Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jane Booth, head of the accounting department at Pacific State University, has felt increasing pressure to raise external funds to compensate for dwindling state financial support. Accordingly, in early January 2001, she conceived the idea of offering a three day accounting workshop on income taxation for local CPAs. She asked Jim Cost, a tenured tax professor, to supervise the planning process for the seminar, which was to be held in late February 2001. In mid January, Professor Cost presented Ms. Booth with the following budget plan:
|
Revenues ($400 per participant)
|
$40,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Speakers ($500 each)
|
$5,000
|
|
|
Rent on facilities
|
3,600
|
|
|
Advertising
|
2,100
|
|
|
Meals and lodging
|
18,000
|
|
|
Departmental overhead allocation
|
3,500
|
32,200
|
|
Profit
|
|
$7,800
|
Explanations of budget items: The facilities rent of $3,600 is a fixed rental, which is to be paid to a local hotel for use of its meeting rooms. The advertising is also a fixed budgeted cost. Meal expense is budgeted at $5 per person per meal (a total of nine meals are to be provided for each participant); lodging is budgeted at the rate of $45 per participant per night. The departmental overhead includes a specific charge for supplies costing $10 for each participant as well as a general allocation of $2,500 for use of departmental secretarial resources. After reviewing the budget, Ms. Booth gave Professor Cost approval to proceed with the seminar.
a. Recast the above income statement in a segment margin income statement format.
b. Assume the actual financial results of the seminar were as follows:
|
Revenues (120 participants)
|
$38,500
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Speakers ($750 each)
|
$7,500
|
|
|
Rent on facilities
|
4,200
|
|
|
Advertising
|
2,900
|
|
|
Meals and lodging
|
21,600
|
|
|
Departmental overhead allocation
|
3,700
|
39,900
|
|
Loss
|
|
($1,400)
|
Explanation of actual results: Because sign ups were running below expectations, the seminar fee was reduced from $400 to $300 for late enrollees an advertising expense was increased. In budgeting for the speakers, Professor Cost neglected to include airfare, which averaged $250 per speaker. After the fees were reduced and advertising increased, the number of participants grew and was larger than expected; therefore, a larger meeting room had to be rented from the local hotel. Recast the actual resultsin a segment margin income format.
c. Compute variances between the budgeted segment margin income statement and the actual segment income statement. Identify and discuss the factors that are primarily responsible for the difference between the budgeted profit and the actual loss on the tax seminar.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hartz Mountain Inc. manufactures small industrial tools and has an annual sales volume of approximately $3.5 million. Sales growth has been steady during the year and there is no evidence of cyclical demand. The company’s market has expanded only in response to product innovation; therefore, R&D is very important to the company. Janice Bennett, controller, has designed and implemented a new budget system. An annual budget has been prepared and divided into 12 equal segments to use for monthly performance evaluations. The vice president of operations was upset upon receiving the following responsibility report for the Machining Department for October 2000:
MACHINING DEPARTMENT—RESPONSIBILITY REPORT FOR THE MONTH ENDED OCTOBER 31, 2000
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
Variance
|
|
Volume in units
|
3,000
|
3,185
|
185F
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs:
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$24,000
|
$24,843
|
$ 843U
|
|
Direct labor
|
27,750
|
29,302
|
1,552U
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
33,300
|
35,035
|
1,735U
|
|
Total
|
$85,050
|
$89,180
|
$4,130U
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs:
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$3,300
|
$3,334
|
$ 34U
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
0
|
|
Tax
|
300
|
300
|
0
|
|
Insurance
|
240
|
240
|
0
|
|
Other
|
930
|
1,027
|
97U
|
|
Total
|
$6,270
|
$6,401
|
$ 131U
|
|
Corporate costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Research and development
|
$2,400
|
$3,728
|
$1,328U
|
|
Selling and administration
|
3,600
|
4,075
|
475U
|
|
Total
|
$6,000
|
$7,803
|
$1,803U
|
|
Total costs
|
$97,320
|
$103,384
|
$6,064U
|
a. Identify the weaknesses in the responsibility report for the Machining Department.
b. Prepare a revised responsibility report for the Machining Department that reduces or eliminates the weaknesses indicated in part (a).
c. Deviations in excess of 5 percent of budget are considered material and
worthy of investigation. Should any of the variances of the Machining Department be investigated? Regardless of materiality, is there any area that the vice president of operations might wish to discuss with the manager of the Machining Department? (CMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Juan Louis manages the sales department at the Boulder Lighting Company. Juan is evaluated based on his ability to meet budgeted revenues. For June 2001, Juan’s revenue budget was as follows:
|
Price per Unit
|
Unit Sales
|
|
Floor lamps
|
$120
|
1,600
|
|
Hanging lamps
|
65
|
2,150
|
|
Ceiling fixtures
|
80
|
4,200
|
The actual sales generated by Mr. Louis’s sales department in June were as follows:
|
|
Total Sales
|
|
Price per Unit
|
in Dollars
|
|
Floor lamps
|
$115
|
$195,500
|
|
Hanging lamps
|
70
|
141,400
|
|
Ceiling fixtures
|
75
|
311,250
|
a. Compute the revenue price variance.
b. Compute the revenue mix variance.
c. Compute the revenue volume variance.
d. Based on your answers to parts (a) through (c), evaluate the performance of Mr. Louis.
e. If Mr. Louis is to be held accountable for meeting the revenue budget, why might it be advisable to also give him the authority to set the sales person salary and commission structure?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Santa Fe Community Hospital (SFCH) has decided to allocate the budgeted costs of its three service departments (Administration, Public Relations, and Maintenance) to its three revenue producing programs (Surgery, In Patient Care, and Out Patient Services). Budgeted information for 2000 follows:
|
Budgeted costs:
|
|
Administration
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Public Relations
|
700,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
500,000
|
|
Allocation bases:
|
|
Administration
|
Dollars of assets employed
|
|
Public Relations
|
Number of employees
|
|
Maintenance
|
Hours of equipment operation
|
|
EXPECTED UTILIZATIONS
|
|
Dollars of Assets
|
Number of
|
Hours of
|
|
Employed
|
Employees
|
Equipment Operation
|
|
Administration
|
$740,090
|
4
|
1,020
|
|
Public Relations
|
450,100
|
7
|
470
|
|
Maintenance
|
825,680
|
5
|
1,530
|
|
Surgery
|
1,974,250
|
10
|
12,425
|
|
In Patient Care
|
1,229,250
|
18
|
8,875
|
|
Out Patient Services
|
521,500
|
22
|
14,200
|
Using the direct method, allocate the expected service department costs to the revenue producing areas.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
McDougle Real Estate classifies its operations into three departments: Commercial Sales, Residential Sales, and Property Management. The owner, William McDougle, wants to know the full cost of operating each department. Direct costs of each department, along with several allocation bases associated with each, are as follows:
|
AVAILABLE ALLOCATION BASES
|
|
|
Direct
|
Number Employees/
|
Dollars of Assets
|
Dollars of
|
|
Costs
|
Salespersons
|
Employed
|
Revenue
|
|
Administration
|
$750,000
|
10
|
$1,240,000
|
n/a
|
|
Accounting
|
495,000
|
5
|
682,000
|
n/a
|
|
Promotion
|
360,000
|
6
|
360,000
|
n/a
|
|
Commercial Sales
|
5,245,000
|
21
|
500,000
|
$4,500,000
|
|
Residential Sales
|
4,589,510
|
101
|
725,000
|
9,500,000
|
|
Property Management
|
199,200
|
13
|
175,000
|
500,000
|
The service departments are shown in a benefits provided ranking. McDougle has also selected the following allocation bases: number of employees/salespersons for Administration; dollars of assets employed for Accounting; and dollars of revenue for Promotion.
a. Using the step method, allocate the service department costs to the revenue generating departments.
b. Which department is apparently the most profitable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer price) Two of the divisions of Construction Equipment Company are the Engine Division and the Mobile Systems Division. The Engine Division produces engines used by both the Mobile Systems Division and a variety of external industrial customers. For external sales, sales orders are generally produced in 50 unit lots. Using this typical lot size, the cost per engine is as follows:
|
Variable production cost
|
$1,050
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
450
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
150
|
|
Fixed selling expense
|
210
|
|
Fixed administrative expense
|
320
|
|
Total unit cost
|
$2,180
|
The Engine Division normally earns a profit margin of 20 percent by setting the external selling price at $2,616. Because a significant number of sales are being made internally, Engine Division managers have decided that $2,616 is the appropriate price to use for all transfers to the Mobile Systems Division. When the managers in the Mobile Systems Division heard of this change in the transfer price, they became very upset because the change would have a major negative impact on Mobile Systems’ net income figures. Because of competition, Mobile Systems has asked the Engine Division to lower its transfer price; by reducing the transfer price, Engine’s profit margin will be 15 percent. Mobile Systems’ managers have asked Construction Equipment top management whether the Division can buy engines externally. Bud Dawkins, Construction Equipment’s president, has gathered the following price information to help the two divisional managers negotiate an equitable transfer price:
|
Current external sales price
|
$2,616
|
|
Total variable production cost plus a 20% profit margin ($1,050 1.2)
|
1,260
|
|
Total production cost plus a 20% profit margin ($1,500 1.2)
|
1,800
|
|
Bid price from external supplier (if motors are purchased in 50 unit lots)
|
2,320
|
a. Discuss advantages and disadvantages of each of the above transfer prices to both the selling and buying divisions and to Construction Equipment.
b. If the Engine Division could sell all of its production externally at $2,616, what is the appropriate transfer price and why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Athlete’s Companion Division makes top of the line sports travel bags that are sold to external buyers and are also being used by the Travel America Division. During the month just ended, Travel America acquired 2,000 bags from Athlete’s Companion Division. Athlete’s Companion’s standard unit costs are
|
Direct material
|
$10
|
|
Direct labor
|
3
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
4
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
6
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
2
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
3
|
Travel America can acquire comparable bags externally for $40 each. Give the entries for each division for the past month if the transfer is to be recorded
a. at Travel America’s external purchase price.
b. at a negotiated price of variable cost plus 15 percent of production cost.
c. by Athlete’s Companion at Travel America’s external price and by Travel America at Athlete’s Companion’s variable production cost.
d. at Athlete’s Companion’s absorption cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Robert Brown, CPA, has three revenue departments: Auditing and Accounting (A&A), Tax (T), and Consulting (C). In addition, the company has two support departments: Administration and EDP. Administration costs are allocated to the three revenue departments on the basis of number of employees. The EDP Department’s fixed costs are allocated to revenue departments on the basis of peak hours of monthly service expected to be used by each revenue department. EDP’s variable costs are assigned to the revenue department sat a transfer price of $40 per hour of actual service. Following are the direct costs and the allocation bases associated with each of the departments:
|
Direct Costs
|
ALLOCATION BASES
|
|
(Before Transfer
|
Number of
|
Peak
|
EDP
|
|
Costs)
|
Employees
|
Hours
|
Hours Used
|
|
Administration
|
$450,000
|
4
|
30
|
290
|
|
EDP—Fixed
|
300,000
|
2
|
n/a
|
n/a
|
|
EDP—Variable
|
90,000
|
2
|
n/a
|
n/a
|
|
A&A
|
200,000
|
10
|
80
|
1,220
|
|
T
|
255,000
|
5
|
240
|
650
|
|
C
|
340,000
|
3
|
25
|
190
|
a. Was the variable EDP transfer price of $40 adequate? Explain.
b. Allocate the other service department costs to A&A, T, and C using the direct method.
c. What are the total costs of the revenue producing departments after the allocation in part (b)?
Robert Brown, CPA, has three revenue departments: Auditing and Accounting (A&A), Tax (T), and Consulting (C). In addition, the company has two support departments: Administration and EDP. Administration costs are allocated to the three revenue departments on the basis of number of employees. The EDP Department’s fixed costs are allocated to revenue departments on the basis of peak hours of monthly service expected to be used by each revenue department. EDP’s variable costs are assigned to the revenue department sat a transfer price of $40 per hour of actual service. Following are the direct costs and the allocation bases associated with each of the departments:
|
Direct Costs
|
ALLOCATION BASES
|
|
(Before Transfer
|
Number of
|
Peak
|
EDP
|
|
Costs)
|
Employees
|
Hours
|
Hours Used
|
|
Administration
|
$450,000
|
4
|
30
|
290
|
|
EDP—Fixed
|
300,000
|
2
|
n/a
|
n/a
|
|
EDP—Variable
|
90,000
|
2
|
n/a
|
n/a
|
|
A&A
|
200,000
|
10
|
80
|
1,220
|
|
T
|
255,000
|
5
|
240
|
650
|
|
C
|
340,000
|
3
|
25
|
190
|
a. Was the variable EDP transfer price of $40 adequate? Explain.
b. Allocate the other service department costs to A&A, T, and C using the direct method.
c. What are the total costs of the revenue producing departments after the allocation in part (b)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carolyn Williams, a management accountant, has recently been employed as controller in the Fashions Division of Deluxe Products, Inc. The company is organized on a divisional basis with considerable vertical integration Fashions Division makes several luggage products, including a slim leather portfolio. Sales of the portfolio have been steady, and the marketing department expects continued strong demand. Carolyn is looking for ways the Fashions Division can contain its costs and thus boost its earnings from future sales. She discovered that the Fashions Division has always purchased its supply of high quality tanned leather from another division of Deluxe Products, the Leather Works Division. Leather Works Division has been providing the three square feet of tanned leather needed for each portfolio for $9 per square foot. Carolyn wondered whether it might be possible to purchase Fashions’ leather needs from a supplier other than Leather Works at a lower price for comparable quality. Top management at Deluxe Products reluctantly agreed to allow the Fashions Division to consider purchasing outside the company. The Fashions Division will need leather for 100,000 portfolios during the coming year. Fashions management has requested bids from several leather suppliers. The two best bids are $8 and $7 per square foot from Koenig and Thompson, respectively. Carolyn has been informed that another subsidiary of Deluxe Products, Ridley Chemical, supplies Thompson with chemicals that have been an essential ingredient of the tanning process for Thompson. Ridley Chemical charges Thompson $2 for enough chemicals to prepare three square feet of leather. Ridley’s profit margin is 30 percent. The Leather Works Division wants to continue supplying Fashions’ leather needs at the same price per square foot as in the past. Tom Reed, Leather Works’ controller, has made it clear that he believes Fashions should continue to purchase all its needs from Leather Works to preserve Leather Works’ healthy profit margin of 40 percent of sales. You, as Deluxe Products’ vice president of finance, have called a meeting of the controllers of Fashions and Leather Works. Carolyn is eager to accept Thompson’s bid of $7. She points out that Fashions’ earnings will show a significant increase if the division can buy from Thompson. Tom Reed, however, wants Deluxe Products to keep the business within the company and suggests that you require Fashions to purchase its needs from Leather Works. He emphasizes that Leather Works’ profit margin should not be lost to the company. From whom should the Fashions Division buy the leather? Consider both Fashions’ desire to minimize its costs and Deluxe Products’ corporate goal of maximizing profit on a companywide basis. (IMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Southeast Products Inc. is a decentralized company. Each division has its own sales force and production facilities and I operated as an investment center. Top management uses return on investment (ROI) for performance evaluation. The Hazlett Division has just been awarded a contract for a product that uses a component manufactured by the Andalusia Division as well as by outside suppliers. Hazlett used a cost figure of $3.80 for the component when the bid was prepared for the new product. Andalusia supplied this cost figure in response to Hazlett’s request for the average variable cost of the component. Andalusia has an active sales force that is continually soliciting new customers. Andalusia’s regular selling price for the component Hazlett needs for the new product is $6.50. Sales of the component are expected to increase. Andalusia management has the following costs associated with the component:
|
Standard variable manufacturing cost
|
$3.20
|
|
Standard variable selling and distribution cost
|
0.6
|
|
Standard fixed manufacturing cost
|
1.2
|
|
Total
|
$5.00
|
The two divisions have been unable to agree on a transfer price for the component. Corporate management has never established a transfer price because interdivisional transactions have never occurred. The following suggestions have been made for the transfer price:
• regular selling price,
• regular selling price less variable selling and distribution expenses,
• standard manufacturing cost plus 15 percent, or
• standard variable manufacturing cost plus 20 percent.
a. Compute each of the suggested transfer prices.
b. Discuss the effect each of the transfer prices might have on the Andalusia Division management’s attitude toward intra company business.
c. Is the negotiation of a price between the Hazlett and Andalusia Divisions a satisfactory method to solve the transfer price problem? Explain your answer.
d. Should the corporate management of Southeast Products Inc. become involved in this transfer controversy? Explain your answer. (CMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shiell Corporation is a diversified manufacturing company with corporate headquarters in Tampa, Florida. The three operating divisions are the Kennedy Division, the Plastic Products Division, and the Outer space Products Division. Much of the manufacturing activity of the Kennedy Division is related to work performed for the government space program under negotiated contracts. Shiell Corporation headquarters provides general administrative support and computer services to each of the three operating divisions. The computer services are provided through a computer time sharing arrangement. The central processing unit (CPU) is located in Tampa, and the divisions have remote terminals that are connected to the CPU by telephone lines. One standard from the Cost Accounting Standards Board provides that the cost of general administration may be allocated to negotiated defense contracts. Further, the standards provide that, in situations in which computer services are provided by corporate headquarters, the actual costs (fixed and variable) of operating the computer department may be allocated to the defense division based on a reasonable measure of computer usage. The general managers of the three divisions are evaluated based on the before tax performance of each division. The November 2000 performance evaluation reports (in millions of dollars) for each division are presented below:
|
|
Plastics
|
Outerspace
|
|
Kennedy
|
Products
|
Products
|
|
Division
|
Division
|
Division
|
|
Sales
|
$23
|
$15
|
$55
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
13
|
7
|
38
|
|
Gross profit
|
$10
|
$8
|
$17
|
|
Selling and administrative:
|
|
|
|
Division selling and administration costs
|
$5
|
$5
|
$8
|
|
Corporate general administration costs
|
1
|
—
|
—
|
|
Corporate computing
|
1
|
—
|
—
|
|
Total
|
$7
|
$5
|
$8
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
$3
|
$3
|
$9
|
|
|
|
|
Without a charge for computing services, the operating divisions may not make the most cost effective use of the Computer Systems Department’s resources. Outline and discuss a method for charging the operating divisions for use of computer services that would promote cost consciousness by the operating divisions and operating efficiency by the Computer Systems Department. (CMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Appleby Industries consists of eight divisions that are evaluated as profit centers. All transfers between divisions are made at market price. Precision Regulator is a division of Appleby that sells approximately 20 percent of its output externally. The remaining 80 percent of the output from Precision Regulator is transferred to other divisions within Appleby. No other division of Appleby Industries transfers internally more than 10 percent of its output. Based on any profit based measure of performance, Precision Regulator is the leading division within Appleby Industries. Other divisional managers within Appleby always find that their performance is compared to that of Precision Regulator. These managers argue that the transfer pricing situation gives Precision Regulator a competitive advantage.
a. What factors may contribute to any advantage that the Precision Regulator Division might have over the other divisions?
b. What alternative transfer price or performance measure might be more appropriate in this situation?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A large American corporation participates in a highly competitive industry. To meet the competition and achieve profit goals, the company has chosen the decentralized form of organization. Each manager of a decentralized center is measured on the basis of profit contribution, market penetration, and return on investment. Failure to meet the objectives established by corporate management for these measures is not accepted and usually results in demotion or dismissal of a center manager. An anonymous survey of managers in the company revealed that the managers felt pressure to compromise their personal ethical standards to achieve the corporate objectives. For example, certain plant locations felt pressure to reduce quality control to a level that could not ensure that all unsafe products would be rejected. Also, sales personnel were encouraged to use questionable sales tactics to obtain orders, including offering gifts and other incentives to purchasing agents. The chief executive officer is disturbed by the survey findings. In her opinion, the company cannot condone such behavior. She concludes that the company should do something about this problem.
a. Discuss what might be the causes for the ethical problems described.
b. Outline a program that could be instituted by the company to help reduce the pressures on managers to compromise personal ethical standards in their work. (CMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7 12 (Journalizing Various Receivable Transactions) Presented below is information related to Sanford Corp.
|
July 1
|
Sanford Corp. sold to Léger Co. merchandise having a sales price of $10,000 with terms 2/10, net/60. Sanford records its sales and receivables net.
|
|
5
|
Accounts receivable of $12,000 (gross) are factored with Rothschild Credit Corp. without recourse at a financing charge of 9%. Cash is received for the proceeds; collections are handled by the finance company.
|
|
9
|
Specific accounts receivable of $9,000 (gross) are pledged to Rather Credit Corp. as security for a loan of $6,000 at a finance charge of 6% of the amount of the loan. The finance company will make the collections. (All the accounts receivable are past the discount period.)
|
|
Dec. 29
|
Léger Co. notifies Sanford that it is bankrupt and will pay only 10% of its account. Give the entry to write off the uncollectible balance using the allowance method. (Note: First record the increase in the receivable on July 11 when the discount period passed.)
|
Instructions
Prepare all necessary entries in general journal form for Sanford Corp.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7 13 (Assigning Accounts Receivable) On April 1, 2012, Prince Company assigns $500,000 of its accounts receivable to the Third National Bank as collateral for a $300,000 loan due July 1, 2012. The assignment agreement calls for Prince Company to continue to collect the receivables. Third National Bank assesses a finance charge of 2% of the accounts receivable, and interest on the loan is 10% (a realistic rate of interest for a note of this type).
Instructions
(a) Prepare the April 1, 2012, journal entry for Prince Company.
(b) Prepare the journal entry for Prince’s collection of $350,000 of the accounts receivable during the period from April 1, 2012, through June 30, 2012.
(c) On July 1, 2012, Prince paid Third National all that was due from the loan it secured on April 1, 2012. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7 14 (Journalizing Various Receivable Transactions) The trial balance before adjustment for Sinatra Company shows the following balances.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$82,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
1,750
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$430,000
|
Instructions
Using the data above, give the journal entries required to record each of the following cases. (Each situation is independent.)
1. To obtain additional cash, Sinatra factors without recourse $20,000 of accounts receivable with Stills Finance. The finance charge is 10% of the amount factored.
2. To obtain a one year loan of $55,000, Sinatra assigns $65,000 of specific receivable accounts to Ruddin Financial. The finance charge is 8% of the loan; the cash is received and the accounts turned over to Ruddin Financial.
3. The company wants to maintain Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at 5% of gross accounts receivable.
4. The company wishes to increase the allowance account by 1½% of net sales.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7 16 (Transfer of Receivables with Recourse) Gringo Corporation factors $250,000 of accounts receivable with Winkler Financing, Inc. on a with recourse basis. Winkler financing will collect the receivables. The receivables records are transferred to Winkler Financing on August 15, 2012. Winkler financing assesses a finance charge of 2% of the amount of accounts receivable and also reserves an amount equal to 4% of accounts receivable to cover probable adjustments.
Instructions
(a) What conditions must be met for a transfer of receivables with recourse to be accounted for as a sale?
(b) Assume the conditions from part (a) are met. Prepare the journal entry on August 15, 2012, for Gringo to record the sale of receivables, assuming the recourse liability has a fair value of $3,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7 17 (Transfer of Receivables without Recourse) SEK Corp. factors $400,000 of accounts receivable with Mays Finance Corporation on a without recourse basis on July 1, 2012. The receivables records are transferred to Mays Finance, which will receive the collections. Mays Finance assesses a finance charge of 1½% of the amount of accounts receivable and retains an amount equal to 4% of accounts receivable to cover sales discounts, returns, and allowances. The transaction is to be recorded as a sale.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entry on July 1, 2012, for SEK Corp. to record the sale of receivables without recourse.
(b) Prepare the journal entry on July 1, 2012, for Mays Finance Corporation to record the purchase of receivables without recourse.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7 18 (Note Transactions at Unrealistic Interest Rates) On July 1, 2012, Rentoul Inc. made two sales.
1. It sold land having a fair value of $900,000 in exchange for a 4 year zero interest bearing promissory note in the face amount of $1,416,163. The land is carried on Rentoul’s books at a cost of $590,000.
2. It rendered services in exchange for a 3%, 8 year promissory note having a face value of $400,000 (interest payable annually). Rentoul Inc. recently had to pay 8% interest for money that it borrowed from British National Bank. The customers in these two transactions have credit ratings that require them to borrow money at 12% interest.
Instructions
Record the two journal entries that should be recorded by Rentoul Inc. for the sales transactions above that took place on July 1, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 1999 Silicon Graphics Inc. (SGI) said it would lay off up to 17% of its workforce and sell or spin off several divisions, including its Cray super computer unit, as the computer maker faces an increasingly difficult market Yesterday’s announcements, made before an analysts’ meeting scheduled for New York, were a setback for Richard E. Belluzzo, brought in 1998 from Hewlett Packard Co. to turn around SGI. While SGI had a sterling reputation for its graphics based workstations, used to create special effects for many movies, it had been badly outmaneuvered in the high end of the market by such competitorsas Sun Microsystems Inc., and was losing sales in the low end to generic PCs.
a. How do the layoffs in this situation suggest that SGI’s strategy has failed?
b. As a market analyst, would you interpret these layoffs to be good news or bad news?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been hired as a consultant by a company that manufactures toys from plastic stocks and resins. The company management is presently wrestling with ways to improve the quality of its products. Evidence of quality problems is everywhere: high rates of product defects, many customer returns, poor rate of customer retention, and high warranty costs. Top management has traced virtually all quality related problems to the production department. Production workers in the company are paid based on a flat hourly rate. No bonuses are paid based on corporate profits or departmental performance measures. As the outside consultant, prepare an oral report to present to the top management of your client discussing how open book management could be applied to address the quality problems. At a minimum, include in your report the following: how quality information would be conveyed to workers, how workers would be trained to understand the information, and how incentives would be established for improved quality performance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are descriptions of environmental waste situations. Identify the environmental strategy you would select to deal with each situation and discuss your logic.
a. A relatively small amount of low toxicity waste is produced. This waste is not easily recycled, nor is technology available to avoid its production. Disposal costs are relatively modest.
b. This waste is highly toxic and is associated with several lethal diseases in humans. The cost of disposal is extraordinarily high.
c. A moderate amount of this waste is produced. The waste is nearly identical to a chemical purchased and used in an etching operation. The waste differs from the purchased chemical only because of a small amount of contaminants introduced in the production process.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Galveston Chemical produces a variety of chemicals that are used in an array of commercial applications. One popular product, a chemical solvent, has among its required materials two very caustic acids, A and B. These acids are a very serious environmental hazard if not disposed of properly. For every ton of chemical produced, 500 pounds of acid A are required as well as 300 pounds of acid B. Because of inefficiencies in the present production process, 40 pounds of acid A and 20 pounds of acid B remain as waste with each ton of chemical manufactured. Because of impurities in the waste acids, they cannot be used in the production of future batches of product. The company incurs a cost of $2 per pound to dispose of the waste acid produced. Recently, the company has become aware of new technology that reduces the quantity of waste acids produced. This technology would generate only 1 pound of acid A and 5 pounds of acid B as waste from each ton of chemical manufactured. Corporate management has estimated the new technology could be acquired and installed at a cost of $500,000. The technology would have a life expectancy of six years. The new technology would not otherwise affect the cost of producing the chemical solvent.
a. Which environmental cost management strategy is Galveston Chemical considering in this example?
b. Why would the application of discounted cash flow methods be appropriate to evaluate the new technology?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
With pioneering feats like the discovery of the hepatitis C virus, Chiron became one of the nation’s largest biotech companies. Then some of its academic style research and gambles on technology didn’t pan out commercially, and growth stalled. In 1998, the proud scientists running Chiron reluctantly turned it over to a no nonsense manager from the pharmaceutical industry. Chiron now is seeking a comeback by taking fewer research risks and squeezing more profit from its assets—acting, that is, more like a traditional pharmaceutical company. Recently, chairman and chief executive, Sean Lance, unveiled the first significant research cuts ever at Chiron. The retrenchment, announced only to employees, is part of a plan to cap its bulging R&D budget at $290 million, and could result in layoffs of as many as 90 scientists, or 20% of its research staff. The cuts, mainly in gene therapy and vaccine programs, are designed to help sustain earnings growth, a priority for Mr. Lance. In the first nine months of 1999, earnings from continuing operations, at $102.5 million, leapt 66% over the year earlier period.
a. Assume you are a market analyst for the biotech industry. Discuss how you would evaluate the news (as good or bad) about Chiron making deep cuts in R&D spending.
b. As a finance professional at Chiron, how could you help Mr. Lance identify opportunities for reducing costs and improving profitability?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 1997 the current employment market for top talent was the tightest in 25 years. The number of searches for senior level executives was at an all time high, nearly 15% ahead of last year’s record clip. Among some of the hottest searches under way: chief executives for Unisys Corp., Delta Air Lines, Quaker Oats Co. and a president and chief operating officer for St. Jude Medical Inc. Why is the labor market so thin for the “performance elite”—the top 4% or so of executives and senior managers? The long term impact of corporate downsizing is a principal reason. The cutbacks in the ranks of middle managers during the past two decades have meant a loss of career development patterns for employees. Because there are fewer rungs on the career ladder, “45 year olds are basically doing the same thing they were at 30,” says Roger I. Sekara, an Alexandria, Va., vice president of A.T. Kearney Executive Search. In light of the scarcity of qualified leaders, what can the accounting functionin an organization do to help identify potential top management talentfrom internal operations?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Peter Wyndale, president of Mallory Industrial, sat dejected in his chair after reviewing the 2001 first quarter financial reports on one of the company’s core products: a standard, five speed transmission (product number 2122) used in the heavy equipment industry in the manufacture of earth moving equipment. Some of the information in the report follows.
MARKET REPORT, PRODUCT NUMBER 2122, QUARTER 1, 2001
|
Sales Data
|
|
Total sales (dollars), Quarter 1, 2001
|
$4,657,500
|
|
Total sales (units), Quarter 1, 2001
|
3,450
|
|
Total sales (dollars), Quarter 1, 2000
|
$6,405,000
|
|
Total sales (units), Quarter 1, 2000
|
4,200
|
|
Market Data
|
|
Industry unit sales, Quarter 1, 2001
|
40,000
|
|
Industry unit sales, Quarter 1, 2000
|
32,000
|
|
Industry average sales price, Quarter 1, 2001
|
$1,310
|
|
Industry average sales price, Quarter 1, 2000
|
$1,640
|
MARKET REPORT, PRODUCT NUMBER 2122, QUARTER 1, 2001
|
Profit Data
|
|
Mallory average gross profit per unit, Quarter 1, 2001
|
$45
|
|
Mallory average gross profit per unit, Quarter 1, 2000
|
$160
|
|
Industry average gross profit per unit, Quarter 1, 2001
|
$75
|
|
Industry average gross profit per unit, Quarter 1, 2000
|
$140
|
Mallory’s strategy for this transmission is to compete on the basis of price. Mallory’s transmission offers no features that allow it to be differentiated from those of major competitors and Mallory’s level of quality is similar to the average of the industry. Also on Mr. Wyndale’s desk was a report from his business intelligence unit. Mr. Wyndale underlined some key pieces of information from the report. The underlined items follow.
• Commodity transmission components (nuts, bolts, etc.), which all major transmission producers acquire from specialty vendors, decreased in price by approximately 5% from January 2000 to January 2001.
• Two major competitors moved their main assembly operations to China from the United States in early 2000. These competitors are believed tohave the lowest unit production cost in the industry.
• A third major competitor ceased manufacture of major gear components and began outsourcing these parts from a Mexican firm in mid 2000. Thi firm increased its market share in 2000 from 10 to 14 percent following amajor decrease in sales price.
• Mallory’s production operations did not change in any material respect from 2000 to 2001.
• Mallory manufactures approximately 83 percent of the components used in the heavy industrial transmission. The industry norm is to make 57 percent of the components.
• For the balance of 2001, industry experts agree that quarterly demand for the heavy industrial transmission will be even higher than the levels posted for the first quarter of 2001.
a. Examine the information Mr. Wyndale has gathered. Analyze the data that are given to identify as specifically as possible the problems that have led to Mallory’s loss of profit and market share in the heavy industrial transmission market.
b. Based on your analysis in part (a), and the information given to Mr. Wyndale, suggest specific alternatives that Mr. Wyndale should consider to make his firm more competitive in the heavy industrial transmission market. Use concepts presented in the chapter as the basis of your recommendations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABX Plastics has experienced serious problems as a result of attempts to manage its impacts on the environment. To illustrate the problems, consider the following events, which occurred during the past five years:
• ABX was assessed $75 million in fines and penalties for toxic emissions. These amounts related to several separate regulatory investigations.
• ABX received reprimands from several regulatory bodies for failing to maintain required records regarding hazardous waste.
• ABX is currently facing a class action lawsuit filed by former employees of a subsidiary in Mexico alleging management failed to disclose information to employees about the toxicity of certain materials—and as a consequence the health of the former employees has been permanently harmed.
• ABX must submit bids to obtain most of its business. Managers have casually observed that the company is successful more frequently when it bids on jobs that require handling the most toxic chemicals.
• ABX has a very basic accounting system that tracks costs on a job order basis, but is not sensitive to quality or environmental costs. Assume that you are an employee of a consulting firm that has been hired by ABX to improve management of all environmental effects. As the finance expert on the consulting team, you are expected to make recommendations as to how the information systems should be modified to reduce environmental costs. Prepare a report discussing your recommendations for ABX.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Slightly more than half of working Americans question their bosses’ integrity; when they do, they’re more likely to leave their jobs over it, according to a study by the Hudson Institute and Walker Information. The firms surveyed more than 2,000 full and part time workers from the public and private sectors in 48 states. Fewer than half of them, 42%, believe their company deserves their loyalty. And slightly more than half of the surveyed employees would recommend their place of employment to another. Employees also fear retaliation for reporting inappropriate behavior like drug use, sexual harassment, record falsification, and unfair treatment of employees, representatives of the research firms said. They also worry complaints won’t be kept confidential.
a. In your opinion, does the achievement of high quality operations mandate that a firm treat its employees ethically? Discuss.
b. Assume a firm has adopted open book management. Discuss how the survey respondents’ perceptions of their employers mesh with the open book management requirement to have honest exchanges of information between employees and managers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Automakers provide an interesting study in cost management strategies. General Motors often provides a contrast to the other U.S. manufacturers. For example, while Chrysler and Ford have opted to outsource many product components, GM continues to manufacture a much higher percentage of the parts needed to produce its cars. One of the variables driving GM’s strategy is its high level of unionization. The unions have resisted attempts made by General Motors to restructure operations and outsource more components.
a. From the perspective of price based competition, why would GM want the flexibility to outsource more of its parts and components?
b. From the perspective of managing quality, how could outsourcing positively or negatively affect GM’s ability to manage quality relative to its competitors?
c. What ethical responsibility does GM bear to the union in seeking to restructure and outsource more of its parts manufacturing?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Terminology) Match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate numbered description on the right.
|
a. Centralized organization
|
1. Situation in which buying division charged a price that differs from that credited to the selling division
|
|
b. Cost center
|
2. Structure in which most decisions are made by segment managers
|
|
c. Decentralized organization
|
3. Situations in which decisions are made that are sometimes not in the best interest of whole firm
|
|
d. Dual pricing arrangement
|
4. Segment whose manager is responsible primarily for costs
|
|
e. Goal congruence
|
5. Segment whose manager is responsible primarily for revenues, expenses, and assets
|
|
f. Investment center
|
6. Segment whose manager is responsible for both revenues and expenses
|
|
g. Profit center
|
7. Segment whose manager is primarily responsible for revenues
|
|
h. Revenue center
|
8. Structure in which most decisions are made by top management
|
|
i. Suboptimization
|
9. An internal exchange price
|
|
j. Transfer price
|
10. Situation in which mutual support exists among goals of individual managers and the organization
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sales Department of Porcelain Works is responsible for sales of two figurines. One is called “Elegant Maiden” and the other is called “Summer Memories.” For April 2001, the Sales Department’s actual and budgeted sales were as follows:
|
ELEGANT MAIDEN
|
SUMMER MEMORIES
|
|
Dollars
|
Units
|
Dollars
|
Units
|
|
Budgeted sales
|
$10,000
|
1,000
|
$15,000
|
3,000
|
|
Actual sales
|
9,000
|
750
|
15,750
|
3,500
|
For April 2001, compute each of the following for the Sales Department of Porcelain Works:
a. Price variance
b. Mix variance
c. Volume variance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Athletes’ Friend, Inc., manufactures two products: baseball bats and gloves. For 2001, the firm budgeted the following:
|
Bats
|
Gloves
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
$600,000
|
|
Unit sales price
|
40
|
30
|
At the end of 2001, managers were informed that total actual sales amounted to 35,000 units and totaled $1,225,000. Glove sales for the year amounted to 20,000 units at an average price of $35.
a. Compute the total revenue variance for 2001.
b. Compute the price variance for 2001.
c. Compute the mix variance for 2001.
d. Compute the volume variance for 2001.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chance Corporation allocates its service department costs to its production departments using the direct method. Information for June 2001 follows:
|
Personnel
|
Maintenance
|
|
Service department costs
|
$68,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Services provided to other departments
|
|
Personnel
|
10%
|
|
Maintenance
|
15%
|
|
|
Fabricating
|
45%
|
60%
|
|
Finishing
|
40%
|
30%
|
a. What amount of personnel and maintenance costs should be assigned to Fabricating for June?
b. What amount of personnel and maintenance costs should be assigned to Finishing for June?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Palisade Bank has three revenue generating areas: checking accounts, savings accounts, and loans. The bank also has three service areas: administration, personnel, and accounting. The direct costs per month and the interdepartmental service structure are shown below in a benefits provided ranking.
|
Direct
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Department
|
Costs
|
Admin.
|
Personnel
|
Accounting
|
Checking
|
Savings
|
Loan
|
|
Administration
|
$90,000
|
|
10
|
10
|
30
|
40
|
10
|
|
Personnel
|
60,000
|
10
|
|
10
|
30
|
20
|
30
|
|
Accounting
|
90,000
|
10
|
|
|
40
|
20
|
20
|
|
Checking
|
90,000
|
|
10
|
|
|
|
|
|
Savings
|
75,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans
|
150,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute the total cost for each revenue generating area using the direct method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cognevich Company is organized in three service departments (Personnel, Administration, and Maintenance) and two revenue generating departments (Stamping and Assembly). The company uses the step method to allocate service department costs to operating departments. In October 2000, Personnel incurred $60,000 of costs, Administration incurred $90,000, and Maintenance incurred $40,000. Proportions of services provided to other departments for October 2000 follow:
|
Personnel
|
Administration
|
Maintenance
|
|
Personnel
|
10%
|
5%
|
|
Administration
|
15%
|
|
10%
|
|
Maintenance
|
10%
|
15%
|
|
|
Stamping
|
45%
|
50%
|
50%
|
|
Assembly
|
30%
|
25%
|
35%
|
a. Assuming that the departments are listed in a benefits provided ranking, what amount of Personnel cost should be assigned to each of the other departments for October? Administration costs? Maintenance costs?
b. What is the total service department cost that was assigned to Stamping in October? To Assembly?
c. Explain why the cost allocation is affected by the order in which costs are assigned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Colleague Press has two revenue producing divisions (College Textbooks and Professional Publications) and two service departments(Administration and Personnel). Direct costs and allocation bases for each of these areas are presented below:
|
Direct
|
Number of
|
Dollars of Assets
|
|
Department
|
Costs
|
Employees
|
Employed
|
|
Administration
|
$225,000
|
10
|
$310,000
|
|
Personnel
|
175,000
|
5
|
75,000
|
|
College Textbooks
|
1,125,000
|
50
|
600,000
|
|
Professional Publications
|
475,000
|
30
|
525,000
|
Company management has decided to allocate administration and personnel costs on the basis of dollars of assets employed and number of employees, respectively. Use the algebraic method to allocate the service department costs and determine the final costs of operating the College Textbooks and Professional Publications Departments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Motchip Division, a decentralized plant of Pazazz Motor Company, is considering what transfer price to charge the Engine Division for transfers of computer chips to that division. The following data on production cost per computer chip have been gathered:
|
Direct material
|
$1.50
|
|
Direct labor
|
4
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1.7
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
2.4
|
|
Total
|
$9.60
|
The Motchip Division sells the computer chips to external buyers for $21.75. Managers of the Engine Division have received external offers to provide the division comparable chips, ranging from $15 at one company to $23 at another.
a. Determine the upper and lower limits for the transfer price between the Motchip Division and the Engine Division.
b. If the Motchip Division is presently selling all the chips it can produce to external buyers, what is the minimum price it should set for transfers to the Engine Division?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Direct material
|
$2.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.4
|
|
Variable overhead
|
0.8
|
|
Fixed overhead (based on production of 700,000 pairs)
|
2.75
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
0.5
|
Another division of Keeler, the Trailer Division, wants to purchase 25,000 pairs of brake pads from Trusty pad Division during next year. No selling costs are incurred on internal sales.
a. If Trusty pad’s manager can sell all the brake pads it produces externally, what should the minimum transfer price be? Explain.
b. Assume that Trust ypad Division is experiencing a slight slowdown in external demand and will be able to sell only 600,000 pairs of brake pads to outsiders next year at the $12 selling price. What should be the minimum selling price to the Trailer Division under these conditions? Explain.
c. Assume that Mr. Leon, the manager of Trailer Division, offers to pay Trusty pad Division’s production costs plus 25 percent for each pair of brake pads. He receives an invoice for $217,187.50, and he was planning on a cost of $131,250. How were these amounts determined? What created the confusion? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two investment centers of Jones Products Company are the Electronics Division and the Appliance Division. The Electronics Division manufactures an electronic computer chip that can be sold externally and is also used by the Appliance Division in making motors for its appliances. The following information is available about the computer chip: Total production annually: 200,000 units; internal requirements: 150,000 units; all others are sold externally List selling price: $25.60 Variable production costs: $12 Fixed overhead: $300,000; allocated on the basis of units of production Variable selling costs: $3; includes $1 per unit in advertising cost Fixed selling costs: $400,000 Determine the transfer price under each of the following methods:
a. Total variable cost
b. Full production cost
c. Total variable production cost plus necessary selling costs
d. Market price
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts were taken from the financial statements of Callahan Company.
Salaries and wages payable
Investment in real estate
Service revenue
Equipment
Interest payable
Accumulated depreciation— equipment
Goodwill Short term investments
Depreciation expense
Mortgage payable (due in 3 years)
Owner’s capital
Unearned service revenue
Match each of the following accounts to its proper balance sheet classification, shown below. If the item would not appear on a balance sheet, use “NA.”
Current assets (CA)
Current liabilities (CL)
Long term investments (LTI)
Long term liabilities (LTL)
Property, plant, and equipment (PPE)
Owner’s equity (OE)
Intangible assets (IA)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of its first month of operations, Watson Answering Service has the following unadjusted trial balance.
|
WATSON ANSWERING SERVICE
|
|
|
August 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 5,400
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
2,800
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,300
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,400
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
$40,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,400
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
30,000
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
1,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
4,900
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
800
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
400
|
|
|
|
$77,300
|
$77,300
|
Other data:
1. Insurance expires at the rate of $200 per month.
2. $1,000 of supplies are on hand at August 31.
3. Monthly depreciation on the equipment is $900.
4. Interest of $500 on the notes payable has accrued during August.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a worksheet.
(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet assuming $35,000 of the notes payable are long term. (c) Journalize the closing entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chester Taylor recently received the following information related to Taylor Company’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet.
|
Inventory
|
$ 2,900
|
|
Cash
|
4,300
|
|
Equipment
|
21,700
|
|
Investments in stock (long term)
|
6,500
|
|
Short term investments
|
$1,200
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
5,700
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
4,300
|
Prepare the assets section of Taylor Company’s classified balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts were taken from the financial statements of Tillman Company.
Interest revenue
Owner’s capital
Utilities payable
Accumulated depreciation
Accounts payable
Equipment
Supplies
Salaries and wages expense
Bonds payable
Investment in real estate
Trademarks
Unearned rent revenue
Match each of the accounts to its proper balance sheet classification, as shown below. If the item would not appear on a balance sheet, use “NA.”
Current assets (CA)
Current liabilities (CL)
Long term investments (LTI)
Long term liabilities (LTL)
Property, plant, and equipment (PPE)
Owner’s equity (OE)
Intangible assets (IA)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Terminology) Match the lettered terms on the left with the numbered descriptions on the right. A letter may be used more than once.
|
a. Autonomation
|
1. Expected selling price less desired profit
|
|
b. Electronic data interchange
|
2. A system in which inventory is produced before it is needed and placed in storage until needed
|
|
c. Flexible manufacturing system
|
3. Streamlined accounting system
|
|
d. Just in time
|
4. The situation of not having a product or component available when it is needed
|
|
e. Multiprocess handling
|
5. A manufacturing environment in which machinery is programmed to stop work when specified situations arise
|
|
f. Order point
|
6. The use of machines and robots to perform the production process
|
|
g. Pull system
|
7. The broadening of worker involvement to include monitoring all machines in a manufacturing cel
|
|
h. Push system
|
8. Computer to computer transfer of information in virtual real time using standardized formats developed by the American National Standards Institute.
|
|
i. Safety stock
|
9. A buffer supply of inventory that minimizes the possibility of running out of a product or component
|
|
j. Stockout
|
10. A system in which purchases and production are made only on an as needed basis
|
|
k. Target cost
|
11. A philosophy that focuses on valueadded activities
|
|
l. Backflush
|
12. The inventory level at which a purchase order is to be issued
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The marketing department at Walters Production Company has an idea for a new product that is expected to have a life cycle of five years. After conducting market research, the company has determined that the product could sell for $250 per unit in the first three years of life and $175 per unit for the last two years. Unit sales are expected as follows:
|
Year 1
|
3,000 units
|
|
Year 2
|
4,600 units
|
|
Year 3
|
4,700 units
|
|
Year 4
|
5,000 units
|
|
Year 5
|
1,500 units
|
Per unit variable selling costs are estimated at $30 throughout the product’s life; annual fixed selling and administrative costs are expected to be $1,750,000. Walters Production Company desires a profit margin of 20 percent of selling price per unit.
a. Compute the life cycle target cost to manufacture the product. (Round to the nearest penny.)
b. If the company expects the product to cost $65 to manufacture in the first year, what is the maximum that manufacturing cost can be in the following four years? (Round to the nearest penny.)
c. Assume Walters Production Company engineers indicate that the expected manufacturing cost per unit is $70. What actions might the company take to reduce this cost?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
James Company uses a JIT system. The following standards are related to Materials A and B, which are used to make one unit of the company’s final product:
|
Annual Material Standards
|
|
|
6 pounds of material A @ $2.25
|
$13.50
|
|
|
8 pounds of material B @ $3.40
|
27.2
|
|
|
Current Material Standards
|
|
7 pounds of material A @ $2.25
|
$15.75
|
|
7 pounds of material B @ $3.40
|
23.8
|
|
$39.55
|
|
|
|
|
The current material standards differ from the original because of an engineering change made near the end of June. During July, the company produced 3,000 units of its final product and used 22,000 pounds of Material A and 20,500 pounds of Material B. All material is acquired at the standard cost per pound.
a. Calculate the material variance and the ENC material variance.
b. Explain the effect of the engineering change on product cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Erica Tommasen uses a JIT system in her manufacturing firm, which makes “Mew” for cats. Erica provides you with the following standards for a can of Mew:
|
Annual Material Standards
|
|
|
5 ounces of component X @ $0.10
|
$0.50
|
|
|
1 ounce of component Y @ $0.25
|
0.25
|
|
|
$0.75
|
|
|
Current Material Standards
|
|
4 ounces of component X @ $0.10
|
$0.40
|
|
2 ounces of component Y @ $0.25
|
0.5
|
|
$0.90
|
|
|
|
|
The standards were changed because of a nutritional (engineering) adjustment. Production during March was 60,000 cans of Mew. Usage of raw material (all purchased at standard costs) was 250,000 ounces of Component X and 108,000 ounces of Component Y.
a. Calculate the material quantity variance for each component.
b. Calculate the engineering change variance for each component.
c. Why would a company implement an engineering change that increases the standard production cost by 20 percent?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Office Superstore produces commercial calendars in a two department operation: Department 1 is labor intensive and Department2 is automated. The average output of Department 1 is 45 units per hour. The units are then transferred to Department 2 where they are finished by a robot. The robot can finish a maximum of 45 units per hour. Office Superstore needs to complete 180 units this afternoon for an order that has been backlogged for four months. The production manager has informed the people in Department 1 that they are to work on nothing else except this order from 1 p.m. until 5 p.m. The supervisor in Department 2 has scheduled the same times for the robot to work on the order. Department 1’s activity for each hour of the afternoon follows:
|
Time
|
1:00–2:00
|
2:00–3:00
|
3:00–4:00
|
4:00–4:58
|
|
Production
|
44 units
|
40 units
|
49 units
|
47 units
|
Assume that each unit moves directly from Department 1 to Department 2 with no lag time. Did Office Superstore complete the 180 units by 5:00 p.m.? If not, explain and provide detailed computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A drugstore carries three types of face cream: Wonder Cream, Skin so Bright, and Fresh & Sweet. Determine the economic order quantity for each, given the following information:
|
Product
|
Order Cost
|
Carrying Cost
|
Demand
|
|
Wonder Cream
|
$4.30
|
$1.90
|
1,200 units
|
|
Skin so Bright
|
6.25
|
1.45
|
1,000 units
|
|
Fresh & Sweet
|
3.7
|
1.25
|
900 units
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Products Development Division of Lite & Fine Cuisinehas just completed its work on a new microwave entrée. The marketing group has decided on an original price for the entrée, but the selling price will be reduced as competitors appear. Market studies indicate that the following quantities of the product can be sold at the following prices over its life cycle:
|
Year
|
Quantity
|
Selling Price
|
Year
|
Quantity
|
Selling Price
|
|
1
|
100,000
|
$2.50
|
5
|
600,000
|
$2.00
|
|
2
|
250,000
|
2.4
|
6
|
450,000
|
2
|
|
3
|
350,000
|
2.3
|
7
|
200,000
|
1.9
|
|
4
|
500,000
|
2.1
|
8
|
130,000
|
1.9
|
Development costs plus other startup costs for this product will total $600,000. Engineering estimates of direct material and direct labor costs are $0.85 and $0.20, respectively, per unit. These costs can be held constant for approximately four years and in year 5 will each increase by 10 percent. Variable overhead per unit is expected to be $0.25, and fixed overhead is expected to be $100,000 per year. Lite & Fine Cuisine management likes to earn a 20 percent gross margin on products of this type.
a. Prepare an income statement for each year of the product’s life, assuming all product costs are inventoried and using eight year amortization of the development and startup costs. What is the cost per unit each year? What rate of gross margin will the product generate each year?
b. Determine the total gross margin to be generated by this product over its life. What rate of gross margin is this?
c. Discuss the differences in the information provided by the analyses in parts (a) and (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given the features below concerning just in time systems, indicate by letter which of the three categories apply to the following items. If more than one category applies, indicate with an additional letter.
D _ desired intermediate result of using JIT
U _ ultimate goal of JIT
T _ technique associated with JIT
a. Reducing setup time
b. Reducing total cost of producing and carrying inventory
c. Using focused factory arrangements
d. Designing products to minimize design changes after production starts
e. Monitoring quality on a continuous basis
f. Using manufacturing cells
g. Minimizing inventory stored
h. Measuring variances caused by engineering changes
i. Using autonomation processes
j. Pulling purchases and production through the system based on sales demand
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brandt Production Company has implemented a just in time inventory system for the production of its insulated wire. Inventories of raw material and work in process are so small that Brandt uses a Raw and In Process account. In addition, almost all labor operations are automated and Brandt has chosen to cost products using standards for direct material and conversion. The following production standards are applicable at the beginning of 2000 for one roll of insulated wire:
|
Direct material (100 yards @ $2.00)
|
$200
|
|
Conversion (4 machine hours @ $35)
|
140
|
|
Total cost
|
$340
|
The conversion cost of $35 per machine hour was estimated on the basis of 500,000 machine hours for the year and $17,500,000 of conversion costs. The following activities took place during 2000:
1. Raw material purchased and placed into production totaled 12,452,000 yards. All except 8,000 yards were purchased at the standard price of $2 per yard. The other 8,000 yards were purchased at a cost of $2.06 per yard due to the placement of a rush order. The order was approved in advance by management. All purchases are on account.
2. From January 1 to February 28, Brandt manufactured 20,800 rolls of insulated wire. Conversion costs incurred to date totaled $3,000,000. Of this amount, $600,000 was for depreciation, $2,200,000 was paid in cash, and $200,000 was on account.
3. Conversion costs are applied to the Raw and In Process account from January 1 to February 28 on the basis of the annual standard.
4. The Engineering Department issued a change in the operations flow document effective March 1, 2000. The change decreased the machine time to manufacture one roll of wire by 5 minutes per roll. However, the standard raises the quantity of direct material to 100.4 yards per roll. The Accounting Department requires that the annual standard be continued for costing the Raw and In Process Inventory for the remainder of 2000. The effects of the engineering changes should be shown in two accounts: Material Quantity Engineering Change Variance and Machine Hours Engineering Change Variance.
5. Total production for the remainder of 2000 was 103,200 rolls of wire. Total conversion costs for the remaining 10 months of 2000 were $14,442,000. Of this amount, $4,000,000 was depreciation, $9,325,000 was paid in cash, and $1,117,000 was on account.
6. The standard amount of conversion cost is applied to the Raw and In Process Inventory for the remainder of the year. Note: Some of the journal entries for the following items are not explicitly covered in the chapter. This problem challenges students regarding the accounting effects of the implementation of a JIT system.
a. Prepare entries for items 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 above.
b. Determine the increase in material cost due to the engineering change related to direct material.
c. Prepare a journal entry to adjust the Raw and In Process Inventory accountfor the engineering change cost found in part (b).
d. Determine the reduction in conversion cost due to the engineering change related to machine time.
e. Prepare a journal entry to reclassify the actual conversion costs by the savings found in part (d).
f. Making the entry in part (e) raises conversion costs to what they would have been if the engineering change related to machine time had not been made. Are conversion costs under or overapplied and by what amount?
g. Assume the reduction in machine time could not have been made without the corresponding increase in material usage. Is the net effect of these engineering changes cost beneficial? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andrew Jackson operates a health food bakery that uses a special type of ground flour in its products. The bakery operates 365 days a year. Andrew finds that he seems to order either too much or too little flour and asks for your help. After some discussion, you find he does not have any idea of when or how much to order. An examination of his records and Andrew’s answers to further questions reveal the following information:
|
Annual usage of flour
|
14,000 pounds
|
|
Average number of days delay between initiating and receiving an order
|
12
|
|
Estimated cost per order
|
$8.00
|
|
Estimated annual cost of carrying a pound of flour in inventory
|
$0.25
|
a. Calculate the economic order quantity for flour.
b. Assume that Andrew desires a safety stock cushion of seven days’ usage.
Calculate the appropriate order point.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Town and Country Nursery grows and sells a variety of household and outdoor plants. The firm also grows and sells garden vegetables. One of the more popular vegetables grown by the firm is a red onion. The company sells approximately 30,000 pounds of red onions per year. Two of the major inputs in the growing of onions are seeds and fertilizer. Due to the poor germination rate, two seeds must be purchased for each onion plant grown (a mature onion plant provides 0.5 pound of onion). Also, 0.25 pound of fertilizer is required for each pound of onion produced. The following information summarizes costs pertaining to onions, seeds, and fertilizer. Carrying costs for onions are expressed per pound of onion; carrying costs for seeds are expressed per seed; and for fertilizer, carrying costs are expressed per pound of fertilizer. To plant onions, the company incurs a cost of $50 to set up the planter and the fertilizing equipment.
|
Onions
|
Seeds
|
Fertilizer
|
|
Carrying cost
|
$0.25
|
$0.01
|
$0.05
|
|
Ordering cost
|
—
|
$4.25
|
$8.80
|
|
Setup cost
|
$50.00
|
—
|
—
|
a. What is the economic production run for onions?
b. How many production runs will Town and Country make for onions annually?
c. What are the economic order quantities for seeds and fertilizer?
d. How many orders will be placed for seeds? For fertilizer?
e. What is the total annual cost of ordering, carrying, and setting up for onion production?
f. How is the planting of onions similar to and different from a typical factory production run?
g. Are there any inconsistencies in your answers to parts (a) through (c) that need to be addressed? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chemcon Corporation sells various industrial supplies used for general purpose cleaning. Approximately 85percent of its sales are to not for profit and governmental institutions. These sales are on a contract basis with an average contract length of two years. Al Stanly, Chemcon’s treasurer, wants to initiate a system that will maximize the amount of time Chemcon holds its cash in the form of marketable securities. Chemcon currently has $9 million of securities that have an expected annual earnings rate of 8 percent. Chemcon is expecting a cash drain over the next 12 month period. Monthly cash outflows are expected to be $2,650,000, but inflows are only expected to be $2,500,000. The cost of either buying or selling securities is $125 per transaction. Stanly has heard that the EOQ inventory model can be applied to cash management. Therefore, he has decided to employ this model to determine the optimal value of marketable securities to be sold to replenish Chemcon’s cash balance.
a. Use the EOQ model in the chapter to
(1) explain the costs Al Stanly is attempting to balance in this situation, and
(2) calculate the optimal dollar amount of marketable securities Stanly should sell when Chemcon needs to replenish its cash balance.
b. Without prejudice to your solution in part a(2), assume that the optimal dollar amount of marketable securities to be sold is $60,000.
(1) Calculate the average cash balance in Chemcon’s checking account that will be on hand during the course of the year.
(2) Determine the number of times during the year that Stanly will have to sell securities.
c. Describe two different economic circumstances applicable to Chemcon that would render its use of the EOQ inventory model inappropriate as a cash management model.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Smith Company manufactures various electronic assemblies that it sells primarily to computer manufacturers. Smith’s reputation has been built on quality, timely delivery, and products that are consistently on the cutting edge of technology. Smith’s business is fast paced. The typical product has a short life; the product is in development for about a year and in the growth stage, with sometimes spectacular growth, for about a year. Each product then experiences a rapid decline in sales as new products become available. Smith’s competitive strategy requires a reliable stream of new products to be developed each year. This is the only way that the company can overcome the threat of product obsolescence. Although the products go through the first half of the product life cycle like products in other industries, they do not go through the second half of the product life cycle in a similar manner. Smith’s products never reach the mature product or declining product stage. Toward the end of the growth stage, products just die as new ones are introduced.
a. In the competitive market facing Smith Company, what would be key considerations in production and inventory control?
b. How would the threat of immediate product obsolescence affect Smith’s practices in purchasing product components and materials?
c. How would the threat of product obsolescence affect the EPR for a typical product produced by Smith Company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A plant manager and her controller were discussing the plant’s inventory control policies one day. The controller suggested to the plant manager that the ordering policies needed to be reviewed because of new technology that had been put in place in the plant’s purchasing department. Among the changes that had been implemented in the plant were installation of (1) computerized inventory tracking, (2) electronic data interchange capabilities with the plant’s major suppliers, and (3) in house facilities for electronic fund transfers.
a. As technology changes, why should managers update ordering policies for inventory?
b. Write a memo to the plant manager describing the likely impact of the changes made in this plant on the EOQ of material input.
b. Without prejudice to your solution in part a(2), assume that the optimal dollar amount of marketable securities to be sold is $60,000.
(1) Calculate the average cash balance in Chemcon’s checking account that will be on hand during the course of the year.
(2) Determine the number of times during the year that Stanly will have to sell securities.
c. Describe two different economic circumstances applicable to Chemcon that would render its use of the EOQ inventory model inappropriate as a cash management model.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
According to Barry Bay us, a marketing professor, the perception that product life cycles are getting shorter is a mistaken one. Bay us identified three reasons for the appearance of shortened product life cycles:
1. New knowledge is being applied faster. The time between an invention and its first application is decreasing, from 90 years during the 1700s to 20 years from 1901 to 1950.
2. More new products are being introduced. In 1986, for example, the number of new product introductions was just under 13,000. By 1991, the number had increased to more than 15,000.
3. The time between innovations is decreasing.
a. As a team, investigate the reality or myth of shortened product life cycles. Use all resources (library, Internet, personal) at your disposal.
b. Prepare a report on your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The acquisition of new technology is often a perilous event for firms. The successful acquisition and implementation of new systems require much more than merely purchasing hardware and software. For example, expenditures for a typical installation of a new financial system are split as follows:
|
Presales consultancy and advice
|
11.74%
|
|
Software
|
37.64%
|
|
Implementation
|
28.27%
|
|
Training
|
14.12%
|
|
Other services
|
14.24%
|
a. Why is it necessary that training be included as a cost of the technology acquisition?
b. How can the finance function of a business improve the internal process of technology acquistion?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are taken from the comparative balance sheets of Mayberry Billiards Club, which prepares its financial statements using the accrual basis of accounting.
|
December 31
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Accounts receivable from members
|
$14,000
|
$ 9,000
|
|
Unearned service revenue
|
17,000
|
25,000
|
Members are billed based upon their use of the club’s facilities. Unearned service revenues arise from the sale of gift certificates, which members can apply to their future use of club facilities. The 2012 income statement for the club showed that service revenue of $161,000 was earned during the year.
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries for each of the following events that took place during 2012.
(1) Accounts receivable from 2011 were all collected.
(2) Gift certificates outstanding at the end of 2011 were all redeemed.
(3) An additional $38,000 worth of gift certificates were sold during 2012. A portion of these was used by the recipients during the year; the remainder was still outstanding at the end of 2012.
(4) Services provided to members for 2012 were billed to members.
(5) Accounts receivable for 2012 (i.e., those billed in item [4] above) were partially collected.
(b) Determine the amount of cash received by the club, with respect to member services, during 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brad Maynard Company has the following balances in selected accounts on December 31, 2012.
|
Service Revenue
|
$40,000
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
2,700
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,450
|
All the accounts have normal balances. Brad Maynard Company debits prepayments to expense accounts when paid, and credits unearned revenues to revenue accounts when received. The following information below has been gathered at December 31, 2012.
1. Brad Maynard Company paid $2,700 for 12 months of insurance coverage on June 1, 2012.
2. On December 1, 2012, Brad Maynard Company collected $40,000 for consulting services to be performed from December 1, 2012, through March 31, 2013.
3. A count of supplies on December 31, 2012, indicates that supplies of $900 are on hand.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries needed at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At Richmond Company, prepayments are debited to expense when paid, and unearned revenues are credited to revenue when received. During January of the current year, the following transactions occurred.
|
Jan.
|
2
|
Paid $1,920 for fi re insurance protection for the year.
|
|
|
10
|
Paid $1,700 for supplies.
|
|
|
15
|
Received $6,100 for services to be performed in the future.
|
On January 31, it is determined that $2,500 of the services are earned and that there are $650 of supplies on hand.
Instructions
(a) Journalize and post the January transactions. (Use T accounts.)
(b) Journalize and post the adjusting entries at January 31.
(c) Determine the ending balance in each of the accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tony Masasi started his own consulting firm, McGee Company, on June 1, 2012. The trial balance at June 30 is shown below.
|
|
McGEE COMPANY
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
June 30, 2012
|
|
|
Account Number
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 7,150
|
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,000
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
2,000
|
|
|
130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,000
|
|
|
157
|
Equipment
|
15,000
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$ 4,500
|
|
209
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
4,000
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
21,750
|
|
400
|
Service Revenue
|
|
7,900
|
|
726
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
729
|
Rent Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
|
$38,150
|
$38,150
|
In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for McGee Company also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 212 Salaries and Wages Payable, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 732 Utilities Expense.
Other data:
1. Supplies on hand at June 30 are $750.
2. A utility bill for $150 has not been recorded and will not be paid until next month.
3. The insurance policy is for a year.
4. $2,800 of unearned service revenue has been earned at the end of the month.
5. Salaries of $1,900 are accrued at June 30.
6. The equipment has a 5 year life with no salvage value. It is being depreciated at $250 per month for 60 months.
7. Invoices representing $1,200 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of June 30.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of June. Use J3 as the page number for your journal.
(b) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning account balances and place a check mark in the posting reference column.
(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at June 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melton River Resort opened for business on June 1 with eight air conditioned units. Its trial balance before adjustment on August 31 is as follows.
|
|
MELTON RIVER RESORT
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
August 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Account Number
|
|
Debit
|
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 19,600
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
3,300
|
|
|
130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
6,000
|
|
|
140
|
Land
|
25,000
|
|
|
143
|
Buildings
|
125,000
|
|
|
149
|
Equipment
|
26,000
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$ 6,500
|
|
208
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
7,400
|
|
275
|
Mortgage Payable
|
|
80,000
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
100,000
|
|
306
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
5,000
|
|
|
429
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
80,000
|
|
622
|
Maintenance and Repairs Expense
|
3,600
|
|
|
726
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
51,000
|
|
|
732
|
Utilities Expense
|
9,400
|
|
|
|
|
$273,900
|
$273,900
|
In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Melton River Resort also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 144 Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings, No. 150 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 212 Salaries and Wages Payable, No. 230 Interest Payable, No. 620 Depreciation Expense, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 718 Interest Expense, and No. 722 Insurance Expense.
Other data:
1. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.
2. A count on August 31 shows $800 of supplies on hand.
3. Annual depreciation is $6,000 on buildings and $2,400 on equipment.
4. Unearned rent revenue of $4,800 was earned prior to August 31.
5. Salaries of $400 were unpaid at August 31.
6. Rentals of $4,000 were due from tenants at August 31. (Use Accounts Receivable.)
7. The mortgage interest rate is 9% per year. (The mortgage was taken out on August 1.)
Instructions
(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on August 31 for the 3 month period June 1–August 31.
(b) Prepare a ledger using the three column form of account. Enter the trial balance amounts and post the adjusting entries. (Use J1 as the posting reference.)
(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on August 31.
(d) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the 3 months ending August 31 and a balance sheet as of August 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Minor Advertising Agency was founded by Brandon Minor in January of 2011. Presented below are both the adjusted and unadjusted trial balances as of December 31, 2012.
|
|
MINOR ADVERTISING AGENCY
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$ 11,000
|
|
$ 11,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
20,000
|
|
21,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,600
|
|
4,800
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,350
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$ 28,000
|
|
$ 34,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
5,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
150
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
5,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
7,200
|
|
5,900
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
2,100
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
25,500
|
|
25,500
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
12,000
|
|
12,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
58,600
|
|
61,400
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
10,000
|
|
12,100
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
850
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
350
|
|
500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
3,800
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4,000
|
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
$129,300
|
$129,300
|
$139,050
|
$139,050
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the annual adjusting entries that were made.
(b) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year ending December 31, 2012, and a balance sheet at December 31.
(c) Answer the following questions.
(1) If the note has been outstanding 6 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?
(2) If the company paid $12,500 in salaries in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A review of the ledger of D. J. Moore Company at December 31, 2012, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.
1. Salaries and Wages Payable $0. There are eight salaried employees. Salaries are paid every Friday for the current week. Five employees receive a salary of $900 each per week, and three employees earn $700 each per week. Assume December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends. All employees worked the last 2 days of December.
2. Unearned Rent Revenue $354,000. The company began subleasing Office space in its new building on November 1. At December 31, the company had the following rental contracts that are paid in full for the entire term of the lease.
|
|
Term
|
|
Number of
|
|
Date
|
(in months)
|
Monthly Rent
|
Leases
|
|
Nov. 1
|
6
|
$5,000
|
5
|
|
Dec. 1
|
6
|
$8,500
|
4
|
3. Prepaid Advertising $15,600. This balance consists of payments on two advertising contracts. The contracts provide for monthly advertising in two trade magazines. The terms of the contracts are as follows.
|
|
Term
|
|
Number of
|
|
|
|
|
Magazine
|
|
Contract
|
Date
|
Amount
|
Issues
|
|
A650
|
May 1
|
$6,000
|
12
|
|
B974
|
Oct. 1
|
9,600
|
24
|
The first advertisement runs in the month in which the contract is signed.
4. Notes Payable $120,000. This balance consists of a note for one year at an annual interest rate of 9%, dated June 1.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On September 1, 2012, the account balances of Moore Equipment Repair were as follows.
|
No.
|
Debits
|
|
No.
|
|
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 4,880
|
154
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
$ 1,500
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
3,520
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
3,400
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
2,000
|
209
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
1,400
|
|
153
|
Equipment
|
15,000
|
212
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
500
|
|
|
|
$25,400
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
18,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$25,400
|
During September, the following summary transactions were completed.
|
Sept.
|
8
|
Paid $1,400 for salaries due employees, of which $900 is for September.
|
|
|
10
|
Received $1,200 cash from customers on account.
|
|
|
12
|
Received $3,400 cash for services performed in September.
|
|
|
15
|
Purchased store equipment on account $3,000.
|
|
|
17
|
Purchased supplies on account $1,200.
|
|
|
20
|
Paid creditors $4,500 on account.
|
|
|
22
|
Paid September rent $500.
|
|
|
25
|
Paid salaries $1,250.
|
|
|
27
|
Performed services on account and billed customers for services provided $2,100.
|
|
|
29
|
Received $650 from customers for future service.
|
Adjustment data consist of:
1. Supplies on hand $1,300.
2. Accrued salaries payable $300.
3. Depreciation is $100 per month.
4. Unearned service revenue of $1,450 is earned.
Instructions
(a) Enter the September 1 balances in the ledger accounts.
(b) Journalize the September transactions.
(c) Post to the ledger accounts. Use J1 for the posting reference. Use the following additional accounts: No. 407 Service Revenue, No. 615 Depreciation Expense, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
(d) Prepare a trial balance at September 30.
(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries.
(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(g) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for September and a balance sheet at September 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Olsen Graphics Company was organized on January 1, 2012, by Gwen Olsen. At the end of the first 6 months of operations, the trial balance contained the accounts shown below.
|
Debits
|
|
Credits
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 8,600
|
Notes Payable
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
14,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
9,000
|
|
Equipment
|
45,000
|
Owner’s Capital
|
22,000
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
2,700
|
Sales Revenue
|
52,100
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
30,000
|
Service Revenue
|
6,000
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
3,700
|
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
1,900
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
1,700
|
|
|
|
|
$109,100
|
|
$109,100
|
Analysis reveals the following additional data.
1. The $3,700 balance in Supplies Expense represents supplies purchased in January. At June 30, $1,500 of supplies was on hand.
2. The note payable was issued on February 1. It is a 9%, 6 month note.
3. The balance in Insurance Expense is the premium on a one year policy, dated March 1, 2012.
4. Service revenues are credited to revenue when received. At June 30, service revenue of $1,300 is unearned.
5. Sales revenue earned but unrecorded at June 30 totals $2,000.
6. Depreciation is $2,250 per year.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the adjusting entries at June 30.
(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(c) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the 6 months ended June 30 and a balance sheet at June 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fran Omiyale started her own consulting firm, Omiyale Consulting, on May 1, 2012. The trial balance at May 31 is as follows.
|
|
OMIYALE CONSULTING
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
May 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Account Number
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 4,500
|
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,000
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
1,900
|
|
|
130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,600
|
|
|
149
|
Equipment
|
11,400
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$ 4,500
|
|
209
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
2,000
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
17,700
|
|
400
|
Service Revenue
|
|
7,500
|
|
726
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
3,400
|
|
|
729
|
Rent Expense
|
900
|
|
|
|
|
$31,700
|
$31,700
|
In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Omiyale Consulting also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 150 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 212 Salaries and Wages Payable, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 717 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 736 Utilities Expense.
Other data:
1. $900 of supplies have been used during the month.
2. Utilities expense incurred but not paid on May 31, 2012, $250.
3. The insurance policy is for 2 years.
4. $400 of the balance in the unearned service revenue account remains unearned at the end of the month.
5. May 31 is a Wednesday, and employees are paid on Fridays. Omiyale Consulting has two employees, who are paid $900 each for a 5 day work week.
6. The office furniture has a 5 year life with no salvage value. It is being depreciated at $190 per month for 60 months.
7. Invoices representing $1,700 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of May 31.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of May. Use J4 as the page number for your journal.
(b) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning account balances and place a check mark in the posting reference column.
(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at May 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Bear Motel opened for business on May 1, 2012. Its trial balance before adjustment on May 31 is as follows.
|
|
BEAR MOTEL
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
May 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Account Number
|
|
Debit
|
credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 3,500
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
2,080
|
|
|
130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,400
|
|
|
140
|
Land
|
12,000
|
|
|
141
|
Buildings
|
60,000
|
|
|
149
|
Equipment
|
15,000
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$ 4,800
|
|
208
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
3,300
|
|
275
|
Mortgage Payable
|
|
40,000
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
41,380
|
|
429
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
10,300
|
|
610
|
Advertising Expense
|
600
|
|
|
726
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
3,300
|
|
|
732
|
Utilities Expense
|
900
|
|
|
|
|
$99,780
|
$99,780
|
In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Bear Motel also contains the following accounts and account numbers: No. 142 Accumulated Depreciation— Buildings, No. 150 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 212 Salaries and Wages Payable, No. 230 Interest Payable, No. 619 Depreciation Expense, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 718 Interest Expense, and No. 722 Insurance Expense.
Other data:
1. Prepaid insurance is a 1 year policy starting May 1, 2012.
2. A count of supplies shows $750 of unused supplies on May 31.
3. Annual depreciation is $3,000 on the buildings and $1,500 on equipment.
4. The mortgage interest rate is 12%. (The mortgage was taken out on May 1.)
5. Two thirds of the unearned rent revenue has been earned.
6. Salaries of $750 are accrued and unpaid at May 31.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on May 31.
(b) Prepare a ledger using the three column form of account. Enter the trial balance amounts and post the adjusting entries. (Use J1 as the posting reference.)
(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on May 31.
(d) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Peterman Co. was organized on July 1, 2012. Quarterly financial statements are prepared. The unadjusted and adjusted trial balances as of September 30 are shown below.
|
|
|
PETERMAN CO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
September 30, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$ 8,700
|
|
$ 8,700
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
10,400
|
|
11,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,500
|
|
650
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
2,200
|
|
1,200
|
|
|
Equipment
|
18,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$ –0–
|
|
$ 700
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,500
|
|
2,500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
725
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
100
|
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
1,900
|
|
1,050
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
22,000
|
|
22,000
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
1,600
|
|
1,600
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
16,000
|
|
17,100
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
1,410
|
|
2,260
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
8,000
|
|
8,725
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,900
|
|
2,900
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
700
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
850
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
1,510
|
|
1,510
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
|
100
|
|
|
|
$53,810
|
$53,810
|
$56,435
|
$56,435
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the adjusting entries that were made.
(b) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the 3 months ending September 30 and a balance sheet at September 30.
(c) If the note bears interest at 12%, how many months has it been outstanding?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A review of the ledger of Roach Company at December 31, 2012, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.
1. Prepaid Insurance $10,440. The company has separate insurance policies on its buildings and its motor vehicles. Policy B4564 on the building was purchased on April 1, 2011, for $7,920. The policy has a term of 3 years. Policy A2958 on the vehicles was purchased on January 1, 2012, for $4,500. This policy has a term of 2 years.
2. Unearned Rent Revenue $429,000. The company began subleasing Office space in its new building on November 1. At December 31, the company had the following rental contracts that are paid in full for the entire term of the lease.
|
|
Term
|
|
Number of
|
|
Date
|
(in months)
|
Monthly Rent
|
Leases
|
|
Nov. 1
|
9
|
$5,000
|
5
|
|
Dec. 1
|
6
|
$8,500
|
4
|
3. Notes Payable $120,000. This balance consists of a note for 9 months at an annual interest rate of 9%, dated November 1.
4. Salaries and Wages Payable $0. There are eight salaried employees. Salaries are paid every Friday for the current week. Five employees receive a salary of $700 each per week, and three employees earn $500 each per week. Assume December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends. All employees worked the last 2 days of December.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On November 1, 2012, the account balances of Robinson Equipment Repair were as follows.
|
No.
|
Debits
|
|
No.
|
Credits
|
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 2,400
|
154
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
$ 2,000
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
4,250
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
2,600
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
1,800
|
209
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
1,200
|
|
153
|
Equipment
|
12,000
|
212
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
700
|
|
|
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
13,950
|
|
|
|
$20,450
|
|
|
$20,450
|
During November, the following summary transactions were completed.
|
Nov.
|
Nov. 8
|
Paid $1,700 for salaries due employees, of which $700 is for October salaries.
|
|
|
10
|
Received $3,420 cash from customers on account.
|
|
|
12
|
Received $3,100 cash for services performed in November.
|
|
|
15
|
Purchased equipment on account $2,000.
|
|
|
17
|
Purchased supplies on account $700.
|
|
|
20
|
Paid creditors on account $2,700.
|
|
|
22
|
Paid November rent $400.
|
|
|
25
|
Paid salaries $1,700.
|
|
|
27
|
Performed services on account and billed customers for services provided $1,900.
|
|
|
29
|
Received $600 from customers for future service.
|
Adjustment data consist of:
1. Supplies on hand $1,400.
2. Accrued salaries payable $350.
3. Depreciation for the month is $200.
4. Unearned service revenue of $1,250 is earned.
Instructions
(a) Enter the November 1 balances in the ledger accounts.
(b) Journalize the November transactions.
(c) Post to the ledger accounts. Use J1 for the posting reference. Use the following additional accounts: No. 407 Service Revenue, No. 615 Depreciation Expense, No. 631 Supplies Expense, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
(d) Prepare a trial balance at November 30.
(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries.
(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(g) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for November and a balance sheet at November 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
It is the end of November and Natalie has been in touch with her grandmother. Her grandmother asked Natalie how well things went in her month of business. Natalie, too, would like to know if she has been profitable or not during November. Natalie realizes that in order to determine Cookie Creations’ income, she must make adjustments.
Natalie puts together the following additional information.
1. A count reveals that $35 of baking supplies were used during November.
2. Natalie estimates that all of her baking equipment will have a useful life of 5 years or 60 months. (Assume Natalie decides to record a full month’s worth of depreciation, regardless of when the equipment was obtained by the business.)
3. Natalie’s grandmother has decided to charge interest of 6% on the note payable extended on November 16. The loan plus interest is to be repaid in 24 months. (Assume that half a month of interest accrued during November.)
4. On November 30, a friend of Natalie’s asks her to teach a class at the neighborhood school. Natalie agrees and teaches a group of 35 grade students how to make Santa Claus cookies. The next day, Natalie prepares an invoice for $300 and leaves it with the school principal. The principal says that he will pass the invoice along to the head office, and it will be paid sometime in December.
5. Natalie receives a utilities bill for $45. The bill is for utilities consumed by Natalie’s business during November and is due December 15.
Instructions
Using the information that you have gathered and based on the new information above, do the following.
(a) Prepare and post the adjusting journal entries.
(b) Prepare an adjusting trial balance.
(c) Using the adjusted trial balance, calculate Cookie Creations’ net income or net loss for the month of November. Do not prepare an income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Happy Camper Park was organized on April 1, 2011, by Amaya Berge. Amaya is a good manager but a poor accountant. From the trial balance prepared by a part time bookkeeper, Amaya prepared the following income statement for the quarter that ended March 31, 2012.
|
HAPPY CAMPER PARK
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Quarter Ended March 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues
|
|
|
|
Rent revenue
|
|
$90,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
Advertising
|
$ 5,200
|
|
|
Salaries and wages
|
29,800
|
|
|
Utilities
|
900
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
800
|
|
|
Maintenance and repairs
|
4,000
|
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
|
40,700
|
|
Net income
|
|
$49,300
|
Amaya thought that something was wrong with the statement because net income had never exceeded $20,000 in any one quarter. Knowing that you are an experienced accountant, she asks you to review the income statement and other data.
You first look at the trial balance. In addition to the account balances reported above in the income statement, the ledger contains the following additional selected balances at March 31, 2012.
|
Supplies
|
$ 6,200
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
7,200
|
|
Notes Payable
|
12,000
|
You then make inquiries and discover the following.
1. Rent revenues include advanced rentals for summer occupancy $15,000.
2. There were $1,700 of supplies on hand at March 31.
3. Prepaid insurance resulted from the payment of a one year policy on January 1, 2012.
4. The mail on April 1, 2012, brought the following bills: advertising for week of March 24, $110; repairs made March 10, $260; and utilities, $180.
5. There are four employees, who receive wages totaling $300 per day. At March 31, 2 days’ salaries and wages have been incurred but not paid.
6. The note payable is a 3 month, 10% note dated January 1, 2012.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a) Prepare a correct income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2012.
(b) Explain to Amaya the generally accepted accounting principles that she did not recognize in preparing her income statement and their effect on her results.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bluestem Company is a pesticide manufacturer. Its sales declined greatly this year due to the passage of legislation outlawing the sale of several of Bluestem’s chemical pesticides. In the coming year, Bluestem will have environmentally safe and competitive chemicals to replace these discontinued products. Sales in the next year are expected to greatly exceed any prior year’s. The decline in sales and profits appears to be a one year aberration. But even so, the company president fears a large dip in the current year’s profits. He believes that such a dip could cause a significant drop in the market price of Bluestem’s stock and make the company a takeover target.
To avoid this possibility, the company president calls in Cathi Bell, controller, to discuss this period’s year end adjusting entries. He urges her to accrue every possible revenue and to defer as many expenses as possible. He says to Cathi, “We need the revenues this year, and next year can easily absorb expenses deferred from this year. We can’t let our stock price be hammered down!” Cathi didn’t get around to recording the adjusting entries until January 17, but she dated the entries December 31 as if they were recorded then. Cathi also made every effort to comply with the president’s request.
Instructions
(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
(b) What are the ethical considerations of (1) the president’s request and (2) Cathi’s dating the adjusting entries December 31?
(c) Can Cathi accrue revenues and defer expenses and still be ethical?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Companies must report or disclose in their financial statements information about all liabilities, including potential liabilities related to environmental clean up. There are many situations in which you will be asked to provide personal financial information about your assets, liabilities, revenue, and expenses. Sometimes you will face difficult decisions regarding what to disclose and how to disclose it.
Instructions
Suppose that you are putting together a loan application to purchase a home. Based on your income and assets, you qualify for the mortgage loan, but just barely. How would you address each of the following situations in reporting your financial position for the loan application? Provide responses for each of the following situations.
(a) You signed a guarantee for a bank loan that a friend took out for $20,000. If your friend doesn’t pay, you will have to pay. Your friend has made all of the payments so far, and it appears he will be able to pay in the future.
(b) You were involved in an auto accident in which you were at fault. There is the possibility that you may have to pay as much as $50,000 as part of a settlement. The issue will not be resolved before the bank processes your mortgage request.
(c) The company at which you work isn’t doing very well, and it has recently laid off employees. You are still employed, but it is quite possible that you will lose your job in the next few months.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements of Zetar plc are presented in Appendix C. The company’s complete annual report, including the notes to its financial statement.
Instructions
Visit Zetar’s corporate website and answer the following questions from Zetar’s 2009 annual report.
(a) From the notes to the financial statements, how does the company determine the amount of revenue to record at the time of a sale?
(b) From the notes to the financial statements, how does the company determine whether a sale has occurred?
(c) Using the consolidated income statement and consolidated statement of financial position, identify items that may result in adjusting entries for deferrals.
(d) Using the consolidated income statement, identify two items that may result in adjusting entries for accruals.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Baxter Hoffman recently received the following information related to Hoffman Company’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet.
|
Prepaid insurance
|
$ 2,300
|
|
Cash
|
800
|
|
Equipment
|
10,700
|
|
Inventory
|
$3,400
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—
|
|
|
equipment
|
2,700
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1,100
|
Prepare the asset section of Hoffman Company’s balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PepsiCo’s financial statements are presented in Appendix A. Financial statements of The Coca Cola Company are presented in Appendix B.
Instructions
(a) Based on the information contained in the financial statements, determine the normal balance of the listed accounts for each company.
PepsiCo
1.Inventory
2.Property, Plant, and Equipment
3.Accounts Payable
4.Interest Expense
Coca Cola
1.Accounts Receivable
2.Cash and Cash Equivalents
3.Cost of Goods Sold
4.Sales (revenue)
(b) Identify the other account ordinarily involved when:
(1) Accounts Receivable is increased.
(2) Salaries and Wages Payable is decreased.
(3) Property, Plant, and Equipment is increased.
(4) Interest Expense is increased.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lisa Ortega operates Ortega Riding Academy. The academy’s primary sources of revenue are riding fees and lesson fees, which are paid on a cash basis. Lisa also boards horses for owners, who are billed monthly for boarding fees. In a few cases, boarders pay in advance of expected use. For its revenue transactions, the academy maintains the following accounts: No. 1 Cash, No. 5 Boarding Accounts Receivable, No. 27 Unearned Boarding Revenue, No. 51 Riding Revenue, No. 52 Lesson Revenue, and No. 53 Boarding Revenue.
The academy owns 10 horses, a stable, a riding corral, riding equipment, and office equipment. These assets are accounted for in accounts No. 11 Horses, No. 12 Building, No. 13 Riding Corral, No. 14 Riding Equipment, and No. 15 Office Equipment.
For its expenses, the academy maintains the following accounts: No. 6 Hay and Feed Supplies, No. 7 Prepaid Insurance, No. 21 Accounts Payable, No. 60 Salaries and Wages Expense, No. 61 Advertising Expense, No. 62 Utilities Expense, No. 63 Veterinary Expense, No. 64 Hay and Feed Expense, and No. 65 Insurance Expense.
Lisa makes periodic withdrawals of cash for personal living expenses. To record Lisa’s equity in the business and her drawings, two accounts are maintained: No. 50 Owner’s Capital, and No. 51 Owner’s Drawings.
During the first month of operations an inexperienced bookkeeper was employed. Lisa Ortega asks you to review the following eight entries of the 50 entries made during the month. In each case, the explanation for the entry is correct.
|
May 1
|
Cash
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
(Invested $18,000 cash in business)
|
|
|
|
5
|
Cash
|
250
|
|
|
|
Riding Revenue
|
|
250
|
|
|
(Received $250 cash for lessons provided)
|
|
|
|
7
|
Cash
|
300
|
|
|
|
Boarding Revenue
|
|
300
|
|
|
(Received $300 for boarding of horses
|
|
|
|
|
beginning June 1)
|
|
|
|
14
|
Riding Equipment
|
80
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
80
|
|
|
(Purchased desk and other office
|
|
|
|
|
equipment for $800 cash)
|
|
|
|
15
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
400
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
400
|
|
|
(Issued check to Lisa Ortega for personal use)
|
|
|
|
20
|
Cash
|
148
|
|
|
|
Riding Revenue
|
|
148
|
|
|
(Received $184 cash for riding fees)
|
|
|
|
30
|
Veterinary Expense
|
75
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
75
|
|
|
(Received bill of $75 from veterinarian for
|
|
|
|
|
services rendered)
|
|
|
|
31
|
Hay and Feed Expense
|
1,700
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
1,700
|
|
|
(Purchased an estimated 2 months’
|
|
|
|
|
supply of feed and hay for $1,700 on account)
|
|
|
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a) Identify each journal entry that is correct. For each journal entry that is incorrect, prepare the entry that should have been made by the bookkeeper
(b) Which of the incorrect entries would prevent the trial balance from balancing?
(c) What was the correct net income for May, assuming the bookkeeper reported net income of $4,500 after posting all 50 entries?
(d) What was the correct cash balance at May 31, assuming the bookkeeper reported a balance of $12,475 after posting all 50 entries (and the only errors occurred in the items listed above)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mary Jansen is the assistant chief accountant at Casey Company, a manufacturer of computer chips and cellular phones. The company presently has total sales of $20 million. It is the end of the first quarter. Mary is hurriedly trying to prepare a general ledger trial balance so that quarterly financial statements can be prepared and released to management and the regulatory agencies. The total credits on the trial balance exceed the debits by $1,000. In order to meet the 4 p.m. deadline, Mary decides to force the debits and credits into balance by adding the amount of the difference to the Equipment account. She chose Equipment because it is one of the larger account balances; percentage wise, it will be the least misstated. Mary “plugs” the difference! She believes that the difference will not affect anyone’s decisions. She wishes that she had another few days to find the error but realizes that the financial statements are already late.
Instructions
(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
(b) What are the ethical issues involved in this case?
(c) What are Mary’s alternatives?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Every company needs to plan in order to move forward. Its top management must consider where it wants the company to be in three to five years. Like a company, you need to think about where you want to be three to five years from now, and you need to start taking steps now in order to get there. With some forethought, you can help yourself avoid a situation, like those described in the All About You feature (available online at the book’s companion website) in which your résumé seems to need creative writing.
Instructions
Provide responses to each of the following items.
(a) Where would you like to be working in three to five years? Describe your plan for getting there by identifying between five and 10 specific steps that you need to take.
(b) In order to get the job you want, you will need a résumé. Your résumé is the equivalent of a company’s annual report. It needs to provide relevant and reliable information about your past accomplishments so that employers can decide whether to “invest” in you. Do a search on the Internet to find a good
résumé format. What are the basic elements of a résumé?
(c) A company’s annual report provides information about a company’s accomplishments. In order for investors to use the annual report, the information must be reliable; that is, users must have faith that the information is accurate and believable. How can you provide assurance that the information on your résumé is reliable?
(d) Prepare a résumé assuming that you have accomplished the five to 10 specific steps you identified in part (a). Also, provide evidence that would give assurance that the information is reliable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Hammond Company, on March 31, 2012, includes these selected accounts before adjusting entries are prepared.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 3,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
9,200
|
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1. Insurance expires at the rate of $100 per month.
2. Supplies on hand total $800.
3. The equipment depreciates $200 a month.
4. One half of the unearned service revenue was earned in March.
Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Skolnick Co. was organized on April 1, 2012. The company prepares quarterly financial statements. The adjusted trial balance amounts at June 30 are shown below.
|
|
Debits
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$ 6,700
|
Notes Payable
|
$ 850
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
600
|
Accounts Payable
|
5,000
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
900
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
1,510
|
|
Supplies
|
1,000
|
Interest Payable
|
400
|
|
Equipment
|
15,000
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
50
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
600
|
Owner’s Capital
|
500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
9,400
|
Service Revenue
|
14,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,500
|
Rent Revenue
|
14,200
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
850
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
800
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
200
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
510
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
50
|
|
|
|
Total debits
|
$37,310
|
Total credits
|
$37,310
|
(a) Determine the net income for the quarter April 1 to June 30.
(b) Determine the total assets and total liabilities at June 30, 2012, for Skolnick Co.
(c) Determine the amount that appears for Owner’s Capital at June 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Terry Thomas opens the Green Thumb Lawn Care Company on April 1. At April 30, the trial balance shows the following balances for selected accounts.
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 3,600
|
|
Equipment
|
28,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
20,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
4,200
|
|
Service Revenue
|
1,800
|
Analysis reveals the following additional data.
1. Prepaid insurance is the cost of a 2 year insurance policy, effective April 1.
2. Depreciation on the equipment is $500 per month.
3. The note payable is dated April 1. It is a 6 month, 12% note.
4. Seven customers paid for the company’s 6 months’ lawn service package of $600 beginning in April. The company performed services for these customers in April.
5. Lawn services provided other customers but not recorded at April 30 totaled $1,500.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of April. Show computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Numerous timing concepts are discussed on pages 100–102. A list of concepts is provided below in the left column, with a description of the concept in the right column. There are more descriptions provided than concepts. Match the description of the concept to the concept.
1. Cash basis accounting.
2. Fiscal year.
3. Revenue recognition principle.
4. Expense recognition principle.
(a) Monthly and quarterly time periods.
(b) Accountants divide the economic life of a business into artificial time periods.
(c) Efforts (expenses) should be matched with accomplishments (revenues).
(d) Companies record revenues when they receive cash and record expenses when they pay out cash.
(e) An accounting time period that is one year in length.
(f) An accounting time period that starts on January 1 and ends on December 31.
(g) Companies record transactions in the period in which the events occur.
(h) Recognize revenue in the accounting period in which it is earned.
Identify timing concepts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Lefevour, Inc. on March 31, 2012, includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,400
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
30,000
|
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
9,000
|
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.
2. Supplies on hand total $1,100.
3. The equipment depreciates $500 per month.
4. 2/5 of the unearned service revenue was earned in March.
Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kreutz Co. was organized on April 1, 2012. The company prepares quarterly financial statements. The adjusted trial balance amounts at June 30 are shown on the next page.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 5,360
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
$ 700
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
480
|
Equipment
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
720
|
Notes Payable
|
4,000
|
|
Supplies
|
920
|
Accounts Payable
|
790
|
|
Equipment
|
12,000
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
300
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
500
|
Interest Payable
|
40
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
7,400
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
400
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,200
|
Owner’s Capital
|
11,200
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
700
|
Service Revenue
|
11,360
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
160
|
Rent Revenue
|
1,100
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
410
|
Total credits
|
$29,890
|
|
Interest Expense
|
40
|
|
|
|
Total debits
|
$29,890
|
|
|
(a) Determine the net income for the quarter April 1 to June 30.
(b) Determine the total assets and total liabilities at June 30, 2012 for Kreutz Company.
(c) Determine the amount that appears for Owner’s Capital at June 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance shows Supplies $1,350 and Supplies Expense $0. If $600 of supplies are on hand at the end of the period, the adjusting entry is:
|
a.Supplies
|
600
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
600
|
|
b.Supplies
|
750
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
750
|
|
c.Supplies Expense
|
750
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
750
|
|
d.Supplies Expense
|
600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
600
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Queenan Company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at $1,000 for the month of June. The adjusting entry to record this depreciation is as follows.
|
a.Depreciation Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
|
|
Queenan Company
|
|
1,000
|
|
b.Depreciation Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
1,000
|
|
c.Depreciation Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
1,000
|
|
d.Equipment Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
1,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kathy Siska earned a salary of $400 for the last week of September. She will be paid on October 1. The adjusting entry for Kathy’s employer at September 30 is:
|
a.No entry is required.
|
400
|
|
|
b.Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
400
|
|
c.Salaries and Wages Expense
|
400
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
400
|
|
d.Salaries and Wages Payable
|
400
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
400
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lance Louis has prepared the following list of statements about the time period assumption.
1. Adjusting entries would not be necessary if a company’s life were not divided into artificial time periods.
2. The IRS requires companies to fi le annual tax returns.
3. Accountants divide the economic life of a business into artificial time periods, but each transaction affects only one of these periods.
4. Accounting time periods are generally a month, a quarter, or a year.
5. A time period lasting one year is called an interim period.
6. All fiscal years are calendar years, but not all calendar years are fiscal years.
Instructions
Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mannelly Corporation encounters the following situations:
1. Mannelly collects $1,300 from a customer in 2012 for services to be performed in 2013.
2. Mannelly incurs utility expense which is not yet paid in cash or recorded.
3. Mannelly’s employees worked 3 days in 2012 but will not be paid until 2013.
4. Mannelly earned service revenue but has not yet received cash or recorded the transaction.
5. Mannelly paid $2,400 rent on December 1 for the 4 months starting December 1.
6. Mannelly received cash for future services and recorded a liability until the revenue was earned.
7. Mannelly performed consulting services for a client in December 2012. On December 31, it had not billed the client for services provided of $1,200.
8. Mannelly paid cash for an expense and recorded an asset until the item was used up.
9. Mannelly purchased $900 of supplies in 2012; at year end, $400 of supplies remain unused.
10. Mannelly purchased equipment on January 1, 2012; the equipment will be used for 5 years.
11. Mannelly borrowed $10,000 on October 1, 2012, signing an 8% one year note payable.
Instructions
Identify what type of adjusting entry (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued expense, or accrued revenue) is needed in each situation, at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Danieal Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the selected accounts, shown on the next page, before adjusting entries have been prepared.
|
|
Debit
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 3,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
|
Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$ 8,400
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
10,200
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
60,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
14,000
|
|
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1. The equipment depreciates $400 per month.
2. One third of the unearned rent revenue was earned during the quarter.
3. Interest of $500 is accrued on the notes payable.
4. Supplies on hand total $900.
5. Insurance expires at the rate of $200 per month.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Interest Payable, and Supplies Expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Danielle Manning, D.D.S., opened a dental practice on January 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.
1. Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $875 of such services was earned but not yet recorded.
2. Utility expenses incurred but not paid prior to January 31 totaled $650.
3. Purchased dental equipment on January 1 for $80,000, paying $20,000 in cash and signing a $60,000, 3 year note payable. The equipment depreciates $400 per month. Interest is $500 per month.
4. Purchased a one year malpractice insurance policy on January 1 for $24,000.
5. Purchased $1,600 of dental supplies. On January 31, determined that $400 of supplies were on hand.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Account titles are: Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, Depreciation Expense, Service Revenue, Accounts Receivable, Insurance Expense, Interest Expense, Interest Payable, Prepaid Insurance, Supplies, Supplies Expense, Utilities Expense, and Utilities Payable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A partial adjusted trial balance of Manumaleuna Company at January 31, 2012, shows the following.
|
|
MANUMALEUNA COMPANY
|
|
|
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
January 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 850
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,400
|
|
|
|
|
$ 800
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
750
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
950
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
400
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
2,900
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
2,000
|
Instructions
Answer the following questions, assuming the year begins January 1.
(a) If the amount in Supplies Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and $1,000 of supplies was purchased in January, what was the balance in Supplies on January 1?
(b) If the amount in Insurance Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and the original insurance premium was for one year, what was the total premium and when was the policy purchased?
(c) If $3,500 of salaries was paid in January, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable at December 31, 2011?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected accounts of Tabor Company are shown below.
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
7/31
|
800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
7/1 Bal.
|
1,100
|
7/31
|
800
|
|
7/10
|
650
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
7/31
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
|
7/15
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
7/31
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
|
|
|
7/31
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
|
7/31
|
1,150
|
7/1 Bal.
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
7/20
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
7/14
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
7/31
|
1,150
|
|
|
|
7/31
|
500
|
Instructions
After analyzing the accounts, journalize (a) the July transactions and (b) the adjusting entries that were made on July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balances before and after adjustment for Matthews Company at the end of its fiscal year are presented on the next page.
|
|
MATTHEWS COMPANY
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
August 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
10,400
|
|
$10,400
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
8,800
|
|
10,800
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,300
|
|
900
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,000
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
14,000
|
|
14,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$ 3,600
|
|
$ 4,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
5,800
|
|
5,800
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
1,100
|
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
1,500
|
|
600
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
15,600
|
|
15,600
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
34,000
|
|
36,000
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
11,000
|
|
11,900
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
17,000
|
|
18,100
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
–0–
|
|
1,400
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
15,000
|
|
15,000
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
–0–
|
|
1,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
–0–
|
|
900
|
|
|
|
$71,500
|
$71,500
|
$75,500
|
$75,500
|
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries that were made.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An inexperienced bookkeeper prepared the following trial balance. Prepare a correct trial balance, assuming all account balances are normal.
|
|
WALTER COMPANY
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$10,800
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
$ 3,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
3,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
2,200
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
9,000
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
|
4,500
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
25,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
18,600
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
$31,600
|
$48,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for M. Anderson, an interior decorator, in her fi rst month of business, are as follows.
|
Jan.
|
2
|
Invested $10,000 cash in business.
|
|
|
3
|
Purchased used car for $4,000 cash for use in business.
|
|
|
9
|
Purchased supplies on account for $500.
|
|
|
11
|
Billed customers $2,100 for services performed.
|
|
|
16
|
Paid $350 cash for advertising.
|
|
|
20
|
Received $700 cash from customers billed on January 11.
|
|
|
23
|
Paid creditor $300 cash on balance owed.
|
|
|
28
|
Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use by owner.
|
Instructions
For each transaction, indicate the following.
(a) The basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, owner’s equity).
(b) The specific account debited and credited (cash, rent expense, service revenue, etc.).
(c) Whether the specific account is increased or decreased.
(d) The normal balance of the specific account.
Use the following format, in which the January 2 transaction is given as an example.
|
|
Account Debited
|
|
|
|
Account Credited
|
|
|
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
(c)
|
(d)
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
(c)
|
d)
|
|
|
Basic
|
Specific
|
|
Normal
|
Basic
|
Specific
|
|
Normal
|
|
Date
|
Type
|
Account
|
Effect
|
Balance
|
Type
|
Account
|
Effect
|
Balance
|
|
Jan. 2
|
Asset
|
Cash
|
Increase
|
Debit
|
Owner’s
|
Owner’s
|
Increase
|
Credit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equity
|
Capital
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Aromashodu Real Estate Agency.
|
Oct.
|
1
|
Devin Aromashodu begins business as a real estate agent with a cash investment of $15,000.
|
|
|
2
|
Hires an administrative assistant.
|
|
|
3
|
Purchases office furniture for $1,900, on account.
|
|
|
6
|
Sells a house and lot for H. Harrelson; bills H. Harrelson $3,600 for realty services provided.
|
|
|
27
|
Pays $1,100 on the balance related to the transaction of October 3.
|
|
|
30
|
Pays the administrative assistant $2,500 in salary for October.
|
Instructions
Prepare the debit credit analysis for each transaction.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions from the journal of Consuela Brown, investment broker, are presented below.
|
Date
|
Account Titles and Explanation
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Aug. 1
|
Cash
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
(Owner’s investment of cash in business)
|
|
|
|
|
10
|
Cash
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
(Received cash for services provided)
|
|
|
|
|
12
|
Equipment
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
and notes payable)
|
|
|
|
|
25
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
1,700
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
1,700
|
|
|
(Billed clients for services provided)
|
|
|
|
|
31
|
Cash
|
|
900
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
|
|
|
(Receipt of cash on account)
|
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Post the transactions to T accounts.
(b) Prepare a trial balance at August 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions from the journal of Consuela Brown, investment broker, are presented below.
end of the first month of operations.
|
|
Cash
|
|
No. 101
|
|
4/1
|
12,000
|
4/15
|
1,300
|
|
4/12
|
900
|
4/25
|
1,500
|
|
4/29
|
400
|
|
|
|
4/30
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
No. 112
|
|
4/7
|
3,200
|
4/29
|
400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
No. 126
|
|
4/4
|
1,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
No. 201
|
|
4/25
|
1,500
|
4/4
|
1,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
4/30
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
No. 301
|
|
|
|
4/1
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
No. 400
|
|
|
|
4/7
|
3,200
|
|
|
|
4/12
|
900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
No. 726
|
|
4/15
|
1,300
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the complete general journal (including explanations) from which the postings to Cash were made.
(b) Prepare a trial balance at April 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is the ledger for Bowman Co. Journalize transactions from account data and prepare a trial balance.
|
|
Cash
|
|
No. 101
|
|
10/1
|
3,000
|
10/4
|
400
|
|
10/10
|
500
|
10/12
|
1,500
|
|
10/10
|
4,000
|
10/15
|
250
|
|
10/20
|
500
|
10/30
|
300
|
|
10/25
|
2,000
|
10/31
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
No. 112
|
|
10/6
|
800
|
10/20
|
500
|
|
10/20
|
940
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
No. 126
|
|
10/4
|
400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
No. 157
|
|
10/3
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
No. 200
|
|
|
|
10/10
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
No. 201
|
|
10/12
|
1,500
|
10/3
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
No. 301
|
|
|
|
10/1
|
3,000
|
|
|
|
10/25
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
|
No. 306
|
|
10/30
|
300
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
No. 400
|
|
|
|
10/6
|
800
|
|
|
|
10/10
|
500
|
|
|
|
10/20
|
940
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
No. 726
|
|
10/31
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
|
No. 729
|
|
10/15
|
250
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Reproduce the journal entries for the transactions that occurred on October 1, 10, and 20, and provide explanations for each.
(b) Determine the October 31 balance for each of the accounts above, and prepare a trial balance at October 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for Roberta Garza Company during its fi rst month in business are presented below.
|
Sept.
|
1
|
Invested $10,000 cash in the business.
|
|
|
5
|
Purchased equipment for $12,000 paying $4,000 in cash and the balance on account.
|
|
|
25
|
Paid $3,000 cash on balance owed for equipment.
|
|
|
30
|
Withdrew $700 cash for personal use.
|
Garza’s chart of accounts shows: No. 101 Cash, No. 157 Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 301 Owner’s Capital, and No. 306 Owner’s Drawings.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions on page J1 of the journal. (Omit explanations.)
(b) Post the transactions using the standard account form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The bookkeeper for Lance Briggs Equipment Repair made a number of errors in journalizing and posting, as described below.
1. A credit posting of $525 to Accounts Receivable was omitted.
2. A debit posting of $750 for Prepaid Insurance was debited to Insurance Expense.
3. A collection from a customer of $100 in payment of its account owed was journalized and posted as a debit to Cash $100 and a credit to Service Revenue $100.
4. A credit posting of $415 to Property Taxes Payable was made twice.
5. A cash purchase of supplies for $250 was journalized and posted as a debit to Supplies $25 and a credit to Cash $25.
6. A debit of $475 to Advertising Expense was posted as $457.
Instructions
For each error:
(a) Indicate whether the trial balance will balance.
(b) If the trial balance will not balance, indicate the amount of the difference.
(c) Indicate the trial balance column that will have the larger total.
Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error (1) is given as an example.
|
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
(c)
|
|
Error
|
In Balance
|
Difference
|
Larger Column
|
|
(1)
|
No
|
$525
|
debit
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounts in the ledger of Bullucks Delivery Service contain the following balances on July 31, 2012.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$ 7,642
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 1,968
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,396
|
Maintenance and Repairs Expense
|
961
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
Service Revenue
|
10,610
|
|
Equipment
|
49,360
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
700
|
|
Gasoline Expense
|
758
|
Owner’s Capital
|
42,000
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
523
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
4,428
|
|
Notes Payable
|
17,000
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
815
|
Instructions
Prepare a trial balance with the accounts arranged as illustrated in the chapter and fill in the missing amount for Cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frontier Park was started on April 1 by H. Hillenmeyer. The following selected events and transactions occurred during April.
|
Apr.
|
1
|
Hillenmeyer invested $35,000 cash in the business.
|
|
|
4
|
Purchased land costing $27,000 for cash.
|
|
|
8
|
Incurred advertising expense of $1,800 on account.
|
|
|
11
|
Paid salaries to employees $1,500.
|
|
|
12
|
Hired park manager at a salary of $4,000 per month, effective May 1.
|
|
|
13
|
Paid $1,650 cash for a one year insurance policy.
|
|
|
17
|
Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.
|
|
|
20
|
Received $6,800 in cash for admission fees.
|
|
|
25
|
Sold 100 coupon books for $25 each. Each book contains 10 coupons that entitle the
|
|
|
|
holder to one admission to the park.
|
|
|
30
|
Received $8,900 in cash admission fees.
|
|
|
30
|
Paid $900 on balance owed for advertising incurred on April 8.
|
Instructions
Journalize the April transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Desiree Clark is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business, the following events and transactions occurred.
|
May
|
1
|
Clark invested $20,000 cash in her business.
|
|
|
2
|
Hired a secretary receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.
|
|
|
3
|
Purchased $2,500 of supplies on account from Read Supply Company.
|
|
|
7
|
Paid office rent of $900 cash for the month.
|
|
|
11
|
Completed a tax assignment and billed client $3,200 for services provided.
|
|
|
12
|
Received $3,500 advance on a management consulting engagement.
|
|
|
17
|
Received cash of $1,200 for services completed for C. Desmond Co.
|
|
|
31
|
Paid secretary receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.
|
|
|
31
|
Paid 60% of balance due Read Supply Company.
|
Desiree uses the following chart of accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 126 Supplies, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 209 Unearned Service Revenue, No. 301 Owner’s Capital, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions.
(b) Post to the ledger accounts.
(c) Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jay Cutler owns and manages a computer repair service, which had the following trialbalance on December 31, 2011 (the end of its fiscal year).
|
|
MEGA REPAIR SERVICE
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 8,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
15,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
13,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
3,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
20,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$19,000
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
40,000
|
|
|
$59,000
|
$59,000
|
Summarized transactions for January 2012 were as follows.
1. Advertising costs, paid in cash, $1,000.
2. Additional supplies acquired on account $4,200.
3. Miscellaneous expenses, paid in cash, $2,000.
4. Cash collected from customers in payment of accounts receivable $14,000.
5. Cash paid to creditors for accounts payable due $15,000.
6. Supplies used during January $4,000.
7. Repair services performed during January: for cash $6,000; on account $9,000.
8. Wages for January, paid in cash, $3,500.
9. Jay’s drawings during January were $3,000.
Instructions
(a) Open T accounts for each of the accounts listed in the trial balance, and enter the opening balances for 2012.
(b) Prepare journal entries to record each of the January transactions.
(c) Post the journal entries to the accounts in the ledger. (Add accounts as needed.)
(d) Prepare a trial balance as of January 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of the Kellen Davis Company shown below does not balance.
|
|
KELLEN DAVIS COMPANY
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
May 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 5,850
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
$ 2,750
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
700
|
|
|
Equipment
|
8,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,500
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
650
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
11,700
|
|
Service Revenue
|
6,690
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
4,200
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
|
1,100
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
890
|
|
|
|
$26,980
|
$20,050
|
Your review of the ledger reveals that each account has a normal balance. You also discover the following errors.
1. The totals of the debit sides of Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Insurance Expense were each understated $100.
2. Transposition errors were made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue. Based on postings made, the correct balances were $2,570 and $6,960, respectively.
3. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $200 was omitted.
4. A $1,000 cash drawing by the owner was debited to Owner’s Capital for $1,000 and credited to Cash for $1,000.
5. A $520 purchase of supplies on account was debited to Equipment for $520 and credited to Cash for $520.
6. A cash payment of $540 for advertising was debited to Advertising Expense for $54 and credited to Cash for $54.
7. A collection from a customer for $210 was debited to Cash for $210 and credited to Accounts Payable for $210.
Instructions
Prepare a correct trial balance. Note that the chart of accounts includes the following: Owner’s Drawings and Supplies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Chicago Theater is owned by Rashied Davis. All facilities were completed on March 31. At this time, the ledger showed: No. 101 Cash $4,000, No. 140 Land $10,000, No. 145 Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $8,000, No. 157 Equipment $6,000, No. 201 Accounts Payable $2,000, No. 275 Mortgage Payable $8,000, and No. 301 Owner’s Capital $18,000. During April, the following events and transactions occurred.
|
Apr.
|
2
|
Paid fi lm rental of $1,100 on first movie.
|
|
|
3
|
Ordered two additional films at $1,000 each.
|
|
|
9
|
Received $2,800 cash from admissions.
|
|
|
10
|
Made $2,000 payment on mortgage and $1,000 for accounts payable due.
|
|
|
11
|
Chicago Theater contracted with Virginia McCaskey to operate the concession stand.
|
|
|
|
McCaskey is to pay 17% of gross concession receipts (payable monthly) for the rental
|
|
|
|
of the concession stand.
|
|
|
12
|
Paid advertising expenses $500.
|
|
|
20
|
Received one of the films ordered on April 3 and was billed $1,000. The fi lm will be
|
|
|
|
shown in April.
|
|
|
25
|
Received $5,200 cash from admissions.
|
|
|
29
|
Paid salaries $2,000.
|
|
|
30
|
Received statement from Virginia McCaskey showing gross concession receipts of
|
|
|
|
$ 1,000 and the balance due to The Chicago Theater of $170 ($1,000 × 17%) for April.
|
|
|
|
McCaskey paid one half of the balance due and will remit the remainder on May 5.
|
|
|
30
|
Prepaid $1,200 rental on special fi lm to be run in May.
|
In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts shows: No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 136 Prepaid Rent, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 429 Rent Revenue, No. 610 Advertising Expense, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger as of April 1. Insert a check mark (?) in the reference column of the ledger for the beginning balance.
(b) Journalize the April transactions. Chicago records admission revenue as service revenue, rental of the concession stand as rent revenue, and fi lm rental expense as rent expense.
(c) Post the April journal entries to the ledger. Assume that all entries are posted from page 1 of the journal.
(d) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012. Problems: Set B
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Victoria Hall is a licensed dentist. During the first month of the operation of her business, the following events and transactions occurred.
|
April
|
1
|
Invested $20,000 cash in her business.
|
|
|
1
|
Hired a secretary receptionist at a salary of $700 per week payable monthly.
|
|
|
2
|
Paid office rent for the month $1,100.
|
|
|
3
|
Purchased dental supplies on account from Smile Company $4,000.
|
|
|
10
|
Provided dental services and billed insurance companies $5,100.
|
|
|
11
|
Received $1,000 cash advance from Trudy Borke for an implant.
|
|
|
20
|
Received $2,100 cash for services completed and delivered to John Carl.
|
|
|
30
|
Paid secretary receptionist for the month $2,800.
|
|
|
30
|
Paid $2,400 to Smile Company for accounts payable due.
|
Victoria uses the following chart of accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 126 Supplies, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 209 Unearned Service Revenue, No. 301 Owner’s Capital, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions.
(b) Post to the ledger accounts.
(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
San Jose Services was formed on May 1, 2012. The following transactions took place during the first month.
Transactions on May 1:
1. Jarron Gilbert invested $40,000 cash in the company, as its sole owner.
2. Hired two employees to work in the warehouse. They will each be paid a salary of $3,050 per month.
3. Signed a 2 year rental agreement on a warehouse; paid $24,000 cash in advance for the first year.
4. Purchased furniture and equipment costing $30,000. A cash payment of $10,000 was made immediately; the remainder will be paid in 6 months.
5. Paid $1,800 cash for a one year insurance policy on the furniture and equipment.
Transactions during the remainder of the month:
6. Purchased basic office supplies for $500 cash.
7. Purchased more office supplies for $1,500 on account.
8. Total revenues earned were $20,000—$8,000 cash and $12,000 on account.
9. Paid $400 to suppliers for accounts payable due.
10. Received $3,000 from customers in payment of accounts receivable.
11. Received utility bills in the amount of $350, to be paid next month.
12. Paid the monthly salaries of the two employees, totalling $6,100.
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries to record each of the events listed. (Omit explanations.)
(b) Post the journal entries to T accounts.
(c) Prepare a trial balance as of May 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of Robbie Gould Co. shown below does not balance.
|
|
ROBBIE GOULD CO.
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
June 30, 2012
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 3,340
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$ 2,812
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,200
|
|
|
Equipment
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
3,666
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
1,100
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
8,000
|
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
800
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
2,480
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
810
|
|
|
|
$12,522
|
$17,486
|
Each of the listed accounts has a normal balance per the general ledger. An examination of the ledger and journal reveals the following errors.
1. Cash received from a customer in payment of its account was debited for $580, and Accounts Receivable was credited for the same amount. The actual collection was for $850.
2. The purchase of a computer on account for $710 was recorded as a debit to Supplies for $710 and a credit to Accounts Payable for $710.
3. Services were performed on account for a client for $980. Accounts Receivable was debited for $980, and Service Revenue was credited for $98.
4. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $700 was omitted.
5. A payment of a balance due for $306 was credited to Cash for $306 and credited to Accounts Payable for $360.
6. The withdrawal of $600 cash for Gould’s personal use was debited to Salaries and Wages Expense for $600 and credited to Cash for $600.
Instructions
Prepare a correct trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cora Theater, owned by Cora Graham, will begin operations in March. The Cora will be unique in that it will show only triple features of sequential theme movies. As of March 1, the ledger of Cora showed: No. 101 Cash $3,000, No. 140 Land $24,000, No. 145 Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $10,000, No. 157 Equipment $10,000, No. 201 Accounts Payable $7,000, and No. 301 Owner’s Capital $40,000. During the month of March the following events and transactions occurred.
|
Mar.
|
2
|
Rented the three Indiana Jonesmovies to be shown for the first 3 weeks of March.
|
|
|
|
The fi lm rental was $3,500; $1,500 was paid in cash and $2,000 will be paid on
|
|
|
|
March 10.
|
|
|
3
|
Ordered the Lord of the Ringsmovies to be shown the last 10 days of March. It will
|
|
|
|
cost $200 per night.
|
|
|
9
|
Received $4,000 cash from admissions.
|
|
|
10
|
Paid balance due on Indiana Jonesmovies rental and $2,100 on March 1 accounts
|
|
|
|
payable.
|
|
|
11
|
Cora Theater contracted with Caleb Hanie to operate the concession stand. Hanie
|
|
|
|
is to pay 15% of gross concession receipts (payable monthly) for the rental of the
|
|
|
|
concession stand.
|
|
|
12
|
Paid advertising expenses $800.
|
|
|
20
|
Received $5,000 cash from customers for admissions.
|
|
|
20
|
Received the Lord of the Ringsmovies and paid the rental fee of $2,000.
|
|
|
31
|
Paid salaries of $3,100.
|
|
|
31
|
Received statement from Caleb Hanie showing gross receipts from concessions of
|
|
|
|
$6,000 and the balance due to Cora Theater of $900 ($6,000 3 15%) for March. Hanie
|
|
|
|
paid one half the balance due and will remit the remainder on April 5.
|
|
|
31
|
Received $9,000 cash from customers for admissions.
|
In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts includes: No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 429 Rent Revenue, No. 610 Advertising Expense, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger. Insert a check mark (?) in the reference column of the ledger for the beginning balance.
(b) Journalize the March transactions. Cora records admission revenue as service revenue, rental of the concession stand as rent revenue, and fi lm rental expense as rent expense.
(c) Post the March journal entries to the ledger. Assume that all entries are posted from page 1 of the journal.
(d) Prepare a trial balance on March 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After researching the different forms of business organization. Natalie Koebel decides to operate “Cookie Creations” as a proprietorship. She then starts the process of getting the business running. In November 2011, the following activities take place.
|
Nov.
|
8
|
Natalie cashes her U.S. Savings Bonds and receives $520, which she deposits in her
|
|
|
|
personal bank account.
|
|
|
8
|
She opens a bank account under the name “Cookie Creations” and transfers $500
|
|
|
|
from her personal account to the new account.
|
|
|
11
|
Natalie pays $65 for advertising.
|
|
|
13
|
She buys baking supplies, such as fl our, sugar, butter, and chocolate chips, for $125
|
|
|
|
cash. (Hint:Use Supplies account.)
|
|
|
14
|
Natalie starts to gather some baking equipment to take with her when teaching the
|
|
|
|
cookie classes. She has an excellent top of the line food processor and mixer that
|
|
|
|
originally cost her $750. Natalie decides to start using it only in her new business. She
|
|
|
|
estimates that the equipment is currently worth $300. She invests the equipment in the
|
|
|
|
business.
|
|
|
16
|
Natalie realizes that her initial cash investment is not enough. Her grandmother lends
|
|
|
|
her $2,000 cash, for which Natalie signs a note payable in the name of the business.
|
|
|
|
Natalie deposits the money in the business bank account. (Hint:The note does not
|
|
|
|
have to be repaid for 24 months. As a result, the note payable should be reported in
|
|
|
|
the accounts as the last liability and also on the balance sheet as the last liability.)
|
|
|
17
|
She buys more baking equipment for $900 cash.
|
|
|
20
|
She teaches her first class and collects $125 cash.
|
|
|
25
|
Natalie books a second class for December 4 for $150. She receives $30 cash in advance
|
|
|
|
as a down payment.
|
|
|
30
|
Natalie pays $1,320 for a one year insurance policy that will expire on December 1, 2011.
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries to record the November transactions.
(b) Post the journal entries to general ledger accounts.
(c) Prepare a trial balance at November 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements of PepsiCo, Inc. are presented in Appendix A. The notes accompanying the statements contain the following selected accounts, stated in millions of dollars.
Accounts Payable
Income Taxes Payable
Accounts Receivable
Interest Expense
Property, Plant, and Equipment
Inventory
Instructions
(a) Answer the following questions.
(1) What is the increase and decrease side for each account?
(2) What is the normal balance for each account?
(b) Identify the probable other account in the transaction and the effect on that account when:
(1) Accounts Receivable is decreased.
(2) Accounts Payable is decreased.
(3) Inventory is increased.
(c) Identify the other account(s) that ordinarily would be involved when:
(1) Interest Expense is increased.
(2) Property, Plant, and Equipmen
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kwikdeal.com uses the allowance method to estimate uncollectible accounts receivable. The company produced the following aging of the accounts receivable at year end.
|
Total
|
0 30
|
31 60
|
61 90
|
91 120
|
Over 120
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$375,000
|
$222,000
|
$90,000
|
$38,000
|
$10,000
|
$15,000
|
|
% uncollectible
|
|
1%
|
4%
|
5%
|
6%
|
10%
|
|
Estimated bad debts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information.
(b) Prepare the year end adjusting journal entry to record the bad debts using the aged uncollectible accounts receivable determined in (a). Assume the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $4,000 debit.
(c) Of the above accounts, $5,000 is determined to be specifically uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to write off the uncollectible account.
(d) The company collects $5,000 subsequently on a specific account that had previously been determined to be uncollectible in (c). Prepare the journal entry necessary to restore the account and record the cash collection.
(e) Comment on how your answers to (a)–(d) would change if Kwikdeal.com used 3% of total accounts receivable, rather than aging the accounts receivable. What are the advantages to the company of aging the accounts receivable rather than applying a percentage to total accounts receivable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2009, Kelso Imports reported this information on its balance sheet.
|
Accounts receivable
|
$600,000
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
40,000
|
During 2010 the company had the following transactions related to receivables.
|
1.
|
Sales on account
|
$2,500,000
|
|
2.
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
40,000
|
|
3.
|
Collections of accounts receivable
|
2,200,000
|
|
4.
|
Write offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible
|
45,000
|
|
5.
|
Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible
|
15,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.
(b) Enter the January 1, 2010, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.
(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2010, assuming that aging the accounts receivable indicates that estimated bad debts are $46,000.
(d) Compute the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is an aging schedule for Galena Company.
|
Customer
|
|
|
Number of Days Past Due
|
|
Total
|
Not Yet Due
|
1 30
|
31 60
|
61 90
|
Over 90
|
|
Aber
|
$ 20,000
|
|
$ 9,000
|
$11,000
|
|
|
|
Bloom
|
30,000
|
$ 30,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cheng
|
50,000
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Dahl
|
38,000
|
|
|
|
|
$38,000
|
|
Others
|
120,000
|
72,000
|
35,000
|
13,000
|
|
|
|
$258,000
|
$107,000
|
$49,000
|
$24,000
|
$40,000
|
$38,000
|
|
Estimated percentage uncollectible
|
|
3%
|
7%
|
12%
|
24%
|
50%
|
|
Total estimated bad debts
|
$ 38,120
|
$ 3,210
|
$ 3,430
|
$ 2,880
|
$ 9,600
|
$19,000
|
At December 31, 2009, the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a credit of $8,000.
Instructions
(a) Journalize and post the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2009. (Use T accounts.)
(b) Journalize and post to the allowance account these 2010 events and transactions:
1. March 1, a $600 customer balance originating in 2009 is judged uncollectible.
2. May 1, a check for $600 is received from the customer whose account was written off as uncollectible on March 1.
(c) Journalize the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2010, assuming that the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a debit of $1,100 and the aging schedule indicates that total estimated bad debts will be $36,700.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here is information related to Schellhamer Company for 2010.
|
Total credit sales
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Accounts receivable at December 31
|
840,000
|
|
Bad debts written off
|
41,000
|
Instructions
(a) What amount of bad debts expense will Schellhamer Company report if it uses the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts?
(b) Assume that Schellhamer Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense based on 3% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debts expense will the company record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $3,000?
(c) Assume the same facts as in part (b), except that there is a $1,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debts expense will Schellhamer record?
(d) What is a weakness of the direct write off method of reporting bad debts expense?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2010, the trial balance of Olpe Company contained the following amounts before adjustment.
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
200,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$ 1,500
|
|
Sales
|
|
875,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2010, to record bad debts expense assuming that the aging schedule indicates that $10,800 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(b) Repeat part (a) assuming that instead of a credit balance there is a $1,500 debit balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
(c) During the next month, January 2011, a $2,700 account receivable is written off as uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to record the write off.
(d) Repeat part (c) assuming that Olpe Company uses the direct write off method instead of the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable.
(e) What are the advantages of using an aging schedule and the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts as compared to the direct write off method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2010, Sands Company had Accounts Receivable of $54,200 and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $3,700. Sands Company prepares financial statements annually and uses a perpetual inventory system. During the year the following selected transactions occurred.
|
Jan.
|
5
|
Sold $7,000 of merchandise to Norris Company, terms n/30. Cost of the merchandise sold was $4,000.
|
|
Feb.
|
2
|
Accepted a $7,000, 4 month, 9% promissory note from Norris Company for balance due.
|
|
12
|
Sold $9,000 of merchandise costing $5,000 to Loflin Company and accepted Loflin’s $9,000, 2 month, 10% note for the balance due.
|
|
26
|
Sold $5,200 of merchandise costing $3,300 to Hossfeld Co., terms n/10.
|
|
Apr.
|
5
|
Accepted a $5,200, 3 month, 8% note from Hossfeld Co. for balance due.
|
|
12
|
Collected Loflin Company note in full.
|
|
June
|
2
|
Collected Norris Company note in full.
|
|
15
|
Sold $2,000 of merchandise costing $1,500 to Madrid Inc. and accepted a $2,000, 6 month, 12% note for the amount due.
|
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The president of Ferman Enterprises Ltd., Angela Ferman, is considering the impact that certain transactions have on the company’s receivables turnover and average collection period ratios. Prior to the following transactions, Ferman’s receivables turnover was 6 times, and its average collection period was 61 days.
|
|
Receivables Turnover
|
Average Collection Period
|
|
Transaction
|
(6 X)
|
(61 days)
|
|
1.
|
Recorded sales on account $100,000.
|
|
|
|
2.
|
Collected $25,000 owing from customers.
|
|
|
|
3.
|
Wrote off a $2,500 account from a customer as uncollectible (Uses allowance method.)
|
|
|
|
4.
|
Recorded sales returns of $1,500 and credited the customers’ accounts.
|
|
|
|
5.
|
Recorded bad debts expense for the year $7,500, using the allowance method.
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Complete the table, indicating whether each transaction will increase (I), decrease (D), or have no effect (NE) on the ratios.
(b) Angela was reading through the financial statements for some publicly traded companies and noticed that they had recorded a loss on sale of receivables. She would like you to explain why companies sell their receivables.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brown Company closes its books on October 31. On September 30 the Notes Receivable account balance is $20,200. Notes Receivable include the following.
|
Date
|
Maker
|
Face Value
|
Term
|
Maturity Date
|
Interest Rate
|
|
Aug. 16
|
Foran Inc.
|
$ 7,000
|
60 days
|
Oct. 15
|
9%
|
|
Aug. 25
|
Marsh Co.
|
3,000
|
2 months
|
Oct. 25
|
7%
|
|
Sept. 30
|
Flagg Corp.
|
10,200
|
6 months
|
Mar. 30
|
8%
|
Interest is computed using a 360 day year. During October the following transactions were completed.
|
Oct.
|
7
|
Made sales of $4,600 on Brown credit cards.
|
|
12
|
Made sales of $600 on Visa credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.
|
|
15
|
Received payment in full from Foran Inc. on the amount due.
|
|
25
|
Received payment in full from Marsh Co. on amount due.
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the October transactions and the October 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable.
(b) Enter the balances at October 1 in the receivable accounts and post the entries to all of the receivable accounts. (Use T accounts.)
(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at October 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Art World Industries, Inc., was incorporated in 1986 in Delaware, although it is located in Los Angeles. The company prints, publishes, and sells limited edition graphics and reproductive prints in the wholesale market. The companybalance sheet at the end of a recent year showed an allowance for doubtful accounts of $175,477. The allowance was set up against certain Japanese accounts receivable that average more than one year in age. The Japanese acknowledge the amount due, but with the slow economy in Japan, they lack the resources to pay at this time.
Instructions
(a) Which method of accounting for uncollectible accounts does Art World Industries use?
(b) Explain the difference between the direct write off and percentage of receivables methods. Based on Art World disclosure above, what important factor would you have to consider in arriving at appropriate percentages to apply for the percentage of receivables method?
(c) What are the implications for a company receivables management of selling its products internationally?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sue and Sam Fielder own Club Fab. From its inception Club Fab has sold merchandise on either a cash or credit basis, but no credit cards have been accepted. During the past several months, the Fielders have begun to question their credit sales policies. First, they have lost some sales because of their refusal to accept credit cards. Second, representatives of two metropolitan banks have convinced them to accept their national credit cards. One bank, City National Bank, has stated that (1) its credit card fee is 4% and (2) it pays the retailer 96 cents on each $1 of sales within 3 days of receiving the credit card billings. The Fielders decide that they should determine the cost of carrying their own credit sales. From the accounting records of the past 3 years they accumulate these data:
|
2010
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$500,000
|
$600,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Collection agency fees for slow paying customers
|
2,900
|
2,600
|
1,600
|
|
Salary of part time accounts receivable clerk
|
4,400
|
4,400
|
4,400
|
Credit and collection expenses as a percentage of net credit sales are as follows: uncollectible accounts 1.6%, billing and mailing costs .5%, and credit investigation fee on new customers .2%. Sue and Sam also determine that the average accounts receivable balance outstanding during the year is 5% of net credit sales. The Fielders estimate that they could earn an average of 10% annually on cash invested in other business opportunities.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a) Prepare a tabulation for each year showing total credit and collection expenses in dollars and as a percentage of net credit sales.
(b) Determine the net credit and collection expenses in dollars and as a percentage of sales after considering the revenue not earned from other investment opportunities.
(c) Discuss both the financial and nonfinancial factors that are relevant to the decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of Gomez Corporation believes that the company’s yearly allowance for doubtful accounts should be 2% of net credit sales. The president of Gomez Corporation, nervous that the stockholders might expect the company to sustain its 10% growth rate, suggests that the controller increase the allowance for doubtful accounts to 4%. The president thinks that the lower net income, which reflects a 6% growth rate, will be a more sustainable rate for Gomez Corporation.
Instructions
(a) Who are the stakeholders in this case?
(b) Does the president request pose an ethical dilemma for the controller?
(c) Should the controller be concerned with Gomez Corporation growth rate in estimating the allowance? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Credit card usage in the United States is substantial. Many startup companies use credit cards as a way to help meet short term financial needs. The most common forms of debt for startups are use of credit cards and loans from relatives. Suppose that you start up Brothers Sandwich Shop. You invested your savings of $20,000 and borrowed $70,000 from your relatives. Although sales in the first few months are good, you see that you may not have sufficient cash to pay expenses and maintain your inventory at acceptable levels, at least in the short term. You decide you may need to use one or more credit cards to fund the possible cash shortfall.
Instructions
(a) Go to the Web and find two sources that provide insight into how to compare credit card terms.
(b) Develop a list, in descending order of importance, as to what features are most important to you in selecting a credit card for your business.
(c) Examine the features of your present credit card. (If you do not have a credit card, select a likely one online for this exercise.) Given your analysis above, what are the three major disadvantages of your present credit card?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.
Copyright
Intangible assets
Research and development costs
Amortization
Franchise
1. The allocation to expense of the cost of an intangible asset over the asset’s useful life.
2. Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long lived assets that do not possess physical substance.
3. An exclusive right granted by the federal government to reproduce and sell an artistic or published work.
4. A right to sell certain products or services or to use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.
5. Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products. These costs must be expensed as incurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joe Seacat recorded the following transactions during the month of April.
|
April 3
|
Cash
|
3,400
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
3,400
|
|
April 16
|
Rent Expense
|
700
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
700
|
|
April 20
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
300
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
300
|
Post these entries to the Cash T account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash. The beginning balance in cash on April 1 was $1,600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts are taken from the ledger of Angulo Company at December 31, 2012.
|
200
|
Notes Payable
|
$20,000
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
28,000
|
|
157
|
Equipment
|
80,000
|
|
306
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
8,000
|
|
726
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
38,000
|
|
400
|
Service Revenue
|
88,000
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$ 6,000
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
6,000
|
|
631
|
Supplies Expense
|
4,000
|
|
212
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
3,000
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
11,000
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
8,000
|
Prepare a trial balance in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kate Brown recorded the following transactions in a general journal during the month of March.
|
Mar. 4
|
Cash
|
2,280
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
2,280
|
|
15
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
400
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
400
|
|
19
|
Utilities Expense
|
92
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
92
|
Post these entries to the Cash account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash. The beginning balance of cash on March 1 was $600.Objectives
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts come from the ledger of SnowGo Company at December 31, 2012.
|
157
|
Equipment
|
$88,000
|
|
306
|
Owner’s Drawings
|
8,000
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
22,000
|
|
726
|
Salaries and Wages
|
$88,000
|
|
|
Expense
|
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
42,000
|
|
400
|
Service Revenue
|
4,000
|
|
301
|
Owner’s Capital
|
95,000
|
|
212
|
Salaries and Wages
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Payable
|
|
|
200
|
Notes Payable
|
2,000
|
|
722
|
Insurance Expense
|
19,000
|
|
130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,000
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
6,000
|
Prepare a trial balance in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bob Sample opened the Campus Laundromat on September 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.
|
Sept.
|
1
|
Bob invested $20,000 cash in the business.
|
|
|
2
|
The company paid $1,000 cash for store rent for September.
|
|
|
3
|
Purchased washers and dryers for $25,000, paying $10,000 in cash
|
|
|
|
and signing a $15,000, 6 month, 12% note payable.
|
|
|
4
|
Paid $1,200 for a one year accident insurance policy.
|
|
|
10
|
Received a bill from the Daily Newsfor advertising the opening of
|
|
|
|
the laundromat $200.
|
|
|
20
|
Bob withdrew $700 cash for personal use.
|
|
|
30
|
The company determined that cash receipts for laundry services for
|
|
|
|
the month were $6,200.
|
The chart of accounts for the company is the same as that for Pioneer Advertising Agency plus No. 610 Advertising Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the September transactions. (Use J1 for the journal page number.)
(b) Open ledger accounts and post the September transactions.
(c) Prepare a trial balance at September 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions for the Daniel Hudson Company for the month of June are presented below. Identify the accounts to be debited and credited for each transaction.
|
June
|
1
|
Dan Hudson invests $5,000 cash in a small welding business of which he is the sole proprietor.
|
|
|
2
|
Purchases equipment on account for $2,100.
|
|
|
3
|
800 cash is paid to landlord for June rent.
|
|
|
12
|
Bills O. Guillen $300 for welding work done on account.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for the Anthony Adams Company are presented in journal form below. Post the transactions to T accounts. Make one T account for each item and determine each account’s ending balance.
|
Date
|
Account Titles and Explanation
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
May 5
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
4,100
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
4,100
|
|
|
(Billed for services provided)
|
|
|
|
|
12
|
Cash
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
(Received cash in payment of account)
|
|
|
|
|
15
|
Cash
|
|
3,000
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
3,000
|
|
|
(Received cash for services provided)
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Scottsdale Middle School wants to raise money for a new sound system for its auditorium. The primary fund raising event is a dance at which the famous disc jockey Jay Dee will play classic and not so classic dance tunes. Steve Cerra, the music and theater instructor, has been given the responsibility for coordinating the fund raising efforts. This is Steve’s first experience with fund raising. He decides to put the eighth grade choir in charge of the event; he will be a relatively passive observer. Steve had 500 unnumbered tickets printed for the dance. He left the tickets in a box on his desk and told the choir students to take as many tickets as they thought they could sell for $5 each. In order to ensure that no extra tickets would be floating around, he told them to dispose of any unsold tickets. When the students received payment for the tickets, they were to bring the cash back to Steve, and he would put it in a locked box in his desk drawer. Some of the students were responsible for decorating the gymnasium for the dance. Steve gave each of them a key to the money box and told them that if they took money out to purchase materials, they should put a note in the box saying how much they took and what it was used for. After two weeks the money box appeared to be getting full, so Steve asked Emily Polzin to count the money, prepare a deposit slip, and deposit the money in a bank account Steve had opened. he day of the dance, Steve wrote a check from the account to pay Jay Dee. The DJ said, however, that he accepted only cash and did not give receipts. So Steve took $200 out of the cash box and gave it to Jay. At the dance Steve had Lisa Depriest working at the entrance to the gymnasium, collecting tickets from students and selling tickets to those who had not pre purchased them. Steve estimated that 400 students attended the dance.
The following day Steve closed out the bank account, which had $250 in it, and gave that amount plus the $180 in the cash box to Principal Skinner. Principal Skinner seemed surprised that, after generating roughly $2,000 in sales, the dance netted only $430 in cash. Steve did not know how to respond.
Instructions
Identify as many internal control weaknesses as you can in this scenario, and suggest how each could be addressed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 31, 2010, Fenton Company had a cash balance per books of $6,140. The statement from Jackson State Bank on that date showed a balance of $7,695.80. A comparison of the bank statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The bank service charge for July was $25.
2. The bank collected a note receivable of $1,500 for Fenton Company on July 15, plus $30 of interest. The bank made a $10 charge for the collection. Fenton has not accrued any interest on the note.
3. The July 31 receipts of $1,193.30 were not included in the bank deposits for July.
These receipts were deposited by the company in a night deposit vault on July 31.
4. Company check No. 2480 issued to H. Coby, a creditor, for $384 that cleared the bank in July was incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal on July 10 for $348.
5. Checks outstanding on July 31 totaled $1,980.10.
6. On July 31 the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $690 for a check received by the company from P. Figura, a customer, on account.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation as of July 31.
(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shellankamp Company of Canton, Iowa, spreads herbicides and applies liquid fertilizer for local farmers. On May 31, 2010, the company’s cash account per its general ledger showed a balance of $6,738.90. The bank statement from Canton State Bank on that date showed the following balance.
a
|
CANTON STATE BANK
|
|
Checks and Debits
|
Deposits and Credits
|
Daily Balance
|
|
XXX
|
XXX
|
5 31 7,112.00
|
A comparison of the details on the bank statement with the details in the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.
2. Cash sales of $833.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $839.15. The bank credited Shellankamp Company for the correct amount.
3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $276.25, and deposits in transit were $1,880.15.
4. On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to R. Delzer, on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Shellankamp Company for $658.
5. A $2,700 note receivable was collected by the bank for Shellankamp Company on May 31 plus $110 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.
6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Shellman Company to P. Jonet for $360 that was incorrectly charged to Shellankamp Company by the bank.
7. On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $380 for a check issued by Natalie Fong, a customer, to Shellankamp Company on account.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2010.
(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Shellankamp Company at May 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q118. Fogelberg Corporation prepares monthly cash budgets. Here are relevant data from operating budgets for 2010.
|
January
|
February
|
|
Sales
|
$360,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Purchases
|
120,000
|
130,000
|
|
Salaries
|
84,000
|
95,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
72,000
|
75,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
79,000
|
88,000
|
All sales and purchases are on account. Budgeted collections and disbursement data are given below. All other expenses are paid in the month incurred except for administrative expenses, which include $1,000 of depreciation per month. Other data.
1. Collections from customers: January $332,000; February $378,000.
2. Payments for purchases: January $110,000; February $125,000.
3. Other receipts: January: collection of December 31, 2009, notes receivable $15,000;
February: proceeds from sale of securities $6,000
4. Other disbursements: February $12,000 cash dividend
The company’s cash balance on January 1, 2010, is expected to be $52,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $50,000.
Instructions
Prepare a cash budget for January and February.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frederickson Company is a very profitable small business. It has not, however, given much consideration to internal control. For example, in an attempt to keep clerical and office expenses to a minimum, the company has combined the jobs of cashier and bookkeeper. As a result, Kenny Dillon handles all cash receipts, keeps the accounting records, and prepares the monthly bank reconciliations. The balance per the bank statement on October 31, 2010, was $18,380. Outstanding checks were: No. 62 for $126.75, No. 183 for $180, No. 284 for $253.25, No. 862 for $190.71, No. 863 for $226.80, and No. 864 for $165.28. Included with the statement was a credit memorandum of $200 indicating the collection of a note receivable for Frederickson Company by the bank on October 25. This memorandum has not been recorded by Frederickson. The company’s ledger showed one cash account with a balance of $21,892.72. The balance included undeposited cash on hand. Because of the lack of internal controls,
Kenny took for personal use all of the undeposited receipts in excess of $3,795.51. He then prepared the following bank reconciliation in an effort to conceal his theft of cash.
|
Cash balance per books, October 31
|
|
$21,892.72
|
|
Add: Outstanding checks
|
|
|
|
No. 862
|
$190.71
|
|
|
No. 863
|
226.80
|
|
|
No. 864
|
165.28
|
482.79
|
|
|
22,375.51
|
|
Less: Undeposited receipts
|
|
3,795.51
|
|
Unadjusted balance per bank, October 31
|
|
18,580.00
|
|
Less: Bank credit memorandum
|
|
200.00
|
|
Cash balance per bank statement, October 31
|
$18,380.00
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a correct bank reconciliation.
(b) Indicate the three ways that Kenny attempted to conceal the theft and the dollar amount involved in each method.
(c) What principles of internal control were violated in this case?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Celtic Company recently changed its system of internal control over cash disbursements. The system includes the following features.
1. Instead of being unnumbered and manually prepared, all checks must now be prenumbered and written by using the new checkwriter purchased by the company.
2. Before a check can be issued, each invoice must have the approval of Jane Bell, the purchasing agent, and Dick McRae, the receiving department supervisor.
3. Checks must be signed by either Frank Person, the treasurer, or Sara Goss, the assistant treasurer. Before signing a check, the signer is expected to compare the amounts of the check with the amounts on the invoice.
4. After signing a check, the signer stamps the invoice “paid” and inserts within the stamp, the date, check number, and amount of the check. The “paid” invoice is then sent to the accounting department for recording.
5. Blank checks are stored in a safe in the treasurer’s office. The combination to the safe is known by only the treasurer and assistant treasurer. 6. Each month the bank statement is reconciled with the bank balance per books by the assistant chief accountant.
7. All employees who handle or account for cash are bonded.
Instructions
Identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements of Celtic Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The board of trustees of a local church is concerned about the internal accounting controls pertaining to the offering collections made at weekly services. They ask you to serve on a three person audit team with the internal auditor of the university and a CPA who has just joined the church. At a meeting of the audit team and the board of trustees you learn the following.
1. The church’s board of trustees has delegated responsibility for the financial management and audit of the financial records to the finance committee. This group pre pares the annual budget and approves major disbursements but is not involved in collections or recordkeeping. No audit has been made in recent years because the same trusted employee has kept church records and served as financial secretary for 15 years. The church does not carry any fidelity insurance.
2. The collection at the weekly service is taken by a team of ushers who volunteer to serve for 1 month. The ushers take the collection plates to a basement office at the rear of the church. They hand their plates to the head usher and return to the church service. After all plates have been turned in, the head usher counts the cash received. The head usher then places the cash in the church safe along with a notation of the amount counted. The head usher volunteers to serve for 3 months.
3. The next morning the financial secretary opens the safe and recounts the collection. The secretary withholds $150–$200 in cash, depending on the cash expenditures expected for the week, and deposits the remainder of the collections in the bank. To facilitate the deposit, church members who contribute by check are asked to make their checks payable to “Cash.”
4. Each month the financial secretary reconciles the bank statement and submits a copy of the reconciliation to the board of trustees. The reconciliations have rarely contained any bank errors and have never shown any errors per books.
Instructions
(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal accounting control in the handling of collections.
(b) List the improvements in internal control procedures that you plan to make at the next meeting of the audit team for (1) the ushers, (2) the head usher, (3) the financial secretary, and (4) the finance committee.
(c) What church policies should be changed to improve internal control?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 31, 2010, Lombard Company had a cash balance per books of $5,681.50. The bank statement from Community Bank on that date showed a balance of $7,964.60. A comparison of the statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The statement included a debit memo of $70 for the printing of additional company checks.
2. Cash sales of $786.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $796.15. The bank credited Lombard Company for the correct amount.
3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $1,106.25, and deposits in transit were $836.15.
4. On May 18 the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to N. Habben, on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Lombard Company for $658.
5. A $2,500 note receivable was collected by the bank for Lombard Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $30. No interest has been accrued on the note.
6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Lonshek Company to C. Young for $290 that was incorrectly charged to Lombard Company by the bank.
7. On May 31 the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $140 for a check issued by K. Uzong, a customer, to Lombard Company on account.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation as of May 31, 2010.
(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at May 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 1, 2010, Moreland Company had the following account balances.
|
Debits
|
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$18,200
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
2,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
6,100
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,500
|
Common Stock
|
20,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
16,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
44,700
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,600
|
|
$73,800
|
|
Equipment
|
28,000
|
|
|
|
$73,800
|
|
|
During December the company completed the following transactions.
|
Dec.
|
7
|
Received $3,200 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount allowed).
|
|
12
|
Purchased merchandise on account from King Co. $12,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
17
|
Sold merchandise on account $15,000, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $10,000.
|
|
19
|
Paid salaries $2,500.
|
|
22
|
Paid King Co. in full, less discount.
|
|
26
|
Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on December 17.
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the December transactions. (Assume a perpetual inventory system.)
(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions. Use Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries Expense, Sales, Sales Discounts, Income Tax Payable, and Income Tax Expense.
(c) The statement from Lyon County Bank on December 31 showed a balance of $22,164. A comparison of the bank statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The bank collected a note receivable of $2,500 for Moreland Company on December 15.
2. The December 31 receipts of $2,736 were not included in the bank deposits for December. The company deposited these receipts in a night deposit vault on December 31.
3. Checks outstanding on December 31 totaled $1,210.
4. On December 31 the bank statement showed a NSF charge of $800 for a check received by the company from C. Park, a customer, on account. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of December 31 based on the available information.
(d) Journalize the adjusting entries resulting from the bank reconciliation and adjustment data.
(e) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger T accounts.
(f ) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(g) Prepare an income statement for December and a classified balance sheet at December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements of Tootsie Roll are presented in Appendix A of this book, together with an auditor’s report—Report of Independent Auditors.
Instructions
Using the financial statements and reports, answer these questions about Tootsie Roll’s internal controls and cash.
(a) What comments, if any, are made about cash in the report of the independent auditors?
(b) What data about cash and cash equivalents are shown in the consolidated balance sheet (statement of financial condition)?
(c) What activities are identified in the consolidated statement of cash flows as being responsible for the changes in cash during 2007?
(d) How are cash equivalents defined in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements?
(e) Read the section of the report titled “Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting.” Summarize the statements made in that section of the report.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alternative Distributor Corp., a distributor of groceries and related products, is headquartered in Medford, Massachusetts.
During a recent audit, Alternative Distributor Corp. was advised that existing internal controls necessary for the company to develop reliable financial statements were inadequate. The audit report stated that the current system of accounting for sales, receivables, and cash receipts constituted a material weakness. Among other items, the report focused on nontimely deposit of cash receipts, exposing Alternative Distributor to potential loss or misappropriation, excessive past due accounts receivable due to lack of collection efforts, disregard of advantages offered by vendors for prompt payment of invoices, absence of appropriate segregation of duties by personnel consistent with appropriate control objectives, inadequate procedures for applying accounting principles, lack of qualified management personnel, lack of supervision by an outside board of directors, and overall poor recordkeeping.
Instructions
(a) Identify the principles of internal control violated by Alternative Distributor Corporation.
(b) Explain why managers of various functional areas in the company should be concerned about internal controls.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As noted in the chapter, banks charge fees of up to $30 for “bounced” checks— that is, checks that exceed the balance in the account. It has been estimated that processing bounced checks costs a bank roughly $1.50 per check. Thus, the profit margin on bounced checks is very high. Recognizing this, some banks have started to process checks from largest to smallest. By doing this, they maximize the number of checks that bounce if a customer overdraws an account. For example, NationsBank (now Bank of America) projected a $14 million increase in fee revenue as a result of processing largest checks first. In response to criticism, banks have responded that their customers prefer to have large checks processed first, because those tend to be the most important. At the other extreme, some banks will cover their customers’ bounced checks, effectively extending them an interest free loan while their account is overdrawn.
Instructions
Answer each of the following questions.
(a) William Preston had a balance of $1,500 in his checking account at First National
Bank on a day when the bank received the following five checks for processing against his account.
|
Check Number
|
Amount
|
Check Number
|
Amount
|
|
3150
|
$ 35
|
3165
|
$ 550
|
|
3162
|
400
|
3166
|
1,510
|
|
|
3169
|
180
|
Assuming a $30 fee assessed by the bank for each bounced check, how much fee revenue would the bank generate if it processed checks (1) from largest to smallest, (2) from smallest to largest, and (3) in order of check number?
(b) Do you think that processing checks from largest to smallest is an ethical business practice?
(c) In addition to ethical issues, what other issues must a bank consider in deciding whether to process checks from largest to smallest?
(d) If you were managing a bank, what policy would you adopt on bounced checks?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented here are selected transactions related to B. Dylan Corp.
|
Mar.
|
1
|
Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Potter Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
11
|
Received payment in full from Potter Company for balance due.
|
|
12
|
Accepted Juno Company’s $20,000, 6 month, 12% note for balance due on outstanding account receivable.
|
|
13
|
Made B. Dylan Corp. credit card sales for $13,200.
|
|
15
|
Made Visa credit sales totaling $6,700. A 5% service fee is charged by Visa.
|
|
Apr.
|
11
|
Sold accounts receivable of $8,000 to Harcot Factor. Harcot Factor assesses a service charge of 2% of the amount of receivables sold.
|
|
13
|
Received collections of $8,200 on B. Dylan Corp. credit card sales.
|
|
May
|
10
|
Wrote off as uncollectible $16,000 of accounts receivable. (B. Dylan Corp. uses the percentage of receivables basis to estimate bad debts.)
|
|
June
|
30
|
The balance in accounts receivable at the end of the first 6 months is $200,000 and the bad debt percentage is 10%. At June 30 the credit balance in the allowance account prior to adjustment is $3,500. Recorded bad debt expense.
|
|
July
|
16
|
One of the accounts receivable written off in May pays the amount due, $4,000, in full.
|
Instructions
Prepare the journal entries for the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Michael Co. accepts a $1,000, 3 month, 12% promissory note in settlement of an account with Tani Co. The entry to record this transaction is:
|
a
|
Notes Receivable
|
1,030
|
|
|
Accounts
|
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
1,030
|
|
b
|
Notes Receivable
|
1,000
|
|
|
Accounts
|
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
1,000
|
|
c
|
Notes Receivable
|
1,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
1,000
|
|
d
|
Notes Receivable
|
1,020
|
|
|
Accounts
|
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
1,020
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schleis Co. holds Murphy Inc.’s $10,000, 120 day, 9% note. The entry made by Schleis Co. when the note is collected, assuming no interest has previously been accrued, is:
|
a
|
Cash
|
10,300
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
|
10,300
|
|
b
|
Cash
|
10,000
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
c
|
Accounts Receivable
|
10,300
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
300
|
|
d
|
Cash
|
10,300
|
10,000
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
|
300
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute the missing amounts for each of the following notes.
|
Principal
|
Annual Interest Rate
|
Time
|
Total Interest
|
|
(a)
|
9%
|
90 days
|
$ 270
|
|
$30,000
|
8%
|
3 years
|
(d)
|
|
$60,000
|
(b)
|
5 months
|
$2,500
|
|
$50,000
|
11%
|
(c)
|
$2,750
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are three promissory notes. Determine the missing amounts.
|
Date of Note
|
Terms
|
Principal
|
Annual Interest Rate
|
Total Interest
|
|
April 1
|
2 years
|
$700,000
|
8%
|
(a)
|
|
July 2
|
30 days
|
79,000
|
(b)
|
$592.50
|
|
March 7
|
6 months
|
60,000
|
11%
|
(c)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During its first year of operations, Morales Company had credit sales of $3,000,000, of which $600,000 remained uncollected at year end. The credit manager estimates that $18,000 of these receivables will become uncollectible.
(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the estimated uncollectibles. (Assume an unadjusted balance of zero in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.)
(b) Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet for Morales Company, assuming that in addition to the receivables it has cash of $90,000, merchandise inventory of $180,000, and prepaid expenses of $13,000.
(c) Calculate the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period. Assume that average net receivables were $300,000. Explain what these measures tell us.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of the current period, Emler Corp. had balances in Accounts Receivable of $200,000 and in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $9,000 (credit). During the period, it had net credit sales of $800,000 and collections of $763,000. It wrote off as uncollectible accounts receivable of $7,000. However, a $3,000 account previously written off as uncollectible was recovered before the end of the current period. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to total $25,000 at the end of the period.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the entries to record sales and collections during the period.
(b) Prepare the entry to record the write off of uncollectible accounts during the period.
(c) Prepare the entries to record the recovery of the uncollectible account during the period.
(d) Prepare the entry to record bad debts expense for the period.
(e) Determine the ending balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
(f) What is the net realizable value of the receivables at the end of the period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Molina Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $86,000; Credit Sales $780,000; and Sales Returns and Allowances $40,000.
Instructions
(a) If Molina uses the direct write off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Molina determines that Banner’s $900 balance is uncollectible.
(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be 10% of accounts receivable.
(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $500 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be 8% of accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Dee Company owns a foreign subsidiary with 3,600,000 local currency units of property, plant, and equipment before accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2013. Of this amount, 2,400,000 LCU were acquired in 2011, when the rate of exchange was 1.6 LCU to $1, and 1,200,000 LCU were acquired in 2012, when the rate of exchange was 1.8 LCU to $1.
The rate of exchange in effect at December 31, 2013, was 2 LCU to $1. The weighted average of exchange rates in effect during 2013 was 1.92 LCU to $1. The subsidiary’s functional currency is the U.S. dollar. Assuming that the property, plant, and equipment are depreciated using the straight line method over a 10 year period with no salvage value, how much depreciation expense relating to the foreign subsidiary’s property, plant, and equipment should be charged in Dee’s income statement for 2013?
a $180,000
b $187,500
c $200,000
d $216,667
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Clark Company owns a foreign subsidiary that had net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, of 4,800,000 local currency units, which was appropriately translated into $800,000. On October 15, 2011, when the rate of exchange was 5.7 LCU to $1, the foreign subsidiary paid a dividend to Clark of 2,400,000 LCU. The dividend represented the net income of the foreign subsidiary for the six months ended June 30, 2011, during which time the weighted average exchange rate was 5.8 LCU to $1. The rate of exchange in effect at December 31, 2011, was 5.9 LCU to $1. What rate of exchange should be used to translate the dividend for the December 31, 2011, financial statements?
a 5.7 LCU to $1
b 5.8 LCU to $1
c 5.9 LCU to $1
d 6.0 LCU to $1
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Certain balance sheet accounts of a foreign subsidiary of Row at December 31, 2011, have been translated into U.S. dollars as follows:
|
Translated at
|
|
Current Rates
|
Historical Rates
|
|
Note receivable, long term
|
$240,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
85,000
|
80,000
|
|
Patent
|
150,000
|
170,000
|
|
$475,000
|
$450,000
|
The subsidiary’s functional currency is the currency of the country in which it is located. What total amount should be included in Row’s December 31, 2011, consolidated balance sheet for the three accounts?
a $450,000
b $455,000
c $475,000
d $495,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inflation data of a foreign country for three years are as follows:
|
Index
|
Change in Index
|
Annual Rate of Inflation
|
|
January 1, 2010
|
150
|
—
|
|
|
January 1, 2011
|
200
|
50
|
50 / 150 = 33%
|
|
January 1, 2012
|
250
|
50
|
50 / 200 = 25%
|
|
January 1, 2013
|
330
|
80
|
80 / 250 = 32%
|
The cumulative three year inflation rate is:
a 45%
b 90%
c 120%
d 180%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Parent accounting under the equity method
Pla purchased a 40 percent interest in Sor, a foreign company, on January 1, 2011, for $342,000, when Sor’s stockholders’ equity consisted of 3,000,000 LCU capital stock and 1,000,000 LCU retained earnings. Sor’s functional currency is its local currency unit. The exchange rate at this time was $0.15 per LCU. Any excess allocated to patents is to be amortized over 10 years. A summary of changes in the stockholders’ equity of Sor during 2011 (including relevant exchange rates) is as follows:
|
LCUs
|
Exchange Rate
|
U.S. Dollars
|
|
Stockholders’ equity January 1, 2011
|
4,000,000
|
$0.15 C
|
$600,000
|
|
Net income
|
800,000
|
0.14 A
|
112,000
|
|
Dividends
|
(400,000)
|
0.14 C
|
(56,000)
|
|
Equity adjustment
|
|
|
(84,000)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity December 31, 2011
|
4,400,000
|
0.13 C
|
$572,000
|
REQUIRED: Determine the following:
1. Excess patent from Pla’s Investment in Sor on January 1, 2011
2. Excess patent amortization for 2011
3. Unamortized excess patent at December 31, 2011
4. Equity adjustment from patents for 2011
5. Income from Sor for 2011
6. Investment in Sor balance at December 31, 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Translation worksheet, parent accounting
Pet acquired 80 percent of the common stock of Sul for $4,000,000 on January 2, 2011, when the stockholders’ equity of Sul consisted of 5,000,000 euros capital stock and 2,000,000 euros retained earnings. The spot rate for euros on this date was $0.50. Any cost/book value difference attributable to a patent is to be amortized over a 10 year period, and Sul’s functional currency is the euro. Accounts from Sul’s adjusted trial balance in euros at December 31, 2011, are as follows:
|
Debits
|
|
|
Cash
|
€ 1,000,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000,000
|
|
Inventories
|
4,000,000
|
|
Equipment
|
8,000,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
4,000,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
800,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
2,700,000
|
|
Dividends
|
500,000
|
|
€ 23,000,000
|
|
Credits
|
€ 2,400,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
3,600,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
5,000,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
2,000,000
|
|
Retained earnings January 1
|
10,000,000
|
|
Sales
|
€ 23,000,000
|
Relevant exchange rates in U.S. dollars for euros are as follows:
|
Current exchange rate December 31, 2011
|
$0.60
|
|
Average exchange rate 2011
|
0.55
|
|
Exchange rate applicable to dividends
|
0.54
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a translation worksheet for Sul at December 31, 2011.
2. Calculate Pet’s income from Sul for 2011 on the basis of a one line consolidation.
3. Determine the correct balance of Pet’s investment in Sul at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Remeasurement worksheet
Par of Chicago acquired all the outstanding capital stock of Sar of London on January 1, 2011, for $1,200,000. The exchange rate for British pounds was $1.60 and Sar’s stockholders’ equity was £800,000, consisting of £500,000 capital stock and £300,000 retained earnings. The functional currency of Sar is the U.S. dollar. Exchange rates for British pounds for 2011 are as follows:
|
Current rate December 31, 2010
|
$1.60
|
|
Current rate December 31, 2011
|
1.70
|
|
Average exchange rate for 2011
|
1.65
|
|
Exchange rate for dividends
|
1.64
|
Sar’s cost of goods sold consists of £200,000 inventory on hand at January 1, 2011, and purchases of £600,000 less £150,000 inventory on hand at December 31, 2011, that was acquired at an exchange rate of $1.68. All of Sar’s plant assets were on hand when Par acquired Sar, and Sar’s other expenses were paid in cash or relate to accounts payable. Sar’s adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2011, in British pounds is as follows:
|
Debits
|
|
|
Cash
|
£ 50,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
200,000
|
|
Short term note receivable
|
50,000
|
|
Inventories
|
150,000
|
|
Land
|
300,000
|
|
Buildings—net
|
400,000
|
|
Equipment—net
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
650,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
200,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
400,000
|
|
Dividends
|
100,000
|
|
£ 3,000,000
|
|
Credits
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
£ 180,000
|
|
Bonds payable—10%
|
500,000
|
|
Bond interest payable
|
20,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
500,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
300,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,500,000
|
|
£ 3,000,000
|
REQUIRED : Prepare a remeasurement worksheet to restate Sar’s adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2011, in U.S. dollars.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Remeasurement worksheet
Phi, a U.S. firm, acquired 100 percent of Stu’s outstanding stock at book value on January 1, 2011, for $112,000. Stu is a New Zealand company, and its functional currency is the U.S. dollar. The exchange rate for New Zealand dollars (NZ$) was $0.70 when Phi acquired its interest. Stu’s stockholders’ equity on January 1, 2011, consisted of NZ$150,000 capital stock and NZ$10,000 retained earnings. The adjusted trial balance for Stu at December 31, 2011, is as follows:
|
Debits
|
|
|
Cash
|
NZ$ 15,000
|
|
Accounts receivable—net
|
60,000
|
|
Inventories
|
30,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
10,000
|
|
Land
|
45,000
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
120,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
12,000
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
28,000
|
|
Dividends
|
20,000
|
|
NZ$400,000
|
|
Credits
|
NZ$ 22,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
18,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
150,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
10,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
200,000
|
|
Sales
|
NZ$400,000
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Prepaid expenses (supplies) of NZ$18,000 were on hand when Phi acquired Stu. Other operating expenses include NZ$8,000 of these supplies that were used in 2011. The remaining NZ$10,000 of supplies is on hand at year end.
2. The NZ$120,000 cost of sales consists of NZ$50,000 inventory on hand at January 1, 2011, and NZ$100,000 in purchases during the year, less NZ$30,000 ending inventory that was acquired when the exchange rate was $0.66.
3. The NZ$60,000 of equipment consists of NZ$50,000 included in the business combination and NZ$10,000 purchased during 2011, when the exchange rate was $0.68. A depreciation rate of 20 percent is applicable to all equipment for 2011.
4. Exchange rates for 2011 are summarized as follows:
|
Current exchange rate January 1, 2011
|
$0.70
|
|
Exchange rate when new equipment was acquired
|
0.68
|
|
Average exchange rate for 2011
|
0.67
|
|
Exchange rate for December 31, 2011, inventory
|
0.66
|
|
Exchange rate for dividends
|
0.66
|
|
Current exchange rate December 31, 2011
|
0.65
|
REQUIRED: Prepare a worksheet to remeasure the adjusted trial balance of Stu Corporation into U.S. dollars at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Translation worksheet, parent accounting
Pel, a U.S. firm, paid $308,000 for all the common stock of Sar of Israel on January 1, 2011, when the exchange rate for sheqels was $0.35. Sar’s equity on this date consisted of 500,000 sheqels common stock and 300,000 sheqels retained earnings. The $28,000 (80,000 sheqels) excess is attributable to a patent with a 10 year amortization period. Sar’s functional currency is the sheqel. Sar’s adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2011, in sheqels is as follows:
|
Sheqels
|
|
Sheqels
|
|
Debits
|
|
Credits
|
|
|
Cash
|
40,000
|
Accounts payable
|
120,000
|
|
Receivables—net
|
50,000
|
Other liabilities
|
60,000
|
|
Inventories
|
150,000
|
Advance from Pel
|
140,000
|
|
Land
|
160,000
|
Common stock
|
500,000
|
|
Equipment—net
|
300,000
|
Retained earnings 1/1
|
300,000
|
|
Buildings—net
|
500,000
|
Sales
|
600,000
|
|
Expenses
|
400,000
|
|
|
|
Exchange loss (advance)
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
Dividends
|
100,000
|
|
|
|
1,720,000
|
|
1,720,000
|
On January 2, 2011, Pel advanced $42,000 (120,000 sheqels) to Sar. This advance was shortterm, denominated in U.S. dollars, and made when the exchange rate for sheqels was $0.35. In June 2011, Sar paid a 100,000 sheqel dividend when the exchange rate was $0.33. The average and year end exchange rates for sheqels are $0.32 and $0.30, respectively.
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a worksheet to translate Sar’s adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2011, into U.S. dollars.
2. Prepare the necessary journal entries for Pel to account for its investment in Sar for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Translation worksheet, parent accounting, consolidation
San is a 90 percent owned foreign subsidiary of Par, acquired by Par on January 1, 2011, at book value equal to fair value, when the exchange rate for LCUs of San’s home country was $0.24. Sans functional currency is the LCU. Par made a 200,000 LCU loan to San on May 1, 2011, when the exchange rate for LCUs was $0.23. The loan is short term and is denominated at $46,000. Adjusted trial balances of the affiliated companies at year end 2011 are as follows:
|
Par in U.S. Dollars
|
San in LCU
|
|
Debits
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 25,100
|
150,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
90,000
|
180,000
|
|
Short term loan to San
|
46,000
|
—
|
|
Inventories
|
110,000
|
230,000
|
|
Land
|
150,000
|
250,000
|
|
Buildings
|
300,000
|
600,000
|
|
Equipment
|
220,000
|
800,000
|
|
Investment in San (100%)
|
230,000
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
81,000
|
100,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
200,000
|
120,000
|
|
Exchange loss
|
—
|
30,000
|
|
Dividends
|
100,000
|
100,000
|
|
Equity adjustment
|
44,000
|
—
|
|
$1,996,100
|
2,760,000
|
|
Credits
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—buildings
|
$ 120,000
|
300,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
60,000
|
400,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
241,100
|
130,000
|
|
Short term loan from Par
|
—
|
230,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
500,000
|
800,000
|
|
Retained earnings January 1
|
220,000
|
200,000
|
|
Sales
|
800,000
|
700,000
|
|
Income from San
|
55,000
|
—
|
|
$1,996,100
|
2,760,000
|
San paid dividends in September, when the exchange rate was $0.21. The exchange rate for LCUs was $0.20 at December 31, 2011, and the average exchange rate for 2011 was $0.22.
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a worksheet to translate San’s adjusted trial balance into U.S. dollars at December 31, 2011.
2. Prepare the necessary journal entries for Par to account for its investment in San for 2011 under the equity method.
3. Prepare consolidation working papers for Par Corporation and Subsidiary for the year ended December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following control procedures are used in Falk Company for over the counter cash receipts.
1. Cashiers are experienced; thus, they are not bonded.
2. All over the counter receipts are registered by three clerks who share a cash register with a single cash drawer.
3. To minimize the risk of robbery, cash in excess of $100 is stored in an unlocked attaché case in the stock room until it is deposited in the bank.
4. At the end of each day the total receipts are counted by the cashier on duty and reconciled to the cash register total.
5. The company accountant makes the bank deposit and then records the day’s receipts.
Instructions
(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control and identify the control principle that is violated.
(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following control procedures are used in Karina’s Boutique Shoppe for cash disbursements.
1. Each week Karina leaves 100 company checks in an unmarked envelope on a shelf behind the cash register.
2. The store manager personally approves all payments before signing and issuing checks.
3. The company checks are unnumbered.
4. After payment, bills are “filed” in a paid invoice folder.
5. The company accountant prepares the bank reconciliation and reports any discrepancies to the owner.
Instructions
(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control and identify the internal control principle that is violated.
(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Juan Ortiz is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31. Juan’s reconciliation is shown here.
|
Cash balance per bank
|
$3,660.20
|
|
Add: NSF check
|
470.00
|
|
Less: Bank service charge
|
25.00
|
|
Adjusted balance per bank
|
$4,105.20
|
|
Cash balance per books
|
$3,975.20
|
|
Less: Deposits in transit
|
590.00
|
|
Add: Outstanding checks
|
770.00
|
|
Adjusted balance per books
|
$4,155.20
|
Instructions
(a) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per bank?
(b) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per books?
(c) Prepare the adjusting journal entries necessary to determine the adjusted cash balance per books.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At April 30 the bank reconciliation of Guardado Company shows three outstanding checks: No. 254 $650, No. 255 $700, and No. 257 $410. The May bank statement and the May cash payments journal are given here.
|
Bank Statement Checks Paid
|
|
|
Cash Payments Journal Checks Issued
|
|
|
Date
|
Check No.
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Check No.
|
Amount
|
|
5 4
|
254
|
$650
|
5 2
|
258
|
$159
|
|
5 2
|
257
|
410
|
5 5
|
259
|
275
|
|
5 17
|
258
|
159
|
5 10
|
260
|
925
|
|
5 12
|
259
|
275
|
5 15
|
261
|
500
|
|
5 20
|
261
|
500
|
5 22
|
262
|
750
|
|
5 29
|
263
|
480
|
5 24
|
263
|
480
|
|
5 30
|
262
|
750
|
5 29
|
264
|
360
|
Instructions
list the outstanding checks at May 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kane Inc.’s bank statement from Western Bank at August 31, 2010, gives the following information.
|
Balance, August 1
|
$16,400
|
Bank debit memorandum:
|
|
|
August deposits
|
73,000
|
Safety deposit box fee
|
$ 25
|
|
Checks cleared in August
|
68,678
|
Service charge
|
50
|
|
Bank credit memorandum:
|
|
Balance, August 31
|
20,692
|
|
Interest earned
|
45
|
|
|
A summary of the Cash account in the ledger for August shows the following: balance, August 1, $16,900; receipts $77,000; disbursements $73,570; and balance, August 31, $20,330. Analysis reveals that the only reconciling items on the July 31 bank reconciliation were a deposit in transit for $5,000 and outstanding checks of $4,500. In addition, you determine that there was an error involving a company check drawn in August: A check for $400 to a creditor on account that cleared the bank in August was journalized and posted for $40.
Instructions
(a) Determine deposits in transit.
(b) Determine outstanding checks.
(c) Prepare a bank reconciliation at August 31.
(d) Journalize the adjusting entry to be made by Kane Inc. at August 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A new accountant at Nicholsen Inc. is trying to identify which of the amounts shown on page 368 should be reported as the current asset “Cash and cash equivalents” in the year end balance sheet, as of April 30, 2010.
1. $60 of currency and coin in a locked box used for incidental cash transactions.
2. A $10,000 U.S. Treasury bill, due May 31, 2010.
3. $300 of April dated checks that Nicholson has received from customers but not yet deposited.
4. An $85 check received from a customer in payment of its April account, but postdated to May 1.
5. $2,500 in the company’s checking account.
6. $4,500 in its savings account.
7. $75 of prepaid postage in its postage meter.
8. A $25 IOU from the company receptionist.
Instructions
(a) What balance should Nicholsen report as its “Cash and cash equivalents” balance at April 30, 2010?
(b) In what account(s) and in what financial statement(s) should the items not included in “Cash and cash equivalents” be reported?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adams, Loomis, and Vogt, three law students who have joined together to open a law practice, are struggling to manage their cash flow. They haven’t yet built up sufficient clientele and revenues to support their legal practice’s ongoing costs. Initial costs, such as advertising, renovations to their premises, and the like, all result in outgoing cash flow at a time when little is coming in. Adams, Loomis, and Vogt haven’t had time to establish a billing system since most of their clients’ cases haven’t yet reached the courts, and the lawyers didn’t think it would be right to bill them until “results were achieved.” Unfortunately, Adams, Loomis, and Vogt’s suppliers don’t feel the same way. Their suppliers expect them to pay their accounts payable within a few days of receiving their bills. So far, there hasn’t even been enough money to pay the three lawyers, and they are not sure how long they can keep practicing law without getting some money into their pockets.
Instructions
Can you provide any suggestions for Adams, Loomis, and Vogt to improve their cash management practices?
Mayfield Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2010. These are the relevant monthly budget data for the first two months of 2010.
1. Collections from customers: January $75,000, February $146,000
2. Payments to suppliers: January $40,000, February $75,000
3. Wages: January $30,000, February $40,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred.
4. Administrative expenses: January $21,000, February $31,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other costs are paid as incurred.
5. Selling expenses: January $15,000, February $20,000. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred.
6. Sales of short term investments in January are expected to realize $12,000 in cash.
Mayfield has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000.
The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.
Instructions
Prepare a cash budget for January and February.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mayfield Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2010. These are the relevant monthly budget data for the first two months of 2010.
1. Collections from customers: January $75,000, February $146,000
2. Payments to suppliers: January $40,000, February $75,000
3. Wages: January $30,000, February $40,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred.
4. Administrative expenses: January $21,000, February $31,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other costs are paid as incurred.
5. Selling expenses: January $15,000, February $20,000. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred.
6. Sales of short term investments in January are expected to realize $12,000 in cash.
Mayfield has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000.
The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.
Instructions
Prepare a cash budget for January and February.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Otto Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. These transactions occurred during the month of August.
|
Aug.
|
1
|
Established the petty cash fund by writing a check on Central Bank for $200.
|
|
15
|
Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $175. On this date, the fund consisted of $25 in cash and these petty cash receipts: freight out $74.40, entertainment expense $41, postage expense $33.70 and miscellaneous expense $27.50.
|
|
16
|
Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $400 by writing a check for $200.
|
|
31
|
Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $283. On this date, the fund consisted of $117 in cash and these petty cash receipts: postage expense $145, entertainment expense $90.60, and freight out $46.40.
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the petty cash transactions.
(b) Post to the Petty Cash account.
(c) What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cherokee Theater is in the Federal Mall. A cashier’s booth is located near the entrance to the theater. Two cashiers are employed. One works from 1:00 to 5:00 P.M., the other from 5:00 to 9:00 P.M. Each cashier is bonded. The cashiers receive cash from customers and operate a machine that ejects serially numbered tickets. The rolls of tickets are inserted and locked into the machine by the theater manager at the beginning of each cashier’s shift. After purchasing a ticket, the customer takes the ticket to a doorperson stationed at the entrance of the theater lobby some 60 feet from the cashier’s booth. The doorperson tears the ticket in half, admits the customer, and returns the ticket stub to the customer. The other half of the ticket is dropped into a locked box by the doorperson. At the end of each cashier’s shift, the theater manager removes the ticket rolls from the machine and makes a cash count. The cash count sheet is initialed by the cashier. At the end of the day, the manager deposits the receipts in total in a bank night deposit vault located in the mall. In addition, the manager sends copies of the deposit slip and the initialed
cash count sheets to the theater company treasurer for verification and to the company’s accounting department. Receipts from the first shift are stored in a safe located in the manager’s office.
Instructions
(a) Identify the internal control principles and their application to the cash receipts transactions of Cherokee Theater.
(b) If the doorperson and cashier decided to collaborate to misappropriate cash, what actions might they take?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various foreign currency–denominated transactions settled in subsequent year
Monroe Corporation imports merchandise from some Canadian companies and exports its own products to other Canadian companies. The unadjusted accounts denominated in Canadian dollars at December 31, 2011, are as follows:
|
Account receivable from the sale of merchandise on December 16 to Carver Corporation. Billing is for 150,000 Canadian dollars and due January 15, 2012
|
$103,500
|
|
Account payable to Forest Corporation for merchandise received December 2 and payable on January 30, 2012. Billing is for 275,000 Canadian dollars.
|
$195,250
|
Exchange rates on selected dates are as follows:
|
December 31, 2011
|
$0.68
|
|
January 15, 2012
|
$0.675
|
|
January 30, 2012
|
$0.685
|
REQUIRED
1. Determine the net exchange gain or loss from the two transactions that will be included in Monroe’s income statement for 2011.
2. Determine the exchange gain or loss from settlement of the two transactions that will be included in Monroe’s 2012 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various foreign currency–denominated transactions settled in subsequent year
American TV Corporation had two foreign currency transactions during December 2011, as follows:
|
December 12
|
Purchased electronic parts from Toko Company of Japan at an invoice price of 50,000,000 yen when the spot rate for yen was $0.00750. Payment is due on January 11, 2012.
|
|
December 15
|
Sold television sets to British Products Ltd. for 40,000 pounds when the spot rate for British pounds was $1.65. The invoice is denominated in pounds and is due on January 14, 2012.
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare journal entries to record the foregoing transactions.
2. Prepare journal entries to adjust the accounts of American TV Corporation at December 31, 2011, if the current exchange rates are $0.00760 and $1.60 for Japanese yen and British pounds, respectively.
3. Prepare journal entries to record payments to Toko Company on January 11, 2012, when the spot rate for Japanese yen is $0.00765, and to record receipt from British Products Ltd. on January 14, 2012, when the spot rate for British pounds is $1.63.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for speculative hedges
Martin Corporation, a U.S. import–export firm, enters into a forward contract on October 2, 2011, to speculate in euros. The contract requires Martin to deliver 1,000,000 euros to the exchange broker on March 31, 2012. Quoted exchange rates for euros are as follows:
|
10/2/11
|
12/31/11
|
3/31/12
|
|
Spot rate
|
$0.6590
|
$0.6500
|
$0.6550
|
|
30 day forward rate
|
0.6580
|
0.6450
|
0.6500
|
|
90 day forward rate
|
0.6560
|
0.6410
|
0.6460
|
|
180 day forward rate
|
0.6530
|
0.6360
|
0.6400
|
REQUIRED: Prepare the journal entries on Martin’s books to account for the speculation throughout the life of the contract.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foreign currency–denominated receivables and payables—multiple years
Shelton Corporation of New York is an international dealer in jewelry and engages in numerous import and export activities. Shelton’s receivables and payables in foreign currency units before year end adjustments on December 31, 2011, are summarized as follows:
|
Foreign Currency
|
Currency Units
|
Rate on Date of Transaction
|
Per Books in U.S. Dollars
|
Current Rate on 12/31/11
|
|
Accounts Receivable Denominated in Foreign Currency
|
|
British pounds
|
100,000
|
$1.6500
|
$165,000
|
$1.6600
|
|
Euros
|
250,000
|
0.6600
|
165,000
|
0.6700
|
|
Swedish krona
|
160,000
|
0.6600
|
105,600
|
0.6400
|
|
Japanese yen
|
2,000,000
|
0.0075
|
15,000
|
0.0076
|
|
Accounts Payable Denominated in Foreign Currency
|
$450,600
|
|
|
Canadian dollars
|
150,000
|
$0.7000
|
$105,000
|
$0.6900
|
|
Mexican pesos
|
220,000
|
0.1300
|
28,600
|
0.1350
|
|
Japanese yen
|
4,500,000
|
0.0074
|
33,300
|
0.0076
|
|
|
|
$166,900
|
|
REQUIRED
1. Determine the amount at which the receivables and payables should be reported in Shelton’s December 31, 2011, balance sheet.
2. Calculate individual gains and losses on each of the receivables and payables and the net exchange gain that should appear in Shelton’s 2011 income statement.
3. Assume that Shelton wants to hedge its exposure to amounts denominated in euros. Should it buy or sell euros for future delivery? In what amount or amounts?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hedge of an anticipated purchase
On December 1, 2011, Jol Company enters into a 90 day forward contract with a rice speculator to purchase 500 tons of rice at $1,000 per ton. Jol enters into this contract in order to hedge an anticipated rice purchase. The contract is to be settled net. The spot price of rice at December 1, 2011, is $950.
On December 31, 2011, the forward rate is $980 per ton. The contract is settled and rice is purchased on February 28, 2012. The spot and forward rates when the contract is settled are $1,005. Assume that Jol purchases 500 tons of rice on the date of the forward contract’s expiration. Assume that this contract has been documented to be an effective hedge. Also assume an appropriate interest rate is 6 percent.
1. Prepare the required journal entries to account for this hedge situation and the subsequent rice purchase on:
1. December 1, 2011
2. December 31, 2011
3. The settlement date
2. Assume that the rice is subsequently sold by Jol on June 1, 2012, for $1,200 per ton. What journal entries will Jol make on that date?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Firm sales commitment
Brk signs a firm sales commitment with Riv. The contract is to sell 100,000 widgets deliverable in three months, on January 31, 2012, at the prevailing market price of widgets at that date. On November 1, 2011, the current sales price of widgets is $5 each. Brk is concerned that the sales price could decrease by the time the delivery is to occur. On November 1, 2011, Brk contracts with Lyn to buy 100,000 widgets deliverable on January 31, 2012, for $5 each. The forward contract is to be settled net. Assume that 6 percent is a reasonable annual discount rate.
Prepare the journal entries to record the firm sales commitment and forward contract on the following dates:
1. November 1, 2011, assuming a sales price of S5.00 per widget
2. December 31, 2011, assuming a sales price of $4.50 per widget
3. January 31, 2012, assuming a sales price of $6 per widget
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various foreign currency hedge situations
On December 12, 2011, Car entered into three forward exchange contracts, each to purchase 100,000 Canadian dollars in 90 days. Assume a 12 percent interest rate. The relevant exchange rates are as follows:
|
Spot Rate
|
Forward Rate (for March 12, 2012)
|
|
December 12, 2011
|
$0.88
|
$0.90
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
0.98
|
0.93
|
1. Car entered into the first forward contract to hedge a purchase of inventory in November 2011, payable in March 2012. At December 31, 2011, what amount of foreign currency transaction gain should Car include in income from this forward contract? Explain.
2. Car entered into the second forward contract to hedge a commitment to purchase equipment being manufactured to Car’s specifications. At December 31, 2011, what amount of net gain or loss on foreign currency transactions should Car include in income from this forward contract? Explain.
3. Car entered into a third forward contract for speculation. At December 31, 2011, what amount of foreign currency transaction gain should Car include in income from this forward contract? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Firm purchase commitment, foreign currency hedge
On April 1, 2011, Win of Canada ordered customized fittings from Ace, a U.S. firm, to be delivered on May 31, 2011, at a price of 50,000 Canadian dollars. The spot rate for Canadian dollars on April 1, 2011, was $0.71. Also on April 1, in order to fix the sale price of the fittings at $35,250, Ace entered into a 60 day forward contract with the exchange broker to hedge the Win contract. This derivative met the conditions set forth in ASC Topic 815 for a hedge of a foreign currency commitment. Exchange rates for Canadian dollars are as follows:
|
April 1
|
May 31
|
|
Spot rate
|
$0.710
|
$0.725
|
|
60 day forward rate
|
0.705
|
0.715
|
REQUIRED: Prepare all journal entries on Ace’s books to account for the commitment and related events on April 1 and May 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Firm purchase commitment, foreign currency hedge
On November 2, 2011, Baz, a U.S. retailer, ordered merchandise from Mat of Japan. The merchandise is to be delivered to Baz on January 30, 2012, at a price of 1,000,000 yen. Also on November 2, Import Baz hedged the foreign currency commitment with Mat by contracting with its exchange broker to buy 1,000,000 yen for delivery on January 30, 2012. Exchange rates for yen are:
|
11/2/11
|
12/31/11
|
1/30/12
|
|
Spot rate
|
$0.0075
|
$0.0076
|
$0.0078
|
|
30 day forward rate
|
0.0076
|
0.0078
|
0.0079
|
|
90 day forward rate
|
0.0078
|
0.0079
|
0.0080
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare the entry (or entries) on Baz’s books on November 2, 2011.
2. Prepare the adjusting entry on December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flow hedge, futures contract
NGW, a consumer gas provider, estimates a rather cold winter. As a result it decides to enter into a futures contract on the NYMEX for natural gas on November 2, 2011. The trading unit is 10,000 million British thermal units (MMBtu). The three month futures contract rate is $7.00 per MMBtu, so each contract will cost NGW $70,000. In addition, the exchange requires a $5,000 deposit on each contract. NGW enters into 20 such contracts.
REQUIRED
1. Why is this futures contract likely to be considered an effective hedge and therefore qualified for hedge accounting?
2. Why would this transaction be accounted for as a cash flow hedge?
3. Assume that the December 31, 2011, futures contract rate is $6.75 for delivery on February 2, 2012, and the spot rate on February 2, 2012, is $6.85. Assume that NGW sells all of the gas on February 3, 2012, for $8.00 per MMBtu. Prepare all the necessary journal entries from November 2, 2011, through February 3, 2012, to account for this hedge situation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fair value hedge, option
Ins makes sophisticated medical equipment. A key component of the equipment is Grade A silver. On May 1, 2011, Ins enters into a firm purchase agreement to buy 1,200,000 troy ounces (equal to 100,000 pounds) of Grade A silver from Sil, for delivery on February 1, 2012, at the market price on that date. To hedge against volatility in price, Ins also enters into an option contract with Cur to put 1,200,000 troy ounces on February 1, 2012, for $10 per troy ounce, the market price on May 1, 2011. If the market price of silver is below $10 per troy ounce on May 1, then Ins will let the option expire. If it is above $10 per troy ounce, then it will exercise the option. The option is to be settled net. Com will pay Instrument Works the difference between the market price and the exercise price. The option costs Ins $1,000 initially. Assume that a 6 percent annual incremental borrowing rate is reasonable.
1. Why would you expect this situation to qualify for hedge accounting?
2. Why should this hedge be accounted for as a fair value hedge instead of as a cash flow hedge?
3. What entries should be made on May 1, 2011, to account for the firm commitment and the option?
4. Assume that the market price for Grade A silver is $9 per troy ounce on December 31, 2011. What are the required entries?
5. Assume that the market price of Grade A silver is $9.50 per troy ounce on February 1, 2012, when Ins receives the silver from Silver Refiners. Prepare the appropriate journal entries on February 1, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flow hedges, interest rate swap
On January 1, 2011, Cam borrows $400,000 from Ven. The five year term note is a variable rate one in which the 2011 interest rate is determined to be 8 percent, the LIBOR rate at January 1, 2011, + 2%. Subsequent years’ interest rates are determined in a similar manner, with the rate set for a particular year equal to the beginning of the year LIBOR rate + 2%. Interest payments are due on December 31 each year and are computed assuming annual compounding. Also on January 1, 2011, Cam decides to enter into a pay fixed, receive variable interest rate swap arrangement with Gra. Cam will pay 8 percent.
Assume that the LIBOR rate on December 31, 2011, is 5 percent.
1. Why is this considered a cash flow hedge instead of a fair value hedge?
2. Do you think that this hedge would be considered effective and therefore would qualify for hedge accounting?
3. Assuming that this hedge relationship qualifies for hedge accounting:
a. Determine the estimated fair value of the hedge at December 31, 2011. Recall that the hedge contract is in effect for the 2012, 2013, 2014, and 2015 interest payments.
b. Prepare the entry at December 31, 2011, to account for this cash flow hedge as well as the December 31, 2011, interest payment.
4. Assuming that the LIBOR rate is 5.5% on December 31, 2012, prepare all the necessary entries to account for the interest rate swap at December 31, 2012, including the 2012 interest payment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fair value hedge, interest rate swap
Assume that instead of initially signing a variable rate loan, Cam receives a fixed rate of 8 percent on the loan on January 1, 2011. Instead of entering into a payfixed, receive variable interest rate swap with Gra, Cam enters into a pay variable, receive fixed interest rate swap. The variable portion of the swap formula is LIBOR rate + 2%, determined at the end of the year to set the rate for the following year. The first year that the swap will be in effect is for interest payments in 2012. Assume that the LIBOR rate on December 31, 2011, is 7 percent.
1. Why is this considered a fair value hedge instead of a cash flow hedge?
2. Do you think that this hedge would be considered effective and therefore would qualify for hedge accounting?
3. Assuming that this hedge relationship qualifies for hedge accounting:
a. Determine the estimated fair value of the hedge at December 31, 2011. Recall that the hedge contract is in effect for the 2012, 2013, 2014, and 2015 interest payments.
b. Prepare the entry at December 31, 2011, to account for this fair value hedge as well as the December 31, 2011, interest payment.
4. Assuming that the LIBOR rate is 6.5% on December 31, 2012, prepare all the necessary entries to account for the interest rate swap at December 31, 2012, including the 2012 interest payment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foreign currency hedge, firm purchase commitment
On October 2, 2011, Flx, a U.S. company, entered into a forward contract to purchase 50,000 euros for delivery in 180 days at a forward rate of $0.6350. The forward contract is a derivative instrument hedging an identifiable foreign currency commitment as defined in ASC Topic 815. The spot rate for euros on this date was $0.6250. Spot rates and forward rates for euros on December 31, 2011, and March 31, 2012, are as follows:
|
December 31, 2011
|
March 31, 2012
|
|
Spot rate
|
$0.6390
|
$0.6560
|
|
Forward rates
|
|
|
|
30 day futures
|
0.6410
|
0.6575
|
|
90 day futures
|
0.6420
|
0.6615
|
|
180 day futures
|
0.6450
|
0.6680
|
REQUIRED: Prepare journal entries to:
1. Record the forward contract on October 2, 2011
2. Adjust the accounts at December 31, 2011
3. Account for settlement of the forward contract and record and adjust the related cash purchase on March 31, 2012
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foreign currency hedge, existing payable
Mar, a U.S. firm, purchased equipment for 400,000 British pounds from Thc on December 16, 2011. The terms were n/30, payable in British pounds. On December 16, 2011, Mar also entered into a 30 day forward contract to hedge the account payable to Thc. Exchange rates for British pounds on selected dates are as follows:
|
12/16/11
|
12/31/11
|
1/15/12
|
|
Spot rate
|
$1.67
|
$1.65
|
$1.64
|
|
Forward rate for 1/15/12
|
1.68
|
1.66
|
1.64
|
REQUIRED
1. Assuming this situation qualifies as a cash flow hedge, prepare journal entries on December 16, 2011, to record Mar’s purchase and the forward contract. A 6% interest rate is appropriate.
2. Prepare year end journal entries for Mar as needed on December 31, 2011.
3. Prepare journal entries for Mar’s settlement of its accounts payable and the forward contract on January 15, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition date effects
On January 1, 2011, Pai, a U.S. firm, purchases all the outstanding capital stock of Sta, a British firm, for $990,000, when the exchange rate for British pounds is $1.65. The book values of Sta’s assets and liabilities are equal to fair values on this date, except for land that has a fair value of £200,000 and equipment with a fair value of £100,000. Summarized balance sheet information for Pai in U.S. dollars and for Sta in pounds just before the business combination is as follows:
|
Pai
|
Sta
|
|
Current assets
|
$3,000,000
|
£100,000
|
|
Land
|
800,000
|
100,000
|
|
Buildings—net
|
1,200,000
|
250,000
|
|
Equipment—net
|
1,000,000
|
50,000
|
|
$6,000,000
|
£500,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 600,000
|
£ 50,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
1,000,000
|
150,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
3,000,000
|
200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,400,000
|
100,000
|
|
$6,000,000
|
£500,000
|
REQUIRED: Prepare a consolidated balance sheet for Pai and Subsidiary at January 1, 2011, immediately after the business combination.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition—Excess allocation and amortization effect
On January 1, 2011, Pan acquired all the stock of Sim of Belgium for $1,200,000, when Sim had 20,000,000 euros
(Eu) capital stock and Eu 15,000,000 retained earnings. Sim’s net assets were fairly valued on this date and any cost/book value differential is due to a patent with a 10 year amortization period. Sim’s functional currency is the euro. The exchange rates for euros for 2011 were as follows:
|
January 1, 2011
|
$.030
|
|
Average for 2011
|
$.032
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
$.035
|
REQUIRED
1. Calculate the patent value from the business combination on January 1, 2011.
2. Determine patent amortization in U.S. dollars for 2011.
3. Prepare a journal entry on Pan’s books to record the patent amortization for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition—Excess allocation and amortization effect
Pal acquired all the stock of Sta of Britain on January 1, 2011, for $163,800, when Sta had capital stock of £60,000 and retained earnings of £30,000. Sta’s assets and liabilities were fairly valued, except for equipment with a three year life that was undervalued by £6,000. Any remaining excess is due to a patent with a useful life of 10 years. Sta’s functional currency is the pound. Exchange rates for British pounds are as follows:
|
January 1, 2011
|
$1.66
|
|
Average for the year 2011
|
1.65
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
1.64
|
REQUIRED
1. Determine the unrealized translation gain or loss at December 31, 2011, related to the cost/book value differential assigned to equipment.
2. Determine the unrealized translation gain or loss at December 31, 2011, related to the patent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition—excess allocation
Pac of the United States purchased all the outstanding stock of Swi of Switzerland for $1,350,000 cash on January 1, 2011. The book values of Swi’s assets and liabilities were equal to fair values on this date except for land, which was valued at 1,000,000 euros. Summarized balance sheet information in euros at January 1, 2011, is as follows:
|
Current assets
|
Eu 800,000
|
Current liabilities
|
Eu 400,000
|
|
Land
|
600,000
|
Bonds payable
|
500,000
|
|
Buildings—net
|
400,000
|
Capital stock
|
1,000,000
|
|
Equipment—net
|
500,000
|
Retained earnings
|
400,000
|
|
Eu 2,300,000
|
|
Eu 2,300,000
|
The functional currency of Swi is the euro. Exchange rates for euros for 2011 are as follows:
|
Spot rate January 1, 2011
|
$0.75
|
|
Average rate 2011
|
0.76
|
|
Current rate December 31, 2011
|
0.77
|
REQUIRED: Determine the unrealized translation gain or loss at December 31, 2011, relating to the excess allocated to the undervalued land.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition excess allocation effects, specific account translation and remeasurement
Fay had a realized foreign exchange loss of $15,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, and must also determine whether the following items will require year end adjustment: Fay had an $8,000 equity adjustment resulting from the translation of the accounts of its wholly owned foreign subsidiary for the year ended December 31, 2011. Fay had an account payable to an unrelated foreign supplier payable in the supplier’s local currency. The U.S. dollar equivalent of the payable was $64,000 on the October 31, 2011, invoice date, and it was $60,000 on
December 31, 2011. The invoice is payable on January 30, 2012.
In Fay’s 2011 consolidated income statement, what amount should be included as foreign exchange loss?
a $11,000
b $15,000
c $19,000
d $23,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reconstruct workpaper (separate and consolidated income statements)
Pen Corporation acquired a 90 percent interest in Soo Corporation in a taxable transaction on January 1, 2011, for $900,000, when Soo had $500,000 capital stock and $400,000 retained earnings. The $90,000 excess cost over book value is due to goodwill. Pen and Soo are an affiliated group for tax purposes.
During 2011, Pen sold land to Soo at a $20,000 profit. Soo still holds the land. Soo paid dividends of $50,000. A flat 34 percent tax rate applies to Pen and Soo. Income statements for Pen and Soo, and a consolidated income statement for Pen and Subsidiary, are summarized as follows:
|
Pen
|
Soo
|
Consolidated
|
|
Sales
|
$ 800,000
|
$200,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Gain on sale of land
|
20,000
|
—
|
—
|
|
Income from Soo
|
36,430
|
—
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(400,000)
|
(75,000)
|
(475,000)
|
|
Other expenses
|
(150,000)
|
(30,000)
|
(180,000)
|
|
Income tax expense
|
(85,000)
|
(32,300)
|
(117,300)
|
|
Noncontrolling interest share
|
—
|
—
|
(6,270)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 221,430
|
$ 62,700
|
$ 221,430
|
REQUIRED: Reconstruct all the workpaper entries needed to consolidate the financial statements of Pen Corporation and Subsidiary for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocate fair value/book value differentials in a taxable purchase combination
Par Corporation acquired all the stock of Sad Corporation on January 1, 2011, for $280,000 cash, when the book values and fair values of Sad’s assets and liabilities were as follows (in thousands):
|
Book Values (Tax Bases)
|
Fair Values
|
|
Current assets
|
$100
|
$100
|
|
Land
|
20
|
60
|
|
Buildings—net
|
80
|
110
|
|
Equipment—net
|
60
|
70
|
|
Assets
|
$260
|
$340
|
|
Liabilities
|
$ 90
|
$ 90
|
|
Capital stock
|
150
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
20
|
|
|
Equities
|
$260
|
|
Sad’s buildings have a remaining life of 10 years, and the equipment has a useful life of 2 years from the date of the combination. During 2011, Sad had income of $50,000 and paid dividends of $20,000. Par and Sad are subject to a 35 percent tax rate.
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a schedule to allocate the excess fair value over book value to Sad’s assets, liabilities, deferred taxes, and goodwill at January 1, 2011, assuming the purchase was a taxable transaction.
2. Prepare a schedule to allocate the excess fair value over book value to Sad’s assets, liabilities, deferred taxes, and goodwill at January 1, 2011, assuming the purchase was a tax free reorganization.
3. Compute Par’s income from Sad for 2011 under both options.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated income statement (separate returns and intercompany equipment)
The pretax operating incomes of Pop Corporation and Son Corporation, its 70 percent owned subsidiary, for 2011 are as follows (in thousands):
|
Pop
|
Son
|
|
Sales
|
$8,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Gain on equipment
|
500
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(5,000)
|
(2,000)
|
|
Other expenses
|
(2,100)
|
(1,200)
|
|
Pretax income (excluding Pop’s
|
|
|
|
income from Son)
|
$1,400
|
$ 800
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Pop received $280,000 dividends from Son during 2011.
2. Goodwill from Pop’s investment in Son is not amortized.
3. Pop sold equipment to Son at a gain of $500,000 on January 1, 2011. Son is depreciating the equipment at a rate of 20% per year.
4. A flat 34% tax rate is applicable.
5. Pop provides for income taxes on undistributed income from Son.
REQUIRED
1. Determine the separate income tax expenses for Pop and Son.
2. Determine Pop’s income from Son on an equity basis.
3. Prepare a consolidated income statement for Pop Corporation and Subsidiary for the year ended December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations (separate tax returns with goodwill, downstream inventory sales, and upstream land sale)
On January 3, 2011, Pix Corporation purchased a 90% interest in Sal Corporation at a price $120,000 in excess of book value and fair value. The excess is goodwill. During 2011, Pix sold inventory items to Sal for $100,000, and $15,000 in profit from the sale remained unrealized at year end. Sal sold land to Pix during the year at a gain of $30,000.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. The companies are an affiliated group for tax purposes.
2. Sal declared and paid dividends of $100,000 in 2011.
3. Pix and Sal file separate income tax returns, and a 34% tax rate is applicable to both companies.
4. Pix uses a correct equity method to account for its investment in Sal.
5. Pretax accounting incomes, excluding Pix’s income from Sal, are as follows (in thousands):
|
Pix
|
Sal
|
|
Sales
|
$ 3,815
|
$ 2,000
|
|
Gain on land
|
—
|
30
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(2,200)
|
(1,200)
|
|
Other expenses
|
(1,000)
|
(400)
|
|
Pretax accounting income
|
$ 615
|
$ 430
|
REQUIRED: Calculate the following:
1. Sal’s net income
2. Pix’s income from Sal
3. Pix’s net income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations (parent company and entity theories)
Balance sheet information of Pod and Sad Corporations at December 31, 2011, is summarized as follows (in thousands):
|
Pod Book Value
|
Sad Book Value
|
Sad Fair Value
|
|
Current assets
|
$ 520
|
$ 50
|
$ 90
|
|
Plant assets—net
|
480
|
250
|
360
|
|
$1,000
|
$300
|
$450
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 80
|
$ 40
|
$ 50
|
|
Capital stock
|
800
|
200
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
120
|
60
|
|
|
$1,000
|
$300
|
|
On January 2, 2011, Pod purchases 80 percent of Sad’s outstanding shares for $500,000 cash.
REQUIRED
1. Determine goodwill from the acquisition under (a) parent company theory and (b) entity theory.
2. Determine noncontrolling interest at January 2, 2011, under (a) parent company theory and (b) entity theory.
3. Determine the amount of total assets that would appear on a consolidated balance sheet prepared at January 2, 2011, under (a) parent company theory and (b) entity theory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations under parent company, entity, and traditional theories (mid year acquisition)
Sal Corporation’s recorded assets and liabilities are equal to their fair values on July 1, 2011, when Pub Corporation purchases 72,000 shares of Sal common stock for $1,800,000. Identifiable net assets of Sal on this date are $1,710,000, and Sal’s stockholders’ equity consists of $800,000 of $10 par common stock and $910,000 retained earnings. Sal has net income for 2011 of $80,000 earned evenly throughout the year and declares no dividends.
REQUIRED
1. Determine the total value of Sal’s net assets at July 1, 2011, under entity theory.
2. Determine goodwill that would appear in a consolidated balance sheet of Pub Corporation and Subsidiary at July 1, 2011, under (a) entity theory, (b) parent company theory, and (c) traditional theory.
3. Determine Pub’s investment income from Sal on an equity basis for 2011.
4. Determine noncontrolling interest in Sal that will be reported in the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 2011, under entity theory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute consolidated net income under three theories (upstream and downstream sales)
Pad Corporation acquired an 80 percent interest in Sot Company at book value a number of years ago. Separate incomes of Pad and Sot for 2011 were $120,000 and $60,000, respectively. The only transactions between Pad and Sot during 2011 were as follows:
1. Pad sold inventory items to Sot for $60,000. These items cost Pad $30,000, and half the items were inventoried at $30,000 by Sot at December 31, 2011.
2. Sot sold land that cost $70,000 to Pad for $96,000 during 2011. The land was held by Pad at December 31, 2011.
3. Sot paid $24,000 dividends to Pad during 2011.
REQUIRED: Compute consolidated net income for Pad Corporation and Subsidiary for 2011 under:
1. Traditional theory
2. Parent company theory
3. Entity theory
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries for push down accounting
On January 1, 2011, Pin Corporation acquired a 90 percent interest in Set Corporation for $2,520,000. The book values and fair values of Set’s assets and equities on this date are as follows (in thousands):
|
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
|
Cash
|
$ 200
|
$ 200
|
|
Accounts receivable—net
|
300
|
300
|
|
Inventories
|
500
|
600
|
|
Land
|
300
|
800
|
|
Buildings—net
|
700
|
1,000
|
|
Equipment—net
|
800
|
600
|
|
$2,800
|
$3,500
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 550
|
$ 550
|
|
Other liabilities
|
450
|
550
|
|
Capital stock
|
1,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
800
|
|
|
$2,800
|
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare the journal entries on Set Corporation’s books to push down the values reflected in the acquisition price under parent company theory.
2. Prepare the journal entries on Set Corporation’s books to push down the values reflected in the acquisition price under entity theory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine investment income for corporate joint venturers
Sun Corporation is a corporate joint venture that is jointly controlled and operated by five investor venturers, four with 15 percent interests each and one with a 40 percent interest. Each of the five venturers is active in venture management. Land sales and other important venture decisions require the consent of each venturer. All venturers paid $15 per share for their investments on January 1, 2011, and no changes in ownership interests have occurred since that time. During 2012, Sun reported net income of $500,000 and paid dividends of $100,000. The stockholders’ equity of Sun at December 31, 2012, is as follows (in thousands):
|
Sun Corporation Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
at December 31, 2012
|
|
|
Common stock $10 par, 500,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
issued, and outstanding
|
$5,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
2,500
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
7,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$8,500
|
REQUIRED: Determine the investment income for 2012 and the investment account balance at December 31, 2012, for the 40 percent venturer and for one of the 15 percent venturers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated balance sheets (parent company and entity theories)
The adjusted trial balances of Pin Corporation and its 80 percent owned subsidiary, Son Corporation, at December 31, 2012, are as follows (in thousands):
|
Pin
|
Son
|
|
Cash
|
$ 32
|
$ 20
|
|
Receivables—net
|
120
|
180
|
|
Inventories
|
300
|
150
|
|
Plant assets—net
|
1,200
|
750
|
|
Investment in Son
|
752
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
1,300
|
600
|
|
Depreciation
|
225
|
75
|
|
Other expenses
|
271
|
175
|
|
Dividends
|
200
|
50
|
|
$4,400
|
$2,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 204
|
$ 100
|
|
Other liabilities
|
300
|
200
|
|
Capital stock
|
1,000
|
500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
800
|
200
|
|
Sales
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Income from Son
|
96
|
—
|
|
$4,400
|
$2,000
|
Pin acquired its interest in Son for $640,000 on January 1, 2011, when Son’s stockholders’ equity consisted of $500,000 capital stock and $100,000 retained earnings. The excess cost was due to a $100,000 undervaluation of plant assets with a 5 year remaining useful life and to previously unrecorded patents with a 10 year amortization period. Pin uses a one line consolidation in accounting for its investment in Son.
REQUIRED: Prepare comparative consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 2012, for Pin Corporation and Subsidiary under (a) parent company theory and (b) entity theory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated balance sheet and income statement under entity theory
Par Corporation acquires an 80 percent interest in Sip Company on January 3, 2011, for $320,000. On this date Sip’s stockholders’ equity consists of $200,000 capital stock and $140,000 retained earnings. The fair value/book value differential is assigned to undervalued equipment with a 6 year remaining life. Immediately after acquisition, Sip sells equipment with a 10 year remaining useful life to Par at a gain of $10,000.
Adjusted trial balances of Par and Sip at December 31, 2011, are as follows (in thousands):
|
Par
|
Sip
|
|
Current assets
|
$ 303.2
|
$180
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
800
|
400
|
|
Investment in Sip
|
336.8
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
500
|
260
|
|
Depreciation
|
100
|
50
|
|
Other expenses
|
120
|
40
|
|
Dividends
|
100
|
20
|
|
$2,260
|
$950
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$ 300
|
$100
|
|
Liabilities
|
200
|
100
|
|
Capital stock
|
600
|
200
|
|
Retained earnings
|
327.2
|
140
|
|
Sales
|
800
|
400
|
|
Gain on plant assets
|
—
|
10
|
|
Income from Sip
|
32.8
|
—
|
|
$2,260
|
$950
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a consolidated income statement for 2011 using entity theory.
2. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 2011, using entity theory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations (parent company and entity theories)
Pal Corporation paid $595,000 cash for 70 percent of the outstanding voting stock of Sin Corporation on January 2, 2011, when Sin’s stockholders’ equity consisted of $500,000 of $10 par common stock and $250,000 retained earnings. The book values of Sin’s assets and liabilities were equal to their fair values on this date.
During 2011, Pal Corporation had separate income of $300,000 and paid dividends of $150,000. Sin’s net income for 2011 was $90,000 and its dividends were $50,000. At December 31, 2011, the stockholders’ equities of Pal and Sin were as follows (in thousands):
|
Pal
|
Sin
|
|
Common stock ($10 par)
|
$1,400
|
$500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
450
|
290
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$1,850
|
$790
|
There were no intercompany transactions between Pal Corporation and Sin Corporation during 2011. Pal uses the equity method of accounting for its investment in Sin.
REQUIRED
1. Assume that Pal Corporation uses parent company theory for preparing consolidated financial statements for 2011. Determine the following amounts:
a Pal Corporation’s income from Sin for 2011
b Goodwill that will appear in the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 2011
c Consolidated net income for 2011
d Noncontrolling interest expense for 2011
e Noncontrolling interest at December 31, 2011
2. Assume that Pal Corporation uses entity theory for preparing consolidated financial statements for 2011.
Determine the following amounts:
a Pal Corporation’s income from Sin for 2011
b Goodwill that will appear in the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 2011
c Total consolidated income for 2011
d Noncontrolling interest share for 2011
e Noncontrolling interest at December 31, 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative consolidated statements under alternative theories
At December 31, 2011, when the fair values of Sam Corporation’s net assets were equal to their book values of $240,000, Pit Corporation acquired an 80 percent interest in Sam for $224,000. One year later, at December 31, 2012, the comparative adjusted trial balances of the two corporations appear as follows (in thousands):
|
Pit Corporation
|
Sam Corporation
|
|
Cash
|
$ 40.8
|
$ 70
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
90
|
30
|
|
Inventory
|
160
|
40
|
|
Land
|
200
|
80
|
|
Buildings
|
900
|
200
|
|
Investment in Sam
|
240
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
375
|
200
|
|
Expenses
|
150
|
50
|
|
Dividends
|
120
|
30
|
|
Total debits
|
$2,275.8
|
$700
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$ 200
|
$ 60
|
|
Accounts payable
|
175.8
|
100
|
|
Capital stock
|
800
|
200
|
|
Retained earnings
|
360
|
40
|
|
Sales
|
700
|
300
|
|
Income from Sam
|
40
|
—
|
|
Total credits
|
$2,275.8
|
$700
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: During 2012, Sam Corporation sold inventory items costing $15,000 to Pit for $23,000. Half of these inventory items remain unsold at December 31, 2012.
REQUIRED: Prepare comparative consolidated financial statements for Pit Corporation and Subsidiary at and for the year ended December 31, 2012, under
1. Traditional theory
2. Parent company theory
3. Entity theory
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative balance sheets under traditional and entity theories
Balance sheets for Pad Corporation and its 80 percent owned subsidiary, Sit Company, at December 31, 2012, are summarized as follows (in thousands):
|
Pad
|
Sit
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 50
|
$ 20
|
|
Receivables—net
|
75
|
35
|
|
Inventories
|
110
|
30
|
|
Plant assets—net
|
215
|
85
|
|
Investment in Sit
|
144
|
—
|
|
Total assets
|
$594
|
$170
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 80
|
$ 15
|
|
Other liabilities
|
20
|
5
|
|
Total liabilities
|
100
|
20
|
|
Capital stock
|
300
|
100
|
|
Retained earnings
|
194
|
50
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
494
|
150
|
|
Total equities
|
$594
|
170
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Pad Corporation paid $128,000 for its 80% interest in Sit on January 1, 2011, when Sit had capital stock of $100,000 and retained earnings of $10,000.
2. At December 31, 2012, Pad’s inventory included items on which Sit had recorded gross profit of $20,000.
REQUIRED : Prepare comparative consolidated balance sheets for Pad Corporation and Subsidiary at December 31, 2012, under the traditional and entity theories of consolidation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entry to record push down, subsidiary balance sheet, and investment income
Pay Corporation paid $480,000 cash for a 100 percent interest in Sap Corporation on January 1, 2012, when Sap’s stockholders’ equity consisted of $200,000 capital stock and $80,000 retained earnings. Sap’s balance sheet on December 31, 2011, is summarized as follows (in thousands):
|
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
|
Cash
|
$ 30
|
$ 30
|
|
Accounts receivable—net
|
70
|
70
|
|
Inventories
|
60
|
80
|
|
Land
|
50
|
75
|
|
Buildings—net
|
100
|
190
|
|
Equipment—net
|
90
|
75
|
|
Total assets
|
$400
|
$520
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 50
|
$ 50
|
|
Other liabilities
|
70
|
$ 60
|
|
Capital stock
|
200
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
80
|
|
|
Total equities
|
$400
|
|
Pay uses the equity method to account for its interest in Sap. The amortization periods for the fair value/book value differentials at the time of acquisition were as follows:
|
$20,000
|
Undervalued inventories (sold in 2012)
|
|
25,000
|
Undervalued land
|
|
90,000
|
Undervalued buildings (10 year useful life remaining)
|
|
(15,000)
|
Overvalued equipment (5 year useful life remaining)
|
|
10,000
|
Other liabilities (2 years before maturity)
|
|
70,000
|
Goodwill
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a journal entry on Sap’s books to push down the values reflected in the purchase price.
2. Prepare a balance sheet for Sap Corporation on January 1, 2012.
3. Sap’s net income for 2012 under the new push down accounting system is $90,000. What is Pay’s income from Sap for 2012?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries and calculations for push down accounting
Par Corporation paid $3,000,000 for an 80 percent interest in Son Corporation on January 1, 2011, when the book values and fair values of Son’s assets and liabilities were as follows (in thousands):
|
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
|
Cash
|
$ 300
|
$ 300
|
|
Accounts receivable—net
|
600
|
600
|
|
Inventories
|
800
|
2,400
|
|
Land
|
200
|
200
|
|
Buildings—net
|
600
|
600
|
|
Equipment—net
|
1,000
|
500
|
|
$3,500
|
$4,600
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 500
|
$ 500
|
|
Long term debt
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Capital stock, $1 par
|
800
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,200
|
|
|
$3,500
|
|
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a journal entry on Son’s books to push down 80% of the values reflected in the purchase price (the parent company theory approach).
2. Prepare a journal entry on Son’s books to push down 100% of the values reflected in the purchase price (the entity theory approach).
3. Calculate the noncontrolling interest in Son on January 1, 2011, under parent company theory.
4. Calculate the noncontrolling interest in Son on January 1, 2011, under entity theory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries and comparative balance sheets at acquisition for push down
Paw Corporation paid $180,000 cash for a 90 percent interest in Sun Corporation on January 1, 2012, when Sun’s stockholders’ equity consisted of $100,000 capital stock and $20,000 retained earnings. Sun Corporation’s balance sheets at book value and fair value on December 31, 2011, are as follows (in thousands):
|
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
|
Cash
|
$ 20
|
$ 20
|
|
Accounts receivable—net
|
50
|
50
|
|
Inventories
|
40
|
30
|
|
Land
|
15
|
15
|
|
Buildings—net
|
30
|
50
|
|
Equipment—net
|
70
|
100
|
|
Total assets
|
$225
|
$265
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 45
|
$ 45
|
|
Other liabilities
|
60
|
60
|
|
Capital stock
|
100
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
20
|
|
|
Total equities
|
$225
|
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. The amortization periods for the fair value/book value differentials at the time of acquisition are as follows:
|
Overvalued inventories (sold in 2012)
|
$10,000
|
|
Undervalued buildings (10 year useful lives)
|
20,000
|
|
Undervalued equipment (5 year useful lives)
|
30,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
Remainder
|
2. Paw uses the equity method to account for its interest in Sun.
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a journal entry on Sun Corporation’s books to push down the values reflected in the purchase price under parent company theory.
2. Prepare a journal entry on Sun Corporation’s books to push down the values reflected in the purchase price under entity theory.
3. Prepare comparative balance sheets for Sun Corporation on January 1, 2012, under the approaches of (1) and (2).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for foreign currency–denominated purchases
Zimmer Corporation, a U.S. firm, purchased merchandise from Taisho Company of Japan on November 1, 2011, for 10,000,000 yen, payable on December 1, 2011. The spot rate for yen on November 1 was $0.0075, and on December 1 the spot rate was $0.0076.
REQUIRED
1. Did the dollar weaken or strengthen against the yen between November 1 and December 1, 2011? Explain.
2. On November 1, 2011, at what amount did Zimmer record the account payable to Taisho?
3. On December 1, 2011, Zimmer paid the 10,000,000 yen to Taisho. Prepare the journal entry to record settlement of the account on Zimmer’s books.
4. If Zimmer had chosen to hedge its exposed net liability position on November 1, would it have entered a forward contract to purchase yen for future receipt or to sell yen for future delivery? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for foreign currency–denominated sales settled in subsequent year
On November 16, 2011, Wick Corporation of the United States sold inventory items to Candle Ltd. of Canada for 90,000 Canadian dollars, to be paid on February 14, 2012. Exchange rates for Canadian dollars on selected dates are as follows:
|
November 16, 2011
|
$0.80
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
$0.84
|
|
February 14, 2012
|
$0.83
|
REQUIRED: Determine the exchange gain or loss on the sale to Candle Ltd. to be included in Wick’s income statement for the years 2011 and 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various foreign currency–denominated transactions
1. On September 1, 2011, Bain Corporation received an order for equipment from a foreign customer for 300,000 euros, when the U.S. dollar equivalent was $400,000. Bain shipped the equipment on October 15, 2011, and billed the customer for 300,000 euros when the U.S. dollar equivalent was $420,000. Bain received the customer’s remittance in full on November 16, 2011, and sold the 300,000 euros for $415,000. In its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, what should Bain report as a foreign exchange gain or loss?
2. On September 22, 2011, Yumi Corporation purchased merchandise from an unaffiliated foreign company for 10,000 euros. On that date, the spot rate was $1.20. Yumi paid the bill in full on March 20, 2012, when the spot rate was $1.30. The spot rate was $1.24 on December 31, 2011. What amount should Yumi report as a foreign currency transaction gain or loss in its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011?
3. On July 1, 2011, Clark Company borrowed 1,680,000 pesos from a foreign lender by signing an interest bearing note due on July 1, 2012, which is denominated in pesos. The U.S. dollar equivalent of the note principal was as follows:
|
July 1, 2011 (date borrowed)
|
$210,000
|
|
December 31, 2011 (Clark’s year end)
|
240,000
|
|
July 1, 2012 (date paid)
|
280,000
|
In its income statement for 2012, what amount should Clark include as a foreign exchange gain or loss?
4. On July 1, 2011, Stone Company lent $120,000 to a foreign supplier by accepting an interest bearing note due on July 1, 2012. The note is denominated in the currency of the borrower and was equivalent to 840,000 pesos on the loan date. The note principal was appropriately included at $140,000 in the receivables section of Stone’s December 31, 2011, balance sheet. The note principal was repaid to Stone on the July 1, 2012, due date, when the exchange rate was 8 pesos to $1. In its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, what amount should Stone include as a foreign currency transaction gain or loss?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After numerous campus interviews, Steve Baden, a senior at Great Northern College, received two office interview invitations from the Baltimore offices of two large firms. Both firms offered to cover his out of pocket expenses (travel, hotel, and meals). He scheduled the interviews for both firms on the same day, one in the morning and one in the afternoon. At the conclusion of each interview, he submitted to both firms his total out of pocket expenses for the trip to Baltimore: mileage $112 (280 miles at $0.40), hotel $130, meals $36, parking and tolls $18, for a total of $296. He believes this approach is appropriate. If he had made two trips, his cost would have been two times $296. He is also certain that neither firm knew he had visited the other on that same trip.Within ten days Steve received two checks in the mail, each in the amount of $296.
Instructions
(a) Who are the stakeholders (affected parties) in this situation?
(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?
(c) What would you do in this situation?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated EPS with goodwill, noncontrolling interest, and warrants
Pal Corporation’s net income for 2011 is $316,000, including $160,000 income from Sod Corporation, its 80 percent owned subsidiary. The income from Sod consists of $176,000 equity in income less $16,000 patent amortization. Pal has 300,000 shares of $10 par common stock outstanding, and Sod has 50,000 shares of $10 par common stock outstanding throughout 2011. In addition, Sod has 10,000 outstanding warrants to acquire 10,000 shares of Sod common stock at $10 per share. The average market price of Sod’s common stock was $20 per share during 2011.
1. For purposes of calculating Pal Corporation’s (and consolidated) diluted earnings per share, Sod’s diluted earnings are:
a $220,000
b $200,000
c $176,000
d $160,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated basic and diluted EPS
The following information is available regarding Put Corporation and its 80 percent owned subsidiary, San Corporation, at and for the year ended December 31, 2011:
|
Put
|
San
|
|
Outstanding common stock
|
8,000 shares
|
5,000 shares
|
|
Warrants to purchase 1,000 shares of San common stock
|
|
|
|
at $9 per share (average market price is $15)
|
|
1,000 warrants
|
|
Net income (includes income from San)
|
$20,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Income from San ($14,400 $2,400 amortization of
|
|
|
|
excess cost over book value acquired)
|
$12,000
|
|
REQUIRED: Determine consolidated earnings per share (both basic and diluted).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated EPS with unrealized profit from upstream sale
The income statements of Pin Corporation and its 80 percent owned subsidiary, Sal Corporation, for 2011 are as follows:
|
Pin
|
Sal
|
|
Sales
|
$1,270,000
|
$ 740,000
|
|
Income from Sal (see note)
|
13,920
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(700,000)
|
(470,000)
|
|
Expenses
|
(462,000 )
|
(230,000 )
|
|
Income before taxes
|
121,920
|
40,000
|
|
Provision for income taxes
|
(41,453 )
|
(13,600 )
|
|
Net income
|
$ 80,467
|
$ 26,400
|
Pin had 10,000 shares of common stock and 1,200 shares of $100 par, 10 percent cumulative preferred stock outstanding throughout 2011. Sal had 20,000 shares of common stock and warrants to purchase 5,000 shares of Sal common stock at $24 outstanding throughout 2011. The average market price of Sal common stock was $30 per share.
REQUIRED: Compute Pin’s (and consolidated) basic and diluted EPS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Subsidiary EPS and consolidated EPS with goodwill and warrants
Pow Corporation owns an 80 percent interest in Soy Corporation. Pow does not have common stock equivalents or other potentially dilutive securities outstanding, so it calculated its EPS for 2011 as follows:
|
$1,000,000 separate income + $480,000 Income from Soy
|
= $1.48
|
|
1,000,000 outstanding common shares of Pow
|
An examination of Pow’s income from Soy shows that it is determined correctly as 80 percent of Soy’s $630,000 net income less $24,000 patent amortization. Pow’s EPS computation is in error, however, because it fails to consider outstanding warrants of Soy that permit their holders to acquire 10,000 shares of Soy common stock at $24 per share and increase Soy’s outstanding common stock to 60,000 shares. The average price of Soy common stock during 2011 was $40.
REQUIRED
1. Compute Soy Corporation’s diluted EPS for use in determining consolidated EPS.
2. Compute consolidated EPS for 2011 (both basic and diluted).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compare separate and consolidated tax filings
The pretax accounting incomes of Pit Corporation and its 100 percent owned subsidiary, Sol Company, for 2011 are as follows (in thousands):
|
Pit
|
Sol
|
|
Sales
|
$1,000
|
$500
|
|
Gain on land
|
200
|
—
|
|
Total revenue
|
1,200
|
500
|
|
Cost of sales
|
500
|
300
|
|
Gross profit
|
700
|
200
|
|
Operating expenses
|
400
|
100
|
|
Pretax accounting income
|
$ 300
|
$100
|
The only intercompany transaction during 2011 was a gain on land sold to Sol. Assume a 34 percent flat income tax rate.
REQUIRED
1. What amount should be shown on the consolidated income statement as income tax expense if separateecompany tax returns are filed?
2. Compute the consolidated income tax expense if a consolidated tax return is filed.
3. What will be the income taxes currently payable if separate income tax returns are filed? If a consolidated return is filed?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated income statement (downstream gain on sale of equipment)
Pan Corporation and its 70 percent owned subsidiary, Sum Corporation, have pretax operating incomes for 2011 as follows (in thousands):
|
Pan
|
Sum
|
|
Sales
|
$8,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Gain on equipment
|
200
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(5,000)
|
(2,000)
|
|
Other expenses
|
(1,800 )
|
(1,200 )
|
|
Pretax income
|
$1,400
|
$ 800
|
Pan received $280,000 dividends from Sum during 2011. A previously unrecorded patent from Pan’s investment in Sum is being amortized at a rate of $50,000 per year (the same time horizon is used for both book and tax purposes).
On January 1, 2011, Pan sold equipment to Sum at a $200,000 gain. Sum is depreciating the equipment at a rate of 20 percent per year. A flat 34 percent tax rate is applicable to both companies.
REQUIRED: Prepare a consolidated income statement for Pan Corporation and Subsidiary for 2011. (Assume no deferred tax balance on January 1, 2011.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries for unrealized profit from upstream sale and separate tax returns
Son Corporation, an 80 percent owned subsidiary of Pin Corporation, sold equipment with a book value of $150,000 to Pin for $250,000 at December 31, 2011. Separate income tax returns are filed, and a 34 percent income tax rate is applicable to both Pin and Son.
REQUIRED
1. Prepare a one line consolidation entry for Pin to eliminate the effect of the intercompany transaction.
2. Prepare workpaper entries in general journal form to eliminate the unrealized profit.
3. Assume that the reported net income of Son is $800,000 and that the sale of equipment is the only intercompany transaction between Pin and Son. What is the noncontrolling interest’s share of total consolidated income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuation Allowance
Pax Corporation recognizes a deferred tax asset (benefit) of $500,000 related to its acquisition of Son Company.
Pax has determined that the tax position qualifies for recognition and should be measured. Pax has determined the amounts and the probabilities of the possible outcomes, as follows:
|
Possible Estimated Outcome
|
Probability of Occurring (%)
|
|
$500,000
|
10
|
|
400,000
|
25
|
|
300,000
|
25
|
|
200,000
|
20
|
|
100,000
|
10
|
|
0
|
10
|
REQUIRED: Calculate the tax benefit to be recognized by Pax.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuation Allowance
Pun Corporation recognizes a deferred tax asset (benefit) of $150,000 related to its acquisition of Sew Company. Pun has determined that the tax position qualifies for recognition and should be measured. Pun has determined the amounts and the probabilities of the possible outcomes, as follows:
|
Possible Estimated Outcome
|
Probability of Occurring (%)
|
|
$150,000
|
50
|
|
125,000
|
20
|
|
100,000
|
10
|
|
50,000
|
10
|
|
0
|
10
|
REQUIRED: Calculate the tax benefit to be recognized by Pun.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Investment in common stock (subsidiary preferred stock)
Par Corporation paid $7,200,000 for 360,000 shares of Sun Corporation’s outstanding voting common stock on January 1, 2011, when the stockholders’ equity of Sun consisted of (in thousands):
|
10% cumulative, preferred stock, $100 par. Liquidation
|
|
|
preference is $105 per share, and 20,000 shares are issued
|
|
|
and outstanding with one year’s dividends in arrears
|
$2,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par, 400,000 shares issued and
|
|
|
outstanding
|
4,000
|
|
Other paid in capital
|
1,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,300
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$8,300
|
During 2011, Sun reported net income of $1,000,000 and declared dividends of $800,000. Any excess of fair value over book value is goodwill, which is not amortized.
REQUIRED: Calculate the following:
1. Goodwill from Par’s acquisition of Sun
2. Par’s income from Sun for 2011
3. Noncontrolling interest share for 2011
4. Noncontrolling interest in Sun at December 31, 2011
5. Par’s Investment in Sun account balance at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidation entries—investments in preferred and common stock—midyear purchases
Pun Corporation acquired 80 percent of Set Corporation’s preferred stock for $175,000 and 90 percent of Set’s common stock for $630,000 on July 1, 2011. Set’s stockholders’ equity on December 31, 2011, was as follows (in thousands):
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
9% preferred stock, cumulative, nonparticipating,
|
|
|
$100 par, call price $105
|
$200
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
500
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par
|
40
|
|
Retained earnings
|
160
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$900
|
Set had net income of $24,000 in 2010 and $46,000 in 2011, but declared no dividends in either year. Assume that preferred dividends accrue ratably throughout each year and that Set’s net assets were fairly valued on July 1, 2011.
REQUIRED
1. Determine the account balances of Pun Corporation’s investments in Set’s preferred and common stocks at December 31, 2011, on the basis of a one line consolidation.
2. Prepare workpaper entries to consolidate the balance sheets of Pun and Set at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing EPS with convertible debentures
Pal Corporation has $108,000 income from its own operations for 2011, and $42,000 income from Sir Corporation, its 70 percent owned subsidiary. Sir’s net income of $60,000 consists of $66,000 operating income less $6,000 net of tax interest on its outstanding 10 percent convertible debentures. Throughout 2011, Pal has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and Sir has 50,000 outstanding common shares.
REQUIRED
1. Compute Pal’s diluted earnings per share for 2011, assuming that Sir’s bonds are convertible into 10,000 shares of Sir’s common stock.
2. Compute Pal’s diluted earnings per share for 2011, assuming that Sir’s bonds are convertible into 10,000 shares of Pal’s common stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute basic and diluted EPS (options; preferred stock)
Pen Corporation owns an 80 percent interest in She Company. Throughout 2011, Pen had 20,000 shares of common stock outstanding. She had the following securities outstanding:
¦ 10,000 shares of common stock
¦ Options to purchase 2,000 shares of She common at $15 per share
¦ 1,000 shares of 10%, $100 par, convertible, preferred stock that are convertible into 3,000 shares of She common stock
Income data for the affiliates for 2011 are as follows:
|
Pen
|
She
|
|
Separate incomes
|
$120,000
|
$ 55,000
|
|
Income from She ($45,000 income to
|
|
|
|
common * 80%) $6,000 patent
|
30,000
|
—
|
|
amortization
|
$150,000
|
$ 55,000
|
REQUIRED: Compute basic and diluted earnings per share for Pen Corporation and Subsidiary for 2011, assuming an average market price for She common stock of $30 per share.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Convertible preferred stock and amortization of excess
Pro Corporation owns 80 percent of Sit Corporation’s outstanding common stock. The 80 percent interest was acquired in 2011 at $40,000 in excess of book value due to undervalued equipment with an eight year remaining useful life. Outstanding securities of the two companies throughout 2012 and at December 31, 2012, are:
|
Pro
|
Sit
|
|
Common stock, $5 par
|
20,000 shares
|
—
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
—
|
6,000 shares
|
|
14% Cumulative, Convertible, Preferred Stock,
|
—
|
1,000 shares
|
|
$100 Par
|
|
|
Sit Corporation’s net income is $50,000 for 2012, and Pro’s net income consists of $70,000 separate income and $23,800 income from Sit.
REQUIRED
1. Compute consolidated basic and diluted earnings per share, assuming that the preferred stock is convertible into 4,000 shares of Sit Corporation’s common stock.
2. Compute consolidated basic and diluted earnings per share, assuming that the preferred stock is convertible into 5,000 shares of Pro’s common stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute consolidated EPS; subsidiary diluted
Pin Company owns 40,000 of 50,000 outstanding shares of Sum Company, and during 2011, it recognizes income from Sum as follows:
|
Share of Sum net income ($500,000 * 80%)
|
$ 400,000
|
|
Patent amortization
|
(50,000)
|
|
Unrealized profit—downstream sales
|
(40,000)
|
|
Unrealized profit—upstream sales ($60,000 * 80%)
|
(48,000 )
|
|
Income from Sum
|
$262,000
|
Pin’s net income for 2011 is $1,262,000, consisting of separate income from Pin of $1,000,000 and $262,000 income from Sum. Pin has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding, but no common stock equivalents or other potentially dilutive securities.
Sum has $100,000 par of 10 percent convertible bonds outstanding that are convertible into 10,000 shares of Sum common stock. The net of tax interest on the bonds is $6,400, and Sum’s diluted earnings per share for purposes of computing consolidated earnings per share are determined as follows:
|
Net income
|
$500,000
|
|
Add: Net of tax interest on convertible bonds
|
6,400
|
|
Less: Unrealized profit on upstream sales
|
(60,000 )
|
|
a Diluted earnings
|
$446,400
|
|
Common shares outstanding
|
50,000
|
|
Shares issuable upon conversion of bonds
|
10,000
|
|
b Common shares and equivalents
|
60,000
|
|
Diluted earnings per share (a , b)
|
$ 7.44
|
REQUIRED: Compute Pin Company’s and consolidated diluted earnings per share for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations (subsidiary preferred stock and warrants)
Pit Corporation’s net income for 2011 consists of the following:
|
Separate income
|
|
$320,000
|
|
Income from Sim Corporation:
|
|
|
|
80% of Sim’s income to common
|
$160,000
|
|
|
Less: Patent amortization
|
(4,000)
|
|
|
Less: Unrealized profits on equipment sold to Sim
|
(10,000)
|
|
|
Les s: 80% of unrealized profit on land purchased
|
|
|
|
from Sim
|
(16,000 )
|
130,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$450,000
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Pit has 100,000 shares of common stock, and Sim has 50,000 shares of common and 10,000 shares of $10 cumulative, convertible, preferred stock outstanding throughout 2011. The preferred stock is convertible into 30,000 shares of Sim stock.
2. Sim has warrants outstanding that permit their holders to purchase 10,000 shares of Sim Corporation common stock at $15 per share (average market price $20).
3. Sim’s reported net income for 2011 is $300,000, allocated $100,000 to preferred stockholders and $200,000 to common stockholders.
4. Pit owned 40,000 shares of Sim common stock throughout 2011.
REQUIRED: Compute Pit Corporation’s (and consolidated) basic and diluted EPS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative income statements (consolidated and separate tax returns)
Par Corporation and its 100 percent owned subsidiary, Sam Corporation, are members of an affiliated group with pretax accounting incomes as follows (in thousands):
|
Par
|
Sam
|
|
Sales
|
$2,400
|
$1,400
|
|
Gain on sale of land
|
100
|
—
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(1,200)
|
(600)
|
|
Operating expenses
|
(700)
|
(500)
|
|
Pretax accounting income
|
$ 600
|
$ 300
|
The gain reported by Par relates to land sold to Sam during the current year. A flat 34 percent income tax rate is applicable.
REQUIRED: Prepare income statements for Par Corporation assuming (a) that separate income tax returns are filed and (b) that a consolidated income tax return is filed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations and income statement (upstream sales)
Pan Corporation paid $577,500 cash for a 70 percent interest in Sir Corporation’s outstanding common stock on January 2, 2011, when the equity of Sir consisted of $500,000 common stock and $300,000 retained earnings. The excess fair value is due to goodwill. In December 2011, Sir sold inventory items to Pan at a gross profit of $50,000 (selling price $120,000 and cost $70,000), and all these items were included in Pan’s inventory at December 31, 2011. Sir paid dividends of $50,000 in 2011, and an 80 percent dividends received deduction is applicable. A flat 34 percent income tax rate is applicable to both companies. Separate pretax incomes of Pan and Sir for 2011 are as follows (in thousands):
|
Pan
|
Sir
|
|
Sales
|
$4,000
|
$1,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(2,000)
|
(550)
|
|
Operating expenses
|
(1,500)
|
(250)
|
|
Pretax income
|
$ 500
|
$ 200
|
REQUIRED
1. Determine 2011 income tax currently payable and income tax expense for Pan and Sir.
2. Calculate Pan’s income from Sir for 2011.
3. Prepare a consolidated income statement for Pan and Sir for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated income statement (downstream sales)
Taxable incomes for Pub Corporation and Sew Corporation, its 70 percent owned subsidiary, for 2011 are as follows (in thousands):
|
Pub
|
Sew
|
|
Sales
|
$500
|
$300
|
|
Dividends received from Sew
|
28
|
—
|
|
Total revenue
|
528
|
300
|
|
Cost of sales
|
250
|
120
|
|
Operating expenses
|
78
|
80
|
|
Total deductions
|
328
|
200
|
|
Taxable income
|
$200
|
$100
|
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Pub acquired its interest in Sew at a fair value equal to book value on December 31, 2010.
2. Sew paid dividends of $40,000 in 2011.
3. Pub sold $90,000 in merchandise to Sew during 2011, and there was $10,000 in unrealized profit from the sales at year end.
4. A flat 34% income tax rate is applicable.
5. Pub is eligible for the 80% dividends received deduction.
Required: Prepare a consolidation income statement workpaper for Pub Corporation and Subsidiary for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions.
1. Grossman Company owns buildings that are worth substantially more than they originally cost. In an effort to provide more relevant information, Grossman reports the buildings at market value in its accounting reports.
2. Jones Company includes in its accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money.
3. Caleb Borke, owner of Caleb’s Cantina, records his personal living costs as expenses of the Cantina.
Instructions For each of the three situations, say if the accounting method used is correct or incorrect. If correct, identify which principle or assumption supports the method used. If incorrect, identify which principle or assumption has been violated.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for Evergreen Lawn Care Company are listed below.
1. Made cash investment to start business.
2. Paid monthly rent.
3. Purchased equipment on account.
4. Billed customers for services performed.
5. Withdrew cash for owner’s personal use.
6. Received cash from customers billed in (4).
7. Incurred advertising expense on account.
8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.
9. Received cash from customers when service was performed.
Instructions
List the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. For example, the first answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in owner’s equity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brandon Computer Timeshare Company entered into the following transactions during May 2010.
1. Purchased computer terminals for $20,000 from Digital Equipment on account.
2. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.
3. Received $15,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.
4. Provided computer services to Fisher Construction Company for $3,000 cash.
5. Paid Northern States Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.
6. Brandon invested an additional $32,000 in the business.
7. Paid Digital Equipment for the terminals purchased in (1) above.
8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,200 on account.
Instructions
Indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results in:
(a) an increase in assets and a decrease in assets.
(b) an increase in assets and an increase in owner’s equity.
(c) an increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.
(d) a decrease in assets and a decrease in owner’s equity.
(e) a decrease in assets and a decrease in liabilities.
(f) an increase in liabilities and a decrease in owner’s equity.
(g) an increase in owner’s equity and a decrease in liabilities
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of the transactions made by S. Moses & Co., a certified public accounting firm, for the month of August is shown below.The expenses were $650 for rent, $4,900 for salaries, and $500 for utilities.
|
Cash+
|
Accounts Receivable+
|
Supplies+
|
Office Equipment=
|
Accounts Payable +
|
S. Moses, Capital
|
S. Moses, Drawings+
|
Revenues
|
Expenses
|
|
1
|
+$15,000
|
|
|
|
|
+$15000
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
2,000
|
|
|
+$5000
|
+$3000
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
750
|
|
+$750
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
+4,600
|
+$3,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
$8300
|
|
|
5
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
1500
|
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
$2000
|
|
|
|
7
|
650
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$650
|
|
8
|
+450
|
450
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9
|
4,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4900
|
|
10
|
|
|
|
|
+500
|
|
|
|
500
|
Instructions
(a) Describe each transaction that occurred for the month.
(b) Determine how much owner’s equity increased for the month.
(c) Compute the amount of net income for the month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lily Company had the following assets and liabilities on the dates indicated.
|
December 31
|
Total Assets
|
Total Liabilities
|
|
2009
|
$400,000
|
$250,000
|
|
2010
|
$460,000
|
$300,000
|
|
2011
|
$590,000
|
$400,000
|
Lily began business on January 1, 2009, with an investment of $100,000.
Instructions From an analysis of the change in owner’s equity during the year, compute the net income (or loss) for:
(a) 2009, assuming Lily’s drawings were $15,000 for the year.
(b) 2010, assuming Lily made an additional investment of $50,000 and had no drawings in 2010.
(c) 2011, assuming Lily made an additional investment of $15,000 and had drawings of $30,000 in 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2010, Craig Cantrel and Mills Enterprises.
|
Craig
|
Mills
|
|
Cantrel
|
Enterprises
|
|
Beginning of year:
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 95,000
|
129,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
85,000
|
(c)
|
|
Total owner’s equity
|
(a)
|
80000
|
|
End of year:
|
|
|
Total assets
|
160,000
|
80,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
120,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total owner’s equity
|
40,000
|
130,000
|
|
Changes during year in owner’s equity:
|
|
Additional investment
|
(b)
|
25,000
|
|
Drawings
|
24,000
|
(d)
|
|
Total revenues
|
215,000
|
100,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
175,000
|
55,000
|
Instructions
Determine the missing amounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to Linda Stanley Co. for the year 2010.
|
Linda Stanley, Capital, January 1, 2010
|
$ 48,000
|
Advertising expense
|
$ 1,800
|
|
Linda Stanley, Drawing during 2010
|
6,000
|
Rent expense
|
10,400
|
|
Service revenue
|
62,500
|
Utilities expense
|
3,100
|
|
Salaries expense
|
30,000
|
|
|
Instructions
After analyzing the data, prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year ending December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mary Close is the bookkeeper for Mendez Company. Mary has been trying to get the balance sheet of Mendez Company to balance. Mendez’s balance sheet is shown below.
|
MENDEZ COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2010
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Cash
|
$15,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$20,000
|
|
Supplies
|
8,000
|
Accounts receivable
|
(8,500)
|
|
Equipment
|
46,000
|
Mendez, Capital
|
67,500
|
|
Mendez, Drawing
|
10,000
|
Total liabilities and
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$79,000
|
owner’s equity
|
$79,000
|
Instructions
Prepare a correct balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jan Nab is the sole owner of Deer Park, a public camping ground near the Lake Mead National Recreation Area. Jan has compiled the following financial information as of December 31, 2010.
|
Revenues during 2010—camping fees
|
$140,000
|
Market value of equipment
|
$140,000
|
|
Revenues during 2010—general store
|
50,000
|
Notes payable
|
60,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
11,000
|
Expenses during 2010
|
150,000
|
|
Cash on hand
|
23,000
|
Supplies on hand
|
2,500
|
|
Original cost of equipment
|
105,500
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Determine Jan Nab’s net income from Deer Park for 2010.
(b) Prepare a balance sheet for Deer Park as of December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to the sole proprietorship of Kevin Johnson, attorney.
|
Legal service revenue—2010
|
$350,000
|
|
Total expenses—2010
|
211,000
|
|
Assets, January 1, 2010
|
85,000
|
|
Liabilities, January 1, 2010
|
62,000
|
|
Assets, December 31, 2010
|
168,000
|
|
Liabilities, December 31, 2010
|
85,000
|
|
Drawings—2010
|
?
|
Instructions
Prepare the 2010 owner’s equity statement for Kevin Johnson’s legal practice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Maria Gonzalez opened a veterinary business in Nashville,Tennessee, on August 1. On August 31, the balance sheet showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Office Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, and M. Gonzalez, Capital $13,700. During September the following transactions occurred.
1. Paid $2,900 cash on accounts payable.
2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.
3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.
4. Earned revenue of $8,000, of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.
5. Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.
6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $300.
7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.
8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank–money borrowed on a note payable.
Instructions (a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances.
The column headings should be as follows: Cash +Accounts Receivable Supplies +Office Equipment + Notes Payable +Accounts Payable+M. Gonzalez, Capital+M. Gonzalez, Drawings _ Revenues _ Expenses.
(b) Prepare an income statement for September, an owner’s equity statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 1, Jeff Wilkins started Skyline Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, by investing $45,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2010, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.
|
Cash
|
$ 5,600
|
Notes Payable
|
$30,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,200
|
Rent Expense
|
1,200
|
|
Equipment
|
64,000
|
Repair Expense
|
400
|
|
Lesson Revenue
|
7,500
|
Fuel Expense
|
2,500
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
500
|
Insurance Expense
|
400
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
800
|
Jeff Wilkins made no additional investment in May, but he withdrew $1,500 in cash for personal use.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.
(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for May assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $1,500 of fuel expense was incurred but not paid.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mark Miller started his own delivery service, Miller Deliveries, on June 1, 2010.The following transactions occurred during the month of June.
June 1 Mark invested $10,000 cash in the business.
2 Purchased a used van for deliveries for $12,000. Mark paid $2,000 cash and signed a note payable for the remaining balance.
3 Paid $500 for office rent for the month.
5 Performed $4,400 of services on account.
9 Withdrew $200 cash for personal use.
12 Purchased supplies for $150 on account.
15 Received a cash payment of $1,250 for services provided on June 5.
17 Purchased gasoline for $100 on account.
20 Received a cash payment of $1,500 for services provided.
23 Made a cash payment of $500 on the note payable.
26 Paid $250 for utilities.
29 Paid for the gasoline purchased on account on June 17.
30 Paid $1,000 for employee salaries.
Instructions
(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format.
(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of June.
(c) Prepare a balance sheet at June 30, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statement information about four different companies is as follows.
|
January 1, 2010
|
Karma Company
|
Yates Company
|
McCain Company
|
Dench Company
|
|
Assets
|
$ 95,000
|
$110,000
|
(g)
|
$170,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
50,000
|
(d)
|
75,000
|
( j)
|
|
Owner’s equity
|
(a)
|
60,000
|
45,000
|
90,000
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
(b)
|
137,000
|
200,000
|
(k)
|
|
Liabilities
|
55,000
|
75,000
|
(h)
|
80,000
|
|
Owner’s equity
|
60,000
|
(e)
|
130,000
|
170,000
|
|
Owner’s equity changes in year
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional investment
|
(c)
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
15,000
|
|
Drawings
|
25,000
|
(f)
|
14,000
|
20,000
|
|
Total revenues
|
350,000
|
420,000
|
(i)
|
520,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
320,000
|
385,000
|
342,000
|
(l)
|
Instructions
(a) Determine the missing amounts. (Hint: For example, to solve for (a), Assets Liabilities + Owner’s equity =$45,000.)
(b) Prepare the owner’s equity statement for Yates Company.
(c) Write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and the interrelationship of the owner’s equity statement to the income statement and balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April 1,Vinnie Venuchi established Vinnie’s Travel Agency. The following transactions were completed during the month.
1. Invested $15,000 cash to start the agency.
2. Paid $600 cash for April office rent.
3. Purchased office equipment for $3,000 cash.
4. Incurred $700 of advertising costs in the Chicago Tribune, on account.
5. Paid $800 cash for office supplies.
6. Earned $11,000 for services rendered: $3,000 cash is received from customers, and the balance of $8,000 is billed to customers on account.
7. Withdrew $500 cash for personal use.
8. Paid Chicago Tribune amount due in transaction (4).
9. Paid employees’ salaries $2,200.
10. Received $4,000 in cash from customers who have previously been billed in transaction (6).
Instructions
(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Office Equipment, Accounts Payable,V.Venuchi, Capital; V.Venuchi, Drawings; Revenues, and Expenses.
(b) From an analysis of the owner’s equity columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jenny Brown opened a law office, on July 1, 2010. On July 31, the balance sheet showed Cash $5,000, Accounts Receivable $1,500, Supplies $500, Office Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $4,200, and Jenny Brown,Capital $8,800. During August the following transactions occurred.
1. Collected $1,200 of accounts receivable.
2. Paid $2,800 cash on accounts payable.
3. Earned revenue of $8,000 of which $3,000 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.
4. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,000, paying $400 in cash and the balance on account.
5. Paid salaries $2,500, rent for August $900, and advertising expenses $400.
6. Withdrew $700 in cash for personal use.
7. Received $1,500 from Standard Federal Bank—money borrowed on a note payable.
8. Incurred utility expenses for month on account $220.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash +Accounts Receivable +Supplies + Office Equipment =Notes Payable+ Accounts Payable+J. Brown, Capital J. Brown, Drawings + Revenues Expenses.
(b) Prepare an income statement for August, an owner’s equity statement for August, and a balance sheet at August 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1, Michelle Sasse started Divine Creations Co., a company that provides craft opportunities, by investing $15,200 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30 and the revenues and expenses for the month of June.
|
Cash
|
$13,750
|
Notes Payable
|
$9,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
3,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
1,200
|
|
Service Revenue
|
7,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
1,600
|
|
Craft Supplies
|
2,000
|
Gas and Oil Expense
|
200
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
400
|
Utilities Expense
|
150
|
|
Equipment
|
10,000
|
|
|
Michelle made no additional investment in June, but withdrew $1,300 in cash for personal use during the month.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2010.
(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for June assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at June 30, and (2) $150 of gas and oil expense was incurred but not paid.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statement information about four different companies is as follows
|
January 1, 2010
|
Donatello Company
|
Raphael Company
|
Michelangelo Company
|
Leonardo Company
|
|
Assets
|
$ 80,000
|
$90,000
|
(g)
|
$150,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
48,000
|
(d)
|
80,000
|
(j)
|
|
Owner’s equity
|
(a)
|
40,000
|
49,000
|
90,000
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
(b)
|
112,000
|
180,000
|
(k)
|
|
Liabilities
|
60,000
|
72,000
|
(h)
|
100,000
|
|
Owner’s equity
|
40,000
|
(e)
|
70,000
|
145,000
|
|
Owner’s equity changes in year
|
|
|
|
Additional investment
|
(c)
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
15,000
|
|
Drawings
|
15,000
|
(f)
|
12,000
|
10,000
|
|
Total revenues
|
350,000
|
410,000
|
(i)
|
500,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
333,000
|
385,000
|
350,000
|
(l)
|
Instructions
(a) Determine the missing amounts. (Hint: For example, to solve for (a), Assets Liabilities= Owner’s equity = $32,000.)
(b) Prepare the owner’s equity statement for Donatello Company.
(c) Write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and the interrelationship of the owner’s equity statement to the income statement and balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CCC1 Natalie Koebel spent much of her childhood learning the art of cookie making from her grandmother. They passed many happy hours mastering every type of cookie imaginable and later creating new recipes that were both healthy and delicious. Now at the start of her second year in college, Natalie is investigating various possibilities for starting her own business as part of the requirements of the entrepreneurship program in which she is enrolled.
A long time friend insists that Natalie has to somehow include cookies in her business plan. After a series of brainstorming sessions, Natalie settles on the idea of operating a cookie making school. She will start on a part time basis and offer her services in people’s homes.Now that she has started thinking about it, the possibilities seem endless. During the fall, she will concentrate on holiday cookies. She will offer individual lessons and group sessions (which will probably be more entertainment than education for the participants). Natalie also decides to include children in her target market.
The first difficult decision is coming up with the perfect name for her business. In the end, she settles on “Cookie Creations” and then moves on to more important issues.
Instructions
(a) What form of business organization—proprietorship, partnership, or corporation—do you recommend that Natalie use for her business? Discuss the benefits and weaknesses of each form and give the reasons for your choice.
(b) Will Natalie need accounting information? If yes, what information will she need and why? How often will she need this information?
(c) Identify specific asset, liability, and equity accounts that Cookie Creations will likely use to record its business transactions.
(d) Should Natalie open a separate bank account for the business? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mary and Jack Gray, local golf stars, opened the Chip Shot Driving Range on March 1, 2010, by investing $25,000 of their cash savings in the business. A caddy shack was constructed for cash at a cost of $8,000, and $800 was spent on golf balls and golf clubs. The Grays leased five acres of land at a cost of $1,000 per month and paid the first month’s rent.
During the first month, advertising costs totaled $750, of which $150 was unpaid at March 31, and $400 was paid to members of the high school golf team for retrieving golf balls. All revenues from customers were deposited in the company’s bank account. On March 15, Mary and Jack withdrew a total of $1,000 in cash for personal living expenses. A $100 utility bill was received on March 31 but was not paid. On March 31, the balance in the company’s bank account was $18,900.
Mary and Jack thought they had a pretty good first month of operations. But, their estimates of profitability ranged from a loss of $6,100 to net income of $2,450.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a) How could the Grays have concluded that the business operated at a loss of $6,100? Was this a valid basis on which to determine net income?
(b) How could the Grays have concluded that the business operated at a net income of $2,450?
(Hint: Prepare a balance sheet at March 31.) Was this a valid basis on which to determine net income?
(c) Without preparing an income statement, determine the actual net income for March.
(d) What was the revenue earned in March?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
With the help of your instructor, identify a particular information system that is not working very well and perform a preliminary investigation of it. In your work, be sure to talk to (1) at least one external ‘‘customer’’ who is affected by the system, (2) one employee who uses the system daily, and (3) one person who manages this type of employee. For example, at a university, you might study the student parking information system. The ‘‘customers’’ are those car owners who purchase parking permits (e.g., students, faculty, and university staff members), data input clerks are the employees who use the system daily, and the parking manager is the person who supervises these employees. Ask each such person what he or she feels are the problems of the system, and what they think should be done to address these problems.
Prepare a preliminary investigation report that describes your system and outlines the following items: (a) the problems that each person experiences with the system, (b) the actions that each person thinks might solve the problems, and (c) your opinion of which difficulties are the ‘‘real problems’’ and which are just symptoms of these problems. Also include some recommendations. Should the present system be replaced, are minor modifications required, or is the system mostly acceptable as it is?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wright Company (Analyzing System Reports)
Wright Company employs a computer based data processing system for maintaining all company records. The current system was developed in stages over the past five years and has been fully operational for the last 24 months.
When the system was being designed, all department heads were asked to specify the types of information and reports they would need for planning and controlling operations. The systems department attempted to meet the specifications of each department head.
Company management specified that certain other reports be prepared for department heads. During the five years of systems development and operation, there have been several changes in the department head positions due to attrition and promotions. The new department heads often made requests for additional reports according to their specifications. The systems department complied with all of these requests. Reports were discontinued only on request by a department head, and then only if it was not a standard report required by top management.
As a result, few reports were discontinued. Consequently, the information processing subsystem was generating a large quantity of reports each reporting period. Company management became concerned about the quantity of report information that was being produced by the system. The internal audit department was asked to evaluate the effectiveness of the reports generated by the system. The audit staff determined early in the study that more information was being generated by the information processing subsystem than could be used effectively. They noted the following reactions to this information overload:
• Many department heads would not act on certain reports during periods of peak activity.
The department heads would let these reports accumulate with the hope of catching up during subsequent lulls.
• Some department heads had so many reports they did not act at all on the information, or they made incorrect decisions because of misuse of the information.
• Frequently, actions required by the nature of the report data were not taken until the department heads were reminded by others who needed the decisions. These department heads did not appear to have developed a priority system for acting on the information produced by the information processing subsystem.
• Department heads often would develop the information they needed from alternative, independent sources, rather than use the reports generated by the information processing subsystem. This was often easier than trying to search among the reports for the needed data.
Requirements:
1. Indicate whether each of the foregoing four reactions contributes positively or negatively to the Wright Company’s operating effectiveness. Explain your answer for each of the four reactions.
2. For each reaction that you indicated as negative, recommend alternative procedures the Wright Company could employ to eliminate this negative contribution to operating effectiveness. (CMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kenbart Company (Redesigning Profit Plan Report)
The managers at Kenbart Company have decided that increased emphasis must be placed on profit planning and comparing ‘‘results’’ to ‘‘plans.’’ A new profit planning system has been implemented to help with this objective. The company uses contribution margin reporting for internal reporting purposes and applies the concept of flexible budgeting for estimating variable costs. Kenbart’s executive management uses the following terms when reviewing and analyzing actual results and the profit plan.
- Original Plan: profit plan approved and adopted by management for the year
- Revised Plan: original plan modified as a consequence of action taken during the year (usually quarterly) by executive management
- Flexed Revised Plan: the most current plan (i.e., either original plan or revised plan, if one has been prepared) adjusted for changes in volume and variable expense rates
- YTD Actual Results: the actual results of operations for the year
- Current Outlook: the summation of the actual year to date results of operations plus the flexed revised plan for the remaining months of the year
Executive management meets monthly to review the actual results compared with the profit plan. Any assumptions or major changes in the profit plan usually are incorporated on a quarterly basis once the first quarter is completed. provides an outline of the basic Profit Plan Report designed by the information processing subsystem. The current system produces this report at the end of the month and whenever executive management initiates a change or modification in its plans. Consequently, many different versions of the firm’s profit plan exist, which makes analysis difficult and confusing.
Several members of executive management have voiced disapproval of the Profit Plan Report because the ‘‘Plan’’ column is not well defined and varies in meaning from one report to another. Furthermore, the report does not include a current outlook column.
|
Kenbert Company Profit Plan Report Month, Year to Date
|
|
Sales
|
Month
|
|
Year to Date
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs
|
Over/(Under)
|
Over/(Under)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
Actual
|
plan
|
$
|
%
|
Actual
|
plan
|
$
|
%
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variable overhead
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total variable manufacturing costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing margin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variable selling expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
General administration
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Therefore, the accounting subsystem has been asked to work with the information processing subsystem in modifying the report so that users can better understand the information being conveyed and the reference points for comparison of results.
Requirements:
1. Redesign the layout of the Profit Plan Report so that it will be more useful to Kenbart’s executive management in its task of reviewing results and planning operations.
2. Explain the reason for each modification you make in the report.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stephen Kerr Cosmetics (Point Scoring Analysis) Kerr Cosmetics distributes cosmetic products to large retailers across the country. The firm was started in 1975 by its first president, Stephen Kerr, who still serves as chairman of the board. Over the years, the company has grown in size and complexity. As the company has prospered, Richard Mason, the controller, has acquired and installed new accounting software to accommodate the increasing demands on the firm’s accounting systems.
This year, Richard has convinced Stephen that it is time to upgrade their payroll system, which is now 7 years old. The company hires an outside consultant, who examines their situation and concludes that either one of two systems can meet their requirements.
Richard therefore asks two of his most competent employees, Fritz Bauman and Meg Chrisman, to help him perform a point scoring analysis and make a final choice.
The three individuals meet as a study team and agree upon five qualities for rating the two vendors: (1) need for further modifications, (2) ease of use, (3) strength of internal controls, (4) flexibility for updating and Internet options, and (5) vendor support. To help them rate the two vendors on these five criteria, the committee invites representatives from each vendor to visit the company and make a presentation. Fritz makes arrangements for the presentation team from Vendor A to present on a Friday morning, and a similar team from Vendor B to visit that same afternoon. Unfortunately, an emergency makes it impossible for Richard to attend either presentation. Meg and Fritz attend both sessions, but come away with very different impressions of the competing software. The table below provides some relevant data.
Requirements:
1. To start their analysis, Meg and Fritz decide to use their own ratings to perform separate point scoring analyses. For this part, use equal weightings of 0.2 for each category. Perform similar analyses using a spreadsheet. Which vendor does each person prefer?
2. Both Meg and Fritz decide that using equal weight for each category doesn’t make sense. After some discussion, they agree to the ‘‘compromise weights’’ shown below. They again perform their analyses. Which vendor does each person prefer now?
3. Fritz and Meg show their results to Richard,who suggests that they use their compromise weights but us combined averages for their grades for each vendor. They perform yet a third analysis. Which vendor receives the highest total now?
4. What do these exercises suggest about point scoring analyses? Does this method still seem ‘‘objective’’ to you? Why or why not?
|
|
|
Fritz’s Weights Meg’s Weights
|
|
|
Equal
|
Compromise
|
Vendor
|
Vendor
|
Vendor
|
Vendor
|
|
Weights
|
Weights
|
A
|
B
|
A
|
B
|
|
Required Modifications
|
0.2
|
0.2
|
3
|
2
|
3
|
3
|
|
Ease of Use
|
0.2
|
0.3
|
8
|
3
|
4
|
6
|
|
Internal Controls
|
0.2
|
0.1
|
3
|
4
|
2
|
4
|
|
Flexibility
|
0.2
|
0.1
|
4
|
5
|
3
|
7
|
|
Vendor Support
|
0.2
|
0.3
|
7
|
5
|
3
|
9
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Continuous auditing has the potential to reduce labor costs associated with auditing. It also can provide audit assurance closer to the occurrence of a transaction, which improves the reliability of frequent or real time financial reports. Using an Internet search engine, find an example of an organization’s usage of continuous auditing.
|
|
Losses
|
|
|
|
Probability That
|
Low
|
High
|
Estimated
|
|
Hazard
|
Loss Will Occur
|
Estimate
|
Estimate
|
Control Costs
|
|
Equipment failure
|
0.08
|
$50,000
|
$150,000
|
$2,000
|
|
Software failure
|
0.1
|
4,000
|
18,000
|
1,400
|
|
Vandalism
|
0.65
|
1,000
|
15,000
|
8,000
|
|
Embezzlement
|
0.05
|
3,000
|
9,000
|
1,000
|
|
Brownout
|
0.4
|
850
|
2,000
|
250
|
|
Power surge
|
0.4
|
850
|
2,000
|
300
|
|
Flood
|
0.15
|
250,000
|
500,000
|
2,500
|
|
Fire
|
0.1
|
150,000
|
300,000
|
4,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
IT Auditing at Merriman, Davenport, and Walker, P.C. (IT Audit Function) Merriman, Davenport, and Walker, P.C. is a regional public accounting firm located in Norfolk, Virginia. The firm specializes in audits of small to mid size businesses and serves clients throughout Virginia, the District of Columbia, and North Carolina. Connie Merriman, the founding partner, started the firm in 1985, and now employs forty audit staff and four tax accountants.
During the past twenty years, Merriman, Davenport, and Walker’s clients have become increasingly sophisticated in their computerized accounting applications. Most of the auditing staff members have developed IT auditing skills and employ them as deemed appropriate when conducting financial audits. However, Connie Merriman has felt for some time that hiring one or two specialized IT auditors would be a good idea and might reduce audit costs, and could also increase firm revenues.
Requirements:
1. Explain how the IT auditors might be able to reduce the cost of an annual audit for a mid sized client?
2. How would the IT auditors most likely interface with the financial audit team on a specific client engagement?
3. What are some new services the firm might be able to offer that would help them to increase revenues?
4. What limitations on services that the IT auditors might perform are imposed by the Sarbanes Oxley Act?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic Requirements (Systems Reliability Assurance)
Kara and Scott Baker own a small retail company, Basic Requirements, with one store located in a small college town and a website through which customers can make purchases. The store sells traditional but up to date clothing for young women such as tee shirts, jeans, chinos, and skirts. The store has been open for ten years and the owners added the online shopping capability just last year. Online business has been slow, but Kara and Scott believe that as student customers graduate from the university they will use the online site to continue to have access to their favorite store from their college days.
The store’s website has many features. It classifies clothing by type and customers can view items in various colors. To purchase an item, the user clicks on the icon depicting the desired product and adds it to an individual online shopping basket. The customer can view the basket and make a purchase at any time while browsing the site. When checking out at the site, a new customer must first register, providing billing and shipping information, as well as credit card data. Returning customers log in with the identification code and password they created when they registered. They also use that method to check on an order status. If a customer forgets their login information, they can simply click on a link to have it emailed to them. Once a user registers, Basic Requirements’ system will automatically add their email address to a file that they use to regularly send out emails about sales and other promotions.
Kara and Scott are concerned about internal controls in their business. They especially worry because they know that their web access creates some special risks. They have asked one of their customers who is an accounting student at the university to evaluate the reliability of their information system, with respect to security, availability, and privacy.
Requirements:
1. Identify two security, availability, and privacy risks that Basic Requirements faces.
2. For each risk identified above, describe two internal controls Basic Requirements should use to protect against these risks.
3. The accounting student who is evaluating the reliability of Basic Requirements’ information system is interested in becoming an IT auditor. Describe some of the specific actions an IT auditor would take to verify that Kara and Scott have adequate controls in place concerning privacy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tiffany Martin, CPA (Information Technology Audit Skills)
Tiffany Martin is an audit manager in a medium sized public accounting firm. Tiffany graduated from college seven years ago with a degree in accounting. She obtained her CPA certification soon after she joined the firm where she currently works. Tiffany is a financial auditor; she has had little training in auditing computerized information systems.
The current engagement Tiffany is working on includes a complex information processing system with multiple applications. The financial accounting transactions are processed on server. The IT department employs 25 personnel, including programmers, systems analysts, a database administrator, computer operators, technical support personnel, and a director. Tiffany has not spoken with anyone in the department because she is fearful that her lack of technical knowledge relative to IT will cause some concern with the client. Because Tiffany does not understand the complexities of the computer processing environment, she is unable to determine what risks might result from the computerized system’s operations. She is particularly worried about unauthorized changes to programs and data that would affect the reliability of the financial statements.
Tiffany has spoken to Dick Stanton, the partner who has responsibility for this audit client, about her concerns. Dick has suggested that Tiffany conduct more substantive testing than she would undertake in a less complex processing environment. This additional testing will hopefully ensure that there are no errors or fraud associated with the computer processing of the financial statements.
Requirements:
1. Do you think that Dick Stanton’s suggested approach is the most efficient way to control risks associated with complex computer environments?
2. How should Tiffany respond to Dick’s suggestion?
3. What can a public accounting firm, such as the one in which Tiffany works, do to ensure that audits of computerized accounting information systems are conducted efficiently and effectively?
4. Should Tiffany be allowed to conduct this audit given her limited level of skills? How might she acquire new skills?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Linz Company (Audit Program for User Accounts)
Jack Herron is an IT auditor with McGee LLP, a large national public accounting firm. His manager, Amanda McDermott, has assigned him to the Linz Company audit. The McGee financial auditors have requested that the IT auditors complete several auditing steps so that they may make a decision about the scope of their audit work. The IT auditors also need to evaluate IT controls to provide the financial auditors with information in order to garner an opinion on internal controls as part of Sarbanes Oxley compliance.
The Linz Company manufactures automotive parts and supplies them to the largest auto makers. The company has approximately 600 employees and has manufacturing operations and offices in three locations. Linz uses a mid sized ERP software program for manufacturers that they acquired and implemented two years ago.
Amanda has asked Jack to develop an audit program to examine logical access to the ERP system. According to the Security Administrator at Linz, each employee is assigned a unique User ID and password when they join the company. The company is very concerned about security, so there is no remote access to the ERP system. The ERP system requires that users change their passwords every six months. System and group settings assigned to each User ID determine what parts of the ERP systems are available to each user.
Requirements:
1. Explain how a deficiency in controls over User IDs and passwords might impact Linz’s financial statements.
2. Explain why auditing User IDs and passwords should be part of the overall IT audit program for Linz.
3. Describe at least four control procedures that Linz could have in place to ensure that only authorized users access the system and that user access is limited according to their responsibilities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
you discussed intranets and extranets, and identified the importance of each to accountants. Now, assume that you are a partner in a medium sized, local CPA firm. Your firm has 4 partners, 10 staff accountants, 1 research assistant, and an administrative assistant. Your firm is considered a technology leader in the local area and you consider this a competitive advantage for your firm. At the weekly staff meeting next Friday you want to discuss the topic of developing an intranet for the firm. To be sure everyone is prepared to discuss this topic, you want to develop a ‘‘talking paper,’’ which is a one page summary of salient points that you want to be sure you cover in your presentation to everyone. Assume you are the research assistant and the partner asks you to prepare this one page discussion aid.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following stated policies pertain to the e commerce website for Small Computers, Inc., a (fictitious) personal and handheld computer manufacturer and seller.
• We will only use information collected on this web for legitimate business purposes. We do not give away or rent any information to third parties.
• We will only contact you for legitimate business purposes, possibly from time to time, as needed. Please be 100% assured that we hold all transactions between you and our company in the strictest confidence.
Disclosure of Business Practices, Shipping, and Billing
• We will ship all items at the earliest possible date.
• We will not require you to accept items that you did not order.
• We will accept any returns from you of damaged or defective merchandise.
• In the event that we should accidentally bill you more than once for the same item, we will immediately issue you a refund.
Evaluate these stated policies in terms of how well they promote customer trust and confidence in Small Computers, Inc.’s electronic business operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hammaker Manufacturing IV (XBRL Enabled Software) Recall, the Hammaker Manufacturing Company (HMC) is located in Burke, Virginia, and manufactures specialty parts for Corvettes. The company implemented a new AIS with the help of a consulting firm. At the time, Hammaker was especially interested in collecting data about inventories. Then, HMC decided to accept the consulting firm’s recommendation to reengineer some processes in the production departments, rather than outsource these processes. Generally speaking, the BPR project is considered a success, based on the results that have been achieved—increased profits and more satisfied customers. To Denise’s credit, she kept the employees informed throughout the study phase so that they understood the need for change. As a result of employee involvement, many useful changes were made and no employees were terminated. Now, with increased profits and a very optimistic view of future growth, Hammaker meets with Denise and Lloyd to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of a new, more powerful AIS. Lloyd’s area of expertise is implementing ERPs, and he is eager to inform HMC about the advantages of selecting an XBRL enabled software solution for the firm.
Requirements:
1. What does it mean when software is ‘‘XBRL enabled’’?
2. Identify at least five advantages that Lloyd might discuss with Dick and Denise regarding an XBRL enabled software solution. Identify any disadvantages that might also be relevant for HMC.
3. Assume that you are Lloyd’s research assistant. Draft a memo for Lloyd to give to HMC that explains how XBRL works. Remember to keep in mind your audience. This should be an executive level piece of correspondence.
4. Now, as the research assistant, develop a PowerPoint presentation for Lloyd to give to Dick and Denise explaining exactly what sorts of benefits they could realize with an XBRL enabled software solution. Be creative, and use diagrams and examples where appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DeGraaf Office Supplies (Business Websites and Security) DeGraaf Office Supplies is a national retailer of office supplies, equipment, and furnishings.
The company opened its first store in 1932, in Columbus, Ohio. Currently, DeGraaf has 300 stores nationwide. Owner managers purchase and run franchised stores. Kim DeGraaf, the founder’s daughter, currently is President and CEO of the corporation. Sales revenues grew steadily during the past decade, but 2009 sales were quite disappointing, down 8% from 2008. The company’s stock price has also taken a big hit during the past few months. Kim resisted developing an Internet presence for the company, and it appears now that this was a mistake. Online sales of office supplies are growing rapidly, particularly in the business to business sector as business organizations are finding it faster and more efficient to enter their office supply orders electronically. The following is a conversation between Kim and Peter Brewer, Vice President of Marketing.
Peter: ‘‘Kim, I warned you that we were going to see sales decline if we didn’t hurry up and get on the Internet. The established brick and mortar businesses in many industries are suffering.’’ Kim: ‘‘You were right, Peter. I think I’ve been overly concerned about security and privacy issues. I also didn’t really believe that online sales in our industry would take off the way they have. I hope we’re not too late, because I want to move ahead immediately in developing a website. I know other companies have a jump start but hopefully our brand name recognition and reputation for quality will help us. I have contracted with a consulting firm to start the website development and am going to give a press release this afternoon about our plans. Fortunately, our current enterprise software has electronic commerce features and the consultants tell me that our Internet site should be ready for business in about six months. I need you to have your staff prepare an analysis of our competitor websites. I would also like as much information as possible related to providing retail and business customers with security and privacy over online transactions with us.’’
Peter: ‘‘This is great news! I will get my staff busy at once providing you and the consulting team with the information they need. There will be a lot of decisions to make.
I’ve studied all the office supply websites and they are organized in a variety of ways. For instance, some sites provide customers with the option to select a type of product such as ballpoint pens and then show the vendor options in that category, while other sites are organized around the vendors. This type of site allows customers to select a vendor name, such as PaperMate, and then lists all the product offerings from that vendor. Hopefully, the consultants have a lot of experience with business websites and they can help us with many of these issues.’’
Requirements:
1. Develop a set of four to five criteria for evaluating their website.
2. Evaluate DeGraaf’s chances for catching up to competitors in the online marketplace.
3. Discuss the privacy and security concerns for companies doing business electronically.
Make recommendations to DeGraaf Office Supplies for addressing these concerns.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Barra Concrete (XOR Encryption) Barra Concrete specializes in creating driveways and curbs for the residential market. Its accounting software uses exclusive OR (XOR) operations to convert the individual bits of a plaintext message into cyphertext. The rules are as follows:
|
|
Exclusive OR rules
|
|
|
Rule 1
|
Rule 2
|
Rule 3
|
Rule 4
|
|
Plaintext bit
|
$0
|
0
|
$1
|
1
|
|
Bit in key
|
0
|
1
|
0
|
1
|
|
Cypertext result
|
0
|
1
|
1
|
0
|
In other words, exactly one of the bits must be a ‘‘1’’ and the other a ‘‘0’’ for the result of an exclusive OR operation to be a ‘‘1.’’ To illustrate, suppose that the bits representing a single plaintext character were 1010 0101 and the secret key used just the four bits 1110.
Here are the results of the XOR operation, using this key:
|
Plaintext bits
|
1010
|
101
|
|
Key (repeated)
|
1110
|
1110
|
|
Cypher text result
|
100
|
1011
|
The encrypted bits are the cypher text, or 0100 1011 as shown. These (encrypted) bits are what the software would transmit to the recipient.
Requirements:
1. Decrypting the cipher text created by an XOR operation is easy—just use the same XOR operation on the encrypted bits! Demonstrate this for the example above.
2. Suppose the secret key were longer—the eight bits 1100 0011. Using this key and an exclusive OR, what is the cipher text for the plaintext message ‘‘Go, team’’ if the bit configuration for these letters is as shown below. (Hint: the final answer consists of seven sets of data, each containing eight bits.)
|
Message
|
G
|
O
|
,
|
T
|
E
|
A
|
M
|
|
Binary
|
0100 0111
|
0100 1111
|
0010 1100
|
0101 0100
|
0100 0101
|
0100 0001
|
0100 1101
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Cash Flows The statement of cash flows provides information on the cash receipts and payments for a specific period of time.The statement of cash flows reports (1) the cash effects of a company’s operations during a period, (2) its investing transactions, (3) its financing transactions, (4) the net increase or decrease in cash during the period, and (5) the cash amount at the end of the period.
Reporting the sources, uses, and change in cash is useful because investors, creditors, and others want to know what is happening to a company’s most liquid resource.The statement of cash flows provides answers to the following simple but important questions.
1. Where did cash come from during the period?
2. What was cash used for during the period?
3. What was the change in the cash balance during the period?
As shown in Softbyte’s statement of cash flows, cash increased $8,050 during the period. Net cash flow provided from operating activities increased cash $1,350. Cash flow from investing transactions decreased cash $7,000. And cash flow from financing transactions increased cash $13,700. At this time, you need not be concerned with how these amounts are determined. Chapter 17 will examine the statement of cash flows in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is selected information related to Flanagan Company at December 31, 2010. Flanagan reports financial information monthly.
|
Office Equipment
|
$10,000
|
Utilities Expense
|
$4,000
|
|
Cash
|
8,000
|
Accounts Receivable
|
9,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
36,000
|
Wages Expense
|
7,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
11,000
|
Notes Payable
|
16,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
2,000
|
Drawings
|
5,000
|
(a) Determine the total assets of Flanagan Company at December 31, 2010.
(b) Determine the net income that Flanagan Company reported for December
(c) Determine the owner’s equity of Flanagan Company at December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joan Robinson opens her own law office on July 1, 2010. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.
1. Joan invested $11,000 in cash in the law practice.
2. Paid $800 for July rent on office space.
3. Purchased office equipment on account $3,000.
4. Provided legal services to clients for cash $1,500.
5. Borrowed $700 cash from a bank on a note payable.
6. Performed legal services for client on account $2,000.
7. Paid monthly expenses: salaries $500, utilities $300, and telephone $100.
8. Joan withdraws $1,000 cash for personal use.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a tabular summary of the transactions.
(b) Prepare the income statement, owner’s equity statement, and balance sheet at July 31 for Joan Robinson, Attorney.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is selected information related to Broadway Company at December 31, 2010. Broadway reports financial information monthly.
|
Accounts Payable
|
$3,000
|
Salaries Expense
|
16,500
|
|
Cash
|
7,000
|
Note Payable
|
25,000
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
6,000
|
Rent Expense
|
10,500
|
|
Service Revenue
|
54,000
|
Accounts Receivable
|
13,500
|
|
Equipment
|
29,000
|
Drawings
|
7,500
|
(a) Determine the total assets of Broadway Company at December 31, 2010.
(b) Determine the net income that Broadway Company reported for December 2010.
(c) Determine the owner’s equity of Broadway Company at December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Urlacher Company performs the following accounting tasks during the year.
Analyzing and interpreting information.
Classifying economic events.
Explaining uses, meaning, and limitations of data.
Keeping a systematic chronological diary of events.
Measuring events in dollars and cents.
Preparing accounting reports.
Reporting information in a standard format.
Selecting economic activities relevant to the company.
Summarizing economic events.
Accounting is “an information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users.”
Instructions Categorize the accounting tasks performed by Urlacher as relating to either the identification (I), recording (R), or communication (C) aspects of accounting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) The following are users of financial statements.
______Customers ______Securities and Exchange Commission
______Internal Revenue Service ______Store manager
______Labor unions ______Suppliers
______Marketing manager ______Vice president of finance
______Production supervisor
Instructions
Identify the users as being either external users or internal users.
(b) The following questions could be asked by an internal user or an external user.
______Can we afford to give our employees a pay raise?
______Did the company earn a satisfactory income?
______Do we need to borrow in the near future?
______How does the company’s profitability compare to other companies?
______What does it cost us to manufacture each unit produced?
______Which product should we emphasize?
______Will the company be able to pay its short term debts?
Instructions
Identify each of the questions as being more likely asked by an internal user or an external user.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prior to and during 2007, the Shadrach Company reported tax depreciation at an amount higher than the amount of financial depreciation, resulting in a book value of the depreciable assets of $24,500 for financial reporting purposes and of $20,000 for tax purposes at the end of 2007.
In addition, the company recognized a $3,500 estimated liability for legal expenses in the financial statements during 2007; it expects to pay this liability (and deduct it for tax purposes) in 2011. The current tax rate is 30%, no change in the tax rate has been enacted, and the company expects to be profitable in future years. What is the amount of the net noncurrent deferred tax liability at the end of 2007?
a. $300
b. $450
c. $1,050
d. $1,350
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of 2007, Conley Company purchased an asset at a cost of $10,000. For financial reporting purposes, the asset has a four year life with no residual value, and is depreciated by the straight line method beginning in 2007. For tax purposes, the asset is depreciated under MACRS using a five year recovery period. Prior to 2007, the company had no deferred tax liability or asset. The difference between depreciation for financial reporting purposes and income tax purposes is the only temporary difference between pretax financial income and taxable income. The current income tax rate is 30% and no change in the tax rate has been enacted for future years. In 2007 and 2008, taxable income will be higher or lower than financial income by what amount?
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Higher by $150
|
Lower by $210
|
|
Higher by $500
|
Lower by $700
|
|
Lower by $500
|
Higher by $700
|
|
Lower by $1,500
|
Higher by $100
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Oliver Company earned taxable income of $7,500 during 2007, its first year of operations. A reconciliation of pretax financial income and taxable income indicated that an additional $2,500 of accelerated depreciation was deducted for tax purposes and that an estimated expense of $5,800 was deducted for financial reporting purposes. The estimated expense is not expected to be deductible for tax purposes until 2010, when the liability is paid. The current tax rate is 30% and no change in the tax rate has been enacted for future years. The resulting journal entry for 2007 would be:
|
a
|
Income Tax Expense
|
1,260
|
|
Deferred Tax Asset
|
1,740
|
|
Deferred Tax Liability
|
750
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
2,250
|
|
b
|
Income Tax Expense
|
1,260
|
|
Deferred Tax Asset
|
990
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
2,250
|
|
c
|
Income Tax Expense
|
3,240
|
|
Deferred Tax Liability
|
990
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
2,250
|
|
d
|
Income Tax Expense
|
3,000
|
|
Deferred Tax Liability
|
750
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
2,250
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Future Deductible Amount Pito Company has been in operation for several years. During those years the company has been profitable, and it expects to continue to be profitable in the foreseeable future. At the beginning of 2007, the company has a deferred tax asset of $360 pertaining to one future deductible amount. During 2007, the company earned taxable income of $51,000, which was taxed at a rate of 30% (no change in the tax rate has been enacted for future years). At the end of 2007, the book value of the current liability to which the deferred tax asset relates for financial reporting purposes exceeded the book value for income tax purposes by $6,000.
Required
1. Prepare the income tax journal entry of the Pito Company at the end of 2007.
2. Show how the deferred tax asset is reported on the Pito Company’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuation Account At the end of 2007, its first year of operations, the Beattie Company reported taxable income of $38,000 and pretax financial income of $34,400. The difference is due to the way the company handles its warranty costs.
For tax purposes, the company deducts the warranty costs as they are paid. For financial reporting purposes, the company provides for a year end estimated warranty liability based on future expected costs. The company is subject to a 30% tax rate for 2007 and no change in the tax rate has been enacted for future years. Based on verifiable evidence, the company decides it should establish a valuation allowance of 60% of its ending deferred tax asset.
Required
1. Prepare the income tax journal entry of the Beattie Company at the end of 2007.
2. Prepare the lower portion of the Beattie Company’s 2007 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income Taxes Thun Company has been in operation for several years. It has both a deductible and a taxable temporary difference. At the beginning of 2007, its deferred tax asset was $690 and its deferred tax liability was $750. The company expects its future deductible amount to be “deductible” in 2008 and its future taxable amount to be “taxable” in 2009. In 2006 Congress enacted income tax rates for future years as follows: 2007, 30%; 2008, 34%; and 2009, 35%. At the end of 2007, the company reported income taxes payable of $12,600, an increase in its deferred tax liability of $300, and an ending balance in its deferred tax asset of $860. The company has prepared the following schedule of items related to its income taxes for 2007.
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
Taxable income for 2007
|
|
Future taxable amount, 12/31/07
|
|
Increase in future deductible amount during 2007
|
|
Income tax expense for 2007
|
Required
Fill in the blanks in the preceding schedule. Show your calculations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Originating and Reversing Difference The Tanner Corporation begins operations in 2006 and reports the following amounts of pretax financial income and taxable income for the years 2006 through 2010. The company has only one temporary difference, and only one originating or reversing difference occurs in any single year. The company is subject to a tax rate of 30% for all the years.
|
Year
|
Pretax Financial Income
|
Taxable Income
|
|
2006
|
$70,000
|
$50,000
|
|
2007
|
85,000
|
75,000
|
|
2008
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
2009
|
82,000
|
92,000
|
|
2010
|
93,000
|
113,000
|
Required
1. Prepare the income tax journal entry for each year.
2. What do you notice about the balance in the deferred taxes over the five years?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Temporary Differences Vickers Company reports taxable income of $4,500 for 2007. The company has two temporary differences between pretax financial income and taxable income at the end of 2007. The first difference is expected to result in taxable amounts totaling $2,470 in future years. The second difference is expected to result in deductible amounts totaling $1,360 in future years. The company has a deferred tax asset of $372 and a deferred tax liability of $690 at the beginning of 2007. The current tax rate is 30% and no change in the tax rate has been enacted for future years. The company has positive, verifiable evidence of future taxable income.
Required
Prepare the income tax journal entry of the Vickers Company at the end of 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating Loss At the end of 2007, its first year of operations, the Swelland Company reported a pretax operating loss of $32,000 for both financial reporting and income tax purposes. At that time the company had no positive verifiable evidence that it would earn future taxable income. However, due to successful management, the company reported pretax operating income (and taxable income) of $70,000 in 2008. During both years, the income tax rate was 30% and no change had been enacted for future years.
Required
1. Prepare the income tax journal entries of the Swelland Company at the end of 2007.
2. Prepare the income tax journal entry of the Swelland Company at the end of 2008.
3. Prepare the lower portion of Swelland’s 2008 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating Loss Baxter Company began operations in 2003 and was profitable through 2006, during which time the tax rate was 30%. At the end of 2007, the company reported a pretax operating loss of $135,000 for both financial reporting and income taxes. Because the tax rate was increased to 40% in 2007, the company elects to forgo any carryback of the operating loss. In 2008 the company reported pretax operating income of $150,000.
Required
1. Prepare the income tax journal entry of the Baxter Company at the end of 2007.
2. Prepare the lower portion of Baxter’s 2007 income statement.
3. Explain why Baxter Company elected to forgo any carryback in 2007.
4. Prepare the income tax journal entry of the Baxter Company at the end of 2008.
5. Prepare the lower portion of Baxter’s 2008 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intraperiod Tax Allocation The Wright Company reports the following information for the year ended December 31, 2007:
|
Pretax income from continuing operations
|
$160,000a
|
|
Pretax gain from sale of investment (extraordinary item)
|
30,000a
|
|
Pretax income from operations of discontinued Division M
|
27,000
|
|
Pretax loss on disposal of Division M
|
45,000
|
|
Pretax correction of error in understating depreciation in 2006
|
8,000
|
|
Retained earnings, January 1, 2007
|
410,000
|
|
Cash dividends during 2007
|
48,000
|
|
Total income tax
|
36,000b
|
a. Of this amount, revenues are $400,000 and expenses are $240,000.
b. Of this amount $7,500 relates to the extraordinary item; $6,750 relates to the pretax income from the operations of discontinued Division M; the pretax loss on the disposal of Division M resulted in an income tax savings of $11,250; and the pretax correction of the depreciation error resulted in an income tax savings of $2,000.
Required
1. Prepare the year end journal entry necessary to record the 2007 intraperiod income tax allocation in regard to the preceding information.
2. Prepare Wright’s 2007 income statement and statement of retained earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating Intraperiod Income Taxes The Stam Corporation reports the following pretax accounting (and taxable) income items during 2007:
|
Income from continuing operations
|
$90,000a
|
|
Loss from operations of a discontinued division
|
10,000
|
|
Gain from the disposal of the discontinued division
|
25,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
20,000
|
a. Of this amount, revenues are $320,000 and expenses are $230,000.
Required
1. Prepare the journal entry necessary to record the 2007 intraperiod income tax allocation in regard to the preceding information. Assume a tax rate of 15% on the first $40,000 of income and a rate of 30% on income in excess of $40,000.
2. Prepare Stam’s 2007 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Disclosure of Intraperiod Tax Allocation The Lester Corporation reports $119,000 of both pretax accounting “income” and taxable income in 2007. In addition to income from continuing operations (of which revenues are $500,000), included in this “income” is a $25,000 extraordinary loss from a fire, a $17,000 loss from operations of discontinued Division W, a $15,000 gain on the disposal of Division W, and a $14,000 correction of an error due to the understatement of bad debt expense in 2006. The company is subject to a 20% tax rate on the first 50,000 of income and a rate of 25% on income in excess of $50,000.
Required
1. Show how this information is disclosed on Lester’s 2007 income statement.
2. Prepare Lester’s 2007 statement of retained earnings. (Assume a beginning retained earnings balance of $191,000 and cash dividends during 2007 amounting to $65,000.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance Sheet Presentation The Thiel Company reports the following deferred tax items at the end of 2007:
|
Deferred Tax Item #
|
Account Balance
|
Related Asset or Liability
|
|
1
|
$ 7,200 credit
|
Current asset
|
|
2
|
6,700 debit
|
Current liability
|
|
3
|
15,500 credit
|
Noncurrent asset
|
|
4
|
10,600 debit
|
Noncurrent liability
|
Required
Show how the preceding deferred tax items are reported on the Thiel Company’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stevenson Apparel is a manufacturer of fashion clothing that has just opened its first large retail store for selling in season clothes at regular prices. The company’s competitive strategy depends on a comprehensive point of sale (POS) system supporting online, up to the minute sales totals, day to day tracking of stock information, and quick checkout of customer purchases. Because cashiers were already familiar with electronic cash registers, management decided that only minimal training was required. Cashiers enter four digit stock tracking numbers (STNs) into one of the POS terminals that retrieves price and description data, computes the tax and total amount due, accepts the type of payment, and controls the cash drawer. A unique STN identifies each of the 9,500 pieces of merchandise. The central computer server maintains stock information.
In the first month of operation, new cashiers were awkward using the new system. They eventually became proficient users but were frustrated with the slow printing of sales tickets and the unpredictable action of their cash drawers. Each checkout stand has a telephone that cashiers use to call for approval of credit card transactions. Customers became impatient when credit approvals delayed the checkout process or when the computer was down, thus stopping all sales, including cash sales. Identify four problems with the system and describe how you would remedy each of them.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jay Beck works for the NSR Consulting Firm. His friend, Hank Henley, is the general manager and majority stockholder of the Pacific Worldwinds, a professional football team. Hank asked Jay to design an online, real time computer system for ‘‘the efficient operation of the football franchise.’’ Jay was quite confused because he could not think of any possible uses for an online, real time system within the operational activities of a football team (or any other type of athletic team). Assume that you are also employed at the consulting firm. Provide several suggestions to Jay concerning specific areas of athletic teams’ (football teams, baseball teams, etc.) information systems where an online, real time computer configuration might be beneficial to managerial decision making.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Installment Method Sales On October 2, 2007 the Television Company sold a set costing $400 to Jones for $600. Jones made a down payment of $150 and agreed to pay $25 the first of each month for 18 months thereafter.
Jones paid the first two installments due on November 1 and December 1, 2007. In 2008 Jones made five payments, but then defaulted on the balance of the payments. The set was repossessed on November 1, 2008. The company closes its books as of December 31.
Required
1. Give three different amounts that might be shown as realized income for 2007 and indicate the circumstances under which each of these amounts would be acceptable.
2. Assuming that the repossessed television set has a wholesale value of $50 and a retail value of $75, prepare a journal entry to record the repossession under the “installment method” of accounting. Explain fully the reasoning applicable to your entry.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics and Revenue and Expense Recognition You are employed by a local CPA firm, and one of your clients is Tiger Manufacturing Company. Tiger has been very successful in recent years, averaging approximately 10% increase in earnings each year. The company is planning a public stock offering early next year, which would bring significant fees to your firm. It would also allow the company to finance a much needed expansion that would allow the company to hire additional employees.
The audit is nearing completion, and it appears that the company will again report a significant increase in earnings.
However, two issues have arisen. First, the company has a large order from a purchaser to be shipped FOB shipping point in early January. The inventory was completed and warehoused late in December, but it was not segregated. Management has included the selling price (less the related expense) in the current year’s net income. Second, the company has added capitalized interest to the cost of two large special orders that are nearing completion. If both these issues are resolved in a way that decreases net income, the company’s net income will be lower than the amount reported last year.
Required
From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, discuss the issues raised by this situation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Researching GAAP Situation When asked about a $518 million “prepaid expense and deferred charge” on its balance sheet for 1990, Sears says that about $100 million of the figure—mainly for the catalog— consists of advertising costs whose impact on profit has been deferred. “These costs are paid but aren’t charged against profits” yet, says a spokesman. Procter and Gamble generally allocates advertising costs based on the number of cases of products it ships.
A spokesman for McDonald’s says that a “small portion” of the $108 million in prepaid expenses and other current assets on its balance sheet for 1990 is deferred production costs for certain commercials and creative development. Nike says that it deducts all advertising costs immediately, and calls advertising cost deferral “a bogus exercise.” Philip Morris accrued $1.4 billion in marketing costs on the liability side of its balance sheet for 1990. This means that Philip Morris is deducting advertising costs it has not yet paid to help smooth out profits from year to year. An analyst says, “I call such amounts ‘hidden earnings’ for future years when financial results aren’t as good as Philip Morris would like. Then, it could lower its advertising cost deductions with this accrual.”
Directions
1. Research the generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short memo that summarizes how to report advertising costs. Cite your reference(s) and applicable paragraph numbers.
2. Are each of the companies complying with the policy? Assume that all the companies recognize revenue at the time of sale.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Researching GAAP Situation Amre Inc. capitalized its marketing costs, such as the cost of purchasing mailing lists, instead of treating the costs as expenses. Inspeech capitalized estimated selling, general, and administrative costs of various acquired companies’ accounting and billing activities for a period of three months following the acquisition. Similarly, the company capitalized search costs to hire new management employees, salaries of individuals involved with the integration of newly acquired companies, and fees for studies by outside consultants. Management justified capitalizing these expenses because they were required to implement the company’s expansion strategy and would benefit future periods.
Among the costs Chambers deferred were portions of executives’ salaries for time spent on developing projects such as new landfills. In addition, the company delayed recognizing some public relations and legal costs, as well as executive travel expenses.
Directions
Research the generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short memo that summarizes how to report advertising costs. Cite your reference(s) and applicable paragraph numbers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Alternatives The Slattery Company was formed on January 1, 2007 to build a single product.
The company issued no par common stock on that date for $300,000 cash. The product costs $20 to make, all of which is paid in cash at the time of production. The company sells each unit of the product for $35 on credit and incurs sales commissions per unit of $5 cash. In 2007 the company produced 10,000 units, shipped 9,000 units, and received payment for 8,000 units.
Required
1. Prepare the 2007 income statement and ending balance sheet under each of the following methods:
a. Revenue recognition at the time of sale (shipment)
b. Revenue recognition during production
c. Revenue recognition at the time of cash receipt
2. Which method provides the most useful information to users? Under what circumstances would the other methods provide more useful information?
3. In 2008 the company produced 15,000 units, shipped 16,000 units, and received payment for 17,000 units. What conclusion can you make about the balance in Retained Earnings on December 31, 2008 for each method of revenue recognition?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Long Term Construction Contracts The Fender Construction Company receives a contract to build a building over a period of three years for a price of $700,000. Information relating to the performance of the contract is summarized as follows:
|
2007
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Construction costs incurred during the year
|
$150,000
|
$242,000
|
$168,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete
|
350,000
|
168,000
|
—
|
|
Billings during the year
|
120,000
|
250,000
|
330,000
|
|
Collections during the year
|
100,000
|
260,000
|
340,000
|
Required
Prepare journal entries for all three years under (1) the percentage of completion method, and (2) the completed contract method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Long Term Construction Contracts The Forman Company has contracted to build a dam over a period of four years for $3,000,000. Information relating to the performance of the contract is summarized as follows:
|
2007
|
2008
|
2009
|
2010
|
|
Construction costs incurred during the year
|
$300,000
|
$1,100,000
|
$863,000
|
$837,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete
|
2,200,000
|
1,400,000
|
837,000
|
—
|
|
Billings during the year
|
280,000
|
870,000
|
1,030,000
|
820,000
|
|
Collections during the year
|
270,000
|
875,000
|
1,010,000
|
845,000
|
Required
1. Compute the profit or loss for each year of the contract under (a) the percentage of completion method, and (b) the completed contract method.
2. Prepare the relevant sections of the income statement and ending balance sheet for each year under (a) the percentage of completion method, and (b) the completed contract method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Long Term Construction Contracts The Rice Company signed a contract to build a dam over a period of three years for a price of $10,000,000. Information relating to the performance of the contract is summarized as follows:
|
2007
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Construction costs incurred during the year
|
$2,000,000
|
$4,000,000
|
$6,000,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete
|
6,000,000
|
6,000,000
|
—
|
|
Billings during the year
|
1,500,000
|
3,500,000
|
5,000,000
|
|
Collections during the year
|
1,300,000
|
3,600,000
|
5,100,000
|
Required
Prepare journal entries for all three years under (1) the percentage of completion method, and (2) the completed contract method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Proportional Performance Method The Hilt Company, a public relations company, signs two year contracts with its clients. For $80,000 in advance, the company agrees to ensure that the client’s name is mentioned five times on a network national news program, 10 times in a national news magazine, and 15 times on a local news program. In 2007 the company signed eight contracts; no additional contracts were signed in 2008.
In 2007 the company’s clients were mentioned 10 times on network national news programs, 40 times in national news magazines, and 22 times on local news programs. In 2008 the company’s clients were mentioned 30 times on national news programs, 40 times in national news magazines, and 98 times on local news programs. The relevant cost information for the eight contracts is as follows:
|
Initial direct costs
|
$20,000
|
|
Annual indirect costs
|
80,000
|
|
Estimated (and actual) total direct costs for two year period
|
260,000
|
|
Direct cost per
|
|
National news program
|
2,000
|
|
National news magazine
|
1,500
|
|
Local news program
|
500
|
Required
1. Prepare the income statements for 2007 and 2008.
2. From a theoretical viewpoint, how should the company compute the depreciation of its office building and office equipment that would be included in the preceding costs? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Under the Installment Method The following information is available for the Dassler Company, which began its operations in 2007:
1. Installment method sales
|
1. Installment method sales
|
|
2007
|
$520,000
|
|
2008
|
600,000
|
|
2. Gross profit percentage
|
|
2007
|
20%
|
|
2008
|
24%
|
|
3. Cash collections on installment method sales
|
|
2007
|
25% of 2007 sales
|
|
2008
|
55% of 2007 sales
|
|
30% of 2008 sales
|
|
4. Bad debt policy
|
|
The company estimates its bad debts to be 2% of installment method sales.
|
|
5. Defaults and repossessions
|
|
2007
|
$10,000 of 2007 installment method sales, of which $1,000 had been collected
|
|
2008
|
$20,000 of 2007 installment method sales, of which $4,000 had been collected
|
|
$15,000 of 2008 installment method sales, of which $2,000 had been collected
|
The policy of the company is to value repossessed items at 40% of their original selling price.
Required
Prepare the journal entries for 2007 and 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Under the Installment Method The Dyson Company sells computer games to teenagers. Selected accounts included in the trial balance at December 31, 2007 and 2008 are as follows:
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Installment accounts receivable, 2006
|
$80,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Installment accounts receivable, 2007
|
112,500
|
|
Allowance for doubtful installment accounts receivable, 2006
|
5,000
|
3,700
|
|
Allowance for doubtful installment accounts receivable, 2007
|
7,000
|
|
Deferred gross profit, 2006
|
16,000
|
3,500
|
|
Deferred gross profit, 2007
|
22,500
|
During 2007 installment method sales and cost of goods sold were $200,000 and $160,000, respectively. In 2007 the company repossessed games that had been sold in 2006 for $6,000 and on which $2,500 had been collected. The games were believed to be worth $1,000. No repossessions occurred on 2007 sales.
Required
Prepare summary journal entries for 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Recovery Method After a two year search for a buyer, Hobson, Inc. sold its idle plant facility to Jackson Company for $700,000 on January 1, 2005. On this date the plant had a depreciated cost on Hobson’s books of $500,000. Under the agreement Jackson paid $100,000 cash on January 1, 2005, and signed a $600,000 note bearing interest at 10%. The note was payable in installments of $100,000, $200,000, and $300,000 on January 1, 2006, 2007, and 2008, respectively. The note was secured by a mortgage on the property sold. Hobson appropriately accounted for the sale under the cost recovery method since there was no reasonable basis for estimating the degree of collectibility of the note receivable. Jackson repaid the note with three late installment payments, which were accepted by Hobson, as follows:
|
Date of Payment
|
Principal
|
Interest
|
|
1 Jul 06
|
$100,000
|
$90,000
|
|
31 Dec 07
|
200,000
|
75,000
|
|
1 Feb 09
|
300,000
|
32,500
|
Required
Prepare a schedule (using the following format) to record the initial transaction for the sale of the idle plant facility, the application of subsequent cash collections on the note, and the necessary journal entry on the date the transaction is complete.
|
Date
|
Cash Received Debit
|
Note Receivable Dr. (Cr.)
|
Idle Plant (Net) (Credit)
|
Deferred Income Dr. (Cr.)
|
Income Recognized (Credit)
|
|
Jan. 1, 2005
|
$100,000
|
|
1 Jul 06
|
190,000
|
|
Dec. 31, 2007
|
275,000
|
|
Feb. 1, 2009
|
332,500
|
|
Feb. 1, 2009
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Alternatives The following are the operating activities of three different companies.
Company X: Engages in long term service contracts involving a specific number of defined but not similar service acts. Uses proportional performance method to recognize revenues. Sells two year service contracts for $600 in advance.
Each service contract requires Company X to perform service act 1 a total of 30 times and service act 2 a total of 50 times during the two year period. At the beginning of 2007, 200 service contracts were sold. The following is a summary of the related cost information for the 200 service contracts:
|
Initial direct costs
|
$8,500
|
|
Annual indirect costs
|
9,300
|
|
Estimated (and actual) total direct costs (for two year period)
|
20,000
|
|
Direct cost per service act
|
|
Service act 1
|
$1.60
|
|
Service act 2
|
1.04
|
During 2007, service act 1 was performed 5,000 times and service act 2 was performed 4,000 times. During 2008, service acts 1 and 2 were performed 1,000 and 6,000 times, respectively.
Company Y: Sells goods on the installment basis. Uses the installment method (because these are exceptional cases) to recognize gross profits. The following is a summary of the installment sales, gross profit, operating expenses, and collections for 2007 and 2008:
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Installment method sales
|
$90,000
|
$110,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
35,100
|
45,100
|
|
Operating expenses
|
18,000
|
21,000
|
|
Cash collections from:
|
|
2006 installment method sales (2006 gross profit is 40%)
|
35,000
|
—
|
|
2007 installment method sales
|
67,000
|
23,000
|
|
2008 installment method sales
|
—
|
80,000
|
Company Z: Engages in long term construction contracts. Uses the percentage of completion method to recognize gross profits. Started contract 1 in 2006, contract 2 in 2007, and contract 3 in 2008. The total gross profit (estimated and actual) and the percentage complete for each contract at the end of 2007 through 2009 are:
|
Contract 1*
|
Contract 2
|
Contract 3
|
|
Gross profit
|
$800,000
|
$350,000
|
$600,000
|
|
% complete at the end of
|
|
2007
|
75%
|
40%
|
—
|
|
2008
|
100%
|
70%
|
35%
|
|
2009
|
100%
|
80%
|
Required
1. Prepare 2007 and 2008 condensed income statements for Company X.
2. Prepare 2007 and 2008 condensed income statements for Company Y.
3. Prepare a schedule that shows Company Z’s gross profit for 2007, 2008, and 2009.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Franchise Year Round Golf sells franchises for indoor golf driving ranges and putting greens. For each franchise, the company charges a nonrefundable initial franchise fee of $45,000. The franchise agreement requires a down payment of $10,000, with the balance covered by the issuance of a $35,000, 10% note, payable by the franchisee at the end of five years. Interest does not begin to accrue until the franchise opens, and the first interest payment is required 12 months after the franchise opens. The company sells only to qualified buyers so the collectibility of the note is always reasonably assured. The services required for the initial franchise fee are completed six months after the agreement is signed.
The franchisee is also required to pay a continuing fee of $6,000 per year, plus 10% of its gross sales. Half the $6,000 is applied against purchases of supplies from the franchisor, which are paid for in cash at the time of purchase. The franchisor charges a sales price of 50% above its cost on these supplies. In the first six months of 2007, the company sold four franchises which began operating at the end of December. These franchisees had sales of $160,000 in 2008, and purchased the allowable amount of supplies. In the second six months of 2007, the company sold one franchise which began operating on April 1, 2008. The franchisee had sales of $25,000 in 2008 and purchased $1,500 of supplies.
Required
Prepare the journal entries required by Year Round Golf in 2007 and 2008 to record the preceding events.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real Estate On January 1, 2007 the Hogback Company sold the Red Rocks Ranch, which constituted 20,000 acres of undeveloped land, to a limited partnership for $50 million. The land had originally cost Hogback $5 million. The terms of the sale included a cash payment of $9 million and a 10% note for $41 million to be paid in equal annual installments for 30 years. The note is secured by the land. Hogback paid a commission to a real estate company of 5% on the selling price.
Required
1. Should Hogback record the transaction as a sale? If so, prepare all the journal entries for 2007.
2. Assume, instead, that the company uses the installment method. Prepare all the journal entries for 2007.
3. Assume, instead, that the payments made to the Hogback Company were returnable at the option of the purchaser until June 30, 2008. Prepare all the journal entries for 2007. Ignore the sales commission.
4. Assume, instead, that the Hogback Company is obligated to make improvements costing $4 million over the next three years. In 2007 it made improvements costing $1 million. Prepare all the journal entries for 2007.
5. If the Hogback Company were the general partner of the limited partnership, would your answer to Requirement 1 change? If it were a limited partner?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consignments On January 1, 2007 the Hadad Company entered into a consignment agreement with the Trinidad Company. The agreement specifies that the consignee (Trinidad) is to sell the merchandise at a price of 30% above cost. Trinidad is required to pay Hadad the net sales price within 15 days of each sale to a third party. The net sales price is defined as the sales price, less any advertising costs incurred by Trinidad, and less a commission of 10% deducted from the sales price less the advertising costs. Hadad pays any costs incurred in shipping the merchandise to Trinidad. In 2007 Hadad shipped merchandise costing $300,000 to Trinidad and incurred delivery costs of $8,000. During the year (through December 15), Trinidad made sales of $195,000 and incurred advertising costs of $15,000, and paid the required amount to Hadad. On December 31, 2007, Hadad phoned Trinidad and was told that since December 15 additional sales of $39,000 had been made and advertising costs of $3,000 incurred. (Record this information in separate journal entries.)
Required
1. Prepare the journal entries for the Hadad Company.
2. What amount, and in what category, would Hadad Company report on its balance sheet on December 31, 2007?
3. Prepare the journal entries for the Trinidad Company.
4. What amount related to the consignment activities, and in what category, would the Trinidad Company report on its balance sheet on December 31, 2007?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Construction Contracts Village Company is accounting for a long term construction contract using the percentage of completion method. It is a three year, fixed fee contract that is presently in its first year. The latest reasonable estimates of total contract costs indicate that the contract will be completed at a profit. Village will submit progress billings to the customer and has reasonable assurance that collections on these billings will be received in each year of the contract.
Required
1. a. What is the justification for the percentage of completion method for long term construction contracts?
b. What facts in the preceding situation indicate that Village should account for this long term construction contract using the percentage of completion method?
2. How would the income recognized in each year of this long term construction contract be determined using the cost to cost method of determining percentage of completion?
3. What is the effect on income, if any, of the progress billings and the collections on these billings?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Methods The following situations are independent.
1. Carlson Company is an international consulting firm that has received a two year engagement from a client for a fee of $2 million. The company will assign differing numbers of personnel to the project depending on the needs of the project and the availability of personnel. The company requires a down payment of 10% and makes periodic billings based on the hours worked by the personnel, plus 20% profit. At the end of the engagement, the company and the client will negotiate whether an adjustment to the fee is appropriate.
2. The Fast Loss Health Club has three types of memberships:
1 year, 3 year, and 10 year. Each type of membership requires an initial fee as well as monthly fees. To encourage memberships, the company offers numerous incentives, such as free dues for the first two months and drawings for free vacation trips. In addition, the company advertises heavily at certain times of the year, such as during the Christmas period. The company also offers special programs to its members for a fee and allows nonmembers to participate for a higher fee.
3. The New Encyclopedia Company ships five complete sets of its 12 volume encyclopedia to each of its new distributors. Each distributor has six months to sell all the encyclopedias and pay the company the selling price, less a 40% commission, within five days of each sale. During this period, the distributor may return the encyclopedias without obligation and at the company’s expense. At the end of six months, the distributor must pay the selling price of the unsold encyclopedias, less a 60% commission.
Required
Discuss the revenue recognition issues that exist in each independent situation. Discuss any issues that exist in matching the expenses against the revenues.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Bonanza Trading Stamps, Inc. was formed early this year to sell trading stamps throughout the Southwest to retailers who distribute them free to their customers. Books for accumulating the stamps and catalogs illustrating the merchandise for which the stamps may be exchanged are given free to retailers for distribution to stamp recipients. Centers with inventories of merchandise premiums have been established for redemption of the stamps. Retailers may not return unused stamps to Bonanza. The following schedule expresses Bonanza’s expectations of the percentages of a normal month’s activity that will be attained. For this purpose, a normal month’s activity is defined as the level of operations expected when expansion of activities ceases or tapers off to a stable rate. The company expects that this level will be attained in the third year, and that sales of stamps will average $2,000,000 per month throughout the third year.
|
Month
|
Actual Stamp Sales Percentage
|
Merchandise Premium Purchases Percentage
|
Stamp Redemptions Percentage
|
|
6
|
30%
|
40%
|
10%
|
|
12
|
60
|
60
|
45
|
|
18
|
80
|
80
|
70
|
|
24
|
90
|
90
|
80
|
|
30
|
100
|
100
|
95
|
Required
1. Explain the factors to be considered in determining when revenue should be recognized in measuring the income of a business enterprise.
2. Explain the accounting alternatives that Bonanza Trading Stamps, Inc. should consider for the recognition of its revenues and related expenses.
3. For each accounting alternative discussed in (2), give balance sheet accounts that Bonanza should use and indicate how it should classify each.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exchanges and Revenue Recognition Issues Certain business “exchanges” are very complex and may qualify as exceptional cases in which the related revenues and expenses are advanced or deferred. The following are four such cases:
1. Franchisor grants a franchise to a franchisee; it collects part of the initial franchise fee and agrees to perform related initial services over an extended period.
2. Land development company acquires land for future development into a “sports retirement community,” subdivides the land into lots, and sells the lots on “credit with payment to be made on a long term basis.
3. Lessor leases equipment to a lessee on a long term noncancelable lease; the fair value of the leased item is greater than the cost, and the ownership of the leased item is transferred to the lessee by the end of the lease life.
4. A construction company builds bridges; it enters into a contract to construct a bridge for Rice County over a two year period.
Required
For each of the preceding exchanges, (a) explain the revenue recognition issues involved, and (b) discuss when the revenue is recognized and by what method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Franchise and Revenue Recognition Southern Fried Shrimp sells franchises to independent operators throughout the southeastern part of the United States. The contract with the franchisee includes the following provisions:
1. The franchisee is charged an initial fee of $25,000. Of this amount, $5,000 is payable when the agreement is signed and a $4,000 non interest bearing note is payable at the end of each of the five subsequent years.
2. All of the initial franchise fee collected by Southern Fried Shrimp is to be refunded and the remaining obligation canceled if, for any reason, the franchisee fails to open the franchise.
3. In return for the initial franchise fee, Southern Fried Shrimp agrees to (1) assist the franchisee in selecting the location for the business, (2) negotiate the lease for the land, (3) obtain financing and assist with building design, (4) supervise construction, (5) establish accounting and tax records, and (6) provide expert advice over a five year period relating to such matters as employee and management training, quality control, and promotion.
4. In addition to the initial franchise fee, the franchisee is required to pay to Southern Fried Shrimp a monthly fee of 2% of sales for menu planning, recipe innovations, and the privilege of purchasing ingredients from Southern Fried Shrimp at or below prevailing market prices. Management of Southern Fried Shrimp estimates that the value of the services rendered to the franchisee at the time the contract is signed amounts to at least $5,000. All franchisees to date have opened their locations at the scheduled time and none has defaulted on any of the notes receivable.
The credit ratings of all franchisees would entitle them to borrow at the current interest rate of 10%. The present value of an ordinary annuity of five annual receipts of $4,000 each, discounted at 10%, is $15,163.
Required
1. Explain the alternatives that Southern Fried Shrimp might use to account for the initial franchise fee, evaluate each by applying generally accepted accounting principles to this situation, and give illustrative entries for each alternative.
2. Given the nature of Southern Fried Shrimp’s agreement with its franchisees, when should it recognize revenue? Discuss the question of revenue recognition for both the initial franchise fee and the additional monthly fee of 2% of sales and give illustrative entries for both types of revenue.
3. Assume that (a) Southern Fried Shrimp sells some franchises for $35,000 (which includes a charge of $10,000 for the rental of equipment for its useful life of 10 years);
(b) $15,000 of the fee is payable immediately and the balance on non interest bearing notes at $4,000 per year;
(c) no portion of the $10,000 rental payment is refundable
in case the franchisee goes out of business; and
(d) title to the equipment remains with the franchisor.
What would be the preferable method of accounting for the rental portion of the initial franchise fee? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Publishing and Revenue Recognition After the presentation of your report on the examination of the financial statements to the board of directors of the Savage Publishing Company, one of the new directors says he is surprised the income statement assumes that an equal proportion of the revenue is earned with the publication of every issue of the company’s magazine. He feels that the “crucial event” in the process of earning revenue in the magazine business is the cash sale of the subscription. He says that he does not understand why— other than for the smoothing of income—most of the revenue cannot be “recognized” in the period of the sale.
Required
Explain the propriety of timing the recognition of revenue in the Savage Publishing Company’s accounts with
1. The cash sale of the magazine subscription.
2. The publication of the magazine every month.
3. Both events, by recognizing a portion of the revenue with the cash sale of the magazine subscription and a portion of the revenue with the publication of the magazine every month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recognition of Revenues and Expenses On May 6, 2006, Sterling Corporation signed a contract with Stony Associates under which Stony agreed (1) to construct an office building on land owned by Sterling, (2) to accept responsibility for procuring financing for the project and finding tenants, and (3) to manage the property for 50 years. The annual profit from the project, after debt service, is to be divided equally between Sterling Corporation and Stony Associates. Stony is to accept its share of future profits as full payment for its services in construction, obtaining finances and tenants, and management of the project. By April 30, 2007, the project was nearly completed and tenants had signed leases to occupy 90% of the available space at annual rentals aggregating $2,600,000. It is estimated that, after operating expenses and debt service, the annual profit will amount to $850,000. The management of Stony Associates believed that the economic benefit derived from the contract with Sterling should be reflected on its financial statements for the fiscal year ended April 30, 2007 and directed that revenue be accrued in an amount equal to the commercial value of the services Stony had rendered during the year, that this amount be carried in contracts receivable, and that all related expenditures be charged against the revenue.
Required
Is the belief of Stony’s management in accord with generally accepted accounting principles for the measurement of revenue and expense for the year ended April 30, 2007? Support your opinion by discussing the application to this case of the factors to be considered for asset measurement and revenue and expense recognition.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recognition of Expenses Kwik Bild Corporation sells and erects shell houses. These are frame structures that are completely finished on the outside but are unfinished on the inside except for flooring, partition studding and ceiling joists. Shell houses are sold chiefly to customers who are handy with tools and who have time to do the interior wiring, plumbing, wall completion and finishing, and other work necessary to make the shell houses livable dwellings.
Kwik Bild buys shell houses from a manufacturer in unassembled packages consisting of all lumber, roofing, doors, windows and similar materials necessary to complete a shell house. Upon commencing operations in a new area, Kwik Bild buys or leases land as a site for its local warehouse, field office and display houses. Sample display houses are erected at a total cost of from $10,000 to $30,000, including the cost of the unassembled packages. The chief element of cost of the display houses is the unassembled packages, since erection is a short, low cost operation. Old sample models are torn down or altered into new models every three to seven years. Sample display houses have little salvage value because dismantling and moving costs amount to nearly as much as the cost of an unassembled package.
Required
1. A choice must be made between (a) expensing the costs of sample display houses in the period in which the expenditure is made, and (b) spreading the costs over more than one period. Discuss the advantages of each method.
2. Is it preferable to amortize the cost of display houses on the basis of (a) the passage of time, or (b) the number of shell houses sold? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Fay, Inc. finances its capital needs approximately one third from longterm debt and two thirds from equity. At December 31, 2006, Fay had the following liability and equity account balances:
|
11% debenture bonds payable, face amount
|
$5,000,000
|
|
Premium on bonds payable
|
352,400
|
|
Common stock
|
8,000,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
$2,295,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,465,000
|
|
Treasury stock, at cost
|
325,000
|
Transactions during 2007 and other information relating to Fay’s liabilities and equity accounts were as follows:
1. The debenture bonds were issued on December 31, 2004 for $5,378,000 to yield 10%. The bonds mature on December 31, 2019. Interest is payable annually on December 31. Fay uses the interest method to amortize bond premium.
2. Fay’s common stock shares are traded on the over the counter market. At December 31, 2006, Fay had 2,000,000 authorized shares of $10 par common stock.
3. On January 16, 2007, Fay reissued 15,000 of its 25,000 shares of treasury stock for $225,000. The treasury stock had been acquired on February 24, 2006.
4. On March 2, 2007, Fay issued a 5% stock dividend on all issued shares. The market price of Fay’s common stock at the time of issuance was $14 per share.
5. On November 2, 2007, Fay borrowed $4,000,000 at 9%, evidenced by an unsecured note payable to United Bank. The note is payable in five equal annual principal installments of $800,000. The first principal and interest payment is due on November 2, 2008.
6. On December 31, 2007, Fay owned 10,000 shares of Ryan Corp.’s common stock, which represented a 1% ownership interest. Fay treats this marketable equity investment as a long term investment in available for sale securities. The stock was purchased on November 2, 2007 at $20 per share. The market price was $18 per share on December 31, 2007.
7. Fay’s net income for 2007 was $2,860,000.
Required
1. Prepare the long term liabilities section of Fay’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet, including all disclosures applicable to each obligation.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Fay’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.
3. Prepare a schedule showing interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Min Co. is a publicly held company whose shares are traded in the overthe counter market. The stockholders’ equity accounts at December 31, 2006 had the following balances:
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 6% cumulative; 5,000 shares authorized; 2,000 issued and outstanding
|
$200,000
|
|
Common stock, $1 par value, 150,000 shares authorized; 100,000 issued and outstanding
|
100,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
800,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,586,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
$2,686,000
|
Transactions during 2007 and other information relating to the stockholders’ equity accounts were as follows:
- February 2, 2007—Issued 13,000 shares of common stock to Ram Co. in exchange for land. On the date issued, the stock had a market price of $11 per share. The land had a carrying value on Ram’s books of $135,000, and an assessed value for property taxes of $90,000.
- March 2, 2007—Purchased 5,000 shares of its own common stock to be held as treasury stock for $14 per share. Min uses the cost method to account for treasury stock. Transactions in treasury stock are legal in Min’s state of incorporation.
- May 11, 2007—Declared a property dividend of marketable securities held by Min to common shareholders. The securities had a carrying value of $600,000; fair value on relevant dates were:
|
Date of declaration (May 11, 2007)
|
$720,000
|
|
Date of record (May 28, 2007)
|
758,000
|
|
Date of distribution (June 4, 2007)
|
736,000
|
- October 1, 2007—Reissued 2,000 shares of treasury stock for $16 per share.
- November 2, 2007—Declared a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to all common shareholders of record November 16, 2007. The dividend was paid on November 26, 2007.
- December 21, 2007—Declared the required annual cash dividend on preferred stock for 2007. The dividend was paid on January 4, 2008.
- January 14, 2008—Before closing the accounting records for 2007, Min became aware that no amortization had been recorded for 2006 for a patent purchased on July 1, 2006. The patent was properly capitalized at $320,000 and had an estimated useful life of eight years when purchased. Min’s income tax rate is 30%. The appropriate correcting entry was recorded on the same day.
- Adjusted net income for 2007 was $838,000.
Required
Determine the amounts of each of the following items. Show supporting calculations.
1. Prior period adjustment
2. Preferred dividends
3. Common dividends—cash
4. Common dividends—property
5. Number of common shares issued at December 31, 2007
6. Total legal capital of common stock issued
7. Additional paid in capital, including treasury stock transactions
8. Total dollar amount of treasury stock
9. Numerator used in calculation of 2007 earnings per share for the year
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Earnings Per Share – “Earnings per share” (EPS) is the most featured single financial statistic about modern corporations. Daily published quotations of stock prices also include a “times earnings” figure for many securities that is based on EPS. Often, the focus of analysts’ discussions will be on the EPS of the corporations receiving their attention.
Required
1. Explain how dividends or dividend requirements on any class of preferred stock that may be outstanding affect the computation of basic EPS.
2. One of the technical procedures applicable in diluted EPS computations is the “treasury stock method.” Briefly describe the circumstances under which it might be appropriate to apply the treasury stock method.
3. In the case of convertible bonds that are assumed to be converted and are dilutive, explain how they are handled for purposes of diluted EPS computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dividends and Treasury Stock Brady Company has 30,000 shares of $10 par value common stock authorized and 20,000 shares issued and outstanding. On August 13, 2007 Brady purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock for $12 per share. Brady uses the cost method to account for treasury stock. On September 14, 2007 Brady sold 500 shares of the treasury stock for $14 per share. In October 2007 Brady declared and distributed 2,000 shares as a stock dividend from unissued shares when the market value of the common stock was $16 per share. On December 21, 2007 Brady declared a $1 per share cash dividend, payable on January 11, 2008 to shareholders of record on December 31, 2007.
Required
1. How should Brady account for the cash dividend, and how would it affect Brady’s balance sheet at December 31, 2007? Explain why.
2. How should Brady account for the stock dividend, and how would it affect Brady’s stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2007? Explain why.
3. How should Brady account for the purchase and sale of the treasury stock, and how should the treasury stock be presented in Brady’s balance sheet at December 31, 2007?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing Coca Cola’s Retained Earnings and EPS Refer to the financial statements and related notes of The Coca Cola Company in Appendix A to this book.
1. What does the company call its retained earnings? What was the amount at the end of 2004?
2. What was the balance of accumulated other comprehensive income on December 31, 2004? What caused it to change during 2004 and by what amounts? 3. What was the company’s basic net income per share for 2004? How much preferred dividends were subtracted in the computation of this income per share? What was the average number of common shares outstanding used in the computation of this income per share? What was the company’s diluted net income per share for 2004? How does this amount compare to 2003? What potential common shares were included why?
4. What were the dividends per share and in total for 2004?
5. Compute the return on shareowners’ equity for 2004. How does this compare to 2003 (the shareowners’ equity was $11,800 million at the end of 2002)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics and EPS Adjustment Ryan Company has as a goal that its earnings per share should increase by at least 3% each year; this goal has been attained every year over the past decade. As a result, the market price per share of Ryan’s common stock also has increased each year. Last year (2006) Ryan’s earnings per share was $3. This year, however, is a different story. Because of decreasing sales, preliminary computations at the end of 2007 show that earnings per share will be only $2.99 per share.
You are the accountant for Ryan Company. Ryan’s controller, Jim Nastic, has come to you with some suggestions. He says, “I’ve noticed that the decrease in revenues has been primarily related to credit sales. Since we have fewer credit sales, I believe we are justified in reducing our bad debts expense from 4 to 2% of net sales. I also think that because of the decreased sales, we won’t use our factory equipment as much, so we can extend its estimated remaining life from 10 to 15 years for computing our straight line depreciation expense. Based on my calculations, if we make these changes, Ryan Company’s 2007 earnings per share will be $3.06. This will sure make our stockholders happy, not to mention our CEO. You may even get a promotion. What do you think?”
Required
From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, prepare a response to Jim Nastic regarding his suggestions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Warren Construction Company has consistently used the percentage of completion method of recognizing income. In 2007 Warren started work on a $6,000,000 construction contract, which was completed in 2008. The accounting records disclosed the following data:
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Progress billings
|
$2,200,000
|
$3,800,000
|
|
Costs incurred
|
1,800,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Collections
|
1,400,000
|
4,600,000
|
|
Estimated cost to complete
|
3,600,000
|
—
|
How much income should Warren have recognized in 2007?
a. $200,000
b. $220,000
c. $300,000
d. $400,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Schmidt Company sells a franchise that requires an initial franchise fee of $50,000. A $10,000 down payment is required, with the balance covered by the issuance of a 12% note, payable in four equal installments. All material services have been substantially performed by the Schmidt Company, the refund period has expired, and the collectibility of the note is reasonably assured. The journal entry recorded by Schmidt Company should be
|
Cash
|
10,000
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
40,000
|
|
Franchise Revenue
|
10,000
|
|
Unearned Franchise Fees
|
40,000
|
|
Cash
|
10,000
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
40,000
|
|
Franchise Revenue
|
50,000
|
|
Cash
|
10,000
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
40,000
|
|
Unearned Franchise Fees
|
50,000
|
|
Cash
|
10,000
|
|
Franchise Revenue
|
10,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April 1, 2006, Pine Construction Company entered into a fixed price contract to construct an apartment building for $6,000,000. Pine appropriately accounts for this contract under the percentage of completion method. Information relating to the contract is as follows:
|
At December 31, 2006
|
At December 31, 2007
|
|
Percentage of completion
|
20%
|
60%
|
|
Estimated costs at completion
|
$4,500,000
|
$4,800,000
|
|
Income recognized (cumulative)
|
$300,000
|
$720,000
|
What is the amount of contract costs incurred during the year ended December 31, 2007?
a. $1,200,000
b. $1,920,000
c. $1,980,000
d. $2,880,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Alternatives The Smith Construction Company received a contract on September 30, 2007 to build a warehouse over a period of 18 months. The contract price was $600,000 and the estimated cost to build was $400,000. The actual (and estimated) costs incurred and the payments made by the purchaser are as follows:
|
Costs
|
Payments
|
|
September 30–December 31, 2007
|
$120,000
|
$90,000
|
|
January 1–December 31, 2008
|
240,000
|
210,000
|
|
January 1–March 31, 2009
|
40,000
|
300,000
|
Required
1. Compute the amount of revenue, expense, and gross profit each year for each of the following methods:
a. Revenue recognition at the time of sale (completion)
b. Revenue recognition during production
c. Revenue recognition at the time of cash receipt
d. Cost recovery (compute only the gross profit)
2. Which method provides the most useful information to users? Under what circumstances would the other methods provide more useful information?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Percentage of Completion The Koolman Construction Company began work on a contract in 2007. The contract price is $3,000,000, and the company uses the percentage of completion method. Other information relating to the contract is as follows:
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Costs incurred during the year
|
$600,000
|
$700,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete, December 31
|
1,400,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Billings during the year
|
500,000
|
850,000
|
|
Collections during the year
|
400,000
|
800,000
|
Required
1. Compute the gross profit or loss recognized in 2007 and 2008.
2. Prepare the appropriate sections of the income statement and ending balance sheet for each year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Percentage of Completion Newberg Construction Corporation contracted to construct a building for $400,000. Construction began in 2007 and was completed in 2008. Data relating to the contract are as follows:
|
Year Ended December 31,
|
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Costs incurred
|
$200,000
|
$110,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete
|
100,000
|
—
|
Required
Newberg uses the percentage of completion method as the basis for income recognition. For the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2008, respectively, how much income should Newberg report?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Long Term Construction Contract The Osborn Construction Company began operations January 2, 2007. During the year, Osborn entered into a contract with Redbeard Razor Corporation to construct a manufacturing facility. At that time, Osborn estimated that it would take five years to complete the facility at a total cost of $4,800,000. The total contract price for construction of the facility is $6,000,000. During the year, Osborn incurred $1,250,000 in construction costs related to the construction project. The estimated cost to complete the contract is $3,750,000. Redbeard was billed and paid 30% of the contract price.
Required
Prepare schedules to compute the amount of gross profit to be recognized for the year ended December 31, 2007 and the amount to be shown as “cost of uncompleted contract in excess of related billings” or “billings on uncompleted contract in excess of related costs” on December 31, 2007, under each of the following methods:
1. Completed contract method
2. Percentage of completion method Show supporting computations in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Proportional Performance Method The New Recreational Company sells two year memberships to its recreational facilities. For $2,200 in advance, each member receives the right to 30 nights at the company’s campgrounds, 20 rounds on its golf courses, and 50 hours on its bowling lanes. In 2007 the company sold 400 memberships. Members used the campgrounds for 4,100 nights, played 3,000 rounds of golf, and bowled for 10,000 hours. The relevant cost information for the 400 contracts is as follows:
|
Initial direct costs
|
$40,000
|
|
Annual indirect costs
|
100,000
|
|
Estimated (and actual) total direct costs for two year period
|
340,000
|
|
Direct cost per
|
|
Night at campground
|
10
|
|
Round of golf
|
15
|
|
Hour of bowling
|
5
|
Required
Prepare the income statement for 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Under the Installment Method Anibonita Company began operations in 2007. It sells goods on installment sales contracts; these transactions are considered to be exceptional, so it uses the installment method to recognize gross profit. The following is a summary of the installment sales, costs of installment sales, operating expenses, and collections for 2007 and 2008:
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Installment method sales
|
$80,000
|
$90,000
|
|
Costs of installment method sales
|
52,000
|
59,400
|
|
Operating expenses
|
13,000
|
15,000
|
|
Cash collections from
|
|
2007 installment method sales
|
42,000
|
21,000
|
|
2008 installment method sales
|
41,000
|
Required
Using the installment method to recognize gross profits, prepare 2007 and 2008 condensed income statements for the Anibonita Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Under the Installment Method The following information is available for the Butler Company in 2007, its first year of operations:
|
Total credit sales (including installment method sales)
|
$205,000
|
|
Total cost of goods sold (including installment method cost of goods sold)
|
130,000
|
|
Installment method sales
|
65,000
|
|
Installment method cost of goods sold
|
39,000
|
|
Cash receipts on credit sales (including installment method sales of $20,000)
|
120,000
|
Required
1. Prepare the journal entries for 2007.
2. If the company collected $45,000 in 2008 on its 2007 installment method sales, prepare the appropriate journal entries in 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Installment Sales The following partial information is available for the Cupp Company:
|
Installment method sales
|
$120,000
|
3
|
|
Installment method cost of goods sold
|
1
|
$63,000
|
|
Gross profit percentage
|
2
|
30%
|
|
Cash receipts on installment method sales
|
|
2007 sales
|
25,000
|
4
|
|
2008 sales
|
5
|
|
Realized gross profit on installment method sales
|
|
2007 sales
|
5,000
|
7,000
|
|
2008 sales
|
9,000
|
Required
Compute the unknown amounts. (Note: It is not necessary to compute the amounts in the numerical sequence.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deposit Method On January 1, 2007, the Fritz Company sold a building in a depressed area for $200,000. The building had originally cost $500,000 and had a book value of $100,000. The sale agreement required the purchaser to pay $5,000 down and sign an 8% note for the balance. Interest on the note is payable at the end of each year; the interest is refundable if the following contingency is not met. The sale agreement is contingent on the commitment by the city government to support redevelopment of the area in which the building is located. Therefore, the company used the deposit method to record the sale.
Required
1. Prepare the journal entries for 2007.
2. On January 1, 2008 the city government made the necessary commitments. Prepare the appropriate journal entry.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Franchise The Chocomalt Company sells franchises. For each franchise, the company charges an initial franchise fee of $28,000. The franchise agreement requires a down payment of $8,000, with the balance covered by the issuance of a $20,000, 12% note, payable by the franchisee in two equal annual installments.
Required
Prepare the journal entry required by the Chocomalt Company to record each initial franchise fee under each of the following independent situations:
1. All material services have been substantially performed, the refund period has expired, and the collectibility of the note is reasonably assured.
2. All material services have been substantially performed, the refund period has expired, and the collectibility of the note is not reasonably assured.
3. All material services have been substantially performed, the refund period has not expired, and the collectibility of the note is reasonably assured.
4. All material services have not been substantially performed, the refund period has expired, and there is no basis for estimating the collectibility of the note.
5. The refund period has expired and the collectibility of the note is reasonably assured, but all material services have not been substantially performed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Alternatives Each of the following independent situations relates to the recognition of revenue:
a. Interest on loans made by a bank
b. Interest on loans made by a bank when the loans are in default
c. Collection of fares by an airline when the passengers make the reservations
d. Shipment of freight and mail by an airline before it receives payment
e. Imposition of a penalty (service charge) by a retailer on overdue accounts
f. Building a submarine for a foreign government
g. Growing and harvesting soybeans
h. Selling lots for vacation homes on long term contracts with small down payments
i. Building houses in a subdivision
j. Growing timber over a 10 year period
k. Payments received by a producer for films that are licensed to movie theaters for two years, after which the rights are licensed to television networks for one year, and finally the rights revert to the producer
l. Rental of a building to another company for five years, with no payment of rent in the first year
m. “One cent” sale in which the first item is sold at full price and the second identical item is sold for $0.01
n. Sale of a season pass by a ski resort
Required
For each situation indicate when a company should recognize revenue.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained Earnings Statement On January 1, 2007 Franklin Company had a retained earnings balance of $206,000. During 2007 the following events occurred:
1. Treasury stock (common) was acquired at a cost of $14,000. State law requires a restriction of retained earnings in an equal amount. The company reports its retained earnings restrictions in a note to the financial statements.
2. Cash dividends totaling $9,000 and stock dividends totaling $6,000 were declared and distributed.
3. Net income was $58,000.
4. Two thousand shares of callable preferred stock were recalled and retired at a price of $150 per share. This stock had originally been issued at $130 per share.
5. A material error in net income for a previous period was corrected. This error correction decreased retained earnings by $12,600 after a related income tax credit of $5,400.
Required
1. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2007.
2. Prepare a note to disclose the restriction of retained earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative Income Statements and Basic EPS Agocha Company reported the following selected items in the stockholders’ equity section of its balance sheet on December 31, 2007 and 2008:
|
December 31,
|
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
7% preferred stock (nonconvertible), $100 par
|
$50,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
70,000
|
84,000
|
In addition, it listed the following selected pretax items in its December 31, 2007 and 2008 adjusted trial balances:
|
31 Dec 07
|
31 Dec 08
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Sales
|
$124,300
|
$140,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
6,000
|
—
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$75,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
18,000
|
20,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss
|
—
|
9,000
|
The preferred shares were outstanding during all of 2007 and 2008; annual dividends were declared and paid in each year.
During 2007, 2,000 common shares were sold for cash on October 3. During 2008, a 20% stock dividend was declared and issued in early May. At the end of 2007 and 2008, the common stock was selling for $25.75 and $32.20, respectively. The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate.
Required
1. Prepare the comparative 2007 and 2008 income statements (multiple step), and the related note that would appear in the Agocha Company’s 2008 annual report.
2. Compute the price/earnings ratio for 2008. How does this compare to 2007? Why is it different?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impact on EPS, Rankings, and Computations Madsen Company had five convertible securities outstanding during all of 2007. It paid the appropriate interest (and amortized any related premium or discount using the straight line method) and dividends on each security during 2007. Each of the convertible securities is described in the following table:
|
Security
|
Description
|
|
10.2% bonds
|
$200,000 face value. Issued at par. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 28 shares of common stock.
|
|
12.0% bonds
|
$160,000 face value. Issued at 110. Premium being amortized over 20 year life. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 47 shares of common stock.
|
|
9.0% bonds
|
$200,000 face value. Issued at 95. Discount being amortized over 10 year life. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 44 shares of common stock.
|
|
8.3% preferred stock
|
$120,000 par value. Issued at 108. Each $100 par preferred stock is convertible into 3.9 shares of common stock.
|
|
7.5% preferred stock
|
$180,000 par value. Issued at par. Each $100 par preferred stock is convertible into 6 shares of common stock.
|
Additional data:
Net income for 2007 totaled $119,460. The weighted average number of common shares outstanding during 2007 was 40,000 shares. No share options or warrants are outstanding. The effective corporate income tax rate is 30%.
Required
1. Prepare a schedule that lists the impact of the assumed conversion of each convertible security on diluted earnings per share.
2. Prepare a ranking of the order in which each of the convertible securities should be included in diluted earnings per share.
3. Compute basic earnings per share.
4. Compute diluted earnings per share.
5. Indicate the amount(s) of the earnings per share that Madsen Company would report on its 2007 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive: EPS Newton Company is preparing its annual earnings per share amounts to be disclosed on its 2007 income statement. It has collected the following information at the end of 2007:
1. Net income: $120,400. Included in the net income is income from continuing operations of $130,400 and an extraordinary loss (net of income taxes) of $10,000. Corporate income tax rate, 30%.
2. Common stock outstanding on January 1, 2007: 20,000 shares.
3. Common stock issuances during 2007: July 6, 4,000 shares; August 24, 3,000 shares.
4. Stock dividend: On October 19, 2007 the company declared a 10% stock dividend that resulted in 2,700 additional outstanding shares of common stock.
5. Common stock prices: 2007 average market price, $30 per share; 2007 ending market price, $27 per share.
6. 7% preferred stock outstanding on January 1, 2007: 1,000 shares. Terms: $100 par, nonconvertible. Current dividends have been paid. No preferred stock issued during 2007.
7. 8% convertible preferred stock outstanding on January 1, 2007: 800 shares. The stock was issued in 2006 at $130 per share. Each $100 par preferred stock is currently convertible into 1.7 shares of common stock. Current dividends have been paid. To date, no preferred stock has been converted.
8. Bonds payable outstanding on January 1, 2007: $100,000 face value. These bonds were issued several years ago at 97 and pay annual interest of 9.6%. The discount is being amortized in the amount of $300 per year. Each $1,000 bond is currently convertible into 22 shares of common stock. To date, no bonds have been converted.
9. Compensatory share options outstanding: Key executives may currently acquire 3,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share. The options were granted in 2006. To date, none have been exercised. The unrecognized compensation cost (net of tax) related to the options is $4 per share.
Required
1. Compute the basic earnings per share. Show supporting calculations.
2. Compute the diluted earnings per share. Show supporting calculations.
3. Show how Newton Company would report these earnings per share figures on its 2007 income statement. Include an explanatory note to the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive: EPS The Frost Company has accumulated the following information relevant to its 2007 earnings per share.
1. Net income for 2007, $150,500.
2. Bonds payable: On January 1, 2007 the company had issued 10%, $200,000 bonds at 110. The premium is being amortized in the amount of $1,000 per year. Each $1,000 bond is currently convertible into 22 shares of common stock. To date, no bonds have been converted.
3. Bonds payable: On December 31, 2005, the company had issued $540,000 of 5.8% bonds at par. Each $1,000 bond is currently convertible into 11.6 shares of common stock. To date, no bonds have been converted.
4. Preferred stock: On July 3, 2006 the company had issued 3,800 shares of 7.5%, $100 par, preferred stock at $108 per share. Each share of preferred stock is currently convertible into 2.45 shares of common stock. To date, no preferred stock has been converted and no additional shares of preferred stock have been issued. The current dividends have been paid.
5. Common stock: At the beginning of 2007, 25,000 shares were outstanding. On August 3, 7,000 additional shares were issued. During September, a 20% stock dividend was declared and issued. On November 30, 2,000 shares were reacquired as treasury stock.
6. Compensatory share options: Options to acquire common stock at a price of $33 per share were outstanding during all of 2007. Currently, 4,000 shares may be acquired. To date, no options have been exercised. The unrecognized compensation cost (net of tax) related to these options is $5 per share.
7. Miscellaneous: Stock market prices on common stock averaged $41 per share during 2007, and the 2007 ending stock market price was $40 per share. The corporate income tax rate is 30%.
Required
1. Compute the basic earnings per share. Show supporting calculations.
2. Compute the diluted earnings per share. Show supporting calculations.
3. Indicate which earnings per share figure(s) Frost Company would report on its 2007 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Earnings Per Share Mason Corporation’s capital structure is as follows:
|
31 Dec
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Outstanding shares of:
|
|
Common stock
|
336,000
|
300,000
|
|
Nonconvertible preferred stock
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
|
8% convertible bonds
|
$1,000,000
|
$1,000,000
|
The following additional information is available:
1. On September 1, 2007, Mason sold 36,000 additional shares of common stock.
2. Net income for the year ended December 31, 2007 was $750,000.
3. During 2007 Mason paid dividends of $3 per share on its nonconvertible preferred stock.
4. The 8% convertible bonds are convertible into 40 shares of common stock for each $1,000 bond.
5. Unexercised compensatory share options to purchase 30,000 shares of common stock at $20.50 per share were outstanding at the beginning and end of 2007. The average market price of Mason’s common stock was $36 per share during 2007. The market price was $33 per share at December 31, 2007. The unrecognized compensation cost (net of tax) related to the options is $2 per share.
6. Warrants to purchase 20,000 shares of common stock at $38 per share were attached to the preferred stock at the time of issuance. The warrants, which expire on December 31, 2012, were outstanding at December 31, 2007.
7. Mason’s effective income tax rate was 30% for 2006 and 2007.
Required
(Show supporting computations in good form, and round earnings per share to the nearest penny.)
1. Compute the number of shares that should be used for the computation of basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2007.
2. Compute the basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2007.
3. Compute the number of shares that should be used for the computation of diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2007.
4. Compute the diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dividends The Keener Company has had 1,000 shares of 7%, $100 par value preferred stock and 40,000 shares of $5 stated value common stock outstanding for the last three years. During that period, dividends paid totaled $6,000, $28,000, and $30,000 for each year, respectively.
Required
Compute the amount of dividends that Keener must have paid to preferred stockholders and common stockholders in each of the three years, given the following four independent assumptions:
1. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and noncumulative
2. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and cumulative
3. Preferred stock is fully participating and cumulative
4. Preferred stock participates up to a maximum of 9% of its par value and is cumulative
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dividends Tomasco, Inc., began operations in January 2003 and had the following reported net income or loss for each of its five years of operations:
|
2003
|
$ 150,000 loss
|
|
2004
|
130,000 loss
|
|
2005
|
120,000 loss
|
|
2006
|
250,000 income
|
|
2007
|
1,000,000 income
|
At December 31, 2007, the Tomasco capital accounts were as follows:
|
Common stock, par value $10 per share; authorized 100,000 shares; issued and outstanding 50,000 shares
|
$500,000
|
|
4% nonparticipating noncumulative preferred stock, par value $100 per share; authorized, issued, and outstanding 1,000 shares
|
100,000
|
|
8% fully participating cumulative preferred stock, par value $100 per share; authorized, issued, and outstanding 10,000 shares
|
1,000,000
|
Tomasco has never paid a cash or stock dividend. There has been no change in the capital accounts since Tomasco began operations. The appropriate state law permits dividends only from retained earnings.
Required
Prepare a work sheet showing the maximum amount available for cash dividends on December 31, 2007 and how it would be distributable to the holders of the common shares and each of the preferred shares. Show supporting computations in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive The Gray Company lists the following stockholders’ equity items on its December 31, 2006 balance sheet:
|
Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par
|
$120,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
180,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on preferred stock
|
21,600
|
|
Additional paid in capital on common stock
|
90,000
|
|
Total contributed capital
|
$411,600
|
|
Retained earnings
|
230,000
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income
|
|
Unrealized increase in value of available for sale securities
|
6,000
|
|
Contributed capital, retained earnings, and accumulated other comprehensive income
|
$647,600
|
|
Less: Treasury stock (2,000 shares of common at $21 per share, acquired on March 3, 2006)
|
42,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
$605,600
|
The following stock transactions occurred during 2007:
Jan. 2 Issued 3,000 shares of common stock at $25 per share.
Jan. 30 Paid the annual 2006 per share dividend on preferred stock and the $2 per share dividend on common stock.
These dividends had been declared on December 31, 2006.
Mar. 2 Issued 400 shares of preferred stock at $125 per share.
May 7 Reissued 600 shares of treasury stock at $24 per share.
June 15 Split the common stock two for one, reducing the par value to $6 per share.
July 2 Declared a 5% stock dividend on the outstanding common stock, to be issued on August 3. The stock is selling for $14 per share.
Aug. 3 Issued the stock dividend.
Oct. 1 Declared a property dividend payable to common stockholders on November 1. The dividend consists of 2,000 shares of an investment in Lamb Company available for sale common stock, which had been acquired at a cost of $12 per share and which have a carrying value of $15 per share. The stock is currently selling for $16 per share.
Nov. 1 Issued the property dividend to common stockholders.
Dec. 31 Declared the annual per share dividend on the outstanding preferred stock and a $1 per share dividend on the outstanding common stock, to be paid on January 30, 2008.
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions.
2. Prepare the December 31, 2007 stockholders’ equity section (assume that 2007 net income was $225,000).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Included in the December 31, 2006 Jacobi Company balance sheet was the following stockholders’ equity section:
|
Preferred stock, 6%, $100 par
|
$200,000
|
|
Premium on preferred stock
|
12,000
|
$212,000
|
|
Common stock, $5 par
|
$150,000
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
240,000
|
390,000
|
|
Total contributed capital
|
$602,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
627,000
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
|
|
Unrealized decrease in value of available for sale securities
|
41,000
|
|
Contributed capital, retained earnings, and accumulated other comprehensive income
|
$1,188,000
|
|
Less: Treasury stock (1,000 shares of common stock at cost, acquired on 2/3/2006)
|
20,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
$1,168,000
|
The company engaged in the following stock transactions during 2007:
Jan. 2 Paid the semiannual dividend on the outstanding preferred stock and a $1.60 per share annual dividend on the outstanding common stock. These dividends had been declared on December 1 of 2006.
Jan. 5 Issued 500 shares of preferred stock at $110 per share.
Jan. 23 Issued 4,000 shares of common stock at $23 per share.
Apr. 2 Reissued 700 shares of treasury stock at $24 per share.
May 14 Declared a 10% stock dividend on the outstanding common stock, payable on June 29. The common stock is currently selling for $25 per share.
June 5 Declared the semiannual cash dividend on the outstanding preferred stock, payable on July 5.
June 29 Issued the stock dividend declared on May 15.
July 5 Paid the cash dividend declared on June 5.
July 20 Split the common stock two for one and reduced the par value to $2.50 per share.
Aug. 3 Declared a property dividend, payable to common stockholders on September 14. The dividend consists of an investment in 5,000 shares of available for sale Drot Company common stock. The stock had been acquired at $9 per share, but has a carrying value of $6 per share. The stock is currently selling for $4 per share.
Sept. 14 Paid the property dividend declared on August 3.
Dec. 3 Declared the semiannual cash dividend on the outstanding preferred stock and a $0.90 per share annual dividend on the outstanding common stock.
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions.
2. Prepare the December 31, 2007 stockholders’ equity section (assume that 2007 net income was $270,000).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stock Dividends, Splits The stockholders’ equity of the Nance Company prior to any of the following events is as follows:
|
Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par
|
$100,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
150,000
|
|
Premium on preferred stock
|
16,000
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
220,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
264,000
|
|
$750,000
|
The company is considering the following alternative items:
1. An 8% stock dividend on the common stock when it is selling for $30 per share.
2. A 30% stock dividend on the common stock when it is selling for $32 per share.
3. A special stock dividend to common stockholders consisting of one share of preferred stock for every 100 shares of common stock. The preferred stock and common stock are selling for $123 and $31 per share, respectively.
4. A two for one stock split on the common stock, reducing the par value to $4 per share (assume the same date for declaration and issuance). The market price is $30 per share on the common stock.
5. A property dividend to common stockholders consisting of 1,000 shares of West Company common stock. This stock is being carried on the Nance Company books at a cost of $48 per share; it has a current value of $54 per share.
6. A cash dividend, consisting of a normal dividend and a liquidating dividend, on both the preferred and the common stock. The 10% preferred dividend includes a 2% liquidating dividend, and the $2.30 per share common dividend includes a $0.30 per share liquidating dividend (separate liquidating dividend contra accounts should be used).
Required
For each of the preceding alternative items:
1. Record (a) the journal entry at the date of declaration, and (b) the journal entry at the date of issuance.
2. Compute the balances in the stockholders’ equity accounts immediately after the issuance (any gains or losses are to be reflected in the retained earnings balance; ignore income taxes).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained Earnings Statement The Tate Company began 2007 with a Retained Earnings account balance of $180,000. During 2007 the following eight events occurred and were properly recorded by the company:
1. Bonds payable with a face value of $100,000 were issued on January 1 at 98. The bonds mature in 10 years. The bond provisions require the restriction of retained earnings (by means of a note to the financial statements) equal to one half the face value of the bonds during the period the bonds are outstanding.
2. On April 13 the company reissued 2,400 shares of treasury stock for $25 per share. The company had reacquired these shares in 2005 at a cost of $20 per share. At that time, it had restricted retained earnings (by means of a note to the financial statements) in an amount equal to the cost of the treasury shares.
3. On January 5 the company recalled and retired 800 shares of $100 par preferred stock at the call price of $120 per share. The stock had originally been issued for $108 per share.
4. During June the company declared and issued a two for one stock split on its common stock, reducing the par value from $10 to $5 per share. Immediately prior to the split, 10,000 shares of common stock were outstanding. The stock market price on the date of the split was $25 per share.
5. In August the company declared and issued a 15% stock dividend when the common stock was selling at $13 per share.
6. During December the company declared and paid its annual $1.30 per share cash dividend on the outstanding common stock.
7. Net income amounted to $72,000.
8. During the year end audit, it was found that in 2006 the company had recorded depreciation on a particular machine twice. The error resulted in a $13,000 overstatement of depreciation during 2006. It was also found that, due to an oversight, a $10,000 loss on the sale of land was omitted from the 2006 income statement. Both items are material. The company has been subject to a 30% income tax rate for several years.
Required
Prepare Tate Company’s statement of retained earnings and any related notes to its financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corrections, Dividends, Retained Earnings Statement On January 1, 2007 the Fastor Company had a retained earnings balance of $218,600. It is subject to a 30% corporate income tax rate. During 2007 the company earned net income of $67,000, and the following events occurred:
1. Cash dividends of $3 per share on 4,000 shares of common stock were declared and paid.
2. A small stock dividend was declared and issued. The dividend consisted of 600 shares of $10 par common stock. On the date of declaration the market price of the company’s common stock was $36 per share.
3. The company recalled and retired 500 shares of $100 par preferred stock. The call price was $125 per share; the stock had originally been issued for $110 per share.
4. The company discovered that it had erroneously recorded depreciation expense of $45,000 in 2006 for both financial reporting and income tax reporting. The correct depreciation for 2006 should have been $20,000. This is considered a material error.
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record items 1 through 4.
2. Prepare Fastor Company’s statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive The stockholders’ equity of the Cory Company on January 1, 2007 is as follows:
|
Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par, callable at $116
|
$100,000
|
|
Preferred stock, 7%, $100 par
|
150,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
220,000
|
|
Premium on capital stock
|
160,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
182,200
|
|
$812,200
|
In January 2007 the company recalled and retired the 8% preferred stock. This stock originally had been issued for $105 per share. In April it declared and issued a 10% stock dividend on the common stock; the stock was then selling for $16 per share. This was the only issuance of common or preferred stock during the year. During November the company reacquired as treasury stock 1,000 shares of its common stock at $18 per share (it uses the cost method for treasury stock). State law requires a restriction of retained earnings equal to the cost of all treasury shares held. The company discloses this restriction by means of a note to the financial statements. In December the annual cash dividends on the outstanding preferred stock and a $1 per share cash dividend on the outstanding common stock were declared and paid. At the end of December net income of $87,000 was closed from Income Summary to Retained Earnings. During the year end audit it was found that two errors had been made during 2006 for both financial reporting and income tax reporting. First, depreciation on certain machinery in the amount of $10,000 was inadvertently omitted. Second, a mathematical mistake was made in the calculation of the accumulated depreciation related to the sale of equipment. Consequently, the reduction in accumulated depreciation and the amount of the gain recognized were both understated by $8,000. Both errors are considered material. The company has been subject to a 30% income tax rate for the past several years.
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions.
2. Prepare Cory Company’s statement of retained earnings and any related notes to its financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corrections You are engaged to perform the first audit of the Marble Company for the year ended December 31, 2007. You find the following account balances related to stockholders’ equity:
|
Preferred stock, $100 par
|
$30,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
65,000
|
|
Capital surplus
|
16,400
|
|
Retained earnings
|
150,000
|
Because of the antiquated terminology and negative balance, you examine the Capital Surplus account first and find in it the following entries:
|
Credit (Debit)
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
$27,100
|
|
Capital from donated land
|
16,000
|
|
Treasury stock (500 common shares at cost)
|
7,500
|
|
Premium on preferred stock
|
3,000
|
|
Stock dividend (50%)
|
20,000
|
|
Prior period adjustment (net of income taxes)
|
12,000
|
|
Loss from fire (uninsured), 2006
|
18,000
|
|
Property dividend declared
|
6,000
|
|
Cash dividends declared
|
24,000
|
|
Balance
|
($41,400)
|
Your examination of the Preferred Stock and Common Stock accounts reveals that the amounts shown correctly state the total par value of the issued capital stock. The Retained Earnings account contains the accumulated earnings of the company, with the exception of any items of retained earnings that were inappropriately debited or credited to the Capital Surplus account.
Required
1. Prepare whatever journal entries are necessary to eliminate the Capital Surplus account and to correct the Marble Company’s stockholders’ equity accounts.
2. Prepare a corrected stockholders’ equity section of Marble Company’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet. Include any related notes to its financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Ashwood, Inc. is a public enterprise whose shares are traded in the overthe counter market. At December 31, 2006 Ashwood had 6,000,000 authorized shares of $10 par value common stock, of which 2,000,000 shares were issued and outstanding. The stockholders’ equity accounts at December 31, 2006 had the following balances:
|
Common stock
|
$20,000,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
7,500,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
6,470,000
|
Transactions during 2007 and other information relating to the stockholders’ equity accounts were as follows:
1. On January 5, 2007, Ashwood issued at $54 per share, 100,000 shares of $50 par value, 9%, cumulative convertible preferred stock. Each share of preferred stock is convertible, at the option of the holder, into two shares of common stock. Ashwood had 600,000 authorized shares of preferred stock.
2. On February 2, 2007, Ashwood reacquired 20,000 shares of its common stock for $16 per share. Ashwood uses the cost method to account for treasury stock.
3. On April 27, 2007, Ashwood sold 500,000 shares (previously unissued) of $10 par value common stock to the public at $17 per share.
4. On June 18, 2007, Ashwood declared a cash dividend of $1 per share of common stock, payable on July 13, 2007 to stockholders of record on July 2, 2007.
5. On November 9, 2007, Ashwood sold 10,000 shares of treasury stock for $21 per share.
6. On December 14, 2007, Ashwood declared the yearly cash dividend on preferred stock, payable on January 14, 2008 to stockholders of record on December 31, 2007.
7. On January 18, 2008, before the books were closed for 2007, Ashwood became aware that the ending inventories at December 31, 2006 were understated by $300,000 (the after tax effect on 2006 net income was $210,000). The appropriate correcting entry was recorded the same day.
8. After correcting the beginning inventory, net income for 2007 was $4,500,000.
Required
1. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for Ashwood for the year ended December 31, 2007. Assume that only single period financial statements for 2007 are presented.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Ashwood’s balance sheet at December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Carr Corporation had the following stockholders’ equity account balances at December 31, 2006:
|
Preferred stock
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital from preferred stock
|
90,000
|
|
Common stock
|
5,150,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital from common stock
|
3,500,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
4,000,000
|
|
Unrealized decrease in value of marketable equity securities
|
245,000
|
|
Treasury common stock
|
270,000
|
Transactions during 2007 and other information relating to the stockholders’ equity accounts were as follows:
1. Carr’s preferred and common shares are traded on the over the counter market. At December 31, 2006, Carr had 100,000 authorized shares of $100 par, 10%, cumulative preferred stock; and 3,000,000 authorized shares of no par common stock with a stated value of $5 per share.
2. On January 9, 2007, Carr formally retired all 30,000 shares of its treasury common stock and had them revert to an unissued basis. The treasury stock had been acquired on January 20, 2006. The shares were originally issued at $10 per share.
3. Carr owned 10,000 shares of Bush, Inc. common stock purchased in 2004 for $750,000. The Bush stock was included in Carr’s short term marketable securities portfolio at the end of 2006 at a value of $650,000. On February 13, 2007, Carr declared a dividend in kind of one share of Bush for every hundred shares of Carr common stock held by stockholders of record on February 27, 2007. The market price of Bush common stock was $63 per share on February 13, 2007. The dividend in kind was distributed on March 12, 2007.
4. On April 2, 2007, 250,000 stock rights were issued to the common stockholders permitting the purchase of one new share of common stock in exchange for one right and $11 cash. On April 23, 2007, 210,000 stock rights were exercised when the market price of Carr’s common stock was $13 per share. Carr issued new shares to settle the transaction. The remaining 40,000 rights were not exercised and expired.
5. On December 10, 2007, Carr declared the yearly cash dividend on preferred stock, payable on January 14, 2008 to stockholders of record on December 31, 2007.
6. After the year end adjustment, the Unrealized Decrease in Value of Marketable Equity Securities account had a debit balance of $135,000 at December 31, 2007.
7. On January 14, 2008, before the accounting records were closed for 2007, Carr became aware that rent income for the year ended December 31, 2006 was overstated by $500,000. The after tax effect on 2006 net income was $275,000. The appropriate correcting entry was recorded the same day.
8. After correcting the rent income, net income for 2007 was $2,600,000.
Required
1. Prepare Carr’s statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2007. Assume that only single period financial statements for 2007 are presented.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Carr’s balance sheet at December 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Dana Company reported the following amounts in the stockholders’ equity section of its December 31, 2006 balance sheet:
|
Preferred stock, 9%, $100 par (10,000 shares authorized, 1,000 shares issued)
|
$100,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par (20,000 shares authorized, 9,000 shares issued)
|
90,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on preferred stock
|
20,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on common stock
|
99,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
330,000
|
During 2007, the company’s net income was $83,000 and its dividends on preferred and common stock were $9,900 and $17,600, respectively. In addition, the following transactions affected its stockholders’ equity:
1. Purchased 750 shares of its outstanding common stock as treasury stock for $22 per share.
2. Sold 500 shares of treasury stock at $27 per share. The company uses the cost method to account for treasury stock.
3. Retired 200 of the common shares held in the treasury.
4. Issued 100 shares of preferred stock for $125 per share.
5. The aggregate market value of the company’s long term investments in available for sale equity securities dropped below the carrying value of these securities at year end. The difference between the carrying value and the year end market value totals $10,000 (net of taxes).
Required
1. Prepare Dana Company’s statement of changes in stockholders’ equity for 2007. (Hint: This statement will include more than 10 numerical columns.) Assume Dana Company reports its comprehensive income in this statement.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Dana Company’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2007. Include any related notes to its financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive The stockholders’ equity section of Gaines Industries’ balance sheet appeared as follows at December 31, 2006:
|
Contributed capital
|
|
Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par (5,000 shares authorized, 3,000 shares issued)
|
$300,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par (25,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued of which 500 shares are being held as treasury stock)
|
200,000
|
|
Premium on preferred stock
|
120,000
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
280,000
|
|
Common stock option warrants
|
32,000
|
|
Total contributed capital
|
$932,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
260,000
|
|
Total contributed capital and retained earnings
|
$1,192,000
|
|
Less: Treasury stock (500 common shares at $31)
|
15,500
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
$1,176,500
|
During 2007, the following chronological transactions were recorded:
1. The company issued 1,000 shares of common stock for $40 per share.
2. The company has a share option plan for key executives. In accordance with the plan, the shares under option and the option price per share for each executive are known on the grant date. During 2007 no new options were granted, and compensation expense of $3,000 was recorded in regard to the existing options.
3. Share options to 500 common shares were exercised in 2007 at an option price of $30 per share. The share option value originally recorded in the Common Stock Option Warrants account in regard to these shares amounted to $3 per share.
4. The company reissued 200 shares of its treasury stock for $41 per share.
5. The company accepted land in an industrial park for a factory building site from the Columbus Development Association. The fair value of the land is estimated by an independent appraiser to be $50,000.
6. The law firm of Crook, Rezich, and Romero agreed to accept 100 shares of preferred stock in lieu of legal fees. At the time the preferred stock was selling for $142 per share.
7. Net income for 2007 of $182,000 was transferred from Income Summary to Retained Earnings. Dividends on preferred and common were $24,800 and $43,000, respectively (debit Retained Earnings and credit Cash).
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding 2007 transactions for Gaines Industries.
2. Prepare the statement of changes in stockholders’ equity for 2007. (Hint: This statement will require 10 numerical columns.)
3. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the December 31, 2007 balance sheet. Include appropriate notes to the financial statements.
4. Compute the return on stockholders’ equity for 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stockholders’ Equity Raun Company had the following account titles on its December 31, 2007 trial balance:
9% cumulative convertible preferred stock, $100 par value
Premium on preferred stock
Common stock, $1 stated value
Premium on common stock
Retained earnings
The following additional information about the Raun Company was available for the year ended December 31, 2007:
1. There were 2 million shares of preferred stock authorized, of which 1 million were outstanding. All 1 million shares outstanding were issued on January 2, 2004 for $120 a share. The preferred stock is convertible into common stock on a one for one basis until December 31, 2013; thereafter, the preferred stock ceases to be convertible and is callable at par value by the company. No preferred stock has been converted into common stock, and there were no dividends in arrears at December 31, 2007.
2. The common stock has been issued at amounts above stated value per share since incorporation in 1989. Of the 5 million shares authorized, 3,580,000 were outstanding at January 1, 2007. The market price of the outstanding common stock has increased slowly but consistently for the last 5 years.
3. The company has an employee share option plan where certain key employees and officers may purchase shares of common stock at 100% of the market price at the date of the option grant. All options are exercisable in installments of one third each year, commencing one year after the date of the grant, and expire if not exercised within four years of the grant date. On January 1, 2007, options for 70,000 shares were outstanding at prices ranging from $47 to $83 a share. Options for 20,000 shares were exercised at $47 to $79 a share during 2007. During 2007, no options expired and additional options for 15,000 shares were granted at $86 a share. The 65,000 options outstanding at December 31, 2007 were exercisable at $54 to $86 a share; of these, 30,000 were exercisable at that date at prices ranging from $54 to $79 a share.
4. The company also has an employee share purchase plan whereby the company pays one half and the employee pays one half of the market price of the stock at the date of the subscription. During 2007, employees subscribed to 60,000 shares at an average price of $87 a share. All 60,000 shares were paid for and issued late in September 2007.
5. On December 31, 2007, there was a total of 355,000 shares of common stock set aside for the granting of future share options and for future purchases under the employee share purchase plan. The only changes in the stockholders’ equity for 2007 were those described previously, 2007 net income, and cash dividends paid.
Required
Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet of Raun Company at December 31, 2007. Substitute, where appropriate, X’s for unknown dollar amounts. Use good form and provide full disclosure. Write appropriate notes as they should appear in the published financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Starfish Company (a company using GAAP and the LIFO inventory method) is considering changing to IFRS and the FIFO inventory method. How would a comparison of these methods affect Starfish’s financials?
(a) During a period of inflation, working capital would decrease when IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.
(b) During a period of inflation, the taxes will decrease when IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.
(c) During a period of inflation, net income would be greater if IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.
(d) During a period of inflation, the current ratio would decrease when IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In some instances, accounting principles require a departure from valuing inventories at cost alone. Determine the proper unit inventory price in the following cases.
|
Cases
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
|
Cost
|
$15.90
|
$16.10
|
$15.90
|
$15.90
|
$15.90
|
|
Sales value
|
14.80
|
19.20
|
15.20
|
10.40
|
17.80
|
|
Estimated cost to complete
|
1.50
|
1.90
|
1.65
|
.80
|
1.00
|
|
Estimated cost to sell
|
.50
|
.70
|
.55
|
.40
|
.60
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Riegel Company uses the LCNRV method, on an individual item basis, in pricing its inventory items. The inventory at December 31, 2012, consists of products D, E, F, G, H, and I. Relevant per unit data for these products appear below.
|
Item D
|
Item E
|
Item F
|
Item G
|
Item H
|
Item I
|
|
Estimated selling price
|
$120
|
$110
|
$95
|
$90
|
$110
|
$90
|
|
Cost
|
75
|
80
|
80
|
80
|
50
|
36
|
|
Cost to complete
|
30
|
30
|
25
|
35
|
30
|
30
|
|
Selling costs
|
10
|
18
|
10
|
20
|
10
|
20
|
Using the LCNRV rule, determine the proper unit value for statement of financial position reporting purposes at December 31, 2012, for each of the inventory items above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dover Company began operations in 2012 and determined its ending inventory at cost and at LCNRV at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. This information is presented below.
|
Cost
|
Net Realizable Value
|
|
12/31/12
|
$346,000
|
$322,000
|
|
12/31/13
|
410,000
|
390,000
|
(a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at LCNRV, and a perpetual inventory system using the cost of goods sold method.
(b) Prepare journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at cost, and a perpetual system using the loss method.
(c) Which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Keyser’s Fleece Inc. holds a drove of sheep. Keyser shears the sheep on a semiannual basis and then sells the harvested wool into the specialty knitting market. Keyser has the following information related to the shearing sheep at January 1, 2012, and during the first six months of 2012.
|
Shearing Sheep
|
|
Carrying value (equal to net realizable value), January 1, 2012
|
$74,000
|
|
Change in fair value due to growth and price changes
|
4,700
|
|
Change in fair value due to harvest
|
(575)
|
|
Wool harvested during the fi rst 6 months (at NRV)
|
9,000
|
Prepare the journal entry (ies) for Keyser’s biological asset (shearing sheep) for the first six months of 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash dividends on the $10 par value common stock of Ray Company were as follows:
|
1st quarter of 2007
|
$800,000
|
|
2nd quarter of 2007
|
900,000
|
|
3rd quarter of 2007
|
1,000,000
|
|
4th quarter of 2007
|
1,100,000
|
The 4th quarter cash dividend was declared on December 21, 2007 to stockholders of record on December 31, 2007. Payment of the 4th quarter cash dividend was made on January 18, 2008.
In addition, Ray declared a 5% stock dividend on its $10 par value common stock on December 3, 2007 when there were 300,000 shares issued and outstanding and the market value of the common stock was $20 per share. The shares were issued on December 24, 2007. What was the effect on the stockholders’ equity accounts of Ray Company as a result of the preceding transactions?
|
Common Stock
|
Additional Paid in Capital
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
a. $ 0
|
$0
|
$3,800,000 dr
|
|
b. $150,000 cr
|
$0
|
$3,950,000 dr
|
|
c. $150,000 cr
|
$150,000 cr
|
$4,100,000 dr
|
|
d. $300,000 cr
|
$300,000 dr
|
$3,800,000 dr
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was abstracted from the accounts of the Oar Corporation at December 31, 2007:
|
Total income since incorporation
|
$840,000
|
|
Total cash dividends paid
|
260,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of donated stock
|
90,000
|
|
Total value of stock dividends distributed
|
60,000
|
|
Excess of proceeds over cost of treasury stock sold
|
140,000
|
What should be the current balance of retained earnings?
a. $520,000
b. $580,000
c. $610,000
d. $670,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effective April 27, 2007 the stockholders of Bennett Corporation approved a two for one split of the company’s common stock, and an increase in authorized common shares from 100,000 shares (par value $20 per share) to 200,000 shares (par value $10 per share). Bennett’s stockholders’ equity accounts immediately before issuance of the stock split shares were as follows:
|
Common stock, par value $20; 100,000 shares authorized; 50,000 shares outstanding
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital (premium of $3 per share on issuance of common stock)
|
150,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,350,000
|
What should be the balances in Bennett’s additional paid in capital and retained earnings accounts immediately after the stock split is effected?
|
Additional Paid in Capital
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
$0
|
$500,000
|
|
$150,000
|
$350,000
|
|
$150,000
|
$1,350,000
|
|
$1,150,000
|
$350,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative Earnings Per Share Ryan Company reports net income of $5,125 for the year ended December 31, 2007, its first year of operations. On January 3, 2007, the company issued 9,000 shares of common stock. On August 1, 2007 it issued an additional 3,000 shares of stock, resulting in 12,000 shares outstanding at year end. During 2008 Ryan Company earned net income of $16,400. It issued 2,000 additional shares of stock on March 3, 2008 and declared and issued a two for one stock split on November 3, 2008, resulting in 28,000 shares outstanding at year end.
During 2009 Ryan Company earned net income of $23,520. The only common stock transaction during 2009 was a 20% stock dividend issued on July 2, 2009.
Required
1. Compute the basic earnings per share that would be disclosed in the 2007 annual report.
2. Compute the 2007 and 2008 comparative basic earnings per share that would be disclosed in the 2008 annual report.
3. Compute the 2007, 2008, and 2009 comparative basic earnings per share that would be disclosed in the 2009 annual report.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic Earnings Per Share Burke Company shows the following condensed income statement information for the year ended December 31, 2007:
|
Income before extraordinary items
|
$29,936
|
|
Less: Extraordinary loss (net of income tax credit)
|
2,176
|
|
Net income
|
$27,760
|
The company declared dividends of $6,000 on preferred stock and $17,280 on common stock. At the beginning of 2007, 10,000 shares of common stock were outstanding. On May 4, 2007 the company issued 2,000 additional common shares,
and on October 19, 2007 it issued a 20% stock dividend on its common stock. The preferred stock is not convertible.
Required
1. Compute the 2007 basic earnings per share.
2. Show the 2007 income statement disclosure of basic earnings per share.
3. Draft a related note to accompany the 2007 financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impact on EPS and Rankings Matthews Company had five convertible securities outstanding during all of 2007. It paid the appropriate interest (and amortized any related premium or discount using the straight line method) and dividends on each security during 2007. Each convertible security is described in the following table. The corporate income tax rate is 30%.
|
Security
|
Description
|
|
9.5% preferred stock
|
$200,000 par value. Issued at 112. Each $100 par preferred stock is convertible into 4.2 shares of common stock.
|
|
11.0% bonds
|
$220,000 face value. Issued at par. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 44 shares of common stock.
|
|
8.0% preferred stock
|
$150,000 par value. Issued at par. Each $100 par preferred stock is convertible into 3.8 shares of common stock.
|
|
10.0% bonds
|
$100,000 face value. Issued at 94. Discount being amortized over 20 year life. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 55 shares of common stock.
|
|
9.0% bonds
|
$200,000 face value. Issued at 108. Premium being amortized over 25 year life. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 48 shares of common stock.
|
Required
1. Prepare a schedule that lists the impact of the assumed conversion of each convertible security on diluted earnings per share.
2. Prepare a ranking of the order in which the securities would be included in the diluted earnings per share computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Convertible Securities and Earnings Per Share Walker Company has 15,000 shares of common stock outstanding during all of 2007. It also has two convertible securities outstanding at the end of 2007. These are:
1. Convertible preferred stock: 1,000 shares of 9%, $100 par, preferred stock were issued in 2006 for $140 per share. Each share of preferred stock is convertible into 3.5 shares of common stock. The current dividends have been paid. To date, no preferred stock has been converted.
2. Convertible bonds: Bonds with a face value of $100,000 and an interest rate of 10% were issued at par on July 6, 2007. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 35 shares of common stock. To date, no bonds have been converted. The company earned net income of $54,000 during 2007. Its income tax rate is 30%.
Required
Compute the 2007 diluted earnings per share. What earnings per share amount(s) would Walker report on its 2007 income statement?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Convertible Securities and Earnings Per Share Caldwell Company has 20,000 shares of common stock outstanding during all of 2007. It also has two convertible securities outstanding at the end of 2007. These are:
1. Convertible preferred stock: 2,000 shares of 9.5%, $50 par, preferred stock were issued on January 2, 2007 for $60 per share. Each share of preferred stock is convertible into 3 shares of common stock. Current dividends have been declared. To date, no preferred stock has been converted.
2. Convertible bonds: Bonds with a face value of $200,000 and an interest rate of 5.7% were issued at par in 2006. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 22 shares of common stock. To date, no bonds have been converted. The company earned net income of $61,500 during 2007. Its income tax rate is 30%.
Required
Compute the 2007 diluted earnings per share. What earnings per share amount(s) would Caldwell report on its 2007 income statement?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dividends Up hoff Company has $80,000 available to pay dividends. It has 2,000 shares of 10%, $100 par, preferred stock and 30,000 shares of $10 par common stock outstanding. The preferred stock is selling for $125 per share and the common stock is selling for $20 per share.
Required
1. Determine the amount of dividends to be paid to each class of stockholder for each of the following independent assumptions:
a. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and noncumulative.
b. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and cumulative. Preferred dividends are two years in arrears at the beginning of the year.
c. Preferred stock is fully participating and cumulative. Preferred dividends are one year in arrears at the beginning of the year.
d. Preferred stock is participating up to a maximum of 15% of its par value and is noncumulative.
2. For 1(a), compute the dividend yield on the preferred stock and the common stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various Dividends The Goodson Company listed the following account balances on December 31, 2006:
|
Investment in Xurk Company bonds
|
$25,000
|
|
Dividends payable: preferred
|
4,000
|
|
Dividends payable: common
|
40,000
|
|
Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par
|
100,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
$400,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on preferred stock
|
20,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on common stock
|
210,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
270,000
|
During 2007, the following transactions occurred:
Feb. 2 Paid the semiannual dividends declared on December 15, 2006.
Mar. 5 Declared a property dividend, payable to common stockholders on April 5 in Xurk Company bonds being held to maturity. The bonds (which have a book value of $25,000) have a current market value of $31,000.
Apr. 5 Paid the property dividend.
July 6 Declared a $4 per share semiannual cash dividend on preferred stock and a $1.10 per share semiannual dividend on common stock, to be paid on August 17.
Aug. 17 Paid the cash dividends.
Oct. 15 Declared a 2% stock dividend on common stock to be issued on December 3. The current market price is $22 per share.
Dec. 3 Issued the stock dividend.
Dec. 28 Declared a $4 and $1.20 per share semiannual cash dividend on preferred and common stock, respectively, to be paid on February 15, 2008.
Required
Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various Dividends Mills Company lists the following condensed balance sheet as of the beginning of 2007:
|
Current assets
|
$60,000
|
Current liabilities
|
$30,000
|
|
Investment in M bonds
|
9,000
|
Common stock, no par
|
150,000
|
|
Fixed assets (net)
|
200,000
|
Retained earnings
|
89,000
|
|
$269,000
|
$269,000
|
Mills is considering the impact of various types of dividends on this balance sheet. Each dividend would be declared and paid in 2007. These include:
1. Cash dividend of $1.00 per share on the 10,000 shares outstanding.
2. Stock dividend of 5% on the 10,000 shares outstanding when the market price is $17 per share.
3. Property dividend consisting of the $9,000 (book value) investment in M bonds being held to maturity. This investment has a current market value of $13,000. (For Requirement 2, assume any gain or loss is to be reflected in retained earnings. Disregard income taxes.)
4. Scrip dividend of $0.80 per share on the 10,000 shares outstanding. The scrip earns interest at a 12% annual rate and is to be declared on January 30 and paid on December 30, 2007. (For Requirement 2, assume any interest expense is to be reflected in retained earnings. Disregard income taxes.)
5. Cash dividend consisting of a $0.70 per share normal dividend and a $0.30 per share liquidating dividend.
Required
For each preceding independent dividend:
1. Prepare the appropriate journal entries for the declaration and payment of the dividend.
2. Prepare a condensed balance sheet after the dividend has been paid.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stock Dividend The stockholders’ equity of the Sadler Company is as shown:
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
$250,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on common stock
|
150,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
200,000
|
|
$600,000
|
The company is considering the declaration and issuance of a stock dividend at a time when the market price is $30 per share.
Required
1. Assuming the board of directors recommends a 6% stock dividend, prepare:
a. the journal entry at the date of declaration
b. the journal entry at the date of issuance
c. the stockholders’ equity after the issuance
2. Assuming, instead, that a 40% stock dividend is recommended, repeat (a), (b), and (c) of Requirement 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stock Dividend Comparison Although Weaver Company has enough retained earnings legally to declare a dividend, its working capital is low. The board of directors is considering a stock dividend instead of a cash dividend. The common stock is currently selling at $34 per share. The following is Weaver’s current stockholders’ equity:
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
$400,000
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
800,000
|
|
Total contributed capital
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,300,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$2,500,000
|
Required
1. Assuming a 15% stock dividend is declared and issued, prepare the stockholders’ equity section immediately after the date of issuance.
2. Assuming, instead, that a 30% stock dividend is declared and issued, prepare the stockholders’ equity section immediately after the date of issuance.
3. What unusual result do you notice when you compare your answers from (1) with (2)? From a theoretical standpoint, how might this have been avoided?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prior Period Adjustments Miles Company began 2007 with a retained earnings balance of $142,400. During an examination of its accounting records on December 31, 2007, the company found it had made the following material errors, for both financial reporting and income tax reporting, during 2006.
1. Depreciation expense of $15,000 inadvertently had been recorded twice for the same machine.
2. No accrual had been made at year end for interest; therefore, interest expense had been understated by $4,000. The Miles Company’s net income during 2007 was $60,000. The company has been subject to a 30% income tax rate for the past several years. It declared and paid dividends of $13,000 during 2007.
Required
1. Prepare whatever journal entries in 2007 are necessary to correct the Miles Company books for its previous errors. Make your corrections directly to the retained earnings account.
2. Prepare the statement of retained earnings for 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained Earnings Statement Hernandez Company began 2007 with a $120,000 balance in retained earnings. During the year, the following events occurred:
1. The company earned net income of $80,000.
2. A material error in net income from a previous period was corrected. This error correction increased retained earnings by $9,800 after related income taxes of $4,200.
3. Cash dividends totaling $13,000 and stock dividends totaling $17,000 were declared.
4. One thousand shares of callable preferred stock that originally had been issued at $110 per share were recalled and retired at the beginning of 2007 for the call price of $120 per share.
5. Treasury stock (common) was acquired at a cost of $20,000. State law requires a restriction of retained earnings in an equal amount. The company reports its retained earnings restrictions in a note to the financial statements.
Required
1. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2007.
2. Prepare the note to disclose the restriction of retained earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method—Conventional and LIFO) Robinson Company began operations late in 2012 and adopted the conventional retail inventory method. Because there was no beginning inventory for 2012 and no markdowns during 2012, the ending inventory for 2012 was $14,000 under both the conventional retail method and the LIFO retail method. At the end of 2013, management wants to compare the results of applying the conventional and LIFO retail methods. There was no change in the price level during 2013. The following data are available for computations.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Inventory, January 1, 2013
|
$14,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
75,000
|
|
Net markups
|
|
9,000
|
|
Net markdowns
|
|
2,500
|
|
Purchases
|
55,500
|
81,000
|
|
Freight in
|
7,500
|
|
|
Estimated theft
|
|
2,000
|
Instructions
Compute the cost of the 2013 ending inventory under both (a) the conventional retail method and (b) the LIFO retail method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Dollar Value LIFO Retail) You assemble the following information for Dillon Department Store, which computes its inventory under the dollar value LIFO method.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Inventory on January 1, 2012
|
$222,000
|
$300,000
|
|
Purchases
|
364,800
|
480,000
|
|
Increase in price level for year
|
|
9%
|
Instructions
Compute the cost of the inventory on December 31, 2012, assuming that the inventory at retail is (a) $294,300 and (b) $359,700.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Dollar Value LIFO Retail) Springsteen Corporation adopted the dollar value LIFO retail inventory method on January 1, 2011. At that time the inventory had a cost of $54,000 and a retail price of $100,000. The following information is available.
|
Year End Inventory at Retail
|
Current Year Cost—Retail %
|
Year End Price Index
|
|
2011
|
$121,900
|
57%
|
106
|
|
2012
|
138,750
|
60%
|
111
|
|
2013
|
126,500
|
61%
|
115
|
|
2014
|
162,500
|
58%
|
125
|
The price index at January 1, 2011, is 100.
Instructions
Compute the ending inventory at December 31 of the years 2011–2014. Round to the nearest dollar.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) Remmers Company manufactures desks. Most of the company’s desks are standard models and are sold on the basis of catalog prices. At December 31, 2012, the following finished desks appear in the company’s inventory.
|
Finished Desks
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
|
2012 catalog selling price
|
$450
|
$480
|
$900
|
$1,050
|
|
FIFO cost per inventory list 12/31/12
|
470
|
450
|
830
|
960
|
|
Estimated current cost to manufacture (
|
460
|
430
|
610
|
1,000
|
|
Sales commissions and estimated other costs of disposal
|
50
|
60
|
80
|
130
|
|
2013 catalog selling price
|
500
|
540
|
900
|
1,200
|
The 2012 catalog was in effect through November 2012, and the 2013 catalog is effective as of December 1, 2012. All catalog prices are net of the usual discounts. Generally, the company attempts to obtain a 20% gross profit on selling price and has usually been successful in doing so.
Instructions
At what amount should each of the four desks appear in the company’s December 31, 2012, inventory, assuming that the company has adopted a lower of FIFO cost or market approach for valuation of inventories on an individual item basis?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) Garcia Home Improvement Company installs replacement siding, windows, and louvered glass doors for single family homes and condominium complexes in northern New Jersey and southern New York. The company is in the process of preparing its annual financial statements for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, and Jim Alcide, controller for Garcia, has gathered the following data concerning inventory. At May 31, 2012, the balance in Garcia’s Raw Materials Inventory account was $408,000, and the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market had a credit balance of $27,500. Alcide summarized the relevant inventory cost and market data at May 31, 2012, in the schedule below. Alcide assigned Patricia Devereaux, an intern from a local college, the task of calculating the amount that should appear on Garcia’s May 31, 2012, financial statements for inventory under the lower of cost or market rule as applied to each item in inventory. Devereaux expressed concern over departing from the cost principle.
|
Cost
|
Replacement Cost
|
Sales Price
|
Net Realizable Value
|
Normal Profit
|
|
Aluminum siding
|
$ 70,000
|
$ 62,500
|
$ 64,000
|
$ 56,000
|
$ 5,100
|
|
Cedar shake siding
|
86,000
|
79,400
|
94,000
|
84,800
|
7,400
|
|
Louvered glass doors
|
112,000
|
124,000
|
186,400
|
168,300
|
18,500
|
|
Thermal windows
|
140,000
|
126,000
|
154,800
|
140,000
|
15,400
|
|
Total
|
$408,000
|
$391,900
|
$499,200
|
$449,100
|
$46,400
|
Instructions
(a) (1) Determine the proper balance in the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market at May 31, 2012.
(2) For the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, determine the amount of the gain or loss that would be recorded due to the change in the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market.
(b) Explain the rationale for the use of the lower of cost or market rule as it applies to inventories.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Entries for Lower of Cost or Market—Cost of Goods Sold and Loss) Malone Company determined its ending inventory at cost and at lower of cost or market at December 31, 2011, December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, as shown below.
|
Cost
|
Lower of Cost or Market
|
|
12/31/11
|
$650,000
|
$650,000
|
|
12/31/12
|
780,000
|
712,000
|
|
12/31/13
|
905,000
|
830,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and at December 31, 2013, assuming that a perpetual inventory system and the cost of goods sold method of adjusting to lower of cost or market is used.
(b) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and at December 31, 2013, assuming that a perpetual inventory is recorded at cost and reduced to lower of cost or market using the loss method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) Eastman Company lost most of its inventory in a fire in December just before the year end physical inventory was taken. Corporate records disclose the following.
|
Inventory (beginning)
|
$ 80,000
|
Sales
|
$415,000
|
|
Purchases
|
290,000
|
Sales returns
|
21,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
28,000
|
Gross profit % based on net selling price
|
35%
|
Merchandise with a selling price of $30,000 remained undamaged after the fire, and damaged merchandise has a salvage value of $8,150. The company does not carry fire insurance on its inventory.
Instructions
Prepare a formal labeled schedule computing the fire loss incurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) On April 15, 2013, fire damaged the office and warehouse of Stanislaw Corporation. The only accounting record saved was the general ledger, from which the trial balance on page 534 was prepared.
|
STANISLAW CORPORATION TRIAL BALANCE MARCH 31, 2013
|
|
Cash
|
$ 20,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
40,000
|
|
|
Inventory, December 31, 2012
|
75,000
|
|
|
Land
|
35,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
110,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$ 41,300
|
|
Equipment
|
3600
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
23,700
|
|
Other accrued expenses
|
|
10,200
|
|
Common stock
|
|
100,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
52,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
135,000
|
|
Purchases
|
52,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
26,600
|
|
|
$362,200
|
$362,200
|
The following data and information have been gathered.
1. The fiscal year of the corporation ends on December 31.
2. An examination of the April bank statement and canceled checks revealed that checks written during the period April 1–15 totaled $13,000: $5,700 paid to accounts payable as of March 31, $3,400 for April merchandise shipments, and $3,900 paid for other expenses. Deposits during the same period amounted to $12,950, which consisted of receipts on account from customers with the exception of a $950 refund from a vendor for merchandise returned in April.
3. Correspondence with suppliers revealed unrecorded obligations at April 15 of $15,600 for April merchandise shipments, including $2,300 for shipments in transit (f.o.b. shipping point) on that date.
4. Customers acknowledged indebtedness of $46,000 at April 15, 2013. It was also estimated that customers owed another $8,000 that will never be acknowledged or recovered. Of the acknowledged indebtedness, $600 will probably be uncollectible.
5. The companies insuring the inventory agreed that the corporation’s fire loss claim should be based on the assumption that the overall gross profit rate for the past 2 years was in effect during the current year. The corporation’s audited financial statements disclosed this information:
|
Year Ended December 31
|
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Net sales
|
$530,000
|
$390,000
|
|
Net purchases
|
280,000
|
235,000
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
50,000
|
66,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
75,000
|
50,000
|
6. Inventory with a cost of $7,000 was salvaged and sold for $3,500. The balance of the inventory was a total loss.
Instructions
Prepare a schedule computing the amount of inventory fire loss. The supporting schedule of the computation of the gross profit should be in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method) Presented below is information related to Waveland Inc.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/12
|
$250,000
|
$ 390,000
|
|
Purchases
|
914,500
|
1,460,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
60,000
|
80,000
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
18,000
|
—
|
|
Gross sales (after employee discounts)
|
—
|
1,410,000
|
|
Sales returns
|
—
|
97,500
|
|
Markups
|
—
|
120,000
|
|
Markup cancellations
|
—
|
40,000
|
|
Markdowns
|
—
|
45,000
|
|
Markdown cancellations
|
—
|
20,000
|
|
Freight in
|
42,000
|
—
|
|
Employee discounts granted
|
—
|
8,000
|
|
Loss from breakage (normal)
|
—
|
4,500
|
Instructions
Assuming that Waveland Inc. uses the conventional retail inventory method, compute the cost of its ending inventory at December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method) Fuque Inc. uses the retail inventory method to estimate ending inventory for its monthly financial statements. The following data pertain to a single department for the month of October 2013.
|
Inventory, October 1, 2013
|
|
|
At cost
|
$ 52,000
|
|
At retail
|
78,000
|
|
Purchases (exclusive of freight and returns)
|
|
|
At cost
|
272,000
|
|
At retail
|
423,000
|
|
Freight in
|
16,600
|
|
Purchase returns
|
|
|
At cost
|
5,600
|
|
At retail
|
8,000
|
|
Markups
|
9,000
|
|
Markup cancellations
|
2,000
|
|
Markdowns (net)
|
3,600
|
|
Normal spoilage and breakage
|
10,000
|
|
Sales
|
390,000
|
Instructions
(a) Using the conventional retail method, prepare a schedule computing estimated lower of cost or market inventory for October 31, 2013.
(b) A department store using the conventional retail inventory method estimates the cost of its ending inventory as $60,000. An accurate physical count reveals only $47,000 of inventory at lower of cost or market. List the factors that may have caused the difference between the computed inventory and the physical count.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) Fiedler Co. follows the practice of valuing its inventory at the lower of cost or market. The following information is available from the company’s inventory records as of December 31, 2012.
|
Item
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Replacement Cost/Unit
|
Estimated Selling Price/Unit
|
Completion & Disposal Cost/Unit
|
Normal Profit Margin/Unit
|
|
A
|
1,100
|
$7.50
|
$8.40
|
$10.50
|
$1.50
|
$1.80
|
|
B
|
800
|
8.20
|
7.90
|
9.40
|
0.90
|
1.20
|
|
C
|
1,000
|
5.60
|
5.40
|
7.20
|
1.15
|
0.60
|
|
D
|
1,000
|
3.80
|
4.20
|
6.30
|
0.80
|
1.50
|
|
E
|
1,400
|
6.40
|
6.30
|
6.70
|
0.70
|
1.00
|
Instructions
Greg Forda is an accounting clerk in the accounting department of Fiedler Co., and he cannot understand why the market value keeps changing from replacement cost to net realizable value to something that he cannot even figure out. Greg is very confused, and he is the one who records inventory purchases and calculates ending inventory. You are the manager of the department and an accountant.
(a) Calculate the lower of cost or market using the “individual item” approach.
(b) Show the journal entry he will need to make in order to write down the ending inventory from cost to market.
(c) Then write a memo to Greg explaining what designated market value is as well as how it is computed. Use your calculations to aid in your explanation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Conventional and Dollar Value LIFO Retail) As of January 1, 2012, Aristotle Inc. installed the retail method of accounting for its merchandise inventory. To prepare the store’s financial statements at June 30, 2012, you obtain the following data.
|
Cost
|
Selling Price
|
|
Inventory, January 1
|
$ 30,000
|
$ 43,000
|
|
Markdowns
|
|
10,500
|
|
Markups
|
|
9,200
|
|
Markdown cancellations
|
|
6,500
|
|
Markup cancellations
|
|
3,200
|
|
Purchases
|
104,800
|
155,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
154,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
2,800
|
4,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
|
8,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule to compute Aristotle’s June 30, 2012, inventory under the conventional retail method of accounting for inventories.
(b) Without prejudice to your solution to part (a), assume that you computed the June 30, 2012, inventory to be $59,400 at retail and the ratio of cost to retail to be 70%. The general price level has increased from 100 at January 1, 2012, to 108 at June 30, 2012. Prepare a schedule to compute the June 30, 2012, inventory at the June 30 price level under the dollar value LIFO retail method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail, LIFO Retail, and Inventory Shortage) Late in 2009, Joan Seceda and four other investors took the chain of Becker Department Stores private, and the company has just completed its third year of operations under the ownership of the investment group. Andrea Selig, controller of Becker Department Stores, is in the process of preparing the year end financial statements. Based on the preliminary financial statements, Seceda has expressed concern over inventory shortages, and she has asked Selig to determine whether an abnormal amount of theft and breakage has occurred. The accounting records of Becker Department Stores contain the following amounts on November 30, 2012, the end of the fiscal year.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 68,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Purchases
|
255,000
|
400,000
|
|
Net markups
|
|
50,000
|
|
Net markdowns
|
|
110,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
320,000
|
According to the November 30, 2012, physical inventory, the actual inventory at retail is $115,000.
Instructions
(a) Describe the circumstances under which the retail inventory method would be applied and the advantages of using the retail inventory method.
(b) Assuming that prices have been stable, calculate the value, at cost, of Becker Department Stores’ ending inventory using the last in, first out (LIFO) retail method. Be sure to furnish supporting calculations.
(c) Estimate the amount of shortage, at retail, that has occurred at Becker Department Stores during the year ended November 30, 2012.
(d) Complications in the retail method can be caused by such items as (1) freight in costs, (2) purchase returns and allowances, (3) sales returns and allowances, and (4) employee discounts. Explain how each of these four special items is handled in the retail inventory method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Change to LIFO Retail) Diderot Stores Inc., which uses the conventional retail inventory method, wishes to change to the LIFO retail method beginning with the accounting year ending December 31, 2012. Amounts as shown below appear on the store’s books before adjustment.
|
At Cost
|
At Retail
|
|
Inventory, January 1, 2012
|
$ 15,800
|
$ 24,000
|
|
Purchases in 2012
|
116,200
|
184,000
|
|
Markups in 2012
|
|
12,000
|
|
Markdowns in 2012
|
|
5,500
|
|
Sales in 2012
|
|
175,000
|
You are to assume that all markups and markdowns apply to 2012 purchases, and that it is appropriate to treat the entire inventory as a single department.
Instructions
Compute the inventory at December 31, 2012, under the following methods.
(a) The conventional retail method.
(b) The last in, first out retail method, effecting the change in method as of January 1, 2012. Assume that the cost to retail percentage for 2011 was recomputed correctly in accordance with procedures necessary to change to LIFO. This ratio was 59%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Change to LIFO Retail; Dollar Value LIFO Retail) Davenport Department Store converted from the conventional retail method to the LIFO retail method on January 1, 2012, and is now considering converting to the dollar value LIFO inventory method. During your examination of the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2013, management requested that you furnish a summary showing certain computations of inventory cost for the past 3 years. Here is the available information.
1. The inventory at January 1, 2011, had a retail value of $56,000 and cost of $29,800 based on the conventional retail method.
2. Transactions during 2011 were as follows.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Gross purchases
|
$311,000
|
$554,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
5,200
|
10,000
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
6,000
|
|
|
Gross sales (after employee discounts)
|
|
551,000
|
|
Sales returns
|
|
9,000
|
|
Employee discounts
|
|
3,000
|
|
Freight in
|
17,600
|
|
|
Net markups
|
|
20,000
|
|
Net markdowns
|
|
12,000
|
3. The retail value of the December 31, 2012, inventory was $75,600, the cost ratio for 2012 under the LIFO retail method was 61%, and the regional price index was 105% of the January 1, 2012, price level.
4. The retail value of the December 31, 2013, inventory was $62,640, the cost ratio for 2013 under the LIFO retail method was 60%, and the regional price index was 108% of the January 1, 2012, price level.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule showing the computation of the cost of inventory on hand at December 31, 2011, based on the conventional retail method.
(b) Prepare a schedule showing the recomputation of the inventory to be reported on December 31, 2011, in accordance with procedures necessary to convert from the conventional retail method to the LIFO retail method beginning January 1, 2012. Assume that the retail value of the December 31, 2011, inventory was $60,000. (c) Without prejudice to your solution to part (b), assume that you computed the December 31, 2011, inventory (retail value $60,000) under the LIFO retail method at a cost of $33,300. Prepare a schedule showing the computations of the cost of the store’s 2012 and 2013 year end inventories under the dollar value LIFO method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) You have been asked by the financial vice president to develop a short presentation on the lower of cost or market method for inventory purposes. The financial VP needs to explain this method to the president because it appears that a portion of the company’s inventory has declined in value.
Instructions
The financial VP asks you to answer the following questions.
(a) What is the purpose of the lower of cost or market method?
(b) What is meant by “market”? (Hint: Discuss the ceiling and floor constraints.)
(c) Do you apply the lower of cost or market method to each individual item, to a category, or to the total of the inventory? Explain.
(d) What are the potential disadvantages of the lower of cost or market method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) Ogala Corporation purchased a significant amount of raw materials inventory for a new product that it is manufacturing. Ogala uses the lower of cost or market rule for these raw materials. The replacement cost of the raw materials is above the net realizable value, and both are below the original cost. Ogala uses the average cost inventory method for these raw materials. In the last 2 years, each purchase has been at a lower price than the previous purchase, and the ending inventory quantity for each period has been higher than the beginning inventory quantity for that period.
Instructions
(a) (1) At which amount should Ogala’s raw materials inventory be reported on the balance sheet? Why?
(2) In general, why is the lower of cost or market rule used to report inventory? (b) What would have been the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold had Ogala used the LIFO inventory method instead of the average cost inventory method for the raw materials? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method) Saurez Company, your client, manufactures paint. The company’s president, Maria Saurez, has decided to open a retail store to sell Saurez paint as well as wallpaper and other supplies that would be purchased from other suppliers. She has asked you for information about the conventional retail method of pricing inventories at the retail store.
Instructions
Prepare a report to the president explaining the retail method of pricing inventories. Your report should include the following points.
(a) Description and accounting features of the method.
(b) The conditions that may distort the results under the method.
(c) A comparison of the advantages of using the retail method with those of using cost methods of inventory pricing.
(d) The accounting theory underlying the treatment of net markdowns and net markups under the method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost Determination, LCM, Retail Method) Olson Corporation, a retailer and wholesaler of national brand name household lighting fixtures, purchases its inventories from various suppliers.
Instructions
(a) (1) What criteria should be used to determine which of Olson’s costs are inventoriable?
(2) Are Olson’s administrative costs inventoriable? Defend your answer. (b) (1) Olson uses the lower of cost or market rule for its wholesale inventories. What are the theoretical arguments for that rule?
(2) The replacement cost of the inventories is below the net realizable value less a normal profit margin, which, in turn, is below the original cost. What amount should be used to value the inventories? Why?
(c) Olson calculates the estimated cost of its ending inventories held for sale at retail using the conventional retail inventory method. How would Olson treat the beginning inventories and net markdowns in calculating the cost ratio used to determine its ending inventories? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method and LIFO Retail) Presented below are a number of items that may be encountered in computing the cost to retail percentage when using the conventional retail method or the LIFO retail method.
1. Markdowns.
2. Markdown cancellations.
3. Cost of items transferred in from other departments.
4. Retail value of items transferred in from other departments.
5. Sales discounts.
6. Purchases discounts (purchases recorded gross).
7. Estimated retail value of goods broken or stolen.
8. Cost of beginning inventory.
9. Retail value of beginning inventory.
10. Cost of purchases.
11. Retail value of purchases.
12. Markups.
13. Markup cancellations.
14. Employee discounts (sales recorded net).
Instructions
For each of the items listed above, indicate whether this item would be considered in the cost to retail percentage under (a) conventional retail and (b) LIFO retail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO) Harrisburg Company is considering changing its inventory valuation method from FIFO to LIFO because of the potential tax savings. However, the management wishes to consider all of the effects on the company, including its reported performance, before making the final decision. The inventory account, currently valued on the FIFO basis, consists of 1,000,000 units at $8 per unit on January 1, 2012. There are 1,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of January 1, 2012, and the cash balance is $400,000. The company has made the following forecasts for the period 2012–2014.
|
2012
|
2013
|
2014
|
|
Unit sales (in millions of units)
|
1.1
|
1.0
|
1.3
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
$10
|
$12
|
$12
|
|
Unit purchases (in millions of units)
|
1.0
|
1.1
|
1.2
|
|
Purchase price per unit
|
$8
|
$9
|
$10
|
|
Annual depreciation (in thousands of dollars)
|
$300
|
$300
|
$300
|
|
Cash dividends per share
|
$0.15
|
$0.15
|
$0.15
|
|
Cash payments for additions to and replacement of
plant and equipment (in thousands of dollars)
|
$350
|
$350
|
$350
|
|
Income tax rate
|
40%
|
40%
|
40%
|
|
Operating expenses (exclusive of depreciation) as a
percent of sales
|
15%
|
15%
|
15%
|
|
Common shares outstanding (in millions)
|
1
|
1
|
1
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule that illustrates and compares the following data for Harrisburg Company under the FIFO and the LIFO inventory method for 2012–2014. Assume the company would begin LIFO at the beginning of 2012.
(1) Year end inventory balances. (3) Earnings per share. (2) Annual net income after taxes. (4) Cash balance. Assume all sales are collected in the year of sale and all purchases, operating expenses, and taxes are paid during the year incurred.
(b) Using the data above, your answer to (a), and any additional issues you believe need to be considered, prepare a report that recommends whether or not Harrisburg Company should change to the LIFO inventory method. Support your conclusions with appropriate arguments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In some instances, accounting principles require a departure from valuing inventories at cost alone. Determine the proper unit inventory price in the following cases.
|
Cases
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
|
Cost
|
$15.90
|
$16.10
|
$15.90
|
$15.90
|
$15.90
|
|
Net realizable value
|
14.50
|
19.20
|
15.20
|
10.40
|
16.40
|
|
Net realizable value less normal profit
|
12.80
|
17.60
|
13.75
|
8.80
|
14.80
|
|
Market (replacement cost)
|
14.80
|
17.20
|
12.80
|
9.70
|
16.80
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Rembrandt Inc.’s inventory.
|
(per unit)
|
Skis
|
Boots
|
Parkas
|
|
Historical cost
|
$190.00
|
$106.00
|
$53.00
|
|
Selling price
|
212.00
|
145.00
|
73.75
|
|
Cost to distribute
|
19.00
|
8.00
|
2.50
|
|
Current replacement cost
|
203.00
|
105.00
|
51.00
|
|
Normal profi t margin
|
32.00
|
29.00
|
21.25
|
Determine the following: (a) the two limits to market value (i.e., the ceiling and the floor) that should be used in the lower of cost or market computation for skis; (b) the cost amount that should be used in the lower of cost or market comparison of boots; and (c) the market amount that should be used to value parkas on the basis of the lower of cost or market.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Floyd Corporation has the following four items in its ending inventory.
|
Item
|
Cost
|
Replacement Cost
|
Net Realizable Value (NRV)
|
NRV less Normal Profi t Margin
|
|
Jokers
|
$2,000
|
$2,050
|
$2,100
|
$1,600
|
|
Penguins
|
5,000
|
5,100
|
4,950
|
4,100
|
|
Riddlers
|
4,400
|
4,550
|
4,625
|
3,700
|
|
Scarecrows
|
3,200
|
2,990
|
3,830
|
3,070
|
Determine the final lower of cost or market inventory value for each item.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) Riegel Company uses the lower of cost or market method, on an individual item basis, in pricing its inventory items. The inventory at December 31, 2013, consists of products D, E, F, G, H, and I. Relevant per unit data for these products appear below.
|
Item D
|
Item E
|
Item F
|
Item G
|
Item H
|
Item I
|
|
Estimated selling price
|
$120
|
$110
|
$95
|
$90
|
$110
|
$90
|
|
Cost
|
75
|
80
|
80
|
80
|
50
|
36
|
|
Replacement cost
|
120
|
72
|
70
|
30
|
70
|
30
|
|
Estimated selling expense
|
30
|
30
|
35
|
35
|
30
|
30
|
|
Normal profi t
|
20
|
20
|
20
|
20
|
20
|
20
|
Instructions
Using the lower of cost or market rule, determine the proper unit value for balance sheet reporting purposes at December 31, 2013, for each of the inventory items above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market) Sedato Company follows the practice of pricing its inventory at the lower of cost or market, on an individual item basis.
|
Item No.
|
Quantity
|
Cost per Unit
|
Cost to Replace
|
Estimated Selling Price
|
Cost of Completion and Disposal
|
Normal Profi t
|
|
1320
|
1,200
|
$3.20
|
$3.00
|
$4.50
|
$0.35
|
$1.25
|
|
1333
|
900
|
2.70
|
2.30
|
3.40
|
0.50
|
0.50
|
|
1426
|
800
|
4.50
|
3.70
|
5.00
|
0.40
|
1.00
|
|
1437
|
1,000
|
3.60
|
3.10
|
3.20
|
0.45
|
0.90
|
|
1510
|
700
|
2.25
|
2.00
|
3.25
|
0.80
|
0.60
|
|
1522
|
500
|
3.00
|
2.70
|
3.90
|
0.40
|
0.50
|
|
1573
|
3,000
|
1.80
|
1.60
|
2.50
|
0.75
|
0.50
|
|
1626
|
1,000
|
4.70
|
5.20
|
6.00
|
0.50
|
1.00
|
Instructions
From the information above, determine the amount of Sedato Company’s inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market—Journal Entries) Dover Company began operations in 2012 and determined its ending inventory at cost and at lower of cost or market at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. This information is presented below.
|
Cost
|
Lower of Cost or Market
|
|
12/31/12
|
$346,000
|
$322,000
|
|
12/31/13
|
410,000
|
390,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at lower of cost or market, and a perpetual inventory system. Assume the cost of goods sold method with no allowance used.
(b) Prepare journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at lower of cost or market, and a perpetual inventory system. Assume the loss method with an allowance used.
(c) Which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Lower of Cost or Market—Error Effect) LaGreca Company uses the lower of cost or market method, on an individual item basis, in pricing its inventory items. The inventory at December 31, 2012, included product X. Relevant per unit data for product X appear below.
|
Estimated selling price
|
$50
|
|
Cost
|
40
|
|
Replacement cost
|
38
|
|
Estimated selling expense
|
14
|
|
Normal profi t
|
9
|
There were 1,000 units of product X on hand at December 31, 2012. Product X was incorrectly valued at $38 per unit for reporting purposes. All 1,000 units were sold in 2013.
Instructions
Compute the effect of this error on net income for 2012 and the effect on net income for 2013, and indicate the direction of the misstatement for each year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relative Sales Value Method) Larsen Realty Corporation purchased a tract of unimproved land for $55,000. This land was improved and subdivided into building lots at an additional cost of $30,000. These building lots were all of the same size but owing to differences in location were offered for sale at different prices as follows.
|
Group
|
No. of Lots
|
Price per Lot
|
|
1
|
9
|
$3,000
|
|
2
|
15
|
4,000
|
|
3
|
19
|
2,000
|
Operating expenses for the year allocated to this project total $18,200. Lots unsold at the year end were as follows.
|
Group 1
|
5 lots
|
|
Group 2
|
7 lots
|
|
Group 3
|
2 lots
|
Instructions
At the end of the fiscal year Larsen Realty Corporation instructs you to arrive at the net income realized on this operation to date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relative Sales Value Method) during 2013, Crawford Furniture Company purchases a carload of wicker chairs. The manufacturer sells the chairs to Crawford for a lump sum of $60,000 because it is discontinuing manufacturing operations and wishes to dispose of its entire stock. Three types of chairs are included in the carload. The three types and the estimated selling price for each are listed below.
|
Type
|
No. of Chairs
|
Estimated Selling Price Each
|
|
Lounge chairs
|
400
|
$90
|
|
Armchairs
|
300
|
80
|
|
Straight chairs
|
800
|
50
|
During 2013, Crawford sells 200 lounge chairs, 100 armchairs, and 120 straight chairs.
Instructions
What is the amount of gross profit realized during 2013? What is the amount of inventory of unsold straight chairs on December 31, 2013?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Purchase Commitments) At December 31, 2013, Volkan Company has outstanding non cancelable purchase commitments for 40,000 gallons, at $3.00 per gallon, of raw material to be used in its manufacturing process. The company prices its raw material inventory at cost or market, whichever is lower.
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2013, is $3.30, how would this matter be treated in the accounts and statements? Explain.
(b) Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2013, is $2.70, instead of $3.30, how would you treat this situation in the accounts and statements?
(c) Give the entry in January 2014, when the 40,000 gallon shipment is received, assuming that the situation given in (b) above existed at December 31, 2013, and that the market price in January 2014 was $2.70 per gallon. Give an explanation of your treatment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) Astaire Company uses the gross profit method to estimate inventory for monthly reporting purposes. Presented below is information for the month of May.
|
Inventory, May 1
|
$ 160,000
|
|
Purchases (gross)
|
640,000
|
|
Freight in
|
30,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,000,000
|
|
Sales returns
|
70,000
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
12,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of sales.
(b) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) Cast leaving Company lost most of its inventory in a fire in December just before the year end physical inventory was taken. The corporation’s books disclosed the following.
|
Beginning inventory
|
$170,000
|
Sales
|
$650,000
|
|
Purchases for the year
|
450,000
|
Sales returns
|
24,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
30,000
|
Rate of gross profi t on net sales
|
30%
|
Merchandise with a selling price of $21,000 remained undamaged after the fire. Damaged merchandise with an original selling price of $15,000 had a net realizable value of $5,300.
Instructions
Compute the amount of the loss as a result of the fire, assuming that the corporation had no insurance coverage.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) You are called by Kevin Garnett of Celtic Co. on July 16 and asked to prepare a claim for insurance as a result of a theft that took place the night before. You suggest that an inventory be taken immediately. The following data are available.
|
Inventory, July 1
|
$ 38,000
|
|
Purchases—goods placed in stock July 1–15
|
90,000
|
|
Sales—goods delivered to customers (gross)
|
116,000
|
|
Sales returns—goods returned to stock
|
4,000
|
Your client reports that the goods on hand on July 16 cost $30,500, but you determine that this figure includes goods of $6,000 received on a consignment basis. Your past records show that sales are made at approximately 25% over cost. Garnett’s insurance covers only goods owned.
Instructions
Compute the claim against the insurance company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) Sliver Lumber Company handles three principal lines of merchandise with these varying rates of gross profit on cost.
|
Lumber
|
25%
|
|
Millwork
|
30%
|
|
Hardware
|
40%
|
On August 18, a fire destroyed the office, lumber shed, and a considerable portion of the lumber stacked in the yard. To file a report of loss for insurance purposes, the company must know what the inventories were immediately preceding the fire. No detail or perpetual inventory records of any kind were maintained. The only pertinent information you are able to obtain are the following facts from the general ledger, which was kept in a fireproof vault and thus escaped destruction.
|
Lumber
|
Millwork
|
Hardware
|
|
Inventory, Jan. 1, 2013
|
$ 250,000
|
$ 90,000
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Purchases to Aug. 18, 2013
|
1,500,000
|
375,000
|
160,000
|
|
Sales to Aug. 18, 2013
|
2,050,000
|
533,000
|
245,000
|
Instructions
Submit your estimate of the inventory amounts immediately preceding the fire.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Gross Profit Method) Presented below is information related to Jerrold Corporation for the current year.
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 600,000
|
|
|
Purchases
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Total goods available for sale
|
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
2,300,000
|
Instructions
Compute the ending inventory, assuming that (a) gross profit is 40% of sales; (b) gross profit is 60% of cost; (c) gross profit is 35% of sales; and (d) gross profit is 25% of cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method) Presented below is information related to McKenna Company.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 58,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Purchases (net)
|
122,000
|
200,000
|
|
Net markups
|
|
20,000
|
|
Net markdowns
|
|
30,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
186,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the ending inventory at retail.
(b) Compute a cost to retail percentage (round to two decimals) under the following conditions.
(1) Excluding both markups and markdowns.
(2) Excluding markups but including markdowns.
(3) Excluding markdowns but including markups.
(4) Including both markdowns and markups.
(c) Which of the methods in (b) above (1, 2, 3, or 4) does the following?
(1) Provides the most conservative estimate of ending inventory.
(2) Provides an approximation of lower of cost or market.
(3) Is used in the conventional retail method.
(d) Compute ending inventory at lower of cost or market (round to nearest dollar).
(e) Compute cost of goods sold based on (d).
(f) Compute gross profit based on (d).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method) Presented below is information related to kuchinsky Company.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 200,000
|
$ 280,000
|
|
Purchases
|
1,425,000
|
2,140,000
|
|
Markups
|
|
95,000
|
|
Markup cancellations
|
|
15,000
|
|
Markdowns
|
|
35,000
|
|
Markdown cancellations
|
|
5,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
2,250,000
|
Instructions
Compute the inventory by the conventional retail inventory method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method) The records of Mandy’s Boutique report the following data for the month of April.
|
Sales
|
$95,000
|
Purchases (at cost)
|
$55,000
|
|
Sales returns
|
2,000
|
Purchases (at sales price)
|
88,000
|
|
Markups
|
10,000
|
Purchase returns (at cost)
|
2,000
|
|
Markup cancellations
|
1,500
|
Purchase returns (at sales price)
|
3,000
|
|
Markdowns
|
9,300
|
Beginning inventory (at cost)
|
30,000
|
|
Markdown cancellations
|
2,800
|
Beginning inventory (at sales price)
|
46,500
|
|
Freight on purchases
|
2,400
|
|
|
Instructions
Compute the ending inventory by the conventional retail inventory method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail Inventory Method—Conventional and LIFO) Brewster Company began operations on January 1, 2012, adopting the conventional retail inventory system. None of the company’s merchandise was marked down in 2012 and, because there was no beginning inventory, its ending inventory for 2012 of $41,100 would have been the same under either the onventional retail system or the LIFO retail system. On December 31, 2013, the store management considers adopting the LIFO retail system and desires to know how the December 31, 2013, inventory would appear under both systems. All pertinent data regarding purchases, sales, markups, and markdowns are shown on the next page. There has been no change in the price level.
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Inventory, Jan. 1, 2013
|
$ 41,100
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Markdowns (net)
|
|
13,000
|
|
Markups (net)
|
|
22,000
|
|
Purchases (net)
|
150,000
|
191,000
|
|
Sales (net)
|
|
167,000
|
Instructions
Determine the cost of the 2013 ending inventory under both (a) the conventional retail method and (b) the LIFO retail method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost Inventory) Esplanade Company was formed on December 1, 2011. The following information is available from Esplanade’s inventory records for Product BAP.
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
January 1, 2012 (beginning inventory) Purchases:
|
600
|
$8.00
|
|
January 5, 2012
|
1,100
|
9.00
|
|
January 25, 2012
|
1,300
|
10.00
|
|
February 16, 2012
|
800
|
11.00
|
|
March 26, 2012
|
600
|
12.00
|
A physical inventory on March 31, 2012, shows 1,500 units on hand.
Instructions
Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2012, under each of the following inventory methods.
(a) FIFO. (b) LIFO. (c) Weighted average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost—Periodic) Presented below is information related to radios for the Couples Company for the month of July.
|
Date
|
Transaction
|
Units In
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
Units Sold
|
Selling Price
|
Total
|
|
July 1
|
Balance
|
100
|
$4.10
|
$ 410
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
Purchase
|
800
|
4.30
|
3,440
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
300
|
$7.00
|
$ 2,100
|
|
10
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
300
|
7.30
|
2,190
|
|
12
|
Purchase
|
400
|
4.51
|
1804
|
|
|
|
|
15
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
200
|
7.40
|
1480
|
|
18
|
Purchase
|
300
|
4.60
|
1380
|
|
|
|
|
22
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
400
|
7.40
|
2960
|
|
25
|
Purchase
|
500
|
4.58
|
2290
|
|
|
|
|
30
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
200
|
7.50
|
1500
|
|
Totals
|
2,100
|
|
$9,324
|
1,400
|
|
$10,230
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the periodic inventory method is used, compute the inventory cost at July 31 under each of the following cost flow assumptions.
(1) FIFO.
(2) LIFO.
(3) Weighted average.
(b) Answer the following questions.
(1) Which of the methods used above will yield the lowest figure for gross profit for the income statement? Explain why.
(2) Which of the methods used above will yield the lowest figure for ending inventory for the balance sheet? Explain why.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO—Periodic and Perpetual) The following is a record of Cannondale Company’s transactions for Boston Teapots for the month of May 2012.
|
May 1
|
Balance 400 units @ $20
|
|
12
|
Purchase 600 units @ $25
|
|
28
|
Purchase 400 units @ $30
|
|
May 10
|
May 10 Sale 300 units @ $38
|
|
20
|
20 Sale 590 units @ $38
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that perpetual inventories are not maintained and that a physical count at the end of the month shows 510 units on hand, what is the cost of the ending inventory using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO?
(b) Assuming that perpetual records are maintained and they tie into the general ledger, calculate the ending inventory using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO.5
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFO and LIFO, Income Statement Presentation) The board of directors of Oksana Corporation is considering whether or not it should instruct the accounting department to change from a first in, first out (FIFO) basis of pricing inventories to a last in, first out (LIFO) basis. The following information is available.
|
Sales
|
20,000 units @ $50
|
|
Inventory, January 1
|
6,000 units @ 20
|
|
Purchases
|
6,000 units @ 22
|
|
10,000 units @ 25
|
|
7,000 units @ 30
|
|
Inventory, December 31
|
9,000 units @ ?
|
|
Operating expenses
|
$200,000
|
Instructions
Prepare a condensed income statement for the year on both bases for comparative purposes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO Effects) You are the vice president of finance of Mickiewicz Corporation, a retail company that prepared two different schedules of gross margin for the first quarter ended March 31, 2012. These schedules appear below.
|
Sales ($5 per unit)
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
Gross Margin
|
|
Schedule 1
|
$150,000
|
$124,900
|
$25,100
|
|
Schedule 2
|
150,000
|
129,600
|
20,400
|
The computation of cost of goods sold in each schedule is based on the following data.
|
Units
|
Cost per Unit
|
Total Cost
|
|
Beginning inventory, January 1
|
10,000
|
$4.00
|
$40,000
|
|
Purchase, January 10
|
8,000
|
4.20
|
33,600
|
|
Purchase, January 30
|
6,000
|
4.25
|
25,500
|
|
Purchase, February 11
|
9,000
|
4.30
|
38,700
|
|
Purchase, March 17
|
12,000
|
4.40
|
52,800
|
Peggy Fleming, the president of the corporation, cannot understand how two different gross margins can be computed from the same set of data. As the vice president of finance, you have explained to Ms. Fleming that the two schedules are based on different assumptions concerning the flow of inventory costs, i.e., FIFO and LIFO. Schedules 1 and 2 were not necessarily prepared in this sequence of cost flow assumptions.
Instructions
Prepare two separate schedules computing cost of goods sold and supporting schedules showing the composition of the ending inventory under both cost flow assumptions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO—Periodic) Tom Brady Shop began operations on January 2, 2012. The following stock record card for footballs was taken from the records at the end of the year.
|
Date
|
Voucher
|
Terms
|
Units Received
|
Unit Invoice Cost
|
Gross Invoice Amount
|
|
1/15
|
10624
|
Net 30
|
50
|
$20
|
$1,000
|
|
3/15
|
11437
|
1/5, net 30
|
65
|
16
|
1,040
|
|
6/20
|
21332
|
1/10, net 30
|
90
|
15
|
1,350
|
|
9/12
|
27644
|
1/10, net 30
|
84
|
12
|
1,008
|
|
11/24
|
31269
|
1/10, net 30
|
76
|
11
|
836
|
|
Totals
|
|
365
|
|
$5,234
|
A physical inventory on December 31, 2012, reveals that 110 footballs were in stock. The bookkeeper informs you that all the discounts were taken. Assume that Tom Brady Shop uses the invoice price less discount for recording purchases.
Instructions
(a) Compute the December 31, 2012, inventory using the FIFO method.
(b) Compute the 2012 cost of goods sold using the LIFO method.
(c) What method would you recommend to the owner to minimize income taxes in 2012, using the inventory information for footballs as a guide?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(LIFO Effect) The following example was provided to encourage the use of the LIFO method. In a nutshell, LIFO subtracts inflation from inventory costs, deducts it from taxable income, and records it in a LIFO reserve account on the books. The LIFO benefit grows as inflation widens the gap between current year and past year (minus inflation) inventory costs. This gap is:
|
With LIFO
|
Without LIFO
|
|
Revenues
|
$3,200,000
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,800,000
|
2,800,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
|
Operating income
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
|
LIFO adjustment
|
40,000
|
0
|
|
Taxable income
|
$ 210,000
|
$ 250,000
|
|
Income taxes @ 36%
|
$ 75,600
|
$ 90,000
|
|
Cash fl ow
|
$ 174,400
|
$ 160,000
|
|
Extra cash
|
$ 14,400
|
0
|
|
Increased cash fl ow
|
9%
|
0%
|
Instructions
(a) Explain what is meant by the LIFO reserve account.
(b) How does LIFO subtract inflation from inventory costs?
(c) Explain how the cash flow of $174,400 in this example was computed. Explain why this amount may not be correct.
(d) Why does a company that uses LIFO have extra cash? Explain whether this situation will always exist.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Alternative Inventory Methods—Comprehensive) Belanna Corporation began operations on December 1, 2012. The only inventory transaction in 2012 was the purchase of inventory on December 10, 2012, at a cost of $20 per unit. None of this inventory was sold in 2012. Relevant information is as follows.
|
Ending inventory units
|
|
December 31, 2012
|
100
|
|
|
December 31, 2013, by purchase date
|
|
December 2, 2013
|
100
|
|
|
July 20, 2013
|
30
|
130
|
During the year, the following purchases and sales were made.
|
Purchases
|
Sales
|
|
|
March 15
|
300 units at $24
|
April 10
|
200
|
|
July 20
|
300 units at 25
|
August 20
|
300
|
|
September 4
|
200 units at 28
|
November 18
|
170
|
|
December 2
|
100 units at 30
|
December 12
|
200
|
The company uses the periodic inventory method.
Instructions
(a) Determine ending inventory under (1) specific identification, (2) FIFO, (3) LIFO, and (4) average cost. (Round unit cost to four decimal places.)
(b) Determine ending inventory using dollar value LIFO. Assume that the December 2, 2013, purchase cost is the current cost of inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Dollar Value LIFO) Presented below is information related to Martin Company.
|
Date
|
Ending Inventory (End of Year Prices)
|
Price Index
|
|
December 31, 2009
|
$ 80,000
|
100
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
111,300
|
105
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
108,000
|
120
|
|
December 31, 2012
|
122,200
|
130
|
|
December 31, 2013
|
147,000
|
140
|
|
December 31, 2014
|
176,900
|
145
|
Instructions
Compute the ending inventory for Martin Company for 2009 through 2014 using the dollar value LIFO method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Various Inventory Issues) The following independent situations relate to inventory accounting.
1. Kim Co. purchased goods with a list price of $175,000, subject to trade discounts of 20% and 10%, with no cash discounts allowable. How much should Kim Co. record as the cost of these goods?
2. Keillor Company’s inventory of $1,100,000 at December 31, 2012, was based on a physical count of goods priced at cost and before any year end adjustments relating to the following items.
(a) Goods shipped from a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 24, 2012, at an invoice cost of $69,000 to Keillor Company were received on January 4, 2013.
(b) The physical count included $29,000 of goods billed to Sakic Corp. f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012. The carrier picked up these goods on January 3, 2013. What amount should Keillor report as inventory on its balance sheet?
3. Zimmerman Corp. had 1,500 units of part M.O. on hand May 1, 2012, costing $21 each. Purchases of part M.O. during May were as follows.
|
Units
|
Units Cost
|
|
May 9
|
2,000
|
$22.00
|
|
17
|
3,500
|
23.00
|
|
26
|
1,000
|
24.00
|
8A physical count on May 31, 2012, shows 2,000 units of part M.O. on hand. Using the FIFO method, what is the cost of part M.O. inventory at May 31, 2012? Using the LIFO method, what is the inventory cost? Using the average cost method, what is the inventory cost?
4. Ashbrook Company adopted the dollar value LIFO method on January 1, 2012 (using internal price indexes and multiple pools). The following data are available for inventory pool A for the 2 years following adoption of LIFO.
|
Inventory
|
At Base Year Cost
|
At Current Year Cost
|
|
1/1/12
|
$200,000
|
$200,000
|
|
12/31/12
|
240,000
|
264,000
|
|
12/31/13
|
256,000
|
286,720
|
Computing an internal price index and using the dollar value LIFO method, at what amount should the inventory be reported at December 31, 2013?
5. Donovan Inc., a retail store chain, had the following information in its general ledger for the year 2013.
|
Merchandise purchased for resale
|
$909,400
|
|
Interest on notes payable to vendors
|
8,700
|
|
Purchase returns
|
16,500
|
|
Freight in
|
22,000
|
|
Freight out
|
17,100
|
|
Cash discounts on purchases
|
6,800
|
What is Donovan’s inventoriable cost for 2013?
Instructions
Answer each of the preceding questions about inventories, and explain your answers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Adjustments) Dimitri Company, a manufacturer of small tools, provided the following information from its accounting records for the year ended December 31, 2012.
|
Inventory at December 31, 2012 (based on physical count of goods in Dimitri’s plant, at cost, on December 31, 2012)
|
$1,520,000
|
|
Accounts payable at December 31, 2012
|
1,200,000
|
|
Net sales (sales less sales returns)
|
8,150,000
|
Additional information is as follows.
1. Included in the physical count were tools billed to a customer f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012. These tools had a cost of $31,000 and were billed at $40,000. The shipment was on Dimitri’s loading dock waiting to be picked up by the common carrier.
2. Goods were in transit from a vendor to Dimitri on December 31, 2012. The invoice cost was $76,000, and the goods were shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29, 2012.
3. Work in process inventory costing $30,000 was sent to an outside processor for plating on December 30, 2012.
4. Tools returned by customers and held pending inspection in the returned goods area on December 31, 2012, were not included in the physical count. On January 8, 2013, the tools costing $32,000 were inspected and returned to inventory. Credit memos totaling $47,000 were issued to the customers on the same date.
5. Tools shipped to a customer f.o.b. destination on December 26, 2012, were in transit at December 31, 2012, and had a cost of $26,000. Upon notification of receipt by the customer on January 2, 2013, Dimitri issued a sales invoice for $42,000.
6. Goods, with an invoice cost of $27,000, received from a vendor at 5:00 p.m. on December 31, 2012, were recorded on a receiving report dated January 2, 2013. The goods were not included in the physical count, but the invoice was included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012.
7. Goods received from a vendor on December 26, 2012, were included in the physical count. However, the related $56,000 vendor invoice was not included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012, because the accounts payable copy of the receiving report was lost.
8. On January 3, 2013, a monthly freight bill in the amount of $8,000 was received. The bill specifically related to merchandise purchased in December 2012, one half of which was still in the inventory at December 31, 2012. The freight charges were not included in either the inventory or in accounts payable at December 31, 2012.
Instructions
Using the format shown below, prepare a schedule of adjustments as of December 31, 2012, to the initial amounts per Dimitri’s accounting records. Show separately the effect, if any, of each of the eight transactions on the December 31, 2012, amounts. If the transactions would have no effect on the initial amount shown, enter NONE.
|
Inventory
|
Accounts Payable
|
Net Sales
|
|
Initial amounts
|
$1,520,000
|
$1,200,000
|
$8,150,000
|
|
Adjustments—increase
|
|
|
|
|
(decrease)
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
|
|
|
|
8
|
|
|
|
|
Total adjustments
|
|
|
|
|
Adjusted amounts
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Purchases Recorded Gross and Net) Some of the transactions of Torres Company during August are listed below. Torres uses the periodic inventory method.
|
August 10
|
Purchased merchandise on account, $12,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
13
|
Returned part of the purchase of August 10, $1,200, and received credit on account.
|
|
15
|
Purchased merchandise on account, $16,000, terms 1/10, n/60.
|
|
25
|
Purchased merchandise on account, $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
28
|
Paid invoice of August 15 in full.
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that purchases are recorded at gross amounts and that discounts are to be recorded when taken:
(1) Prepare general journal entries to record the transactions.
(2) Describe how the various items would be shown in the financial statements.
(b) Assuming that purchases are recorded at net amounts and that discounts lost are treated as financial expenses:
(1) Prepare general journal entries to enter the transactions.
(2) Prepare the adjusting entry necessary on August 31 if financial statements are to be prepared at that time.
(3) Describe how the various items would be shown in the financial statements.
(c) Which of the two methods do you prefer and why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost) Hull Company’s record of transactions concerning part X for the month of April was as follows.
|
Purchases
|
Sales
|
|
April 1 (balance on hand)
|
100 @ $5.00
|
April 5
|
300
|
|
4
|
400 @ 5.10
|
12
|
200
|
|
11
|
300 @ 5.30
|
27
|
800
|
|
18
|
200 @ 5.35
|
28
|
150
|
|
26
|
600 @ 5.60
|
|
|
|
30
|
200 @ 5.80
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the inventory at April 30 on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. Carry unit costs to the nearest cent.
(1) First in, first out (FIFO).
(2) Last in, first out (LIFO).
(3) Average cost.
(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what amount would be shown as ending inventory in (1), (2), and (3) above? Carry average unit costs to four decimal places.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost) Some of the information found on a detail inventory card for Slatkin Inc. for the first month of operations is as follows.
|
Received
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
No. of Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Issued, No. of Units
|
Balance, No. of Units
|
|
January 2
|
1,200
|
$3.00
|
|
1,200
|
|
7
|
|
|
700
|
500
|
|
10
|
600
|
3.20
|
|
1,100
|
|
13
|
|
|
500
|
600
|
|
18
|
1000
|
3.30
|
300
|
1,300
|
|
20
|
|
|
1,100
|
200
|
|
23
|
1300
|
3.40
|
|
1,500
|
|
26
|
|
|
800
|
700
|
|
28
|
1600
|
3.50
|
|
2,300
|
|
31
|
|
|
1,300
|
1,000
|
Instructions
(a) From these data compute the ending inventory on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. Carry unit costs to the nearest cent and ending inventory to the nearest dollar.
(1) First in, first out (FIFO).
(2) Last in, first out (LIFO).
(3) Average cost.
(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, would the amounts shown as ending inventory in (1), (2), and (3) above be the same? Explain and compute.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Financial Statement Effects of FIFO and LIFO) The management of Tritt Company has asked its accounting department to describe the effect upon the company’s financial position and its income statements of accounting for inventories on the LIFO rather than the FIFO basis during 2012 and 2013. The accounting department is to assume that the change to LIFO would have been effective on January 1, 2012, and that the initial LIFO base would have been the inventory value on December 31, 2011. Presented below are the company’s financial statements and other data for the years 2012 and 2013 when the FIFO method was employed.
|
|
Financial Position as of
|
|
|
12/31/11
|
12/31/12
|
12/31/13
|
|
Cash
|
$ 90,000
|
$130,000
|
$154,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
120,000
|
|
Inventory
|
120,000
|
140,000
|
176,000
|
|
Other assets
|
160,000
|
170,000
|
200,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$450,000
|
$540,000
|
$650,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 40,000
|
$ 60,000
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Other liabilities
|
70,000
|
80,000
|
110,000
|
|
Common stock
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
140,000
|
200,000
|
260,000
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$450,000
|
$540,000
|
$650,000
|
|
Income for Years Ended
|
|
|
12/31/12
|
12/31/13
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$900,000
|
$1,350,000
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
505,000
|
756,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
205,000
|
304,000
|
|
710,000
|
1,060,000
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
190,000
|
290,000
|
|
Income taxes (40%)
|
76,000
|
116,000
|
|
Net income
|
$114,000
|
$ 174,000
|
Other data:
1. Inventory on hand at December 31, 2011, consisted of 40,000 units valued at $3.00 each.
2. Sales (all units sold at the same price in a given year):
2012—150,000 units @ $6.00 each 2013—180,000 units @ $7.50 each
3. Purchases (all units purchased at the same price in given year):
2012—150,000 units @ $3.50 each 2013—180,000 units @ $4.40 each
4. Income taxes at the effective rate of 40% are paid on December 31 each year.
Instructions
Name the account(s) presented in the financial statements that would have different amounts for 2013 if LIFO rather than FIFO had been used, and state the new amount for each account that is named. Show computations.
P8 8 (Dollar Value LIFO) Norman’s Televisions produces television sets in three categories: portable, midsize, and flat screen. On January 1, 2012, Norman adopted dollar value LIFO and decided to use a single inventory pool. The company’s January 1 inventory consists of:
|
Category
|
Quantity
|
Cost per Unit
|
Total Cost
|
|
Portable
|
6,000
|
$100
|
$ 600,000
|
|
Midsize
|
8,000
|
250
|
2,000,000
|
|
Flat screen
|
3,000
|
400
|
1,200,000
|
|
17,000
|
|
$3,800,000
|
During 2012, the company had the following purchases and sales.
|
Category
|
Quantity Purchased
|
Cost per Unit
|
Quantity Sold
|
Selling Price per Unit
|
|
Portable
|
15,000
|
$110
|
14,000
|
$150
|
|
Midsize
|
20,000
|
300
|
24,000
|
405
|
|
Flat screen
|
10,000
|
500
|
6,000
|
600
|
|
45,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
Instructions
(a) Compute ending inventory, cost of goods sold, and gross profit.
(b) Assume the company uses three inventory pools instead of one. Repeat instruction (a).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Internal Indexes—Dollar Value LIFO) On January 1, 2012, Bonanza Wholesalers Inc. adopted the dollar value LIFO inventory method for income tax and external financial reporting purposes. However, Bonanza continued to use the FIFO inventory method for internal accounting and management purposes. In applying the LIFO method, Bonanza uses internal conversion price indexes and the multiple pools approach under which substantially identical inventory items are grouped into LIFO inventory pools. The following data were available for inventory pool no. 1, which comprises products A and B, for the 2 years following the adoption of LIFO.
|
|
FIFO Basis per Records
|
|
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
Inventory, 1/1/12
|
|
|
|
|
Product A
|
10,000
|
$30
|
$300,000
|
|
Product B
|
9,000
|
25
|
225,000
|
|
|
|
$525,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/12
|
|
|
|
|
Product A
|
17,000
|
36
|
$612,000
|
|
Product B
|
9,000
|
26
|
234,000
|
|
|
|
$846,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/13
|
|
|
|
|
Product A
|
13,000
|
40
|
$520,000
|
|
Product B
|
10,000
|
32
|
320,000
|
|
|
|
$840,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule to compute the internal conversion price indexes for 2012 and 2013. Round indexes to two decimal places.
(b) Prepare a schedule to compute the inventory amounts at December 31, 2012 and 2013, using the dollar value LIFO inventory method.
P8 11 (Dollar Value LIFO) Richardson Company cans a variety of vegetable type soups. Recently, the company decided to value its inventories using dollar value LIFO pools. The clerk who accounts for inventories does not understand how to value the inventory pools using this new method, so, as a private consultant, you have been asked to teach him how this new method works. He has provided you with the following information about purchases made over a 6 year period.
|
Date
|
Ending Inventory (End of Year Prices)
|
Price Index
|
|
Dec. 31, 2008
|
$ 80,000
|
100
|
|
Dec. 31, 2009
|
111,300
|
105
|
|
Dec. 31, 2010
|
108,000
|
120
|
|
Dec. 31, 2011
|
128,700
|
130
|
|
Dec. 31, 2012
|
147,000
|
140
|
|
Dec. 31, 2013
|
174,000
|
145
|
You have already explained to him how this inventory method is maintained, but he would feel better about it if you were to leave him detailed instructions explaining how these calculations are done and why he needs to put all inventories at a base year value.
Instructions
(a) Compute the ending inventory for Richardson Company for 2008 through 2013 using dollar value LIFO.
(b) Using your computation schedules as your illustration, write a step by step set of instructions explaining how the calculations are done. Begin your explanation by briefly explaining the theory behind this inventory method, including the purpose of putting all amounts into base year price levels.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs) You are asked to travel to Milwaukee to observe and verify the inventory of the Milwaukee branch of one of your clients. You arrive on Thursday, December 30, and find that the inventory procedures have just been started. You spot a railway car on the sidetrack at the unloading door and ask the warehouse superintendent, Buck Rogers, how he plans to inventory the contents of the car. He responds, “We are not going to include the contents in the inventory.” Later in the day, you ask the bookkeeper for the invoice on the carload and the related freight bill. The invoice lists the various items, prices, and extensions of the goods in the car. You note that the carload was shipped December 24 from Albuquerque, f.o.b. Albuquerque, and that the total invoice price of the goods in the car was $35,300. The freight bill called for a payment of $1,500. Terms were net 30 days. The bookkeeper affirms the fact that this invoice is to be held for recording in January.
Instructions
(a) Does your client have a liability that should be recorded at December 31? Discuss.
(b) Prepare a journal entry (ices), if required, to reflect any accounting adjustment required. Assume a perpetual inventory system is used by your client.
(c) For what possible reason(s) might your client wish to postpone recording the transaction?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs) George Solti, the controller for Garrison Lumber Company, has recently hired you as assistant controller. He wishes to determine your expertise in the area of inventory accounting and therefore asks you to answer the following unrelated questions.
(a) A company is involved in the wholesaling and retailing of automobile tires for foreign cars. Most of the inventory is imported, and it is valued on the company’s records at the actual inventory cost plus freight in. At year end, the warehousing costs are prorated over cost of goods sold and ending inventory. Are warehousing costs considered a product cost or a period cost?
(b) A certain portion of a company’s “inventory” is composed of obsolete items. Should obsolete items that are not currently consumed in the production of “goods or services to be available for sale” be classified as part of inventory?
(c) A company purchases airplanes for sale to others. However, until they are sold, the company charters and services the planes. What is the proper way to report these airplanes in the company’s financial statements?
(d) A company wants to buy coal deposits but does not want the financing for the purchase to be reported on its financial statements. The company therefore establishes a trust to acquire the coal deposits. The company agrees to buy the coal over a certain period of time at specified prices. The trust is able to finance the coal purchase and pay off the loan as it is paid by the company for the minerals. How should this transaction be reported?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(General Inventory Issues) In January 2012, Susquehanna Inc. requested and secured permission from the commissioner of the Internal Revenue Service to compute inventories under the last in, first out (LIFO) method and elected to determine inventory cost under the dollar value LIFO method. Susquehanna Inc. satisfied the commissioner that cost could be accurately determined by use of an index number computed from a representative sample selected from the company’s single inventory pool.
Instructions
(a) Why should inventories be included in (1) a balance sheet and (2) the computation of net income?
(b) The Internal Revenue Code allows some account able events to be considered differently for income tax reporting purposes and financial accounting purposes, while other account able events must be reported the same for both purposes. Discuss why it might be desirable to report some account able events differently for financial accounting purposes than for income tax reporting purposes.
(c) Discuss the ways and conditions under which the FIFO and LIFO inventory costing methods produce different inventory valuations. Do not discuss procedures for computing inventory cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(LIFO Inventory Advantages) Jane Yoakam, president of Estefan Co., recently read an article that claimed that at least 100 of the country’s largest 500 companies were either adopting or considering adopting the last in, first out (LIFO) method for valuing inventories. The article stated that the firms were switching to LIFO to (1) neutralize the effect of inflation in their financial statements, (2) eliminate inventory profits, and (3) reduce income taxes. Ms. Yoakam wonders if the switch would benefit her company. Estefan currently uses the first in, first out (FIFO) method of inventory valuation in its periodic inventory system. The company has a high inventory turnover rate, and inventories represent a significant proportion of the assets. Ms. Yoakam has been told that the LIFO system is more costly to operate and will provide little benefit to companies with high turnover. She intends to use the inventory method that is best for the company in the long run rather than selecting a method just because it is the current fad.
Instructions
(a) Explain to Ms. Yoakam what “inventory profits” are and how the LIFO method of inventory valuation could reduce them.
(b) Explain to Ms. Yoakam the conditions that must exist for Estefan Co. to receive tax benefits from a switch to the LIFO method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 4 (Basic Note and Accounts Receivable Transactions)
Part 1
On July 1, 2012, Wallace Company, a calendar year company, sold special order merchandise on credit and received in return an interest bearing note receivable from the customer. Wallace Company will receive interest at the prevailing rate for a note of this type. Both the principal and interest are due in one lump sum on June 30, 2013.
Instructions
When should Wallace Company report interest revenue from the note receivable? Discuss the rationale for your answer.
Part 2
On December 31, 2012, Wallace Company had significant amounts of accounts receivable as a result of credit sales to its customers. Wallace uses the allowance method based on credit sales to estimate bad debts. Past experience indicates that 2% of credit sales normally will not be collected. This pattern is expected to continue.
Instructions
(a) Discuss the rationale for using the allowance method based on credit sales to estimate bad debts. Contrast this method with the allowance method based on the balance in the trade receivables accounts.
(b) How should Wallace Company report the allowance for doubtful accounts on its balance sheet at December 31, 2012? Also, describe the alternatives, if any, for presentation of bad debt expense in Wallace Company’s 2012 income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 6 (Sale of Notes Receivable) Corrs Wholesalers Co. sells industrial equipment for a standard 3 year note receivable. Revenue is recognized at time of sale. Each note is secured by a lien on the equipment and has a face amount equal to the equipment’s list price. Each note’s stated interest rate is below the customer’s market rate at date of sale. All notes are to be collected in three equal annual installments beginning one year after sale. Some of the notes are subsequently sold to a bank with recourse, some are subsequently sold without recourse, and some are retained by Corrs. At year end, Corrs evaluates all outstanding notes receivable and provides for estimated losses arising from defaults.
Instructions
(a) What is the appropriate valuation basis for Corrs’s notes receivable at the date it sells equipment?
(b) How should Corrs account for the sale, without recourse, of a February 1, 2012, note receivable sold on May 1, 2012? Why is it appropriate to account for it in this way?
(c) At December 31, 2012, how should Corrs measure and account for the impact of estimated losses resulting from notes receivable that it
(1) Retained and did not sell?
(2) Sold to bank with recourse?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 7 (Zero Interest Bearing Note Receivable) On September 30, 2011, Rolen Machinery Co. sold a machine and accepted the customer’s zero interest bearing note. Rolen normally makes sales on a cash basis. Since the machine was unique, its sales price was not determinable using Rolen’s normal pricing practices. After receiving the first of two equal annual installments on September 30, 2012, Rolen immediately sold the note with recourse. On October 9, 2013, Rolen received notice that the note was dishonored, and it paid all amounts due. At all times prior to default, the note was reasonably expected to be paid in full.
Instructions
(a) (1) How should Rolen determine the sales price of the machine?
(2) How should Rolen report the effects of the zero interest bearing note on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011? Why is this accounting presentation appropriate?
(b) What are the effects of the sale of the note receivable with recourse on Rolen’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, and its balance sheet at December 31, 2012?
(c) How should Rolen account for the effects of the note being dishonored?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 8 (Reporting of Notes Receivable, Interest, and Sale of Receivables) On July 1, 2012, Moresan Company sold special order merchandise on credit and received in return an interest bearing note receivable from the customer. Moresan will receive interest at the prevailing rate for a note of this type. Both the principal and interest are due in one lump sum on June 30, 2013. On September 1, 2012, Moresan sold special order merchandise on credit and received in return a zero interest bearing note receivable from the customer. The prevailing rate of interest for a note of this type is determinable. The note receivable is due in one lump sum on August 31, 2014. Moresan also has significant amounts of trade accounts receivable as a result of credit sales to its customers. On October 1, 2012, some trade accounts receivable were assigned to Indigo Finance Company on a non notification (Moresan handles collections) basis for an advance of 75% of their amount at an interest charge of 8% on the balance outstanding. On November 1, 2012, other trade accounts receivable were sold on a without recourse basis. The
factor withheld 5% of the trade accounts receivable factored as protection against sales returns and allowances and charged a finance charge of 3%.
Instructions
(a) How should Moresan determine the interest revenue for 2012 on the:
(1) Interest bearing note receivable? Why?
(2) Zero interest bearing note receivable? Why?
(b) How should Moresan report the interest bearing note receivable and the zero interest bearing note receivable on its balance sheet at December 31, 2012?
(c) How should Moresan account for subsequent collections on the trade accounts receivable assigned on October 1, 2012, and the payments to Indigo Finance? Why?
(d) How should Moresan account for the trade accounts receivable factored on November 1, 2012? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 9 (Accounting for Zero Interest Bearing Note) soon after beginning the year end audit work on March 10 at Engines Company, the auditor has the following conversation with the controller. Controller: The year ended March 31st should be our most profitable in history and, as a consequence, the board of directors has just awarded the officers generous bonuses.
Auditor: I thought profits were down this year in the industry, according to your latest interim report.
Controller: Well, they were down, but 10 days ago we closed a deal that will give us a substantial increase for the year.
Auditor: Oh, what was it?
Controller: Well, you remember a few years ago our former president bought stock in Henderson Enterprises because he had those grandiose ideas about becoming a conglomerate. For 6 years we have not been able to sell this stock, which cost us $3,000,000 and has not paid a nickel in dividends. Thursday we sold this stock to Bimini Inc. for $4,000,000. So, we will have a gain of $700,000 ($1,000,000 pretax) which will increase our net income for the year to $4,000,000, compared with last year’s $3,800,000. As far as I know, we’ll be the only company in the industry to register an increase in net income this year. That should help the market value of the stock! Auditor: Do you expect to receive the $4,000,000 in cash by March 31st, your fiscal year end?
Controller: No. Although Bimini Inc. is an excellent company, they are a little tight for cash because of their rapid growth. Consequently, they are going to give us a $4,000,000 zero interest bearing note with payments of $400,000 per year for the next 10 years. The first payment is due on March 31 of next year.
Auditor: Why is the note zero interest bearing?
Controller: Because that’s what everybody agreed to. Since we don’t have any interest bearing debt, the funds invested in the note do not cost us anything and besides, we were not getting any dividends on the Henderson Enterprises stock.
Instructions
Do you agree with the way the controller has accounted for the transaction? If not, how should the transaction is accounted for?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 10 (Receivables Management) As the manager of the accounts receivable department for Beavis Leather Goods, Ltd., you recently noticed that Kelly Collins, your accounts receivable clerk who is paid $1,200 per month, has been wearing unusually tasteful and expensive clothing. (This is Beavis’s first year in business.) This morning, Collins drove up to work in a brand new Lexus. Naturally suspicious by nature, you decide to test the accuracy of the accounts receivable balance of $192,000 as shown in the ledger. The following information is available for your first year (precisely 9 months ended September 30, 2012) in business.
|
1) Collections from customers
|
$188,000
|
|
2) Merchandise purchased
|
360,000
|
|
3) Ending merchandise inventory
|
90,000
|
|
4) Goods are marked to sell at 40% above cost.
|
Instructions
Assuming all sales were made on account, compute the ending accounts receivable balance that should appear in the ledger, noting any apparent shortage. Then, draft a memo dated October 3, 2012, to Mark Price, the branch manager, explaining the facts in this situation. Remember that this problem is serious, and you do not want to make hasty accusations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 11 (Bad Debt Reporting) Marvin Company is a subsidiary of Hughes Corp. The controller believes that the yearly allowance for doubtful accounts for Marvin should be 2% of net credit sales. The president, nervous that the parent company might expect the subsidiary to sustain its 10% growth rate, suggests that the controller increase the allowance for doubtful accounts to 3% yearly. The president thinks that the lower net income, which reflects a 6% growth rate, will be a more sustainable rate for Marvin Company.
Instructions
(a) Should the controller be concerned with Marvin Company’s growth rate in estimating the allowance? Explain your answer.
(b) Does the president’s request pose an ethical dilemma for the controller? Give your reasons.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Included in the December 31 trial balance of Rivera Company are the following assets.
|
Cash
|
$ 190,000
|
|
Equipment (net)
|
1,100,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
41,000
|
|
Raw materials
|
335,000
|
|
Work in process
|
$200,000
|
|
Receivables (net)
|
400,000
|
|
Patents
|
110,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
170,000
|
Prepare the current assets section of the December 31 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Amsterdam Company uses a periodic inventory system. For April, when the company sold 600 units, the following information is available
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
April 1 inventory
|
250
|
$10
|
$ 2,500
|
|
April 15 purchase
|
400
|
12
|
4,800
|
|
April 23 purchase
|
350
|
13
|
4,550
|
|
1,000
|
|
$11,850
|
Compute the April 30 inventory and the April cost of goods sold using the average cost method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventorial Costs) In your audit of Garza Company, you find that a physical inventory on December 31, 2012, showed merchandise with a cost of $441,000 was on hand at that date. You also discover the following items were all excluded from the $441,000.
1. Merchandise of $61,000 which is held by Garza on consignment. The consignor is the Bontemps Company.
2. Merchandise costing $33,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. destination to a customer on December 31, 2012. The customer was expected to receive the merchandise on January 6, 2013.
3. Merchandise costing $46,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. shipping point to a customer on December 29, 2012. The customer was scheduled to receive the merchandise on January 2, 2013.
4. Merchandise costing $73,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. destination on December 30, 2012, and received by Garza on January 4, 2013.
5. Merchandise costing $51,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012, and received by Garza on January 5, 2013.
Instructions
Based on the above information, calculate the amount that should appear on Garza’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012, for inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that in an annual audit of Webber Inc. at December 31, 2012, you find the following transactions near the closing date.
1. A special machine, fabricated to order for a customer, was finished and specifically segregated in the back part of the shipping room on December 31, 2012. The customer was billed on that date and the machine excluded from inventory although it was shipped on January 4, 2013.
2. Merchandise costing $2,800 was received on January 3, 2013, and the related purchase invoice recorded January 5. The invoice showed the shipment was made on December 29, 2012, f.o.b. destination.
3. A packing case containing a product costing $3,400 was standing in the shipping room when the physical inventory was taken. It was not included in the inventory because it was marked “Hold for shipping instructions.” Your investigation revealed that the customer’s order was dated December 18, 2012, but that the case was shipped and the customer billed on January 10, 2013. The product was a stock item of your client.
4. Merchandise costing $720 was received on December 28, 2012, and the invoice was not recorded. You located it in the hands of the purchasing agent; it was marked “on consignment.”
5. Merchandise received on January 6, 2013, costing $680 was entered in the purchases journal on January 7, 2013. The invoice showed shipment was made f.o.b. supplier’s warehouse on December 31, 2012. Because it was not on hand at December 31, it was not included in inventory.
Instructions
Assuming that each of the amounts is material, state whether the merchandise should be included in the client’s inventory, and give your reason for your decision on each item.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs—Perpetual) Bradford Machine Company maintains a general ledger account for each class of inventory, debiting such accounts for increases during the period and crediting them for decreases. The transactions below relate to the Raw Materials inventory account, which is debited for materials purchased and credited for materials requisitioned for use.
1. An invoice for $8,100, terms f.o.b. destination, was received and entered January 2, 2013. The receiving report shows that the materials were received December 28, 2012.
2. Materials costing $7,300 were returned to the supplier on December 29, 2012, and were shipped f.o.b. shipping point. The return was entered on that date, even though the materials are not expected to reach the supplier’s place of business until January 6, 2013.
3. Materials costing $28,000, shipped f.o.b. destination, were not entered by December 31, 2012, “because they were in a railroad car on the company’s siding on that date and had not been unloaded.”
4. An invoice for $7,500, terms f.o.b. shipping point, was received and entered December 30, 2012. The receiving report shows that the materials were received January 4, 2013, and the bill of lading shows that they were shipped January 2, 2013.
5. Materials costing $19,800 were received December 30, 2012, but no entry was made for them because “they were ordered with a specified delivery of no earlier than January 10, 2013.”
Instructions
Prepare correcting general journal entries required at December 31, 2012, assuming that the books have not been closed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Determining Merchandise Amounts—Periodic) Two or more items are omitted in each of the following tabulations of income statement data. Fill in the amounts that are missing.
|
2011
|
2012
|
2013
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$290,000
|
$ ?
|
$410,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
6,000
|
13,000
|
?
|
|
Net sales
|
?
|
347,000
|
?
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
20,000
|
32,000
|
?
|
|
Ending inventory
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Purchases
|
?
|
260,000
|
298,000
|
|
Purchase returns and allowances
|
5,000
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
Freight in
|
8,000
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
238,000
|
?
|
303,000
|
|
Gross profi t on sales
|
46,000
|
91,000
|
97,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Purchases Recorded Net) Presented below are transactions related to Guillen, Inc.
|
May 10
|
Purchased goods billed at $20,000 subject to cash discount terms of 2/10, n/60.
|
|
11
|
Purchased goods billed at $15,000 subject to terms of 1/15, n/30.
|
|
19
|
Paid invoice of May 10.
|
|
24
|
Purchased goods billed at $11,500 subject to cash discount terms of 2/10, n/30.
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare general journal entries for the transactions above under the assumption that purchases are to be recorded at net amounts after cash discounts and that discounts lost are to be treated as financial expense.
(b) Assuming no purchase or payment transactions other than those given above, prepare the adjusting entry required on May 31 if financial statements are to be prepared as of that date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Periodic versus Perpetual Entries) Chippewas Company sells one product. Presented below is information for January for Chippewas Company.
|
Jan. 1 Inventory
|
100 units at $6 each
|
|
4 Sale
|
80 units at $8 each
|
|
11 Purchase
|
150 units at $6.50 each
|
|
13 Sale
|
120 units at $8.75 each
|
|
20 Purchase
|
160 units at $7 each
|
|
27 Sale
|
100 units at $9 each
|
Chippewas uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. All purchases and sales are on account.
Instructions
(a) Assume Chipper was uses a periodic system. Prepare all necessary journal entries, including the end of month closing entry to record cost of goods sold. A physical count indicates that the ending inventory for January is 110 units.
(b) Compute gross profit using the periodic system.
(c) Assume Chipper was uses a perpetual system. Prepare all necessary journal entries.
(d) Compute gross profit using the perpetual system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Errors—Periodic) Thomason Company makes the following errors during the current year. (In all cases, assume ending inventory in the following year is correctly stated.)
1. Both ending inventory and purchases and related accounts payable are understated. (Assume this purchase was recorded and paid for in the following year.)
2. Ending inventory is overstated, but purchases and related accounts payable are recorded correctly.
3. Ending inventory is correct, but a purchase on account was not recorded. (Assume this purchase was recorded and paid for in the following year.)
Instructions
Indicate the effect of each of these errors on working capital, current ratio (assume that the current ratio is greater than 1), retained earnings, and net income for the current year and the subsequent year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Errors) At December 31, 2012, Dwight Corporation reported current assets of $390,000 and current liabilities of $200,000. The following items may have been recorded incorrectly. Dwight uses the periodic method.
1. Goods purchased costing $22,000 were shipped f.o.b. shipping point by a supplier on December 28. Dwight received and recorded the invoice on December 29, 2012, but the goods were not included in Dwight’s physical count of inventory because they were not received until January 4, 2013.
2. Goods purchased costing $20,000 were shipped f.o.b. destination by a supplier on December 26. Dwight received and recorded the invoice on December 31, but the goods were not included in Dwight’s 2012 physical count of inventory because they were not received until January 2, 2013.
3. Goods held on consignment from Kishi Company were included in Dwight’s December 31, 2012, physical count of inventory at $13,000.
4. Freight in of $3,000 was debited to advertising expense on December 28, 2012.
Instructions
(a) Compute the current ratio based on Dwight’s balance sheet.
(b) Recompute the current ratio after corrections are made.
(c) By what amount will income (before taxes) be adjusted up or down as a result of the corrections?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Errors) The net income per books of Adamson Company was determined without knowledge of the errors indicated below.
|
Year
|
Net Income per Books
|
Error in Ending Inventory
|
|
2008
|
$50,000
|
Overstated
|
$ 5,000
|
|
2009
|
52,000
|
Overstated
|
9,000
|
|
2010
|
54,000
|
Understated
|
11,000
|
|
2011
|
56,000
|
No error
|
|
|
2012
|
58,000
|
Understated
|
2,000
|
|
2013
|
60,000
|
Overstated
|
10,000
|
Instructions
Prepare a worksheet to show the adjusted net income figure for each of the 6 years after taking into account the inventory errors.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO—Periodic and Perpetual) Inventory information for Part 311 of Seminole Corp. discloses the following information for the month of June.
|
June 1
|
Balance
|
300 units @ $10
|
June 10
|
Sold
|
200 units @ $24
|
|
11
|
Purchased
|
800 units @ $11
|
15
|
Sold
|
500 units @ $25
|
|
20
|
Purchased
|
500 units @ $13
|
27
|
Sold
|
250 units @ $27
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the periodic inventory method is used, compute the cost of goods sold and ending inventory under (1) LIFO and (2) FIFO.
(b) Assuming that the perpetual inventory method is used and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what is the value of the ending inventory at LIFO?
(c) Assuming that the perpetual inventory method is used and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what is the gross profit if the inventory is valued at FIFO?
(d) Why is it stated that LIFO usually produces a lower gross profit than FIFO?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost Determination) LoBianco Company’s record of transactions for the month of April was as follows.
|
Purchases
|
Sales
|
|
April 1 (balance on hand)
|
600 @
|
$ 6.00
|
April 3
|
500 @
|
$10.00
|
|
4
|
1,500 @
|
6.08
|
9
|
1,300 @
|
10.00
|
|
8
|
800 @
|
6.40
|
11
|
600 @
|
11.00
|
|
13
|
1,200 @
|
6.50
|
23
|
1,200 @
|
11.00
|
|
21
|
700 @
|
6.60
|
27
|
900 @
|
12.00
|
|
29
|
500 @
|
6.79
|
|
4,500
|
|
|
5,300
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that periodic inventory records are kept, compute the inventory at April 30 using
(1) LIFO and (2) average cost.
(b) Assuming that perpetual inventory records are kept in both units and dollars, determine the inventory at April 30 using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO.
(c) Compute cost of goods sold assuming periodic inventory procedures and inventory priced at FIFO.
(d) In an inflationary period, which inventory method—FIFO, LIFO, average cost—will show the highest net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The president, vice president, and sales manager of Moorer Corporation were discussing the company s present credit policy. The sales manager suggested that potential sales were being lost to competitors because of Moorer Corporation s tight restrictions on granting credit to consumers. He stated that if credit policies were loosened, the current year s estimated credit sales of $3,000,000 could be increased by at least 20% next year with an increase in uncollectible accounts= receivable of only $10,000 over this year s amount of $37,500. He argued that because the company s cost of sales is only 25% of revenues, the company would certainly come out ahead. The vice president, however, suggested that a better alternative to easier credit terms would be to accept consumer credit cards such as VISA or MASTERCARD. She argued that this alternative could increase sales by 40%. The credit card finance charges to Moorer Corporation would be 4% of the additional sales. At this point, the president interrupted by saying that he wasn t at all sure that increasing credit sales of any kind was a good thing. In fact, he suggested that the $37,500 of uncollectible accounts receivable was altogether too high. He wondered whether the company should discontinue offering sales on account. With the information given, determine whether Moorer Corporation would be better off under the sales manager s proposal or the vice president s proposal. Also, address the president s suggestion that credit sales of all types be abolished.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
James Dee Company cleans the outside walls of buildings. The average job generates revenue of $800,000 and takes about two weeks to complete. Customers are required to pay for a job within 30 days after its completion. James Dee Company guarantees its work for five years if the building walls get dirty within five years, James Dee will clean them again at no charge. James Dee is considering recognizing revenue using one of the following methods:
a. Recognize revenue when James Dee signs the contract to do the job.
b. Recognize revenue when James Dee begins the work.
c. Recognize revenue immediately after the completion of the job.
d. Recognize revenue 30 days after the completion of the job when the cash is collected.
e. Wait until the five year guarantee period is over before recognizing any revenue.
Which revenue recognition option would you recommend to James Dee? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of Stardust Company at the end of its 2003 fiscal year included the following account balances:
|
Account
|
|
|
Accounts receivable . . . .
|
$48,900
|
|
Allowance for bad debts
|
2,500 (debit balance)
|
The company has not yet recorded any bad debt expense for 2003. Determine the amount of bad debt expense to be recognized by Stardust Company for 2003, assuming the following independent situations:
1. An aging accounts receivable analysis indicates that probable uncollectible accounts receivable at year end amount to $4,500.
2. Company policy is to maintain a provision for uncollectible accounts receivable equal to 3% of outstanding accounts receivable.
3. Company policy is to estimate uncollectible accounts receivable as equal to 0.5% of the previous year s annual sales, which were $200,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were associated with the accounts receivable and uncollectible accounts of Hilton, Inc., during 2003:
a. The opening credit balance in Allowance for Bad Debts was $900,000 at January 1, 2003.
b. During 2003, the company realized that specific accounts receivable totaling $920,000 had gone bad and had been written off.
c. An account receivable of $50,000 was collected during 2003. This account had previously been written off as a bad debt in 2002.
d. The company decided that Allowance for Bad Debts would be $920,000 at the end of2003.
1. Prepare journal entries to show how these events would be recognized in the accounting system using:
a. The direct write off method.
b. The allowance method.
2. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each method with respect to the matching principle.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dodge Company had the following information relating to its accounts receivable at December 31, 2002, and for the year ended December 31, 2003:
|
Accounts receivable balance at 12/31/02
|
$900,000
|
|
Allowance for bad debts at 12/31/02 (credit balance)
|
50,000
|
|
Gross sales during 2003 (all credit).
|
5,000,000
|
|
Collections from customers during 2003
|
4,500,000
|
|
Accounts written off as uncollectible during 2003
|
60,000
|
|
Estimated uncollectible receivables at 12/31/03
|
110,000
|
Dodge Company uses the percentage of receivables method to estimate bad debt expense.
1. At December 31, 2003, what is the balance of Dodge Company s Allowance for Bad Debts? What is the bad debt expense for 2003?
2. At December 31, 2003, what is the balance of Dodge Company s gross accounts receivable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cicero Company s accounts receivable reveal the following balances:
|
Age of Accounts
|
Receivable Balance
|
|
Current
|
600,000
|
|
1 30 days past due
|
$320,000
|
|
31 60 days past due
|
$80,000
|
|
61 90 days past due
|
$50,000
|
|
91 120 days past due
|
9,000
|
The credit balance in Allowance for Bad Debts is now $26,000. After a thorough analysis of its collection history, the company estimates that the following percentages of receivables willeventually prove uncollectible:
|
Current.
|
0.40%
|
|
1 30 days past due .
|
3
|
|
31 60 days past due.
|
12
|
|
61 90 days past due.
|
60
|
|
91 120 days past due.
|
90
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following aging of accounts receivable is for Harry Company at the end of its first year of business:
|
Aging of Accounts Receivable
31 Dec 03
|
|
Overall
|
Less Than 30
Days
|
31 to 60
Days
|
61 to 90
Days
|
Over 90
Days
|
|
Ken Nelson
|
10,000
|
$8,000
|
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Elaine Anderson
|
40,000
|
31,000
|
$4,000
|
|
$5,000
|
|
Bryan Crist
|
12,000
|
3,000
|
4,000
|
$2,000
|
$3,000.00
|
|
Renee Warner
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
Nelson Hsia
|
16,000
|
10,000
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
Stella Valerio
|
25,000
|
20,000
|
|
$5,000.00
|
|
|
Totals
|
$163,000
|
$122,000
|
24,000
|
$8,000
|
$9,000
|
Harry Company has collected the following bad debt information from a consultant familiar with Harry s industry:
|
Age of Account
|
Percentage Ultimately Uncollectible
|
|
Less than 30 days
|
2%
|
|
31 60 days
|
10
|
|
61 90 days
|
30
|
|
Over 90 days
|
75
|
1. Compute the appropriate Allowance for Bad Debts as of December 31, 2003.
2. Make the journal entry required to record this allowance. Remember that, since this is Harry s first year of operations, the allowance account at the beginning of the year was $0.
3. What is Harry s net accounts receivable balance as of December 31, 2003?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The vice president for Tres Corporation provides you with the following list of accounts receivable written off in the current year. (These accounts were recognized as bad debt exf274pense at the time they were written off; i.e., the company was using the direct write off method.)
|
Date
|
Customer
|
Amount
|
|
30 Mar
|
Rasmussen Company
|
$12,000
|
|
31 Jul
|
Dodge Company
|
7,500
|
|
30 Sep
|
Larsen Company
|
10,000
|
|
42,004
|
Peterson Company
|
12,000
|
Tres Corporation s sales are all on an n/30 credit basis. Sales for the current year total $3,600,000, and analysis has indicated that uncollectible receivable losses historically approximate 1.5% of sales.
1. Do you agree or disagree with Tres Corporation s policy concerning recognition of bad debt expense? Why or why not?
2. If Tres were to use the percentage of sales method for recording bad debt expense, by how much would income before income taxes change for the current year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Keefer Company uses the percentage of sales method for computing bad debt expense. As of January 1, 2003, the balance of Allowance for Bad Debts was $200,000. Write offs of uncollectible accounts during 2003 totaled $240,000. Reported bad debt expense for 2003 was $320,000, computed using the percentage of sales method. Keith & Harding, the auditors of Keefer s financial statements, compiled an aging accounts receivable analysis of Keefer s accounts at the end of 2003. This analysis has led Keith & Harding to estimate that, of the accounts receivable Keefer has as of the end of 2003, $700,000 will ultimately prove to be uncollectible. Given their analysis, Keith & Harding, the auditors, think that Keefer should make anadjustment to its 2003 financial statements. What adjusting journal entry should Keith & Harding suggest?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are summary financial data for Parker Enterprises, Inc., and Boulder, Inc., for three recent years:
|
Year 3
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales (in millions):
|
|
|
|
Parker Enterprises, Inc
|
$3,700
|
$3,875
|
$3,882
|
|
Boulder, Inc
|
17,825
|
16,549
|
15,242
|
|
Net accounts receivable (in millions):
|
|
|
Parker Enterprises, Inc
|
1,400
|
1,800
|
1,725
|
|
Boulder, Inc.
|
5,525
|
5,800
|
6,205
|
1. Using the above data, compute the accounts receivable turnover and average collection period for each company for years 2 and 3.
2. Which company appears to have the better credit management policy?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Hickory Company has the following data related to its accounts receivable:
|
2,002
|
2003
|
|
Net sales.
|
1,425,000
|
$1,650,000
|
|
Net receivables:
|
|
Beginning
|
375,000
|
333,500
|
|
End of year
|
$420,000
|
375,000
|
Use these data to compute accounts receivable turnover ratios and average collection periods for 2002 and 2003. Based on your analysis, is Hickory Company managing its receivables better or worse in 2003 than it did in 2002?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rick Procter, president of Sharp Television Stores, has been concerned recently about decliningsales due to increased competition in the area. Rick has noticed that many of the national stores selling television sets and appliances have been placing heavy emphasis on warranties in their marketing programs. In an effort to revitalize sales, Rick has decided to offer free service and repairs for one year as a warranty on his television sets. Based on experience, Rick believes that first year service and repair costs on the television sets will be approximately 5% of sales. The first month of operations following the initiation of Rick s new marketing plan showed significant increases in sales of TV sets. Total sales of TV sets for the first three months under the warranty plan were $10,000, $8,000, and $12,000, respectively.
1. Assuming that Rick prepares adjusting entries and financial statements for his own use at the end of each month, prepare the appropriate entry to recognize customer service (warranty) expense for each of these first three months.
2. Prepare the appropriate entry to record services provided to repair sets under warranty in the second month, assuming that the following costs were incurred: labor (paid in cash), $550; supplies, $330.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a bank reconciliation for Oldroyd Company at January 31, 2003, using the information shown.
1. Cash per the accounting records at January 31 amounted to $72,802; the bank statement on this same date showed a balance of $64,502.
2. The canceled checks returned by the bank included a check written by the Oldham Company for $1,764 that had been deducted from Oldroyd s account in error.
3. Deposits in transit as of January 31, 2003, amounted to $10,928.
4. The following amounts were adjustments to Oldroyd Company s account on the bank statement:
a. Service charges of $26.
b. An NSF check of $1,400.
c. Interest earned on the account, $40.
5. Checks written by Oldroyd Company that have not yet cleared the bank include four checks totaling $5,778.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The records of Denna Corporation show the following bank statement information for December: a. Bank balance, December 31, 2003, $87,450
b. Service charges for December, $50
c. Rent collected by bank, $1,000
d. Note receivable collected by bank (including $300 interest), $2,300
e. December check returned marked NSF (check was a payment of an account receivable), $200
f. Bank erroneously reduced Denna s account for a check written by Dunna Company, $1,000
g. Cash account balance, December 31, 2003, $81,200
h. Outstanding checks, $9,200
i. Deposits in transit, $5,000
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for December.
2. Prepare the entry to correct the cash account as of December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jensen Company has just received the September 30, 2003, bank statement summarized in the following schedule:
|
Charges
|
Deposits
|
Balance
|
|
Balance, September 1
|
$5,100
|
|
Deposits recorded during September
|
$27,000
|
32,100
|
|
Checks cleared during September
|
$27,300
|
|
4,800
|
|
NSF check, J. J. Jones
|
50
|
|
4,750
|
|
Bank service charges
|
10
|
|
4,740
|
|
Balance, September 30
|
4,740
|
Cash on hand (recorded on Jensen s books but not deposited) on September 1 and September 30 amounted to $200. There were no deposits in transit or checks outstanding at September 1, 2003. The cash account for September reflected the following:
|
Cash
|
|
Sept. 1 Balance
|
5,300
|
Sept. Checks
|
28,000
|
|
Sept. Deposits
|
29,500
|
|
|
Answer the following questions. (Hint: It may be helpful to prepare a complete bank reconciliation.)
1. What is the ending balance per the cash account before adjustments?
2. What adjustments should be added to the depositor s books?
3. What is the total amount of the deductions from the depositor s books?
4. What is the total amount to be added to the bank s balance?
5. What is the total amount to be deducted from the bank s balance?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nixon Enterprises is experiencing a temporary shortage of cash. To cover the shortage, the financial vice president of the company proposed that some of the company s accounts receivable be sold (factored). A factoring company has offered to buy up to $2 million of the company s receivables on a without recourse basis at a fee of 16% of the amount factored. As an alternative, another vice president of the company has proposed borrowing an equivalent amount from South Willow Bank, pledging the outstanding receivables as collateral for the loan. Under the terms of the borrowing agreement, Nixon Enterprises would receive 80% of the value of all receivables assigned to the bank and would be charged a 1% loan origination (service) fee based on the actual dollar amount of cash received and 12% annual interest on the outstanding loan. The company estimates that the loan will be repaid in two months. Evaluate the two alternatives. Which one is better from the company s perspective?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rabona Slice, a U.S. company, sold 100,000 cases of tropical fruit to Ben Thanh Market, a Vietnamese firm, for 2.5 billion Vietnamese dong. The sale was made on November 17, 2003, when one U.S. dollar equaled 14,000 dong. Payment of 2.5 billion Vietnamese dong was due to Rabona Slice on January 16, 2004. At December 31, 2003, one U.S. dollar equaled 15,000 dong, and on January 16, 2004, one U.S. dollar equaled 15,600 dong.
1. What will be the value of the accounts receivable on December 31, 2003, in Vietnamese dong?
2. What will be the value of the accounts receivable on December 31, 2003, in U.S. dollars?
3. Will Rabona Slice recognize an exchange gain or loss at December 31, 2003? Explain.
4. Will Rabona Slice recognize an exchange gain or loss on January 16, 2004? Explain.
5. In connection with this sale, what amount will Rabona Slice report as Sales Revenue in its income statement for 2003?
6. In connection with this sale, what amount will Rabona Slice report as Cash Collected from Customers in its statement of cash flows for 2004?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
American, Inc., sells one widget to Japanese Company at an agreed upon price of 1,000,000 yen. On the day of the sale, one yen is equal to $0.01. American, Inc., maintains its accounting records in U.S. dollars. Therefore, the amount in yen must be converted to U.S. dollars.
1. Provide the journal entry that would be made by American, Inc., on the day of the sale, assuming Japanese Company pays for the widget on the day of the sale.
2. Most sales are on account, meaning that payment will not be received for 30 days or even longer. What issues will arise for American, Inc., if the sale is made with payment due in 30 days? (Hint: What might happen to the value of the yen in relation to the dollar during the 30 day period?)
3. Suppose that 30 days from the date of the sale the value of one yen is equal to $0.008. What journal entry would be made when the 1,000,000 yen are received by American, Inc.?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 2 (Various Receivable Accounting Issues) Kimmel Company uses the net method of accounting for sales discounts. Kimmel also offers trade discounts to various groups of buyers. On August 1, 2012, Kimmel sold some accounts receivable on a without recourse basis. Kimmel incurred a finance charge. Kimmel also has some notes receivable bearing an appropriate rate of interest. The principal and total interest is due at maturity. The notes were received on October 1, 2012, and mature on September 30, 2014. Kimmel’s operating cycle is less than one year.
Instructions
(a) (1) Using the net method, how should Kimmel account for the sales discounts at the date of sale? What is the rationale for the amount recorded as sales under the net method?
(2) Using the net method, what is the effect on Kimmel’s sales revenues and net income when customers do not take the sales discounts?
(b) What is the effect of trade discounts on sales revenues and accounts receivable? Why?
(c) How should Kimmel account for the accounts receivable factored on August 1, 2012? Why?
(d) How should Kimmel account for the note receivable and the related interest on December 31, 2012? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA7 3 (Bad Debt Reporting Issues) Clark Pierce conducts a wholesale merchandising business that sells approximately 5,000 items per month with a total monthly average sales value of $250,000. Its annual bad debt rate has been approximately 1½% of sales. In recent discussions with his bookkeeper, Mr. Pierce has become confused by all the alternatives apparently available in handling the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts balance. The following information has been presented to Pierce.
1. An allowance can be set up (a) on the basis of a percentage of sales or (b) on the basis of a valuation of all past due or otherwise questionable accounts receivable. Those considered uncollectible can be charged to such allowance at the close of the accounting period, or specific items can be charged off directly against (1) Gross Sales or to (2) Bad Debt Expense in the year in which they are determined to be uncollectible.
2. Collection agency and legal fees, and so on, incurred in connection with the attempted recovery of bad debts can be charged to (a) Bad Debt Expense, (b) Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, (c) Legal Expense, or (d) Administrative Expense.
3. Debts previously written off in whole or in part but currently recovered can be credited to (a) Other Revenue, (b) Bad Debt Expense, or (c) Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
Instructions
Which of the foregoing methods would you recommend to Mr. Pierce in regard to (1) allowances and charge offs, (2) collection expenses and, (3) recoveries? State briefly and clearly the reasons supporting your recommendations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information presented below is for Sun Marketing, Inc.
a. Salaries for the period December 26, 2003, through December 31, 2003, amounted to $14,240 and have not been recorded or paid. (Ignore payroll taxes.)
b. Interest of $6,000 is payable for three months on a 15%, $160,000 loan and has not been recorded.
c. Rent of $24,000 was paid for six months in advance on December 1 and debited to Prepaid Rent.
d. Rent of $82,000 was credited to an unearned revenue account when received. Of this amount, $33,400 is still unearned at year end.
e. The expired portion of an insurance policy is $1,000. Prepaid Insurance was originally debited.
f. Interest revenue of $300 from a $2,000 note has been earned but not collected or recorded.
Prepare the adjusting entries that should be made on December 31, 2003. (Omit explanations.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information presented below is for Averrett Marketing, Inc.
a. Rent of $56,500 was credited to an unearned revenue account when received. Of this amount, $24,750 is still unearned at year end.
b. Interest revenue of $4,500 from a $65,000 note has been earned but not collected or recorded.
c. Salaries for the period December 26, 2003, to December 31, 2003, amounted to $11,500 and have not been recorded or paid. (Ignore payroll taxes.)
d. Interest of $8,000 is payable for September 2003 through December 2003 on a 12%, $200,000 loan and has not been recorded.
e. The expired portion of an insurance policy is $2,150. Prepaid Insurance was originally debited.
f. Rent of $18,000 was paid for six months in advance on November 15, 2003, and debited to
Prepaid Rent. Prepare the adjusting entries that should be made on December 31, 2003. (Omit explanations.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of cash records and account balances of Wells, Inc., for 2003 is as follows:
|
Account
|
Account
|
Cash
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
Received or
|
|
Jan. 1, 2003
|
Dec. 31, 2003
|
Paid in 2003
|
|
Wages Payable
|
$2,600
|
$3,000
|
|
|
Unearned Rent .
|
4,500
|
5,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
100
|
120
|
|
|
Paid for wages .
|
$29,600
|
|
Received for rent
|
12,000
|
|
Paid for insurance
|
720
|
Determine the amounts that should be included on the 2003 income statement for (1) wages expense, (2) rent revenue, and (3) insurance expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of cash records and account balances of Computer Networking, Inc., for 2003 is as follows:
|
Account
|
Account
|
Cash
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
Received or
|
|
Jan. 1, 2003
|
Dec. 31, 2003
|
Paid in 2003
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
$10,750
|
$12,750
|
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
23,250
|
26,500
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance.
|
2,000
|
3,100
|
|
|
Paid for salaries
|
|
$125,000
|
|
Received for rent
|
|
64,250
|
|
Paid for insurance
|
|
12,600
|
Determine the amounts that should be included on the 2003 income statement for (1) salaries
expense, (2) rent revenue, and (3) insurance expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the format provided, for each account identify (1) whether the account is a balance sheet (B/S) or an income statement (I/S) account; (2) whether it is an asset (A), a liability (L), an owners equity (OE), a revenue (R), or an expense (E) account; (3) whether the account is a real or a nominal account; (4) whether the account will be closed or left open at year end; and (5) whether the account normally has a debit or a credit balance. The following example is provided:
|
Account
|
B/S or
|
A, L, OE,
|
Real or
|
Closed
|
Debit/
|
|
Title
|
I/S
|
R, E
|
Nominal
|
or Open
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
B/S
|
A
|
Real
|
Open
|
Debit
|
1. Accounts Receivable
2. Accounts Payable
3. Prepaid Insurance
4. Mortgage Payable
5. Rent Expense
6. Sales Revenue
7. Cost of Goods Sold
8. Dividends
9. Capital Stock
10. Inventory
11. Retained Earnings
12. Prepaid Rent
13. Supplies on Hand
14. Utilities Expense
15. Income Taxes Payable
16. Interest Revenue
17. Notes Payable
18. Income Tax Expense
19. Wages Payable
20. Unearned Rent Revenue
21. Land
22. Unearned Consulting Fees
23. Interest Receivable
24. Consulting Fees
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement and the balance sheet for the Hamblin Company for the year ended December 31, 2003, are provided below.
|
Sales revenue
|
$270,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$150,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense.
|
45,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
10,500
|
205,500
|
|
Net income .
|
$64,500
|
|
Hamblin Company Balance Sheet
|
|
31 Dec 03
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$49,500
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
22,500
|
|
|
Inventory
|
15,000
|
|
|
Land
|
225,000
|
|
|
Total assets. .
|
$312,000
|
|
Liabilities and Owners Equity
|
|
Liabilities:
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$15,000
|
|
Owners equity:
|
|
|
Capital stock .
|
$202,500
|
|
|
Retained earnings .
|
94,500
|
|
|
Total owners equity .
|
297,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owners equity
|
$312,000
|
Requied
1. Using the DuPont framework, compute Hamblin s return on equity (ROE).
2. Prepare a common size balance sheet, using total revenue as the basis for comparison.
3. Interpretive Question: Based on your analysis in (1) and (2), does Hamblin Company appear to be in good shape?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement for Home Light, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 200
|
Sales revenue .
|
$452,000
|
|
Less expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of goods
|
$363,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense.
|
72,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
5,250
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
3,820
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
4,930
|
|
|
Property tax expense
|
11,200
|
|
|
Total expenses.
|
460,200)
|
|
Net loss
|
$0(8,200)
|
Dividends of $20,000 were paid on December 30, 2003.
1. Give the entry required on December 31, 2003, to properly close the income statement accounts.
2. Give the entry required to close the dividends account at December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement for Quality Plumbing, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2003, is as follows:
|
Sales revenue
|
$623,400
|
|
Less expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$447,000
|
|
|
Wages expense. .
|
98,350
|
|
|
Utilities expense .
|
1,720
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
2,790
|
|
|
Property tax expense
|
2,110
|
|
|
Rent expense . . .
|
26,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
9,830
|
|
|
Interest expense .
|
4,300
|
|
|
Total expenses.
|
592,100
|
|
Net income
|
$31,300
|
Dividends of $23,200 were paid on December 30, 2003.
1. Give the entry required on December 31, 2003, to properly close the income statement accounts.
2. Give the entry required to close the dividends account at December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted and adjusted trial balances of White Company as of December 31, 2003, are presented below.
|
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$21,250
|
$9,350
|
$21,250
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
11,250
|
|
11,250
|
|
|
Supplies on Hand .
|
5,195
|
|
3,895
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
17,545
|
|
7,545
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,985
|
|
1,100
|
|
|
Buildings (net).
|
95,000
|
|
95,000
|
|
|
Land
|
45,720
|
|
45,720
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
$9,350
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
|
5,700
|
|
Income Taxes Payable.
|
|
|
580
|
|
Interest Payable
|
450
|
|
1,050
|
|
Notes Payable
|
65,000
|
|
65,000
|
|
Capital Stock .
|
84,320
|
|
84,320
|
|
Consulting Fees Earned.
|
142,380
|
|
142,380
|
|
Wages Expense.
|
92,335
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense .
|
3,500
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
585
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expenses
|
4,365
|
|
|
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,770
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
$301,500
|
|
|
|
1. Prepare the journal entries that are required to adjust the accounts at December 31, 2003.
2. Prepare the journal entry that is required to close the accounts at December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The bookkeeper for Careless Company accidentally pressed the wrong computer key and erased the amount of Retained Earnings. You have been asked to analyze the following data and provide some key numbers for the board of directors meeting, which is to take place in 30 minutes. With the exception of Retained Earnings, the following account balances are available at December 31, 2003.
|
Cash. .
|
$122,000
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$98,000
|
|
Furniture (net) . .
|
80,000
|
Inventory
|
320,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
240,000
|
Notes Payable
|
500,000
|
|
Land.
|
520,000
|
Supplies on Hand
|
20,000
|
|
Buildings (net) . .
|
480,000
|
Capital Stock .
|
600,000
|
|
Sales Revenue . .
|
830,000
|
Dividends . . .
|
40,000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
100,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
?
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
440,000
|
|
|
1. Compute the amount of total assets at December 31, 2003.
2. Compute the amount of net income for the year ended December 31, 2003.
3. After all closing entries are made, what is the amount of Retained Earnings at December 31, 2003?
4. What was the beginning Retained Earnings balance at January 1, 2003?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of November 2003, the general ledger of Porridge Milling Company showed the following amounts:
|
Assets.
|
$64,250
|
|
Liabilities .
|
28,800
|
|
Owners Equity
|
62,000
|
The company s bookkeeper is new on the job and does not have much accounting experience. Because the bookkeeper has made numerous errors, total assets do not equal liabilities plus owners equity. The following is a list of errors made.
a. Inventory that cost $42,000 was sold, but the entry to record cost of goods sold was not made.
b. Credit sales of $12,100 were posted to the general ledger as $21,100. The accounts receivable were posted correctly.
c. Inventory of $12,500 was purchased on account and received before the end of November, but no entry to record the purchase was made until December.
d. November salaries payable of $5,000 were not recorded until paid in December.
e. Common stock was issued for $18,500 and credited to Accounts Payable.
f. Inventory purchased for $31,050 was incorrectly posted to the asset account as $13,500. No error was made in the liability account. Determine the correct balances of assets, liabilities, and owners equity at the end of November.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The post closing trial balance of Anderson Company at December 31, 2002, is shown here.
|
Anderson Company Post Closing Trial Balance
|
|
31 Dec 02
|
|
|
Cash
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable.
|
$15,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
20,000
|
|
|
Land..
|
30,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
150,000
|
$25,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
35,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
125,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
30,000
|
|
Totals
|
$215,000
|
$215,000
|
During 2003, Anderson Company had the following transactions:
a. Inventory purchases were $80,000, all on credit (debit Inventory).
b. An additional $10,000 of capital stock was issued for cash.
c. Merchandise that cost $100,000 was sold for $180,000; $100,000 were credit sales and
the balance were cash sales. (Debit Cost of Goods Sold and credit Inventory for sale of merchandise.)
d. The notes were paid, including $7,000 interest.
e. $105,000 was collected from customers.
f. $95,000 was paid to reduce accounts payable.
g. Salaries expense was $30,000, all paid in cash.
h. A $10,000 cash dividend was declared and paid.
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record each of the 2003 transactions.
2. Set up T accounts with the proper balances at January 1, 2003, and post the journal entries to the T accounts.
3. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2003, and a balance sheet as of that date. Also prepare a statement of retained earnings.
4. Prepare the entries necessary to close the nominal accounts, including Dividends.
5. Post the closing entries to the ledger accounts [label (i) and (j)] and prepare a post closing trial balance at December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jerry Stillwell, the owner of a small company, asked Jones, a CPA, to conduct an audit of the company s financial statements. Stillwell told Jones that the audit needed to be completed in time to submit audited financial statements to a bank as part of a loan application. Jones immediately accepted the assignment and agreed to provide an auditor s report within two weeks. Because Jones was busy, he hired two accounting students to perform the audit. After two hours of instruction, he sent them off to conduct the audit. Jones told the students not to spend time reviewing the internal controls, but instead to concentrate on proving the mathematical accuracy of the ledgers and other financial records. The students followed Jones s instructions, and after 10 days, they provided the financial statements, which did not include notes. Jones reviewed the statements and prepared an auditor s report. The report did not refer to generally accepted accounting principles and contained no mention of any qualifications or disclosures. Briefly describe the problems with this audit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A few years ago, the owners of an electronics wholesale company committed massive fraud by overstating revenues on the financial statements. They recorded three large fictitious sales near the end of the year to the retailers SILO, CIRCUIT CITY, and WAL MART. The three transactions overstated revenues, receivables, and income by nearly $20 million. As part of the audit procedures, the external auditors sent requests for confirmation to the three stores to ensure that they did, in fact, owe the electronics company $20 million. In the meantime, the owners of the electronics company rented mailboxes in the cities where the three customers were headquartered, using names very similar to those of the three customers. The requests for confirmation were sent to the mailboxes. The owners completed the confirmations and sent them back to the auditors, confirming the $20 million in receivables. With respect to the fraud, answer the following two questions: 1. What journal entries would the fraud perpetrators have entered into the financial records to overstate revenues? 2. Should the external auditors be held liable for not catching the fraud?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial statements are available for SHERWOOD REAL ESTATE COMPANY:
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$00,001,300
|
Accounts payable
|
$0,100,000
|
|
|
Receivable from sale
|
Mortgage payable
|
6,000,000
|
|
|
of real estate
|
5,000,000
|
Total liabilities.
|
6,100,000
|
|
Interest receivable*
|
180,000
|
|
|
|
|
Real estate properties.
|
$6,000,000
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
|
Capital stock
|
$0,010,000
|
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
5,071,300
|
|
|
|
Total stockholders equity
|
5,081,300
|
|
|
Total liabilities and stock
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$11,181,300
|
holders equity
|
11,181,300
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
Gain on sale of real estate
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Interest income
|
$180,000
|
|
Total revenues
|
3,380,000
|
|
Expenses
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Net income
|
$2,180,000
|
Sherwood Company is using these financial statements to entice investors to buy stock in the company. However, a recent FBI investigation revealed that the sale of real estate was a fabricated transaction with a fictitious company that was recorded to make the financial statements look better. The sales price was $5,000,000 with a zero cash down payment and a $5,000,000 receivable. Prepare financial statements for Sherwood Company showing what its total assets, liabilities, stockholders equity, and income really are with the sale of real estate removed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the early 1990s, the top executive of a large oil refining company (based in New York) was convicted of financial statement fraud. One of the issues in the case involved the way the company accounted for its oil inventories. In particular, the company would purchase crude oil from exploration companies and then process the oil into finished oil products, such as jet fuel, diesel fuel, and so forth. Because there was a ready market for these finished products, as soon as the company purchased the crude oil, it would value its oil inventory at the selling prices of the finished products less the cost to refine the oil. Although the case involved fraud, the type of accounting used was also questioned because it allowed the company to recognize profit before the actual sale (and even refining) of the oil. Nevertheless, one of the large CPA firms attested to the use of this method. If you were the judge in this case, would you be critical of this accounting practice?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three college seniors with majors in accounting are discussing alternative career plans. All three want to enter careers that will help to ensure the integrity of financial reporting. The first wants to become an internal auditor. She believes that by ensuring appropriate internal controls within a company, the financial statements will be reliable. The second wants to go to work in public accounting and perform external audits of companies. He believes that external auditors are independent and can make sure that financial statements are correct. The third student believes that neither choice will be adding much value to the integrity of financial statements because, in both cases, the auditors will be receiving their pay (either directly or indirectly) from the companies they audit. He believes the only way to make a real difference is to work for the Securities and Exchange Commission, using the arm of government regulation to force companies to issue appropriate financial statements and then punishing them (through jail sentences and large fines) when their financial statements are misleading. In your opinion, which of these three students will make the largest contribution toward ensuring integrity in the financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a recently hired accountant for a small business, SMC, Inc., you are provided with last year s balance sheet, income statement, and post closing trial balance to familiarize yourself with the business.
|
SMC, Inc.
Balance Sheet
|
|
ASSET
|
31 Dec 02
|
|
|
Cash
|
$34,500
|
|
|
Accounts receivable.
|
25,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
10,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
200
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$69,700
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
Liabilities:
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$12,000
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
1,000
|
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
3,675
|
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$16,675
|
|
Stockholders equity:
|
|
|
Capital stock (10,000 shares outstanding)
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings.
|
28,025
|
|
|
Total stockholders equity
|
53,025
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders equity.
|
$69,700
|
|
SMC, Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Sales revenue
|
110,000
|
|
|
Rent revenue
|
1,000
|
|
|
Total revenues.
|
$111,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold
|
60,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
$51,000
|
|
Less operating expenses:
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
400
|
|
|
Salaries expense.
|
22,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
4,100
|
26,500
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$24,500
|
|
Less income taxes.
|
3,675
|
|
Net income
|
20,825
|
|
Earnings per share ($20,825 10,000 shares)
|
$2.08
|
|
SMC, Inc.
Post Closing Trial Balance
37,621
|
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
34,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
25,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
10,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
200
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$12,000
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
1,000
|
|
Income Taxes
|
3,675
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
25,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
28,025
|
|
Totals
|
$69,700
|
$69,700
|
You are also given the following information that summarizes the business activity for the current year, 2003.
a. Issued 5,000 additional shares of capital stock for $10,000 cash.
b. Borrowed $5,000 on January 2, 2003, from Downtown Bank as a long term loan. Interest for the year is $500, payable on January 2, 2004.
c. Paid $3,600 cash on November 1 to lease a truck for one year.
d. Received $1,200 on November 1 from a tenant for six months rent.
e. Paid $600 on October 1 for a one year insurance policy.
f. Purchased $500 of supplies for cash.
g. Purchased inventory for $100,000 on account.
h. Sold inventory for $150,000 on account; cost of the merchandise sold was $80,000.
i. Collected $120,000 cash from customers accounts receivable.
j. Paid $70,000 cash for inventories purchased during the year.
k. Paid $25,000 for sales reps salaries, including $1,000 owed at the beginning of 2003.
l. No dividends were paid during the year.
m. The income taxes payable for the year were paid. Income taxes are based on a 15% corporate tax rate.
n. For adjusting entries, all prepaid expenses are initially recorded as assets, and all unearned revenues are initially recorded as liabilities.
o. At year end, $150 worth of supplies are on hand.
p. At year end, an additional $5,000 of sales salaries are owed, but have not yet been paid.
You are asked to do the following:
1. Journalize the transactions for the current year, 2003, using the accounts listed on the financial statements and other appropriate accounts (you may omit explanations).
2. Set up T accounts and enter the beginning balances from the December 31, 2002, postclosing trial balance for SMC. Post all current year journal entries to the T accounts.
3. Journalize and post any necessary adjusting entries at the end of 2003. (Hint: Items b, c,
d, e, m, o, and p require adjustment.)
4. After the adjusting entries are posted, prepare a trial balance, a balance sheet, and an income statement for 2003. (Hint: Income before income taxes should equal $39,600.)
5. Journalize and post closing entries for 2003 and prepare a post closing trial balance.
6. Using the DuPont framework, compute the return on equity for SMC for 2002 and 2003.
7. Interpretive Question: What is your overall assessment of the financial health of SMC, Inc.?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZZZZ BEST was a Los Angeles based company specializing in carpet cleaning and insurance restoration. Prior to allegations of fraud and its declaration of bankruptcy in 1988, ZZZZ Bestwas touted as one of the hottest stocks on Wall Street. In 1987, after only six years in business, the company had a market valuation exceeding $211 million, giving its genius president a paper fortune of $109 million. Lawsuits, however, alleged that the company was nothing more than a massive fraud scheme that fooled major banks, two CPA firms, an investment banker, and a prestigious law firm. ZZZZ Best was started as a carpet cleaning business by Barry Minkow, a 15 year old high school student, in 1981. Although ZZZZ Best had impressive growth as a carpet cleaning business, the growth was not nearly fast enough for the impatient Minkow. In 1985, ZZZZ Best announced that it was expanding into the insurance restoration business, restoring buildings that had been damaged by fire, floods, and other disasters. During 1985 and 1986, ZZZZ Best reported undertaking several large insurance restoration projects. The company reported high profits from these restoration jobs. A public stock offering in 1986 stated that 86% of ZZZZ Best Corporation s business was in the insurance restoration area. Based on the company s high growth and reported income in 1987, a spokesperson for a large brokerage house was quoted in Business Week as saying that Barry Minkow is a great manager and ZZZZ Best is a great company. He recommended that his clients buy ZZZZ Bes tstock. That same year, the Association of Collegiate Entrepreneurs and the Young Entrepreneurs Organization placed Minkow on their list of the top 100 young entrepreneurs in America; and the mayor of Los Angeles honored Minkow with a commendation that said that he had set a fine entrepreneurial example of obtaining the status of a millionaire at the age of 18. Unfortunately, ZZZZ Best s insurance business, its impressive growth, and its high reported income were totally fictitious. In fact, the company never once made a legitimate profit. Barry Minkow himself later said that he was a fraudster who convincingly deceived almost everyone involved with the company. Through the use of widespread collusion among company officials, Minkow was even able to hide the fraud from ZZZZ Best s external auditor. For example, when ZZZZ Best reported an $8.2 million contract to restore a building in San Diego, the external auditor demanded to see the building; this was difficult since neither the building nor the job existed. However, officials of ZZZZ Best gained access to a construction site and led the auditor through a tour of an unfinished building in San Diego to show that the restoration work was ongoing. The situation became very complicated for ZZZZ Best when the auditor later asked to see the finished job. ZZZZ Best had to spend $1 million to lease the building and hire contractors to finish six of the eight floors in ten days. The auditor was led on another tour and wrote a memo saying, Job looks very good. The auditor was subsequently faulted for looking only at what ZZZZ Best officials chose to show, without making independent inquiries .Minkow s house of cards finally came crashing down as it became apparent to banks, suppliers, investors, and the auditors that the increasing difficulty ZZZZ Best was having with paying its bills was entirely inconsistent with a company reporting so much revenue and profit. In January 1988, a federal grand jury in Los Angeles returned a 57 count indictment, charging 11 individuals including ZZZZ Best founder and president, Barry Minkow with engaging in a massive fraud scheme. Minkow was later convicted and sentenced to 25 years in a federal penitentiary in Colorado. ZZZZ Best grossly inflated its operating results by reporting bogus revenue and receivables. What factors prevent a company from continuing to report fraudulent results indefinitely? What could the auditor have done to uncover the ZZZZ Best fraud?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HealthCare, Inc.,* operates a number of medical testing facilities around the United States. Drug manufacturers, such as MERCK and BRISTOL MYERS SQUIBB, contract with Health Care for testing of their newly developed drugs and other medical treatments. HealthCare advertises, gets patients, and then administers the drugs or other experimental treatments, under a doctor s care, to determine their effectiveness. The Food and Drug Administration requires such human testing before allowing drugs to be prescribed by doctors and sold by pharmacists. A typical contract might read as follows: HealthCare, Inc., will administer the new drug, Lexitol, to 50 patients, once a week for 10 weeks, to determine its effectiveness in treating male baldness. Merck will pay HealthCare, Inc., $100 per patient visit, to be billed at the conclusion of the test period. The total amount of the contract is $50,000 (50 patients _ 10 visits _ $100 per visit). Given these kinds of contracts, when should HealthCare recognize revenue when contracts are signed, when patient visits take place, when drug manufacturers are billed, or when cash is collected?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cannon Group provides computer network consulting services. The company initially debits assets in recording prepaid expenses and credits liabilities in recording unearned revenues. Give the appropriate entry that Cannon would use to record each of the following transactions on the date it occurred. Prepare the adjusting entries needed on December 31, 2003. (Round all numbers to the nearest dollar.)
1. On April 1, 2003, the company paid $250 for a two year subscription to a computer networking journal. The subscription starts April 1, 2003, and expires March 31, 2005.
2. On May 1, 2003, Cannon paid $2,300 in property taxes for the year May 1, 2003, to April 30, 2004.
3. On June 15, 2003, Cannon received $25,000 for a contract to provide consulting services for 18 months beginning immediately.
4. On July 1, 2003, the company paid a two year premium of $15,000 on an insurance policy that is effective July 1, 2003, and expires June 30, 2005.
5. Cannon rented part of its office building to Ross Graphics, LLC. Ross paid $1,500 on September 1, 2003, for the next six months rent.
6. Cannon loaned $150,000 to a client. On October 1, 2003, the client paid $18,000 for interest in advance (October 1, 2003, to September 30, 2004).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shop Rite Services is ready to prepare its financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2003. The following information can be determined by analyzing the accounts:
1. On August 1, 2003, Shop Rite received a $4,800 payment in advance for rental of office space. The rental period is for one year beginning on the date payment was received. Shop Rite recorded the receipt as unearned rent.
2. On March 1, 2003, Shop Rite paid its insurance agent $3,000 for the premium due on a 24 month corporate policy. Shop Rite recorded the payment as prepaid insurance. 3. Shop Rite pays its employee wages the middle of each month. The monthly payroll (ignoring payroll taxes) is $22,000.
4. Shop Rite received a note from a customer on June 1, 2003, as payment for services. The amount of the note is $1,000 with interest at 12%. The note and interest will be paid on June 1, 2005.
5. On December 20, 2003, Shop Rite received a $2,500 check for services. The transaction was recorded as unearned revenue. By year end, Shop Rite had completed three fourths of the contracted services. The rest of the services won t be completed until at least the middle of January 2004.
6. On September 1, Shop Rite purchased $500 worth of supplies. At December 31, 2003, one fourth of the supplies had been used. Shop Rite initially recorded the purchase of supplies as an asset. Where appropriate, prepare adjusting journal entries at December 31, 2003, for each of these items.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following two independent situations:
1. On June 1, Brown Company received $4,800 cash for a two year subscription to its monthly magazine. The term of the subscription begins on June 1. Make the entry to record the receipt of the subscription on June 1. Also make the necessary adjusting entry at December 31. The company uses an account called Unearned Subscription Revenue.
2. Clark Company pays its employees every Friday for a five day workweek. Salaries of $200,000 are earned equally throughout the week. December 31 of the current year is a Tuesday.
a. Make the adjusting entry at December 31.
b. Make the entry to pay the week s salaries on Friday, January 3, of the next year. Assume that all employees are paid for New Year s Day.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following items for Burton Company:
1. On November 1 of the current year, Burton Company borrowed $150,000 at 8% interest. As of December 31, no interest expense has been recognized.
2. On September 1 of the current year, Burton Company rented to another company some excess space in one of its buildings. Burton Company received $18,000 cash on September
1. The rental period extends for six months, starting on September 1. Burton Company credited the account Unearned Rent Revenue upon receipt of the rent paid in advance.
3. At the beginning of the year, Burton Company had $900 of supplies on hand. During the year, another $5,400 of supplies were purchased for cash and recorded in the asset account Office Supplies. At the end of the year, Burton Company determined that $1,400of supplies remained on hand.
4. On February 1 of the current year, Burton Company loaned Dridge Company $100,000 at 9% interest. The loan amount, plus accrued interest, will be repaid in one year. For each of the items, make the appropriate adjusting journal entry, if any, necessary in Burton Company s books as of December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Davis Company opened a Web page design business on January 1 of the current year. The following information relates to Davis Company s operations during the current year:
1. On February 1, Davis Company rented a new office. Before moving in, it prepaid a year s rent of $24,000 cash.
2. On March 31, Davis Company borrowed $50,000 from a local bank at 15%. The loan is to be repaid, with interest, after one year. As of December 31, no interest payments had yet been made.
3. Davis Company bills some of its customers in advance for its design services. During the year Davis received $60,000 cash in advance from its customers. As of December 31, Davis s accountant determined that 40% of that amount had not yet been earned.
4. On June 15, Davis Company purchased $1,400 of supplies for cash. On September 14, Davis made another cash purchase of $1,100. As of December 31, Davis s accountant determined that $1,700 of supplies had been used during the year.
5. Before closing its books, Davis Company found a bill for $800 from a free lance programmer who had done work for the company in November. Davis had not yet recorded anything in its books with respect to this bill. Davis plans to pay the bill in January of next year. For each of the items, make the initial entry, where appropriate, to record the transaction and, if necessary, the adjusting entry at December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer the following questions:
1. If office supplies on hand amounted to $4,000 at the beginning of the period and total purchases of office supplies during the period amounted to $22,000, determine the ending balance of office supplies on hand if office supplies expense for the period amounted to $20,000.
2. If beginning and ending accounts receivable were $10,000 and $12,000, respectively, and total sales made on account for the period amounted to $52,000, determine the amount of cash collections from customers on account for the period.
3. Assume all rent revenues are received in advance and accounted for as unearned rent, and beginning and ending balances of unearned rent are $3,000 and $2,500, respectively. If total rent revenue for the period amounts to $15,000, determine the amount of rent collections in advance for the period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is for Ina Company:
|
2003
|
2002
|
2,001
|
|
Total assets
|
$200,000
|
$160,000
|
180,000
|
|
Total liabilities .
|
90,000
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
|
Stockholders equity
|
110,000
|
80,000
|
80,000
|
|
Sales
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
600,000
|
|
Net income
|
40,000
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
For the years 2001, 2002, and 2003, compute:
1. Return on equity
2. Profit margin
3. Asset turnover
4. Assets to equity ratio
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The numbers below are for Iffy Company and Model Company for the year 2003:
|
Iffy
|
Model
|
|
Cash
|
$00,120
|
$00,900
|
|
Accounts receivable.
|
600
|
4,500
|
|
Inventory
|
480
|
6,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
3,440
|
15,000
|
|
Total liabilities .
|
3,190
|
18,150
|
|
Stockholders equity
|
1,450
|
8,250
|
|
Sales
|
10,000
|
75,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
9,200
|
66,750
|
|
Wages expense.
|
700
|
5,250
|
|
Net income.
|
100
|
3,000
|
1. Compute return on equity, profit margin, asset turnover, and the assets to equity ratio for both Iffy and Model.
2. Briefly explain why Iffy s return on equity is lower than Model s.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The numbers below are for Question Company and Standard Company for the year 2003:
|
Question
|
Standard
|
|
Cash .
|
$00,060
|
$00,300
|
|
Accounts receivable.
|
600
|
4,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,400
|
3,650
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
1,000
|
8,650
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$2,448
|
$13,280
|
|
Stockholders equity
|
612
|
3,320
|
|
Sales
|
10,000
|
50,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold.
|
7,350
|
36,750
|
|
Wages expense . .
|
700
|
3,500
|
|
Other expenses . .
|
1,900
|
8,500
|
|
Net income
|
50
|
$1,250
|
1. Compute return on equity, profit margin, asset turnover, and the assets to equity ratio for both Question and Standard.
2. Briefly explain why Question s return on equity is lower than Standard s.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement and balance sheet for the Rollins Company are provided below. Using the DuPont framework, compute the profit margin, asset turnover, assets to equity ratio, and resulting return on equity for the year 2003.
|
Revenue from services
|
151,920
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
Insurance expense
|
$5,480
|
|
|
Rent expense . .
|
500
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
2,960
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
55,000
|
63,940
|
|
Net income
|
87,980
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities and Owners Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$22,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$54,800
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
40,000
|
Capital stock.
|
50,000
|
|
Notes receivable.
|
12,800
|
Retained earnings
|
150,000
|
|
Machinery
|
180,000
|
Total liabilities
|
|
Total assets.
|
$254,800
|
and owners equity
|
$254,800
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the income statement and balance sheet for the Jacobson and Sons Company, compute the three components of return on equity profitability, efficiency, and leverage based on the DuPont framework, for the year 2003.
Jacobson and Sons Co.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2003
|
Revenues . .
|
$265,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
Supplies expense.
|
$138,600
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
$26,700
|
|
|
Utilities expense.
|
6,500
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
17,100
|
|
|
Other expenses
|
8,700
|
197,600
|
|
Net income .
|
$67,400
|
Jacobson and Sons Co.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2003
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities and Owners Equity
|
|
Cash.
|
$38,900
|
Accounts payable
|
$17,100
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
31,000
|
Notes payable
|
17,200
|
|
Supplies.
|
46,300
|
Capital stock.
|
30,000
|
|
Land.
|
25,000
|
Retained earnings .
|
173,600
|
|
Buildings
|
96,700
|
Total liabilities
|
|
|
Total assets.
|
$237,900
|
and owners equity
|
$237,900
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are taken from the comparative balance sheet prepared for Elison Company:
|
2003
|
2002
|
|
Cash .
|
$68,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Accounts receivable .
|
86,000
|
80,000
|
|
Inventory
|
136,000
|
60,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
182,000
|
110,000
|
|
Total assets .
|
$472,000
|
$300,000
|
Sales for 2003 were $2,000,000. Sales for 2002 were $1,600,000.
1. Prepare the asset section of a common size balance sheet for Elison Company for 2003 and 2002.
2. Overall, Elison is less efficient at using its assets to generate sales in 2003 than in 2002. What asset or assets are responsible for this decreased efficiency?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative income statements for Callister Company for 2003 and 2002 are given on the following page.
1. Prepare common size income statements for Callister Company for 2003 and 2002.
2. The profit margin for Callister is lower in 2003 than in 2002. What expense or expenses are causing this lower profitability?
|
2003
|
2002
|
|
Sales.
|
$1,600,000
|
$900,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,020,000
|
480,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$580,000
|
$420,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
200,000
|
160,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$380,000
|
$260,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
80,000
|
60,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$300,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
90,000
|
60,000
|
|
Net income
|
$210,000
|
$140,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classify each of the following accounts as either a real account (R) or a nominal account (N):
1. Cash
2. Sales Revenue
3. Accounts Receivable
4. Cost of Goods Sold
5. Prepaid Insurance
6. Capital Stock
7. Retained Earnings
8. Insurance Expense
9. Salaries Payable
10. Interest Expense
11. Insurance Premiums Payable
12. Salaries Expense
13. Accounts Payable
14. Prepaid Salaries
15. Utilities Expense
16. Notes Payable
17. Inventory
18. Property Tax Expense
19. Rent Expense
20. Interest Payable
21. Income Taxes Payable
22. Dividends
23. Buildings
24. Office Supplies
25. Income Tax Expense
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement for Eriksen Enterprises for the year ended June 30, 2003, is provided.
Eriksen Enterprises
Income Statement
For the Year Ended June 30, 2003
|
Sales revenue .
|
$187,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
122,000
|
|
Selling and general expenses
|
20,500
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
$44,500
|
|
Income tax expense
|
17,800
|
|
Net income .
|
$26,700
|
1. Prepare a journal entry to close the accounts to Retained Earnings.
2. What problem may arise in closing the accounts if the information from the income statement is used?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue and expense accounts of Rushford Publishing Company for November 30, 2003, are given as follows. Prepare a compound journal entry that will close the revenue and expense accounts to the retained earnings account.
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Sales Revenue . . .
|
$250,500
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
$124,500
|
|
|
Salaries Expense .
|
35,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense .
|
1,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense. . .
|
$9,300
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,700
|
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
800
|
|
|
Supplies Expense.
|
1,000
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
10,000
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A listing of account balances taken from the adjusted ledger account balances of Farmers Co Op shows the following:
|
Cash
|
$22,580
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
56,480
|
|
Inventory
|
78,360
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
6,520
|
|
Land
|
136,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
28,640
|
|
Notes Payable
|
40,000
|
|
Salaries Payable .
|
9,000
|
|
Taxes Payable
|
24,400
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
15,200
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
90,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
44,000
|
|
Dividends
|
20,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
68,700
|
All revenue and expense accounts have been closed to Retained Earnings. Dividends has not yet been closed.
Prepare (1) the closing entry for Dividends and (2) a post closing trial balance for December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below is a listing of account balances taken from the adjusted ledger account balances of Goldsmith Corporation.
|
Cash
|
$25,500
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
24,000
|
|
Inventory
|
60,000
|
|
Prepaid Advertising.
|
5,500
|
|
Building .
|
95,000
|
|
Land
|
35,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
20,000
|
|
Wages Payable
|
5,000
|
|
Income Taxes Payable.
|
4,000
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
55,000
|
|
Notes Payable.
|
27,500
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
2,500
|
|
Capital Stock. .
|
95,500
|
|
Dividends
|
15,500
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
51,000
|
All revenues and expense accounts have been closed to Retained Earnings. Dividends has not yet been closed. Prepare (1) the closing entry for Dividends and (2) a post closing trial balance for December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of Dallas Company shows the following balances, among others, on December
31, 2003, the end of its first fiscal year:
|
Rent Revenue
|
$36,800
|
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
2,700
|
|
Mortgage Payable .
|
130,000
|
Inspection of the company s records reveals that:
1. Rent revenue of $2,800 is unearned at December 31, 2003.
2. Interest of $7,800 on the mortgage is payable semiannually on March 1 and September 1.
3. Office supplies of $500 are on hand on December 31. When purchases of office supplies were made during the year, they were charged to the office supplies expense account. Given this information, prepare journal entries to adjust the books as of December 31, 2003. Completing the
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the course of your examination of the books and records of Hickory Company, you find the following data:
|
Salaries earned by employees in 2003
|
$53,000
|
|
Salaries paid in 2003
|
55,000
|
|
Total sales revenue in 2003
|
838,000
|
|
Cash collected from sales in 2003
|
900,000
|
|
Utilities expense incurred in 2003
|
5,000
|
|
Utility bills paid in 2003
|
4,800
|
|
Cost of goods sold in 2003
|
532,000
|
|
Cash paid on purchases in 2003 .
|
411,000
|
|
Inventory at December 31, 2003. .
|
320,000
|
|
Tax assessment for 2003
|
5,000
|
|
Taxes paid in 2003.
|
4,900
|
|
Rent expense for 2003
|
30,000
|
|
Rent paid in 2003.
|
25,000
|
Required
1. Compute Hickory s net income for 2003 using cash basis accounting.
2. Compute Hickory s net income for 2003 using accrual basis accounting.
3. Interpretive Question: Why is accrual basis accounting normally used? Can you see any opportunities for improperly reporting income under cash basis accounting? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following journal entries are from the books of Kara Rachel Company:
|
a. Cash
|
10,000
|
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
b. Cash
|
25,000
|
|
|
Loan Payable
|
|
25,000
|
|
c. Buildings
|
50,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
5,000
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
|
45,000
|
|
d. Inventory
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
25,000
|
|
e. Accounts Receivable
|
42,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
42,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
21,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
21,000
|
|
f. Salary Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
6,000
|
|
g. Cash
|
37,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
37,000
|
|
h. Accounts Payable
|
20,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
20,000
|
For each of the journal entries, prepare an explanation of the business event that is being represented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume you work in the accounting department at Marshall, Inc. Your boss has asked you to prepare a trial balance as of November 30, 2003, using the following account balances from the company s ledger. Prepare the trial balance and insert the missing amount for Cost of Goods Sold.
|
Accounts Payable
|
55,000
|
Notes Payable
|
250,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
25,000
|
Notes Receivable .
|
20,000
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
5,000
|
Other Expenses
|
1,000
|
|
Buildings
|
150,000
|
Property Tax Expense .
|
1,500
|
|
Capital Stock
|
173,000
|
Rent Expense .
|
$7,500
|
|
Cash
|
35,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
40,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold.
|
?0 0
|
Salaries Expense .
|
155,000
|
|
Equipment
|
55,000
|
Salaries Payable
|
2,000
|
|
Inventory
|
200,000
|
Sales Revenue
|
375,000
|
|
Land
|
125,000
|
Short Term Investments
|
15,000
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
95,000
|
Utilities Expense
|
7,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Domino, Inc., had the following information reported. From these data, determine the amount of:
1. Capital stock at December 31, 2002.
2. Retained earnings at December 31, 2003.
3. Revenues for the year 2003.
|
37,621
|
37,986
|
|
Total assets. .
|
$250,000
|
$300,000
|
|
Total liabilities .
|
$60,000
|
$70,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
?
|
$50,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
150,000
|
?
|
|
Revenues for 2003
|
?
|
|
Expenses for 2003
|
205,000
|
|
Dividends paid during 2003.
|
$5,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As of January 1, 2003, Kendrick Corporation had the following balances in its general ledger:
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$31,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
23,500
|
|
|
Inventory
|
92,000
|
|
|
Office Building . .
|
208,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable.
|
$16,500
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
180,000
|
|
Notes Payable . .
|
68,500
|
|
Capital Stock
|
57,500
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
32,500
|
|
Totals
|
$355,000
|
$355,000
|
Kendrick had the following transactions during 2003. All expenses were paid in cash, unless otherwise stated.
a. Accounts Payable as of January 1, 2003, were paid off.
b. Purchased inventory for $35,000 cash.
c. Collected $21,000 of receivables.
d. Sold $185,000 of merchandise, 85% for cash and 15% for credit. The Cost of Goods Sold was $98,500.
e. Paid $25,000 mortgage payment, of which $15,000 represents interest expense.
f. Paid salaries expense of $60,000.
g. Paid utilities of $6,300.
h. Paid installment of $5,000 on note.
1. Prepare journal entries to record each listed transaction. (Omit explanations.)
2. Set up T accounts with the proper account balances at January 1, 2003, post the journal entries to the T accounts, and prepare a trial balance for Kendrick Corporation at December 31, 2003.
3. Interpretive Question: If the debit and credit columns of the trial balance are in balance, does this mean that no errors have been made in journalizing the transactions? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume you are interviewing for a part time accounting job at Spilker & Associates, Inc., and the interviewer gives you the following list of company transactions in September 2003.
Sept. 1 Received $150,000 for capital stock issued.
Sept. 2 Paid $20,000 cash to employees for wages earned in September 2003.
Sept. 4 Purchased $75,000 of running shoes and clothing on account for resale.
Sept. 5 Paid utilities of $1,800 for September 2003.
Sept. 9 Paid $1,500 cash for September s insurance premium.
Sept. 11 Sold inventory of running shoes and clothing costing $35,000 for $70,000, with $20,000 received in cash and the remaining balance on credit.
Sept. 15 Purchased $2,500 of supplies on account.
Sept. 21 Received $25,000 from customers as payments on their accounts.
Sept. 25 Paid $75,000 of accounts payable. Using this list, you have been asked to do the following in the interview: Required
1. Journalize each of the transactions for September. (Omit explanations.)
2. Set up T accounts, and post each of the journal entries made in (1).
3. Interpretive Question: If the business owners wanted to know at any given time how much cash the company had, where would you tell the owners to look? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pat Bjornson, owner of Pat s Beauty Supply, completed the following business transactions during March 2003.
Mar. 1 Purchased $53,000 of inventory on credit.
Mar. 4 Collected $5,000 from customers as payments on their accounts.
Mar. 5 Purchased equipment for $3,000 cash.
Mar. 6 Sold inventory that cost $30,000 to customers on account for $40,000.
Mar. 10 Paid rent for March, $1,050.
Mar. 15 Paid utilities for March, $100.
Mar. 17 Paid a $300 monthly salary to the part time helper.
Mar. 20 Collected $33,000 from customers as payments on their accounts.
Mar. 22 Paid $53,000 cash on account payable. (See March 1 entry.)
Mar. 25 Paid property taxes for March of $1,200.
Mar. 28 Sold inventory that cost $20,000 to customers for $30,000 cash.
Required
1. For each transaction, give the entry to record it in the company s general journal. (Omit explanations.)
2. Set up T accounts, and post the journal entries to their appropriate accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
W Merchandise Company had the following transactions during 2003 a. Sam Jeakins began business by investing the following assets, receiving capital stock in exchange:
|
Cash
|
$020,000*
|
|
Inventory
|
37,000*
|
|
Land
|
25,500*
|
|
Building .
|
160,000*
|
|
Equipment
|
12,500*
|
|
Totals .
|
$255,000*
|
b. Sold merchandise that cost $30,000 for $45,000; $15,000 cash was received immediately, and the other $30,000 will be collected in 30 days.
c. Paid off the note of $5,000 plus $300 interest.
d. Purchased merchandise costing $12,000, paying $2,000 cash and issuing a note for $10,000.
e. Exchanged $2,000 cash and $8,000 in capital stock for office equipment costing $10,000.
f. Purchased a truck for $15,000 with $3,000 down and a one year note for the balance.
Requiared
1. Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)
2. Post the journal entries using T accounts for each account.
3. Prepare a trial balance at December 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following list is a selection of transactions from Trafalga, Inc. s business activities during 2003, the first year of operations.
a. Received $50,000 cash for capital stock.
b. Paid $5,000 cash for equipment.
c. Purchased inventory costing $18,000 on account.
d. Sold $25,000 of merchandise to customers on account. Cost of goods sold was $15,000.
e. Signed a note with a bank for a $10,000 loan.
f. Collected $9,500 cash from customers who had purchased merchandise on account.
g. Purchased land, $10,000, and a building, $60,000, for $15,000 cash and a 30 year mortgage of $55,000.
h. Made a first payment of $2,750 on the mortgage principal plus $2,750 in interest.
i. Paid $12,000 of accounts payable.
j. Purchased $1,500 of supplies on account.
k. Paid $2,500 of accounts payable.
l. Paid $7,500 in wages earned during the year.
m. Received $10,000 cash and $3,000 of notes in settlement of customers accounts.
n. Received $3,250 in payment of a note receivable of $3,000 plus interest of $250.
o. Paid $600 cash for a utility bill.
p. Sold excess land for its cost of $3,000.
q. Received $1,500 in rent for an unused part of a building.
r. Paid off $10,000 note, plus interest of $1,200.
Required
1. Set up T accounts, and appropriately record the debits and credits for each transaction directly in the T accounts. Leave room for a number of entries in the cash account.
2. Prepare a trial balance.
3. Prepare an income statement for the period. (Ignore income taxes and the EPS computation.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pacific Motors, Inc., entered into the following transactions during the month of August:
a. Purchased $1,500 of supplies on account from Major Supply Company. The cost of the supplies to Major Supply Company was $1,200.
b. Paid $600 to Valley Electric for the monthly utility bill.
c. Sold a truck to Fast Delivery, Inc. A $5,000 down payment was received with the balance of $12,000 due within 30 days. The cost of the delivery truck to Pacific Motors was $11,000.
d. Purchased a total of eight new cars and trucks from Japanese Motors, Inc., for a total of $96,000, one half of which was paid in cash. The balance is due within 45 days. The total cost of the vehicles to Japanese Motors was $80,000.
e. Paid $1,875 to Silva s Automotive for repair work on cars for the current month.
f. Sold one of the new cars purchased from Japanese Motors to the town mayor, Ana Mecham. The sales price was $17,500, and was paid by Mecham upon delivery of the car. The cost of the particular car sold to Mecham was $12,100.
g. Borrowed $10,000 from a local bank to be repaid in one year with 12% interest.
Required
1. For each of the transactions, make the proper journal entry on the books of Pacific Motors. (Omit explanations.)
2. For each of the transactions, make the proper journal entry on the books of the other party to the transaction, for example, (a) Major Supply Company, (b) Valley Electric. (Omit explanations.)
3. Interpretive Question: Why do some of the journal entries for Pacific Motors and other companies involved appear to be mirror images of each other?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance was prepared by a new employee.
|
Trial Balance Alden Company, Inc. For Year Ended November 30, 2003
|
|
Cash
|
$18,250
|
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
$78,900
|
|
Advertising Expense .
|
9,600
|
|
|
Capital Stock .
|
102,000
|
|
Equipment.
|
36,900
|
|
|
Notes Payable .
|
187,350
|
|
Inventory.
|
148,000
|
|
|
Wages Expense.
|
87,150
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
5,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
19,750
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
5,300
|
|
Rent Expense
|
8,750
|
|
Wages Payable .
|
9,000
|
|
|
Furniture
|
15,000
|
|
Other Expenses
|
2,950
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
235,600
|
|
Buildings
|
104,700
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
113,050
|
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
1,300
|
|
Land .
|
87,850
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
14,400
|
|
Utilties Expense.
|
3,200
|
|
|
Totals.
|
$537,800
|
$756,200
|
Prepare the corrected company trial balance. (Assume all accounts have normal balances and the recorded amounts are correct.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Downtown Company, a retailer, had the following account balances as of April 30, 2003:
|
Cash
|
10,100
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
4,900
|
|
|
Inventory
|
16,000
|
|
|
Land
|
26,000
|
|
|
Building
|
24,000
|
|
|
Furniture
|
4,000
|
|
|
Notes Payable.
|
$25,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
12,000
|
|
Capital Stock.
|
30,000
|
|
Retained Earnings.
|
18,000
|
|
Totals
|
$85,000
|
$85,000
|
During May, the company completed the following transactions.
May 3 Paid one half of 4/30/03 accounts payable.
May 6 Collected all of 4/30/03 accounts receivable.
May 7 Sold inventory costing $7,700 for $6,000 cash and $4,000 on account.
May 8 Sold one half of the land for $13,000, receiving $8,000 cash plus a note for $5,000.
May 10 Purchased inventory on account, $10,000.
May 15 Paid installment of $5,000 on notes payable (entire amount reduces the liability account).
May 21 Issued additional capital stock for $2,000 cash.
May 23 Sold inventory costing $4,000 for $7,500 cash.
May 25 Paid salaries of $2,000.
May 26 Paid rent of $500.
May 29 Purchased desk for $500 cash.
Required
1. Prepare the journal entry for each transaction.
2. Set up T accounts with the proper account balances at April 30, 2003, and post the entries to the T accounts.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of May 31, 2003.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Several doctors are considering the purchase of a small real estate business as an investment. Because you have some training in the mechanics of the accounting cycle, they have hired you to review the real estate company s accounting records and to prepare a balance sheet and an income statement for their use. In analyzing various business documents, you verify the following data.
The account balances at the beginning of the current year were as follows
|
Cash in Bank
|
7,800
|
|
Notes Receivable (from Current Owner)
|
10,000
|
|
Supplies on Hand.
|
750
|
|
Prepaid Office Rent
|
4,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$450
|
|
Owners Equity
|
22,600
|
During the current year, the following summarized transactions took place:
a. The owner paid $1,200 to the business to cover the interest on the note receivable ($10,000 _ 0.12 _ 1 year). Nothing was paid on the principal.
b. Real estate commissions earned during the year totaled $45,500. Of this amount, $1,000 has not been received by year end.
c. The company purchased $500 of supplies during the year. A count at year end shows $300 worth still on hand.
d. The $4,500 paid for office rental was for 18 months, beginning in January of this year.
e. Utilities paid during the year amounted to $1,500.
f. During the year, $400 of accounts payable were paid; the balance in Accounts Payable at year end is $300, with the adjustment being debited to Miscellaneous Office Expense.
g. The owner paid himself $1,500 a month as a salary and paid a part time secretary $2,400 for the year. (Ignore payroll taxes.) On the basis of the above data, prepare a balance sheet and an income statement for the real estate business. Does the business appear profitable? Does the balance sheet raise any questions or concerns? What other information might the doctors want to consider in making this investment decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Silva and Wanita Rodriques are the owners of Year Round Landscape, Inc., a small landscape and yard service business in southern California. The business is three years old and has grown significantly, especially during the past year. To sustain this growth, Year Round Landscape must expand operations. In the past, the Rodriques have been able to secure funds for the business from personal resources. Now those resources are exhausted, and the Rodriques are seeking a loan from a local bank. To satisfy bank requirements, Year Round Landscape, Inc., must provide a set of financial statements, including comparative income statements showing the growth in earnings over the past three years. In analyzing the records, Silva notices that the nominal accounts have not yet been closed for this year. Furthermore, Silva is aware of a major contract that is to be signed on January 3, only three days after the December 31 year end for the business. Silva suggests that the closing process be delayed one week so that this major contract can be included in this year s operating results. Silva estimates that this contract will increase current year earnings by 20%. What accounting issues are involved in this case? What are the ethical issues?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the controller for South Valley Industries. Your assistant has just completed the financial statements for the current year and has given them to you for review. A copy of the statements also has been given to the president of the company. The income statement reports a net income for the year of $50,000 and earnings per share of $2.50. In reviewing the statements, you realize the assistant neglected to record adjusting entries. After making the necessary adjustments, the company shows a net loss of $10,000. The difference is due to an unusually large amount of unrecorded expenses at year end. You realize that these expenses are not likely to be found by the independent auditors. You wonder if it would be better to delay the recording of the expenses until the first part of the subsequent year in order to avoid reporting a net loss on the income statement for the current year. A significant increase in revenues is expected in the coming year, and the expenses in question could be absorbed by the higher revenues. What issues are involved in this case? What course of action would you take?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dian Karen and Kathy Gillen are considering forming a company to purchase a small business that specializes in interior decoration services. The business records show a modest profit over each of the past five years (approximately $5,000 net income per year). However, the past year s operating results appear to be much better, as shown by the unaudited income statement.
Fashion Design, Inc. Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2003
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Consulting revenues.
|
51,000
|
|
|
Commissions on furnishings sold.
|
18,000
|
|
|
Total revenues .
|
$69,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Advertising expense.
|
1,200
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
4,800
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
36,000
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
500
|
|
|
Utilities expense.
|
1,800
|
|
|
Other expenses
|
1,500
|
45,800
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$23,200
|
|
Income taxes (estimated at 25%)
|
5,800
|
|
Net income
|
$17,400
|
|
EPS: $17,400 1,000 shares $17.40 per share
|
In an attempt to verify what appears to be unusually high net income for 2003, Karen and Gillen hire a CPA to audit the records. The CPA discovers the following:
a. The company pays salaries on the 1st and 15th of each month. Salaries amounting to $2,500 have been earned by employees by December 31 but will not be paid until January 1. No adjusting entry has been made.
b. Of the $18,000 in commissions received by December 31, 30% will not be earned until completion of a job in mid February of 2004. All commissions received have been recorded as revenues.
c. A $10,000 payment was received on November 1 for a consulting assignment that is only one half earned at December 31. The total amount was credited to Consulting Revenues when received.
d. The rent is $400 per month and must be paid in advance on a one year lease. A check for $4,800 was given to the landlord on March 1, 2003, and recorded as rent expense on that date.
According to the CPA, except for these data, the income statement appears to accurately reflect the operating results of Fashion Design, Inc.
Answer the following questions:
1. Do the 2003 operating results offer encouragement to Karen and Gillen as potential investors? Explain.
2. What adjustments (if any) are required to make the income statement more accurately reflect the results of operations for the year?
3. What is the impact on the balance sheet (if any) of the data discovered by the CPA?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 31, 2003, Matt Morgan completed the first year of operations for his new computer retail store. The following data were obtained from the company s accounting records:
|
Sales to customers
|
197,000
|
|
Collections from customers .
|
145,000
|
|
Interest earned and received on savings accounts
|
2,500
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
98,500
|
|
Amounts paid to suppliers for inventory
|
103,000
|
|
Wages owed to employees at year end
|
3,500
|
|
Wages paid to employees ..
|
40,000
|
|
Utility bill owed: to be paid next month.
|
1,100
|
|
Interest due at 12/31 on loan to be paid in March of next year..
|
1,200
|
|
Amount paid for one and one half years rent, beginning Jan. 1, 2003.
|
17,500
|
|
Income taxes owed at year end
|
4,000
|
1. How much net income (loss) should Matt report for the year ended December 31, 2003, according to (a) cash basis accounting and (b) accrual basis accounting?
2. Which basis of accounting provides the better measure of operating results for Matt?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 31, Brian Silvaggi completed the first year of operations for his new business. The following data are available from the company s accounting records:
|
Sales to customers
|
145,000
|
|
Collections from customers
|
125,000
|
|
Interest earned and received on savings accounts
|
1,500
|
|
Amount paid for one and one half years rent
|
3,600
|
|
Utility bill owed: to be paid next month..
|
960
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
80,000
|
|
Amount paid to suppliers for materials ..
|
83,000
|
|
Wages paid to employees
|
47,500
|
|
Wages owed to employees at year end
|
1,200
|
|
Interest due at 12/31 on a loan to be paid the middle of next year.
|
800
|
1. How much net income (loss) should Brian report for the year ended December 31 according to (a) cash basis accounting and (b) accrual basis accounting?
2. Which basis of accounting provides the better measure of operating results for Brian?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following accounts, indicate whether it would be found in the income statement or in the balance sheet.
1. Cash
2. Inventory
3. Salaries Expense
4. Prepaid Salaries
5. Retained Earnings
6. Office Supplies Expense
7. Accounts Receivable
8. Cost of Goods Sold
9. Maintenance Expense
10. Interest Receivable
11. Capital Stock
12. Accounts Payable
13. Buildings
14. Mortgage Payable
15. Interest Expense
16. Accounts Payable
17. Notes Receivable
18. Office Supplies
19. Sales Revenue
20. Insurance Expense
21. Machinery
22. Land
23. Salaries Payable
24. Prepaid Insurance
25. Notes Payable
26. Dividends
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each type of adjustment listed, indicate whether it is an unrecorded receivable, an unrecorded liability, an unearned revenue, or a prepaid expense at December 31, 2003.
1. Property taxes that are for the year 2003, but are not to be paid until 2004.
2. Rent revenue earned during 2003, but not collected until 2004.
3. Salaries earned by employees in December 2003, but not to be paid until January 5, 2004.
4. A payment received from a customer in December 2003 for services that will not be performed until February 2004.
5. An insurance premium paid on December 29, 2003, for the period January 1, 2004, to December 31, 2004.
6. Gasoline charged on a credit card during December 2003. The bill will not be received until January 15, 2004.
7. Interest on a certificate of deposit held during 2003. The interest will not be received until January 7, 2004.
8. A deposit received on December 15, 2003, for rental of storage space. The rental period is from January 1, 2004, to December 31, 2004.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Boswell Group is a professional corporation providing management consulting services. The company initially debits assets in recording prepaid expenses and credits liabilities in recording unearned revenues. Give the entry that Boswell would use to record each of the following transactions on the date it occurred. Prepare the adjusting entries needed on December 31, 2003.
1. On July 1, 2003, the company paid a three year premium of $7,200 on an insurance policy that is effective July 1, 2003, and expires June 30, 2006.
2. On February 1, 2003, Boswell paid its property taxes for the year February 1, 2003, to January 31, 2004. The tax bill was $1,800.
3. On May 1, 2003, the company paid $180 for a three year subscription to an advertising journal. The subscription starts May 1, 2003, and expires April 30, 2006.
4. Boswell received $1,800 on September 15, 2003, in return for which the company agreed to provide consulting services for 18 months beginning immediately.
5. Boswell rented part of its office space to Bristle Brush Company. Bristle paid $1,200 on November 1, 2003, for the next six months rent.
6. Boswell loaned $100,000 to a client. On November 1 the client paid $24,000, which represents two years interest in advance (November 1, 2003, through October 31, 2005).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The September 9, 2007, issue of the New York Timesincludes an article by Denise Caruso titled When Balance Sheets Collide with the New Economy.
Instructions
Read the article and answer the following questions.
(a) What are some examples of valuable assets that the article says currently do not have a home on the balance sheet?
(b) What examples does the company give of the value of reputation and how it can affect a stock price?
(c) What justification does the article give for having companies report on their environmental and social responsibility, and their strategy for dealing with disasters?
(d) Are any initiatives currently being used that try to account for intangible assets that do not currently show up on the balance sheet?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bob Evans Farms, Inc. operates 579 restaurants in 18 states and produces fresh and fully cooked sausage products, fresh salads, and related products distributed to grocery stores in the Midwest, Southwest, and Southeast. For a recent 3 year period Bob Evans Farms reported the following selected income statement data (in millions of dollars).
|
2007
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Sales
|
$1,654.5
|
$1,584.8
|
$1,460.2
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
482.1
|
469.7
|
443.2
|
|
Net income
|
60.5
|
54.8
|
37.0
|
|
Total assets
|
1,197.0
|
1,185.1
|
1,150.9
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the percentage change in sales and in net income from 2005 to 2007.
(b) What contribution, if any, did the company’s gross profit rate make to the decline in earnings?
(c) What was Bob Evans’s profit margin ratio in each of the 3 years? Comment on any trend in this percentage.
(d) The chief executive officer’s letter stated that the company continued to invest prudently in restaurants, opening 10 new restaurants in 2007, compared to 20 openings in 2006. What effect would you expect this change to have on return on assets? Calculate the company’s return on assets for 2006 and 2007 to see if it reflects the increase in number of stores.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting for goodwill differs in countries around the world. The discussion of a change in goodwill accounting practices shown below was taken from the notes to the financial statements of J Sainsbury Plc, one of the worlds leading retailers. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, it serves 11 million customers a week.
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) How does the initial determination and recording of goodwill compare with that in the United States? That is, is goodwill initially recorded in the same circumstances, and is the calculation of the amount the same in both the United Kingdom and the
United States?
(b) Prior to adoption of the new accounting standard (FRS 10), how did the company account for goodwill? What were the implications for the income statement?
(c) Under the new accounting standard, how does the company account for its goodwill? Is it possible, under the new standard, for a company to avoid charging goodwill amortization to net income?
(d) In what ways is the new standard similar to U.S. standards, and in what ways is it different?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Percival Furniture Corp. is nationally recognized for making high quality products. Management is concerned that it is not fully exploiting its brand power. Percivals production managers are also concerned because their plants are not operating at anywhere near full capacity. Management is currently considering a proposal to offer a new line of affordable furniture. Those in favor of the proposal (including the vice president of production) believe that, by offering these new products, the company could attract a clientele that it is not currently servicing. Also, it could operate its plants at full capacity, thus taking better advantage of its assets. The vice president of marketing, however, believes that the lower priced (and lower margin) product would have a negative impact on the sales of existing products. The vice president believes that $10,000,000 of the sales of the new product will be from customers that would have purchased the more expensive product, but switched to the lower margin product because it was available. (This is often referred to as cannibalization of existing sales). Top management feels, however, that even with cannibalization, the companys sales will increase and the company will be better off. The following data are available.
|
(in thousands)
|
Current results
|
Proposed results without cannibalization
|
Proposed results with cannibalization
|
|
Sales
|
$45,000
|
$60,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Net income
|
$12,000
|
$13,500
|
$12,000
|
|
Average total assets
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute Percival’s return on assets ratio, profit margin ratio, and asset turnover ratio, both with and without the new product line.
(b) Discuss the implications that your findings in part (a) have for Percival’s decision.
(c) Are there any other options that Percival should consider? What impact would each of these have on the above ratios?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The chapter presented some concerns regarding the current accounting standards for research and development expenditures.
Instructions
Assume that you are either (a) the president of a company that is very dependent on ongoing research and development, writing a memo to the FASB complaining about the current accounting standards regarding research and development, or (b) the FASB member defending the current standards regarding research and development. Your memo should address the questions shown below.
1. By requiring expensing of R&D, do you think companies will spend less on R&D? Why or why not? What are the possible implications for the competitiveness of U.S. companies?
2. If a company makes a commitment to spend money for R&D, it must believe it has future benefits. Shouldnt these costs therefore be capitalized just like the purchase of any long lived asset that you believe will have future benefits?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clean Air Anti Pollution Company is suffering declining sales of its principal product, non biodegradable plastic cartons. The president, Danny Fort, instructs his controller, Steve Penny, to lengthen asset lives to reduce depreciation expense. A processing line of automated plastic extruding equipment, purchased for $3.5 million in January 2009, was originally estimated to have a useful life of 8 years and a salvage value of $400,000. Depreciation has been recorded for 2 years on that basis. Danny wants the estimated life changed to 12 years total and the straight line method continued. Steve is hesitant to make the change, believing it is unethical to increase net income in this manner. Danny says, Hey, the life is only an estimate, and I;ve heard that our competition uses a 12 year life on their production equipment.
Instructions
(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
(b) Is the proposed change in asset life unethical, or is it simply a good business practice by an astute president?
(c) What is the effect of Danny’s proposed change on income before taxes in the year of change?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A companys tradename is a very important asset to the company, as it creates immediate product identification. Companies invest substantial sums to ensure that their product is well known to the consumer. Test your knowledge of who owns some famous brands and their impact on the financial statements.
Instructions
(a) Provide an answer to the five multiple choice questions below.
(1) Which company owns both Taco Bell and Pizza Hut?
(a) McDonalds.
(b) CKE.
(c) Yum Brands.
(d) Wendys.
(2) Dairy Queen belongs to:
(a) Breyer.
(b) Berkshire Hathaway.
(c) GE.
(d) The Coca Cola Company.
(3) Phillip Morris, the cigarette maker, is owned by:
(a) Altria.
(b) GE.
(c) Boeing.
(d) ExxonMobil.
(4) AOL, a major Internet provider, belongs to:
(a) Microsoft.
(b) Cisco.
(c) NBC.
(d) Time Warner.
(5) ESPN, the sports broadcasting network, is owned by:
(a) Procter & Gamble.
(b) Altria.
(c) Walt Disney.
(d) The Coca Cola Company.
(b) How do you think the value of these brands is reported on the appropriate company’s balance sheet?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Snyder Software Inc. successfully developed a new spreadsheet program. However, to produce and market the program, the company needed $2.0 million of additional financing. On January 1, 2009, Snyder borrowed money as follows.
1. Snyder issued $500,000, 11%, 10 year bonds. The bonds sold at face value and pay interest on January 1.
2. Snyder issued $1.0 million, 10%, 10 year bonds for $886,996. Interest is payable on January 1. Snyder uses the straight line method of amortization.
Instructions
(a) For the 11% bonds, prepare journal entries for the following items.
(1) The issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2009.
(2) Accrue interest expense on December 31, 2009.
(3) The payment of interest on January 1, 2010.
(b) For the 10 year, 10% bonds:
(1) Journalize the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2009.
(2) Prepare the entry for the redemption of the bonds at 101 on January 1, 2012, after paying the interest due on this date. The carrying value of the bonds at the redemption date was $920,897.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have recently started business as an accounting consultant. Companies come to you when they face difficult decisions about how to make certain journal entries. You are currently working on the following two problems, which are independent of one another.
a. Baggins Company sells hamburgers for $1.00 each. The cost of the materials used to make each hamburger is 30 cents. Baggins has a compensation plan in which its employees are paid in the form of cash and hamburgers. During 2003, Baggins paid cash salaries of $500,000 and also issued certificates to employees entitling them to 200,000 free hamburgers. The certificates are not redeemable until 2004. What journal entry or entries should Baggins make in 2003 to record this employee compensation information?
b. Radagast Company purchased a building for $100,000 cash on January 1, 2003. Because of poor business decisions, as of December 31, 2003, the building is worthless. Make all journal entries necessary in 2003 in connection with this building.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Payless Department Store had the following transactions during the year:
1. Purchased inventory on account.
2. Sold merchandise for cash, assuming a profit on the sale.
3. Borrowed money from a bank.
4. Purchased land, making cash down payment and issuing a note for the balance.
5. Issued stock for cash.
6. Paid salaries for the year.
7. Paid a vendor for inventory purchased on account.
8. Sold a building for cash and notes receivable at no gain or loss.
9. Paid cash dividends to stockholders.
10. Paid utilities.
Using the following column headings, identify the accounts involved and indicate the net effect of each transaction on the accounting equation (_ increase; _ decrease; 0 no effect). Transaction 1 has been completed as an example.
|
Transaction
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
=
|
Owners Equity
|
|
1
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
|
|
|
(Inventory)
|
|
(Accounts Payable)
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the accounts listed, indicate whether it is an asset (A), a liability (L), or an owners equity (OE) account. If it is an account that affects owners equity, indicate whether it is a revenue (R) or expense (E) account.
1. Cash
2. Sales
3. Accounts Receivable
4. Cost of Goods Sold
5. Insurance Expense
6. Capital Stock
7. Mortgage Payable
8. Salaries and Wages Expense
9. Retained Earnings
10. Salaries Payable
11. Accounts Payable
12. Interest Revenue
13. Inventory
14. Interest Receivable
15. Notes Payable
16. Equipment
17. Office Supplies
18. Utilities Expense
19. Interest Payable
20. Rent Expense
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accountant for Han Company is considering how to journalize the following transactions:
a. The employees of Han Company earned $105,000. The employees received $90,000 in cash and were promised that they will receive the remaining $15,000 as a pension payment on the date that they retire.
b. On August 1, 2003, Han Company paid $1,800 cash for one year of rent on a building it is using. This one year of rent is scheduled to be in effect for the 12 months starting on August 1, 2003.
1. What journal entry should be made on the books of Han Company to record the employee compensation information in (a)?
2. Describe any assumptions necessary in making the employee compensation journal entry in (1).
3. Make the necessary journal entry on Han Company s books on August 1 to record the payment for the building rent described in (b).
4. Consider the journal entry made in (3). Is any adjustment to Han s books necessary as of
December 31, 2003, as a consequence of the rent journal entry made on August 1?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fitch Company was organized on January 1. During the first year of operations, the following plant asset expenditures and receipts were recorded in random order.
|
Debits
|
|
|
1.
|
Cost of real estate purchased as a plant site (land $180,000 and building $70,000)
|
$ 250,000
|
|
2.
|
Accrued real estate taxes paid at time of purchase of real estate
|
6,000
|
|
3.
|
Cost of demolishing building to make land suitable for construction of new building
|
32,000
|
|
4.
|
Cost of filling and grading the land
|
7,100
|
|
5.
|
Excavation costs for new building
|
21,900
|
|
6.
|
Architect’s fees on building plans
|
40,000
|
|
7.
|
Full payment to building contractor
|
629,500
|
|
8.
|
Cost of parking lots and driveways
|
36,000
|
|
9.
|
Real estate taxes paid for the current year on land
|
7,300
|
|
|
$1,029,800
|
|
Credits
|
|
|
10.
|
Proceeds for salvage of demolished building
|
$ 12,700
|
Instructions
Analyze the transactions using the table column headings provided here. Enter the number of each transaction in the Item column, and enter the amounts in the appropriate columns. For amounts in the Other Accounts column, also indicate the account titles.
Item Land Building Other Accounts
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2010, Kretsinger Corporation reported these plant assets.
|
Land
|
|
$ 4,000,000
|
|
Buildings
|
$28,500,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—buildings
|
12,100,000
|
16,400,000
|
|
Equipment
|
48,000,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
5,000,000
|
43,000,000
|
|
Total plant assets
|
|
$63,400,000
|
During 2011, the following selected cash transactions occurred.
|
Apr.
|
1
|
Purchased land for $2,630,000.
|
|
May
|
1
|
Sold equipment that cost $750,000 when purchased on January 1, 2006. The equipment was sold for $370,000.
|
|
June
|
1
|
Sold land purchased on June 1, 1998, for $1,800,000. The land cost $800,000.
|
|
July
|
1
|
Purchased equipment for $800,000.
|
|
Dec.
|
31
|
Retired fully depreciated equipment that cost $470,000 when purchased on December 31, 2001. No salvage value was received.
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions. (Hint:You may wish to set up T accounts, post beginning balances, and then post 2011 transactions.) Kretsinger uses straight line depreciationfor buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 40 year life and no salvage value; the equipment is estimated to have a 10 year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement.
(b) Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2011.
(c) ?Prepare the plant assets section of Kretsinger’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here are selected transactions for Cagle Corporation for 2010.
|
Jan.
|
1
|
Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2000. The machine cost $52,000 and had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.
|
|
June
|
30
|
Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2007. The computer cost $42,000 and had a useful life of 7 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $23,000.
|
|
Dec.
|
31
|
Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2007. The truck cost $30,000 and was depreciated based on a 6 year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.
|
Instructions
Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation on assets disposed of, where applicable. Cagle Corporation uses straight line depreciation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Jan.
|
2
|
Paid $27,000 legal costs to successfully defend the patent against infringement by another company.
|
|
Jan.–June
|
|
Developed a new product, incurring $220,000 in research and development costs. A patent was granted for the product on July 1, and its useful life is equal to its legal life. Legal and other costs for the patent were $12,000.
|
|
Sept.
|
1
|
Paid $110,000 to an extremely large defensive lineman to appear in commercials advertising the company’s products. The commercials will air in September and October.
|
|
Oct.
|
1
|
Acquired a copyright for $120,000. The copyright has a useful life and legal life of 50 years.
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
(b) Prepare journal entries to record the 2011 amortization expense.
(c) Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
(d) Prepare the note to the financial statements on Gore Company’s intangible assets as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Due to rapid employee turnover in the accounting department, the following transactions involving intangible assets were improperly recorded by the Hamlin Company in 2010.
1. Hamlin developed a new manufacturing process, incurring research and development costs of $120,000. The company also purchased a patent for $96,000. In early January Hamlin capitalized $216,000 as the cost of the patents. Patent amortization expense of $18,000 was recorded based on a 12 year useful life.
2. On July 1, 2010, Hamlin purchased a small company and as a result acquired goodwill of $40,000. Hamlin recorded a half years amortization in 2010 based on a 40 year life ($500 amortization). The goodwill has an indefinite life.
Instructions
Prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2010. Assume the books have not yet been closed for 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Navarro Corporation purchased machinery on January 1, 2010, at a cost of $330,000. The estimated useful life of the machinery is 5 years, with an estimated salvage value at the end of that period of $30,000. The company is considering different depreciation methods that could be used for financial reporting purposes.
Instructions
(a) Prepare separate depreciation schedules for the machinery using the straight line method, and the declining balance method using double the straight line rate.
(b) Which method would result in the higher reported 2010 income? In the higher total reported income over the 5 year period?
(c) Which method would result in the lower reported 2010 income? In the lower total reported income over the 5 year period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pinkerton Corporations trial balance at December 31, 2010, is presented below. All 2010 transactions have been recorded except for the items described after the trial balance.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 28,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
36,800
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
10,000
|
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
–0–
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
36,200
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,600
|
|
|
Land
|
20,000
|
|
|
Building
|
150,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
|
Patent
|
9,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$ 500
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
|
50,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
24,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
27,300
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
6,000
|
|
Notes Payable (short term)
|
|
11,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
Notes Payable (long term)
|
|
35,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
50,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
63,600
|
|
Dividends
|
12,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
900,000
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
–0–
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
–0–
|
|
Gain on Disposal
|
|
–0–
|
|
Bad Debts Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
630,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Buildings
|
–0–
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
–0–
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Other Operating Expenses
|
61,800
|
|
|
Amortization Expense—Patents
|
–0–
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
110,000
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,167,400
|
$1,167,400
|
Unrecorded transactions
1. On May 1, 2010, Pinkerton purchased equipment for $16,000 plus sales taxes of $800 (all paid in cash).
2. On July 1, 2010, Pinkerton sold for $3,500 equipment which originally cost $5,000. Accumulated depreciation on this equipment at January 1, 2010, was $1,800; 2010 depreciation prior to the sale of equipment was $450.
3. On December 31, 2010, Pinkerton sold for $5,000 on account inventory that cost $3,500.
4. Pinkerton estimates that uncollectible accounts receivable at year end are $4,000.
5. The note receivable is a one year, 8% note dated April 1, 2010. No interest has been recorded.
6. The balance in prepaid insurance represents payment of a $3,600, 6 month premium on September 1, 2010.
7. The building is being depreciated using the straight line method over 30 years. The salvage value is $30,000.
8. The equipment owned prior to this year is being depreciated using the straight line method over 5 years. The salvage value is 10% of cost.
9. The equipment purchased on May 1, 2010, is being depreciated using the straightline method over 5 years, with a salvage value of $1,800.
10. The patent was acquired on January 1, 2010, and has a useful life of 9 years from that date.
11. Unpaid salaries at December 31, 2010, total $2,200.
12. The unearned rent of $6,000 was received on December 1, 2010, for 3 months rent.
13. Both the short term and long term notes payable are dated January 1, 2010, and carry a 10% interest rate. All interest is payable in the next 12 months.
14. Income tax expense was $15,000. It was unpaid at December 31.
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above.
(b) Prepare an updated December 31, 2010, trial balance.
(c) Prepare a 2010 income statement and a 2010 retained earnings statement.
(d) Prepare a December 31, 2010, balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the financial statements and the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Tootsie Roll Industries in Appendix A.
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) What were the total cost and book value of property, plant, and equipment at December 31, 2007?
(b) What method or methods of depreciation are used by Tootsie Roll for financial reporting purposes?
(c) What was the amount of depreciation and amortization expense for each of the 3 years 2005–2007? (Hint: Use statement of cash flows.)
(d) Using the statement of cash flows, what are the amounts of property, plant, and equipment purchased (capital expenditures) in 2007 and 2006?
(e) Explain how Tootsie Roll accounted for its intangible assets in 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
I need help with answering Parts 1 4 of the attached final assignment. Would you be able to provide me with a detailed explanation of these parts? I appreciate any assistance that you can provide.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How do I put this in a income statement
|
Oak Manufacturing
|
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
|
December 31, 20×5
|
|
Cash
|
$1,590
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
3,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
60
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
60
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
6,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation–Office Equipment
|
|
$ “B”
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
1,600
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
210
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
2,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
“D”
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
6,600
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
“A”
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
240
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
300
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense–Office Equipment
|
300
|
______
|
|
|
$”C”
|
$15,510
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Designing a Balanced Scorecard strategy map for an auto parts manufacturing company Domestic Auto Parts (DAP), 16 a $1 billion subsidiary of a U.S. auto parts manufacturing company, manufactured and marketed original and after market parts for automobile producers in the United States. It distributed products directly to original equipment automakers as well as to large retail chains. DAP was currently number four in market share in the United States out of nine direct competitors. Its 9% return on capital was respectable but less than that of its leading competitors.
DAP’s current product line was solid, but it had not introduced new products to the market during the past three years. This had caused its projected revenues to decline and its industry position to slip. As recently as two years ago, DAP was number two in the industry, but competitors Western Auto and Just in Time Automotive had passed it, pushing DAP to number four. Western Auto had introduced higher value products to the market with the use of technology both to manufacture products and in the parts themselves. Western’s customers paid a premium price for the improved performance of the company’s products.
DAP, on the other hand, had protected margins during its revenue decline by aggressively attacking costs. It succeeded in maintaining its gross and operating margin levels but at the cost of limiting plant investment and technology upgrades in manufacturing plants. It was beginning to experience maintenance problems, such as an increase in unscheduled downtime. Also, because it lacked the flexible manufacturing capabilities of competitors, it had to produce to stock rather than to order, causing inventory costs to rise to noncompetitive levels. Company management now recognized that the recent cost cutting had maintained margins in the short term but may have severely affected DAP’s ability to compete in the longer term.
To help turn the company around, the parent company had recently hired a new CEO, Ellen Bright. Her job was clearly set out for her—either turn the subsidiary around in two years or close the business. The minimum requirements for continued operations were to achieve 12% return on capital employed (ROCE) and a growth rate faster than the industry’s so that it could regain its number one or two position among competitors.
With this directive in hand, Bright held a meeting with her executive team to explain the situation and get their input. She started the meeting by stating:
The only way we can achieve our goal is for each of you and your departments to cooperate to improve our return on capital. Product quality has set us apart in the past. We must regain our high quality position and grow our revenues and our contribution to the parent company.
My review of the economics and the competitive situation at DAP suggests that we must do three things: we need to grow; we must be customer intimate; and, we must be operationally excellent. And we must do all three things at once to be successful.
Joe [the new chief financial officer brought in by Bright], you and I have been working on the economics required to achieve our financial goals. Why don’t you share our initial findings with the group?
Joe Nathan described the financial goals for the turnaround:
Basically, I designed a simple economic model to pinpoint the critical economic drivers needed to reach our goal of a 12% ROCE. We must increase our top line revenue by 50% through innovation and customer relationships, we need to better utilize our capital assets (both current and new)—currently we are operating at 65% on old assets—and we must get to 90% utilization on an upgraded asset base. Finally, we must minimize our total cost structure—today we are operating above the average cost in our competitor group. We need to get to the lowest cost quartile to compete. These are the key drivers needed to get to the financial results expected by the parent company. We must balance them—one against the other—to achieve our overall goal of 12% ROCE.
The question is how are we going to do this? What must we do—what objectives must we set and achieve?
Ellen Bright interjected, ?oWe are going to build a strategy to achieve each of these thrusts. I need your commitment and active contribution.?? She asked Michael Milton, vice president of manufacturing, for his perspective. Milton said:
I’ll admit that we certainly need to get more creative and bring to market new and improved products. But we need to do a lot of our processes better. Supplier management and manufacturing as well as product delivery have to be better coordinated so we can effectively and efficiently get new products to the customer. We need to be on time and on spec just to get the opportunity to sell new products. Key in my mind is managing the supplier pipeline, the raw materials—there is a lot of money to be saved there.
We also need to balance our intense focus on cost cutting with the need to make investments in process improvements and new and upgraded equipment. Unscheduled downtime and the inability to make product switchovers on the manufacturing floor are killing us. Upgraded capital will both reduce our costs and help deliver consistently on time and on spec. We talk a lot about preventive maintenance, but we need to get real about it. This could save us big time in terms of costs and effectiveness. If we don’t do these operational things we will have trouble convincing customers to pay a premium price for our products.
David Dillon, head of distribution, described the problems he faced:
At the moment, I don’t have the infrastructure tools to create a first class network of wholesalers and distributors. We need to streamline our distribution process and position ourselves as a strong business partner to attract and retain profitable customers. There are a lot of people out there with great experience and good ideas about how to achieve this, but the department is large and geographically dispersed, and there is no formal way of sharing best practices and best thinking. These steps will help us achieve our grow revenue goal by getting products to market at a reasonable price in a reasonable time.
Mary Stewart, vice president of marketing and sales, added:
Improving our distribution will be a major factor in our new customer intimacy thrust by providing the opportunity for win–win relationships with our distributor customers and enhancing our reputation for efficiency and organization.
In addition, we must position ourselves in the market—with the right customers—to be viable.
We have recently studied our customer base and found an important segment of the current customer base that is profitable in both the direct and wholesale segments. In fact, 69% of our customers produce 90% of our profit. We went on to determine what these key customers want and will pay for. Both key segments, direct and wholesale, want essentially the same things. They expect us to deliver products on time and on spec. This, however, is expected from everyone in the industry. It’s a hurdle that must be passed just to be considered a viable vendor. The differentiator is for a supplier to understand their needs and translate that by continuous communication and productive dialogue. They want a long term, mutually beneficial relationship with their suppliers.
They want superior, technology sophisticated products from a supplier with a superior reputation and image in the industry. Such a supplier makes their buying decisions less risky.
Rita Richardson, vice president of research and development, responded to the challenge to produce state of the art technologically sophisticated products:
Well, we have some talented people in our R&D group who can produce the kind of products our customers need. But all the products in the world will not be bought without a good marketing communications effort. We need to be able to tell people what we have and how it can benefit them. We need a marketing effort that positions us as an innovator with new and enhanced products to offer. I think it might help to have some of our marketing staff spend time in the R&D department to get a feel for what’s going on. Sure some reskilling may be needed to achieve our innovation goals but I think we have a solid base of R&D professionals.
Bright interjected at this point, ?oI think you have hit on something there, Rita. I think we all need to be more business focused and less functionally focused. The company seems to be suffering because employees know only what goes on inside their own area. This team needs to lead this cross functional view by example—in what we say and what we do.??
She closed the meeting by challenging the group even further:
None of our objectives can be accomplished without a major commitment from all of us to build a world class workforce. To operate as an innovator we must change the way we think in this organization. Our employees must value change not resist it. We must reskill large parts—not some—of the organization. This will require training. Training involves both time and money. To support the new workforce we will also need to provide tools to work smarter and harder. We can do this and align the organization through the use of just in time technology. This commitment to people and organization is necessary to do the things we need to do to deliver customer benefits and ultimately financial returns.
Required
From the meeting of senior DAP executives, develop a strategy map of objectives, as well as potential Balanced Scorecard measures, for DAP. You can be guided by the following questions:
Financial
1. Who are the shareholders, and what do they want?
2. What are the shareholders’ expectations in the following areas?
(a) Revenue growth.
(b) Asset utilization.
(c) Cost improvement.
Customer
1. Who are the customers?
2. What do the customers want? How does DAP create value for them?
Process
1. What processes are most important for creating value for DAP’s shareholders and customers?
2. What are the objectives and measures for each process identified here?
Learning and Growth
1. What specific skills and capabilities do DAP’s people need in order to excel at the critical processes that you identified in the process perspective?
2. What other objectives can you identify to improve the human resources, information technology, and organization culture and alignment of DAP if it is to succeed with its strategy?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
African Lakes Company purchased a delivery truck. The total cash payment was $27,900, including the following items.
|
Negotiated purchase price
|
$24,000
|
|
Installation of special shelving
|
1,100
|
|
Painting and lettering
|
900
|
|
Motor vehicle license
|
100
|
|
Annual insurance policy
|
500
|
|
Sales tax
|
1,300
|
|
Total paid
|
$27,900
|
Explain how each of these costs would be accounted for.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.
Goodwill
Intangible assets
Research and development costs
Amortization
Franchise
1. Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long lived assets that do not possess physical substance.
2. The allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense in a rational and systematic manner.
3. A right to sell certain products or services, or use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.
4. Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products. These costs must be expensed as incurred.
5. The excess of the cost of a company over the fair market value of the net assets required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following expenditures relating to plant assets were made by Bel Air Company during the first 2 months of 2010.
1. Paid $7,000 of accrued taxes at the time the plant site was acquired.
2. Paid $200 insurance to cover a possible accident loss on new factory machinery while the machinery was in transit.
3. Paid $850 sales taxes on a new delivery truck.
4. Paid $21,000 for parking lots and driveways on the new plant site.
5. Paid $250 to have the company name and slogan painted on the new delivery truck.
6. Paid $8,000 for installation of new factory machinery.
7. Paid $900 for a 1 year accident insurance policy on the new delivery truck.
8. Paid $75 motor vehicle license fee on the new truck.
Instructions
(a) Explain the application of the cost principle in determining the acquisition cost of plant assets.
(b) List the numbers of the transactions, and opposite each indicate the account title to which each expenditure should be debited.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trudy Company incurred the following costs.
|
1.
|
Sales tax on factory machinery purchased
|
$ 5,000
|
|
2.
|
Painting of and lettering on truck immediately upon purchase
|
700
|
|
3.
|
Installation and testing of factory machinery
|
2,000
|
|
4.
|
Real estate broker’s commission on land purchased
|
3,500
|
|
5.
|
Insurance premium paid for first year’s insurance on new truck
|
880
|
|
6.
|
Cost of landscaping on property purchased
|
7,200
|
|
7.
|
Cost of paving parking lot for new building constructed
|
17,900
|
|
8.
|
Cost of clearing, draining, and filling land
|
13,300
|
|
9.
|
Architect’s fees on self constructed building
|
10,000
|
Instructions
Indicate to which account Trudy would debit each of the costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chris Rock has prepared the following list of statements about depreciation.
1. Depreciation is a process of asset valuation, not cost allocation.
2. Depreciation provides for the proper matching of expenses with revenues.
3. The book value of a plant asset should approximate its market value.
4. Depreciation applies to three classes of plant assets: land, buildings, and equipment.
5. Depreciation does not apply to a building because its usefulness and revenue producing ability generally remain intact over time.
6. The revenue producing ability of a depreciable asset will decline due to wear and tear and to obsolescence.
7. Recognizing depreciation on an asset results in an accumulation of cash for replacement of the asset.
8. The balance in accumulated depreciation represents the total cost that has been charged to expense.
9. Depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation are reported on the income statement.
10. Four factors affect the computation of depreciation: cost, useful life, salvage value, and residual value.
Instructions
Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jack Reese, the new controller of Muckenthaler Company, has reviewed the expected useful lives and salvage values of selected depreciable assets at the beginning of 2010. Here are his findings:
a
|
Useful Life (in years)
|
Salvage Value
|
|
Type of Asset
|
Date Acquired
|
Cost
|
Accumulated Depreciation, Jan. 1, 2010
|
Old
|
Proposed
|
Old
|
Proposed
|
|
Building
|
Jan. 1, 2002
|
$900,000
|
$172,000
|
40
|
50
|
$40,000
|
$35,000
|
|
Warehouse
|
Jan. 1, 2005
|
120,000
|
23,000
|
25
|
20
|
5,000
|
3,600
|
All assets are depreciated by the straight line method. Muckenthaler Company uses a calendar year in preparing annual financial statements. After discussion, management has agreed to accept Jack proposed changes. (The Proposed useful life is total life, not remaining life.)
Instructions
(a) Compute the revised annual depreciation on each asset in 2010. (Show computations.)
(b) Prepare the entry (or entries) to record depreciation on the building in 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here are selected 2010 transactions of Falk Corporation.
|
Jan.
|
1
|
Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2000. The machine cost $62,000 and had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.
|
|
June
|
30
|
Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2008. The computer cost $39,000 and had a useful life of 3 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $5,000 cash.
|
|
Dec.
|
31
|
Sold a delivery truck for $9,000 cash. The truck cost $25,000 when it was purchased on January 1, 2007, and was depreciated based on a 5 year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.
|
Instructions
Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation on assets disposed of, where applicable. Falk Corporation uses straight line depreciation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Myler International is considering a significant expansion to its product line. The sales force is excited about the opportunities that the new products will bring. The new products are a significant step up in quality above the companys current offerings, but offer a complementary fit to its existing product line. Frank Peralta, senior production department manager, is very excited about the high tech new equipment that will have to be acquired to produce the new products. Carol Herbert, the companys CFO, has provided the following projections based on results with and without the new products.
|
Without New Products
|
With New Products
|
|
Sales
|
$10,000,000
|
$18,000,000
|
|
Net income
|
$600,000
|
$1,350,000
|
|
Average total assets
|
$5,000,000
|
$15,000,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the company’s return on assets ratio, profit margin ratio, and asset turnover ratio, both with and without the new product line.
(b) Discuss the implications that your findings in part (a) have for the company’s decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hopson Company reports the following information (in millions) during a recent year: net sales, $11,408.5; net earnings, $244.9; total assets, ending, $4,312.6; and total assets, beginning, $4,254.3.
Instructions
(a) Calculate the (1) return on assets, (2) asset turnover, and (3) profit margin ratios.
(b) Prove mathematically how the profit margin and asset turnover ratios work together to explain return on assets, by showing the appropriate calculation.
(c) Hopson Company owns Villas (grocery), Hopson Theaters, Lawton Drugstores, and Urbin (heavy equipment), and manages commercial real estate, among other activities. Does this diversity of activities affect your ability to interpret the ratios you calculated in (a)? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
These are selected 2010 transactions for Hammon Corporation:
|
Jan.
|
1
|
Purchased a copyright for $120,000. The copyright has a useful life of 8 years and a remaining legal life of 30 years.
|
|
May
|
1
|
Purchased a patent with an estimated useful life of 4 years and a legal life of 20 years for $54,000.
|
|
Sept.
|
1
|
Purchased a small company and recorded goodwill of $150,000. Its useful life is indefinite.
|
Instructions
Prepare all adjusting entries at December 31 to record amortization required by the events.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gladow Company, organized in 2010, has these transactions related to intangible assets in that year:
|
Jan.
|
2
|
Purchased a patent (5 year life) $300,000.
|
|
Apr.
|
1
|
Goodwill purchased (indefinite life) $360,000.
|
|
July
|
1
|
Acquired a 9 year franchise; expiration date July 1, 2019, $540,000.
|
|
Sept.
|
1
|
Research and development costs $185,000.
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the necessary entries to record these intangibles. All costs incurred were for cash.
(b) Make the entries as of December 31, 2010, recording any necessary amortization.
(c) Indicate what the balances should be on December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elbert Company was organized on January 1. During the first year of operations, the following plant asset expenditures and receipts were recorded in random order.
|
Debits
|
|
|
1.
|
Cost of real estate purchased as a plant site (land $255,000 and building $25,000)
|
$ 280,000
|
|
2.
|
Installation cost of fences around property
|
6,800
|
|
3.
|
Cost of demolishing building to make land suitable for construction of new building
|
24,000
|
|
4.
|
Excavation costs for new building
|
23,000
|
|
5.
|
Accrued real estate taxes paid at time of purchase of real estate
|
2,179
|
|
6.
|
Cost of parking lots and driveways
|
29,000
|
|
7.
|
Architect’s fees on building plans
|
33,000
|
|
8.
|
Real estate taxes paid for the current year on land
|
5,800
|
|
9.
|
Full payment to building contractor
|
640,000
|
|
|
$1,043,779
|
|
Credits
|
|
|
10.
|
Proceeds from salvage of demolished building
|
$ 8,000
|
Instructions
Analyze the transactions using the following table column headings. Enter the number of each transaction in the Item column, and enter the amounts in the appropriate columns. For amounts in the Other Accounts column, also indicate the account title.
Item Land Building Other Accounts
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2010, Rijo Corporation reported the following plant assets.
|
Land
|
|
$ 3,000,000
|
|
Buildings
|
$26,500,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—buildings
|
12,100,000
|
14,400,000
|
|
Equipment
|
40,000,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
5,000,000
|
35,000,000
|
|
Total plant assets
|
|
$52,400,000
|
During 2011, the following selected cash transactions occurred.
|
Apr.
|
1
|
Purchased land for $2,200,000.
|
|
May
|
1
|
Sold equipment that cost $600,000 when purchased on January 1, 2004. The equipment was sold for $170,000.
|
|
June
|
1
|
Sold land for $1,800,000. The land cost $1,000,000.
|
|
July
|
1
|
Purchased equipment for $1,300,000.
|
|
Dec.
|
31
|
Retired equipment that cost $500,000 when purchased on December 31, 2001. No salvage value was received.
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions. (Hint:You may wish to set up T accounts, post beginning balances, and then post 2011 transactions.) Rijo uses straight line depreciation for buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 40 year useful life and no salvage value; the equipment is estimated to have a 10 year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement.
(b) Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2011.
(c) Prepare the plant assets section of Rijo’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented here are selected transactions for Sager Company for 2010.
|
Jan.
|
1
|
Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2000. The machine cost $71,000 on that date and had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.
|
|
June
|
30
|
Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2007. The computer cost $30,000 and had a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. computer was sold for $10,000.
|
|
Dec.
|
31
|
Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2005. The truck cost $31,000 and was depreciated based on an 8 year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.
|
Instructions
Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Sager Company uses straight line depreciation. (Assume depreciation is up to date as of December 31, 2009.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The intangible assets section of Salmiento Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31, 2010, is presented here.
|
Patents ($60,000 cost less $6,000 amortization)
|
$54,000
|
|
Copyrights ($36,000 cost less $25,200 amortization)
|
10,800
|
|
Total
|
$64,800
|
The patent was acquired in January 2010 and has a useful life of 10 years. The copyright was acquired in January 2004 and also has a useful life of 10 years. The following cash transactions may have affected intangible assets during 2011.
|
Jan.
|
2
|
Paid $45,000 legal costs to successfully defend the patent against infringement by another company.
|
|
Jan.–June
|
Developed a new product, incurring $210,000 in research and development costs. A patent was granted for the product on July 1, and its useful life is equal to its legal life. Legal and other costs for the patent were $20,000.
|
|
Sept.
|
1
|
Paid $40,000 to a quarterback to appear in commercials advertising the company’s products. The commercials will air in September and October.
|
|
Oct.
|
1
|
Acquired a copyright for $200,000. The copyright has a useful life and legal life of 50 years.
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
(b) Prepare journal entries to record the 2011 amortization expense for intangible assets.
(c) Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
(d) Prepare the note to the financial statements on Salmiento Corporation’s intangible assets as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Titus Corporation and Vane Corporation, two companies of roughly the same size, are both involved in the manufacture of shoe tracing devices. Each company depreciates its plant assets using the straight line approach. An investigation of their financial statements reveals the information shown below.
|
Titus Corp.
|
Vane Corp.
|
|
Net income
|
$ 240,000
|
$ 300,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,250,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Total assets (average)
|
3,300,000
|
3,000,000
|
|
Plant assets (average)
|
2,400,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
Intangible assets (goodwill)
|
300,000
|
0
|
Instructions
(a) For each company, calculate these values:
(1) Return on assets ratio.
(2) Profit margin.
(3) Asset turnover ratio.
(b) Based on your calculations in part (a), comment on the relative effectiveness of the two companies in using their assets to generate sales. What factors complicate your ability to compare the two companies?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In recent years Wang Company has purchased three machines. Because of frequent employee turnover in the accounting department, a different accountant was in charge of selecting the depreciation method for each machine, and various methods have been used. Information concerning the machines is summarized in the table below.
|
Machine
|
Acquired
|
Cost
|
Salvage Value
|
Useful Life (in years)
|
Depreciation Method
|
|
1
|
Jan. 1, 2008
|
$96,000
|
$ 12,000
|
6
|
Straight line
|
|
2
|
July 1, 2009
|
85,000
|
10,000
|
5
|
Declining balance
|
|
3
|
Nov. 1, 2009
|
66,000
|
6,000
|
6
|
Units of activity
|
For the declining balance method, Wang Company uses the double declining rate. For the units of activity method, total machine hours are expected to be 24,000. Actual hours of use in the first 3 years were: 2009, 400; 2010, 4,500; and 2011, 5,000.
Instructions
- Compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each machine at December 31, 2011.
If machine 2 was purchased on October 1 instead of July 1, what would be the depreciation expense for this machine in 2009? In 2010?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Old Habits Die Hard
“The ethical climate in the Czech Republic has improved since the early days, but we still have a long way to go,” said Josef Machinka, an economic adviser to the Ministry of Finance, while attending an investment seminar sponsored by the Prague Stock Exchange. “We really lack an established ethical framework.” Adds Charles University professor Jana Vychopen? , “Ethical problems still exist, but they stem from 40 years under a system that promoted corruption. Under the communists it was all political influence.
There wasn’t an economy—corruption sustained the system back then, but now chokes it. We were shocked into a market economy and our coupon privatization was racked with scandal. Even the word ‘tunneling,’ meaning asset stripping, was coined here.” “Ethics hangs over the market but so does a lack of transparency,” states Pavel Kraus, analyst for Merta Investment Management. “Many of today’s managers forged their attitudes in the 70s and 80s. Under communism, secrecy— not transparency—was the watchword.
They just don’t think it’s important to keep investors informed, so how do you know they’re not a bunch of shady managers trying to hide something?” He goes on to give the example of Bednar, a large chemical company that was one of the first state owned enterprises to be privatized. “Bednar is run by old dogs who can’t—or won’t—learn new tricks. Like a lot of Czech companies, Bednar didn’t come to the stock market, but found itself on the stock exchange because of the privatization. The managers found themselves in a publicly traded company against their will. “Still, it’s better than the old days. Back in the 90s I asked to meet with them to discuss their business plan and was told, ‘Sure—for CzK 400 an hour.’ I kept phoning them for several weeks and finally wore them down. They ended up meeting me for free!” Agreeing with Kraus is Ji?ri Michalik, a broker with Habova Securities. “Things are getting better. Czech companies are finally realizing that they have to let investors know what they’re getting into if they are going to attract more investment. They looked around and realized that our Polish and Hungarian rivals were leaving us in the dust. Right after privatization most managers didn’t have experience at quickly compiling and disseminating their financial information. Even if they had good intentions, it was hard for them to do. But now more and more of them have the experience.”
The conversation comes back to Jana Vychopen?. “I put a lot of the blame on the Prague Stock Exchange. It’s still not seen as a place to raise capital. Five IPOs between 1993 and 2008 is not a good track record. We have the rules in place and managers’ attitudes are changing, if slowly. But poor enforcement means that investors don’t always get what they need or they get it too late to be of any good. of course, Czech citizens have never gotten used to being shareholders. They put most of their savings in banks, so banks have a lot of money to lend. It’s easy for Czech companies to get credit, so they have little incentive for going public.”
Required
1. Describe the problems characterized in this case.
2. What are the likely causes of these problems?
3. What are consequences of these problems for investors, Czech companies, and the Prague Stock Exchange?
4. Outline a program of changes needed to correct the problems identified.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What Difference Does It Really Make?
As an analyst for a securities firm, you are aware that accounting practices differ around the world. Yet you wonder whether these differences really have any material effect on companies’ financial statements. You also know that the SEC in the United States requires non U.S. registrants to reconcile key financial data from the GAAP used in their financial statements to U.S. GAAP. However, companies using IFRS were exempt from this reconciliation requirement starting in 2007.
Required:
1. Document the effects of the GAAP differences in the 20F by doing the following:
a. For the current year, calculate the percentage change for net income and for total shareholders’ equity indicated by the reconciliation and using the non U.S. GAAP (i.e., IFRS) numbers as a base.
b. Repeat the same calculations for the preceding year. Are the percentage changes approximately the same? What is significant about your findings?
c. For the current year, identify the two income statement items and the two balance sheet items that exhibit the relatively largest differences. Would you expect other French multinational companies to be subject to similar item by item differences?
2. Should a U.S. reader of non U.S. financial statements find this SEC mandated reconciliation useful?
3. Based on your analysis of the sanofi aventis 2006 limited restatement, do you support the SEC’s decision to exempt companies using IFRS from the reconciliation requirement? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Do the Differences Really Matter?
As an analyst for a securities firm, you are aware that accounting practices differ around the world. Yet you wonder whether these differences really have any material effect on companies’ financial statements. You also know that the SEC in the United States requires non U.S. registrants to reconcile key financial data from the GAAP used in their financial statements to U.S. GAAP. However, companies using IFRS were exempt from this reconciliation requirement starting in 2007. You obtain the last reconciliation from Unilever
Required
1. Document the effects of the GAAP differences in the 20F by doing the following:
a. For the current year, calculate the percentage change for net income and for total shareholders’ equity indicated by the reconciliation and using the non U.S. GAAP (i.e., IFRS) numbers as a base.
b. Repeat the same calculations for the preceding year. Are the percentage changes approximately the same? What is significant about your findings?
c. For the current year, identify the two income statement items and the two balance sheet items that exhibit the relatively largest differences. Would you expect other Dutch multinational companies to be subject to similar item by item differences?
2. Should a U.S. reader of non U.S. financial statements find this SEC mandated reconciliation useful?
3. Based on your analysis of the Unilever 2006 limited restatement, do you support the SEC’s decision to exempt companies using IFRS from the reconciliation requirement? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standing on Principles
Recent U.S. accounting scandals, such as Enron and WorldCom, have caused some to question whether current U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) are really protecting investors. Critics, including the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), charge that the rules based approach to U.S. GAAP encourages a check the box mentality that inhibits transparency in financial reporting. Some observers express a preference for principles based standards, such as International
Financial Reporting Standards or those found in the United Kingdom. Both the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the SEC have released reports on the feasibility of principles based accounting standards in the United States.62
The following appeared in a leading British professional accounting journal.
Ever since the Enron debacle first hit the news, smug U.K. accountants have found a new excuse for feeling superior to their transatlantic cousins. The U.S. Financial Accounting Standards Board’s massive oeuvre have been scoffed at as being merely a whole bunch of rules that don’t hang together. Both British and International standards, by way of contrast, are asserted to be based on principles. This essential difference, it is argued, helps to explain why the U.S. profession has got itself into such deep trouble.
Perhaps. But probably not. It certainly seems true that the highly detailed American standards have tended to invite legalistic interpretations and loopholing, whereas the U.K.’s paramount requirement to present a true and fair view has helped to remind us that accounting is more than a compliance activity. However, it is much too glib to characterise their accounting standards as lacking in principle compared to ours; in terms of their intellectual rigour, American accounting standards compare
favourably with any others in the world.
How is it that the U.K. and International Accounting Standards Boards appear to have found reliable principles on which to base their own standards, principles that have eluded FASB? After all, both bodies have themselves adopted conceptual frameworks that are largely copies of the FASB’s version, and claim to follow them. The answer is that they haven’t. Our standards aren’t really more principled than the American ones, they are simply less detailed. And even that is changing—both the U.K. and IASB rulebooks have swollen very considerably in recent years, often inspired (if that is the word) by the content of the equivalent
American standards.63
Required
1. What is the difference between rules based and principles based accounting standards, and what are the advantages and disadvantages of each?
2. Why has U.S. GAAP evolved into a rules based approach? Would principles based standards be effective in the United States? Why or why not?
3. What needs to change in the United States to make principles based standards effective?
4. Are investors and analysts better served by rules based or principles based accounting standards? Why do you say so?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Casino Capital
What conditions are necessary to develop an efficient stock market with fair trading? What role does accounting and financial reporting play in stock market development? Consider the case of China:
Those Chinese who think of themselves as street smart tell a joke about three fools. The first is the boss who plays around with his secretary and ends up her husband. The second is the investor who plays the property market and ends up a homeowner. And the third is the punter who plays the stock market and finds himself a shareholder. This sums up the culture of China’s fledgling capital markets. “Trading, not ownership,” is the approach of China’s investors, says Anthony Neoh, a former head of Hong Kong’s Securities and Futures Commission who is now the chief outside adviser to China’s regulatory body. “That’s what we need to change.” This marks a shift in China’s capital market reforms. So far, Beijing has focused almost entirely on the “supply side” of the securities market. This has included listing more, and better, companies, and forcing them to adopt better standards of corporate governance and disclosure. Such efforts have a long way to go.
However, the government now realizes that it also needs to work on the demand side.” At present, China’s stock market, Asia’s second largest by capitalization, consists of 60m mainly clueless retail investors, driven to trade almost entirely on rumor.64
[T]he balance sheets of Chinese companies are, by common consent, a joke. In January [2001] the government’s official auditing body admitted that more than two thirds of the 1,300 biggest state owned enterprises cook their books. Johnny Chen, the Beijing head of PricewaterhouseCoopers, says that even this is an understatement. Quite simply, the SOEs’ numbers are whatever the key man wants them to be. And without genuinely independent directors to chair an audit committee, that will not change.65
Even China’s mostly hapless stock market investor (66m of them, officially) had something to cheer about this month, after the country’s highest court said that shareholders could file individual or class action lawsuits against companies that lie about their accounts. There appear to be a lot of liars about. Around 900 shareholder suits are pending, in a country with 1,200 listed companies.
It remains to be seen whether these steps amount to mere tinkering, or herald the new and bolder approach to financial reform that China badly needs. Its markets for labor, goods, and services are nowadays more liberal than those in some capitalist economies. Its capital markets, by contrast, have changed only cosmetically since the days of central planning. In effect, all capital in China is allocated, one way or the other, by the government, which wastes much of it.
The decade old stock market is dominated by state owned enterprises that were listed for political rather than economic reasons. Some two thirds of the market’s capitalization is not traded, so the state retains total control. There is no corporate bond market to speak of.66
[A]ll is not what it seems in China’s capital markets. For a start, growth in the domestic stock market has outstripped the efforts—game as they are—of the regulators and the legal system to police it. The authorities say that computer matching of share transactions has allowed them pretty much to stop powerful syndicates ramping up share prices. They have even sent the biggest manipulators to jail, yet insider trading is still rife on a heroic scale.
Stock exchange executives reckon that the real number of investors is around half the official number: investors use multiple accounts for dodgy share dealings.
The real issue is the quality of the listed companies themselves, says one financial official. Even some of the better regarded ones indulge in all sorts of market abuses, such as lending money raised on the stock market to the parent company rather than investing it, or speculating in the stock market on their own account. Almost all companies allowed a listing are the beneficiaries of government favoritism. Their profitability is usually abysmal, their levels of disclosure poor, and—with the state holding roughly two thirds of the shares of companies listed in Shanghai and Shenzhen—their treatment of minority shareholders appalling.67
[T]he biggest problem is the poor quality of the listed companies. All but a handful are state enterprises, which are approved for an IPO by a political committee rather than by independent underwriters. A 2002 survey by the China Securities Regulatory Commission (CSRC), the top regulator, found that one in ten listed companies had doctored its books, and the finance ministry reported in January [2004] 152 firms it had surveyed had misstated their profits by a combined 2.9 billion yuan. “The stock market has been used to support national industrial policy, to subsidize SOE restructuring, not to allow private companies to raise capital,” says Stephen Green of the Royal Institute of International Affairs.68
Required
1. Describe the conditions necessary to develop a stock market in an emerging economy.
2. How do these conditions compare to the situation in China?
3. How likely is China to develop a stock market with fair trading? Why do you say so?
4. Outline a plan of reforms necessary to achieve stock market development in China.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the Green
O.J. Sanders works in the financial reporting section of a large U.S. pharmaceutical company. The company has recently committed to “go green” and O.J.’s boss wants to add some environmental disclosures in the company’s annual report. O.J. is charged with recommending the contents of the environmental disclosure. In his research, O.J. learns that U.S. companies have generally lagged European companies in environmental reporting, but that more and more U.S. companies are now disclosing environmental matters. He believes that his company should at least “match the competition” in the disclosures it makes. Toward that end, he obtains the annual report of Roche, a Swiss competitor. O.J. also learns about the G3 sustainability reporting guidelines of the Global Reporting Initiative.
Required:
1. Discuss why financial statement users find environmental disclosures informative.
2. Obtain the G3 sustainability reporting guidelines of the Global Reporting Initiative List the environmental performance indicators that the GRI recommends for disclosure.
3. How closely do Roche’s environmental disclosures match the GRI recommendations? What are the areas of nondisclosure?
4. Describe the environmental disclosures that O.J. should recommend his company make.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seeing Is Believing
Tyler Poland is a stock picker responsible for recommending Mexican securities for his brokerage firm’s clients. He is often frustrated about the lack of credible information on companies in Mexico. “Everything is always so top secret,” he says. “Any time I try to learn about a company’s activities, all I hear is ‘I wouldn’t know what to tell you’.” In Mexico, it seems, information is power. Trivial or not, information seems to be off limits to anyone who is not an insider.
Tyler knows that this secretiveness goes way back in Mexico’s history. The Aztec rulers kept their subjects amazed by powerful deities who were both unpredictable and hard to understand. The Spanish followed many detailed bureaucratic rules but hardly ever shared them with ordinary Mexicans.
After independence, the ruling political parties made sure that compromising information never got in the wrong hands.
Historian and novelist Hector Aguilar Camin has written, “In Mexico, powerful people have traditionally kidnapped information. Part of the process of democratization is freeing it.” But “there is still a tendency to want to hold it hostage for some kind of benefit.”34
Most economists believe that government secrecy made the 1994 currency collapse more severe because the Mexican government withheld vital macroeconomic statistics from the international banking community. Many worry now that secrecy will limit Mexico’s economic growth. Yet pressure for transparency has grown along with an influx of foreign investors doing business in Mexico. The rise of opposition political parties and the growth of a free press have fueled a new debate over access to information.
“What good are all of these trends to me?” complains Tyler. “I need better information now.”
Required
1. Discuss at least five characteristics that predict relatively low disclosure levels in Mexico.
2. Discuss characteristics or features that predict relatively high levels of disclosure in Mexico.
3. Accounting measurement and disclosure practices are improving (from an investor protection viewpoint) in many emerging market economies. What are some of the recent improvements in these areas in Mexico? Discuss the underlying factors that help explain why the improvements are occurring.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kashmir Enterprises
Kashmir Enterprises, an Indian carpet manufacturer, begins the calendar year withthe following Indian rupee (INR) balances:
|
Cash
|
920,000
|
Accounts payable
|
420,000
|
|
Inventory
|
640,000
|
Owners’ equity
|
1,140,000
|
|
$1,560,000
|
$1,560,000
|
During the first week in January, the company acquires additional manufacturing inventories costing INR 2,400,000 on account and a warehouse for INR3,200,000 paying INR800,000 down and signing a 20 year, 10 percent note for the balance. The warehouse (assume no salvage value) is depreciated straight line over the period of the note. Cash sales were INR6,000,000 for the year; selling and administrative expenses, including office rent, were INR1,200,000.
Payments on account totaled INR2,200,000, while inventory on hand at year end was INR480,000. Except for interest expense paid on December 31, all other cash receipts and payments took place uniformly throughout the year.
On January 1, the U.S. dollar/rupee exchange rate was $.025 = INR 1; at yearend it was $.02 = INR 1. The average exchange rate during the year was $.022. The Indian consumer price index rose from 128 to 160 by December 31, averaging 144 during the year. At the new financial statement date, the cost to replace inventories had increased by 30 percent; the cost to rebuild a comparable warehouse (based on the construction cost index) was approximately INR4,480,000.
Required
1. Assuming beginning inventories were acquired when the general price index level was 128, prepare Kashmir Enterprises’ financial statements (i.e., income statement and balance sheet) under the
(a) conventional original transactions cost model,
(b) historical cost constant rupee model, and
(c) current cost model.
2. Comment on which financial statement set gives financial analysts the most useful performance and wealth measures.
3. Now assume that management at Kashmir Enterprises’ U.S. headquarters wants to see the Indian rupee statements in U.S. dollars. Two price level foreign currency translation procedures are requested. The first is to translate Kashmir’s unadjusted rupee statements to dollars (use the current rate method) and then restate the resulting dollar amounts accounting for U.S. inflation (the U.S. general price level at the financial statement date was 108, up 8 percent from the previous year). The second is to restate the Indian rupee statements accounting for inflation (using the historical cost constant rupee model), then translate the adjusted amounts to dollars using the current rate. Comment on which of the two resulting sets of dollar statements you prefer for use by American readers. (The U.S. general price level averaged 104 during the year.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project 1
Project 1 is a C (Regular) Corporation Tax Return.
Project 2
Project 2 is an S Corporation Tax Return.
The Income Tax Return may be prepared manually or using the PROSERIES (TURBOTAX) software
INSTRUCTIONS
Click on START and enter “PROGRAMS” and locate “ProSeries 2013”. Click on “2013 ProSeries”. The software will appear on the screen.
CREATING CLIENT/INPUTTING DATA
Click on “New” to create a new client. You will select the type of Income Tax Return. Choose the Income Tax Return for which of the three (3) options that you choose to prepare an Income Tax Return. After selecting a type of Income Tax Return, the first document that you will enter (automatically appears on the screen) will be the “Information Worksheet” (preceded by the name of type of Return chosen, ie. Partnership, etc.). Complete all necessary information on the “Information Worksheet”. To enter specific tax related information, you must enter the form, schedule or document that relate to the tax related information you wish to enter. Much of the information will be entered on the forms labeled page 1 2. To go to a specific Form or document, you may either click on “Forms” (and then click on “Select Form”), hit the “F6” key or hit “Control F” then highlight the desired Form, Schedule or document (or press the lighted letter(s) and/or number(s) of the desired Form, Schedule or document) and press return (enter).
WORKSHEETS
In many cases, information may (or must) be entered into a worksheet which is automatically transferred to where needed in the respective Income Tax Returns. This is especially true for Form 1065 (Partnership Return) for entering information on partners, etc. Accordingly, pay attention to the many worksheets that are available for the Return you are preparing to see if certain information may (or must) be entered through a worksheet instead of directly in the Forms and/or Schedules of the Income Tax Return itself.
DEPRECIATION
To enter depreciation information, either click on “Forms” (and then click on “Select Form”), hit the “F6” key or hit “Control F” and enter the “Depr Entry Wks”. Enter a description of the asset to be depreciated and press return (enter). Highlight the Form or Schedule the asset relates to (for Partnerships and S Corporations) and press return (enter). Complete the necessary information at the top of the “Asset Entry Worksheet”. The computed depreciation will automatically be transferred to the appropriate Form or Schedule that the asset relates. (If the Form or Schedule that the asset relates has not been previously created (for Partnerships and S Corporations), you will be asked to create the Form or Schedule at this time).
PRINTING
To access the print commands, press “Control P” and click on “Tax Returns” then press return (enter) to print the entire Tax Return. If you desire to print one (1) Form or Schedule at a time, click on the printer on the tool bar with the red arrow, then click on “Choose” and select the desired Form or Schedule to print.
DEFAULT SETTINGS
DO NOT ALTER ANY OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
CORPORATION INCOME TAXATION
SPRING SEMESTER 2014
INCOME TAX PROJECT
Project 1
FACTS
Valerie Lawson and Clara Norman are the sole equal shareholders in the corporation of Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. The corporation, which is a retail office supplies and stationery store, began its operations on January 2, 1985 (also date of incorporation). For Federal Income Tax purposes, the corporation is a calendar year taxpayer and uses the Accrual Method Of Accounting. Its Employer Identification Number is 76 1234567, address is 4369 Robbie Lane Houston, Texas 77026 3915, telephone number is (281) 479 8132, fax number is (281) 567 9024 and E Mail address is “lawsonandnormanenterprises.com”. The business activity code for the corporation is 453210. Valerie Lawson is the president of the corporation and its contact person for Federal Income Tax purposes and Clara Norman is the secretary and treasurer of the corporation. Both are full time employees of the corporation devoting one hundred percent (100%) of their time to the business and each has an annual salary of $75,000. Valerie Lawson’s social security number is 234 56 7890 and her address is 8124 Annette Court Houston, Texas 77031 9475. Clara Norman has social security number of 890 12 3456 and her address is 2716 Nanette Drive Houston, Texas 77061 3459.
FINANCIAL INFORMATION
During the year of 2013, Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. reported the following Income and Expenses (including necessary accruals) for Financial Accounting purposes:
Gross Receipts $1,482,000
Sales Returns And Allowances 109,000
Purchases 510,000
Dividends Received From Stock (Not Qualified Dividends)
Investments In Less Than twenty percent (20%)
Owned United States (U. S.) Corporation 80,000
Interest Income:
Taxable Interest 18,000
Tax Exempt Interest 7,200
Salaries: Officers 150,000
Other Employees 108,000
Repairs And Maintenance 19,300
Rent Expense Office 84,000
Rent Expense Equipment 15,500
Payroll Taxes (Federal And State) 19,600
Interest Expense 25,200
Advertising Expense 44,500
Charitable Contributions 48,000
Legal And Professional Fees 28,800
Depreciation Expense 50,000 *
Utilities Expense 27,300
Employee’s Health Insurance Premiums 14,200
Entertainment Of Clients 5,000
Officers’ Life Insurance Premiums 14,400 **
1
* Based upon Straight Line Depreciation, a useful life of five (5) years and no salvage value for all assets (see specific assets below).
** Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. Is The Designated Beneficiary.
The Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. owns the following depreciable assets:
ASSET DESCRIPTION DATE ACQUIRED ORIGINAL COST
Automobile – 2012 Lexus 460 April 1, 2012 $ 50,000
(Five year Property)
Automobile – 2012 Cadillac Seville April 1, 2012 50,000
(Five year Property)
Furniture And Fixtures May 1, 2011 150,000
(Seven year Property)
Each automobile was used a total of 18,000 miles during the year of 2013 all which were business miles. The automobiles were not available for personal use during off duty hours and were used solely by Valerie Lawson and Clara Norman, who both have another vehicle available for personal use. For Federal Income Tax purposes, all of these assets are depreciated using the Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS). Section 179 Deduction was not elected in regards to any of these assets nor was Straight Line Depreciation used.
BALANCE SHEETS
The Balance Sheets (Financial Accounting) for the Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. at the beginning and ending of the year of 2013 are as follows:
ASSETS January 1 December 31
Cash $ 36,000 $ 84,000
Trade Notes And Accounts Receivable 96,000 90,000
Inventory (Valued At Cost) * 120,000 100,000
Marketable Securities Long Term 140,000 170,000
Depreciable Assets (And Land) 260,000 ** 260,000 **
Less: Accumulated Depreciation (65,000) (115,000)
Other Assets (Deposits) 12,000 12,000
TOTAL ASSETS $ 599,000 $ 601,000
======= =======
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Accounts Payable (Non Recourse) $ 96,000 $ 116,200
Federal Income Taxes Payable 8,600 ?
Notes Payable Short Term (Recourse) 16,000 24,000
Notes Payable Long Term (Recourse) 164,000 212,000
Common Stock 10,000 10,000
Retained Earnings (Unappropriated) 304,400 229,042
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY $ 599,000 $ 601,000
======= =======
* The rules of Section 263A of the Internal Revenue Code do not apply to the corporation.
** Includes $10,000 allocated to Land.
2
ESTIMATED TAX PAYMENTS
During 2013, Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. made the following estimated tax payments:
April 15, 2013 $30,000
June 17, 2013 $20,000
September 16, 2013 $20,000
December 16, 2013 $10,000
The 2012 Federal Income Tax liability for Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. was $76,800 and no overpayment of 2012 Federal Income Tax is being applied to the 2013 Federal Income Tax liability of Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc.
OTHER INFORMATION
Both shareholders of Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. are United States Citizens. Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. does not own directly or indirectly fifty percent (50%) or more of the voting stock in any other domestic corporation and the corporation is not a subsidiary in an affiliated group or a parent subsidiary controlled group. During the year of 2013, Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. paid cash dividends of $280,000 ($140,000 to each shareholder) and the corporation did not pay dividends in excess of the corporation’s Current Earnings And Profits and Accumulated Earnings And Profits. In addition, Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. is not a shareholder in any foreign corporation nor has any interest in or a signature or other authority over any financial account in a foreign country. Furthermore, during the year of 2013, the corporation did not receive a distribution from nor was a grantor of, or transferor to, a foreign trust. Moreover, Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. did not issue publicly offered debt instruments with original issue discount. Finally, the corporation had no Net Operating Losses (NOL’s) carryover from prior tax years.
REQUIRED
Prepare the C (Regular) Corporation Tax Return for the Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. for the tax year of 2013. The following Forms are needed to complete the Tax Return:
Form 1120
Form 1125 A
Form 1125 E
Schedule G
Form 4562
Form 4626
CHECK FIGURES
FORM 1120
INCOME (Page 1)
1. Total Income (Line 11): $941,000.
DEDUCTIONS (Page 1)
1. Charitable Contributions (Line 19): $36,566.
2. Depreciation (Line 20): $36,437. (Also Line 22 – Form 4562)
3. Total Deductions (Line 27): $611,903.
4. Taxable Income (Line 30): $273,097.
SCHEDULE M 1 (Page 5)
1. Net Income (Loss) Per Books (Line 1): $204,642.
2. Expenses Recorded On Books This Year
Not Deducted On This Return (Itemize) (Line 5): $41,897.
SCHEDULE M 2 (Page 5)
1. Balance At End Of Year (Line 8): $229,042.
CORPORATION INCOME TAXATION
SPRING SEMESTER 2014
INCOME TAX PROJECT
Project 2
FACTS
Valerie Lawson and Clara Norman are the sole equal shareholders in the corporation of Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. each owning one hundred (100) shares of common stock of the corporation. The corporation, which is a retail office supplies and stationery store, began its operations on January 2, 1985 (also date of incorporation). For Federal Income Tax purposes, the corporation is a calendar year taxpayer, uses the Accrual Method Of Accounting and, since its year of inception, properly elected and maintained the S Corporation status. Its Employer Identification Number is 76 1234567, address is 4369 Robbie Lane Houston, Texas 77026 3915, telephone number is (281) 479 8132, fax number is (281) 536 1908 and E Mail address is “lawsonandnormanenterprises.com”. The business activity code for the corporation is 453210. Valerie Lawson, who is the designated Tax Matters Person for the corporation, has social security number of 234 56 7890, her address is 8124 Annette Court Houston, Texas 77031 9475 and her telephone number is (832) 246 8015. Clara Norman has social security number of 890 12 3456, her address is 2716 Nanette Drive Houston, Texas 77061 3459 and her telephone number is (832) 623 5097.
FINANCIAL INFORMATION
During the year of 2013, the Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. reported the following Income and Expenses (including necessary accruals) for Financial Accounting purposes:
Gross Receipts $1,482,000
Sales Returns And Allowances 109,000
Purchases 510,000
Dividends Received From Stock (Not Qualified Dividends)
Investments In Less Than twenty percent (20%)
Owned United States (U. S.) Corporation 80,000
Interest Income:
Taxable Interest (Bank) 18,000
Tax Exempt Interest 7,200
Salaries: Valerie Lawson 75,000
Clara Norman 75,000
Other Employees 108,000
Repairs And Maintenance 19,300
Rent Expense Office 84,000
Rent Expense Equipment 15,500
Payroll Taxes (Federal And State) 19,600
Interest Expense (Trade Or Business Interest) 25,200
Advertising Expense 44,500
Charitable Contributions (“50%” Charities) 48,000
Legal And Professional Fees 28,800
Depreciation Expense 50,000 *
Utilities Expense 27,300
Employee’s Health Insurance Premiums 14,200
Entertainment Of Clients 5,000
Officers’ Life Insurance Premiums 14,400 **
1
* Based upon Straight Line Depreciation, a useful life of five (5) years and no salvage value for all assets (see specific assets below).
** Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. Is The Designated Beneficiary.
No additional capital contributions were made during the year of 2013 and each shareholder made a total of $140,000 (all cash) withdrawals throughout the course of the year of 2013.
The Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. owns the following depreciable assets:
ASSET DESCRIPTION DATE ACQUIRED ORIGINAL COST
Automobile – 2012 Lexus 460 April 1, 2012 $ 50,000
(Five year Property)
Automobile – 2012 Cadillac Seville April 1, 2012 50,000
(Five year Property)
Furniture And Fixtures May 1, 2011 150,000
(Seven year Property)
Each automobile was used a total of 18,000 miles during the year of 2013 all which were business miles. The automobiles were not available for personal use during off duty hours and were used solely by Valerie Lawson and Clara Norman, who both have another vehicle available for personal use. For Federal Income Tax purposes, all of these assets are depreciated using the Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS). Section 179 Deduction was not elected in regards to any of these assets nor was Straight Line Depreciation used.
BALANCE SHEETS
The Balance Sheets (Financial Accounting) for the Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. at the beginning and ending of the year of 2013 are as follows:
ASSETS January 1 December 31
Cash $ 36,000 $ 84,000
Trade Notes And Accounts Receivable 96,000 90,000
Inventory (Valued At Cost) * 120,000 100,000
Marketable Securities Long Term 140,000 250,000
Depreciable Assets (And Land) 260,000 ** 260,000 **
Less: Accumulated Depreciation (65,000) (115,000)
Other Assets (Deposits) 12,000 12,000
TOTAL ASSETS $ 599,000 $ 681,000
======= =======
LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Accounts Payable (Non Recourse) $ 96,000 $ 116,200
Notes Payable Short Term (Recourse) 24,600 24,000
Notes Payable Long Term (Recourse) 164,000 212,000
Capital Stock 10,000 10,000
Retained Earnings (Unappropriated) 304,400 *** 318,800
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND
SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY $ 599,000 $ 681,000
======= =======
* The rules of Section 263A of the Internal Revenue Code do not apply to the corporation.
** Includes $10,000 allocated to Land.
2
*** The beginning Retained Earnings (Unappropriated) balance was allocated to tax accounts of Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. as follows:
Accumulated Adjustments Account $286,800
Other Adjustments Account 17,600
OTHER INFORMATION
Both shareholders are United States citizens and the corporation does not own directly or indirectly fifty percent (50%) or more of the voting stock in any other domestic corporation. In addition, Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. was not a member of a controlled group that is subject to the provisions of Section 1561 of the Internal Revenue Code. During the year of 2013, the corporation had no interest in or a signature or other authority over any financial account in a foreign country. Furthermore, the corporation did not receive a distribution from, nor was the grantor of, or transferor to, a foreign trust during the year of 2013. The corporation has not filed nor is required to file Form 8264 Application For Registration Of A Tax Shelter and the corporation did not issue publicly offered debt instruments with original issue discount. Finally, no estimated tax payments were made during the tax year of 2013 by the corporation for itself or on behalf of any of the shareholders of the corporation.
REQUIRED
Prepare the S Corporation Tax Return for the Lawson And Norman Enterprises, Inc. for the year of 2013 and Schedule K 1 for both shareholders. The following Forms are needed to complete the Tax Return:
Form 1120S
Form 1125 A
Schedule K 1 (Form 1120S) (2)
Form 4562
CHECK FIGURES
FORM 1120S
INCOME (Page 1)
1. Total Income (Loss) (Line 6): $843,000.
DEDUCTIONS (Page 1)
1. Depreciation (Line 14): $36,437. (Also Line 22 – Form 4562)
2. Total Deductions (Line 20): $575,337.
3. Ordinary Income (Loss) (Line 21): $267,663.
SCHEDULE K (Page 2 Page 3)
1. Interest Income (Line 4): $18,000.
2. Ordinary Dividends (Line 5a): $80,000.
3. Charitable Contributions (Line 12a): $48,000.
4 Total Property Distributions (Including Cash) Other Than Dividends (Line 16d): $280,000.
5. Income (Loss) (Line 18): $317,663.
SCHEDULE M 1 (Page 4)
1. Net Income (Loss) Per Books (Line 1): $294,400.
2. Expenses Recorded On Books This Year
Not Included On Schedule K (Itemize) (Line 3): $30,463.
SCHEDULE M 2 (Page 4)
1. Balance At End Of Year (Line 8):
(a) Accumulated Adjustments Account: $308,400.
(b) Other Adjustments Account: $10,400.
SCHEDULE K 1 (Each) (Page 1)
1. Ordinary Income (Loss) From Trade Or Business (Line 1): $133,831.
2. Interest Income (Line 4): $9,000.
3. Ordinary Dividends (Line 5a): $40,000.
4. Charitable Contributions (Line 12): $24,000.
4
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given:
Railway Company A has 1,000 miles of track that extend from Location A to Location B. Railway Company A adopted the composite method of depreciation for its railroad infrastructure that includes track and ties. The assets on the beginning of2010 balance sheet (prepared at the end of 2009) currently are as follows:
Ties:
Original Cost—$13,000,000
Residual Value—$500,000
Depreciable Cost—$12,500,000
Estimated Life—20
Average Cost/Unit—1,000,000 ties at $13.00
Rails:
Original Cost—$20,000,000
Residual Value—$1,000,000
Depreciable Cost—$19,000,000
Estimated Life—40
Average Cost/Unit—800,000 rails at $25.00
The average cost per unit represents costs of the assets over their life. Railway Company A expects to replace 1/20 of the ties at a current cost per unit of $20.00 and1/40 of therails at a current cost of $50 during 2011.
Task:
Perform the following calculations using the provided template (see the “Group and Composite Depreciation Template” attachment below):
A. Calculate the depreciation expense for the year using the composite method for 2010 and 2011.
B. Management is considering depreciating the ties using the group method for 2011. Calculate the depreciation expense for the year on the ties using the group method and compute the group depreciation rate for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Obtain Under Armour’s 2009 10 K through the “Investor Relations” portion of their website. (Using a search engine, search for: Under Armour investor relations.) Once at the Investor Relations section of the website, look for “SEC Filings.” When you see the list of all the filings either filter for the “Annual Filings” or search for “10 K.” Another option is to go to http://www.sec.gov and click “Search for Company Filings” under “Filings & Forms.”
Required:
1. Look at the “Reserve for Uncollectible Accounts Receivable” heading to Note 2 (Summary of Significant Accounting Policies). Does Under Armour use the percentage of credit sales method or the aging method to estimate bad debt expense?
2. Looking at the same note, what was Under Armour’s allowance for doubtful accounts in 2009 and 2008?
3. Was a larger percentage of the gross accounts receivable considered uncollectible at December 31, 2008 or 2009?
4. Calculate Under Armour’s receivables turnover for 2008 and 2009 (Accounts Receivable, net, was $71,867 at December 31, 2007). (Note: Round answers to two decimal places.) If the industry average for receivables turnover is 24.78, how do you evaluate their efficiency with receivables?
5. Calculate Under Armour’s gross profit margin, operating margin, and net profit margin for 2008 and 2009. (Note: Round answers to two decimal places.)
6. If the industry average for gross profit ratio is 36.61 percent, what sort of strategy do you
think Under Armour is pursuing?
7. Evaluate the trend of Under Armour’s operating margin and net profit margin and relate the trend to the industry averages of 10.97 percent and 6.54 percent, respectively.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Yuli One Copters is in the business of designing and manufacturing helicopters for commercial, military and pleasure use.They are considering a $200 million upgrade to their production line for the Yuli Jumper—a two person helicopter with a payload of 300 pounds plus the two occupants.The potential cash flow is estimated at net revenues of $85 million per year for seven years.Recently, they were advised of potential patent infringement and to eliminate this problem they are considering buying a license. SohnCo will sell a license is good for two years of exclusive use of the patent.Yuli One Copters uses a corporate MARR of 18% and their risk free alternatives are 4%.The VP of Engineering at Yuli One Copters estimates market volatility in demand is 40%.The VP of Marketing estimates market volatility in demand at 35%.
1. 1.Since the VP’s trust you, they asked you to figure out the most they should pay for a license from SohnCo.Explain your answer in detail.
2. 2.Yuli One Copters is known to be aggressive in ignoring intellectual property claims.Imagine they just go ahead with the project as stated above without buying the license.Sometime in year 3 of 7, a court decision requires them to reimburse AllaCo $300 million.Because Yuli Copters has this strategy, they are tooled up to be in court and they incur minimal extra cost in defending their actions.They finally pay, however, at the end of year 4.How does this strategy work for them?Are they better off licensing or being aggressive?Explain your answer in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jan Martinelli, a junior in college, has been seeking ways to earn extra spending money. As an active sports enthusiast, Jan plays tennis regularly at the Naples Tennis Club, where her family has a membership. The president of the club recently approached Jan with the proposal that she manage the club’s tennis courts. Jan’s primary duty would be to supervise the operation of the club’s four indoor and 10 outdoor courts, including court reservations.
In return for her services, the club would pay Jan $300 per week, plus Jan could keep whatever she earned from lessons and the fees from the use of the ball machine. The club and Jan agreed to a one month trial, after which both would consider an arrangement for the remaining two years of Jan’s college career. On this basis, Jan organized Topspin. During April 2012, Jan managed the tennis courts and entered into the following transactions:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Knowledge of POM QM for Windows essential
Question 1
Frank’s machine shop operates 250 days per year. Frank sells 5,000 units per year of his most popular item, a specialty gear. The set up cost for this gear is £100 and the monthly unit cost of holding inventory is 1% of the production cost per unit, which is £50. The lead time is 10 days. When the gear is being produced, the shop can make 80 gears per day (
Hint: You should use the production model for inventory management.).
Complete the following:
- How many gears should be produced in each run and at what minimum cost?
- What is the cycle time?
- Find the reorder point.
- Draw a graph to depict inventory level against time and show on it the quantities found above. Also, what is the maximum inventory level?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| BANNER MANUFACTURING INC. |
|
| In your second interview with Mr. banner, you presented your well |
| prepared financial analysis of the Banner Manufacturing Company |
| along with a cash flow statement. Mr. Banner was indeed very |
| impressed with your personality and knowledge and consequently |
| offered you a position as a general manager for his company. |
|
| With a great deal of confidence and enthusiasm, you began your work |
| last week. After several days of hard work, you become familiar |
| with the general operations of the Company. In addition, you found |
| a copy of comparative financial statements for the first 12 months |
| of the operations (previous year). However, you were not able to find |
| reliable and useful information about the unit cost of the |
| Company’s products. |
|
| OPERATING DATA |
|
| Banner Company makes two products, X and Y. The manufacturing |
| operations take place in two producing departments, cutting and |
| assembly. The Company also has two service departments, general |
| factory and maintenance. These service departments provide services |
| to the cutting and assembly departments. |
|
| The general factory department handles all purchases and takes care of |
| the administrating matters. The maintenance department performs all |
| the maintenance works for the cutting and the assembly departments. |
|
| The Company uses material “A” for both products X and Y. Material |
| “B” is used only for product Y. |
|
| Due to the standardization and simplification of production, |
| unskilled workers have been used in the past year. The Company can |
| assign worker to either producing departments with minor training. |
| The material and labor requirements for the products are presented |
| in appendix C. |
|
| All sales of the Company are on credit. Approximately, half of the |
| customers take advantage of the cash discount and pay with in the |
| one month discount period. |
|
| PLANNING FOR SUCCESS |
|
| Having gathered the above information, you are very anxious to |
| utilize your intelligence and knowledge to improve the operations |
| of the Banner Company. You have realized that first you need to |
| determine the behavior of the Company’s various costs in order to |
| improve planning, cost control, and decision making. |
|
| REQUIREMENTS |
| |
| Determine the cost equations for factory overhead, advertising |
| expense, salary & commissions, bad debt expense, sales discount, |
| and purchasing expense by using a simple or multiple regression |
| model and the data presented in appendices C &D. |
| |:: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MA 24 40. NPV and Project Reevaluation with Taxes, Straight Line Depreciation.
In 2010, the Bayside Chemical Company prepared the following analysis of an investment proposal for a new manufacturing facility:
Predicted12%Present
Cash YearPresentValue
Inflowsof CashValueof Cash
(Outflows)FlowsFactorFlows
A BC(A) x (C)
Initial investment
Fixed assets…………………$(800,000)01.000$ (800,000)
Working capital………………(100,000)01.000(100,000)
Operations
Annual taxable income
Without depreciation…………300,0001 53.6051,081,500
Taxes on income
($300,000×0.34)………………(102,000)1 53.605(367,710)
Depreciation tax shield…………54,400*1 53.605196,112
Disinvestments
Site restoration………………….80,00050.567(45,360)
Tax shield of restoration
($80,000×0.34)…………………27,20050.56715,422
Working capital………………..100,00050.56756,700
Net present value of all cash flows………………………………………………………$36,664
Because the proposal had a positive net present value when discounted at Bayside’s cost of capital of 12percent, the project was approved; all investments were made at the end of 2011.
Shortly after production began in January 2012, a government agency notified Bayside of required additional expenditures totaling $200,000 to bring the plant into compliance with new federal emission regulations. Bayside has the option either to comply with the regulations by December 31, 2012, or to sell the entire operation (fixed assets and working capital) for $250,000 on December 31, 2012. The improvements will be depreciated over the next four year life of the plant using straight line depreciation. The cost of the site restoration will not be affected by the improvements. If Bayside elects to sell the plant, any book loss can be treated as an offset against taxable income on other operations. This tax deduction is an additional cash benefit of selling.
Required:
- Should bay side sell the plant or comply with the new federal regulations? To simplify calculations, assume that any additional improvements are paid for on December 31, 2012.
- Would Bayside have accepted the proposal in 2011 if it had been aware of the forthcoming federal regulations?
- Do you have any suggestions that might increase the projects net present value? (No calculations).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Phase 3 Discussion Board |
| Deliverable Length: |
1000 1250 words |
| Details: |
Primary Discussion Response is due by Wednesday (11:59:59pm Central), Peer Responses are due by Sunday (11:59:59pm Central).
In January 2011, JIM, purchased $350,000 of new MACRS (Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System) 5 year property in the United States. This equipment was placed in service May 1, 2011. JIM wants to take as much depreciation in 2011 as possible.
- Calculate the depreciation for 2011.
- If JIM had been located in a qualified enterprise zone, what would be the depreciation amount?
- Explain the depreciation method you used.
In addition, include the tax benefits (savings) for the first year and the present value of the total tax benefits for the entire 5 year period.
- Discuss how the tax benefits and present value would change if a different method of depreciation was used.
- Also, discuss when JIM would not choose to take as much depreciation as possible.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
In January 2011, JIM, purchased $350,000 of new MACRS (Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System) 5 year property in the United States. This equipment was placed in service May 1, 2011. JIM wants to take as much depreciation in 2011 as possible.
- Calculate the depreciation for 2011.
- If JIM had been located in a qualified enterprise zone, what would be the depreciation amount?
- Explain the depreciation method you used.
In addition, include the tax benefits (savings) for the first year and the present value of the total tax benefits for the entire 5 year period.
- Discuss how the tax benefits and present value would change if a different method of depreciation was used.
- Also, discuss when JIM would not choose to take as much depreciation as possible.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following exercise needs to be answered according to Australian Accounting Standards Board legislation and must contain between 800 1000 words.
You are working as an accountant for Balfour Rose Bryant and the senior partner has asked you to prepare a report answering the following questions about consolidation procedures for a client:
Beda Ltd has a 28% interest in the share capital of Haven Ltd, which is a company involved in the same industry as Beda Ltd. The remaining share capital is owned by Mr and Mrs Wournos who are the founders of Haven Ltd. Mr and Mrs Wournos have given Beda Ltd three out of five seats available on the board of directors. Beda Ltd takes the lead on all decisions but the business is closely monitored by Mr and Mrs Wournos who hold the other two board positions.
Advise the directors of Beda Ltd of the requirements of AASB 127 in respect of the control criterion and how they would apply to this investment.
Why is it necessary to make adjustments for intra group transactions?
As the majority of the directors do not have an accounting background, your report answering the questions must be written to convey a clear understanding of consolidation accounting concepts (control vs significant influence) and other relevant accounting issues.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Markus Company’s common stock sold for $2.75 per share at the end of this year. The company paid preferred stock dividends totaling $4,400 and a common stock dividend of $0.55 per share this year. It also provided the following data excerpts from this year’s financial statements: Ending Balance Beginning Balance Cash $ 35,000 $ 30,000 Accounts receivable $ 60,000 $ 50,000 Inventory $ 55,000 $ 60,000 Current assets $ 150,000 $ 140,000 Total assets $ 450,000 $ 460,000 Current liabilities $ 60,000 $ 40,000 Total liabilities $ 130,000 $ 120,000 Preferred stock $ 40,000 $ 40,000 Common stock, $1 par value $ 80,000 $ 80,000 Total stockholders’ equity $ 320,000 $ 340,000 Total liabilities and stockholders’s equity $ 450,000 $ 460,000 This Year Sales (all on account) $ 700,000 Cost of goods sold $ 400,000 Gross margin $ 300,000 Net operating income $ 140,000 Interest expense $ 8,000 Net income $ 92,400 1 what is the earnings per share? 2 what is the price earnings ratio? 3 what is the dividend payout ratio? 4.what is the dividend yield ratio? 5.what is the return on total assets (assuming a 30% tax rate)? 6.what is the return on common stockholders’ equity? 7.what is the book value per share at the end of this year? 8.what is the amount of working capital and the current ratio at the end of this year? 9.what is the acid test ratio at the end of this year? 10.what is the accounts receivable turnover? 11.what is the average sale period? 12.what is the inventory turnover? 13.what is the average sale period? 14.what is the time interest earned ratio? 15.what is the debt to equity ratio at the end of this year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Three Stage FCFF Valuation Model with Declining Growth in Stage 2.
Charles Jones is evaluating Marathon Oil Company (NYSE: MRO) using a threestage growth model. He has accumulated the following information:
Current FCFF = $745 million
Outstanding shares = 309.39 million
Equity beta = 0.90, risk free rate = 5.04 percent, and equity risk premium = 5.5 percent
Cost of debt = 7.1 percent
Marginal tax rate = 34 percent
Capital structure = 20 percent debt, 80 percent equity
Long term debt = $1.5 18 billion
Growth rate of FCFF =
8.8 percent annually in Stage 1, Years 1 4
7.4 percent in Year 5,6.0 percent in Year 6,4.6 percent in Year 7
3.2 percent in Year 8 and thereafter
Using the information that Jones has accumulated, estimate the following:
1. WACC
2. Total value of the firm
3. Total value of equity
4. Value per share
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting EPS for Nonrecurring Items.
You are calculating a trailing PIE for American Electric Power (NYSE: AEP) as of 9 November 2001, when the share price closed at $44.50. In its fiscal year ended 31 December 2000, AEP recorded EPS of $0.83 that included an extraordinary loss of $0.1 1. Additionally, AEP took an expense of $203 million for merger costs during that calendar year, which are not expected to recur, and had unusual deficits in two out of four quarters. As of November 2001, the trailing twelve months’ EPS was $2.16, including three quarters in 2001 and one quarter in 2000. The fourth quarter of calendar year 2000 had $0.69 per share in nonrecurring expenses. Without making an adjustment for nonrecurring items, the trailing PIE was $44.50/$2.16 = 20.6. Adjusting for these items, you arrive at a figure for trailing EPS of $2.85 using an underlying earnings concept, and a trailing PIE of $44.501$2.85 = 15.6. This number is the PIE an analyst would use in valuation, being consistent in the treatment of earnings for all stocks under review. In the course of this chapter, we will illustrate adjustments to earnings in many examples.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating a Leading PIE Ratio (2).
In Example 4 2, we calculated a normalized EPS for Koninklijke Philips (NYSE:PHG) and a PIE based on normalized EPS. In this example, we compute leading PIES for PHG using alternative definitions. Table 4 3 presents PHG’s actual and forecasted EPS, which reflect a severe downturn in its Consumer Electronics division.
|
TABLE 4 3 Quarterly EPS for PHG (in US Dollars, excluding nonrecurrina items)
|
|
31 March
|
30 June
|
30 September
|
31 December
|
|
2001
|
0.08
|
(0.34)
|
(0.27)
|
E0.00
|
|
2002
|
E(0.05)
|
E0.010
|
E0.15
|
E0.03
|
On 8 November 2001, PHG stock closed at $25.72. PHG’s fiscal year ends on 31 December. As of 8 November 2001, solve the following problems using the information in Table 4 3:
1. Calculate PHG’s leading PIE based on the next four quarters of forecasted EPS.
2. Calculate PHG’s leading PIE based on a fiscal year definition and current fiscal year (2001) forecasted EPS.
3. Calculate PHG’s leading PIE based on a fiscal year definition and next fiscal year (2002) forecasted EPS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Leading PIE Based on Fundamental Forecasts (2).
Hyundai Motor Company Ltd (KSE: 05380.KS) manufactures and sells cars, trucks, and commercial vehicles. As of the beginning of February 2002, you are valuing Hyundai stock (which closed at Korean won 29,300 on that day). Using a spreadsheet free cash flow to equity model in which you have forecasted FCFE individually for 2002 and 2003, and valuing the final piece using a PIE, you obtain a FCFE value for the stock of KRW31,500. For ease of communication, you want to express your valuation in terms of a leading PIE based on forecasted year 2002 EPS of KRW4,446.
1. What is Hyundai’s justified PIE based on forecasted fundamentals?
2. State whether the stock appears to be fairly valued, overvalued, or undervalued, based on your answer to Problem 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relative Industry Valuation
In general, the U.S. pharmaceutical industry traded at a substantial premium to the market (S&P 500) in the years 1951 to 1993.19 In the early 1990s, the industry’s relative valhation was at its lowest level and priced at a discount to the market. Had the U.S. pharmaceutical industry prospects changed?
To some extent, the industry outlook had changed due to the prospect of U.S. health care reform and secular changes in the industry in the early 1990s. Nevertheless, stocks in this sector continued to rise dramatically through the year 2000. Recent S&P industry data indicate that as of 31 May 2001, the U.S. pharmaceutical industry was trading at an average PIE of 33.7 compared to an S&P 500 PIE of 25.1 once again, at a premium to the market.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuation Relative to Own Historical P/Es.
As of the beginning of 2001, you are valuing the Bank of Nova Scotia (TSE:BNS.TO), Canada’s fourth largest bank in terms of assets. You are investigating the method of comparables using BNS.TO’s five year average PIE as the benchmark value of the multiple. Table 4 8 presents the data.
|
TABLE 4 8 Historical P/Es for BNS.TO
|
|
|
|
|
2000
|
1999
|
1998
|
1997
|
1996
|
Overall Mean
|
|
Average annual P/E
|
9.7
|
11.1
|
12.8
|
11.0
|
8.0
|
10.5
|
1. State a benchmark value for BNS.TO’s PIE.
2. Given 2000 EPS of CAD3.55, calculate a justified price for BNS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Practices (1).
Analysts label stock markets as bubbles when market prices appear to lose contact with intrinsic value. The run up of the prices of Internet stocks in U.S. markets in the 1998 2000 period, in the view of many, represented a bubble. During this period, many analysts adopted PIS as a metric for valuing Internet stocks with negative earnings and cash flow. Perhaps at least partly as a result of this practice, some Internet companies engaged in questionable revenue recognition practices to justify their high valuations. In order to increase sales, some companies engaged in activities such as bartering Web site advertising with other Internet companies. For example, Internet Revenue.com might barter $1,000,000 worth of banner advertising with RevenueIsUs.com. Each would show $1,000,000 of revenue and $1,000,000 of expense. Although neither had any net income or cash flow, each company’s revenue growth and market valuation was enhanced (at least temporarily). The value placed on the advertising was also questionable. As a result of these and other questionable activities, the U.S. SEC issued a stern warning to companies. International accounting standard setters have begun a study to define revenue recognition principles. The analyst should review footnote disclosures to assess whether the company may be recognizing revenue prematurely or otherwise aggressively.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Practices (2).
Sales on a bill and hold basis involve selling products but not delivering those products until a later date.42 Sales on this basis have the effect of accelerating sales into an earlier reporting period. The following is a case in point. In its Form 10K filed 6 March 1998, for fiscal year ended 28 December 1997, Sunbeam Corporation listed the following footnote:
1. Operations and Signijicant Accounting Policies Revenue RecognitionThe Company recognizes revenues from product sales principally at the time of shipment to customers. In limited circumstances, at the customer’s request the Company may sell seasonal product on a bill and hold basis provided that the goods are completed, packaged and ready for shipment, such goods are segregated and the risks of ownership and legal title have passed to the customer. The amount of such bill and hold sales at
29 December 1997 was approximately 3 percent of consolidated revenues. Net sales are comprised of gross sales less provisions for expected customer returns, discounts, promotional allowances and cooperative advertising.
After internal and SEC investigations, the company restated its financial results, including a restated revenue recognition policy:
Revenue RecognitionThe Company recognizes sales and related cost of goods sold from product sales when title passes to the customers which is generally at the time of shipment. Net sales is comprised of gross sales less provisions for estimated customer returns, discounts, promotional allowances, cooperative advertising allowances and costs incurred by the Company to ship product to customers. Reserves for estimated returns are established by the Company concurrently with the recognition of revenue. Reserves are established based on a variety of factors, including historical return rates, estimates of customer inventory levels, the market for the product and projected economic conditions. The Company monitors these reserves and makes adjustment to them when management believes that actual returns or costs to be incurred differ from amounts recorded. In some situations, the Company has shipped product with the right of return where the Company is unable to reasonably estimate the level of returns andlor the sale is contingent upon the resale of the product. In these situations, the Company does not recognize revenue upon product shipment, but rather when it is reasonably expected the product will not be returned.
The company had originally reported revenue of $1,168,182,000 for the fiscal year ended 31 December 1997. After restatement, the company reported revenue of $1,073,000,000 for the same period a more than 8 percent reduction in revenue.
The analyst reading the footnote in the original report would have noted the billand hold practices and reduced revenue by 3 percent. This company engaged in other accounting practices tending to inflate revenue, which did not come to light until the investigation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Justified P/S Based on Forecasted Fundamentals.
As an automobile analyst, you are valuing the stocks of three automobile manufacturers including General Motors (NYSE: GM) as of the end of 2001. You estimate that GM’s required rate of return is 11 percent based on an average of a capital asset pricing model (CAPM) estimate and a bond yield plus risk premium estimate. Your other forecasts are as follows:
long term profit margin = 3.5 percent,
dividend payout ratio = 30 percent, and
earnings growth rate = 5 percent.
Although you forecast that GM’s profit margin for 2001 will be 1 percent, you recognize that 2001 was a year of economic contraction. A profit margin of 3.5 percent is close to GM’s long term average, and an earnings growth rate of 5 percent is close to the median analyst forecast, according to First CallI Thomson Financial. As a first estimate of GM’s justified PIS based on forecasted fundamentals, you decide to use Equation 4 4.
1. Based on the above data, calculate GM’s justified PIS.
2. Given an estimate of GM’s sales per share for 2001 of $295, what is the intrinsic value of GM stock?
3. Given a market price for GM of $53 as of 6 December 2001, and your answer to Problem 2, state whether GM stock appears to be fairly valued, overvalued, or undervalued.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting Methods and Cash Flow.
One approximation of cash flow in practical use is EPS plus depreciation, amortization, and depletion. Even this simple approximation can point to issues of interest to the analyst in valuation, as this stylized illustration shows. Hypothetical companies A and B have constant cash revenues and cash expenses (as well as a constant number of shares outstanding) in 2000, 2001, and 2002. Company A incurs total depreciation of $15.00 per share during the three year period, which it spreads out evenly (straight line depreciation, SLD). Because revenues, expenses, and depreciation are constant over the period, EPS for Business A is also constant, say at $10, as given in Column 1 in Table 4 14. Business B is identical to Business A except that it uses accelerated depreciation: Depreciation is 150 percent of SLD in 2000, declining to 50 percent of SLD in 2002, as given in Column 5. (We assume both A and B use the same depreciation method for tax purposes.)
|
Earning Growth Rates and Cash Flow (all amounts per share)
|
|
Company A
|
Company B
|
|
Year
|
Earnings (1)
|
Depreciation (2)
|
Cash Flow (3)
|
Earnings (4)
|
Depreciation (5)
|
Cash Flow (6)
|
|
2000
|
$10.00
|
$5.00
|
$15.00
|
$7.50
|
$7.50
|
$15.00
|
|
200 1
|
$10.00
|
$5.00
|
$15.00
|
$10.00
|
$5.00
|
$15.00
|
|
2002
|
$10.00
|
$5.00
|
$15.00
|
$12.50
|
$2.50
|
$15.00
|
|
Sum
|
$15.00
|
|
Sum
|
$15.00
|
|
Because of different choices in how Company A and B depreciate for financial reporting purposes, Company A’s EPS is flat at $10.00 (Column 1) whereas Company B’s shows 29 percent compound growth, ($12.50/$7.50)1/2 1.00 = 0.29 (Column 4). Company B shows apparent positive earnings momentum. As analysts comparing Companies A and B, we might be misled using EPS numbers as reported (without putting EPS on a comparable basis). For both companies, however, cash flow per share is level at $15. Depreciation may be the simplest noncash charge to understand; write offs and other noncash charges may offer more latitude for the management of earnings. Hawkins (1998) summarizes many corporate accounting issues for analysts, including how accounting choices can create the effect of earnings momentum.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Price to Cash Flow and Comparables.
As a technology analyst, you have been asked to compare the valuation of Compaq Computer Corporation (NYSE: CPQ) with Gateway, Inc. (NYSE: GTW).56~One valuation metric you are considering is P/CF. information on PICF, PIFCFE, and selected fundamentals as of 16 April 2001.
|
A Comparison Between Two Companies (all amounts per share)
|
|
Current Price
|
Trailing CF per share
|
P/CF
|
Trailing FCFE per share
|
P/FCFE
|
Consensus Five Year Growth Forecast
|
Beta
|
|
CPQ
|
$17.98
|
$1.84
|
9.8
|
$0.29
|
62
|
13.4%
|
1 S O
|
|
GTW
|
$15.65
|
$1.37
|
11.4
|
$1.99
|
NM
|
10.6%
|
1.45
|
Using the information in Table 4 16, compare the valuations of CPQ and GTW using the PICF multiple, assuming that the two stocks have approximately equal risk.
CPQ is selling at a PICF (9.8) approximately 14 percent smaller than the PICF of GTW (1 1.4). We would expect on that basis that, all else equal, investors anticipate a higher growth rate for GTW. In fact, the consensus five year earnings growth forecast for CPQ is 280 basis points higher than for GTW. As of the date of the comparison, CPQ appears to be relatively undervalued compared with GTW, as judged by PICF. The information in Table 4 16 on FCFE supports the proposition that CPQ may be relatively undervalued. Positive FCFE for CPQ suggests that growth was funded internally; negative FCFE for GTW suggests the need for external funding of growth.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating Dividend Yield.
Dividend data for Ford Motor Company (NYSE: F).
|
Dividend Data for Ford Motor Company
|
|
Dividends per share
|
|
1Q:2002
|
$0.10
|
|
4Q:2001
|
$0.15
|
|
3Q:2001
|
$0.30
|
|
2Q:2001
|
$0.30
|
|
Total
|
$0.85
|
Given a price per share of $14.62, calculate the trailing dividend yield of Ford. The dividend rate is $0.10 X 4 = $0.40. The dividend yield is $0.40/$14.62 = 0.0274 or 2.7%. This percentage is the yield reported by Standard & Poor’s in a stock report on Ford Motor Company dated 16 February 2002.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dividend Yield Comparables.
William Leiderman is a portfolio manager for a U.S. pension fund’s domestic equity portfolio. The portfolio is exempt from taxes, so any differences in the taxation of dividends and capital gains are not relevant. Leiderman’s client has a high current income requirement. Leiderman is considering the purchase of utility stocks for the fund as of early April 2002. He has narrowed down his selection to three large cap utilities serving the southeastern United States, given in Table 4 20.
|
Using Dividend Yield to Compare Stocks
|
|
Company
|
Consensus Forecast Growth
|
Beta
|
Dividend Yield
|
|
Florida Power and Light (NYSE: FPL)
|
6.95%
|
0.13
|
3.7%
|
|
Progress Energy (NYSE: PGN)
|
6.79%
|
0.09
|
4.4%
|
|
Southern Company (NYSE: SO)
|
5.44%
|
0.06
|
4.7%
|
All of the securities exhibit similar and low market risk. Although Southern Company has the highest dividend yield, it also has the lowest expected growth rate. Leiderman determines that Progress Energy provides the greatest combination of dividend yield and growth, amounting to 11.19 percent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relative Strength in Relation to an Equity Index.
Shows the values of the utility and the finance components of the NYSE Common Stock Indexes for the end of each of 12 months from November 2000 through October 2001. Values for the NYSE Composite Index are also given.
|
NYSE Indexes
|
|
Utility
|
Finance
|
Composite
|
|
November
|
434.95
|
592.35
|
629.78
|
|
December
|
440.54
|
646.95
|
656.87
|
|
January
|
442.5 1
|
641.37
|
663.64
|
|
February
|
406.01
|
603.76
|
626.94
|
|
March
|
394.69
|
585.48
|
595.66
|
|
April
|
421.41
|
604.65
|
634.83
|
|
May
|
406.49
|
625.1 1
|
641.67
|
|
June
|
376.61
|
626.65
|
621.76
|
|
July
|
370.92
|
616.58
|
616.94
|
|
August
|
346.92
|
585.54
|
597.84
|
|
September
|
340.74
|
549.41
|
543.84
|
|
October
|
323.46
|
543.16
|
546.34
|
We divide each industry index value by the NYSE Composite value for the same month and then scale those results so that relative strength for November 2001 equals 1.0.
|
Relative Strength lndicators
|
|
RSTR Utility
|
RSTR Finance
|
|
November
|
1.000
|
1.000
|
|
December
|
0.971
|
1.047
|
|
January
|
0.965
|
1.028
|
|
February
|
0.938
|
1.024
|
|
March
|
0.959
|
1.045
|
|
April
|
0.961
|
1.013
|
|
May
|
0.917
|
1.036
|
|
June
|
0.877
|
1.072
|
|
July
|
0.871
|
1.063
|
|
August
|
0.840
|
1.041
|
|
September
|
0.907
|
1.074
|
|
October
|
0.857
|
1.057
|
State the relative strength of utilities and finance over the entire time period November 2000 through October 2001. Interpret the relative strength for each sector over that period.
2. Discuss the relative performance of utilities and finance in the month of April 2001.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Calculation of Residual Income.
Axis Manufacturing Company, Inc. (AXCI), a very small company in terms of market capitalization, has total assets of €2,000,000 financed 50 percent with debt and 50 percent with equity capital. The cost of debt capital is 7 percent before taxes (4.9 percent after taxes) and the cost of equity capital is 12 percent.6 The company has earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) of €200,000 and a tax rate of 30 percent. Net income for AXCI can be determined as follows:
|
EBIT
|
€200,000
|
|
Less: Interest Expense
|
70,000
|
|
Pretax Income
|
€130,000
|
|
Less: Income Tax Expense
|
39,000
|
|
Net Income
|
€9 1,000
|
With earnings of €91,000, AXCI is clearly profitable in an accounting sense. But was the company profitable enough to satisfy its owners? Unfortunately, it was not. To incorporate the cost of equity capital, we compute residual income. One approach to calculating residual income is to deduct an equity charge (the estimated cost of equity capital in money terms) from net income. We compute the equity charge as follows:
Equity charge = Equity capital X Cost of equity capital in percent
= €1,000,000 x 12% = €120,000.
As stated, residual income is equal to net income minus the equity charge:
|
Net Income
|
€9 1,000
|
|
Equity Charge
|
120,000
|
|
Residual Income
|
€(29,000)
|
AXCI did not earn enough to cover the cost of equity capital. As a result, it has negative residual income. Although AXCI is profitable in an accounting sense, it is not profitable in an economic sense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Per Share Residual lncome Forecasts.
David Smith is evaluating the expected residual income for Scottish Power (London Stock Exchange: SPW). Smith determines that SPW has a required rate of return of 8 percent. He obtains the following data from Thomson Financial as of 4 March 2002:
|
Current market price:
|
GBP4.00
|
|
Book value per share:
|
GBP3.41
|
|
Consensus annual earnings estimates
|
|
March 2002:
|
GBP0.33
|
|
March 2003:
|
GBP0.39
|
|
Annualized dividend per share:
|
GBP0.26
|
What is the forecast residual income for fiscal years ended March 2002 and March 2003?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuing a Company Using the General Residual Income Model.
Robert Sumargo, an equity analyst, is considering the valuation of Dell Computer (NYSE: DELL), which closed on 19 April 2002 at $27.34. Sumargo notes that DELL has had very high ROE in the past 10 years and that consensus analyst forecasts for EPS for fiscal years ending in January 2003 and 2004 reflect expected ROEs of 50 percent and 48 percent, respectively. Sumargo xpects that high ROEs may not be sustainable in the future. Sumargo often takes a present value approach to valuation. As of the date of the valuation, DELL does not pay dividends; although a discounted dividend valuation is possible, Sumargo does not feel confident about predicting the date of dividend initiation. He decides to apply the residual income model to value DELL, using the following data and assumptions:
According to the capital asset pricing model (CAPM), DELL has a required rate of return of 14 percent.
DELL’S book value per share at 1 February 2002 was $1.78.
ROE is expected to be 50 percent for fiscal year end January 2003. Because of competitive pressures, Sumargo expects ROE to decline by 2 percent each year thereafter until it reaches the CAPM required rate of return.
DELL does not currently pay a dividend. Sumargo does not expect one to be paid in the foreseeable future, so that all earnings will be reinvested.
1. Compute the value of DELL using the residual income model.
2. After reviewing Sumargo’s valuation, a colleague points out that DELL has been issuing stock options to employees, which are not recorded as an expense, and repurchasing shares on the market to offset the dilutive impact of the stock options. These activities have resulted in a large decline in book value per share in recent years. At the same time, the colleague expects that the diminution of book value per share from the use of employee stock options will continue into the future. Discuss the potential impact on Sumargo’s estimate of value if the colleague is correct.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E centives, Inc.—Raising Capital in Switzerland
On October 3, 2000, E centives, incorporated in the United States, made an initial public offering on the Swiss Stock Exchange’s New Market. The company raised approximately US$40 million. E centive’s offering circular stated that no offers or sales of the company’s common stock would be made in the United States, and that there would be no public market for the common stock in the United States after the offering. The Swiss Exchange’s New Market.
The Swiss Exchange launched the New Market in 1999. The New Market is designed to meet the financing needs of rapidly growing companies from Switzerland and abroad. It provides firms with a simplified means of entry to the Swiss capital markets. Listing requirements for the New Market are simple. For example, companies must have an operating track record of 12 months, the initial public listing must involve a capital increase, and to ensure market liquidity, a bank must agree to make a market in the securities. with promotional offers based on their interests. At the time of the public offering, E centives maintained over 4.4 million e centives online accounts for members. The company does not charge members a fee for its service. Instead, the company generates revenue primarily from marketers whose marketing matter is delivered to targeted groups of E centives members. E centives currently employs more than 100 people in its Bethesda, Maryland headquarters, and its offices in Redwood City, New York, and Los Angeles.
As of the offering date, the company had little revenue and had not been profitable. Revenue for the year ended December 31, 1999, was US$740,000, with a net loss of about US$16 million. As of June 30, 2000, the company had an accumulated deficit of about US$39 million. E centives’ growth strategy is to expand internationally. To date, the company has focused on pursuing opportunities in the United States. E centives intends to expand into Europe and other countries. The company is currently considering expanding into Switzerland, the United Kingdom, and Germany.19
E centives
E centives, Inc. is a leading online direct marketing infrastructure company. The company offers systems and technologies that enable businesses to build large, rich databases of consumer profiles and interests. In return, consumers receive a free personalized service that provides them
Required
1. Refer to Exhibit 1 8, which lists factors relevant for choosing an overseas market for listing or raising capital. Which factors might have been relevant in E centives’ decision to raise capital and list on the Swiss Exchange’s New Market?
2. Why do you believe E centives chose not to raise public equity in the United States? What are the potential drawbacks related to E centives’ decision not to raise capital in the U.S. public markets?
3. What are the advantages and disadvantages to E centives of using U.S. GAAP?
4. Should the SWX Swiss Exchange require E centives to prepare its financial statements using Swiss accounting standards?
5. What are the listing requirements for the New Market? What are the financial reporting requirements?
Does E centives appear to fit the profile of the typical New Market company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Global Benchmarks: Infosys Technologies Limited
Investors, individual, corporate and institutional, are increasingly investing beyond national borders. The reason is not hard to find. Returns abroad, even after allowing for foreign currency exchange risk, have often exceeded those offered by domestic investments. Information provided in a firm’s annual report is often the major source of information available to those seeking to sample foreign equities. In attempting to assess the risk and return attributes of a given company, readers must answer questions such as the following: What accounting principles were employed? Should the financial statements be restated according to a different set of accounting principles to be more useful? What types of information are not provided that one would expect to find in financial statements of companies from the investor’s home country? How would one compensate for limited disclosure? What does the audit report reveal about the level of audit quality? What auditing standards were used? Are they acceptable? Does the audit report mean the same thing as it does in the reader’s home country?
The financial statements (including selected notes) and auditor’s report for Infosys Technologies Limited. Infosys was incorporated in 1981 as Infosys Consultants Private Limited, as a private company under the Indian Companies Act. Its name eventually evolved into Infosys Technologies Limited in 1992, when the company went public. Its mission is to provide high quality and cost competitive technology solutions for companies around the world. It has grown into a $5 billion company with a market capitalization in excess of $15 billion.
How the statements of Infosys stack up to other companies in the industry in meeting the information needs of a nondomestic investor such as yourself. Specifically, what reporting practices raise issues for you? What reporting practices do you find particularly helpful? In preparing your critique, compare the reporting practices of Infosys to a service provider in your country, most of whom maintain corporate Web sites on the Internet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Are Classifications of Accounting Outmoded?
Consider the following statements by David Cairns, former secretary general of the International Accounting Standards Committee.26
When we look at the way that countries or companies account for particular transactions and events, it is increasingly difficult to distinguish in a systematic way so called Anglo American accounting from Continental European accounting or American accounting from, say, German accounting.27
I am increasingly persuaded . . . that the distinction between Anglo American accounting and Continental European accounting is becoming less and less relevant and more and more confused. In reaching this conclusion, I do not dispute that different economic, social and legal considerations have influenced the development of accounting in different countries. I also do not dispute the fact that there have been, and still are, differences in the means by which different countries determine accounting requirements and the form of the resulting requirements. I do believe, however, that those who continue to favour these classifications are ignoring what is happening in the world and how companies actually account for transactions and events.
It is increasingly apparent that the different economic, social and legal considerations which have influenced national accounting do not necessarily result in different accounting and that countries are reaching the same answers irrespective of their different cultural backgrounds (or reaching different answers in spite of the similar cultural backgrounds). In fact, there are now probably far more similarities between American and German accounting than there are between American and British accounting.
There are many reasons for this not least the increasing practice of standard setting bodies and other regulators to share ideas and learn from one another. They do this in the IASC, the UN, the OECD, the EU, and such groupings as G4. This cross fertilization of ideas is not surprising because standard setting bodies in all countries are having to address the same accounting
problems.28
Required
1. Do you agree with Cairns’s assertion that classifications of accounting are simplistic and of little relevance in today’s world? Are attempts to classify accounting futile and outmoded? Why or why not?
2. Some observers contend that financial reporting is becoming more and more alike among “world class” companies—the world’s largest multinational corporations—and especially those listed on the major stock exchanges, such as London, New York, and Tokyo. What is the relevance of this contention for classifications of accounting, and what are the factors that would cause this to happen?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shrieves Casting Company is considering adding a new line to its product mix, and the capital budgeting analysis is being conducted by Sidney Johnson, a recently graduated MBA. The production line would be set up in unused space in Shrieves’s main plant. The machinery’s invoice price would be approximately $200,000, another $10,000 in shipping charges would be required, and it would cost an additional $30,000 to install the equipment. The machinery has an economic life of 4 years, and Shrieves has obtained a special tax ruling that places the equipment in the MACRS 3 year class. The machinery is expected to have a salvage value of $25,000 after 4 years of use.
The new line would generate incremental sales of 1,250 units per year for 4 years at an incremental cost of $100 per unit in the first year, excluding depreciation. Each unit can be sold for $200 in the first year. The sales price and cost are both expected to increase by 3% per year due to inflation. Further, to handle the new line, the firm’s net working capital would have to increase by an amount equal to 12% of sales revenues. The firm’s tax rate is 40%, and its overall weighted average cost of capital is 10%.
a. Define “incremental cash flow.”
(1) Should you subtract interest expense or dividends when calculating project cash flow?
(2) Suppose the firm had spent $100,000 last year to rehabilitate the production line site. Should this be included in the analysis? Explain.
(3) Now assume the plant space could be leased out to another firm at $25,000 per year.
Should this be included in the analysis? If so, how?
(4) Finally, assume that the new product line is expected to decrease sales of the firm’s other lines by $50,000 per year. Should this be considered in the analysis? If so, how?
b. Disregard the assumptions in part a. What is Shrieves’s depreciable basis? What are the annual depreciation expenses?
c. Calculate the annual sales revenues and costs (other than depreciation). Why is it important to include inflation when estimating cash flows?
d. Construct annual incremental operating cash flow statements.
e. Estimate the required net working capital for each year and the cash flow due to investments in net working capital.
f. Calculate the after tax salvage cash flow.
g. Calculate the net cash flows for each year. Based on these cash flows, what are the project’s NPV, IRR, MIRR, PI, payback, and discounted payback? Do these indicators suggest that the project should be undertaken?
h. What does the term “risk” mean in the context of capital budgeting; to what extent can risk be quantified; and, when risk is quantified, is the quantification based primarily on statistical analysis of historical data or on subjective, judgmental estimates?
i. (1) What are the three types of risk that are relevant in capital budgeting?
(2) How is each of these risk types measured, and how do they relate to one another?
(3) How is each type of risk used in the capital budgeting process?
j. (1) What is sensitivity analysis?
(2) Perform a sensitivity analysis on the unit sales, salvage value, and cost of capital for the project. Assume each of these variables can vary from its base case, or expected, value by ±10%, ±20%, and ±30%. Include a sensitivity diagram, and discuss the results.
(3) What is the primary weakness of sensitivity analysis? What is its primary usefulness?
k. Assume that Sidney Johnson is confident in her estimates of all the variables that affect the project’s cash flows except unit sales and sales price. If product acceptance is poor, unit sales would be only 900 units a year and the unit price would only be $160; a strong consumer response would produce sales of 1,600 units and a unit price of $240. Johnson believes there is a 25% chance of poor acceptance, a 25% chance of excellent acceptance, and a 50% chance of average acceptance (the base case).
(1) What is scenario analysis?
(2) What is the worst case NPV? The best case NPV?
(3) Use the worst , base , and best case NPVs and probabilities of occurrence to find the project’s expected NPV, as well as the NPV’s standard deviation and coefficient of variation.
l. Are there problems with scenario analysis? Define simulation analysis, and discuss its principal advantages and disadvantages.
m. (1) Assume Shrieves’s average project has a coefficient of variation in the range of 0.2 to 0.4. Would the new line be classified as high risk, average risk, or low risk? What type of risk is being measured here?
(2) Shrieves typically adds or subtracts 3 percentage points to the overall cost of capital to adjust for risk. Should the new line be accepted?
(3) Are there any subjective risk factors that should be considered before the final decision is made?
n. What is a real option? What are some types of real options?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume you have just been hired as a business manager of Pizza Palace, a regional pizza restaurant chain. The company’s EBIT was $50 million last year and is not expected to grow. The firm is currently financed with all equity, and it has 10 million shares outstanding. When you took your corporate finance course, your instructor stated that most firms’ owners would be financially better off if the firms used some debt. When you suggested this to your new boss, he encouraged you to pursue the idea. As a first step, assume that you obtained from the firm’s investment banker the following estimated costs of debt for the firm at different capital structures:
|
Percent Financed with Debt, wd
|
rd
|
|
0%
|
—
|
|
20
|
8.0%
|
|
30
|
8.5
|
|
40
|
10.0
|
|
50
|
12.0
|
If the company were to recapitalize, then debt would be issued and the funds received would be used to repurchase stock. Pizza Palace is in the 40% state plus federal corporate tax bracket, its beta is 1.0, the risk free rate is 6%, and the market risk premium is 6%. a. Provide a brief overview of capital structure effects. Be sure to identify the ways in which capital structure can affect the weighted average cost of capital and free cash flows.
b. (1) What is business risk? What factors influence a firm’s business risk?
(2) What is operating leverage, and how does it affect a firm’s business risk? Show the operating break even point if a company has fixed costs of $200, a sales price of $15, and variable costs of $10.
c. Now, to develop an example that can be presented to Pizza Palace’s management to illustrate the effects of financial leverage, consider two hypothetical firms: Firm U, which uses no debt financing, and Firm L, which uses $10,000 of 12% debt. Both firms have $20,000 in assets, a 40% tax rate, and an expected EBIT of $3,000.
(1) Construct partial income statements, which start with EBIT, for the two firms.
(2) Now calculate ROE for both firms.
(3) What does this example illustrate about the impact of financial leverage on ROE?
d. Explain the difference between financial risk and business risk.
e. What happens to ROE for Firm U and Firm L if EBIT falls to $2,000? What does this imply about the impact of leverage on risk and return?
f. What does capital structure theory attempt to do? What lessons can be learned from capital structure theory? Be sure to address the MM models.
g. What does the empirical evidence say about capital structure theory? What are the implications for managers?
h. With the preceding points in mind, now consider the optimal capital structure for Pizza Palace.
(1) For each capital structure under consideration, calculate the levered beta, the cost of equity, and the WACC.
(2) Now calculate the corporate value for each capital structure.
i. Describe the recapitalization process and apply it to Pizza Palace. Calculate the resulting value of the debt that will be issued, the resulting market value of equity, the price per share, the number of shares repurchased, and the remaining shares. Considering only the capital structures under analysis, what is Pizza Palace’s optimal capital structure?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the amount at risk of a credit loss in the following examples. You may wish to refer back to previous chapters to determine how to do these calculations.
A. A party goes long a forward contract on one euro denominated in dollars in which the underlying is the euro. The original term of the contract was two years, and the forward rate was $0.90. The contract now has 18 months to go. The spot rate is $0.862. The U.S. interest rate is 6 percent, and the euro interest rate is 5 percent.
The interest rates are based on discrete compounding/discounting. Determine the amount at risk of a credit loss and which party currently bears the risk.
B. Consider a plain vanilla interest rate swap with two months to go before the next payment. Six months after that, the swap will have its final payment. The swap fixed rate is 7 percent, and the upcoming floating payment is 6.9 percent. All payments are based on 30 days in a month and 360 days in a year. Two month LIBOR is 7.250 percent, and eight month LIBOR is 7.375 percent. Determine the amount at risk of a credit loss and which party currently bears the risk. Assume a $1 notional principal.
C. A party has sold an option on a stock for $35. The option is currently worth $46, as quoted in the market. Determine the amount at risk of a credit loss and which party currently bears the risk.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Competitive Analysis.
Veritas DGC Inc. (NYSE: VTS) is a provider of seismic data two or three dimensional views of the earth’s subsurface and related geophysical services to the natural gas and crude oil (petroleum) industry. Oil and gas drillers purchase such information to increase drilling success rates and so lower overall exploration costs.
According to Standard & Poor’s Corporation, VTS’s peer group is “Oil & Gas Geophysical Data Technologies” in Oil & Gas Equipment and Services. Competitors include WestemGeco, a joint venture of Schlurnberger Ltd. (NYSE: SLB) and Baker Hughes Inc. (NYSE: BHI); Petroleum Geo Services (NYSE: PGO) which in late 2001 announced plans to merge with VTS; Dawson Geophysical (Nasdaq NMS: DWSN); Compagnie Gknkrale de Gkophysique (NYSE: GGY); and Seitel, Inc. (NYSE: SEI).
1. Discuss the economic factors that may affect demand for the services provided by VTS and its competitors, and explain a logical framework for analyzing and forecasting revenue for these companies.
2. Explain how comparing the level and trend in profit margin (net income1 sales) and revenue per employee for the above companies may help in evaluating whether one of these companies is the cost leader in the peer group.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quality of Earnings Warning Signs.
Livent, Inc., was a publicly traded theatrical production company that staged a number of smash hits such as Tony award winning productions of Showboat and Fosse. Livent capitalized preproduction costs including expenses for pre opening advertising, publicity and promotion, set construction, props, costumes, and salaries and fees paid to the cast and crew musicians during rehearsals. The company then amortized these capitalized costs over the expected life of the theatrical production based on anticipated revenues.
I. State the effect of Livent’s accounting for preproduction costs on its reported earnings per share.
we will encounter the popular concept of EBITDA: earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization are added back to earnings). Some analysts use ratios such as EBITDAIinterest expense and debt1EBITDA to assess one aspect of a company’s financial strength, debt paying ability.
2. If an analyst calculated EBITDAIinterest expense and debt1EBITDA based on Livent’s accounting for preproduction costs without adjustment, how might the analyst be misled in assessing Livent’s financial strength?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Benjamin Graham on Accounting.
In a manuscript from 1936 (reprinted in Ellis 1991), Benjamin Graham pictures the chair of a major corporation outlining how his company will return to profitability in the middle of the Great Depression of the 20th century:
“Contrary to expectations, no changes will be made in the company’s manufacturing or selling policies. Instead, the bookkeeping system is to be entirely revamped. By adopting and further improving a number of modem accounting and financial devices the corporation’s earning power will be amazingly transformed.” The top item on the chair’s list gives a flavor of the progress that will be made: “Accordingly, the Board has decided to extend the write down policy initiated in the 1935 report, and to mark down the Fixed Assets from $1,338,552,858.96 to a round Minus $1,000,000,000 . . . As the plant wears out, the liability becomes correspondingly reduced. Hence, instead of the present depreciation charge of some $47,000,000 yearly there will be an annual appreciation credit of 5 percent, or $50,000,000. This will increase earnings by no less than $97,000,000 per annum.”
Summing up, the chair shares the foresight of the Board: “. . . [T]he Board is not unmindful of the possibility that some of our competitors may seek to offset our new advantages by adopting similar accounting improvements . . . Should necessity arise, moreover, we believe we shall be able to maintain our deserved superiority by introducing still more advanced bookkeeping methods, which are even now under development in our Experimental Accounting Laboratory.”
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intrinsic Value and Return Concepts (1).
As an automotive industry analyst, you are researching Fiat S.p.A. (Milan Stock Exchange: FIA.MI), a leading Italian headquartered automobile manufacturer. You have assembled the following information and assumptions as of late March 2002:
The current share price of FIA.MI is €15.895 (based on the closing price on 22 March 2002).
Your estimate of FIA.MI’s intrinsic value is €17.26.
Over the course of one year, you expect the mispricing of FIA.MI shares, equal to €17.26 €15.895 = €1.365, to be fully corrected. In addition to the correction of mispricing, you forecast additional price appreciation of €1.22 per share over the course of the year as well as the payment of a cash dividend of €0.6 1.
You estimate that the required rate of return on FIA.MI shares is 10.6 percent a year.
Using the above information:
1. State whether FIA.MI shares are overvalued, fairly valued, or undervalued, based on your forecasts.
2. Calculate the expected one year holding period return on FIA.MI stock.
3. Determine the expected alpha for FIA.MI stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intrinsic Value and Return Concepts (2).
As an active investor, you have developed forecasts of returns for three securities and translated those forecasts into expected rate of return estimates. You have also estimated the securities’ required rates of return using two models that we will discuss in the capital asset pricing model (CAPM) and the Fama French (FF) three factor model. As a next step, you intend to rank the securities by alpha.
|
TABLE 1 2 Rates of Return
|
|
Expected Rate of Return
|
CAPM Required Rate of Return
|
FF Required Rate of Return
|
|
Security 1
|
0.15
|
0.10
|
0.12
|
|
Security 2
|
0.07
|
0.12
|
0.07
|
|
Security 3
|
0.09
|
0.10
|
0.10
|
Based on the information in Table 1 2:
1. Calculate the exante alphas of each security.
2. Rank the securities by relative attractiveness using the CAPM, and state whether each security is overvalued, fairly valued, or undervalued.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asset Based Valuation.
Analysts often apply asset based valuation to natural resource companies. For example, a crude oil producer such as Petrobras (NYSE: PBR) might be valued on the basis of the market value of its current proven reserves in barrels of oil, minus a discount for estimated extraction costs. A forest industry company such as Weyerhauser (NYSE: WY) might be valued on the basis of the board meters (or board feet) of timber it controls. Today, however, fewer companies than in the past are involved only in natural resources extraction or production. For example,
Occidental Petroleum (NYSE: OXY) features petroleum in its name but also has substantial chemical manufacturing operations. For such cases, the total company might be valued as the sum of its divisions, with the natural resource division valued on the basis of its proven resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relative Valuation Models.
While researching Smithson Genomics, Inc., STH HI)’^ in the Healthcare Information Services industry, you encounter a difference of opinions. One analyst’s report claims that STHI is at least 15 percent overvalued, based on a comparison of its PIE with the median PIE of peer companies in the Healthcare Information Services industry and taking account of company and peer group fundamentals. A second analyst asserts that Srnithson is undervalued by 10 percent, based on a comparison of STHI’s PIE with the median PIE of the Russell 3000 Index, a broad based U.S. equity index. Both analyses appear to be carefully executed and reported. Can both analysts be right? Yes.
The assertions of both analysts concern relative valuations. The first analyst claims that STHI is relatively overvalued compared with its peers (in the sense of the purchase cost of a unit of earnings, PIE). Suppose that the entire Healthcare Information Services industry is substantially undervalued in relation to the overall market as represented by the Russell 3000. STHI could then also be relatively undervalued relative to the Russell 3000. Both analysts can be right because they are making relative valuations. Analysts ultimately care about the investment implications of their information. If the second analyst believes that the market price of the Russell 3000 fairly represents that index’s intrinsic value, then she might expect a positive alpha from investing in STHI, even if some other peer group companies possibly command higher expected alphas. In practice, the analyst may consider other factors such as market liquidity in relation to the intended position size. On the other hand, if the analyst thought that the overall market valuation was high, the analyst might anticipate a negative alpha from investing in STHI. Relative valuation is tied to relative performance. The analyst in many cases may want to supplement such information with estimates of intrinsic value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What Are Analysts Expected to Do?
When analysts at brokerage firms recommend a stock to the public that later performs very poorly, or when they fail to uncover negative corporate activities, they can sometimes come under public scrutiny. Industry leaders may then be asked to respond to such criticism and to comment on expectations about the role and responsibilities of analysts. One such instance occurred in the United States as a consequence of the late 2001 collapse of Enron Corporation, an energy trading company. In testimony before the U. S. Senate (excerpted below), the President and CEO of AIMR offered a summary of the working conditions and responsibilities of brokerage analysts. In the following passage, due diligence refers to investigation and analysis in support of a recommendation; the failure to exercise due diligence may sometimes result in liability according to various securities laws. “Wall Street analysts” refers to analysts working in the U.S. brokerage industry (sell side analysts).
What are Wall Street analysts expected to do? These analysts are assigned companies and industries to follow, are expected to research fully these companies and the industries in which they operate, and to forecast their future prospects. Based on this analysis, and using appropriate valuation models, they must then determine an appropriate fair price for the company’s securities.
After comparing this fair price to the current market price, the analyst is able to make a recommendation. If the analyst’s “fair price” is significantly above the current market price, it would be expected that the stock be rated a “buy” or “market outperform.”
How do Wall Street analysts get their information? Through hard work and due diligence. They must study and try to comprehend the information in numerous public disclosure documents, such as the annual report to shareholders and regulatory filings . . . and gather the necessary quantitative and qualitative inputs to their valuation models.
This due diligence isn’t simply reading and analyzing annual reports. It also involves talking to company management, other company employees, competitors, and others, to get answers to questions that arise from their review of public documents. Talking to management must go beyond participation in regular conference calls. Not all questions can be voiced in those calls because of time constraints, for example, and because analysts, like journalists, rightly might not wish to “show their cards,” and reveal the insights they have gotten through their hard work, by asking a particularly probing question in the presence of their competitors.
Wall Street analysts are also expected to understand the dynamics of the industry and general economic conditions before finalizing a research report and making a recommendation. Therefore, in order for their firm to justify their continued employment, Wall Street analysts must issue research reports on their assigned companies and must make recommendations based on their reports to clients who purchase their firm’s research.30
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating the Cost of Equity Using an APT Model.
You have estimated the factor sensitivities of Johnson & Johnson, Inc. common stock (NYSE: JNJ) on BIRR factors. These are given in Table 2 4, with the factor sensitivities of the S&P 500 for comparison.
|
TABLE 2 4 Factor Sensitivities in the BIRR Model
|
|
Risk Factor
|
JNJ Factor Sensitivity
|
S&P 500 Factor Sensitivities
|
|
Confidence risk
|
0.17
|
0.27
|
|
Time horizon risk
|
0.74
|
0.56
|
|
Inflation risk
|
0.15
|
0.37
|
|
Business cycle risk
|
1.16
|
1.71
|
|
Market timing risk
|
0.72
|
1 .OO
|
Using the factor risk premiums estimated by Burmeister et al. and with a T bill rate of 5 percent, calculate the required rate of return for JNJ using the multifactor model.
The required rate of return for JNJ is
r=5.00% + (0.17×2.59%) (0.74×0.66%) ( 0.15×4.32%) + (1.16×1.49%)+(0.72×3.61%)=9.93%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cost of Equity of IBM from Two Perspectives.
You are valuing the stock of International Business Machines Corporation (NYSE:IBM) as of December 21,2001, and you have gathered the following information:
|
20 year T bond yield to maturity:
|
5.8%
|
|
IBM 8.375s of 2019 yield to maturity:
|
6.238%
|
The IBM bonds, you note, are investment grade (rated A1 by Standard & Poor’s and A+ by Moody’s Investors Service). The beta on IBM stock is 1.24.
1. Calculate the cost of equity using the CAPM. Assume that the equity risk premium is 5.7 percent.
2. Calculate the cost of equity using the bond yield plus risk premium approach, with a risk premium of 3 percent.
3. Suppose you found that IBM stock, which closed at 121.45 on December 21, 2001, was slightly undervalued based on a DCF valuation using the CAPM cost of equity from Question 1. Does the alternative estimate of the cost of equity from Question 2 support the conclusion based on Question I?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuation Using the Gordon Growth Model (2).
As an analyst for a U.S. domestic equity income mutual fund, you are evaluating Connecticut Water Service, Inc. (Nasdaq NMS: CTWS) for possible inclusion in the approved list of investments. Not all countries have traded water utility stocks. In the United States, about 85 percent of the population gets its water from government entities. A group of investor owned water utilities, however, also supplies water to the public. CTWS is the parent company of three regulated water utility companies serving Connecticut and Massachusetts.
Because CTWS operates in a regulated industry providing an important staple to a stable population, you are confident that its future earnings growth should follow its stable historical growth record. CTWS’s return on equity has consistently come in close to the historical median ROE for U.S. businesses of 12.2 percent, reflecting the regulated prices for its product.
Estimated FY2001 and FY2002 EPS are $1.27 and $1.33 according to First Call/Thomson Financial, reflecting 4.7 percent growth. CTWS has a current dividend rate of $0.81. Although CTWS’s dividend payout ratio has been relatively stable (73 percent in 2000, 77 percent in 1999, 75 percent in 1998, 77 percent in 1997, and 78 percent in 1996), you conclude that CTWS has not followed an exact fixed payout dividend policy. CTWS has been conservative in reflecting earnings growth in increased dividends. Your forecast of dividends for FY2002 is $0.83 your nominal annual GDP growth estimate is 4 percent. Compared with a mean dividend payout ratio of 76 percent from 1996 2000, you expect a long term average dividend payout ratio of 70 percent going forward. You anticipate a 3.7 percent long term dividend growth rate. A recent price for CTWS is $30.00. You estimate CTWS’s cost of equity at 6.2 percent.
1. Calculate the Gordon growth model estimate of value for CTWS stock.
2. State whether CTWS appears to be overvalued, fairly valued, or undervalued based on the Gordon growth model estimate of value.
3. Justify the selection of the Gordon growth model for valuing CTWS.
4. CTWS’s beta is 0.16. Calculate the CAPM estimate of the cost of equity for CTWS. (Assume an equity risk premium of 5.7 percent. The risk free rate based on the long term T bond was also 5.7 percent as of the price quotation date.)
5. Calculate the Gordon growth estimate of value using the cost of equity from your answer to Question 4. Assuming that a price earnings ratio (PIE) of 24 based on estimated FY2002 EPS is an approximate guide to value, evaluate whether this Gordon growth estimate is plausible.
6. How does uncertainty in CTWS’s cost of equity affect your confidence in your answer to Question 2?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Finding the Expected Rate of Return for Varying Expected Dividends.
An analyst expects JNJ’s (Johnson & Johnson, from Example 2 4) current dividend of $0.70 to grow by 14.5 percent for six years and then grow by 8 percent into perpetuity. JNJ’s current price is $53.28. What is the expected return on an investment in JNJ’s stock?
In performing trial and error with the two stage model to estimate the expected rate of return, it is important to have a good initial guess. We can use the expected rate of return formula from the Gordon growth model and JNJ’s long term growth rate to find a first approximation: r = ($0.70 X 1.08)/$53.28 + 0.08 = 9.42%. Because we know that the growth rate in the first six years is more than 8 percent, the estimated rate of return must be above 9.42 percent. Using 9.42 percent and 10.0 percent, we calculate the implied price in Table 2 12:
|
TABLE 2 12 Johnson & Johnson
|
|
Ti me
|
Dt
|
Present Value of Dt and V6 at r = 9.42%
|
Present Value of Dt and V6 at r = 10.0%
|
|
1
|
$0.8015
|
$0.7325
|
$0.7286
|
|
2
|
$0.9177
|
$0.7665
|
$0.7584
|
|
3
|
$1.0508
|
$0.8021
|
$0.7895
|
|
4
|
$1.2032
|
$0.8394
|
$0.8218
|
|
5
|
$1.3776
|
$0.8783
|
$0.8554
|
|
6
|
$1 S774
|
$0.9191
|
$0.8904
|
|
7
|
$1.7035
|
|
|
|
6
|
|
$69.90
|
$48.0805
|
|
Total
|
|
$74.84
|
$52.9246
|
|
Market Price
|
$53.28
|
$53.28
|
The present value of the terminal value is V6/(1 + r)6 = [Dtl(r g)]/(l + r)6. For r = 9.42 percent, the present value is [1.7035/(0.0942 0.08)]/(1.0942)6 = $69.90. The present value for other values of r is found similarly. Apparently, the expected rate of return is slightly less than 10 percent, assuming efficient prices.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Example Showing g = b X ROE.
In the year just ended, a company began with shareholders’ equity of $1,000,000, earned $250,000 net income, and paid dividends of $100,000. Its ROE is 25 percent and its retention rate is 60 percent. ‘The company begins the next year with $1,150,000 of shareholders’ equity because it retained $150,000. There are no additions to equity from an increase in shares outstanding.
If the company again earns 25 percent on equity in the next year, net income will be $287,500, which is a 15 percent increase. The increase in earnings is $287,500 $250,000 = $37,500. This is 15 percent above the previous year’s earnings of $250,000. The company retains 60 percent of earnings (60% X $287,500 = $172,500) and pays out the other 40 percent (40% X $287,500 =
$1 15,000) as dividends.
The formula for the dividend growth rate is g = b X ROE, which is g = 0.60 X 25% = 15%. Notice that dividends for the company grew from $100,000 to $1 15,000, which is exactly a 15 percent growth rate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the Constant Growth FCFF Valuation Model.
Cagiati Enterprises has FCFF of 700 million Swiss francs (CHF) and FCFE of CHF620 million. Cagiati’s before tax cost of debt is 5.7 percent and its required rate of return for equity is 11.8 percent. The company expects a target capital structure consisting of 20 percent debt financing and 80 percent equity financing.
The tax rate is 33.33 percent, and FCFF is expected to grow forever at 5.0 percent. Cagiati Enterprises has debt outstanding with a market value of CHF2.2 billion and has 200 million outstanding common shares.
What is Cagiati’s weighted average cost of capital? What is the total value of Cagiati’s equity using the FCFF valuation approach? What is the value per share using this approach?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Further Examination of Noncash Charges.
Consider the following cash flow statement of Dell Computer (Nasdaq NMS:DELL) in order to forecast Dell’s future cash flows. The special charges relate to restructuring charges and purchased research and development expenses.
|
Years Ending
|
29 Jan 1999
|
28 Jan 2000
|
2 Feb 2001
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
$1,460
|
$1,666
|
$2,177
|
|
Adjustments to reconcile net income to
|
|
|
|
|
net cash provided by operating activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
103
|
156
|
240
|
|
Tax benefits of employee stock plans
|
444
|
1,040
|
929
|
|
Special charges
|
|
194
|
105
|
|
Gain on sale of investments
|
(9)
|
(80)
|
(307)
|
|
Other
|
20
|
56
|
109
|
|
Changes in:
|
|
|
|
|
Operating working capital
|
367
|
812
|
671
|
|
Non current assets and liabilities
|
51
|
82
|
271
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$2,436
|
$3,926
|
$4,195
|
How would you use the tax benefits of employee stock option plans, special charges, and the gain on sale of investments as noncash charges when using the add back method to calculate free cash flows starting from net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FCFF Valuation with Preferred Stock in the Capital Structure.
Welch Corporation uses bond, preferred stock, and common stock financing. The market value of each of these sources of financing and the before tax required rates of return for each are given below:
|
Market Value
|
Required Return
|
|
Bonds
|
$400,000,000
|
8.0%
|
|
Preferred stock
|
$100,000,000
|
8.0%
|
|
Common stock
|
$500,000,000
|
12.0%
|
|
Total
|
$1 ,000,000,000
|
|
Other financial information:
Net income available to common shareholders = $1 10,000,000
Interest expenses = $32,000,000
Preferred dividends = $8,000,000
Depreciation = $40,000,000
Investment in fixed capital = $70,000,000
Investment in working capital = $20,000,000
Net borrowing = $25,000,000
Tax rate = 30 percent
Stable growth rate of FCFF = 4.0 percent
Stable growth rate of FCFE = 5.0 percent
1. Calculate Welch Corporation’s WACC.
2. Calculate the current value of FCFF.
3. Based on forecasted FCFF, what is the total value of the firm and the value of equity?
4. Calculate the current value of FCFE.
5. Based on forecasted FCFE, what is the value of equity?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Two Stage FCFE Valuation Model with Declining Net Income Growth in Stage 1.
Vishal Noronha needs to prepare a valuation of Sindhuh Enterprises. Noronha has assembled the following information for his analysis. It is now the first day of 2003.
EPS for 2002 is $2.40.
For the next five years, the growth rate in EPS is given below. After 2007, the growth rate will be 7 percent.
|
Year
|
2003
|
2004
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Growth rate for EPS
|
30%
|
18%
|
12%
|
9%
|
7%
|
Net investment in fixed capital (net of depreciation) for the next five years are given below. After 2007, capital expenditures are expected to grow at 7 percent annually.
|
Year
|
2003
|
2004
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Net capital expenditure per share
|
3.000
|
2.500
|
2.000
|
1.500
|
1.000
|
The investment in working capital each year will equal 50 percent of the net investment in capital items.
Thirty percent of the net investment in fixed capital and investment in working capital will be financed with new debt financing.
Current market conditions dictate a risk free rate of 6.0 percent, an equity risk premium of 4.0 percent, and a beta of 1.10 for Sindhuh Enterprises.
1. What is the per share value of Sindhuh Enterprises on the first day of 2003?
2. What should be the trailing PIE on the first day of 2003 and the first day of 2007?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lift Jack Company, as shown in Illustration 17 3 (page 893) has seven activity cost pools and two products. It expects to produce 200,000 units of its automobile scissors jack and 80,000 units of its truck hydraulic jack. Having identified its activity cost pools and the cost drivers for each cost pool, Lift Jack Company accumulated the following data relative to those activity cost pools and cost drivers.
|
Annual Overhead Data
|
|
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Cost Drivers
|
Estimated Overhead
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Activity
|
Scissors Jacks
|
Hydraulic Jacks
|
|
Ordering and receiving
|
Purchase orders
|
$ 200,000
|
2,500 orders
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
|
Machine setup
|
Setups
|
600,000
|
1,200 setups
|
500
|
700
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
2,000,000
|
800,000 hours
|
300,000
|
500,000
|
|
Assembling
|
Parts
|
1,800,000
|
3,000,000 parts
|
1,800,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Inspecting and testing
|
Tests
|
700,000
|
35,000 tests
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
|
Painting
|
Parts
|
300,000
|
3,000,000 parts
|
1,800,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Supervising
|
Direct labor hours
|
1,200,000
|
200,000 hours
|
130,000
|
70,000
|
|
|
$6,800,000
|
|
|
Using the above data, do the following:
(a) Prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity based overhead rates per cost driver.
(b) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost to the two products.
(c) Compute the overhead cost per unit for each product.
(d) Comment on the comparative overhead cost per unit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spread well Paint Company manufactures two high quality base paints: an oil based paint and a latex paint. Both are house paints and are manufactured in neutral white color only. Sprea dwell sells the white base paints to franchised retail paint and decorating stores where pigments are added to tint (color) the paint as the customer desires. The oil based paint is made from, thinned, and cleaned with organic solvents (petroleum products) such as mineral spirits or turpentine. The latex paint is made from, thinned, and cleaned with water; synthetic resin particles are suspended in the water and dry and harden when
exposed to the air.
Spread well uses the same processing equipment to produce both paints in different production runs. Between batches, the vats and other processing equipment must be washed and cleaned.
After analyzing the company’s entire operations, spread well’s accountants and production managers have identified activity cost pools and accumulated annual budgeted overhead costs by pool as follows.
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Estimated Overhead
|
|
Purchasing
|
$ 240,000
|
|
Processing (weighing and mixing,
|
|
grinding, thinning and drying, straining)
|
1,400,000
|
|
Packaging (quarts, gallons, and 5 gallons)
|
580,000
|
|
Testing
|
240,000
|
|
Storage and inventory control
|
180,000
|
|
Washing and cleaning equipment
|
560,000
|
|
Total annual budgeted overhead
|
$3,200,000
|
Following further analysis, activity cost drivers were identified and their expected use by product and activity were scheduled as follows.
|
Expected Use of Drivers per Product
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Cost Drivers
|
Expected Cost Drivers per Activity
|
Oil Based
|
Latex
|
|
Purchasing
|
Purchase orders
|
1,500 orders
|
800
|
700
|
|
Processing
|
Gallons processed
|
1,000,000 gals.
|
400,000
|
600,000
|
|
Packaging
|
Containers filled
|
400,000 containers
|
180,000
|
220,000
|
|
Testing
|
Number of tests
|
4,000 tests
|
2,100
|
1,900
|
|
Storing
|
Avg. gals. on hand
|
18,000 gals.
|
10,400
|
7,600
|
|
Washing
|
Number of batches
|
800 batches
|
350
|
450
|
Spread well has budgeted 400,000 gallons of oil based paint and 600,000 gallons of latex paint for processing during the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Helena Company reports the following total costs at two levels of production.
|
10,000 Units
|
20,000 Units
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
17,000
|
34,000
|
|
Indirect materials
|
1,000
|
2,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
|
Utilities
|
3,000
|
5,000
|
|
Rent
|
6,000
|
6,000
|
Classify each cost as variable, fixed, or mixed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Byrnes Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using units produced as the activity level.
|
Units Produced
|
Total Cost
|
|
March
|
9,800
|
$14,740
|
|
April
|
8,500
|
13,250
|
|
May
|
7,000
|
11,100
|
|
June
|
7,600
|
12,000
|
|
July
|
8,100
|
12,460
|
(a) Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high low method.
(b) Estimate the total cost if the company produces 6,000 units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Garner Manufacturing Inc. sold 20,000 units and recorded sales of $800,000 for the first quarter of 2012. In making the sales, the company incurred the following costs and expenses.
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$250,000
|
$110,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
100,000
|
25,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
82,000
|
73,000
|
(a) Prepare a CVP income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2012.
(b) Compute the contribution margin per unit.
(c) Compute the contribution margin ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Krisanne Company reports the following operating results for the month of June.
|
KRISANNE COMPANY CVP Income Statement For the Month Ended June 30, 2012
|
|
Total
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales (5,000 units)
|
$300,000
|
$60
|
|
Variable costs
|
180,000
|
36
|
|
Contribution margin
|
120,000
|
$24
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
100,000
|
|
|
Net income
|
$ 20,000
|
|
To increase net income, management is considering reducing the selling price by 10%, with no changes to unit variable costs or fixed costs. Management is confident that this change will increase unit sales by 25%.
Using the contribution margin technique, compute the break even point in units and dollars and margin of safety in dollars,
(a) assuming no changes to sales price or costs, and
(b) assuming changes to sales price and volume as described above.
(c) Comment on your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manzeck Bicycles International produces and sells three different types of mountain bikes. Information regarding the three models is shown below.
|
Pro
|
Intermediate
|
Standard
|
Total
|
|
Units sold
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
25,000
|
40,000
|
|
Selling price
|
$800
|
$500
|
$350
|
|
|
Variable cost
|
$500
|
$300
|
$250
|
|
The company’s total fixed costs to produce the bicycles are $7,500,000.
(a) Determine the sales mix as a function of units sold for the three products.
(b) Determine the weighted average unit contribution margin.
(c) Determine the total number of units that the company must produce to break even.
(d) Determine the number of units of each model that the company must produce to break even.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carolina Corporation manufactures and sells three different types of high quality sealed ball bearings. The bearings vary in terms of their quality specifications—primarily with respect to their smoothness and roundness. They are referred to as Fine, Extra Fine, and Super Fine bearings. Machine time is limited. More machine time is required to manufacture the Extra Fine and Super Fine bearings. Additional information is provided below.
|
Product
|
|
Fine
|
Extra Fine
|
Super Fine
|
|
Selling price
|
$6.00
|
$10.00
|
$16.00
|
|
Variable costs and expenses
|
4.00
|
6.50
|
11.00
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$2.00
|
$ 3.50
|
$ 5.00
|
|
Machine hours required
|
0.02
|
0.04
|
0.08
|
(a) Ignoring the machine time constraint, what strategy would appear optimal?
(b) What is the contribution margin per unit of limited resource for each type of bearing?
(c) If additional machine time could be obtained, how should the additional capacity be used?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rex field Corp. is contemplating a huge investment in automated mass spectrometers for its medical laboratory testing services. Its current process relies heavily on the expertise of a high number of lab technicians. The new equipment would employ a computer expert system that integrates much of the decision process and knowledge base that is used by a skilled lab technician.
Rex Field, the company’s CEO, has requested that an analysis of projected results using the old technology versus the new technology be done for the coming year. The accounting department has prepared the following CVP income statements for use in your analysis.
|
Old
|
New
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,000,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
1,400,000
|
600,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
600,000
|
1,400,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
400,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 200,000
|
$ 200,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Justin and Andrea Doll Company produces and sells tennis balls. The following costs are available for the year ended December 31, 2012. The company has no beginning inventory. In 2012, 8,000,000 units were produced, but only 7,500,000 units were sold. The unit selling price was $0.50 per ball. Costs and expenses were:
|
Variable costs per unit
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$0.10
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.05
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
0.08
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses
|
0.02
|
|
Annual fixed costs and expenses
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$500,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
100,000
|
(a) Compute the manufacturing cost of one unit of product using variable costing.
(b) Prepare a 2012 income statement for Justin and Andrea Doll Company using variable costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Francis Corporation manufactures and sells three different types of water sport wakeboards. The boards vary in terms of their quality specifications—primarily with respect to their smoothness and finish. They are referred to as Smooth, Extra Smooth, and Super Smooth boards. Machine time is limited. More machine time is required to manufacture the Extra Smooth and Super Smooth boards. Additional information is provided below.
|
Product
|
|
Smooth
|
Extra Smooth
|
Super Smooth
|
|
Selling price
|
$60
|
$100
|
$160
|
|
Variable costs and expenses
|
50
|
75
|
130
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$10
|
$ 25
|
$ 30
|
|
Machine hours required
|
0.25
|
0.40
|
0.60
|
|
Total fixed costs: $234,000
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use this list of terms to complete the sentences that follow.
|
Long range planning
|
Participative budgeting
|
|
Sales forecast
|
Operating budgets
|
|
Master budget
|
Financial budgets
|
1. A shows potential sales for the industry and a company’s expected share of such sales.
2. are used as the basis for the preparation of the budgeted income statement.
3. The is a set of interrelated budgets that constitutes a plan of action for a specified time period.
4. identifies long term goals, selects strategies to achieve these goals, and develops policies and plans to implement the strategies.
5. Lower level managers are more likely to perceive results as fair and achievable under
a approach.
6. focus primarily on the cash resources needed to fund expected operations and planned capital expenditures.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Soriano Company is preparing its master budget for 2012. Relevant data pertaining to its sales, production, and direct materials budgets are as follows:
Sales: Sales for the year are expected to total 1,200,000 units. Quarterly sales, as a percent of total sales, are 20%, 25%, 30%, and 25%, respectively. The sales price is expected to be $50 per unit for the first three quarters and $55 per unit beginning in the fourth quarter. Sales in the first quarter of 2013 are expected to be 10% higher than the budgeted sales for the first quarter of 2012.
Production: Management desires to maintain the ending finished goods inventories at 25% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales volume.
Direct materials: Each unit requires 3 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $5 per pound. Management desires to maintain raw materials inventories at 5% of the next quarter’s production requirements. Assume the production requirements for the first quarter of 2013 are 810,000 pounds.
Prepare the sales, production, and direct materials budgets by quarters for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Midwest Division operates as a profit center. It reports the following for the year:
|
Budgeted
|
Actual
|
|
Sales
|
$1,500,000
|
$1,700,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
700,000
|
800,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
400,000
|
400,000
|
|
Noncontrollable fixed costs
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
Prepare a responsibility report for the Midwest Division for December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The service division of Metro Industries reported the following results for 2012.
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
320,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
40,800
|
|
Average operating assets
|
280,000
|
Management is considering the following independent courses of action in 2013 in order to maximize the return on investment for this division.
1. Reduce average operating assets by $80,000, with no change in controllable margin.
2. Increase sales $80,000, with no change in the contribution margin percentage.
(a) Compute the controllable margin and the return on investment for 2012.
(b) Compute the controllable margin and the expected return on investment for each proposed alternative.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glenda Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. For 2012, the master overhead budget for the Packaging Department based on 300,000 direct labor hours was as follows.
|
Variable Costs
|
Fixed Costs
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$360,000
|
Supervision
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Supplies and lubricants
|
150,000
|
Depreciation
|
24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
210,000
|
Property taxes
|
18,000
|
|
Utilities
|
120,000
|
Insurance
|
12,000
|
|
$840,000
|
|
$114,000
|
During July, 24,000 direct labor hours were worked. The company incurred the following variable costs in July: indirect labor $30,200, supplies and lubricants $11,600, maintenance $17,500, and utilities $9,200. Actual fixed overhead costs were the same as monthly budgeted fixed costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manlow Company makes a cologne called Allure. The standard cost for one bottle of Allure is as follows.
|
Standard
|
|
Manufacturing Cost Elements
|
Quantity
|
x Price
|
Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
6 oz.
|
x $ 0.90
|
$ 5.40
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.5 hrs.
|
x $12.00
|
6.00
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
0.5 hrs.
|
x $ 4.80
|
2.40
|
|
|
|
$13.80
|
During the month, the following transactions occurred in manufacturing 10,000 bottles of Allure.
1. 58,000 ounces of materials were purchased at $1.00 per ounce.
2. All the materials purchased were used to produce the 10,000 bottles of Allure.
3. 4,900 direct labor hours were worked at a total labor cost of $56,350.
4. Variable manufacturing overhead incurred was $15,000 and fixed overhead incurred was $10,400.
The manufacturing overhead rate of $4.80 is based on a normal capacity of 5,200 direct labor hours. The total budget at this capacity is $10,400 fixed and $14,560 variable.
Instructions
(a) Compute the total variance and the variances for direct material and direct labor elements.
(b) Compute the total variance for manufacturing overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Juanita Company must decide whether to make or buy some of its components. The costs of producing 166,000 electrical cords for its floor lamps are as follows.
|
Direct materials
|
$90,000
|
Variable overhead
|
$32,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$20,000
|
Fixed overhead
|
$24,000
|
Instead of making the electrical cords at an average cost per unit of $1.00 ($166,000 /166,000), the company has an opportunity to buy the cords at $0.90 per unit. If the company purchases the cords, all variable costs and one fourth of the fixed costs will be eliminated.
(a) Prepare an incremental analysis showing whether the company should make or buy the electrical cords.
(b) Will your answer be different if the released productive capacity will generate additional income of $5,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you have just been hired as a financial analyst by Triple Play Inc., a mid sized California company that specializes in creating high fashion clothing. Because no one at Triple Play is familiar with the basics of financial options, you have been asked to prepare a brief report that the firm’s executives can use to gain at least a cursory understanding of the topic. To begin, you gathered some outside materials on the subject and used these materials to draft a list of pertinent questions that need to be answered. In fact, one possible approach to the report is to use a question and answer format. Now that the questions have been drafted, you have to develop the answers.
a. What is a financial option? What is the single most important characteristic of an option?
b. Options have a unique set of terminology. Define the following terms:
(1) Call option
(2) Put option
(3) Strike price or exercise price
(4) Expiration date
(5) Exercise value
(6) Option price
(7) Time value
(8) Writing an option
(9) Covered option
(10) Naked option
(11) In the money call
(12) Out of the money call
(13) LEAPS
c. Consider Triple Play’s call option with a $25 strike price. The following table contains historical values for this option at different stock prices:
|
Stock Price
|
Call Option Price
|
|
$25
|
$ 3.00
|
|
30
|
7.50
|
|
35
|
12.00
|
|
40
|
16.50
|
|
45
|
21.00
|
|
50
|
25.50
|
(1) Create a table that shows
(a) stock price,
(b) strike price,
(c) exercise value,
(d) option price, and
(e) the time value, which is the option’s price less its exercise value.
(2) What happens to the time value as the stock price rises? Why?
d. Consider a stock with a current price of P = $27. Suppose that over the next 6 months the stock price will either go up by a factor of 1.41 or down by a factor of 0.71. Consider a call option on the stock with a strike price of $25 that expires in 6 months. The risk free rate is 6%.
(1) Using the binomial model, what are the ending values of the stock price? What are the payoffs of the call option?
(2) Suppose you write 1 call option and buy Ns shares of stock. How many shares must you buy to create a portfolio with a riskless payoff (i.e., a hedge portfolio)?
What is the payoff of the portfolio?
(3) What is the present value of the hedge portfolio? What is the value of the call option?
(4) What is a replicating portfolio? What is arbitrage?
e. In 1973, Fischer Black and Myron Scholes developed the Black Scholes option pricing model (OPM).
(1) What assumptions underlie the OPM?
(2) Write out the three equations that constitute the model.
(3) According to the OPM, what is the value of a call option with the following characteristics?
Stock price = $27.00
Strike price = $25.00
Time to expiration = 6 months = 0.5 years
Risk free rate = 6.0%
Stock return standard deviation = 0.49
f. What impact does each of the following parameters have on the value of a call option?
(1) Current stock price
(2) Strike price
(3) Option’s term to maturity
(4) Risk free rate
(5) Variability of the stock price
g. What is put–call parity?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the last few years, Harry Davis Industries has been too constrained by the high cost of capital to make many capital investments. Recently, though, capital costs have been declining, and the company has decided to look seriously at a major expansion program proposed by the marketing department. Assume that you are an assistant to Leigh Jones, the financial vice president. Your first task is to estimate Harry Davis’s cost of capital. Jones has provided you with the following data, which she believes may be relevant to your task:
(1) The firm’s tax rate is 40%.
(2) The current price of Harry Davis’s 12% coupon, semiannual payment, noncallable bonds with 15 years remaining to maturity is $1,153.72. Harry Davis does not use short term interest bearing debt on a permanent basis. New bonds would be privately placed with no flotation cost.
(3) The current price of the firm’s 10%, $100 par value, quarterly dividend, perpetual preferred stock is $116.95. Harry Davis would incur flotation costs equal to 5% of the proceeds on a new issue.
(4) Harry Davis’s common stock is currently selling at $50 per share. Its last dividend (D0) was $3.12, and dividends are expected to grow at a constant rate of 5.8% in the foreseeable future. Harry Davis’s beta is 1.2, the yield on T bonds is 5.6%, and the market risk premium is estimated to be 6%. For the over own bond yield plus judgment al risk premium approach, the firm uses a 3.2% risk premium.
(5) Harry Davis’s target capital structure is 30% long term debt, 10% preferred stock, and 60% common equity.
To help you structure the task, Leigh Jones has asked you to answer the following questions.
a. (1) What sources of capital should be included when you estimate Harry Davis’s weighted average cost of capital?
(2) Should the component costs be figured on a before tax or an after tax basis?
(3) Should the costs be historical (embedded) costs or new (marginal) costs?
b. What is the market interest rate on Harry Davis’s debt, and what is the component cost of this debt for WACC purposes?
c. (1) What is the firm’s cost of preferred stock?
(2) Harry Davis’s preferred stock is riskier to investors than its debt, yet the preferred’s yield to investors is lower than the yield to maturity on the debt. Does this suggest that you have made a mistake?
d. (1) What are the two primary ways companies raise common equity?
(2) Why is there a cost associated with reinvested earnings?
(3) Harry Davis doesn’t plan to issue new shares of common stock. Using the CAPM approach, what is Harry Davis’s estimated cost of equity?
e. (1) What is the estimated cost of equity using the discounted cash flow (DCF) approach?
(2) Suppose the firm has historically earned 15% on equity (ROE) and has paid out
62% of earnings, and suppose investors expect similar values to obtain in the future.
How could you use this information to estimate the future dividend growth rate, and what growth rate would you get? Is this consistent with the 5.8% growth rate given earlier?
(3) Could the DCF method be applied if the growth rate were not constant? How?
f. What is the cost of equity based on the over own bond yield plus judgmental risk premium method?
g. What is your final estimate for the cost of equity, rs?
h. What is Harry Davis’s weighted average cost of capital (WACC)?
i. What factors influence a company’s WACC?
j. Should the company use the overall, or composite, WACC as the hurdle rate for each of its divisions?
k. What procedures can be used to estimate the risk adjusted cost of capital for a particular division? What approaches are used to measure a division’s beta?
l. Harry Davis is interested in establishing a new division that will focus primarily on developing new Internet based projects. In trying to determine the cost of capital for this new division, you discover that specialized firms involved in similar projects have, on average, the following characteristics: (1) their capital structure is 10% debt and 90% common equity; (2) their cost of debt is typically 12%; and (3) they have a beta of 1.7.
Given this information, what would your estimate be for the new division’s cost of capital?
m. What are three types of project risk? How can each type of risk be considered when thinking about the new division’s cost of capital?
n. Explain in words why new common stock that is raised externally has a higher percentage cost than equity that is raised internally by retaining earnings.
o. (1) Harry Davis estimates that if it issues new common stock, the flotation cost will be 15%. Harry Davis incorporates the flotation costs into the DCF approach. What is the estimated cost of newly issued common stock, taking into account the flotation cost?
(2) Suppose Harry Davis issues 30 year debt with a par value of $1,000 and a coupon rate of 10%, paid annually. If flotation costs are 2%, what is the after tax cost of debt for the new bond issue?
p. What four common mistakes in estimating the WACC should Harry Davis avoid?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bill and Edna had been married two years, and had just reached the point where they had enough savings to start investing. Bill’s uncle Dave told them that he had recently inherited some very rare railroad bonds from his grandmother’s estate. He wanted to help Bill and Edna get a start in the world, and would sell them 50 of the bonds at $100 each. The bonds were dated 1873, beautifully engraved, showing a face value of $1,000 each. Uncle Dave pointed out that “United States of America” was printed prominently at the top, and that the U.S. government had established a “sinking fund” to retire the old railroad bonds. All Bill and Edna needed to do was hold on to them until the government contacted them, and they would eventually get the full $1,000 for each bond. Bill and Edna were overjoyed…..until a year later when they saw the exact same bonds for sale at a coin and stamp shop priced as “collectors items” for $9.95 each!
Requirements
1. If a company goes bankrupt, what happens to the bonds they issued, and the investors who bought the bonds?
2. When investing in bonds, how do you tell if it is a legitimate transaction?
3. Is there a way to determine the relative risk of corporate bonds?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions from the journal of Faital Inc. during its first month of operations are presented below. Post these transactions to T accounts.
|
Date
|
Account Titles
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
July 1
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
30,000
|
|
9
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
6,000
|
|
24
|
Cash
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
4,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bob Sample and other student investors opened Campus Carpet Cleaning, Inc. on September 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.
|
Sept. 1
|
Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in the business.
|
|
2
|
Paid $1,000 cash for store rent for the month of September.
|
|
3
|
Purchased industrial carpet cleaning equipment for $25,000, paying $10,000 in cash and signing a $15,000 6 month, 12% note payable.
|
|
4
|
Paid $1,200 for 1 year accident insurance policy.
|
|
10
|
Received bill from the Daily News for advertising the opening of the cleaning service, $200.
|
|
15
|
Performed services on account for $6,200.
|
|
20
|
Paid a $700 cash dividend to stockholders.
|
|
30
|
Received $5,000 from customers billed on September 15.
|
The chart of accounts for the company is the same as for Sierra Corporation except for the following additional account: Advertising Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the September transactions.
(b) Open ledger accounts and post the September transactions.
(c) Prepare a trial balance at September 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Hammond, Inc., on March 31, 2012, includes these selected accounts before adjusting entries are prepared.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 3,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$5,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
9,200
|
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1. Insurance expires at the rate of $100 per month.
2. Supplies on hand total $800.
3. The equipment depreciates $200 a month.
4. One half of the unearned service revenue was earned in March.
Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Skolnick Co. was organized on April 1, 2012. The company prepares quarterly financial statements. The adjusted trial balance amounts at June 30 are shown below:
|
Debits
|
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$ 6,700
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
$ 850
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
600
|
Notes Payable
|
5,000
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
900
|
Accounts Payable
|
1,510
|
|
Supplies
|
1,000
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
400
|
|
Equipment
|
15,000
|
Interest Payable
|
50
|
|
Dividends
|
600
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
9,400
|
Common Stock
|
14,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,500
|
Service Revenue
|
14,200
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
850
|
Rent Revenue
|
800
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
200
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
510
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
50
|
|
|
|
Total debits
|
$37,310
|
Total credits
|
$37,310
|
(a) Determine the net income for the quarter April 1 to June 30.
(b) Determine the total assets and total liabilities at June 30, 2012 for Skolnick Co.
(c) Determine the amount that appears for Retained Earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Terry Thomas and a group of investors incorporate the Green Thumb Lawn Care Corporation on April 1. At April 30, the trial balance shows the following balances for selected accounts.
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 3,600
|
|
Equipment
|
28,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
20,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
4,200
|
|
Service Revenue
|
1,800
|
Analysis reveals the following additional data pertaining to these accounts.
1. Prepaid insurance is the cost of a 2 year insurance policy, effective April 1.
2. Depreciation on the equipment is $500 per month.
3. The note payable is dated April 1. It is a 6 month, 12% note.
4. Seven customers paid for the company’s 6 month lawn service package of $600 beginning in April. These customers received the first month of services in April.
5. Lawn services performed for other customers but not billed at April 30 totaled $1,500.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of April. Show computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Early in 2012, Westmoreland Company switched to a just in time inventory system. Its sales, cost of goods sold, and inventory amounts for 2011 and 2012 are shown below.
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$2,000,000
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,000,000
|
910,000
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
290,000
|
210,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
210,000
|
50,000
|
Determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2011 and 2012. Discuss the changes in the amount of inventory, the inventory turnover and days in inventory, and the amount of sales across the two years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Englehart Company has the following inventory, purchases, and sales data for the month of March.
|
Inventory, March
|
200 units @ $4.00
|
$ 800
|
|
Purchases
|
|
|
|
March 10
|
500 units @ $4.50
|
2,250
|
|
March 20
|
400 units @ $4.75
|
1,900
|
|
March 30
|
300 units @ $5.00
|
1,500
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
March 15
|
500 units
|
|
|
March 25
|
400 units
|
|
The physical inventory count on March 31 shows 500 units on hand.
Instructions
Under a periodic inventory system, determine the cost of inventory on hand at March 31 and the cost of goods sold for March under (a) the first in, first out (FIFO) method; (b) the last in, first out (LIFO) method; and (c) the average cost method. (For average cost, carry cost per unit to three decimal places.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trillo Company’s bank statement for May 2012 shows these data.
|
Balance May 1
|
$12,650
|
Balance May 31
|
$14,280
|
|
Debit memorandum:
|
|
Credit memorandum:
|
|
|
NSF check
|
175
|
Collection of note receivable
|
505
|
The cash balance per books at May 31 is $13,319. Your review of the data reveals the following.
1. The NSF check was from Hup Co., a customer.
2. The note collected by the bank was a $500, 3 month, 12% note. The bank charged a $10 collection fee. No interest has been previously accrued.
3. Outstanding checks at May 31 total $2,410.
4. Deposits in transit at May 31 total $1,752.
5. A Trillo Company check for $352 dated May 10 cleared the bank on May 25. This check, which was a payment on account, was journalized for $325.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at May 31.
(b) Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented here are selected transactions related to B. Dylan Corp.
|
Mar. 1
|
Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Potter Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
11
|
Received payment in full from Potter Company for balance due.
|
|
12
|
Accepted Juno Company’s $20,000, 6 month, 12% note for balance due on outstanding account receivable.
|
|
13
|
Made B. Dylan Corp. credit card sales for $13,200.
|
|
15
|
Made Visa credit sales totaling $6,700. A 5% service fee is charged by Visa.
|
|
Apr. 11
|
Sold accounts receivable of $8,000 to Harcot Factor. Harcot Factor assesses a service charge of 2% of the amount of receivables sold.
|
|
13
|
Received collections of $8,200 on B. Dylan Corp. credit card sales.
|
|
May 10
|
Wrote off as uncollectible $16,000 of accounts receivable. (B. Dylan Corp. uses the percentage of receivables basis to estimate bad debts.)
|
|
June 30
|
The balance in accounts receivable at the end of the first 6 months is $200,000 and the bad debts percentage is 10%. At June 30 the credit balance in the allowance account prior to adjustment is $3,500. Recorded bad debt expense.
|
|
July 16
|
One of the accounts receivable written off in May pays the amount due, $4,000, in full.
|
Instructions
Prepare the journal entries for the transactions. (Omit cost of goods sold entries.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.
|
Copyright
|
Amortization
|
|
Intangible assets
|
Franchise
|
|
Research and development costs
|
|
1. The allocation to expense of the cost of an intangible asset over the asset’s useful life.
2. Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long lived assets that do not possess physical substance.
3. An exclusive right granted by the federal government to reproduce and sell an artistic or published work.
4. A right to sell certain products or services or to use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.
5. Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products. These costs must be expensed as incurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Snyder Software Inc. successfully developed a new spreadsheet program. However, to produce and market the program, the company needed additional financing. On January
1, 2011, Snyder borrowed money as follows.
1. Snyder issued $500,000, 11%, 10 year bonds. The bonds sold at face value and pay interest on January 1.
2. Snyder issued $1.0 million, 10%, 10 year bonds for $886,996. Interest is payable on January 1. Snyder uses the straight line method of amortization.
Instructions
(a) For the 11% bonds, prepare journal entries for the following items.
(1) The issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2011.
(2) Accrue interest expense on December 31, 2011.
(3) The payment of interest on January 1, 2012.
(b) For the 10 year, 10% bonds:
(1) Journalize the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2011.
(2) Prepare the entry for the redemption of the bonds at 101 on January 1, 2014, after paying the interest due on this date. The carrying value of the bonds at the redemption date was $920,897.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rolman Corporation is authorized to issue 1,000,000 shares of $5 par value common stock. In its first year, the company has the following stock transactions.
|
Jan. 10
|
Issued 400,000 shares of stock at $8 per share.
|
|
Sept. 1
|
Purchased 10,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $9 per share.
|
|
Dec. 24
|
Declared a cash dividend of 10 cents per share on common stock outstanding.
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions.
(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet, assuming the company had retained earnings of $150,600 at December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement for Kosinski Manufacturing Company contains the following condensed information.
|
KOSINSKI MANUFACTURING COMPANY Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues
|
|
$6,583,000
|
|
Operating expenses, excluding depreciation
|
$4,920,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
880,000
|
5,800,000
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
|
783,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
|
353,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 430,000
|
Included in operating expenses is a $24,000 loss resulting from the sale of machinery for $270,000 cash. Machinery was purchased at a cost of $750,000. The following balances are reported on Kosinski’s comparative balance sheet at December 31.
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
$672,000
|
$130,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
775,000
|
610,000
|
|
Inventory
|
834,000
|
867,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
521,000
|
501,000
|
Income tax expense of $353,000 represents the amount paid in 2012. Dividends declared and paid in 2012 totaled $200,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
*(b) Prepare the statement of cash flows using the direct method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The events and transactions of Dever Corporation for the year ending December 31, 2012, resulted in these data.
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$2,600,000
|
|
Net sales
|
4,400,000
|
|
Other expenses and losses
|
9,600
|
|
Other revenues and gains
|
5,600
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
1,100,000
|
|
Gain from discontinued division
|
570,000
|
|
Loss from tornado disaster (extraordinary loss)
|
600,000
|
Analysis reveals the following.
1. All items are before the applicable income tax rate of 30%.
2. The plastics division was sold on July 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Keystone Manufacturing Company.
|
|
|
March 1
|
March 31
|
|
Raw material inventory
|
|
$12,000
|
$10,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Materials purchased in March
|
$ 90,000
|
|
|
|
Direct labor in March
|
75,000
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead in March
|
220,000
|
|
|
Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month of March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the descriptions that follow with the corresponding terms.
|
Descriptions:
|
Terms:
|
|
All activities associated with providing a product or service.
|
a. Activity based costing
|
|
A method of allocating overhead based on each product’s use of activities in making the product.
|
b. Balanced scorecard
|
|
Systems implemented to reduce defects in finished products with the goal of achieving zero defects.
|
c. Just in time (JIT) inventory
|
|
A performance measurement approach that uses both financial and nonfinancial measures, tied to company objectives, to evaluate a company’s operations in an integrated fashion.
|
d. Total quality management (TQM)
|
|
Inventory system in which goods are manufactured or purchased just as they are needed for use.
|
e. Value chain
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Superior Manufacturing Company has the following cost and expense data for the year ending December 31, 2012.
|
Raw materials, 1/1/12
|
$ 30,000
|
Insurance, factory
|
$ 14,000
|
|
Raw materials, 12/31/12
|
20,000
|
Property taxes, factory building
|
6,000
|
|
Raw materials purchases
|
205,000
|
Sales (net)
|
1,500,000
|
|
Indirect materials
|
15,000
|
Delivery expenses
|
100,000
|
|
Work in process, 1/1/12
|
80,000
|
Sales commissions
|
150,000
|
|
Work in process, 12/31/12
|
50,000
|
Indirect labor
|
90,000
|
|
Finished goods, 1/1/12
|
110,000
|
Factory machinery rent
|
40,000
|
|
Finished goods, 12/31/12
|
120,000
|
Factory utilities
|
65,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
350,000
|
Depreciation, factory building
|
24,000
|
|
Factory manager’s salary
|
35,000
|
Administrative expenses
|
300,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for Superior Company for 2012.
(b) Prepare an income statement for Superior Company for 2012.
(c) Assume that Superior Company’s accounting records show the balances of the following current asset accounts: Cash $17,000, Accounts Receivable (net) $120,000, Prepaid Expenses $13,000, and Short term Investments $26,000. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet for Superior Company as of December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cardella Manufacturing applies overhead on the basis of direct labor costs. The company estimates annual overhead costs will be $760,000 and annual direct labor costs will be $950,000. During February, Cardella Manufacturing works on two jobs: A16 and B17. Summary data concerning these jobs are as follows.
Manufacturing Costs Incurred
Purchased $54,000 of raw materials on account
Factory labor $76,000, plus $4,000 employer payroll taxes.
Manufacturing overhead exclusive of indirect materials and indirect labor $59,800.
|
Assignment of Costs
|
|
Direct materials:
|
Job A16 $27,000, Job B17 $21,000
|
|
Indirect materials:
|
$3,000
|
|
Direct labor:
|
Job A16 $52,000, Job B17 $26,000
|
|
Indirect labor:
|
$2,000
|
The company completed Job A16 and sold it on account for $150,000. Job B17 was only partially completed.
Instructions
(a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate.
(b) Journalize the February transactions in the sequence followed in the chapter.
(c) What was the amount of under or over applied manufacturing overhead?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Karlene Industries produces plastic ice cube trays in two processes: heating and stamping. All materials are added at the beginning of the Heating Department process. Karlene uses the weighted average method to compute equivalent units.
On November 1, the Heating Department had in process 1,000 trays that were 70% complete. During November, it started into production 12,000 trays. On November 30, 2012, 2,000 trays that were 60% complete were in process.
The following cost information for the Heating Department was also available.
|
Work in process, November 1:
|
|
Costs incurred in November:
|
|
Materials
|
$ 640
|
Material $3,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
360
|
Labor 2,300
|
|
Cost of work in process, Nov. 1
|
$1,000
|
Overhead 4,050
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing and posting liabilities
The general ledger of Pack N Ship at June 30, 2012, the end of the company’s fiscal year, includes the following account balances before adjusting entries.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 111,000
|
|
Current portion of notes payable
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
|
Salary payable
|
|
|
Employee payroll taxes payable
|
960
|
|
Employer payroll taxes payable
|
|
|
Unearned rent revenue
|
6,300
|
|
Long–term note payable
|
220,000
|
The additional data needed to develop the adjusting entries at June 30 are as follows:
a. The long term debt is payable in annual installments of $44,000, with the next installment due on July 31. On that date, Pack N Ship will also pay one year’s interest at 10%. Interest was last paid on July 31 of the preceding year. Make the adjusting entry to shift the current installment of the long term note payable to a current liability. Also accrue interest expense at year end.
b. Gross salaries for the last payroll of the fiscal year were $4,900.
c. Employer payroll taxes owed are $810.
d. On February 1, the company collected one year’s rent of $6,300 in advance.
Requirements
1. Using the four column ledger format, open the listed accounts and insert the unadjusted June 30 balances.
2. Journalize and post the June 30 adjusting entries to the accounts that you opened. Key adjusting entries by letter.
3. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at June 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and journalizing payroll amounts
Lenny Worthington is general manager of Crossroad Tanning Salons. During 2012, Worthington worked for the company all year at a $6,100 monthly salary. He also earned a year end bonus equal to 5% of his salary. Worthington’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $810 per month, plus $928 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $80 per month, plus $60 on the bonus. The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Worthington authorized the following payroll deductions: United Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $15 per month. Crossroad incurred payroll tax expense on Worthington for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, Crossroad provides Worthington with health insurance at a cost of $110 per month. During 2012, Crossroad paid $7,000 into Worthington’s retirement plan.
Requirements
1. Compute Worthington’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.
2. Compute Crossroad’s total 2012 payroll expense for Worthington.
3. Make the journal entry to record Crossroad’s expense for Worthington’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision Case 10 1 Golden Bear Construction operates throughout California. The owner, Gaylan Beavers, employs 15 work crews. Construction supervisors report directly to Beavers, and the supervisors are trusted employees. The home office staff consists of an accountant and an office manager. Because employee turnover is high in the construction industry, supervisors hire and fire their own crews. Supervisors notify the office of all personnel changes. Also, supervisors forward to the office the employee W 4 forms. Each Thursday, the supervisors submit weekly time sheets for their crews, and the accountant prepares the payroll. At noon on Friday, the supervisors come to the office to get paychecks for distribution to the workers at 5 PM. The company accountant prepares the payroll, including the paychecks. Beavers signs all paychecks. To verify that each construction worker is a bona fide employee, the accountant matches the employee’s endorsement signature on the back of the canceled paycheck with the signature on that employee’s W 4 form.
Requirements
1. Identify one way that a supervisor can defraud Golden Bear Construction under the present system.
2. Discuss a control feature that the company can use to safeguard against the fraud you identified in Requirement 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sara Chung knew the construction contractors in her area well. She was the purchasing manager at the power plant, a business that was the major employer in the region. Whenever a repair or maintenance job came up, Sara’s friends would inflate the invoice by 10%. The invoice would then be passed through the accounts payable department, where the clerk was supposed to review and verify the charges before processing the payment. The accounts payable clerk, Valerie Judson, was happy to have a job and didn’t want anything to jeopardize it. She knew the deal, but kept her mouth shut. Sara’s contractor friends would always “kick back” the 10% extra to Sara under the table. One day Valerie had a heart attack and went into the hospital. The company hired a new accounts payable clerk, Spencer Finn. He had worked construction in his college days and suspected something was fishy, but he couldn’t prove it. He did, however, wish to protect himself in case the fraud came to light.
Requirements
1. How could an auditor detect fraud of this sort?
2. What can a business do to prevent this kind of fraudulent activity?
3. What should the new accountant do to protect himself?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In recent years, the airline industry has dominated headlines. Consumers are shopping Priceline.com and other Internet sites for the lowest rates. The airlines have also lured customers with frequent flyer programs, which award free flights to passengers who accumulate specified miles of travel. Unredeemed frequent flyer mileage represents a liability that airlines must report on their balance sheets, usually as Air traffic liability. Southwest Airlines, a profitable, no frills carrier based in Dallas, has been rated near the top of the industry. Southwest controls costs by flying to smaller, less expensive airports; using only one model of aircraft; serving no meals; increasing staff efficiency; and having a shorter turnaround time on the ground between flights. The fact that most of the cities served by Southwest have predictable weather maximizes its on time arrival record.
Requirements
With a partner or group, lead your class in a discussion of the following questions, or write a report as directed by your instructor.
1. Frequent flyer programs have grown into significant obligations for airlines. Why should a liability be recorded for those programs? Discuss how you might calculate the amount of this liability. Can you think of other industries that offer incentives that create a similar liability?
2. One of Southwest Airlines’ strategies for success is shortening stops at airport gates between flights. The company’s chairman has stated, “What [you] produce is lower fares for the customers because you generate more revenue from the same fixed cost in that airplane.” Look up fixed cost in the Glindex of this book. What are some of the “fixed costs” of an airline? How can better utilization of assets improve a company’s profits?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is the correct journal entry to record the issuance of a $100,000 face value bond at 95?
|
a
|
Cash
|
95,000
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
5,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
|
b
|
Cash
|
95,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
95,000
|
|
c
|
Bonds payable
|
95,000
|
|
Cash
|
95,000
|
|
d
|
Cash
|
100,000
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
5,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
95,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the liabilities section of the balance sheet
Luxury Suites Hotels includes the following selected accounts in its general ledger at December 31, 2012:
|
Note payable, long term
|
$ 125,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 34,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
325,000
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
9,750
|
|
Interest payable (due next year)
|
1,200
|
Salary payable
|
2,800
|
|
Estimated warranty payable
|
1,800
|
Sales tax payable
|
800
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the liabilities section of Luxury Suites’ balance sheet at December 31, 2012. Report a total for current liabilities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the liabilities section of the balance sheet
Blue Socks’ account balances at June 30, 2014, include the following:
|
Data Table
|
|
Cash
|
$ 138,000
|
Salary payable
|
$ 6,500
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
117,000
|
Building, net of depreciation
|
780,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
13,200
|
Interest payable (due next year)
|
2,400
|
|
Current portion of long term notes payable
|
8,000
|
FICA taxes payable
|
1,900
|
|
Blue, capital
|
500,000
|
Accounts receivable
|
145,000
|
|
Premium on bonds payable
|
12,000
|
Bonds payable (Maturity date 12/31/2020)
|
400,000
|
|
Sales taxes payable
|
4,000
|
Blue, drawing
|
2,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the liabilities section of Blue Socks’ balance sheet at June 30, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for long term note payable transactions
Consider the following note payable transactions of Tube Video Productions.
|
2014
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Purchased equipment costing $80,000 by issuing an eight year, 12% note payable. The note requires annual principal payments of $10,000 plus interest each March 1.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Recorded current portion of the note in the journal.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Accrued interest on the note payable.
|
|
2015
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Paid the first installment on the note.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Accrued interest on the note payable.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions for the company.
2. Considering the given transactions only, what are Tube Video Productions’ total liabilities on December 31, 2015?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording mortgage payable entries from an amortization schedule
Kaiser Company’s partial amortization schedule follows:
|
Payment # Loan
|
Date
|
Payment
|
Interest Expense Principal x 6% x 1/12)
|
Principal
|
Mortgage Balance
|
|
1/1/2013
|
|
|
|
500,000.00
|
|
1
|
1/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,500.00
|
1,097.30
|
498,902.70
|
|
2
|
2/28/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,494.51
|
1,102.79
|
497,799.91
|
|
3
|
3/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,489.00
|
1,108.30
|
496,691.61
|
|
4
|
4/30/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,483.46
|
1,113.84
|
495,577.77
|
|
5
|
5/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,477.89
|
1,119.41
|
494,458.36
|
|
6
|
6/30/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,472.29
|
1,125.01
|
493,333.35
|
|
7
|
7/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,466.67
|
1,130.63
|
492,202.72
|
|
8
|
8/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,461.01
|
1,136.29
|
491,066.43
|
|
9
|
9/30/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,455.33
|
1,141.97
|
489,924.46
|
|
10
|
10/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,449.62
|
1,147.68
|
488,776.78
|
|
11
|
11/30/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,443.88
|
1,153.42
|
487,623.36
|
|
12
|
12/31/2013
|
3,597.30
|
2,438.12
|
1,159.18
|
486,464.18
|
|
2013 totals
|
43,167.60
|
29,631.78
|
13,535.82
|
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the note issuance and the reclassification of the current portion on January 1, 2013 (explanations are not required).
2. Journalize the first payment on January 31, 2013 (do not round).
3. Journalize the second payment on February 28, 2013 (do not round).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining bond prices
Adams is planning to issue $520,000 of 6%, five year bonds payable to borrow for a major expansion. The chief executive, Shane Adams, asks your advice on some related matters.
Requirements
1. Answer the following questions:
a. At what type of bond price will Adams have total interest expense equal to the cash interest payments?
b. Under which type of bond price will Adams’ total interest expense be greater than the cash interest payments?
c. If the market interest rate is 7%, what type of bond price can Adams expect for the bonds?
2. Compute the price of the bonds if the bonds sell for 93.
3. How much will Adams pay in interest each year? How much will Adams’ interest expense be for the first year, assuming the straight line method is used?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing bond transactions
Clark issued $50,000 of 10 year, 9% bonds payable on January 1, 2012. Clark pays interest each January 1 and July 1 and amortizes discount or premium by the straight line method. The company can issue its bonds payable under various conditions.
Requirements
1. Journalize Clark’s issuance of the bonds and first semiannual interest payment assuming the bonds were issued at par value. Explanations are not required.
2. Journalize Clark’s issuance of the bonds and first semiannual interest payment assuming the bonds were issued at a price of 95. Explanations are not required.
3. Journalize Clark’s issuance of the bonds and first semiannual interest payment assuming the bonds were issued at a price of 106. Explanations are not required.
4. Which bond price results in the most interest expense for Clark? Explain in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions and reporting them on the balance sheet
The following transactions of Emergency Pharmacies occurred during 2014 and 2015:
|
2014
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Borrowed $360,000 from Lessburg Bank. The six year, 10% note requires payments due annually, on March 1. Each payment consists of $60,000 principal plus one year’s interest.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Reclassified current portion of Lessburg Bank note.
|
|
Dec
|
1
|
Mortgaged the warehouse for $200,000 cash with Saputo Bank. The mortgage requires monthly payments of $4,000. The interest rate on the note is 9% and accrues monthly. The first payment is due on January 1, 2015.
|
|
Dec
|
1
|
Reclassified current portion of the Saputo Bank note for the principal due in 2015 of $31,505.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Recorded interest accrued on the Saputo Bank note.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Recorded interest accrued on the Lessburg Bank note.
|
|
2015
|
|
Jan
|
1
|
Paid Saputo Bank monthly mortgage payment.
|
|
Feb
|
1
|
Paid Saputo Bank monthly mortgage payment.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Paid Saputo Bank monthly mortgage payment.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Paid first installment on note due to Lessburg Bank.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions in Emergency Pharmacies’ general journal. Round all answers to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.
2. Assume Emergency Pharmacies only adjusts the current portion of long term notes on the last day of each year, December 31. Prepare the liabilities section of the balance sheet for Emergency Pharmacies on March 1, 2015.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing and journalizing bond transactions
On March 1, 2012, Mechanics Credit Union (MCU) issued 7%, 20 year bonds payable with maturity value of $300,000. The bonds pay interest on February 28 and August 31. MCU amortizes bond premium and discount by the straight line method.
Requirements
1. If the market interest rate is 6% when MCU issues its bonds, will the bonds be priced at maturity (par) value, at a premium, or at a discount? Explain.
2. If the market interest rate is 8% when MCU issues its bonds, will the bonds be priced at par, at a premium, or at a discount? Explain.
3. The issue price of the bonds is 95. Journalize the following bond transactions:
a. Issuance of the bonds on March 1, 2012.
b. Payment of interest and amortization of discount on August 31, 2012.
c. Accrual of interest and amortization of discount on December 31, 2012.
d. Payment of interest and amortization of discount on February 28, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing, journalizing, and reporting bond transactions
Billy’s Hamburgers issued 5%, 10 year bonds payable at 90 on December 31, 2010. At December 31, 2012, Billy reported the bonds payable as follows:
|
Long term debt:
|
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
$ 400,000
|
|
|
Less: Discount
|
32,000
|
$ 368,000
|
Billy uses the straight line amortization method and pays semiannual interest each June 30 and December 31.
Requirements
1. Answer the following questions about Billy’s bonds payable:
a. What is the maturity value of the bonds?
b. What is the carrying amount of the bonds at December 31, 2012?
c. What is the annual cash interest payment on the bonds?
d. How much interest expense should the company record each year?
2. Record the June 30, 2013, semiannual interest payment and amortization of discount.
3. What will be the carrying amount of the bonds at December 31, 2013?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Report liabilities on the balance sheet
The accounting records of Route Maker Wireless include the following:
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 76,000
|
Salary payable
|
$ 9,500
|
|
Mortgage note payable, long term
|
80,000
|
Bonds payable, current installment
|
30,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
19,000
|
Premium on all bonds payable
|
|
Bonds payable, long term
|
164,000
|
(all long term)
|
11,000
|
|
Rory, capital
|
175,000
|
Unearned service revenue
|
3,000
|
Requirement
1. Report these liabilities on the Route Maker Wireless balance sheet, including headings and totals for current liabilities and long term liabilities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions and reporting them on the balance sheet
The following transactions of Johnson Pharmacies occurred during 2014 and 2015:
|
2014
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Borrowed $100,000 from Naples Bank. The five year, 15% note requires payments due annually, on March 1. Each payment consists of $20,000 principal plus one year’s interest.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Reclassified current portion of the Naples Bank note.
|
|
Dec
|
1
|
Mortgaged the warehouse for $400,000 cash with Sage Bank. The mortgage requires monthly payments of $8,000. The interest rate on the note is 7% and accrues monthly. The first payment is due on January 1, 2015.
|
|
Dec
|
1
|
Reclassified current portion of the Sage Bank note for the principal due in 2015 of $70,634.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Recorded interest accrued on the Sage Bank note.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Recorded interest accrued on the Naples Bank note.
|
|
2015
|
|
Jan
|
1
|
Paid Sage Bank monthly mortgage payment.
|
|
Feb
|
1
|
Paid Sage Bank monthly mortgage payment.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Paid Sage Bank monthly mortgage payment.
|
|
Mar
|
1
|
Paid first installment on note due to Naples Bank.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions in Johnson Pharmacies’ general journal. Round all answers to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.
2. Assume Johnson Pharmacies only adjusts the current portion of long term notes on the last day of each year, December 31. Prepare the liabilities section of the balance sheet for Johnson Pharmacies on March 1, 2015.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing and journalizing bond transactions
On March 1, 2012, Professors Credit Union (PCU) issued 6%, 20 year bonds payable with maturity value of $500,000. The bonds pay interest on February 28 and August 31. PCU amortizes bond premium and discount by the straight line method.
Requirements
1. If the market interest rate is 5% when PCU issues its bonds, will the bonds be priced at maturity (par) value, at a premium, or at a discount? Explain.
2. If the market interest rate is 7% when PCU issues its bonds, will the bonds be priced at par, at a premium, or at a discount? Explain.
3. The issue price of the bonds is 97. Journalize the following bond transactions:
a. Issuance of the bonds on March 1, 2012.
b. Payment of interest and amortization of discount on August 31, 2012.
c. Accrual of interest and amortization of discount on December 31, 2012.
d. Payment of interest and amortization of discount on February 28, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting liabilities on the balance sheet
The accounting records of Compass Point Wireless include the following:
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 75,000
|
Salary payable
|
$ 7,500
|
|
Mortgage note payable, long term
|
72,000
|
Bonds payable, current installment
|
17,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
17,000
|
Premium on all bonds payable
|
|
Bonds payable, long term
|
163,000
|
(all long term)
|
12,000
|
|
West, capital
|
170,000
|
Unearned service revenue
|
3,200
|
Requirement
1. Report these liabilities on the Compass Point Wireless balance sheet, including headings and totals for current liabilities and long term liabilities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raffie’s Kids, a non profit organization that provides aid to victims of domestic violence, low income families, and special needs children has a 30 year, 5% mortgage on the existing building. The mortgage requires monthly payments of $3,000. Raffie’s bookkeeper is preparing financial statements for the board and in doing so, lists the mortgage balance of $287,000 under current liabilities because the board hopes to be able to pay the mortgage off in full next year. $20,000 of the mortgage principal will be paid next year if Raffie’s pays according to the mortgage agreement.
Requirement
1. The board members call you, their trusted CPA, to advise them on how Raffie’s Kids should report the mortgage on its balance sheet. Provide your recommendation and discuss the reason for your recommendation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition of patent, amortization, and change in useful life
Miracle Printers (MP) manufactures printers. Assume that MP recently paid $600,000 for a patent on a new laser printer. Although it gives legal protection for 20 years, the patent is expected to provide a competitive advantage for only eight years.
Requirements
1. Assuming the straight line method of amortization, make journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the patent and (b) amortization for year 1.
2. After using the patent for four years, MP learns at an industry trade show that another company is designing a more efficient printer. On the basis of this new information, MP decides, starting with year 5, to amortize the remaining cost of the patent over two remaining years, giving the patent a total useful life of six years. Record amortization for year 5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalized asset cost and partial year depreciation
Drive and Fly, near an airport, incurred the following costs to acquire land, make land improvements, and construct and furnish a small building:
|
a.
|
Purchase price of three acres of land
|
$ 80,000
|
|
b.
|
Delinquent real estate taxes on the land to be paid by Drive and Fly
|
5,600
|
|
c.
|
Additional dirt and earthmoving
|
9,000
|
|
d.
|
Title insurance on the land acquisition
|
3,200
|
|
e.
|
Fence around the boundary of the property
|
9,100
|
|
f.
|
Building permit for the building
|
500
|
|
g.
|
Architect’s fee for the design of the building
|
20,700
|
|
h.
|
Signs near the front of the property
|
9,000
|
|
i.
|
Materials used to construct the building
|
215,000
|
|
j.
|
Labor to construct the building
|
173,000
|
|
k.
|
Interest cost on construction loan for the building
|
9,500
|
|
l.
|
Parking lots on the property
|
29,000
|
|
m.
|
Lights for the parking lots
|
11,300
|
|
n.
|
Salary of construction supervisor (80% to building; 20% to parking lot and concrete walks)
|
80,000
|
|
o.
|
Furniture
|
11,600
|
|
p.
|
Transportation of furniture from seller to the building
|
2,200
|
|
q.
|
Landscaping (shrubs)
|
6,300
|
Drive and Fly depreciates land improvements over 20 years, buildings over 40 years, and furniture over 10 years, all on a straight line basis with zero residual value.
Requirements
1. Set up columns for Land, Land Improvements, Building, and Furniture. Show how to account for each cost by listing the cost under the correct account. Determine the total cost of each asset.
2. All construction was complete and the assets were placed in service on July 1. Record partial year depreciation for the year ended December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalized asset cost and first year depreciation, and identifying depreciation results that meet management objectives
On January 3, 2012, Trusty Delivery Service purchased a truck at a cost of $90,000. Before placing the truck in service, Trusty spent $3,000 painting it, $1,500 replacing tires, and $4,500 overhauling the engine. The truck should remain in service for five years and have a residual value of $9,000. The truck’s annual mileage is expected
to be 22,500 miles in each of the first four years and 10,000 miles in the fifth year—100,000 miles in total. In deciding which depreciation method to use, Mikail Johnson, the general manager, requests a depreciation schedule for each of the depreciation methods (straight line, units of production, and double declining balance).
Requirements
1. Prepare a depreciation schedule for each depreciation method, showing asset cost, depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and asset book value.
2. Trusty prepares financial statements using the depreciation method that reports the highest net income in the early years of asset use. For income tax purposes, the company uses the depreciation method that minimizes income taxes in the early years. Consider the first year that Trusty uses the truck. Identify the depreciation methods that meet the general manager’s objectives, assuming the income tax authorities permit the use of any of the methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lump sum asset purchases, partial year depreciation, and impairments
Gretta Chung Associates surveys American eating habits. The company’s accounts include Land, Buildings, Office equipment, and Communication equipment, with a separate accumulated depreciation account for each asset. During 2012 and 2013, Gretta Chung completed the following transactions:
|
2012 Jan 1
|
Traded in old office equipment with book value of $40,000 (cost of $132,000 and accumulated depreciation of $92,000) for new equipment. Chung also paid $80,000 in cash. Fair value of the new equipment is $119,000.
|
|
Apr 1
|
Acquired land and communication equipment in a group purchase. Total cost was $270,000 paid in cash. An independent appraisal valued the land at $212,625 and the communication equipment at $70,875.
|
|
Sep 1
|
Sold a building that cost $555,000 (accumulated depreciation of $255,000 through December 31 of the preceding year). Chung received $370,000 cash from the sale of the building. Depreciation is computed on a straight line basis. The building has a 40 year useful life and a residual value of $75,000.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Recorded depreciation as follows: Communication equipment is depreciated by the straight line method over a five year life with zero residual value. Office equipment is depreciated using the double eclining balance method over five years with $2,000 residual value.
|
|
2013 Jan 1
|
The company identified that the communication equipment suffered significant decline in value. The fair value of the communication equipment was determined to be $55,000.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Gretta Chung Associates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for intangibles
Midland Telecom provides communication services in Iowa, Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchased goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following figures:
|
Book value of assets
|
$ 750,000
|
|
Market value of assets
|
1,000,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
530,000
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.
2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 31, 2012, Express Delivery, the overnight shipper, had total assets of $21,000,000,000 and total liabilities of $13,000,000,000. Included among the assets were property, plant, and equipment with a cost of $17,000,000,000 and accumulated depreciation of $10,000,000,000. During the year ended May 31, 2012, Express Delivery earned total revenues of $28,000,000,000 and had total expenses of $25,000,000,000, of which $8,000,000,000 was depreciation expenses. The CFO and the controller are concerned that the results of 2012 will make investors unhappy. Additionally, both hold stock options to purchase shares at a reduced price, so they would like to see the market price continue to grow. They decide to “extend” the life of assets so that depreciation will be reduced to $5,000,000,000 for 2012.
Requirements
1. What is the change to net income due to their decision?
2. What appears to be their motivation for the change in asset lives? Is this ethical? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalized asset cost and partial year depreciation
Best Parking, near an airport, incurred the following costs to acquire land, make land improvements, and construct and furnish a small building:
|
a.
|
Purchase price of three acres of land
|
$ 89,000
|
|
b.
|
Delinquent real estate taxes on the land to be paid by Best Parking
|
6,000
|
|
c.
|
Additional dirt and earthmoving
|
8,000
|
|
d.
|
Title insurance on the land acquisition
|
3,600
|
|
e.
|
Fence around the boundary of the property
|
9,100
|
|
f.
|
Building permit for the building
|
800
|
|
g.
|
Architect’s fee for the design of the building
|
20,200
|
|
h.
|
Signs near the front of the property
|
9,400
|
|
i.
|
Materials used to construct the building
|
212,000
|
|
j.
|
Labor to construct the building
|
172,000
|
|
k.
|
Interest cost on construction loan for the building
|
9,300
|
|
l.
|
Parking lots on the property
|
28,900
|
|
m.
|
Lights for the parking lots
|
10,100
|
|
n.
|
Salary of construction supervisor (75% to building; 25% to parking lot and concrete walks)
|
40,000
|
|
o.
|
Furniture
|
11,500
|
|
p.
|
Transportation of furniture from seller to the building
|
2,000
|
|
q.
|
Landscaping (shrubs)
|
6,900
|
Best Parking depreciates land improvements over 25 years, buildings over 50 years, and furniture over 12 years, all on a straight line basis with zero residual value.
Requirements
1. Set up columns for Land, Land Improvements, Building, and Furniture. Show how to account for each cost by listing the cost under the correct account. Determine the total cost of each asset.
2. All construction was complete and the assets were placed in service on July 1. Record partial year depreciation for the year ended December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalized asset cost and first year depreciation, and identifying depreciation results that meet management objectives
On January 8, 2012, Speedway Delivery Service purchased a truck at a cost of $65,000. Before placing the truck in service, Speedway spent $4,000 painting it, $2,500 replacing tires, and $8,000 overhauling the engine. The truck should remain in service for five years and have a residual value of $6,000. The truck’s annual mileage is expected to be 22,000 miles in each of the first four years and 12,000 miles in the fifth year—100,000 miles in total. In deciding which depreciation method to use, David Greer, the general manager, requests a depreciation schedule for each of the depreciation methods (straight line, units of production, and double declining balance).
Requirements
1. Prepare a depreciation schedule for each depreciation method, showing asset cost, depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and asset book value.
2. Speedway prepares financial statements using the depreciation method that reports the highest net income in the early years of asset use. For income tax purposes, the company uses the depreciation method that minimizes income taxes in the early years. Consider the first year that Speedway uses the truck. Identify the depreciation methods that meet the general manager’s objectives, assuming the income tax authorities permit the use of any of the methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lump sum asset purchases, partial year depreciation, and impairments
Hilda Carr Associates surveys American eating habits. The company’s accounts include Land, Buildings, Office equipment, and Communication equipment, with a separate accumulated depreciation account for each asset. During 2012 and 2013, Hilda Carr completed the following transactions:
|
2012 Jan 1
|
Traded in old office equipment with book value of $43,000 (cost of $140,000 and accumulated depreciation of $97,000) for new equipment. Carr also paid $83,000 in cash. Fair value of the new equipment is $119,000.
|
|
Apr 1
|
Acquired land and communication equipment in a group purchase. Total cost was $430,000 paid in cash. An independent appraisal valued the land at $338,625 and the communication equipment at $112,875.
|
|
Sep 1
|
Sold a building that cost $560,400 (accumulated depreciation of $260,000 through December 31 of the preceding year). Carr received $390,000 cash from the sale of the building. Depreciation is computed on a straight line basis. The building has a 40 year useful life and a residual value of $90,000.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Recorded depreciation as follows: Communication equipment is depreciated by the straight line method over a five year life with zero residual value. Office equipment is depreciated using the double declining balance over five years with $1,000 residual value.
|
|
2013 Jan 1
|
The company identified that the communication equipment suffered significant decline in value. The fair value of the communication equipment was determined to be $75,000.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Hilda Carr Associates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for intangibles
Heartland Telecom provides communication services in Iowa, Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Heartland purchased goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shurburn Wireless Company, which had the following figures:
|
Book value of assets
|
$ 800,000
|
|
Market value of assets
|
900,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
540,000
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the entry to record Heartland’s purchase of Shurburn Wireless for $360,000 cash plus a $540,000 note payable.
2. What special asset does Heartland’s acquisition of Shurburn Wireless identify? How should Heartland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shurburn Wireless? Explain in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose you are an investment advisor, and you are looking at two companies to recommend to your clients, Shelly’s Seashell Enterprises and Jeremy Feigenbaum Systems. The two companies are virtually identical, and both began operations at the beginning of the current year. During the year, each company purchased inventory as follows:
|
Jan
|
4
|
10,000
|
units at $4 =
|
$ 40,000
|
|
Apr
|
6
|
5,000
|
units at 5 =
|
25,000
|
|
Aug
|
9
|
7,000
|
units at 6 =
|
42,000
|
|
Nov
|
27
|
10,000
|
units at 7 =
|
70,000
|
|
Totals
|
|
32,000
|
|
$177,000
|
During the first year, both companies sold 25,000 units of inventory. In early January, both companies purchased equipment costing $143,000, with a 10 year estimated useful life and a $20,000 residual value. Shelly uses the inventory and depreciation methods that maximize reported income (FIFO and straight line). By contrast, Feigenbaum uses the inventory and depreciation methods that minimize income taxes (LIFO and doubledeclining balance). Both companies’ trial balances at December 31, 2013, included the following:
|
Sales revenue
|
$270,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
80,700
|
Requirements
1. Prepare both companies’ income statements. (Disregard income tax expense.)
2. Write an investment letter to address the following questions for your clients: Which company appears to be more profitable? Which company has more cash to invest in new projects? Which company would you prefer to invest in? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jim Reed manages a fleet of utility trucks for a rural county government. He’s been in his job 30 years, and he knows where the angles are. He makes sure that when new trucks are purchased, the salvage value is set as low as possible. Then, when they become fully depreciated, they are sold off by the county at salvage value. Jim makes sure his buddies in the construction business are first in line for the bargain sales, and they make sure he gets a little something back. Recently, a new county commissioner was elected with vows to cut expenses for the taxpayers. Unlike other commissioners, this man has a business degree, and he is coming to visit Jim tomorrow.
Requirements
1. When a business sells a fully depreciated asset for its salvage value, is a gain or loss recognized?
2. How do businesses determine what salvage values to use for their various assets? Are there “hard and fast” rules for salvage values?
3. How would an organization prevent the kind of fraud depicted here?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Visit a local business.
Requirements
1. List all its plant assets.
2. If possible, interview the manager. Gain as much information as you can about the business’s plant assets. For example, try to determine the assets’ costs, the depreciation method the company is using, and the estimated useful life of each asset category. If an interview is impossible, then develop your own estimates of the assets’ costs, useful lives, and book values, assuming an appropriate depreciation method.
3. Determine whether the business has any intangible assets. If so, list them and learn as much as possible about their nature, cost, and estimated useful lives.
4. Write a detailed report of your findings and be prepared to present it to the class.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, your company owes employees for three days of the five day workweek. The total payroll for the week is $7,800. What journal entry should you make at December 31?
a. Nothing because you will pay the employees on Friday.
|
b.
|
Salary expense
|
4,680
|
|
Salary payable
|
4,680
|
|
b.
|
Salary payable
|
4,680
|
|
Salary expense
|
4,680
|
|
c.
|
Salary expense
|
7,800
|
|
Salary payable
|
7,800
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions
The following transactions of Denver Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012:
|
2011
|
|
Jan
|
9
|
Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $9,000, signing a six month, 6% note payable for that amount.
|
|
29
|
Recorded the week’s sales of $64,000, three fourths on credit, and one fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax.
|
|
2012
|
|
Feb
|
5
|
Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state.
|
|
28
|
Borrowed $204,000 on a four year, 10% note payable that calls for $51,000 annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and long term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts.
|
|
Jul
|
9
|
Paid the six month, 6% note, plus interest, at maturity.
|
|
Aug
|
31
|
Purchased inventory for $12,000, signing a six month, 9% note payable.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 2% of sales of $603,000.
|
|
31
|
Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate interest accrual for each note payable.
|
|
Feb
|
28
|
Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four year note payable.
|
|
29
|
Paid off the 9% note plus interest at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions in Denver’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions
The following transactions of Brooks Garrett occurred during 2012:
|
Apr
|
30
|
Garrett is party to a patent infringement lawsuit of $200,000. Garrett’s attorney is certain it is remote that Garrett will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
Jun
|
30
|
Estimated warranty expense at 2% of sales of $400,000.
|
|
Jul
|
28
|
Warranty claims paid in the amount of $6,000.
|
|
Sep
|
30
|
Garrett is party to a lawsuit for copyright violation of $100,000. Garrett’s attorney advises that it is probable Garrett will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Garrett estimates warranty expense on sales for the second half of the year of $500,000 at 2%.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize required transactions, if any, in Garrett’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing and posting liabilities
The general ledger of Speedy Ship at June 30, 2012, the end of the company’s fiscal year, includes the following account balances before adjusting entries.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 114,000
|
|
Current portion of notes payable
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
|
Salary payable
|
|
|
Employee payroll taxes payable
|
970
|
|
Employer payroll taxes payable
|
|
|
Unearned rent revenue
|
6,900
|
|
Long–term note payable
|
210,000
|
The additional data needed to develop the adjusting entries at June 30 are as follows:
a. The long term debt is payable in annual installments of $42,000, with the next installment due on July 31. On that date, Speedy Ship will also pay one year’s interest at 8%. Interest was last paid on July 31 of the preceding year. Make the adjusting entry to shift the current installment of the long term note payable to a current liability. Also accrue interest expense at year end.
b. Gross salaries for the last payroll of the fiscal year were $4,300.
c. Employer payroll taxes owed are $850.
d. On February 1, the company collected one year’s rent of $6,900 in advance.
Requirements
1. Using the four column ledger format, open the listed accounts and insert the unadjusted June 30 balances.
2. Journalize and post the June 30 adjusting entries to the accounts that you opened. Key adjusting entries by letter.
3. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at June 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and journalizing payroll amounts
Louis Welch is general manager of United Tanning Salons. During 2012, Welch worked for the company all year at a $6,200 monthly salary. He also earned a yearend bonus equal to 10% of his salary. Welch’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $850 per month, plus $924 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $70 per month, plus $40 on the bonus. The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Welch authorized the following payroll deductions: Charity Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $5 per month. United incurred payroll tax expense on Welch for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, United provides Welch with health insurance at a cost of $150 per month. During 2012, United paid $4,000 into Welch’s retirement plan.
Requirements
1. Compute Welch’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.
2. Compute United’s total 2012 payroll expense for Welch.
3. Make the journal entry to record United’s expense for Welch’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions
The following transactions of Plymouth Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012:
|
2011
|
|
Jan
|
9
|
Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $7,000, signing a six month, 9% note payable for that amount.
|
|
29
|
Recorded the week’s sales of $67,000, three fourths on credit, and one fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax.
|
|
2012
|
|
Feb
|
5
|
Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state.
|
|
28
|
Borrowed $210,000 on a four year, 8% note payable that calls for $52,500 annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and long term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts.
|
|
Jul
|
9
|
Paid the six month, 9% note, plus interest, at maturity.
|
|
Aug
|
31
|
Purchased inventory for $6,000, signing a six month, 11% note payable.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 4% of sales of $608,000.
|
|
31
|
Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate interest accrual for each note payable.
|
|
Feb
|
28
|
Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four year note payable.
|
|
29
|
Paid off the 11% note plus interest at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions in Plymouth’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions
The following transactions of Dunn Miles occurred during 2012:
|
Apr
|
30
|
Miles is party to a patent infringement lawsuit of $230,000. Miles’s attorney is certain it is remote that Miles will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
Jun
|
30
|
Estimated warranty expense at 3% of sales of $430,000.
|
|
Jul
|
28
|
Warranty claims paid in the amount of $6,400.
|
|
Sep
|
30
|
Miles is party to a lawsuit for copyright violation of $130,000. Miles’s attorney advises that it is probable Miles will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
Dec
|
31
|
Miles estimates warranty expense on sales for the second half of the year of $510,000 at 3%.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize required transactions, if any, in Miles’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method), card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue
Relaxing Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions
|
2011
|
|
|
Jul 1
|
Sold inventory to Great – Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine month, 12% note. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Oct 31
|
Recorded credit and debit card sales for the period of $21,000.
|
|
Nov 3
|
Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $410.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Great – Mart note.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $15,200 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts is $11,600.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
Apr 1
|
Collected the maturity value of the Great – Mart note.
|
|
Jun 23
|
Sold merchandise to Ambiance, Corp., receiving a 60 day, 9% note for $13,000. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Aug 22
|
Ambiance, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.
|
|
Nov 16
|
Loaned $21,000 cash to Creed, Inc., receiving a 90 day, 8% note.
|
|
Dec 5
|
Collected in full on account from Ambiance, Corp.
|
|
31
|
Accrued the interest on the Creed, Inc., note.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Relaxing Recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year. Round to the nearest dollar.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable and accruing interest
Kelly Realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2012.
|
Note
|
Date
|
Principal Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term
|
|
(1)
|
Aug 1
|
$ 24,000
|
17%
|
1 year
|
|
(2)
|
Nov 30
|
18,000
|
6%
|
6 months
|
|
(3)
|
Dec 19
|
12,000
|
12%
|
30 days
|
Requirements
For each note, compute interest using a 360 day year. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Journalize the entry to record the inception of each of the three notes and also journalize a single adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, the fiscal year end, to record accrued interest revenue on all three notes.
3. Journalize the collection of principal and interest at maturity of all three notes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable, dishonored notes, and accrued interest revenue
Consider the following transactions for Jo Jo Music.
|
2011
|
|
Dec 6
|
Received a $7,000, 90 day, 12% note on account from Dark Star Music.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Dark Star Music note.
|
|
31
|
Made a closing entry for interest revenue.
|
|
2012
|
|
Mar 4
|
Collected the maturity value of the Dark Star Music note.
|
|
Jun 30
|
Loaned $11,000 cash to Love Joy Music, receiving a six month, 11% note.
|
|
Oct 2
|
Received a $2,400, 60 day, 11% note for a sale to Voice Publishing. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Dec 1
|
Voice Publishing dishonored its note at maturity; wrote off the note as uncollectible, debiting Allowance for uncollectible accounts.
|
|
30
|
Collected the maturity value of the Love Joy Music note.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize all transactions for Jo Jo Music. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using ratio data to evaluate a company’s financial position
The comparative financial statements of Lakeland Cosmetic Supply for 2012, 2011, and 2010 include the data shown here:
|
2012
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Balance sheet—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 90,000
|
$ 70,000
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
145,000
|
175,000
|
125,000
|
|
Receivables, net
|
290,000
|
260,000
|
250,000
|
|
Inventories
|
370,000
|
335,000
|
325,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
60,000
|
15,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 955,000
|
$ 855,000
|
$ 780,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 560,000
|
$ 600,000
|
$ 690,000
|
|
Income statement—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue (all on account)
|
$5,860,000
|
$5,140,000
|
$4,200,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute these ratios for 2012 and 2011:
a. Acid test ratio
b. Days’ sales in receivables
c. Accounts receivable turnover
2. Considering each ratio individually, which ratios improved from 2011 to 2012 and which ratios deteriorated? Is the trend favorable or unfavorable for the company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explaining common types of receivables and designing internal controls for receivables
Tutor Tots performs tutoring services on account, so virtually all cash receipts arrive by mail and are then placed in the petty cash box for a week. Average daily cash receipts are $24,000. Jennifer Swanson, the owner, has just returned from a meeting with new ideas for the business. Among other things, Swanson plans to institute stronger internal controls over cash receipts from customers.
Requirements
1. What types of receivables are most likely to be collected by Tutor Tots?
2. List the following procedures in the correct order.
a. Another person, such as the owner or the manager, compares the amount of the bank deposit to the total of the customer credits posted by the accountant. This gives some assurance that the day’s cash receipts went into the bank and that the same amount was posted to customer accounts.
b. The person who handles cash should not prepare the bank reconciliation.
c. An employee with no access to the accounting records deposits the cash in the bank immediately.
d. The remittance slips go to the accountant, who uses them for posting credits to the customer accounts.
e. Someone other than the accountant opens the mail. This person separates customer checks from the accompanying remittance slips.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write off methods, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
On October 31, 2012, Blossom Floral Supply had a $180,000 debit balance in Accounts receivable and a $7,200 credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts. During November, Blossom made
- sales on account, $560,000.
- collections on account, $598,000.
- write offs of uncollectible receivables, $9,000.
Requirements
1. Journalize all November entries using the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense was estimated at 1% of credit sales. Show all November activity in Accounts receivable, Allowance for uncollectible accounts, and Uncollectible account expense (post to these T accounts).
2. Using the same facts, assume instead that Blossom used the direct write off method to account for uncollectible receivables. Journalize all November entries using the direct write off method. Post to Accounts receivable and Uncollectible account expense and show their balances at November 30, 2012.
3. What amount of uncollectible account expense would Blossom report on its November income statement under each of the two methods? Which amount better matches expense with revenue? Give your reason.
4. What amount of net accounts receivable would Blossom report on its November 30, 2012 balance sheet under each of the two methods? Which amount is more realistic? Give your reason.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method), card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue
Sleepy Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:
|
2011
|
|
Jul 1
|
Sold inventory to Go – Mart, receiving a $37,000, nine month, 8% note. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Oct 31
|
Recorded credit and debit card sales for the period of $19,000.
|
|
Nov 3
|
Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $420.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Go – Mart note.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $14,100 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts is $10,200.
|
|
2012
|
|
Apr 1
|
Collected the maturity value of the Go – Mart note.
|
|
Jun 23
|
Sold merchandise to Appeal, Corp., receiving a 60 day, 12% note for $7,000. Ignore cost of goods sold
|
|
Aug 22
|
Appeal, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable
|
|
Nov 16
|
Loaned $23,000 cash to Creed, Inc., receiving a 90 day, 16% note.
|
|
Dec 5
|
Collected in full on account from Appeal, Corp.
|
|
31
|
Accrued the interest on the Creed, Inc., note.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Sleepy Recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year. Round to the nearest dollar.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable and accruing interest
Christie Realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2012.
|
Note
|
Date
|
Principal Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term
|
|
(1)
|
Jun 1
|
$ 12,000
|
10%
|
1 year
|
|
(2)
|
Sep 30
|
20,000
|
9%
|
6 months
|
|
(3)
|
Oct 19
|
10,000
|
12%
|
30 days
|
Requirements
For each note, compute interest using a 360 day year. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Journalize the entry to record the inception of each of the three notes and also journalize a single adjusting entry at October 31, 2012, the fiscal year end, to record accrued interest revenue on all three notes.
3. Journalize the collection of principal and interest at maturity of all three notes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable, dishonored notes, and accrued interest revenue
Consider the following transactions for Rural Beginnings.
|
2011
|
|
Dec 6
|
Received a $4,000, 90 day, 9% note on account from AM Publishing.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the AM Publishing note.
|
|
31
|
Made a closing entry for interest revenue.
|
|
2012
|
|
Mar 4
|
Collected the maturity value of the AM Publishing note.
|
|
Jun 30
|
Loaned $15,000 cash to Johnathon’s Publishing, receiving a six month, 8% note.
|
|
Oct 2
|
Received a $2,000, 60 day, 8% note for a sale to Ying Yang Music. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Dec 1
|
Ying Yang Music dishonored its note at maturity; wrote off the note as uncollectible, debiting Allowance for uncollectible accounts.
|
|
30
|
Collected the maturity value of the Johnathon’s Publishing note.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize all transactions for Rural Beginnings. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using ratio data to evaluate a company’s financial position
The comparative financial statements of Perfection Cosmetic Supply for 2012, 2011, and 2010 include the data that follow:
|
2012
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Balance sheet—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 60,000
|
$ 50,000
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
155,000
|
155,000
|
120,000
|
|
Receivables, net
|
300,000
|
240,000
|
260,000
|
|
Inventories
|
355,000
|
320,000
|
320,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
75,000
|
25,000
|
55,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 945,000
|
$ 790,000
|
$ 815,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 590,000
|
$ 580,000
|
$ 680,000
|
|
Income statement—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue (all on account)
|
$5,830,000
|
$5,110,000
|
$4,210,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute these ratios for 2012 and 2011:
a. Acid test ratio
b. Days’ sales in receivables
c. Accounts receivable turnover
2. Considering each ratio individually, which ratios improved from 2011 to 2012 and which ratios deteriorated? Is the trend favorable or unfavorable for the company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision Case 8 1 Weddings on Demand sells on account and manages its own receivables. Average experience for the past three years has been as follows:
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
210,000
|
|
Bad debt expense
|
4,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
61,000
|
Unhappy with the amount of bad debt expense she has been experiencing, Aledia Sanchez, owner of Weddings on Demand, is considering a major change in her business. Her plan would be to stop selling on account altogether but accept either cash, credit, or debit cards from her customers. Her market research indicates that if she does so, her sales will increase by 10% (i.e., from $350,000 to $385,000), of which $200,000 will be credit or debit card sales, and the rest will be cash sales. With a 10% increase in sales, there will also be a 10% increase in Cost of goods sold. If she adopts this plan, she will no longer have bad debt expense, but she will have to pay a fee on debit/credit card transactions of 2% of sales. She also believes this plan will allow her to save $5,000 per year in other operating expenses.
Requirement
1. Should Sanchez start accepting debit and credit cards? Show the computations of net income under her present arrangement and under the plan. (Challenge)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E Z Loan, Co., makes loans to high risk borrowers. E Z borrows from its bank and then lends money to people with bad credit. The bank requires E Z Loan to submit quarterly financial statements in order to keep its line of credit. E Z’s main asset is Notes receivable. Therefore, Uncollectible note expense and Allowance for uncollectible notes are important accounts. Slade McMurphy, the owner of E Z Loan, wants net income to increase in a smooth pattern, rather than increase in some periods and decrease in others. To report smoothly increasing net income, McMurphy underestimates Uncollectible note expense in some periods. In other periods, McMurphy overestimates the expense. He reasons that over time the income overstatements roughly offset the income understatements.
Requirement
1. Is McMurphy’s practice of smoothing income ethical? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dylan worked for a propane gas distributor as an accounting clerk in a small Midwestern town. Last winter, his brother Mike lost his job at the machine plant. By January, temperatures were sub zero, and Mike had run out of money. Dylan saw that Mike’s account was overdue, and he knew Mike needed another delivery to heat his home. He decided to credit Mike’s account and debit the balance to the parts inventory, because he knew the parts manager, the owner’s son, was incompetent and would never notice the extra entry. Months went by, and Dylan repeated the process until an auditor ran across the charges by chance. When the owner fired Dylan, he said “if you had only come to me and told me about Mike’s situation, we could have worked something out.”
Requirements
1. What can a business like this do to prevent employee fraud of this kind?
2. What effect would Dylan’s actions have on the balance sheet? The income statement?
3. How much discretion does a business have with regard to accommodating hardship situations? (Challenge)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bob Davidson and Sheila Thornton worked for several years as sales representatives for Xerox Corporation. During this time, they became close friends as they acquired expertise with the company’s full range of copier equipment. Now they see an opportunity to put their experience to work and fulfill lifelong desires to establish their own business. Rolltide College, located in their city, is expanding, and there is no copy center within five miles of the campus. Business in the area is booming, and the population in this section of the city is growing. Davidson and Thornton want to open a copy center, similar to a FedEx Office, near the campus. A small shopping center across the street from the college has a vacancy that would fit their needs. Davidson and Thornton each have $20,000 to invest in the business, and they forecast the need for $30,000 to renovate the store. Xerox Corporation will lease two large copiers to them at a total monthly rental of $4,000. With enough cash to see them through the first six months of operation, they are confident they can make the business succeed. The two work very well together, and both have excellent credit ratings. Davidson and Thornton must borrow $40,000 to amass a total startup capital of $80,000, which will allow them to start the business, advertise its opening, and keep it running for its first six months. Assume the role of Davidson and Thornton, the partners who will own Rolltide Copy Center.
Requirements
1. As a group, visit a copy center to familiarize yourselves with its operations. If possible, interview the manager or another employee. Then write a loan request that Davidson and Thornton will submit to a bank with the intent of borrowing $40,000 to be paid back over three years. The loan will be a personal loan to the partnership of Davidson and Thornton, not to Rolltide Copy Center. The request should specify all the details of Davidson and Thornton’s plan that will motivate the bank to grant the loan. Include a budgeted income statement for the first six months of the copy center’s operation.
2. As a group, interview a loan officer in a bank. Have the loan officer evaluate your loan request. Write a report, or make a presentation to your class—as directed by your instructor—to reveal the loan officer’s decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing notes receivable transactions
Big Ted Toys sells on account. When a customer account becomes three months old, Big Ted converts the account to a note receivable and immediately discounts the note to a bank. During 2012, Big Ted completed the following transactions:
|
Aug 29
|
Sold goods on account to V. Mayer, $3,000.
|
|
Dec 1
|
Received a $3,000, 60 day, 11% note from Mayer in satisfaction of his past due account receivable.
|
|
1
|
Sold the Mayer note by discounting it to a bank for $2,600.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in Big Ted’s journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing notes receivable transactions
A company received the following notes during 2012. The notes were discounted on the dates and at the rates indicated:
|
Note
|
Date
|
Principal Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term
|
Date Discounted
|
Discount Rate
|
|
(1)
|
Jun 1
|
$ 13,000
|
10%
|
120 days
|
Aug 15
|
13%
|
|
(2)
|
Aug 19
|
10,000
|
9%
|
90 days
|
Aug 30
|
11%
|
|
(3)
|
Jul 15
|
4,000
|
7%
|
6 months
|
Oct 15
|
9%
|
Identify each note by number, compute interest using a 360 day year, and round all interest amounts to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Determine the discount and proceeds from the sale (discounting) of each note.
3. Journalize the discounting of notes (1) and (2).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing notes receivable transactions
A company received the following notes during 2012. The notes were discounted on the dates and at the rates indicated:
|
Note
|
Date
|
Principal Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term
|
Date Discounted
|
Discount Rate
|
|
(1)
|
Jun 1
|
$ 12,000
|
13%
|
120 days
|
Sep 10
|
16%
|
|
(2)
|
Aug 19
|
11,000
|
8%
|
90 days
|
Jun 20
|
10%
|
|
(3)
|
Jul 15
|
8,000
|
6%
|
6 months
|
Oct 15
|
8%
|
Requirements
Identify each note by number, compute interest using a 360 day year, and round all interest amounts to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Determine the discount and proceeds from the sale (discounting) of each note.
3. Journalize the discounting of notes (1) and (2).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Distinguishing capital expenditures from expenses
Consider the following expenditures:
a. Purchase price.
b. Ordinary recurring repairs to keep the machinery in good working order.
c. Lubrication before machinery is placed in service.
d. Periodic lubrication after machinery is placed in service.
e. Major overhaul to extend useful life by three years.
f. Sales tax paid on the purchase price.
g. Transportation and insurance while machinery is in transit from seller to buyer.
h. Installation.
i. Training of personnel for initial operation of the machinery.
j. Income tax paid on income earned from the sale of products manufactured by the machinery.
Requirement
1. Classify each of the expenditures as a capital expenditure or an expense related to machinery.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing depreciation—three methods
Papa’s Fried Chicken bought equipment on January 2, 2012, for $39,000. The equipment was expected to remain in service for four years and to perform 11,000 fry jobs. At the end of the equipment’s useful life, Papa’s estimates that its residual value will be $6,000. The equipment performed 1,100 jobs the first year, 3,300 the second year, 4,400 the third, and 2,200 the fourth year.
Requirements
1. Prepare a schedule of depreciation expense per year for the equipment under the three depreciation methods. After two years under double declining balance depreciation, the company switched to the straight line method. Show your computations.
2. Which method tracks the wear and tear on the equipment most closely?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Measuring asset cost, UOP depreciation, and asset trade
Safety Trucking Company uses the units of production (UOP) depreciation method because UOP best measures wear and tear on the trucks. Consider these facts about one Mack truck in the company’s fleet. When acquired in 2010, the rig cost $450,000 and was expected to remain in service for 10 years or 1,000,000 miles. Estimated residual value was $150,000. The truck was driven 82,000 miles in 2010, 122,000 miles in 2011, and 162,000 miles in 2012. After 45,000 miles in 2013, the company traded in the Mack truck for a lessex pensive Freightliner. Safety also paid cash of $22,000. Fair value of the Mack truck was equal to its net book value on the date of the trade.
Requirement
1. Determine Safety’s cost of the new truck. Journal entries are not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision Case 7 3 San Diego Harbor Tours has poor internal control over cash. Ben Johnson, the owner, suspects the cashier of stealing. Here are some details of company cash at September 30:
a. The Cash account in the ledger shows a balance of $6,450.
b. The September 30 bank statement shows a balance of $4,300. The bank statement lists a $200 bank collection, a $10 service charge, and a $40 NSF check.
c. At September 30, the following checks are outstanding:
d. There is a $3,000 deposit in transit at September 30.
e. The cashier handles all incoming cash and makes bank deposits. He also writes checks and reconciles the monthly bank statement. Johnson asks you to determine whether the cashier has stolen cash from the business and, if so, how much.
Requirements
1. Perform your own bank reconciliation using the format illustrated in the chapter. There are no bank or book errors.
2. Explain how Johnson can improve his internal controls.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mel O’Conner owns rental properties in Michigan. Each property has a manager who collects rent, arranges for repairs, and runs advertisements in the local newspaper. The property managers transfer cash to O’Conner monthly and prepare their own bank reconciliations. The manager in Lansing has been stealing from the company. To cover the theft, he understates the amount of the outstanding checks on the monthly bank reconciliation. As a result, each monthly bank reconciliation appears to balance. However, the balance sheet reports more cash than O’Conner actually has in the bank. O’Conner is currently putting his entire business up for sale. In negotiating the sale of the business, O’Conner is showing the balance sheet to prospective buyers.
Requirements
1. Identify who, other than O’Conner, could be harmed by this theft. In what ways could they be harmed?
2. Discuss the role accounting plays in this situation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Levon Helm was a kind of one man mortgage broker. He would drive around Tennessee looking for homes that had second mortgages, and if the criteria were favorable, he would offer to buy the second mortgage for “cash on the barrelhead.” Helm bought low and sold high, making sizable profits. Being a small operation, he employed one person, Cindy Patterson, who did all his bookkeeping. Patterson was an old family friend, and he trusted her so implicitly that he never checked up on the ledgers or the bank reconciliations. At some point, Patterson started “borrowing” from the business and concealing her transactions by booking phony expenses. She intended to pay it back someday, but she got used to the extra cash and couldn’t stop. By the time the scam was discovered, she had drained the company of funds that it owed to many of its investors. The company went bankrupt, Patterson did some jail time, and Helm lost everything.
Requirements
1. What was the key control weakness in this case?
2. Many small businesses cannot afford to hire enough people for adequate separation of duties. What can they do to compensate for this?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Applying the allowance method (aging of accounts) to account for uncollectibles [10 min]
Summer and Sandcastles Resort had the following balances at December 31, 2012, before the year end adjustments:
|
Accounts receivable
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
|
78,000
|
1,900
|
The aging of accounts receivable yields the following data:
|
Age of Accounts receivable
|
|
0–60 Days
|
Over 60 Days
|
Total Receivables
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$75,000
|
$3,000
|
$78,000
|
|
Percent uncollectible
|
x 4%
|
x 24%
|
|
Requirements
1. Journalize Summer’s entry to adjust the allowance account to its correct balance at December 31, 2012.
2. Prepare a T account to compute the ending balance of Allowance for uncollectible accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing interest amounts on notes receivable
A table of notes receivable for 2012 follows:
|
Principal
|
Interest Rate
|
Interest Period During 2012
|
|
Note 1
|
$ 30,000
|
8%
|
4 months
|
|
Note 2
|
10,000
|
11%
|
45 days
|
|
Note 3
|
19,000
|
10%
|
75 days
|
|
Note 4
|
100,000
|
7%
|
10 months
|
Requirement
1. For each of the notes receivable, compute the amount of interest revenue earned during 2012. Use a 360 day year, and round to the nearest dollar.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting receivables and other accounts in the financial statements
Northend Medical Center included the following items in its financial statements:
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
$ 150
|
Service revenue
|
$ 14,700
|
|
Cash
|
1,010
|
Other assets
|
380
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,590
|
Cost of services sold and other expenses
|
12,400
|
|
Accounts payable
|
900
|
Notes payable
|
3,490
|
Requirements
1. How much net income did Northend earn for the month?
2. Show two ways Northend can report receivables on its classified balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the acid test ratio and days’ sales in receivables to evaluate a company
Southside Clothiers reported the following items at September 30, 2012 (last year’s—2011—amounts also given as needed):
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 320,000
|
Accounts receivable, net:
|
|
Cash
|
260,000
|
September 30, 2012
|
$ 270,000
|
|
Inventories
|
|
September 30, 2011
|
170,000
|
|
September 30, 2012
|
290,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,150,000
|
|
September 30, 2011
|
200,000
|
Short–term investments
|
140,000
|
|
Net sales revenue
|
2,920,000
|
Other current assets
|
120,000
|
|
Long–term assets
|
420,000
|
Other current liabilities
|
180,000
|
|
Long–term liabilities
|
130,000
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Compute Southside’s (a) acid test ratio, (b) days’ sales in average receivables for 2012, and (c) accounts receivable turnover ratio. Evaluate each ratio value as strong or weak. Southside sells on terms of net 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying and correcting internal control weakness
Suppose The Right Rig Dealership is opening a regional office in Omaha. Cary Regal, the office manager, is designing the internal control system. Regal proposes the following procedures for credit checks on new customers, sales on account, cash collections, and write offs of uncollectible receivables:
- The credit department runs a credit check on all customers who apply for credit.
- When an account proves uncollectible, the credit department authorizes the write off of the account receivable.
- Cash receipts come into the credit department, which separates the cash received from the customer remittance slips. The credit department lists all cash receipts by customer name and amount of cash received.
- The cash goes to the treasurer for deposit in the bank. The remittance slips go to the accounting department for posting to customer accounts.
- The controller compares the daily deposit slip to the total amount posted to customer accounts. Both amounts must agree.
Requirement
1. Identify the internal control weakness in this situation, and propose a way to correct it.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
At December 31, 2012, the Accounts receivable balance of GPS Technology is $190,000. The Allowance for doubtful accounts has an $8,600 credit balance. GPS Technology prepares the following aging schedule for its accounts receivable:
|
Age of Accounts
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1–30 Days
|
31–60 Days
|
61–90 Days
|
Over 90 Days
|
|
$190,000
|
$80,000
|
$60,000
|
$40,000
|
$10,000
|
|
Estimated percent uncollectible
|
0.4 %
|
5.0 %
|
6.0 %
|
50.0 %
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the year end adjusting entry for doubtful accounts on the basis of the aging schedule. Show the T account for the Allowance for uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2012.
2. Show how GPS Technology will report its net Accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
At September 30, 2012, Windy Mountain Flagpoles had Accounts receivable of $34,000 and Allowance for uncollectible accounts had a credit balance of $3,000. During October 2012, Windy Mountain Flagpoles recorded the following:
- Sales of $189,000 ($165,000 on account; $24,000 for cash).
- Collections on account, $133,000.
- Uncollectible account expense, estimated as 1% of credit sales.
- Write offs of uncollectible receivables, $2,800.
Requirements
1. Journalize sales, collections, uncollectible account expense using the allowance method (percent of sales method), and write offs of uncollectibles during October 2012.
2. Prepare T accounts to show the ending balances in Accounts receivable and Allowance for uncollectible accounts. Compute netaccounts receivable at October 31. How much does Windy Mountain expect to collect?
3. Show how Windy Mountain Flagpoles will report net Accounts receivable on its October 31, 2012 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing transactions using the direct write off method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
High Performance Cell Phones sold $23,000 of merchandise to Anthony Trucking Company on account. Anthony fell on hard times and paid only $8,000 of the account receivable. After repeated attempts to collect, High Performance finally wrote off its accounts receivable from Anthony. Six months later High Performance received Anthony’s check for $15,000 with a note apologizing for the late payment.
Requirements
1. Journalize for High Performance:
a. Sale on account, $23,000. (Ignore cost of goods sold.)
b. Collection of $8,000 on account.
c. Write off of the remaining portion of Anthony’s account receivable. High Performance uses the direct write off method for uncollectibles.
d. Reinstatement of Anthony’s account receivable.
e. Collection in full from Anthony, $15,000.
2. Show how High Performance would report receivables on its balance sheet after all entries have been posted.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing card sales, note receivable transactions, and accruing interest
Marathon Running Shoes reports the following:
|
2012
|
|
May 4
|
Recorded Estate credit card sales of $107,000, net of processor fee of 3%.
|
|
Sep 1
|
Loaned $17,000 to Jean Porter, an executive with the company, on a one year, 15% note.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Accrued interest revenue on the Porter note.
|
|
2013
|
|
Sep 1
|
Collected the maturity value of the Porter note.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize all entries required for Marathon Running Shoes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing note receivable transactions
The following selected transactions occurred during 2012 for Caspian Importers. The company ends its accounting year on April 30, 2012:
|
Feb 1
|
Loaned $14,000 cash to Brett Dowling on a one year, 8% note.
|
|
Apr 6
|
Sold goods to Putt Masters, receiving a 90 day, 6% note for $9,000.
|
|
30
|
Made a single entry to accrue interest revenue on both notes.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize all required entries from February 1 through April 30, 2012. Use a 360 day year for interest computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing note receivable transactions
Hot Heat Steam Cleaning performs services on account. When a customer account becomes four months old, Hot Heat converts the account to a note receivable. During 2012, the company completed the following transactions:
|
Apr
|
28
|
Performed service on account for Sinclair Club, $18,000.
|
|
Sep
|
1
|
Received an $18,000, 60 day, 9% note from Sinclair Club in satisfaction of its past due account receivable.
|
|
Oct
|
31
|
Collected the Sinclair Club note at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in Hot Heat’s journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating ratio data
Algonquin Carpets reported the following amounts in its 2013 financial statements. The 2012 figures are given for comparison.
|
|
2013
|
|
2012
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 4,000
|
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
|
20,000
|
|
9,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 63,000
|
|
$ 76,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for uncollectibles
|
6,000
|
57,000
|
5,000
|
71,000
|
|
Inventory
|
|
195,000
|
|
191,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
|
4,000
|
|
4,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
$ 280,000
|
|
$ 285,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
$ 104,000
|
|
$ 106,000
|
|
Net sales (all on account)
|
|
$ 732,000
|
|
$ 735,000
|
Requirements
1. Calculate Algonquin’s acid test ratio for 2013. Determine whether Algonquin’s acid test ratio improved or deteriorated from 2012 to 2013. How does Algonquin’s acid test ratio compare with the industry average of 0.80?
2. Calculate the days’ sales in receivables for 2013. How do the results compare with Algonquin’s credit terms of net 30?
3. Calculate Algonquin’s accounts receivable turnover ratio. How does Algonquin’s ratio compare to the industry average accounts receivable turnover of 10?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Collection period for receivables
Contemporary Media Sign Company sells on account. Recently, Contemporary reported the following figures:
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Net sales
|
$ 572,000
|
$ 600,000
|
|
Receivables at end of year
|
38,700
|
46,100
|
Requirements
1. Compute Contemporary’s average collection period on receivables during 2012.
2. Suppose Contemporary’s normal credit terms for a sale on account are “2/10, net 30.” How well does Contemporary’s collection period compare to the company’s credit terms? Is this good or bad for Contemporary?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explaining common types of receivables and designing internal controls for receivables
Organizational Kings performs organizational consulting services on account, so virtually all cash receipts arrive in the mail. Average daily cash receipts are $36,000. Katie Stykle, the owner, has just returned from a meeting with new ideas for the business. Among other things, Stykle plans to institute stronger internal controls over cash receipts from customers.
Requirements
1. What types of receivables are most likely to be collected by Organizational Kings?
2. List the following procedures in the correct order.
a. Another person, such as the owner or the manager, compares the amount of the bank deposit to the total of the customer credits posted by the accountant. This gives some assurance that the day’s cash receipts went into the bank and that the same amount was posted to customer accounts.
b. The person who handles cash should not prepare the bank reconciliation.
c. An employee with no access to the accounting records deposits the cash in the bank immediately.
d. The remittance slips go to the accountant, who uses them for posting credits to the customer accounts.
e. Someone other than the accountant opens the mail. This person separates customer checks from the accompanying remittance slips.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write off methods, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
On August 31, 2012, Daisy Floral Supply had a $155,000 debit balance in Accounts receivable and a $6,200 credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts. During September, Daisy made
- sales on account, $590,000.
- collections on account, $627,000.
- write offs of uncollectible receivables, $7,000.
Requirements
1. Journalize all September entries using the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense was estimated at 3% of credit sales. Show all September activity in Accounts receivable, Allowance for uncollectible accounts, and
Uncollectible account expense (post to these T accounts).
2. Using the same facts, assume instead that Daisy used the direct write off method to account for uncollectible receivables. Journalize all September entries using the direct write off method. Post to Accounts receivable and Uncollectible account expense and show their balances at September 30, 2012.
3. What amount of uncollectible account expense would Daisy report on its September income statement under each of the two methods? Which amount better matches expense with revenue? Give your reason.
4. What amount of net accounts receivable would Daisy report on its September 30, 2012 balance sheet under each of the two methods? Which amount is more realistic? Give your reason.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet At September 30, 2012, the accounts of Mountain Terrace Medical Center (MTMC) include the following:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 145,000
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts (credit balance)
|
3,500
|
During the last quarter of 2012, MTMC completed the following selected transactions:
|
Dec 28
|
Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectible: Regan, Co., $1,300; Owen Mac, $900; and Rain, Inc., $700.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Recorded uncollectible account expense based on the aging of accounts receivable, as follows:
|
|
Age of Accounts
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1–30 Days
|
31–60 Days
|
61–90 Days
|
Over 90 Days
|
|
$165,000
|
$97,000
|
$ 37,000
|
$ 14,000
|
$ 17,000
|
|
Estimated percent uncollectible
|
0.3%
|
3%
|
30%
|
35%
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Open the Allowance for uncollectible accounts T account, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance.
3. Show how Mountain Terrace Medical Center should report net accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet. Use the three line reporting format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method (percentage of sales), and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
Quality Watches completed the following selected transactions during 2012 and 2013:
|
2012
|
|
Dec 31
|
Estimated that uncollectible account expense for the year was 2% of credit sales of $450,000 and recorded that amount as expense. Use the allowance method.
|
|
31
|
Made the closing entry for uncollectible account expense.
|
|
2013
|
|
Jan 17
|
Sold inventory to Malcom Monet, $700, on account. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Jun 29
|
Wrote off Malcom Monet’s account as uncollectible after repeated efforts to collect from him.
|
|
Aug 6
|
Received $700 from Malcom Monet, along with a letter apologizing for being so late. Reinstated Monet’s account in full and recorded the cash receipt.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Made a compound entry to write off the following accounts as uncollectible: Brian Kemper, $1,600; May Milford, $1,000; and Ronald Richter, $400.
|
|
31
|
Estimated that uncollectible account expense for the year was 2% on credit sales of $460,000 and recorded the expense.
|
|
31
|
Made the closing entry for uncollectible account expense.
|
Requirements
1. Open T accounts for Allowance for uncollectible accounts and Uncollectible account expense. Keep running balances, assuming all accounts begin with a zero balance.
2. Record the transactions in the general journal, and post to the two T accounts.
3. Assume the December 31, 2013, balance of Accounts receivable is $135,000. Show how net Accounts receivable would be reported on the balance sheet at that date. Use the three line format of reporting the net accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Exuberance Corp. presented its financial statements under the national GAAP of “Strangeland” (country) until 2004. It adopted IFRS from 2005 and is required to prepare an opening IFRS balance sheet as at January 1, 2004. In preparing the IFRS opening balance sheet Exuberance Corp. noted
• Under its previous GAAP, Exuberance Corp. had deferred advertising costs of $1,000,000 and had classified proposed dividends of $500,000 as a current liability.
• It had not made a provision for warranty of $200,000 in the financial statements presented under previous GAAP since the concept of “constructive obligation” was not recognised under its previous GAAP.
• In arriving at the amount to be capitalized as part of costs necessary to bring an asset to its working condition, Exuberance Corp. had not included professional fees of $300,000 paid to architects at the time when the building it currently occupies as its head office was being constructed.
Required
Advise Exuberance Corp. on the treatment of all the above items under IFRS 1
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under which one of the following circumstances would an entity’s current year’s financial statements not qualify as first IFRS financial statements?
(a) The entity prepared its financial statements under IFRS in the previous year and these were meant for internal purposes only.
(b) The entity prepared the previous year’s financial statements under its national GAAP.
(c) The entity prepared its previous year’s financial statements in conformity with all requirements of IFRS, but these statements did not contain an explicit and unreserved statement that they complied with IFRS.
(d) The entity prepared its previous year’s financial statements in conformity with all requirements of IFRS, and these statements did contain an explicit and unreserved statement that they complied with IFRS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Playful has ordered an amount of inventory from a supplier on July 1, 20X5. The supplier has said that the goods will be shipped and delivered on September 1, 20X5. The goods were actually received on September 30, 20X5. The supplier has agreed to accept 2,000 shares in Playful as payment for the inventory.
Playful has received an invoice for $50,000. This invoice is only for accounting purposes as the fair value of the goods is difficult to determine because of the highly specialized nature of the inventory.
The shares vest immediately in the supplier as soon as they are received.
The directors of the entity are unsure as to the effect that a movement in the entity’s share price will have on equity settled share based payments.
Prior to the applicable date in IFRS 2, Playful had granted share options to each of its directors. On January 1, 20X6, Playful decided to reprice the options at a new exercise price. Playful has also granted share appreciation rights to the members of a middle management committee.
The share appreciation rights provide these employees with the right to receive cash equal to the appreciation in the entity’s share price since the grant date, which was January 1, 20X6. All of the rights vest on December 31, 20X7, and they can be exercised during 20X8. It is anticipated that 5% of the middle management personnel will leave during the period to December 31, 20X7.
Required
The entity wishes to know what the implications of the above issuance of shares and share options are for the financial statements of Playful and its subsidiary. Ignore the deferred taxation effects.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Mack, a public limited company, grants 5,000 share options each to its 20 executives on June 1, 20X5, on these vesting conditions:
• The executives must remain in the company’s employment during the vesting period.
• The share price must reach $10 a share before the share options vest.
• The company’s earnings must increase cumulatively by more than 5% in the first year, 10% in second year, and 16% in the third year after the grant date for the options to vest in that year.
The company has calculated that the fair value of each option at the grant date is $5. The exercise price of the option is $3, and the exercise date is August 1, 20X8. The shares will vest as soon as all of the above conditions are met.
The company’s earnings increased by 4% in the year to May 31, 20X6. At that date, it expects that the earnings will increase by 7% in 20X7 and 6% in 20X8. Additionally, it is anticipated that one director will leave every year.
At May 31, 20X6, no directors had left, but it is anticipated that two directors will leave in the next year (they did) and two in the year to May 31, 20X8. The cumulative increase in earnings by the end of May 31, 20X7, is 10%. The performance target will be met in 20X8, and only one director will leave in that year.
The shares of the entity are ordinary shares of $1, and the tax rate applicable in the jurisdiction is 30%.
Tax allowances are based on the intrinsic value of the share. The share price of Mack was
|
$ per share
|
|
June 1, 20X5
|
5
|
|
May 31, 20X6
|
7
|
|
May 31, 20X7
|
10
|
|
May 31, 20X8
|
13
|
|
August 1, 20X8
|
14
|
Required
Show the accounting entries, including deferred taxation, for the above share based payment transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity issues shares as consideration for the purchase of inventory. The shares were issued on January 1, 20X4. The inventory is eventually sold on December 31, 20X5. The value of the inventory on January 1, 20X4, was $3 million. This value was unchanged up to the date of sale. The sale proceeds were $5 million. The shares issued have a market value of $3.2 million. Which of the following statements correctly describes the accounting treatment of this share based payment transaction?
(a) Equity is increased by $3 million, inventory is increased by $3 million; the inventory value is expensed on sale on December 31, 20X5.
(b) Equity is increased by $3.2 million, inventory is increased by $3.2 million; the inventory value is expensed on sale on December 31, 20X5.
(c) Equity is increased by $3 million, inventory is increased by $3 million; the inventory value is expensed over the two years to December 31, 20X5.
(d) Equity is increased by $3.2 million, inventory is increased by $3.2 million; the inventory value is expensed over the two years to December 31, 20X5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Entity A is an unlisted entity, and its shares are owned by two directors. The directors have decided to issue 100 share options to an employee in lieu of many years’ service. However, the fair value of the share options cannot be reliably measured as the entity operates in a highly specialized market where there are no comparable companies. The exercise price is $10 per share, and the options were granted on January 1, 20X4, when the value of the shares was also estimated at $10 per share. At the end of the financial year, December 31, 20X4, the value of the shares was estimated at $15 per share and the options vested on that date. What value should be placed on the share options issued to the employee for the year ended December 31, 20X4?
(a) $1,000
(b) $1,500
(c) $ 500
(d) $ 250
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying internal controls
Consider the following situations.
a. While reviewing the records of Quality Pharmacy, you find that the same employee orders merchandise and approves invoices for payment.
b.. Business is slow at Amazing Amusement Park on Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday nights. To reduce expenses, the owner decides not to use a ticket taker on those nights. The ticket seller (cashier) is told to keep the tickets as a record of the number sold.
c. The same trusted employee has served as cashier for 12 years.
d. When business is brisk, Quickie Mart deposits cash in the bank several times during the day. The manager at one store wants to reduce the time employees spend delivering cash to the bank, so he starts a new policy. Cash will build up over weekends, and the total will be deposited on Monday.
e. Grocery stores such as Convenience Market and Natural Foods purchase most merchandise from a few suppliers. At another grocery store, the manager decides to reduce paperwork. He eliminates the requirement that the receiving department prepare a receiving report listing the goods actually received from the supplier.
Requirement
1. Consider each situation separately. Identify the missing internal control procedure from these characteristics:
? Assignment of responsibilities
? Separation of duties
? Audits
? Electronic controls
? Other controls (specify)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using a bank reconciliation as a control device
Lynn Cavender owns Cavender Boot City. She fears that a trusted employee has been stealing from the company. This employee receives cash from customers and also prepares the monthly bank reconciliation. To check up on the employee, Cavender prepares her own bank reconciliation, as shown. This reconciliation is both complete and accurate, based on the available data.
|
CAVENDER’S BOOT CITY Bank Reconciliation January 31, 2012
|
|
Bank
|
Books
|
|
Balance, January 31
|
$ 1,500
|
Balance, January 31
|
$ 1,050
|
|
Add: Deposit in transit
|
410
|
Add: Bank collection
|
790
|
|
Less: Outstanding checks
|
1,080
|
Interest revenue
|
15
|
|
Adjusted bank balance
|
$ 830
|
Less: Service charge
|
20
|
|
|
Adjusted book balance
|
$ 1,835
|
Requirements
1. How is the preparation of a bank reconciliation considered to be a control device?
2. Which side of the reconciliation shows the true cash balance?
3. What is Cavender’s true cash balance?
4. Does it appear that the employee has stolen from the company?
5. If so, how much? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying bank reconciliation items
The following items could appear on a bank reconciliation:
a. Outstanding checks, $670.
b. Deposits in transit, $1,500.
c. NSF check from customer, #548 for $175.
d. Bank collection of our note receivable of $800, and interest of $80.
e. Interest earned on bank balance, $20.
f. Service charge, $10.
g. Book error: We credited Cash for $200. The correct amount was $2,000.
h. Bank error: The bank decreased our account by $350 for a check written by another customer.
Requirement
1. Classify each item as (1) an addition to the book balance, (2) a subtraction from the book balance, (3) an addition to the bank balance, or (4) a subtraction from the bank balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a bank reconciliation
Brett Knight operates four bowling alleys. He just received the October 31 bank statement from City National Bank, and the statement shows an ending balance of $905. Listed on the statement are an EFT rent collection of $410, a service charge of $10, NSF checks totaling $70, and a $30 charge for printed checks. In reviewing his cash records, Knight identified outstanding checks totaling $450 and a deposit in transit of $1,775. During October, he recorded a $310 check by debiting Salary expense and crediting Cash for $31. His Cash account shows an October 31 balance
of $2,209.
Requirements
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation at October 31.
2. Journalize any transactions required from the bank reconciliation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash
Karen’s Dance Studio created a $370 imprest petty cash fund. During the month, the fund custodian authorized and signed petty cash tickets as follows:
|
Petty Cash Ticket No.
|
Item
|
Account Debited
|
Amount
|
|
1
|
Delivery of programs to customers
|
Delivery expense
|
$ 25
|
|
2
|
Mail package
|
Postage expense
|
15
|
|
3
|
Newsletter
|
Supplies expense
|
35
|
|
4
|
Key to closet
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
55
|
|
5
|
Computer jump drive
|
Supplies expense
|
80
|
Requirement
1. Make the general journal entries to
a. create the petty cash fund and
b. record its replenishment. Cash in the fund totals $147, so $13 is missing. Include explanations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Correcting internal control weakness
Each of the following situations has an internal control weakness.
a. Upside – Down Applications develops custom programs to customer’s specifications. Recently, development of a new program stopped while the programmers redesigned Upside – Down’s accounting system. Upside – Down’s accountants could have performed this task.
b. Norma Rottler has been your trusted employee for 24 years. She performs all cashhandling and accounting duties. Ms. Rottler just purchased a new Lexus and a new home in an expensive suburb. As owner of the company, you wonder how she can afford these luxuries because you pay her only $30,000 a year and she has no
source of outside income.
c. Izzie Hardwoods, a private company, falsified sales and inventory figures in order to get an important loan. The loan went through, but Izzie later went bankrupt and could not repay the bank.
d. The office supply company where Pet Grooming Goods purchases sales receipts recently notified Pet Grooming Goods that its documents were not prenumbered. Howard Mustro, the owner, replied that he never uses receipt numbers.
e. Discount stores such as Cusco make most of their sales for cash, with the remainder in credit card sales. To reduce expenses, one store manager ceases purchasing fidelity bonds on the cashiers.
f. Cornelius’ Corndogs keeps all cash receipts in an empty bread box for a week, because he likes to go to the bank on Tuesdays when Joann is working.
Requirements
1. Identify the missing internal control characteristics in each situation.
2. Identify the possible problem caused by each control weakness.
3. Propose a solution to each internal control problem.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions
On June 1, Bash Salad Dressings creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $450. During June, Al Franklin, the fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash Ticket No.
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
Office supplies
|
$ 15
|
|
102
|
Cab fare for executive
|
10
|
|
103
|
Delivery of package across town
|
20
|
|
104
|
Dinner money for city manager to entertain the mayor
|
35
|
|
105
|
Inventory
|
65
|
On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of
$310. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense,
Travel expense, Delivery expense, Entertainment expense, and Inventory.
Requirements
1. Explain the characteristics and the internal control features of an imprest fund.
2. On June 30, how much cash should the petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
3. Journalize all required entries to create the fund and replenish it. Include explanations.
4. Make the July 1 entry to increase the fund balance to $475. Include an explanation, and briefly describe what the custodian does.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions
Suppose that on June 1, Rockin’ Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $500. During June, Michael Martell, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash Ticket No.
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
1
|
Postage for package received
|
$ 20
|
|
2
|
Decorations and refreshments for office party
|
25
|
|
3
|
Two boxes of stationery
|
35
|
|
4
|
Printer cartridges
|
15
|
|
5
|
Dinner money for sales manager entertaining a customer
|
75
|
On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $325. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.
Requirements
1. On June 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.
3. Make the entry on July 1 to increase the fund balance to $550. Include an explanation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Making an ethical judgment
North Bank has a loan receivable from Westminster Dance Company. Westminster is late making payments to the bank, and Kevin McHale, a North Bank vice president, is helping Westminster restructure its debt. McHale learns that Westminster is depending on landing a $1,500,000 contract from Envy Theater, another North Bank client. McHale also serves as Envy’s loan officer at the bank. In this capacity, he is aware that Envy is considering declaring bankruptcy. McHale has been a great help to Westminster, and Westminster’s owner is counting on him to carry the company through this difficult restructuring. To help the bank collect on this large loan, McHale has a strong motivation to help Westminster survive.
Requirements
1. Identify the ethical issue that McHale is facing. Specify the two main alternatives available to McHale.
2. Identify the possible consequences of McHale identifying Envy’s financial position to Westminster Dance Company.
3. Identify the correct ethical decision McHale must make based on the two alternatives identified in Requirement 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a bank reconciliation and journal entries
The October 31 bank statement of White’s Healthcare has just arrived from State Bank. To prepare the bank reconciliation, you gather the following data:
a. The October 31 bank balance is $5,170.
b. The bank statement includes two charges for NSF checks from customers. One is for $420 (#1), and the other is for $120 (#2).
c. The following White checks are outstanding at October 31:
|
Check No.
|
Amount
|
|
237
|
$ 90
|
|
288
|
150
|
|
291
|
580
|
|
294
|
590
|
|
295
|
10
|
|
296
|
150
|
d. White collects from a few customers by EFT. The October bank statement lists a $1,400 EFT deposit for a collection on account.
e. The bank statement includes two special deposits that White hasn’t recorded yet: $1,050, for dividend revenue, and $50, the interest revenue White earned on its bank balance during October.
f. The bank statement lists a $70 subtraction for the bank service charge.
g. On October 31, the White treasurer deposited $290, but this deposit does not appear on the bank statement.
h. The bank statement includes a $700 deduction for a check drawn by Multi State Freight Company. White notified the bank of this bank error.
i. White’s Cash account shows a balance of $2,700 on October 31.
Requirements
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation for White’s Healthcare at October 31, 2012.
2. Journalize any required entries from the bank reconciliation. Include an explanation for each entry
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions
On September 1, Cool Salad Dressings creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $250. During September, Michael Martell, the fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash Ticket No.
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
Office supplies
|
$ 30
|
|
102
|
Cab fare for executive
|
20
|
|
103
|
Delivery of package across town
|
35
|
|
104
|
Dinner money for city manager to entertain the mayor
|
25
|
|
105
|
Inventory
|
80
|
7 On September 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $65. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Travel expense, Delivery expense, Entertainment expense, and Inventory.
Requirements
1. Explain the characteristics and the internal control features of an imprest fund.
2. On September 30, how much cash should the petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
3. Journalize all required entries to create the fund and replenish it. Include explanations.
4. Make the October 1 entry to increase the fund balance to $300. Include an explanation, and briefly describe what the custodian does.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions
Suppose that on September 1, Bash Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $250. During September, Ruth Mangan, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash Ticket No.
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
1
|
Postage for package received
|
$ 30
|
|
2
|
Decorations and refreshments for office party
|
10
|
|
3
|
Two boxes of stationery
|
25
|
|
4
|
Printer cartridges
|
35
|
|
5
|
Dinner money for sales manager entertaining a customer
|
65
|
On September 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $80. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.
Requirements
1. On September 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.
3. Make the entry on October 1 to increase the fund balance to $325. Include an explanation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Making an ethical judgment
Citizenship Bank has a loan receivable from Therot Recording Company. Therot is late making payments to the bank, and Robert Phelps, a Citizenship Bank vice president, is helping Therot restructure its debt. Phelps learns that Therot is depending on landing a $1,000,000 contract from Starstruck Theater, another Citizenship Bank client. Phelps also serves as Starstruck’s loan officer at the bank. In this capacity, he is aware that Starstruck is considering declaring bankruptcy. Phelps has been a great help to Therot, and Therot’s owner is counting on him to carry the company through this difficult restructuring. To help the bank collect on this large loan, Phelps has a strong motivation to help Therot survive.
Requirements
1. Identify the ethical issue that Phelps is facing. Specify the two main alternatives available to Phelps.
2. Identify the possible consequences of Phelps identifying Starstruck’s financial position to Therot Recording Company.
3. Identify the correct ethical decision Phelps must make based on the two alternatives identified in Requirement 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision Case 7 2 This case is based on an actual situation. Centennial Construction
Company, headquartered in Dallas, Texas, built a Rodeway Motel 35 miles north of Dallas.
The construction foreman, whose name was Slim Chance, hired the 40 workers needed to complete the project. Slim had the construction workers fill out the necessary tax forms, and he sent their documents to the home office. Work on the motel began on April 1 and ended September 1. Each week, Slim filled out a time card of hours worked by each employee during the week. Slim faxed the time sheets to the home office, which prepared the payroll checks on Friday morning. Slim drove to the home office on Friday, picked up the payroll checks, and returned to the construction site. At 5 PM on Friday, Slim distributed payroll checks to the workers.
Requirements
1. Describe in detail the main internal control weakness in this situation. Specify what negative result(s) could occur because of the internal control weakness.
2. Describe what you would do to correct the internal control weakness.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
An entity has purchased the whole of the share capital of another entity for a purchase consideration of $20 million. The goodwill arising on the transaction was $5 million. It was planned at the outset that the information systems would be merged in order to create significant savings. Additionally the entity was purchased because of its market share in a particular jurisdiction and because of its research projects. Subsequently the cost savings on the information systems were made. The government of the jurisdiction introduced a law that restricted the market share to below that anticipated by the entity, and some research projects were abandoned because of lack of funding.
Required
Explain any potential indicators of the impairment of goodwill.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
The calculation refers to an impairment loss suffered by subsidiary Zen at December 31, 20X4:
|
Goodwill
|
Net assets
|
Total
|
|
$m
|
$m
|
$m
|
|
December 31, 20X4—carrying value
|
300
|
900
|
1200
|
|
Impairment
|
(300)
|
(200)
|
(500)
|
|
|
700
|
700
|
There has been a favorable change in the estimates of the recoverable amount of Zen’s net assets since the impairment loss was recognized. The recoverable amount is now $800 million at December 31, 20X5. The net assets’ carrying value would have been $720 million at December 31, 20X5. Assets are depreciated at 20% reducing balance.
Required
Show the accounting treatment for the reversal of the impairment loss as of December 31, 20X5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Excellent Inc. is an oil entity that is exploring oil off the shores of Excessoil Islands. It has employed oil exploration experts from around the globe. Despite all efforts, there is a major oil spill that has grabbedthe attention of the media. Environmentalists are protesting and the entity has engaged lawyers to advise it about legal repercussions. In the past, other oil entities have had to settle with the environmentalists, paying huge amounts in out of court settlements. The legal counsel of Excellent Inc. has advised it that there is no law that would require it to pay anything for the oil spill; the parliament of Excessoil Islands is currently considering such legislation, but that legislation would probably take another year to be finalized as of the date of the oil spill. However, in its television advertisements and promotional brochures, Excellent Inc. often has clearly stated that it is very conscious of its responsibilities toward the environment and will make good any losses that may result from its exploration. This policy has been widely publicized, and the chief executive officer has acknowledged this policy in official meetings when members of the public raised questions to him on this issue.
Required
Does the above give rise to an obligating event that requires Excellent Inc. to make a provision for the cost of making good the oil spill?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
XYZ Inc. is getting ready to move its factory from its existing location to a new industrial free zone specially created by the government for manufacturers. To avail itself of the preferential licensing offered by the local governmental authorities as a reward for moving into the free trade zone and the savings in costs that would ensue (since there are no duties or taxes in the free trade zone), XYZ Inc. has to move into the new location before the end of the year. The lease on its present location is non cancel able and is for another two years from year end. The obligation under the lease is the annual rent of $100,000.
Required
Advise XYZ Inc. what amount, if any, it needs to provide at year end toward this lease obligation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
The board of directors of ABC Inc. at their meeting held on December 15, 20X1, decided to close down the entity’s international branches and shift its international operations and consolidate them with its domestic operations. A detailed formal plan for winding up the international operations was also formalized and agreed by the board of directors in that meeting. Letters were sent out to customers, suppliers, and workers soon thereafter. Meetings were called to discuss the features of the formal plan to wind up international operations, and representatives of all interested parties were presenting those meetings.
Required
Do the actions of the board of directors create a constructive obligation that needs a provision for restructuring?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Amazon Inc. has been sued for following three alleged infringements of law:
(1) Unauthorized use of a trademark; the claim is for $100 million
(2) Nonpayment of end of service severance pay and gratuity to 5,000 employees who were terminated without Amazon Inc. giving any reason; the class action lawsuit is claiming $3 million
(3) Unlawful environmental damage for dumping waste in the river near its factory; environmentalists are claiming unspecified damages as cleanup costs
Legal counsel is of the opinion that not all the legal cases are tenable in law and has communicated to Amazon Inc. this assessment of the three lawsuits:
Lawsuit 1: The chances of this lawsuit are remote.
Lawsuit 2: It is probable that Amazon Inc. would have to pay the displaced employees, but the best estimate of the amount that would be payable if the plaintiff succeeds against the entity is $2 million.
Lawsuit 3: There is no current law that would compel the entity to pay for such damages. There may be a case for constructive obligation, but the amount of damages cannot be estimated with any reliability.
Required
What should be the provision that Amazon Inc. should recognize or the contingent liability that it should disclose in each of the lawsuits, based on the assessments of its legal counsel?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
A Singapore based shipping company lost an entire shipload of cargo valued at $5 million on a voyage to Australia. It is, however, covered by an insurance policy. According to the report of the surveyor the amount is collectible, subject to the deductible clause (i.e., 10% of the claim) in the insurance policy. Before year end, the shipping company received a letter from the insurance company that a check was in the mail for 90% of the claim.
The international freight forwarding company that entrusted the shipping company with the delivery of the cargo overseas has filed a lawsuit for $5 million, claiming the value of the cargo that was lost on high seas, and also consequential damages of $2 million resulting from the delay. According to the legal counsel of the shipping company, it is probable that the shipping company would have to pay the $5 million, but it is a remote possibility that it would have to pay the additional $2 million claimed by the international freight forwarding company, since this loss was specifically excluded in the freight forwarding contract.
Required
What provision or disclosure would the shipping company need to make at year end?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When can a “provision” be recognized in accordance with IAS 37?
(a) When there is a legal obligation arising from a past (obligating) event, the probability of the outflow of resources is more than remote (but less than probable), and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
(b) When there is a constructive obligation as a result of a past (obligating) event, the outflow of resources is probable, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
(c) When there is a possible obligation arising from a past event, the outflow of resources is probable, and an approximate amount can be set aside toward the obligation.
(d) When management decides that it is essential that a provision be made for unforeseen circumstances and keeping in mind this year the profits were enough but next year there may be losses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Amazon Inc. has been served a legal notice on December 15, 20X1, by the local environmental protection agency (EPA) to fit smoke detectors in its factory on or before June 30, 20X2 (before June 30 of the following year). The cost of fitting smoke detectors in its factory is estimated at $250,000. How should Amazon Inc. treat this in its financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X1?
(a) Recognize a provision for $250,000 in the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X1.
(b) Recognize a provision for $125,000 in the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X1, because the other 50% of the estimated amount will be recognized next year in the financial statement for the year ended December 31, 20X2.
(c) Because Amazon Inc. can avoid the future expenditure by changing the method of operations and thus there is no present obligation for the future expenditure, no provision is required at December 31, 20X1, but as there is a possible obligation, this warrants disclosure in footnotes to the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X1.
(d) Ignore this for the purposes of the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X1, and neither disclose nor provide the estimated amount of $250,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A competitor has sued an entity for unauthorized use of its patented technology. The amount that the entity may be required to pay to the competitor if the competitor succeeds in the lawsuit is determinable with reliability, and according to the legal counsel it is less than probable (but more than remote) that an outflow of the resources would be needed to meet the obligation. The entity that was sued should at yearend:
(a) Recognize a provision for this possible obligation.
(b) Make a disclosure of the possible obligation in footnotes to the financial statements.
(c) Make no provision or disclosure and wait until the lawsuit is finally decided and then expense the amount paid on settlement, if any.
(d) Set aside, as an appropriation, a contingency reserve, an amount based on the best estimate of the possible liability.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A factory owned by XYZ Inc. was destroyed by fire. XYZ Inc. lodged an insurance claim for the value of the factory building, plant, and an amount equal to one year’s net profit. During the year there were a number of meetings with the representatives of the insurance company. Finally, before year end, it was decided that XYZ Inc. would receive compensation for 90% of its claim. XYZ Inc. received a letter that the settlement check for that amount had been mailed, but it was not received before year end. How should XYZ Inc. treat this in its financial statements?
(a) Disclose the contingent asset in the footnotes.
(b) Wait until next year when the settlement check is actually received and not recognize or disclose this receivable at all since at year end it is a contingent asset.
(c) Because the settlement of the claim was conveyed by a letter from the insurance company that also stated that the settlement check was in the mail for 90% of the claim, record 90% of the claim as a receivable as it is virtually certain that the contingent asset will be received.
(d) Because the settlement of the claim was conveyed by a letter from the insurance company that also stated that the settlement check was in the mail for 90% of the claim, record 100% of the claim as a receivable at year end as it is virtually certain that the contingent asset will be received, and adjust the 10% next year when the settlement check is actually received.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The board of directors of ABC Inc. decided on December 15, 20XX, to wind up international operations in the Far East and move them to Australia. The decision was based on a detailed formal plan of restructuring as required by IAS 37. This decision was conveyed to all workers and management personnel at the headquarters in Europe. The cost of restructuring the operations in the Far East as per this detailed plan was $2 million. How should ABC Inc. treat this restructuring in its financial statements for the year end December 31, 20XX?
(a) Because ABC Inc. has not announced the restructuring to those affected by the decision and thus has not raised an expectation thatABC Inc. will actually carry out the restructuring (and as no constructive obligation has arisen), only disclose the restructuring decision and the cost of restructuring of $2 million in footnotes to the financial statements.
(b) Recognize a provision for restructuring since the board of directors has approved it and it has been announced in the headquarters of ABC Inc. in Europe.
(c) Mention the decision to restructure and the cost involved in the chairman’s statement in the annual report since it a decision of the board of directors.
(d) Because the restructuring has not commenced before year end, based on prudence, wait until next year and do nothing in this year’s financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Brilliant Inc. acquires copyrights to the original recordings of a famous singer. The agreement with the singer allows the company to record and rerecord the singer for a period of five years. During the initial six month period of the agreement, the singer is very sick and consequently cannot record. The studio time that was blocked by the company had to be paid even during the period the singer could not sing.
These costs were incurred by the company:
|
(a) Legal cost of acquiring the copyrights
|
$10 million
|
|
(b) Operational loss (studio time lost, etc.) during start up period
|
$ 2 million
|
|
(c) Massive advertising campaign to launch the artist
|
$ 1 million
|
Required
Which of the above items is a cost that is eligible for capitalization as an intangible asset?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Extreme Inc. is a newly established enterprise. It was set up by an entrepreneur who is generally interested in the business of providing engineering and operational support services to aircraft manufacturers. Extreme Inc., through the contacts of its owner, received a confirmed order from a well known aircraft manufacturer to develop new designs for ducting the air conditioning of their aircraft. For this project, Extreme Inc. needed funds aggregating to $1 million. It was able to convince venture capitalists and was able to obtain funding of $1 million from two Silicon Valley venture capitalists. The expenditures Extreme Inc. incurred in pursuance of its research and development project follow, in chronological order:
• January 15, 20X5: Paid $175,000 toward salaries of the technicians (engineers and consultants)
• March 31, 20X5: Incurred $250,000 toward cost of developing the duct and producing the test model
• June 15, 20X5: Paid an additional $300,000 for revising the ducting process to ensure that product could be introduced in the market
• August 15, 20X5: Developed, at a cost of $80,000, the first model (prototype) and tested it with the air conditioners to ensure its compatibility
• October 30, 20X5: A focus group of other engineering providers was invited to a conference for the introduction of this new product. Cost of the conference aggregated to $50,000.
Required
What is the proper accounting treatment for the various costs incurred during 20X5?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Costs generally incurred by a newly established entity include
(a) Preopening costs of a business facility
(b) Recipes, secret formulas, models and designs, prototype
(c) Training, customer loyalty, and market share
(d) An in house–generated accounting software
(e) The design of a pilot plan
(f) Licensing, royalty, and stand still agreements
(g) Operating and broadcast rights
(h) Goodwill purchased in a business combination
(i) A company developed patented drug approved for medical use
(j) A license to manufacture a steroid by means of a government grant
(k) Cost of courses taken by management in quality engineering management
(l) A television advertisement that will stimulate the sales in the technology industry
Required
Which of the above mentioned costs are eligible for capitalization according to IAS 38, and which of them should be expensed when they are incurred?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Active Asset Inc. owns a freely transferable taxi operator’s license, which it acquired on January 1, 20X1, at an initial cost of $10,000. The useful life of the license is five years (based on the date it is valid for). The entity uses the straight line method to amortize the intangible. Such licenses are frequently traded either between existing operators or with aspiring operators. At the balance sheet date, on December 31, 20X2, due to a government permitted increase in fixed taxi fares, the traded values of such a license was $12,000. The accumulated amortization on December 31, 20X2, amounted to $4,000.
Required
What journal entries are required at December 31, 20X2, to reflect the increase/decrease in carrying value (cost or revalued amount less accumulated depreciation) on the revaluation of the operating license based on the traded values of similar license? Also, what would be the resultant carrying value of the intangible asset after the revaluation?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
XYZ Inc. and its subsidiaries have provided you, their International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) specialist, with a list of the properties they own:
(a) Land held by XYZ Inc. for undetermined future use
(b) A vacant building owned by XYZ Inc. and to be leased out under an operating lease
(c) Property held by a subsidiary of XYZ Inc., a real estate firm, in the ordinary course of its business
(d) Property held by XYZ Inc. for the use in production
(e) A hotel owned by ABC Inc., a subsidiary of XYZ Inc., and for which ABC Inc. provides security services for its guests’ belongings
Required
Advise XYZ Inc. and its subsidiaries as to which of the above mentioned properties would qualify under IAS 40 as investment properties. If they do not qualify thus, how should they be treated under IFRS?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Investors Galore Inc., a listed company in Germany, ventured into construction of a mega shopping mall in south Asia, which is rated as the largest shopping mall of Asia. The company’s board of directors aftermarket research decided that instead of selling the shopping mall to a local investor, who had approached them several times during the construction period with excellent offers which he progressively increased during the year of construction, the company would hold this property for the purposes of earning rentals by letting out space in the shopping mall to tenants. For this purpose it used the services of a real estate company to find an anchor tenant (a major international retail chain) that then attracted other important retailers locally to rent space in the mega shopping mall, and within months of the completion of the construction the shopping mall was fully let out.
The construction of the shopping mall was completed and the property was placed in service at the end of 20X1. According to the company’s engineering department the computed total cost of the construction of the shopping mall was $100 million. An independent valuation expert was used by the company to fair value the shopping mall on an annual basis. According to the fair valuation expert the fair values of the shopping mall at the end of 20X1 and at each subsequent year end thereafter wereThe independent valuation expert was of the opinion that the useful life of the shopping mall was 10 years and its residual value was $10 million.
Required
What would be the impact on the profit and loss account of the company if it decides to treat the shopping mall as an investment property under IAS 40 (a) Using the “fair value model”; and (b) Using the “cost model.” (Since the rental income for the shopping mall would be the same under both the options, for the purposes of this exercise do not take into consideration the impact of the rental income from the shopping mall on the net profit or loss for the period).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
An entity has these balances in its financial records:
|
$m
|
|
Value of biological asset at cost 12/31/X1
|
600
|
|
Fair valuation surplus on initial recognition at fair value 12/31/X1
|
700
|
|
Change in fair value to 12/31/X2 due to growth and price fluctuations
|
100
|
|
Decrease in fair value due to harvest
|
90
|
Required
Show how these values would be incorporated into the financial statements at December 31, 20X2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
A public limited company, Dairy, produces milk on its farms. It produces 30% of the country’s milk that is consumed. Dairy owns 450 farms and has a stock of 210,000 cows and 105,000 heifers. The farms produce 8 million kilograms of milk a year, and the average inventory held is 150,000 kilograms of milk.
However, the company is currently holding stocks of 500,000 kilograms of milk in powder form. At October 31, 20X4, the herds are
• 210,000 cows (3 years old), all purchased on or before November 1, 20X3
• 75,000 heifers, average age 1.5 years, purchased on April 1, 20X4
• 30,000 heifers, average age 2 years, purchased on November 1, 20X3
No animals were born or sold in the year.
The unit values less estimated point of sale costs were
|
1 year old animal at October 31, 20X4:
|
$32
|
|
2 year old animal at October 31, 20X4:
|
$45
|
|
1.5 year old animal at October 31, 20X4:
|
$36
|
|
3 year old animal at October 31, 20X4:
|
$50
|
|
1 year old animal at November 1, 20X3 and
|
|
April 1, 20X4:
|
$30
|
|
2 year old animal at November 1, 20X3:
|
$40
|
The company has had problems during the year: Contaminated milk was sold to customers. As a result, milk consumption has gone down. The government has decided to compensate farmers for potential loss in revenue from the sale of milk. This fact was published in the national press on September 1, 20X4. Dairy received an official letter on October 10, 20X4, stating that $5 million would be paid to it on January 2, 20X5.
The company’s business is spread over different parts of the country. The only region affected by the contamination was Borthwick, where the government curtailed milk production in the region. The cattle were unaffected by the contamination and were healthy. The company estimates that the future discounted cash flow income from the cattle in the Borthwick region amounted to $4 million, after taking into account the government restriction order. The company feels that it cannot measure the fair value of the cows in the region because of the problems created by the contamination. There are 60,000 cows and 20,000 heifers in the region. All these animals had been purchased on November 1, 20X3. A rival company had offered Dairy $3 million for these animals after point of sale costs and further offered $6 million for the farms themselves in that region. Dairy has no intention of selling the farms at present. The company has been applying IAS 41 since November 1, 20X3.
Required
Advise the directors on how the biological assets and produce of Dairy should be accounted for under IAS 41, discussing the implications for the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates the accounting for a cash flow hedge.
Facts
Entity A is a producer of widgets. To hedge the risk of declines in the price of 100 widgets that it expects to sell on December 31, 20X8, Entity A on January 1, 20X7, enters into a net settled forward contract on 100 widgets for delivery on December 31, 20X8. During 20X7, the change in the fair value of the forward contract is a decrease of $8,000. During 20X8, the change in the fair value of the forward contract is an increase of $2,000. On December 31, 20X8, Entity A settles the forward contract by paying $6,000.At the same time, it sells 100 widgets to customers for $93,000.
Required
Prepare the appropriate journal entries on January 1, 20X7, December 31, 20X7, and December 31,
20X8. Assume that all conditions for hedge accounting are met and that the hedging relationship is fully effective (100%).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the principle for recognition of a financial asset or a financial liability in IAS 39?
(a) A financial asset is recognized when, and only when, it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the entity and the cost or value of the instrument can be measured reliably.
(b) A financial asset is recognized when, and only when, the entity obtains control of the instrument and has the ability to dispose of the financial asset independent of the actions of others.
(c) A financial asset is recognized when, and only when, the entity obtains the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset and has the ability to dispose the financial asset.
(d) A financial asset is recognized when, and only when, the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Is there any exception to the requirement to measure at fair value financial assets classified as at fair value through profit or loss or available for sale?
(a) No. Such assets are always measured at fair value.
(b) Yes. If the fair value of such assets increases above cost, the resulting unrealized holding gains are not recognized but deferred until realized.
(c) Yes. If the entity has the positive intention and ability to hold assets classified in those categories to maturity, they are measured at amortized cost.
(d) Yes. Investments in unquoted equity instruments that cannot be reliably measured at fair value (or derivatives that are linked to and must be settled in such unquoted equity instruments) are measured at cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under IAS 39, is a derivative (e.g., an equity conversion option) that is embedded in another contract (e.g., a convertible bond) accounted for separately from that other contract?
(a) Yes. IAS 39 requires all derivatives (both freestanding and embedded) to be accounted for as derivatives.
(b) No. IAS 39 precludes entities from splitting financial instruments and accounting for the components separately.
(c) It depends. IAS 39 requires embedded derivatives to be accounted for separately as derivatives if, and only if, the entity has embedded the derivative in order to avoid derivatives accounting and has no substantive business purpose for embedding the derivative.
(d) It depends. IAS 39 requires embedded derivatives to be accounted for separately if, and only if, the economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative and the host contract are not closely related and the combined contract is not measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognized in profit or loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the accounting treatment of the hedging instrument and the hedged item under fair value hedge accounting?
(a) The hedging instrument is measured at fair value, and the hedged item is measured at fair value with respect to the hedged risk.
Changes in fair value are recognized in profit or loss.
(b) The hedging instrument is measured at fair value, and the hedged item is measured at fair value with respect to the hedged risk.
Changes in fair value are recognized directly in equity to the extent the hedge is effective.
(c) The hedging instrument is measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognized directly in equity to the extent the hedge is effective. The accounting for the hedged item is not adjusted.
(d) The hedging instrument is accounted for in accordance with the accounting requirements for the hedged item (i.e., at fair value, cost or amortized cost, as applicable), if the hedge is effective.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Entity A has a profit after tax of $15 million for the year ended December 31, 20X2. These appropriations of profit have not been included in this amount:
|
$m
|
|
(1) Arrears of cumulative preference dividend for 2 years ended December 31,20X2
|
4
|
|
(2) Ordinary dividends
|
5
|
|
(3) Preference share premium payable on redemption—appropriation of profit
|
1
|
|
(4) Exceptional profit (net of tax)
|
4
|
These share transactions occurred during the year ended December 31, 20X2. The entity had 3 million ordinary shares of $1 outstanding at January 1, 20X2:
|
Ordinary shares
|
|
|
Date
|
issued/purchased
|
|
|
January 1
|
250,000
|
Issued at $5 per share $1 paid to date: entitled participate
|
|
|
in dividends to the extent paid up
|
|
April 1
|
600,000
|
Full market price $3 per share issue
|
|
July 1
|
(400,000)
|
Purchase of own shares at $3.5 per share
|
|
|
|
|
Required
Calculate basic earnings per share.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Entity A has made a net profit attributable to ordinary shareholders of $2 million for the year to December 31, 20X1. Ten million ordinary shares were outstanding for the entire year. Since January 20X0 there has been $800,000 of 5% convertible loan stock in issue. The terms of conversion are for every $100 nominal value of stock.
On
|
June 30, 20X1
|
120 ordinary shares
|
|
June 30, 20X2
|
150 ordinary shares
|
|
June 30, 20X3
|
140 ordinary shares
|
Assume that interest on loan stock is allowable for tax relief at 30%.
Required
Calculate basic and diluted earnings per share. (Assume that no conversion takes place in the year.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
An entity issues 4 million convertible bonds at January 1, 20X1. The bonds mature in three years and are issued at their face value of $10. The bonds attract interest arrears. Each bond can be converted into two ordinary shares. The company can settle the principal amount of the bonds in ordinary shares or in cash. When the bonds are issued, the interest rate for a similar debt without the conversion rights is 10%. At the issue date the market price of an ordinary share is $4. Ignore taxation. The company is likely to settle the contract by issuing shares.
|
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders to December 31, 20X1
|
$33 million
|
|
Ordinary shares outstanding
|
10 million
|
|
Allocation of proceeds of bond
|
|
Liability
|
$30 million
|
|
Equity
|
$10 million
|
|
Total
|
$40 million
|
Required
Calculate basic and diluted earnings per share for the year to December 31, 20X1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates the accounting for issued convertible debt instruments.
Facts
On October 31, 20X5, Entity A issues convertible bonds with a maturity of five years. The issue is for a total of 1,000 convertible bonds. Each bond has a par value of $100,000, a stated interest rate is 5% per year, and is convertible into 5,000 ordinary shares of Entity A. The convertible bonds are issued at par.
The per share price for an Entity A share is $15. Quotes for similar bonds issued by Entity A without a conversion option (i.e., bonds with similar principal and interest cash flows) suggest that they can be sold for $90,000.
Required
(a) Indicate how Entity A should account for the compound instrument on initial recognition.
(b) Determine whether the effective interest rate will be higher, lower, or equal to 5%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates the application of the conditions for offsetting of financial assets and financial liabilities.
Facts
Entity A has a legal right to set off cash flows due to Entity B (i.e., payables of Entity A) against amounts due from Entity B (i.e., receivables of Entity A). Entity A has these payables to Entity B: $1,000,000 on March 31, $3,000,000 on June 30, and $2,500,000 on October 31. Entity A has these receivables from Entity B: $500,000 on January 15, $4,000,000 on June 30, and $1,000,000 on December 15.
Required
Indicate the extent to which Entity A can set off the aforementioned receivables and payables in its balance sheet, assuming it has an intention to settle offsetting amounts net or simultaneously on each settlement date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements best describes the principle for classifying an issued financial instrument as either a financial liability or equity?
(a) Issued instruments are classified as liabilities or equity in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangement and the definitions of a financial liability, financial asset, and an equity instrument.
(b) Issued instruments are classified as liabilities or equity in accordance with the legal form of the contractual arrangement and the definitions of a financial liability and an equity instrument.
(c) Issued instruments are classified as liabilities or equity in accordance with management’s designation of the contractual arrangement.
(d) Issued instruments are classified as liabilities or equity in accordance with the risk and rewards of the contractual arrangement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following instruments would not be classified as a financial liability?
(a) A preference share that will be redeemed by the issuer for a fixed amount of cash on a future date (i.e., the entity has an outstanding share that it will repurchase at a future date).
(b) A contract for the delivery of as many of the entity’s ordinary shares as are equal in value to $100,000 on a future date (i.e., the entity will issue a variable number of own shares in return for cash at a future date).
(c) A written call option that gives the holder the right to purchase a fixed number of the entity’s ordinary shares in return for a fixed price (i.e., the entity would issue a fixed number of own shares in return for cash, if the option is exercised by the holder, at a future date).
(d) An issued perpetual debt instrument (i.e., a debt instrument for which interest will be paid for all eternity, but the principal will not be repaid).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the principle of accounting for a compound instrument (e.g., an issued convertible debt instrument)?
(a) The issuer shall classify a compound instrument as either a liability or equity based on an evaluation of the predominant characteristics of the contractual arrangement.
(b) The issuer shall classify the liability and equity components of a compound instrument separately as financial liabilities, financial assets, or equity instruments.
(c) The issuer shall classify a compound instrument as a liability in its entirety, until converted into equity, unless the equity component is detachable and separately transferable, in which case the liability and equity components shall be presented separately.
(d) The issuer shall classify a compound instrument as a liability in its entirety, until converted into equity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How are the proceeds from issuing a compound instrument allocated between the liability and equity components?
(a) First, the liability component is measured at fair value, and then the remainder of the proceeds is allocated to the equity component (with and without method).
(b) First, the equity component is measured at fair value, and then the remainder of the proceeds is allocated to the liability component (with and without method).
(c) First, the fair values of both the equity component and the liability component are estimated.
Then the proceeds are allocated to the liability and equity components based on the relation between the estimated fair values (relative fair value method).
(d) The equity component is measured at its intrinsic value. The liability component is measured at the par amount less the intrinsic value of the equity component.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates the application of the principle for recognition of a financial asset or financial liability.
Facts Entity A is evaluating whether each of the next items should be recognized as a financial asset or financial liability under IAS 39:
(a) An unconditional receivable
(b) A forward contract to purchase a specified bond at a specified price at a specified date in the future
(c) A planned purchase of a specified bond at a specified date in the future
(d) A firm commitment to purchase a specified quantity of gold at a specified price at a specified date in the future. The contract cannot be net settled.
(e) A firm commitment to purchase a machine that is designated as a hedged item in a fair value hedge of the associated foreign currency risk
Required
Help Entity A by indicating whether each of the above items should be recognized as an asset or liability under IAS 39.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates the application of the principle for derecognition of financial assets
Facts
During the reporting period, Entity A has sold various financial assets:
(a) Entity A sells a financial asset for $10,000. There are no strings attached to the sale, and no other rights or obligations are retained by Entity A.
(b) Entity A sells an investment in shares for $10,000 but retains a call option to repurchase the shares at any time at a price equal to their current fair value on the repurchase date.
(c) Entity A sells a portfolio of short term account receivables for $100,000 and promises to pay up to $3,000 to compensate the buyer if and when any defaults occur. Expected credit losses are significantly less than $3,000, and there are no other significant risks.
(d) Entity A sells a portfolio of receivables for $10,000 but retains the right to service the receivables for a fixed fee (i.e., to collect payments on the receivables and pass them on to the buyer of the receivables). The servicing arrangement meets the pass through conditions.
(e) Entity A sells an investment in shares for $10,000 and simultaneously enters into a total return swap with the buyer under which the buyer will return any increases in value to Entity A and Entity A will pay the buyer interest plus compensation for any decreases in the value of the investment.
(f) Entity A sells a portfolio of receivables for $100,000 and promises to pay up to $3,000 to compensate the buyer if and when any defaults occur. Expected credit losses significantly exceed $3,000.
Required
Help Entity A by evaluating the extent to which derecognition is appropriate in each of the above cases.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates how to determine the fair value of a financial instrument.
Facts Entity A is considering how to determine the fair value of the following financial instruments:
(a) A share that is actively traded on a stock exchange
(b) A share for which no active market exists but for which quoted prices are available
(c) A loan asset originated by the entity
(d) A bond that is not actively traded but whose fair value can be determined by reference to quoted interest rates for government bonds
(e) A complex derivative that is tailor made for the entity
Required
In each of these cases, discuss whether fair value would be determined using a quoted market price or a valuation technique under IAS 39.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates how to account for available for sale financial assets.
Facts
On August 1, 2006, Entity A purchased a two year bond, which it classified as available for sale. The bond had a stated principal amount of $100,000, which Entity A will receive on August 1, 2008. The stated coupon interest rate was 10% per year, which is paid semiannually on December 31 and July 31.
The bond was purchased at a quoted annual yield of 8% on a bond equivalent yield basis.
Required
(a) What price did Entity A pay for the bond? (Hint: Compute the present value using a semiannual yield and semiannual periods.)
(b) Did Entity A purchase the bond at par, at a discount, or at a premium?
(c) Prepare the journal entry at the date Entity A purchased the bond. (Entity A paid cash to acquire the bond. Assume that no transaction costs were paid.)
(d) Prepare a bond amortization schedule for years 2006 to 2008. For each period, show cash interest receivable, recognized interest revenue, amortization of any bond discount or premium, and the carrying amount of the bond at the end of the period.
(e) Prepare the journal entries to record cash interest receivable and interest revenue on July 31,
(f) If the quoted market yield for the bond changes from 8% to 9% on December 31, 2007, should Entity A recognize an increase, a decrease, or no change in the carrying amount of the bond on that date? If you conclude that the carrying amount should change, compute the change and prepare the corresponding journal entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates how to account for derivatives.
Facts On January 1, 20X6, Entity A enters into a forward contract to purchase on January 1, 20X8, a specified number of barrels of oil at a fixed price. Entity A is speculating that the price of oil will increase and plans to net settle the contract if the price increases. Entity A does not pay anything to enter in to the forward contract on January 1, 20X6. Entity A does not designate the forward contract as a hedging instrument.
At the end of 20X6, the fair value of the forward contract has increased to $400,000. At the end of 20X7, the fair value of the forward contract has declined to $350,000.
Required
Prepare the appropriate journal entries on January 1, 20X6, December 31, 20X6, and December 31, 20X7.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates when to separate embedded derivatives.
Facts
Entity A is seeking to identify embedded derivatives that are required to be separated under IAS 39. It is considering whether these contracts contain embedded derivatives:
(a) An investment in a bond whose interest payments are linked to the price of gold. The bond is classified as at fair value through profit or loss.
(b) An investment in a bond whose interest payments are linked to the price of silver. The bond is classified as available for sale.
(c) An investment in a convertible debt instrument that is classified as available for sale
(d) A lease contract that has a rent adjustment clause based on inflation
(e) An issued convertible debt instrument
Required
Identify any embedded derivatives in these cases and, in each case, determine whether any identified embedded derivative requires separate accounting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
An entity has a defined benefit pension plan. As of January 1, 20X4, these values relate to the pension scheme:
• Fair value of plan assets: $50 million
• Present value of defined benefit obligation: $45 million
• Cumulative unrecognized actuarial gains: $8 million
• Average remaining working lives of employees: 20 years
At the end of the period at December 31, 20X4, the fair value of the plan assets has risen by $5 million.
The present value of the defined benefit obligation has risen by $3 million. The actuarial gain is $10 million, and the average remaining working lives of the employees is 20 years. The entity wishes to know the difference between the corridor approach and the full recognition of actuarial gains and losses.
Required
Show how the actuarial gain or loss for the period ending December 31, 20X4, could be recognized in the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
This information related to a defined benefit plan for the year ended December 31, 20X6:
(a) Current service cost of providing benefits for the year to December 31, 20X6: $30 million
(b) Average remaining working life of employees: 10 years
(c) Benefits paid to retired employees in the year: $31 million
(d) Contributions paid to the fund: $21 million
(e) Present value of obligation to provide benefits: $2,200 million at January 1, 20X6, and $2,500 million at December 31, 20X6
(f) Fair value of plan assets: $2,100 million at January 1, 20X6, and $2,400 million at December 31, 20X6
(g) Net cumulative unrecognized gains at January 1, 20X6: $252 million
(h) Past service cost: $115 million. All of these benefits have vested.
(i) Discount rates and expected rates of return on plan assets:
January 1, 20X6 January 1, 20X7 Discount rate 5% 6% Expected rate of return on plan assets 7% 8% The entity wishes to use the corridor approach to recognizing actuarial gains and losses.
Required
Show the amounts that will be recognized in the balance sheet and income statement for the year ended
December 31, 20X6, under IAS 19, Employee Benefits, and the movement in the net liability in the balance Sheet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity operates a defined benefit plan that pays employees an annual benefit based on their number of years of service. The annual payment does allow the employer to vary the final benefit. Over the last five years the entity has used this flexibility to increase employees’ pensions by the current growth in earnings per share. How will employees’ benefit be calculated if they retire in the current period?
(a) It will be based on the existing plan rules with no additional award.
(b) It will be based on the existing plan rules plus the current rate of growth of earnings per share.
(c) It will be based on the plan rules plus the current rate of inflation.
(d) It will be based on the plan rules plus the increase in earnings per share anticipated over the remaining working lives of the employees.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity uses International Financial Reporting Standards to prepare its financial statements, but the defined benefit obligation has been calculated using assumptions that are different from IFRS. The financial statements of the entity also do not take into account unrecognized past service costs. How should the entity measure its net pension liability?
(a) The net present value of the defined benefit obligation less the fair value of the plan assets.
(b) The net present value of the defined benefit obligation less the fair value of plan assets less the unrecognized past service costs.
(c) The net present value of the defined benefit obligation less the fair value of the plan assets less the unrecognized past service costs. In addition, a review of the assumptions should be undertaken to remeasure the obligation.
(d) The value in the entity’s balance sheet will simply be used in the consolidated financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity on December 31, 20X5, changes its defined benefit pension plan to a defined contribution plan. The entity agrees with the employees to pay them $9 million in total on the introduction of a defined contribution plan. The employees forfeit any pension entitlement for the defined benefit plan. The pension liability recognized in the balance sheet at December 31, 20X4, was $10 million. How should this curtailment be accounted for in the balance sheet at December 31, 20X5?
(a) A settlement gain of $1 million should be shown.
(b) The pension liability should be credited to reserves and a cash payment of $9 million should be shown in expense in the income statement.
(c) The cash payment should go to reserves and the pension liability should be shown as a credit to the income statement.
(d) A credit to reserves should be made of $1 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Brilliant Inc. received a grant of $60 million to compensate it for costs it incurred in planting trees over a period of five years. Brilliant Inc. will incur such costs in this manner:
|
Year
|
Costs
|
|
1
|
$ 2 million
|
|
2
|
$ 4 million
|
|
3
|
$ 6 million
|
|
4
|
$ 8 million
|
|
5
|
$10 million
|
Total costs thus incurred will aggregate to $30 million, whereas the grant received is $60 million.
Required
Based on the provisions of IAS 20, how would Brilliant Inc. treat the “grant” in its books?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Intelligent Corp. received a grant of $150 million to install and run a windmill in an economically backward area. Intelligent Inc. has estimated that such a windmill would cost $250 million to construct. The secondary condition attached to the grant is that the entity should hire labor in the local market (i.e., from the economically backward area where the windmill is located) instead of employing workers from other parts of the country. It should maintain a ratio of 1:1 local workers to workers from outside in its labor force for the next 5 years. The windmill is to be depreciated using the straight line method over a period of 10 years.
Required
Advise Intelligent Corp. on the treatment of this grant in accordance with IAS 20.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity acquired 60% of the share capital of a foreign entity on June 30, 20X6. The fair value of the net assets of the foreign entity at that date was €6 million. This value was €1.2 million higher than the carrying amount of the net assets of the foreign entity. The excess was due to the increase in value of non depreciable land. The functional currency of the entity is the dollar. The financial year end of the entity is December 31, 20X6. The exchange rates at June 30, 20X6, and December 31, 20X6, were €1.5 = $1 and €2 = $1 respectively.
What figure for the fair value adjustment should be included in the group financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X6?
(a) $600,000
(b) $800,000
(c) $2 million.
(d) $3 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
(a) Magnificent Inc. engaged a consulting firm to advise it on many projects that it had been planning to undertake in order to diversify its operations and enhance its public image and ratings. With this mandate, the consulting firm set out to prepare a feasibility study for the construction of a shopping mall that would house anchor tenants such as world class international designers and well known global retail chains. The consulting firm advised Magnificent Inc. that this kind of a project would do wonders to its corporate image. This shopping mall had certain distinguishing features that were unique in many respects, and it could easily win the coveted title of the most popular commercial complex in the country. Based on his advice, Magnificent Inc. began construction of the shopping mall on a huge plot of land in the heart of the city. Substantial amounts were spent on its construction. Architects from around the globe competed for the project, and the construction was entrusted to the best construction firm in the country. The construction took over two years from the date the project was launched. The total cost of construction was financed by a term loan from an international bank.
(b) The consulting firm also advised Magnificent Inc. to launch a car dealership that deals only in world renowned, expensive brand names, such as Rolls Royce and Alfa Romeo. According to the research study undertaken by the consulting firm, this would be yet another business to diversify and invest in order to enhance the corporate image of Magnificent Inc. with people who matter, as such an exclusive car dealership would cater only to the needs of the top management of multinational corporations (MNCs) operating in the country. Magnificent Inc. invested in this business by borrowing funds from major local banks. Besides the corporate guarantees Magnificent Inc. gave to the banks, they also insisted on depositing with the banks title deeds of the cars as security for the loans until the entire loan amounts remain unpaid.
Required
(a) Would the shopping mall be considered a qualifying asset under the Standard? Would the interest expense on the term loan borrowed for the construction of the shopping mall qualify as eligible borrowing costs?
(b) Would the expensive cars purchased by the car dealership be considered qualifying assets under the Standard, thereby making it possible for Magnificent Inc. to capitalize the borrowing costs, which are substantial compared to the costs of the cars? Would borrowing costs include guarantee commission paid to banks for arranging corporate guarantees in addition to interest expense on bank loans?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
A socially responsible multinational corporation (MNC) decided to construct a tunnel that will link two sides of the village that were separated by a natural disaster years ago. Realizing its role as a good corporate citizen, the MNC has been in this village for a couple of years exploring oil and gas in the nearby offshore area. The tunnel would take two years to build and the total capital outlay needed for the construction would be not less than $20 million. To allow itself a margin of safety, the MNC borrowed $22 million from three sources and used the extra $2 million for its working capital purposes. Financing was arranged in this way:
• Bank term loans: $5 million at 7% per annum
• Institutional borrowings: $7 million at 8% per annum
• Corporate bonds: $10 million at 9% per annum
In the first phase of the construction of the tunnel, there were idle funds of $10 million, which the MNC invested for a period of six months. Income from this investment was $500,000.
Required
If the MNC decided to opt for the “allowed alternative treatment” under IAS 23, how would it treat the borrowing costs? How would it capitalize the borrowing costs, and what would it do with the investment income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Borrowing costs can be capitalized as part of the asset when
(a) They are a qualifying asset and the entity has opted for the benchmark treatment under IAS 23.
(b) They are a qualifying asset; the entity has opted for the allowed alternative treatment under IAS 23, but it is not probable that they will result in future economic benefits to the entity.
(c) They are a qualifying asset; the entity has opted for the allowed alternative treatment under IAS 23, and it is probable that they will result in future economic benefits to the entity, but the costs cannot be measured reliably.
(d) They are a qualifying asset; the entity has opted for the allowed alternative treatment under IAS 23, and it is probable that they will result in future economic benefits to the entity, but the costs cannot be measured reliably.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Interesting Inc. is a manufacturer of automobile spare parts. It transacts business through a business model that has worked for several years and has made the entity a successful enterprise that is rated in the top 10 businesses in its field by a trade journal. Interesting Inc. believes in working with reliable and dependable vendors and also sells only to entities that it can either control or exercise significant influence over. The business model works in this way:
(a) Interesting Inc. purchases everything it needs from Excellent Inc., a well known supplier. Due to the high quality of the material that Excellent Inc. has provided over the last 10 years, Interesting Inc. has never purchased from any other supplier. Thus it may be considered economically dependent on Excellent Inc.
(b) Interesting Inc. sells 70% of its output to a company owned by a director and the balance to an entity that is its “associate” by virtue of Interesting Inc. owning 35% of the share capital of that company.
(c) Interesting Inc. stores inventory in a warehouse that is leased from the wife of its director. The lease rentals are at arm’s length.
(d) Interesting Inc. has provided an interest free loan to a company owned by the chief executive officer (CEO) of Interesting Inc. for the purposes of financing the purchase of delivery vans which the company owned by the CEO is using for transporting goods from the warehouse of the supplier to the warehouse used by Interesting Inc. for storing inventory.
Required
Based on the requirements of IAS 24, identify which transactions would need to be disclosed as related party transactions under IAS 24.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Zeeba Inc. is part of a major industrial group of companies and is known to accurately disclose related party transactions in its financial statements prepared under IFRS. With the sweeping changes that were made to the various Standards under the International Accounting Standards Board’s Improvements Project, the entity is seeking advice from IFRS specialists on whether the following transactions need to be reported under IAS 24 and, if so, to what extent, and how the related party transactions footnote should be worded.
1. Remuneration and other payments made to the entity’s chief executive officer (CEO) during the year 20XX were
a. An annual salary of $2 million
b. Share options and other share based payments valued at $1 million
c. Contributions to retirement benefit plan amounting to $1 million
d. Reimbursement of his travel expenses for business trips totaling $1.2 million
2. Sales made during the year 20XX to
a. Meifa, Inc., parent company: $35 million
b. Deifa, Inc., associate: $25 million
3. Trade debtors at December 31, 20XX, include
a. Due from Meifa, Inc.: Gross: $10 million, Net of provision: $7 million
b. Due from Deifa, Inc.: $15 million (these receivables are fully backed by corporate guarantees from Deifa, Inc.)
Required
Please advise Zeeba, Inc. on related party transactions that need to be disclosed and draft a sample related party transactions footnote to guide the entity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If there have been related party transactions during the year, an entity needs to make, at a minimum, certain disclosures. Which of the following is not a required minimum disclosure under IAS 24?
(a) The amount of the related party transactions.
(b) The amount of the outstanding related party balances and their terms and conditions along with details of guarantees given and received.
(c) The amounts of similar transactions with unrelated (third) parties to establish that comparable related party transactions have been entered at arm’s length.
(d) Provisions for doubtful debts related to the amount of outstanding related party balances and expense recognized during the year in respect of bad or doubtful debts due from related parties.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
A acquired 30% of the issued capital of B for $1 million on December 31, 20X5. The accumulated profits at that date were $2 million. A appointed three directors to the board of B, and A intends to hold the investment for a significant period of time. The companies prepare their financial statements to December 31 each year. The abbreviated balance sheet of B on December 31, 20X7 is
|
Sundry net assets
|
$6 million
|
|
Issued share capital of $1
|
$1 million
|
|
Share premium
|
$2 million
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$3 million
|
B had made no new issues of shares since the acquisition of the investment by A. The recoverable amount of net assets of B is deemed to be $7 million. The fair value of the net assets at the date of acquisition was $5 million.
Required
What amount should be shown in A’s consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 20X7, for the investment in B?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Z operates in a hyperinflationary economy. Its balance sheet at December 31, 20X5, follows:
|
m. zlotis
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
900
|
|
Inventory
|
2,700
|
|
Cash
|
350
|
|
Share capital (issued 20X1)
|
400
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,350
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
500
|
|
Current liabilities
|
700
|
The general price index had moved in this way:
|
December 31
|
|
20X1
|
100
|
|
20X2
|
130
|
|
20X3
|
150
|
|
20X4
|
240
|
|
20X5
|
300
|
The property, plant, and equipment was purchased on December 31, 20X3, and there is six months’ inventory held. The noncurrent liabilities were a loan raised on March 31, 20X5.
Required
Show the balance sheet of Z after adjusting for hyperinflation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity has a subsidiary that operates in a hyperinflationary economy. The subsidiary’s financial statements are measured in terms of the local currency, which is the zloty. The subsidiary’s financial statements have been restated in accordance with IAS 29. The parent is located in the United States and prepares the consolidated financial statements in U.S. dollars. Which of the following accounting procedures is correct in terms of the consolidation of the subsidiary’s financial statements?
(a) The subsidiary’s financial statements should be prepared using the zloty and then retranslated into U.S. dollars.
(b) The subsidiary’s financial statements should be prepared using the zloty, then restated according to IAS 29, and then retranslated into U.S. dollars at closing rates.
(c) The subsidiary’s financial statements should be remeasured in U.S. dollars, then restated according to IAS 29 and consolidated.
(d) The subsidiary’s financial statements should be deconsolidated and not included in the consolidated financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A joint venture is exempt from using the equity method or proportionate consolidation in certain circumstances.
Which of the following circumstances is not a legitimate reason for not using the equity method or proportionate consolidation?
(a) Where the interest is held for sale under IFRS 5.
(b) Where the exception in IAS 27 applies regarding an entity not being required to present consolidated financial statements.
(c) Where the venturer is wholly owned, is not a publicly traded entity and does not intend to be, the ultimate parent produces consolidated accounts, and the owners do not object to the nonusage of the accounting methods.
(d) Where the joint venture’s activities are dissimilar from those of the parent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates how to apply the definition of a financial instrument and the scope of IAS 32.
Facts Company A is evaluating whether each of these items is a financial instrument and whether it should be accounted for under IAS 32:
(a) Cash deposited in banks
(b) Gold bullion deposited in banks
(c) Trade accounts receivable
(d) Investments in debt instruments
(e) Investments in equity instruments, where Company A does not have significant influence over the investee
(f) Investments in equity instruments, where Company A has significant influence over the investee
(g) Prepaid expenses
(h) Finance lease receivables or payables
(i) Deferred revenue
(j) Statutory tax liabilities
(k) Provision for estimated litigation losses
(l) An electricity purchase contract that can be net settled in cash
(m) Issued debt instruments
(n) Issued equity instruments
Required
Help Company A to determine (1) which of the above items meet the definition of a financial instrument and (2) which of the above items fall within the scope of IAS 32.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case illustrates the application of the principle for how to distinguish between liabilities and equity.
Facts
During 2004, Entity A has issued a number of financial instruments. It is evaluating how each of these instruments should be presented under IAS 32:
(a) A perpetual bond (i.e., a bond that does not have a maturity date) that pays 5% interest each year
(b) A mandatorily redeemable share with a fixed redemption amount (i.e., a share that will be redeemed by the entity at a future date)
(c) A share that is redeemable at the option of the holder for a fixed amount of cash
(d) A sold (written) call option that allows the holder to purchase a fixed number of ordinary shares from Entity A for a fixed amount of cash
Required
For each of the above instruments, discuss whether it should be classified as a financial liability and, if so, why.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brilliant Inc. is constructing a skyscraper in the heart of town and has signed a fixed price two year contract for $21.0 million with the local authorities. It has incurred the following cost relating to the contract by the end of first year:
• Material cost = $5 million
• Labor cost = $2 million
• Construction overhead = $2 million
• Marketing costs = $0.5 million
• Depreciation of idle plant and equipment = $0.5 million
At the end of the first year, it has estimated cost to complete the contract = $9 million.
What profit or loss from the contract should Brilliant Inc. recognize at the end of the first year?
(a) $1.5 million (9/18 × 3.0)
(b) $1.0 million (9/18 × 2.0)
(c) $1.05 million (10/19 × 2.0)
(d) $1.28 million (9.5/18.5 × 2.5)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mediocre Inc. has entered into a very profitable fixed price contract for constructing a high rise building over a period of three years. It incurs the following costs relating to the contract during the first year:
• Cost of material = $2.5 million
• Site labor costs = $2.0 million
• Agreed administrative costs as per contract to be reimbursed by the customer = $1 million
• Depreciation of the plant used for the construction = $0.5 million
• Marketing costs for selling apartments when they are ready = $1.0 million
Total estimated cost of the project = $18 million
The percentage of completion of this contract at the year end is
(a) 50% (= 6.0/18.0)
(b) 27% (= 4.5/16.5)
(c) 25% (= 4.5/18.0)
(d) 39% (= 7.0/18)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A construction company is in the middle of a two year construction contract when it receives a letter from the customer extending the contract by a year and requiring the construction company to increase its output in proportion of the number of years of the new contract to the previous contract period.
This is allowed in recognizing additional revenue according to IAS 11 if
(a) Negotiations have reached an advanced stage and it is probable that the customer will accept the claim.
(b) The contract is sufficiently advanced and it is probable that the specified performance standards will be exceeded or met.
(c) It is probable that the customer will approve the variation and the amount of revenue arising from the variation, and the amount of revenue can be reliably measured.
(d) It is probable that the customer will approve the variation and the amount of revenue arising from the variation, whether the amount of revenue can be reliably measured or not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
An entity has the following assets and liabilities recorded in its balance sheet at December 31, 20X5:
|
Carrying value
|
|
$ million
|
|
Property
|
10
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
5
|
|
Inventory
|
4
|
|
Trade receivables
|
3
|
|
Trade payables
|
6
|
|
Cash
|
2
|
The value for tax purposes of property and for plant and equipment are $7 million and $4 million respectively.
The entity has made a provision for inventory obsolescence of $2 million, which is not allowable for tax purposes until the inventory is sold. Further, an impairment charge against trade receivables of $1 million has been made. This charge does not relate to any specific trade receivable but to the entity’s assessment of the overall collectibility of the amount. This charge will not be allowed in the current year for tax purposes but will be allowed in the future. Income tax paid is at 30%.
Required
Calculate the deferred tax provision at December 31, 20X5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Balance Sheet at January 1, 20X4
|
Local GAAP
|
|
$m
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
7,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
$3,000
|
|
Intangible assets
|
2,000
|
|
Financial assets
|
6,000
|
|
Total noncurrent assets
|
18,000
|
|
Trade and other receivables
|
$7,000
|
|
Other receivables
|
1,600
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
700
|
|
Total current assets
|
9,300
|
|
Total assets
|
27,300
|
|
Issued capital
|
6,000
|
|
Revaluation reserve
|
1,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
6,130
|
|
Total equity
|
13,630
|
|
Interest bearing loans
|
8,000
|
|
Trade and other payables
|
4,000
|
|
Employee benefits
|
1,000
|
|
Current tax liability
|
70
|
|
Deferred tax liability
|
600
|
|
Total liabilities
|
13,670
|
|
Total equity and liabilities
|
27,300
|
(a) Tax bases of the above assets and liabilities are the same as their carrying amounts except for
|
Tax base
|
|
$m
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
1,400
|
|
Trade receivables
|
7,500
|
|
Interest bearing loans
|
8,500
|
|
Financial assets
|
7,000
|
• The intangible assets are development costs that are allowed for tax purposes when the cost is incurred. The costs were incurred in 20X2.
• Included in trade and other payables is an accrual for compensation to be paid to employees.
It is allowed for taxation when the payment is made and totals $200 million.
(b) During 20X3, a building was revalued. At January 1, 20X4, there was $1500 million remaining in the revaluation reserve in respect of this building.
(c) The following adjustments to the financial statements will have to be made to comply with IFRS 1, First Time Adoption of IFRS, on January 1, 20X4:
• Intangible assets of $400 million do not qualify for recognition under IFRS 1.
• The financial assets are all classified as at fair value through profit or loss and their fair value is $6,500 million, which is to be included in the IFRS accounts.
• A pension liability of $50 million is to be recognized under IFRS 1 that was not recognized under local generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). The tax base of the liability is zero.
(d) The entity is likely to be very profitable in the future.
Required
Calculate the deferred tax provision at January 1, 20X4, showing the amount of the adjustment required to the deferred tax provision and any amounts to be charged to revaluation reserve. (Assume a tax rate of 30%.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
East is a private entity, and it has recently acquired two 100% owned subsidiaries, West and North. West and North are themselves private entities. East has a business plan whereby in a few years it is going to acquire a stock exchange listing for its shares and capital. East acquired West on July 1, 20X3. When East acquired West, it had unused tax losses. On July 1, 20X3, it seemed that West would have sufficient taxable profit in the future to realize the deferred tax asset created by these losses. However, subsequent events have shown that the future taxable profit will not be sufficient to realize all of the unused tax losses.
West has made a general impairment charge of $4 million against its total accounts receivable. West gets tax relief on impairment of specific accounts receivable. Because of the current economic situation, West feels that impairment charges will increase in the future.
West has investments that are valued at fair value in the balance sheet and any gain or loss is taken to the income statement. The gains and losses become taxable when the investments are sold.
East acquired North on July 1, 20X3, for $10 million, when the fair value of the net assets was $8 million. The tax base of the net assets acquired was $7 million. Any impairment loss on goodwill is not allowed as a deduction in determining taxable profit.
During the current year, North has sold goods to East of $10 million. North has made a profit of 20% on the selling price on the transaction. East has $5 million worth of these goods recorded in its balance sheet at the current year end.
The directors of East have decided that during the period up to the date they intend to list the shares of the entity, they will realize the earnings of the subsidiary, North, through dividend payments. Tax is payable on any remittance of dividends to the holding entity. In the current year no dividends have been declared or paid.
Taxation is payable for listed entities at 40% and for private entities at 35% in the jurisdiction.
Required
Prepare a memorandum that sets out the deferred tax implications of the above information for the East Group.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity is undertaking a reorganization. Under the plan, part of the entity’s business will be demerged and will be transferred to a separate entity, Entity Z. This also will involve a transfer of part of the pension obligation to Entity Z. Because of this, Entity Z will have a deductible temporary difference at its year end of December 31, 20X4. It is anticipated that Entity Z will be loss making for the first four years of its existence, but thereafter it will become a profitable entity. The future forecasted profit is based on estimates of sales to intergroup companies. Should Entity Z recognize the deductible temporary difference as a deferred tax asset?
(a) The entity should recognize a deferred tax asset.
(b) Management should not recognize a deferred tax asset as future profitability is not certain.
(c) The entity should recognize a deferred tax asset if the authenticity of the budgeted profits can be verified.
(d) The entity should recognize a deferred tax asset if the intergroup profit in the budgeted profit is eliminated.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rossendale, a public limited company, has two business segments that are reported separately in its financial statements. The segments are “machinery” and “investment and insurance.” In its management accounts, the company reports four different divisional results. The four divisions are machinery leasing, machinery sales, investments, and insurance. The results of the segments and the divisions follow:
Segment information at May 31, 20X4: Rossendale
|
External
|
Internal
|
result(profit/loss)
|
Segment assets
|
Segment liebilities
|
|
$m
|
$m
|
$m
|
$m
|
$m
|
|
Machinery:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Leasing
|
$180
|
20
|
32
|
194
|
50
|
|
Sales
|
110
|
15
|
4
|
24
|
22
|
|
Financial statements disclosure amount
|
200
|
35
|
28
|
218
|
72
|
|
Investment and insurance:
|
|
|
|
|
Investment
|
120
|
130
|
80
|
192
|
65
|
|
Insurance
|
60
|
8
|
(53)
|
116
|
95
|
|
Financial statements disclosure amount
|
180
|
138
|
27
|
308
|
160
|
|
Total
|
470
|
173
|
55
|
526
|
232
|
How would Rossendale report its segment information under IAS 14 as of its year end of May 31, 20X4?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A chemical entity has no overseas sales. The entity produces different products from the process. The entity sells its product to small businesses, to larger national businesses, and to multinational entities. The management of the entity proposed to disclose just one business segment. Can the entity disclose just one business segment because it sells all of its products nationally?
(a) Yes, IAS 14 will allow the entity to disclose a single business segment.
(b) No, the entity can identify three different sets of customers and should, therefore disclose information on that basis.
(c) Yes, even though there are three different groups of customers, they all present the same risks to the entity.
(d) IAS 14 is silent on this matter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity is in the entertainment industry and organizes outdoor concerts in four different areas of the world: Europe, North America, Australasia, and Japan. The entity reports to the board of directors on the basis of each of the four regions. The management accounts show the profitability for each of the four regions, with allocations for that expenditure which is difficult to directly charge to a region. The concerts are of two types: popular music and classical music.
What is the appropriate basis for segment reporting in this entity?
(a) The segments should be reported by class of business, that is, popular and classical music.
(b) The segments should be reported by region, so Australasia and Japan would be combined.
(c) The segment information should be reported as North America and the rest of the world.
(d) Segment information should be reported for each of the four different regions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity has split its business segments on the basis of the law governing its different types of business.
Two business segments that the entity has identified are insurance and banking. Within the banking group, several different services are provided: retail banking, merchant banking, and small business advisory service. The insurance entities sell travel insurance, health insurance, and property insurance. The entity operates throughout the world in several countries and continents. What basis should the entity report its segmental information?
(a) On the basis of its business divisions.
(b) By geographical location.
(c) On the basis of the services it offers within those divisions.
(d) The entity should just show one segment, entitled banking and insurance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity is engaged in the manufacturing industry and has recently purchased an 80% holding in a small financial services group. This group does not meet any of the threshold criteria for a reportable segment. Can the entity disclose the financial services group as a separate business segment?
(a) No, because it does not meet any of the IAS criteria, it cannot be disclosed as a separate segment.
(b) Yes, even though it does not meet the IAS criteria, an entity can disclose business segments separately if they are a distinguishable component.
(c) The entity can disclose only 80% of the results and net assets of the banking group.
(d) Because of the disparity in types of business, the group should disclose its segmental information on a geographical basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity operates in the gas industry and has four different productive processes within the production cycle. It is essentially a vertically integrated business. The entity proposes to disclose segmental information regarding each of the four operations.
Can the entity disclose separately as business segments the four operations within the production cycle
(a) No, it must show a single segment covering all the various operations.
(b) IAS 14 says that it is compulsory to show each different operation separately.
(c) IAS 14 encourages voluntary disclosure of the segments, and it is considered to be good practice.
(d) The entity should group together various operations and show exploration, production, and chemicals as one segment and retailing as another segment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity manufactures suits, clothing, bed linen, and various cotton and manmade fiber products. It has several segments, which are reported internally as
|
|
|
Segment
|
|
Segments
|
Sales
|
Profit
|
assets
|
|
Suits
|
40%
|
45%
|
50%
|
|
Shirts
|
30%
|
35%
|
33%
|
|
Bed linen
|
15%
|
10%
|
7%
|
|
Blinds
|
8%
|
6%
|
5%
|
|
Cloth
|
7%
|
4%
|
5%
|
|
100%
|
100%
|
100%
|
The table represents the percentages of sales, profit, and segment assets that are attributable to the different segments. The entity wants to present bed linen and cloth as a single segment but is wondering whether the information can be aggregated. How will the segmental information be presented in the financial statements?
(a) Bed linen and cloth, suits, and shirts, will all be shown as separate segments with blinds in the other category.
(b) All of the segments should be presented separately.
(c) Suits, shirts, and bed linen will be separate segments with blinds and cloth shown as a single segment.
(d) Suits and cloth will be one segment with shirts, bed linen, and blinds shown as other separate segments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case study is concerned with directly attributable costs.
Facts Extravagant Inc. is installing a new plant at its production facility. It has incurred these costs:
|
1. Cost of the plant (cost per supplier’s invoice plus taxes)
|
$2,500,000
|
|
2. Initial delivery and handling costs
|
$200,000
|
|
3. Cost of site preparation
|
$600,000
|
|
4. Consultants used for advice on the acquisition of the plant
|
$700,000
|
|
5. Interest charges paid to supplier of plant for deferred credit
|
$200,000
|
|
6. Estimated dismantling costs to be incurred after 7 years
|
$300,000
|
|
7. Operating losses before commercial production
|
$400,000
|
Required
Please advise Extravagant Inc. on the costs that can be capitalized in accordance with IAS 16.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Healthy Inc. bought a private jet for the use of its top ranking officials. The cost of the private jet is $15 million and can be depreciated either using a composite useful life or useful lives of its major components. It is expected to be used over a period of 7 years. The engine of the jet has a useful life of 5 years. The private jet’s tires are replaced every 2 years. The private jet will be depreciated using the straight line method over
(a) 7 years composite useful life.
(b) 5 years useful life of the engine, 2 years useful life of the tires, and 7 years useful life applied to the balance cost of the jet.
(c) 2 years useful life based on conservatism (the lowest useful life of all the parts of the jet).
(d) 5 years useful life based on a simple average of the useful lives of all major components of the jet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Inc. owns a fleet of over 100 cars and 20 ships. It operates in a capital intensive industry and thus has significant other property, plant, and equipment that it carries in its books. It decided to revalue its property, plant, and equipment. The company’s accountant has suggested the alternatives that follow.
Which one of the options should XYZ Inc. select in order to be in line with the provisions of IAS 16?
(a) Revalue only one half of each class of property, plant, and equipment, as that method is less cumbersome and easy compared to revaluing all assets together.
(b) Revalue an entire class of property, plant, and equipment.
(c) Revalue one ship at a time, as it is easier than revaluing all ships together.
(d) Since assets are being revalued regularly, there is no need to depreciate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Jay has entered into a lease of property whereby the title to the land does not pass to the entity at the end of the lease but the title to the building passes after 15 years. The lease commenced on July 1, 20X5, when the value of the land was $54 million and the building value was $18 million. Annual lease rentals paid in arrears commencing on June 30, 20X6, are $6 million for land and $2 million for buildings. The entity has allocated the rentals on the basis of their relative fair values at the start of the lease. The payments under the lease terms are reduced after every 6 years, and the minimum lease term is 30 years. The net present value of the minimum lease payments at July 1, 20X5, was $40 million for land and $17 million for buildings. The buildings are written off on the straight line basis over their useful life of 15 years. Assume an effective interest rate of 7%.
Required
Discuss how Jay should treat this lease under IAS 17.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Micrium, a computer chip manufacturing company, sells its products to its distributors for onward sales to the ultimate customers. Due to frequent fluctuations in the market prices for these goods, Micrium has a “price protection” clause in the distributor agreement that entitles it to raise additional billings in case of upward price movement. Another clause in the distributor’s agreement is that Micrium can at any time reduce its inventory by buying back goods at the cost at which it sold the goods to the distributor. Distributors pay for the goods within 60 days from the sale of goods to them. When should Micrium recognize revenue on sale of goods to the distributors?
(a) When the goods are sold to the distributors.
(b) When the distributors pay to Micrium the cost of the goods (i.e., after 60 days of the sale of goods to the distributors).
(c) When goods are sold to the distributor provided estimated additional revenue is also booked under the “protection clause” based on past experience.
(d) When the distributor sells goods to the ultimate customers and there is no uncertainty with respect to the “price protection” clause or the buyback of goods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company XYZ Inc. manufacturers and sells standard machinery. One of the conditions in the sale contract is that installation of machinery will be undertaken by XYZ Inc. During December 2005, XYZ received a special onetime contract from ABC Ltd. To manufacture, install, and maintain customized machinery.
It is the first time XYZ Inc. will be producing this kind of machinery, and it is expecting numerous changes that would need to be made to the machine after the installation is completed, which one period is described in the contract of sale as the “maintenance period.” The total cost of making the changes during the maintenance period cannot be reasonably estimated at the time of the installation. When should the revenue from sale of this special machine be recognized?
(a) When the machinery is produced.
(b) When the machinery is produced and delivered.
(c) When the installation is complete.
(d) When the maintenance period as per the contract of sale expires.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are the operating details of two plants operating under the same management:
|
Plant A (Rs)
|
Plant B (Rs)
|
|
Sales
|
12,00,000
|
10,00,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
6,00,000
|
5,00,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
2,00,000
|
1,00,000
|
|
Capacity of operation
|
100%
|
50%
|
It is proposed to merge both the plants. You are required to ascertain
- Break even sales and break even capacity of the merged plant
- Profit and profitability of operating the merged plant at 90% of the capacity
- Capacity level of operation if a profit of Rs 4,00,000 (the profit made by both the plants before merger) has to be attained by the merged plant
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The budgeted results for Joseph & Co. Ltd include the following
|
Product
|
Sales (Rs)
|
Variable cost as percentage of sales value
|
|
A
|
50,00,000
|
60
|
|
B
|
40,00,000
|
50
|
|
C
|
80,00,000
|
65
|
|
D
|
30,00,000
|
85
|
|
E
|
44,00,000
|
80
|
|
2,44,00,000
|
65.77
|
Fixed overheads for the period is Rs 87,00,000. You are required to
- Prepare a statement showing the amount of loss expected
- Recommend a change in the sales volume of each product, which will eliminate the expected loss. Assume that the sale of only one product can be increased at a time.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures three products, and their respective details are furnished as follows:
|
|
X
|
Y
|
Z
|
|
Capacity engaged
|
20%
|
40%
|
40%
|
|
Units produced
|
2,000
|
5,000
|
6,000
|
|
Cost per unit
|
Rs 20
|
Rs 32
|
Rs 36
|
|
Wages
|
Rs 10
|
Rs 12
|
Rs 16
|
|
Variable overheads
|
Rs 7
|
Rs 9
|
Rs 11
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
Rs 20
|
Rs 19
|
Rs 20
|
|
|
Rs 57
|
Rs 72
|
Rs 83
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
Rs 57
|
Rs 77
|
Rs 87
|
|
Profit or loss
|
Rs 1
|
Rs 5
|
Rs 4
|
The management proposes to discontinue line X. It intends to utilize the disengaged capacity in the lines Y and Z equally. Advise the management suitably.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The details of cost per unit at an activity level of 10,000 units of a product are as follows:
|
Rs
|
|
Raw materials
|
10
|
|
Direct expenses
|
8
|
|
Labour charges
|
2
|
|
Variable overheads
|
4
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
6
|
|
Total cost per unit
|
30
|
|
Profit per unit
|
2
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
32
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
. State whether the following statements are true or false
- A budget is nothing but an estimate.
- Budgets are drawn up by the chief accountant.
- Budgets are blueprints for action.
- A budget manual is a summary of all the functional budgets.
- Budgetary control system does not suit small businesses.
- Limiting factor is a major constraint on all the operational activities of an organization.
- The budget relating to the key factor should be prepared last.
- For control purposes, long term budget should be prepared.
- Estimate of the sales given in the sales budget is mere guesswork.
- A fixed budget is useful only when the actual level of activity corresponds to the budgeted level of activity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Brilliant Trading Inc. purchases motorcycles from various countries and exports them to Europe. Brilliant Trading has incurred these expenses during 2005:
(a) Cost of purchases (based on vendors’ invoices)
(b) Trade discounts on purchases
(c) Import duties
(d) Freight and insurance on purchases
(e) Other handling costs relating to imports
(f) Salaries of accounting department
(g) Brokerage commission payable to indenting agents for arranging imports
(h) Sales commission payable to sales agents
(i) After sales warranty costs
Required
Brilliant Trading Inc. is seeking your advice on which costs are permitted under IAS 2 to be included in cost of inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Weighted Average Cost Method Facts Vigilant LLC, a newly incorporated company, uses the latest version of a software package (EXODUS) to cost and value its inventory. The software uses the weighted average cost method to value inventory.
The following are the purchases and sales made by Vigilant LLC during 2006 (as a newly set up company, Vigilant LLC has no beginning inventory):
Purchases January 100 units @ $250 per unit
March 150 units @ $300 per unit
September 200 units @ $350 per unit
Sales
March 150 units
December 170 units
Required
Vigilant LLC has approached you to compute the value of its inventory and the cost per unit of the inventory at March 31, 2006, September 30, 2006, and December 31, 2006, under the weighted average cost method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
Moonstruck Enterprises Inc. is a retailer of Italian furniture and has five major product lines: sofas, dining tables, beds, closets, and lounge chairs. At December 31, 200X, quantity on hand, cost per unit, and net realizable value (NRV) per unit of the product lines are as follows:
|
Quantity
|
Cost
|
NRV
|
|
Product line
|
on hand
|
per unit ($)
|
per unit ($)
|
|
Sofas
|
100
|
1,000
|
1,020
|
|
Dining tables
|
200
|
500
|
450
|
|
Beds
|
300
|
1,500
|
1,600
|
|
Closets
|
400
|
750
|
770
|
|
Lounge chairs
|
500
|
250
|
200
|
Required
Compute the valuation of the inventory of Moonstruck Enterprises at December 31, 200X, under IAS 2 using the “lower of cost and NRV” principle.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC LLC manufactures and sells paper envelopes.
The stock of envelopes was included in the closing inventory as of December 31, 2005, at a cost of $50 each per pack. During the final audit, the auditors noted that the subsequent sale price for the inventory at January 15, 2006, was $40 each per pack. Furthermore, inquiry reveals that during the physical stock take, a water leakage has created damages to the paper and the glue. Accordingly, in the following week, ABC LLC spent a total of $15 per pack for repairing and reapplying glue to the envelopes. The net realizable value and inventory write down (loss) amount to
(a) $40 and $10 respectively.
(b) $45 and $10 respectively.
(c) $25 and $25 respectively.
(d) $35 and $25 respectively.
(e) $30 and $15 respectively.23
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entity purchases a building and the seller accepts payment partly in equity shares and partly in debentures of the entity. This transaction should be treated in the cash flow statement as follows:
(a) The purchase of the building should be investing cash outflow and the issuance of shares and the debentures financing cash outflows.
(b) The purchase of the building should be investing cash outflow and the issuance of debentures financing cash outflows while the issuance of shares investing cash outflow.
(c) This does not belong in a cash flow statement and should be disclosed only in the footnotes to the financial statements.
(d) Ignore the transaction totally since it is a noncash transaction. No mention is required in either the cash flow statement or anywhere else in the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How should repayment of a long term loan comprising repayment of the principal amount and interest due to date on the loan be treated in a cash flow statement?
(a) The repayment of the principal portion of the loan is a cash flow belonging in the “investing activities” section; the interest payment belongs either in the “operating activities” section or the “financing activities” section.
(b) The repayment of the principal portion of the loan is a cash flow belonging in the “investing activities” section; the interest payment belongs either in the “operating activities” section or the “investing activities” section.
(c) The repayment of the principal portion of the loan is a cash flow belonging in the “investing activities” section; the interest payment belongs in the “operating activities” section (because IAS 7 does not permit any alternatives in case of interest payments).
(d) The repayment of the principal portion of the loan is a cash flow belonging in the “investing activities” section; the interest payment should be netted against interest received on bank deposits, and the net amount of interest should be disclosed in the “operating activities” section.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
(a) All Change Co. Inc. changed its accounting policy in 200Y with respect to the valuation of inventories.
Up to 200X, inventories were valued using a weighted average cost (WAC) method. In 200Y the method was changed to first in, first out (FIFO), as it was considered to more accurately reflect the usage and flow of inventories in the economic cycle. The impact on inventory valuation was determined to be
|
At December 31, 200W:
|
an increase of $10,000
|
|
At December 31, 200X:
|
an increase of $15,000
|
|
At December 31, 200Y:
|
an increase of $20,000
|
(b) The income statements prior to adjustment are
|
200Y
|
200X
|
|
Revenue
|
$250,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
100,000
|
80,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
150,000
|
120,000
|
|
Administration costs
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
|
Selling and distribution costs
|
25,000
|
15,000
|
|
Net profit
|
$65,000
|
$55,000
|
Required
Present the change in accounting policy in the Income Statement and the Statement of Changes in Equity in accordance with requirements of IAS 8.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
(a) The internal auditor of Vigilant Inc. noticed in 200Y that in 200X the entity had omitted to record in its books of accounts an amortization expense amounting to $30,000 relating to an intangible asset.
(b) An extract from the income statement for the years ended December 31, 200X and 200Y, before correction of the error follows:
|
200Y
|
200X
|
|
Gross profit
|
$300,000
|
$345,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
Selling and distribution expenses
|
($30,000)
|
($30,000)
|
|
Amortization
|
30,000
|
XXXX
|
|
Net income before income taxes
|
150,000
|
225,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
30,000
|
45,000
|
|
Net profit
|
120,000
|
180,000
|
(c) The “retained earnings” of Vigilant Inc. for 200X and 200Y before correction of the error are
|
200Y
|
200X
|
|
Retained earnings, beginning of the year
|
$225,000
|
$45,000
|
|
Retained earnings, ending of the year
|
375,000
|
225,000
|
(d) Vigilant Inc.’s income tax rate was 20% for both years.
Required
Present the accounting treatment prescribed by IAS 8 for the correction of the errors.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
The preparation of the financial statements of Excellent Corp. for the accounting period ended December 31, 2005, was completed by the management on March 15, 2006. The draft financial statements were considered at the meeting of the board of directors held on March 20, 2006, on which date the board approved them and authorized them for issuance. The annual general meeting (AGM) was held on April 10, 2006, after allowing for printing and the requisite notice period mandated by the corporate statute. At the AGM the shareholders approved the financial statements. The approved financial statements were filed by the corporation with the Company Law Board (the statutory body of the country that regulates corporations) on April 20, 2006.
Required
Given these facts, what is the “authorization date” in terms of IAS 10?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
The statutory audit of ABC Inc. for year ended June 30, 2005, was completed on August 30, 2005. The financial statements were signed by the managing director on September 8, 2005, and approved by the shareholders on October 10, 2005. The next events have occurred.
(1) On July 15, 2005, a customer owing $900,000 to ABC Inc. filed for bankruptcy. The financial statements include an allowance for doubtful debts pertaining to this customer only of $50,000.
(2) ABC Inc.’s issued capital comprised 100,000 equity shares. The company announced a bonus issue of 25,000 shares on August 1, 2005.
(3) Specialized equipment costing $545,000 purchased on March 1, 2005, was destroyed by fire on
June 13, 2005. On June 30, 2005, ABC Inc. has booked a receivable of $400,000 from the insurance company pertaining to this claim. After the insurance company completed its investigation, it was discovered that the fire took place due to negligence of the machine operator. As a result, the insurer’s liability was zero on this claim by ABC Inc.
Required
How should ABC Inc. account for these three post–balance sheet events?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A new drug named “EEE” was introduced by Genius Inc. in the market on December 1, 2005. Genius Inc.’s financial year ends on December 31, 2005. It was the only company that was permitted to manufacture this patented drug. The drug is used by patients suffering from an irregular heartbeat. On March 31, 2006, after the drug was introduced, more than 1,000 patients died. After a series of investigations, authorities discovered that when this drug was simultaneously used with “BBB,” a drug used to regulate hypertension, the patient’s blood would clot and the patient suffered a stroke. A lawsuit for $100,000,000 has been filed against Genius Inc. The financial statements were authorized for issuance on April 30, 2006. Which of the following options is the appropriate accounting treatment for this post– balance sheet event under IAS 10?
(a) The entity should provide $100,000,000 because this is an “adjusting event” and the financial statements were authorized to be issued after the accident.
(b) The entity should disclose $100,000,000 as a contingent liability because it is an “adjusting event.”
(c) The entity should disclose $100,000,000 as a “contingent liability” because it is a present obligation with an improbable outflow.
(d) Assuming the probability of the lawsuit being decided against Genius Inc. is remote,the entity should disclose it in the footnotes, because it is a nonadjusting material event.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Excellent Inc. built a new factory building during 2005 at a cost of $20 million. At December 31, 2005, the net book value of the building was $19 million.
Subsequent to year end, on March 15, 2006, the building was destroyed by fire and the claim against the insurance company proved futile because the cause of the fire was negligence on the part of the caretaker of the building. If the date of authorization of the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2005, was March 31, 2006, Excellent Inc. should
(a) Write off the net book value to its scrap value because the insurance claim would not fetch any compensation.
(b) Make a provision for one half of the net book value of the building.
(c) Make a provision for three fourths of the net book value of the building based on prudence.
(d) Disclose this nonadjusting event in the footnotes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
International Inc. deals extensively with foreign entities, and its financial statements reflect these foreign currency transactions. Subsequent to the balance sheet date, and before the “date of authorization” of the issuance of the financial statements, there were abnormal fluctuations in foreign currency rates.
International Inc. should
(a) Adjust the foreign exchange year end balances to reflect the abnormal adverse fluctuations in foreign exchange rates.
(b) Adjust the foreign exchange year end balances to reflect all the abnormal fluctuations in foreign exchange rates (and not just adverse movements).
(c) Disclose the post–balance sheet event in footnotes as a nonadjusting event.
(d) Ignore the post–balance sheet event.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
XYZ, Inc. is negotiating with the local government to build a new bridge after demolishing the existing bridge in downtown near the city center. At the initial meeting, it was indicated that the government would not be willing to pay for both components of the contract an amount exceeding $100,000. The government representatives insisted that separate proposals would need to be submitted and negotiated and that the contractor should maintain separate records for each component of the contract and upon re separate proposals, it was agreed that the split of the contract price of $100,000 would be in the ratio of 70% for construction of the new bridge and 30% for demolishing the existing bridge
Required
Evaluate in light of the provisions of IAS 11 whether the contract for the construction of the new bridge and the contract for demolishing the existing bridge should be segmented and treated as separate contracts or be combined and treated as a single contract.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Facts
In year 1, Slow Build Inc. was invited to tender for the construction of a residential block and connected shopping arcade with common plaza and garden and play areas. Tenders were required to detail the costs of each element separately, but it was clear that only one contractor would win the entire contract due to the interrelated aspects of the development.
During year 1, Slow Build Inc. management traveled to the United States to visit three possible designers in order to obtain their preliminary design proposals, of which only one would be selected. The cost of the visit was $20,000. Later in year 1, having selected one designer, Slow Build Inc. returned to the United States to clarify design details and request construction of a scale model in order to make a presentation of the tender to the ultimate customer. The cost of the second trip was $15,000.
During year 2, but before its year 1 financial statements were authorized for issue, Slow Build Inc. was notified that it had been awarded the contract. However, the contract was not signed until after the year 1 financial statements were issued.
The contract was for a total price of $16 million, comprising $9 million for the residential block, $5 million for the shopping arcade, and $2 million for the common plaza, garden, and play area. A mobilization advance of $1 million would be paid at the outset, $1 million was payable at the end of year 2, $5 million at the end of year 3, and $8 million was payable at the end of year 4, at which point the development would be complete and $1 million was to be held back as a retention for one year.
Slow Build Inc. initially estimated that the total cost of the project would be $12 million, of which $7 million would be for the residential block, $4 million for the shopping arcade, and $1 million for the plaza, gardens, and play area. Included in this cost is $1 million of plant acquired specifically for the project that could not be used subsequently. The estimated residual value of this plant at the end of the contract was $100,000. Also included in the overall cost was 30 months of depreciation on general plant and equipment already owned by Slow Build Inc. at $50,000 per month. The on site accounts staff cost included in the estimate was $5,000 per month. Their role was to maintain and record time cards of workers and receive and issue materials.
Costs incurred at each year end were
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
Year 4
|
Total
|
|
Residential block
|
1,000,000
|
3,000,000
|
3000000
|
$7000000
|
|
Shopping arcade
|
$500,000
|
1,800,000
|
1,700,000
|
4,000,000
|
|
Plaza, gardens, & play area
|
|
200,000
|
800,000
|
1,000,000
|
|
Total
|
1,500,000
|
5,000,000
|
5500000
|
$12000000
|
The costs at the end of year 2 include $250,000 of materials delivered to the site for use in year 3.
The $200,000 in year 3 for the plaza, gardens, and play area was an advance to subcontractors who would mobilize in year 4.
During year 3, due to a fire at the neighboring plot, the police cordoned off the whole area for a month while investigations were conducted. During this time all plant and equipment remained idle on site. However, work continued in Slow Build Inc.’s workshop and yard.
During year 3, the customer requested a variation in the contract with a value of $1 million and a cost of $750,000. However, the variation was not approved by the customer until after Slow Build Inc.’s year 3 financial statements were authorized for issue. Slow Build Inc. incurred the extra costs for the variation in year 3.
Required
Provide Slow Build Inc.’s income statement and the amounts that should be presented in the balance sheet for each of the years 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company producing product X yields two by products Y and Z. The following particulars relate to a particular period of operation in which the joint cost amounted to Rs 1,40,000:
|
|
|
|
Cost of further
|
|
Product
|
Sales (Rs)
|
Profit 10 on sales
|
processing (Rs)
|
|
X
|
1,45,920
|
20%
|
36,016
|
|
Y
|
72,960
|
30%
|
11,000
|
|
Z
|
48,640
|
25%
|
6,292
|
The company apportions selling expenses to X, Y and Z in the ratio 10:1:7. Calculate the profit from the sales of each product and the joint cost applied to each product.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vasanth Ltd manufactures product A, which yields two by products B and C. The actual joint expense of manufacture for a period was Rs 8,000. Subsequent expenses and other data are as follows:
|
|
A (Rs)
|
B (Rs)
|
C (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
100
|
75
|
25
|
|
Wages
|
200
|
125
|
50
|
|
Overheads
|
150
|
125
|
75
|
|
|
450
|
325
|
150
|
Prepare a statement showing apportionment of joint costs to the main product and the by products.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A factory produces an article A; this process yields B and C as by products. The costs are as follows:
|
|
Actual Joint costs
|
|
Subsequent cost
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Material
|
10,000
|
1,500
|
1,300
|
1,000
|
|
Labour
|
1,600
|
200
|
150
|
100
|
|
Overhead
|
8,000
|
800
|
550
|
400
|
|
|
19,600
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
1,500
|
|
Estimated sales
|
|
30,000
|
24,000
|
20,000
|
|
Estimated profit
|
|
30%
|
25%
|
20%
|
Show how you would apportion the joint cost of manufacture.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A factory producing an article A also produces a by product B, which is further processed into finished product. The joint cost of manufacture is given as follows:
|
Material
|
50,000
|
|
Labour
|
30,000
|
|
Overheads
|
20,000
|
Subsequent costs are given as follows:
|
A
|
B
|
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
|
Material
|
30,000
|
15,000
|
|
Labour
|
14,000
|
10,000
|
|
Overheads
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
|
Selling prices
|
1,60,000
|
80,000
|
Estimated profits on sales are 25% for A and 290% for B. It is assumed that selling and distribution expenses are in proportion to sales prices. Show how you would apportion joint costs of manufacture and prepare a statement showing the cost of production of A and B.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
manufacture is as follows:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials
|
5,000
|
|
Labour
|
3,000
|
|
Overheads
|
2,000
|
|
Total
|
10,000
|
Subsequent costs are as follows:
|
P
|
Q
|
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
|
Material
|
3,000
|
1,500
|
|
Labour
|
1,400
|
1,000
|
|
Overheads
|
600
|
500
|
|
5,000
|
3,000
|
Selling prices are as follows: P—Rs 16,000 and Q—Rs 8,000. Estimated profits on selling prices are 25% for P and 20% for Q. Assume that selling and distribution of expenses are in proportion to the sales price. Show how you would apportion joint cost of manufacture, and prepare a statement showing the cost of production of P and Q.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AB Co. Ltd manufactures product A, which yields two by products B and C. The actual joint expenses of manufacturing for a period were Rs 8,200. The profits on each product as a percentage of sales are 33?%, 25% and 15%, respectively. Subsequent expenses are as follows:
|
|
|
Products
|
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
100
|
75
|
25
|
|
Direct wages
|
200
|
125
|
50
|
|
Overheads
|
150
|
125
|
75
|
|
|
450
|
325
|
150
|
|
Sales
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
2,500
|
Show how you would apportion the joint expenses of manufacture.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the estimated costs of production of by products X and Y at the point of separation from the main product.
|
By product
|
By product
|
|
X
|
Y
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
Rs 12
|
Rs 24
|
|
Cost per unit after separation from the main product
|
Rs 3
|
Rs 5
|
|
Units produced
|
500
|
200
|
Selling expenses amount to 25% of total works cost, that is, including both pre separation and post separation works costs. Selling prices are arrived at by adding 20% of total cost, that is, the sum of works cost and selling expenses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During a month, 2,000 units of raw materials at a cost of Rs 9,500 were issued to process A. At the end of the month 1,500 units had been produced; 300 units were still in process; and 200 units had been scrapped. A normal wastage of 5% is allowed. The work in progress is complete:
100% with respect to raw materials
75% with respect to other materials
50% with respect to labour and overheads
The total costs incurred were (in addition to raw materials) as follows:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials
|
1,825
|
|
Direct wages
|
3,500
|
|
Overheads
|
2,725
|
A scrapped unit realizes Re 1. Prepare the process account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During January 2,000 units were introduced into process I. The normal loss was estimated at 5% on input. At the end of the month 1,400 units had been produced and transferred to the next process. 460 units were incomplete and 140 units had been scrapped. It was estimated that the incomplete units had reached a stage in production as follows:
Material: 75% completed
Labour: 50% completed
Overhead: 50% completed
The cost of 2,000 units was Rs 5,800. Direct materials introduced during the process amounted to Rs 1,440. Direct wages amounted to Rs 3,340. Production overheads incurred were Rs 1,670. Units scrapped realized Re 1 each. The units scrapped had passed through the process; so they were 100% complete with respect to material, labour and overhead. Prepare a statement of equivalent production, a statement of cost and the process I account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following details, prepare a statement of equivalent production and a statement of cost, and find the value of the following:
Output transferred Closing work in progress, by the average cost method
|
Opening work in progress
|
2,000 units
|
|
Materials (100% complete)
|
Rs 7,500
|
|
Labour (60% complete)
|
Rs 3,000
|
|
Overheads (60% complete)
|
Rs 1,500
|
|
Units introduced into the process
|
8,000
|
There are 2,000 units in process and the stage of completion is estimated to be as follows: materials—100%, labour—50% and overheads—50%. 8,000 units are transferred to next process. The process costs for the period are as follows: materials—Rs 1,00,000; labour—Rs 78,000; overheads—Rs 39,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is given for process I for B Ltd. The average method of pricing work in progress is used. Work in progress in January:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials on 500 units
|
900
|
|
Labour on 500 units
|
1,000
|
|
Factory overheads on 500 units
|
400
|
|
Total
|
2,300
|
Production costs for January:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials
|
7,800
|
|
Labour
|
9,150
|
|
Factory overheads
|
6,125
|
|
Cost for January
|
23,075
|
Production completed during January:
500 units from 1 January, work in progress
2,000 units from products received during January
2,500 total units completed
Work in progress on 31 January: 400 units, 25% completed as to material, labour and overhead.
Calculate process I account for January.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raviraj Ltd manufactures and sells four types of products under the brand names of A, B, C and D. The sales mix in value comprises 33?% , 41?%, 16?% and 8?% of products A, B, C and D, respectively. The total budgeted sales (100%) are Rs 60,000 per month. Operating costs are Variable costs:
|
Product A:
|
60% of selling price
|
|
B:
|
68% of selling price
|
|
C:
|
80% of selling price
|
|
D:
|
40% of selling price
|
Fixed cost: Rs 17,500 per month
Calculate BEP for the products on an overall basis and also the break even sales of individual products.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assuming that cost structure and selling prices remain the same in periods I and II, calculate the following: (a) profit volume ratio; (b) fixed cost; (c) BEP for sales; (d) profit when sales are of Rs 1,00,000; (e) sales required to earn a profit of Rs 20,000; (f) margin of safety at a profit of Rs 15,000; and (g) variable cost in period II.
|
Period
|
Sales(Rs)
|
Cost(Rs)
|
Profit(Rs)
|
|
Ii
|
120000
|
111000
|
10000
|
|
Ii
|
160000
|
127000
|
18000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is obtained from Gopu & Co. for the year ending on 31 March 1998: Sales = Rs 2,80,000; variable costs = Rs 2,10,000; and fixed costs = Rs 30,000. You are required to calculate the following:
- Present P/V ratio, BEP and margin of safety
- Revised P/V ratio, BEP and margin of safety for each of the following cases:
- 25% increase in selling price
- 10% decrease in selling price
- 20% increase in fixed costs
- 10% decrease in fixed costs
- 10% increase in variable costs
- 10% decrease in variable costs
- 10% increase in selling price accompanied by 10% decrease in variable costs
- 10% decrease in selling price accompanied by 10% increase in variable costs
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is given regarding products A and B of a firm:
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Sales price
|
Rs 80
|
Rs 55
|
|
Direct material
|
Rs 35
|
Rs 35
|
|
Direct labour hours (Re 0.50 per hour)
|
15 hours
|
2 hours
|
|
Variable overheads: 100% of direct wages
|
|
|
|
Fixed overhead: Rs 3,000
|
|
|
Present this information to show the profitability of products during labour shortage.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a factory producing two different kinds of articles, the limiting factor is the availability of labour. From the following information for the factory for 1994, show which product is more profitable
|
Product A, cost per unit (Rs)
|
Product B, cost per unit (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
5.00
|
5.00
|
|
Labour:
|
|
|
|
6 hours at 0.50
|
3.00
|
1.50
|
|
3 hours at 0.50
|
|
|
|
Overheads:
|
|
|
|
Fixed (50% of labour)
|
1.50
|
0.75
|
|
Variable
|
1.50
|
1.50
|
|
Total cost
|
11.00
|
8.75
|
|
Selling price
|
14.00
|
11.00
|
|
Profit
|
3.00
|
2.25
|
|
Total production for the month
|
700 units
|
800 units
|
Maximum capacity per month = 4,800 hours. Also, give proof in support of your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following particulars are obtained from the records of a company manufacturing two products P and R:
|
Per unit
|
|
Product P (Rs)
|
Product R (Rs)
|
|
Selling price
|
250
|
500
|
|
Material cost (Rs 20 per kilogram)
|
40
|
100
|
|
Direct wages (Rs 6 per hour)
|
60
|
120
|
|
Variable overheads
|
20
|
40
|
|
Total fixed overhead = Rs 10,000
|
|
|
Comment on the profitability of each product when production capacity in hours is the limiting factor.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raman & Co. produces two products X and Y. The technical labour needed to produce the products is in short supply. The following data is available for the year ending on 31 March 2000
|
Product X per unit (Rs)
|
Product Y per unit (Rs)
|
|
Material
|
40
|
60
|
|
Labour (at Rs 2 per hour)
|
20
|
12
|
|
Variable overheads (50% of labour)
|
10
|
6
|
|
Fixed cost (at the current capacity level)
|
15
|
30
|
|
Selling price
|
140
|
180
|
|
Units sold
|
900
|
2,000
|
Maximum labour hours available per month = 3,000 hours If maximum profit is to be attained using the remaining capacity by producing and selling the best product when labour time is limited (present production of either one of the products should be kept as the minimum output), determine the maximum profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(This illustration shows fixing of priorities for different products with reference to the key factor.) A company manufactures and markets three products X, Y and Z. All the three products are made using the same set of machines. Production is limited by machine capacity. From the following data, indicate priorities for products X, Y and Z with a view to maximizing profits
|
|
|
Products
|
|
|
X
|
|
|
|
Raw material cost per unit (Rs)
|
11.25
|
16.25
|
21.25
|
|
Direct labour cost per unit (Rs)
|
2.50
|
2.50
|
2.50
|
|
Other variable costs per unit (Rs)
|
1.50
|
2.25
|
3.55
|
|
Selling price per unit (Rs)
|
25.00
|
30.00
|
35.00
|
|
Standard machine time required per unit in minutes
|
39
|
20
|
28
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(This illustration shows the case when different key factors are involved.) The following particulars are extracted from the records of a company:
|
Per unit
|
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Sale price (Rs)
|
120
|
130
|
|
Consumption of materials (kg)
|
5
|
4
|
|
Material cost (Rs)
|
24
|
14
|
|
Direct wages (Rs)
|
2
|
3
|
|
Machine hours used
|
2
|
3
|
|
Variable overheads
|
4
|
6
|
Comment on the profitability of each product (both use the same raw material) when
- Total sales potential in units is limited
- Total sales potential in value is limited
- Raw material is in short supply
- Production capacity (in terms of machine hours) is the limiting factor
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes. Calculate cost of the product at each stage:
|
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
Raw materials
|
23,000
|
—
|
—
|
|
Other materials
|
34,000
|
27,000
|
12,000
|
|
Wages
|
11,000
|
22,000
|
36,000
|
|
Overheads
|
12,000
|
16,000
|
18,000
|
|
Output in units
|
16,000
|
16,000
|
18,000
|
|
Opening stock (units)
|
—
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
|
Closing stock (units)
|
—
|
5,000
|
2,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes A, B and C. To process A, 10,000 units at Re 1 per unit were issued. The other direct expenses are as follows:
|
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process 8 (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
Sundry materials
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
1480
|
|
Direct labour
|
5,000
|
8,000
|
6,500
|
|
Direct expenses
|
1,050
|
1,188
|
1,605
|
The wastage of process A was 5%, process B 4% and process C 5%. The wastage of process A was sold at Re 0.25 per unit, that of B at Re 0.50 per unit and that of C at Re 1 per unit. The overhead charges were 168% of direct labour. The final product was sold at Rs 10.0 per unit, fetching a profit of 20% on sale. Prepare process accounts and finished goods account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through two processes X and Y before it is finished and transferred to stock. In both the processes, 10% of the weight put in is lost. An additional 20% is scrapped, which realizes Rs 10 per tonne and Rs 15 per tonne, respectively, from processes X and Y. The following data is obtained for the month of November 1996
|
Process X
|
Process Y
|
|
Material consumed
|
1,000 tonnes
|
100 tonnes
|
|
Rs
|
Rs
|
|
Cost per tonne of material
|
20
|
30
|
|
Wages
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Works expenses
|
7,000
|
8,400
|
Prepare process accounts showing cost of the output of each process and the cost per tonne.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a manufacturing concern, a certain product A yields by products B and C. The joint expenses of manufacture are as follows:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials
|
12,500
|
|
Labour
|
10,000
|
|
Overheads
|
17,500
|
The subsequent expenses are as follows:
|
A (Rs)
|
B (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
600
|
700
|
|
Labour
|
1,300
|
900
|
|
Overhead
|
100
|
800
|
|
2,000
|
2,400
|
Selling prices are A—Rs 40,000 and B—Rs 32,000. Estimated profits on selling price are A—30% and B—30%. Show how you would apportion the joint costs of manufacture and prepare the products accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
State whether the following statements are true or false
- Process costing is one aspect of operation costing.
- Process costing is applied in garment industry.
- Process costing is applied in chemical works.
- Normal loss does not increase the cost per unit of usual production.
- Abnormal loss is spread on good units of production.
- Abnormal gain should reduce normal loss.
- In process costing, ordinarily no distinction is made between direct and indirect materials.
- The cost of abnormal process loss is not included in the cost of a process.
- The method of costing applied in biscuit industry is process costing.
- When actual loss is more than estimated loss, the difference between the two is considered as abnormal gain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the cost of each process and the total cost of production from the following data:
|
|
Process 1
|
Process 2
|
Process 3
|
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
|
Material
|
2,250
|
750
|
300
|
|
Wages
|
1,200
|
3,000
|
900
|
|
Direct expenses
|
SOO
|
SOO
|
500
|
|
Works overheads
|
1,890
|
2,580
|
1,875
|
Other indirect expenses of Rs 1,275 should be apportioned on the basis of wages.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A particular brand of scent passed through three important processes. During the week ending on 15 January 1987, 600 bottles were produced. The costbooks show the following information:
|
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
1,500
|
|
Labour
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,300
|
|
Direct expenses
|
600
|
200
|
SOO
|
|
Cost of bottles
|
|
2,030
|
|
|
Cost of corks
|
|
|
325
|
The indirect expenses for the period were Rs 1,600 (indirect expenses are charged on labour basis). The by products were sold for Rs 240 (process B). The residue was sold for Rs 125.50 (process C). Prepare the account with respect to each process, showing its cost and cost of production of the finished product per bottle.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes X, Y and Z. The normal waste of each process was 3%, 5% and 8% for X, Y and Z, respectively. The waste of process X was sold at Rs 2.50 per unit, that of Y at Rs 5 per unit and that of Z at Rs 8.50 per unit. 10,000 units were issued to process X on 1 July at a cost of Rs 100 per unit. The other expenses were as follows:
|
|
Processes
|
|
|
X (Rs)
|
Y (Rs)
|
Z (Rs)
|
|
Sundry materials
|
10,000
|
15,000
|
5,000
|
|
Labour
|
50,000
|
80,000
|
65,000
|
|
Expenses
|
10,450
|
15,895
|
20,000
|
The actual outputs were 9,500 units; 9,100 units and 8,100 units for X, Y and Z, respectively. Prepare process accounts assuming that there are no opening or closing stocks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The product of a company passes through three distinct processes to reach completion. From past experience it is ascertained that wastage is incurred in each process as under process A—2%, process B—5% and process C—10%. The wastage of processes A and B is sold at Rs 10 per 100 units and that of process C at Rs 80 per 100 units. Following is information regarding the production of March 1994:
|
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
12,000
|
8,000
|
4,000
|
|
Direct labour
|
16,000
|
12,000
|
6,000
|
|
Machine expenses
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
|
Other factory expenses
|
3,500
|
3,800
|
4,200
|
20,000 units have been issued to process A at a cost of Rs 20,000. The output of each process is as under process A—19,500 units; process B—18,800 units; and process C—16,000 units. There was no stock or work in progress in any process in the beginning and the end of March. Prepare process account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following information, prepare process cost accounts and normal loss, abnormal loss or gain accounts:
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
|
Material
|
30,000
|
3,000
|
|
Labour
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Overheads
|
7,000
|
8,600
|
|
Input (units)
|
20,000
|
17,500
|
|
Normal loss
|
10%
|
4%
|
|
Sale of waste per unit (Rs)
|
1
|
2
|
|
Final output from process B (units)
|
—
|
17000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three process I, II and III. From the following information, prepare the process accounts assuming that there are no opening or closing stocks:
|
Process I (Rs)
|
Process II (Rs)
|
Process III (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
1000
|
1500
|
500
|
|
Labour
|
5000
|
8000
|
6500
|
|
Overheads
|
1050
|
1188
|
2009
|
|
Actual output (units)
|
9500
|
9100
|
8100
|
|
Normal loss
|
3%
|
5%
|
8%
|
The wastage of process I was sold at 25 paise per unit, that of process II at 50 paise per unit and that of process III at Re 1 per unit. Raw materials of 10,000 units were introduced into process I in the beginning at a cost of Re 1 per unit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The product of a company passes through three distinct processes to reach completion. They are A, B and C. From past experience it is ascertained that loss is incurred in each process as follows: Process A—2%, process B—5%, process C—10%.
In each case, the percentage of loss is computed on the number of units entering the process concerned. The loss of each process possesses a scrap value. The loss of processes A and B is sold at Rs 5 per 100 units and that of process C at Rs 20 per 100 units.
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
|
|
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
3,000
|
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
20,000 units have been issued to process A at a cost of Rs 10,000. The output of each process is as under process A—19,500 units; process B—18,800 units; and process C—16,000 units. There is no work in progress in any process. Prepare process accounts. Calculations should be made to the nearest rupee.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes. The following data relate to the three processes during September 1998:
|
|
Total
|
Process I
|
Process II
|
Process III
|
|
Materials (Rs)
|
5,625
|
2,600
|
2,000
|
1,025
|
|
Labour (Rs)
|
7,330
|
2,250
|
3,6130
|
1,400
|
|
Production overhead (Rs)
|
7,330
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
|
Output (units)
|
—
|
450
|
340
|
276
|
|
Normal loss (% of input)
|
—
|
10
|
20
|
25
|
|
Scrap value (Rs per unit)
|
—
|
2
|
4
|
5
|
500 units at Rs 4 per unit were introduced in process I. Production overhead is absorbed in the ratio of labour. Prepare process accounts, abnormal loss and abnormal gain accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a factory, the product passes through two processes A and B. A loss of 5% is allowed in process A and 2% in process B, nothing being realized by disposal of the wastage. During April, 10,000 units of material costing Rs 6 per unit were introduced into process A. The other costs were as follows:
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
—
|
6,140
|
|
Labour
|
10,000
|
6,000
|
|
Overheads
|
6,000
|
4,600
|
The output was 9,300 units from process A; 9,200 units were produced by process B, which were transferred to a warehouse. 8,000 units of the finished product were sold at Rs 15 per unit, the selling and distribution expenses being Rs 2 per unit. Prepare process accounts and a statement of profit or loss of the firm for April, assuming there are no opening stocks of any type.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The product of a manufacturing concern passes through two processes A and B and then to finished stock. It is ascertained that in each process normally 5% of the total weight is lost and 10% is scrap from which processes A and B realizes Rs 80 per tonne. The following are the figures relating to both the processes:
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
|
Materials in tonnes
|
1,000
|
70
|
|
Cost of materials in rupees per tonne
|
125
|
200
|
|
Wages in rupees
|
28,000
|
10,000
|
|
Manufacturing expenses in rupees
|
8,000
|
5,250
|
|
Output in tonnes
|
830
|
780
|
Prepare process cost accounts showing cost per tonne of each process. There was no stock of work in progress in any process.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes, processes I, II and III. 15,000 units of crude material were introduced into process I at Re 1 per unit. Additional information is as follows:
|
|
Process I (Rs)
|
Process II (Rs)
|
Process III (Rs)
|
|
Material consumed (Rs)
|
3,000
|
4,500
|
1,500
|
|
Direct labour (Rs)
|
15,000
|
24,000
|
19,500
|
|
Normal loss (%)
|
3
|
6
|
10
|
|
Manufacturing expenses (Rs)
|
3,600
|
3,705
|
5,618
|
|
Output an units)
|
14,250
|
13,650
|
12,012
|
|
Value of normal loss per unit (Rs)
|
0.50
|
1.00
|
2.00
|
Prepare process cost accounts and normal loss, abnormal loss and abnormal gain accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes A, B and C. The details of expenses incurred on the three processes during the year 1992 are as follows:
|
|
Process A
|
Process B
|
Process C
|
|
Units issued/introduced at cost per unit Rs 100
|
10000
|
|
|
|
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
(Rs)
|
|
Sundry materials
|
10000
|
15,000
|
5,000
|
|
Labour
|
30000
|
80000
|
65,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
6,000
|
18,150
|
27,200
|
|
Selling price per unit of output
|
120
|
165
|
250
|
Management expenses during the year were Rs 80,000 and selling expenses were Rs 50,000. These are not allocable to the processes. The actual outputs of processes A, B and C were 9,300 units; 5,400 units; and 2,100 units, respectively. Two thirds of the output of process A and one half of the output of process B were passed on to the next process and the balance was sold. The entire output of process C was sold. The normal losses of the three processes, calculated on the inputs of processes, were as follows: process A—5%, process B—15% and process C—20%. The loss of units in process A was sold at Rs 2 per unit, that of B at Rs 5 per unit and that of process C at Rs 10 per unit. Prepare process accounts and profit and loss accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s. XYZ Co. has a single process.
Work in progress (opening) = 8,000 units
|
|
Rs
|
|
Cost:
|
Materials
|
29,600
|
|
Wages
|
6,600
|
|
Overheads
|
5,800
|
During the period, the input was 32,000 units. Additional cost data is as follows:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials
|
1,12,400
|
|
Wages
|
33,400
|
|
Overheads
|
30,200
|
At the end of the year, 28,000 units were fully processed and 12,000 units were still in progress. The value of closing stock included the full cost of materials as well as one third of the cost of wages and overheads. Tabulate the production and cost figures to give quantities, unit values and total values of the completed output and the detailed values of the closing work in progress.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In manufacturing the main product, a company processes the incidental waste into two by products A and B. From the following data relating to the products, you are required to prepare a comparative profit and loss statement showing individual costs and other details. The total cost up to separation point was Rs 3,10,400.
|
|
Main product
|
By product A
|
By product B
|
|
Sales
|
Rs 8,00,000
|
Rs 64.000
|
Rs 96.000
|
|
Costs after separation
|
Rs 80,000
|
Rs 12 800
|
Rs 14 400
|
|
Estimated net profit percentage to sales value
|
|
20
|
20
|
|
Estimated selling expenses as percentage of sales value
|
|
20:.
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data have been extracted from the books of M/s. East India Coke Company Ltd:
|
Yield (Rs) of recovered products per tonne of coal
|
|
Coke
|
1,420
|
|
Coal tar
|
120
|
|
Benzol
|
22
|
|
Sulphate of ammonia
|
26
|
|
Gases
|
412
|
|
Total
|
2,000
|
The price of coal is Rs 80 per tonne. Direct labour and overhead costs to the point of split off are Rs 40 and Rs 60, respectively, per tonne of coal. Calculate material, labour overhead and total costs of each product on the basis of weight.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data calculate the cost per mile of a vehicle:
|
Rs
|
|
Value of vehicle
|
15,000
|
|
Road licence for the year
|
500
|
|
Insurance charges per year
|
100
|
|
Garage rent per year
|
600
|
|
Driver’s wage per month
|
200
|
|
Cost of petrol per litre
|
0.80
|
|
Miles per litre
|
8
|
|
Proportionate charge for tyre and maintenance per mile
|
0.20
|
|
Estimated life
|
1,50,000 miles
|
|
Estimated annual mileage
|
6,000 miles
|
Ignore interest on capital.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Union Transport Company supplies the following details in respect of a truck of 5 tonne capacity:
|
Cost of truck
|
Rs 90,000
|
|
Estimated life
|
10 years
|
|
Diesel, Oil, grease
|
Rs 15 per rip each way
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
Rs 500 per month
|
|
Driver’s wages
|
Rs 500 per month
|
|
Cleaner’s wages
|
Rs 250 per month
|
|
Insurance
|
Rs 4,800 per year
|
|
Tax
|
Rs 2,400 per year
|
|
General supervision charges
|
Rs 4,800 per year
|
The truck carries goods to and from the city covering a distance of 50 miles each way. While going to the city, freight is available to the extent of full capacity and on return 20% of the capacity. Assuming that the truck runs on an average 25 days a month.
Work out:
- Operating cost per ton mile and
- Rate per ton per trip that the company should charge, if a profit of 50% on freightage is to be earned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shriman operates a taxi. Compute cost per running km from the following details.
|
Rs
|
|
Purchase price of taxi
|
50,000
|
|
Insurance per annum
|
1,000
|
|
Rent of garage per month
|
100
|
|
Tyres and tubes per set (A set lasts 16,000 km)
|
4,000
|
|
Driver’s wage per day of 8 hours
|
32
|
|
(Average distance per day 160 km)
|
|
|
Fuel cost per gallon (A gallon lasts 24 km)
|
12
|
|
Repairs per annum
|
1,200
|
|
Stand and police payments p.a.
|
2,600
|
|
Interest on bank loan for the taxi p.a.
|
4,000
|
|
Kilometres run per annum
|
20,000
|
|
Life of the taxi (in km)
|
1,00,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data you are required to ascertain the cost of running the motor lorry per tonne mile.
|
Total tonnage carried in a week: 30
|
|
Total mileage in a week: 600 miles
|
Details of the above are:
|
Miles
|
Tons
|
|
Monday
|
120
|
6
|
|
Tuesday
|
125
|
5
|
|
Wednesday
|
110
|
4
|
|
Thursday
|
100
|
5.5
|
|
Friday
|
80
|
4.5
|
|
Saturday
|
65
|
5.0
|
|
600
|
30
|
Expenses for the week are as follows:
|
Driver’s salary: Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
Cleaner’s salary: Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
Petrol, oil, etc.: Rs 1.00 per mile
|
|
Repair and maintenance: Rs 300 p.m.
|
|
Depreciation: 4,800 p.a.
|
|
Other expenses: 500 p.m.
|
|
Assume: 4 weeks in a month.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raja runs mini bus service in the town and has two vehicles. He furnishes you the following data and wants you to compute the cost per running mile.
|
Vehicle A Rs
|
Vehicle B Rs
|
|
Cost of vehicle
|
25,000
|
15,000
|
|
Road licence (per year)
|
750
|
750
|
|
Salaries (yearly)
|
1,800
|
1,200
|
|
Driver’s wage per hour
|
4
|
4
|
|
Cost of fuel per litre
|
1.50
|
1.50
|
|
Maintenance per mile
|
1.50
|
2.00
|
|
Tyre cost per mile
|
1.00
|
.80
|
|
Garage rent per year
|
1,600
|
550
|
|
Annual insurance premium
|
850
|
500
|
|
Miles run per litre
|
6
|
5
|
|
Miles run during the year
|
15,000
|
6,000
|
|
Estimated life of vehicles
|
1,00,000 miles
|
75,000 miles
|
Charge interest at 10% p.a. on the cost of vehicle. The vehicle runs 20 miles per hour on an average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data relating to two vehicles A & B, compute the cost per running mile.
|
Vehicle A Miles
|
Vehicle B Miles
|
|
Mileage run (annual)
|
15,000
|
6,000
|
|
Estimated life of vehicles
|
1,00,000
|
75,000
|
|
Miles run per gallon of fuel
|
20
|
15
|
|
Rs
|
Rs
|
|
Cost of vehicle
|
25,000
|
15,000
|
|
Road tax (annual)
|
750
|
750
|
|
Insurance (annual)
|
700
|
400
|
|
Garage rent (annual)
|
600
|
500
|
|
Supervision & salaries
|
1,200
|
1,200
|
|
Drivers wages per hour
|
3
|
3
|
|
Cost of fuel per gallon
|
3
|
3
|
|
Tyres allocation per mile
|
0.80
|
0.60
|
|
Repairs and maintenance per mile
|
1.65
|
2.00
|
Charge interest at 5% per annum on cost of vehicles. The vehicles run 20 miles an hour on average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Road Transport Company, which keeps a fleet of lorries, shows the following information:
|
Kilometres run for April 1994
|
30,000
|
|
Wages for April
|
Rs 2,000
|
|
Petrol, oil, etc. for April
|
Rs 4,000
|
|
Original cost of vehicles
|
Rs 1,00,000
|
|
Depreciation to be allowed @ 25% per annum on original cost
|
|
|
Repairs for the month of April
|
Rs 6,000
|
|
Garage rent, etc. for April
|
Rs 1,000
|
|
Licence, Insurance, etc. for the year
|
Rs 6,000
|
prepare a statement for April 1994 showing the fixed and variable cost per running km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars, calculate the cost of running a taxi per kilometre:
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 2,00,000
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 6,000 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 5,000 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 2,000 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 4,000 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 6,000 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 6,000 per taxi
|
|
10. Drivers salary
|
Rs 2,000 per month per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repair
|
Rs 10,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 3,000 k.m. in a month of which 30% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is one litre for 10 km at Rs 18 per litre. Oil and other sundries are Rs 50 per 100 km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sohan Singh has started transport business with a fleet of 10 taxis. The various expenses incurred by him are given below:
- Cost of each taxi—Rs 75,000
- Salary of office staff—Rs 1,500 p.m.
- Salary of garage staff—Rs 2,000 p.m.
- Rent of garage—Rs 1,000 p.m.
- Driver’s salary (per taxi) —Rs 400 p.m.
- Road tax and repairs per taxi—Rs 2,160 p.a.
- Insurance premium at 4% of cost p.a.
The life of a taxi is 3,00,000 km at the end of which it is estimated to be sold at Rs 15,000. A taxi runs on an average 4,000 km per month of which 20% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is 9 km per litre of petrol costing Rs 6.30 per litre. Oil and other sundry expenses amount to Rs 10 per 100 km.
Calculate the effective cost of running taxi per kilometre. If the hire charge is Rs 1.80 per km, find out the profit Sohan Singh may expect to make in the first year of operation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data, calculate the cost per kilometre of a vehicle:
|
Rs
|
|
Value of vehicle
|
75,000
|
|
Road licence fee per year
|
500
|
|
Insurance per year
|
100
|
|
Garage rent per year
|
600
|
|
Driver’s wage per month
|
500
|
|
Cost of petrol per litre
|
6.00
|
|
Kilometres run per liter
|
8
|
|
Proportionate charge for tyre and maintenance per km
|
0.40
|
|
Estimated life
|
1,50,000 km
|
|
Estimated annual kilometres
|
6,000
|
|
Ignore interest on capital
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data relating to a lorry of 4 tonne capacity, you are required to compute the operating cost per tonne mile.
|
Truck cost
|
Rs 1,00,000
|
|
Estimated life in years
|
10
|
|
Maintenance
|
Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
Payment to driver and cleaners
|
Rs 750 p.m.
|
|
Annual insurance
|
Rs 1,200
|
|
Establishment charges
|
Rs 650 p.m.
|
|
Fuel per month
|
Rs 600
|
|
Sundry expenses en route
|
Rs 2,000 p.a.
|
The lorry goes to a town 50 miles away with full load and comes back empty for 20 days in a month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following figures are extracted from the books of a firm for the year 1994.
|
Passenger buses
|
5 Numbers
|
|
Bus costing
|
Rs 50,000; Rs 1,20,000; Rs 45,000 Rs 55,000 and Rs 80,000
|
|
Depreciation 20% of the cost per annum
|
|
|
Annual repair and spare parts, etc. 80% of depreciation
|
|
|
Wages of 10 drivers
|
Rs 600 each per month
|
|
Wages of 20 cleaners
|
Rs 300 each per month
|
|
Interest
|
8% on capital
|
|
Rent of 6 garages
|
Rs 100 each per month
|
|
Director fees
|
Rs 900 per month
|
|
Office establishment
|
Rs 6,000 per month
|
|
License and taxes
|
Rs 4,000 half yearly
|
Realization of sale of old tyros and tubes: Rs 3,600 half yearly. 900 passengers were carried over 1,600 km during the year. Work out in the appropriate cost sheet, the unit cost per passenger kilometers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following, data relating to vehicle ‘X’ calculate the cost per running kilometre.
|
Vehicle X
|
|
Kilometers run (annual)
|
15,000
|
|
Tons per km (average)
|
6
|
|
Cost of vehicle
|
Rs 25,000
|
|
Road license (annual)
|
Rs 750
|
|
Insurance (annual)
|
Rs 700
|
|
Garage rent (annual)
|
Rs 900
|
|
Supervision and salaries
|
Rs 2,400
|
|
Drivers wages per hour
|
Rs 3
|
|
Cost of fuel per litre
|
Rs 3
|
|
Kilometers run per litre
|
20
|
|
Repairs and maintenance per km
|
Rs 1.75
|
|
Tyra allocation per km
|
90 paise
|
|
Estimated life of vehicle
|
1,00,000 km
|
Charge interest at 5% p.a. on cost of vehicle. The vehicle runs 20 km per hour on an average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
XY & Co. owns a fleet of 10 trucks each costing Rs 60,000. The company has employed one manager to whom it pays Rs 450 p.m., an accountant who gets Rs 250 p.m. and a peon who gets Rs 100 p.m. The company has got its trucks insured @ 2% per annum. The annual total tax is Rs 1,200 per truck. The other expenses are as follows:
|
Driver’s salary
|
Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
Cleaner’s salary
|
Rs 80 p.m.
|
|
Mechanic’s salary
|
Rs 300 p.m.
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
Rs 1,200 per year for one truck.
|
|
Diesel consumption
|
3 km per litre at Re 0.90 per litre
|
|
Estimated life of the truck is 5 years.
|
|
|
Other information:
|
|
|
Distance travelled by each truck per day
|
200 km.
|
|
Normal loading capacity
|
100 quintals
|
|
Wastage in loading capacity
|
10%
|
|
Percentage of trucks laid up for repairs
|
5%
|
|
Effective days in a month
|
25
|
Calculate (a) Cost per quintal km and (b) Cost per km of running a truck.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Transport Company operates two trucks. Following is the data regarding the monthly cost of operating them.
|
Trucks
|
|
A Rs
|
B Rs
|
|
Driver’s salary
|
250
|
275
|
|
Cleaner’s wages
|
150
|
160
|
|
Petrol
|
300
|
350
|
|
Mobil oil
|
25
|
30
|
|
Garage rent
|
125
|
125
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
50
|
50
|
|
Depreciation
|
560
|
620
|
|
Supervision
|
100
|
100
|
|
Repairs
|
120
|
140
|
|
Overheads
|
40
|
40
|
The two trucks carried 150 tonnes of goods each during the month of November 1989. The distances covered were 3,500 k.m. and 5,000 k.m. respectively. Prepare an operating cost sheet for November 1989 from the above data.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data, find out the cost per ‘room day’ and the charge to the customers if the profit required is 20% on cost.
|
Room accommodation available
|
|
50 double rooms
|
|
100 single rooms
|
Each double room is equal to two single rooms. Average occupancy throughout the year of 360 days is 75%.The costs are as follows:
|
Rs
|
|
Depreciation of premises
|
1,00,000
|
|
Depreciation of furniture
|
1,20,000
|
|
Opening stock of linen
|
2,00,000
|
|
Purchases of linen
|
1,00,000
|
|
Closing stock of linen
|
1,50,000
|
|
Salaries of staff
|
1,00,000
|
|
Sundry charges
|
70,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is the information given by the owner of a hotel. You are required to advise him what rent should be charged from customers per day so that he is able to earn 25% profit on cost other than interest.
- Staff salaries Rs 80,000 per annum
- Room attendant’s salary Rs 2 per day: The salary is paid on daily basis and services of room attendant are needed only when the room is occupied. There is one attendant for one room.
- Lighting, heating and power: The normal lighting expenses for a room are Rs 50. Power is used only in winter and normal charge per month if occupied for a room is Rs 20.
- Repairs to buildings Rs 10,000 per annum
- Linen, etc. Rs 4,800 per annum
- Sundries Rs 6,600 per annum
- Interior decoration and furnishing Rs 10,000 per annum
- Cost of buildings Rs 4,00,000. Rate of depreciation is 5%
- Other equipment Rs 1,00,000. Rate of depreciation is 10%
- Interest at 5% may be charged on its investments of Rs 5,00,000 in the buildings and equipment
- There are 100 rooms in the hotel and 80% of the rooms are normally occupied in summer and 30% of the rooms are occupied in winter.
You many assume that period of summer and winter is six months each. Normal days in a month may be assumed to be 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare process accounts from the following information:
|
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
3,500
|
4,640
|
1,200
|
|
Wages
|
2,800
|
3,700
|
900
|
|
Expenses
|
1,750
|
2,800
|
850
|
|
Works overheads
|
890
|
1,100
|
750
|
Other expenses of Rs 1,400 should be allocated based on wages.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through three processes A, B and C for its completion. As finished goods 6,000 units are produced.
|
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
Process C (Rs)
|
|
Materials
|
6,000
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
|
Wages
|
18,000
|
16,000
|
12,000
|
|
Expenses
|
3,500
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Overheads
|
400
|
600
|
200
|
Raw material is issued at Rs 45,000. Prepare process accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through two processes. Prepare process accounts.
|
Process A (Rs)
|
Process B (Rs)
|
|
Direct materials
|
40,000
|
50,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
|
Output in units
|
6,000
|
7,000
|
|
Opening stock (in units)
|
—
|
3,000
|
|
Closing stock (in units)
|
—
|
1,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Delhi Transport Company has been given a route of 20 km long to run a bus. The bus costs the company a sum of Rs 70,000. It has been insured at 3% p.a. and the annual tax will amount to Rs 1,500. Garage rent is Rs 100 p.m. Actual repairs will be Rs 1,500 and the bus is likely to last for 5 years.
The driver’s salary will be Rs 150 per month and the conductor’s salary will be Rs 100 per month in addition to 10% of the takings as commission (to be shared by the driver and the conductor equally). Cost of stationery will be Rs 50 p.m. Manager cum accountant’s salary is Rs 400 p.m.
Petrol and oil will be Rs 25 per 100 km. The bus will make 3 round trips carrying on the average 40 passengers on each trip. Assuming 15% profit on takings, calculate the bus fare to be charged from each passenger. The bus will run on an average 25 days in a month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pallavan Transport Corporation runs the following fleet of buses in a particular area of Madras for 30 days in a month: 25 buses of 50 passenger capacity, On an average, each bus makes 10 trips a day covering a distance of 8 km in each trip with 75% of seats occupied. Generally, 10% of buses are kept away from the roads for repairs.
|
Rs
|
|
Monthly expenses:
|
|
|
Rent
|
2,500
|
|
Road tax
|
500
|
|
Salary of chief operating manager
|
1,500
|
|
Salary of three assistant managers
|
800 each
|
|
Salary of four supervisors
|
400 each
|
|
Wages of 30 cleaners
|
100 each
|
|
Wages of 25 drivers
|
240 each
|
|
Wages of 25 conductors
|
200 each
|
|
Consumable stores
|
4,500
|
|
Diesel
|
34,000
|
|
Lubricants
|
5,500
|
|
Replacement of tyres
|
1,750
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
2,750
|
|
Depreciation
|
6,500
|
|
Work shop expenses
|
3,500
|
Calculate the cost per passenger km of operating the service.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Transport Company has been given a 20 km long route to run a bus. The bus costs Rs 70,000 and has been insured @ 6% p.a. while annual taxes amount to Rs 2,000. Garage rent is Rs 100 p.m. yearly repairs will be Rs 2,000 and the bus is likely to last for five years.
The driver’s salary will be Rs 4,000 p.a. and that of conductor’s Rs 2,000 p.a. in addition to 10% of the taking as commission (to be shared by the driver and the conductor equally). Cost of stationery will be Rs 600 p.a. Manager’s salary is Rs 400 p.m. who also looks after accounts.
Petrol and oil will be Rs 25 per 100 km. The bus will make 3 round trips carrying on the average 40 passengers on each trip. Assuming 25% profit on taking, calculate the bus fare to be charged from the each passenger. The bus runs on an average 25 days in a month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Laxmi Transport Company is running 4 buses between two towns, which are 100 km apart. Seating capacity of each bus is 40 passengers.
The following particulars were obtained from their books for April:
|
Rs
|
|
Wages of drivers, conductors and cleaners
|
4,800
|
|
Salaries of office and supervisory staff
|
2,000
|
|
Diesel oil and other oil
|
8,000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
1,600
|
|
Taxation, insurance, etc.
|
3,200
|
|
Depreciation
|
5,200
|
|
Interest and other charges
|
4,000
|
|
28,800
|
Actual passengers carried were 75% of the seating capacity. All the four buses ran on all the days of the month. Each bus made one round trip per day. Find out the cost per passenger km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A practising Chartered Accountant now spends Re 0.90 per kilometre on taxi fares for his clients, 5 works. He is considering two other alternatives, the purposes of a new small can or an old bigger car. The estimated cost figures are:
|
Items
|
New small car Rs
|
Old bigger car Rs
|
|
Purchase price
|
40,000
|
25,000
|
|
Sale price of the car after five years
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
|
Repairs and servicing, per annum
|
1,000
|
1,200
|
|
Taxes and insurance per annum
|
1,700
|
700
|
|
Petrol price, per litre
|
3.50
|
3.50
|
|
Petrol consumption per litre
|
10 km
|
7 km
|
He estimates that he does 10,000 km annually, which of the three alternatives will be cheaper? If his practice expends and he has to do 19,000 km per annum, what should be his decision? At how many km per annum, will the cost of the two cars break even and why? Ignore interest and income tax.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
XY & Company Limited owns a fleet of ten trucks each costing Rs 75,000. The company has employed one manager to whom it pays Rs 450 p.m. an accountant who gets Rs 250 p.m. and a peon who gets Rs 100 p.m. The company has got its trucks insured @ 2% per annum. The annual total tax is Rs 1,200 per truck. The other expenses are as follows:
|
Driver’s salary
|
Rs 300 per month
|
|
Cleaner’s salary
|
Rs 100 per month
|
|
Mechanic’s salary
|
Rs 400 per month
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
Rs 1,200 per year for one truck
|
|
3 km per litre at Re 90 per litre
|
|
|
The estimated life of the truck is five years.
|
|
Other information:
|
Distance travelled by each truck per day 200 km.
|
|
|
Normal loading capacity
|
100 quintals
|
|
Wastage in loading capacity
|
10%
|
|
Percentage of truck laid up for repair
|
5%
|
|
Effective days in a month
|
25
|
Calculate (a) cost per quintal kilometre and (b) cost per kilometre of running a truck.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A transport company supplies the following details in respect of a truck of five ton capacity:
|
Cost of truck
|
Rs 1,20,000
|
|
Estimated life
|
10 years
|
|
Scrap value at the end of life
|
Rs 6,000
|
|
Diesel, oil, grease
|
Rs 25 per trip each way
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
Driver’s wage
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
Cleaner’s wage
|
Rs 250 p.m.
|
|
Insurance
|
Rs 4,800 p.a.
|
|
Tax
|
Rs 2,400
|
|
General supervision charges
|
Rs 6,000 p.a.
|
The truck carries goods to and from the city covering a distance of 50 miles each way.
On outward trip freight is available to the extent of full capacity and on return 20% of capacity.
Assuming that the truck runs on an average 25 days a month, work out:
- Operating cost per tonne mile
- Rate per tonne per trip that the company should charge if a profit of 50% on freightage is to be earned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SMC is a public school having five buses each plying in different directions for the transport of its school students. In view of a larger number of students availing of the bus service the buses work two shifts daily both in the morning and in the afternoon. The buses are garaged in school. The workload of the students has been so arranged that in the morning the first trip picks up senior students and the second trip plying an hour later picks up the junior students. Similarly in the afternoon the first trip takes the junior students and an hour later the second trip takes the senior students home.
The distance travelled by each bus one way is 8 km. The school works 25 days in a month and remains closed for vacation in May, June and December, Bus fee however, is payable by the students for all 12 months in a year.
The details of expenses for a year as under
|
Driver’s salary
|
Rs 600 per month per driver
|
|
Cleaner’s salary
|
Rs 350 per month
|
|
(Salary payable for all 12 months)
|
|
|
(One cleaner employed for all the five buses)
|
|
|
Licence fee, taxes, etc.
|
Rs 900 per bus per annum
|
|
Insurance
|
Rs 1,000 per bus per annum
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
Rs 3,500 per bus per annum
|
|
Purchase price of the bus
|
Rs 2,00,000 each
|
|
Life 12 years
|
|
|
Scrap value
|
Rs 20,000
|
|
Diesel cost
|
Rs 2.00 per litre
|
|
Each bus gives an average mileage of 4 km per litre of diesel
|
|
|
Seating capacity of each bus is 50 students.
|
|
|
The seating capacity is fully occupied during the whole year.
|
|
Students picked up and dropped within a range up to 4 km of distance from the school are charged half fare. 50% of the students travelling in each trip in this category ignore interest. Since the charges are to be based on average cost, you are required to:
- Prepare a statement showing the expenses of operating a single bus and the fleet of five buses for a year.
- Work out the average cost per student per month in respect of
- Students coming from a distance of up to 4 km from the school and
- Students coming from a distance beyond 4 km from the school.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The new thermal power generating plant gives you the following data; find out in an appropriate cost sheet, cost of electricity per unit produced during the month of August 1978.
a. Fuel:
Coal at the beginning of the month 500 tonnes.
Supply during the month 1,100 tonnes
Balance at the end of the month 400 tonnes.
Annual contract for supply of coal for colliery at Rs 10 per tonne.
Add: 10% to cover freight and handling charges.
- Oil: 10 tonnes at Rs 250 per tonne.
- Water: 50,000 litres. Pumping charges at 25 paise 100 per litre.
- Depreciation of steam boiler: Capital value Rs 24,000 and the rate of depreciation 12½% per annum.
- Salaries and wages of the boiler house: 10 men at Rs 150 per month each. 40 coolies at Rs 30 per month each.
- Recovery on account of sale of ashes: 100 tonnes at Re 1 per tonne.
- Salaries and wages of the generating station: 50 men at Rs 150 per month each. 20 coolies at Rs 30 per month each.
- Repairs and maintenance of the generating equipment: Rs 2,600. Depreciation of generating equipment: Capital value: Rs 1,80,000 and the rate of depreciation 12½% p.a.
- Share of administration charges: Rs 1,750
- Number of units generated: 1,46,000.
- Loss in the process 2,000 units generated.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Progressive Enterprises Limited runs a canteen for the benefit of its workmen and provides necessary subsidy to the canteen.During month of August 1981, the following purchases were made:
|
Commodity
|
Quantity kg
|
Rate per kg Rs
|
|
1. Tea
|
4
|
10
|
|
2. Sugar
|
50
|
3
|
|
3. Milk
|
60
|
2
|
|
4. Atta
|
210
|
2
|
|
5. Flour
|
20
|
3
|
|
6. Vegetable ghee
|
30
|
11
|
|
7. Besan
|
12
|
4
|
|
8. Dal
|
30
|
3.50
|
|
9. Potato
|
90
|
2
|
|
10. Green vegetable
|
20
|
1.50
|
|
11. Spices
|
2
|
24
|
The other expenses for the month were : Rickshaw fare Rs 20 salary to cook (1) Rs 250 per month each. Wages to waiters (2) Rs 150 per month each. Supervisor’s salary Rs 300 per month Fuel, gas, coal, etc. Rs 400. Miscellaneous expenses crockery and glassware Rs 100. Depreciation of utensils and furniture Rs 50. Sale of coupons 7,800 @ Re 0.15 per coupon. Prepare trading and profit and loss account of the canteen for the month of August and find out the amount of subsidy paid by the company.
|
Tea
|
Sugar
|
Atta
|
|
Opening balance
|
2 kg
|
10 kg
|
30kg
|
|
Closing balance
|
1 kg
|
5 kg
|
20 kfg
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following cost data pertaining to the year 1964–1965 are collected from the books of ABC Power Company Limited
|
|
Rs
|
|
Rs
|
|
Total units generated
|
15,00,000
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
22,000
|
|
Operating labour
|
18,000
|
Administration overheads
|
9,000
|
|
Plant supervision
|
5,250
|
Capital cost
|
2,00,000
|
|
Lubricants and supplies
|
12,000
|
|
|
Coal consumed per kWh for the year is 1.5 lb and the cost of cool delivered to the power station is Rs 33.06 per metric ton. Depreciation rate chargeable is 4% per annum and interest on capital is to be taken at 1% higher than Reserve bank rate of 6% per annum.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
‘Amitabh’ theatre in Bombay seeks your assistance in price determination. From the following data relating to April 1998, you are requested to
- Compute cost per ‘Man Show’
- Ascertain rates to be charged for each class of seating accommodation.
|
Rs
|
|
Staff salaries per month
|
10,000
|
|
Monthly maintenance and cleaning
|
2,500
|
|
Electricity charges per month
|
2,000
|
|
Projector room supplies per month
|
12,000
|
|
Advertising expenditure per month
|
10,000
|
|
Hire charges of print per month
|
30,000
|
|
General expenses
|
7,000
|
|
Revenue from slides shown per month
|
2,000
|
The theatre premises and building are valued at Rs 9,00,000. 6% on the capital cost per annum should be charged as depreciation. Rents collected from stalls in the theatre are Rs 8,400 per year. Depreciation of furniture & projector per month respectively are Rs 1,000 and Rs 500.
During April 1998, four shows with average attendance of 80% were run daily. Out of the seats occupied, 10% represent free passes and owner’s connections.
Entertainment tax 50% of collections
Profit required 50% of net collections
The theatre contains 200 balcony, 300 first class and 500 second class seats. The weightage given is 3, 2, 1 respectively in terms of worth.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fast roadways runs 10 buses between two suburban centres which are 25 km apart seating capacity at each bus in 30 passengers. The expenses for the month of November 1994 were as under:
|
Rs
|
|
Salaries of drivers and conductors
|
30,000
|
|
Salaries of mechanical staff
|
3,000
|
|
Diesel oil and lubricants
|
20,000
|
|
Taxes, insurance etc.
|
2,600
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
4,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
16,000
|
Seating capacity utilized was 60%.
All the buses ran 25 days at the month.
Each bus made four round trips daily.
- Find out the cost per passenger kilometre and the cost per round trip per passenger
- What would have been the cost per passenger, if the seating capacity utilization were to go up to 80%.
- What would have been the cost per round trip per passenger, if all the expenses (other than depreciation) were to go up by 20% at a seating capacity utilization of 80%?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raja runs a fleet of taxis and the following information is available from the rewards maintained by Rim.
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 20,000
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 400 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
600 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 600 per taxi
|
|
10. Driver’s salary
|
Rs 200 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repairs
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 3,000 km in a month at which 30% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is one litre for 10 km @ Rs 1.80 per litre. Old and other sundries are Rs 5 per 100 km.
Calculate the cost of running a taxi per km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raja automobiles distributes its good to a regional dealer using a single lorry. The dealer’s premises are 40 km away by road. The lorry has a capacity of 10 tonnes and makes the journey twice a day fully loaded on the outward journeys and empty on return journeys. The following information is available for a four weekly period during the year 1991.
|
Petrol consumption
|
8 km per km
|
|
Petrol cost
|
Rs 6.50 per litre
|
|
Oil
|
Rs 50 per week
|
|
Driver’s wages
|
Rs 200 per week
|
|
Repairs
|
Rs 50 per week
|
|
Garage rent
|
Rs 75 per week
|
|
Cost of lorry
|
80,000 km
|
|
Insurance
|
Rs 3,250 p.a.
|
|
Cost of tyres
|
Rs 3,125
|
|
Life of tyres
|
25,000 km
|
Estimated sale value of Rs 25,000 lorry at end of its life. Vehicle licence cost Rs 650 p.a. Other overhead rate Rs 20,800 p.a. The lorry operates on a five day week.
Required:
- A statement to show the total cost of operating the vehicle for a four weekly period analysed into running costs and fixed costs.
- Calculate vehicle cost per km and per ton km
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raja has been promised a contract to run a tourist car on a 20 km long rate for the chief executive of a multinational firm. He buys a car costing Rs 1,50,000. The annual cost of insurance and taxes are Rs 4,500 and Rs 900, respectively. He has to pay Rs 12,500 p.m. for a garage where he keeps the car when it is not in use. The annual repair are estimated at Rs 4,000. The car is estimated to have a life at 10 years, at the end of which the scrap value is likely to be Rs 50,000.
He hires a driver who is to be paid Rs 300 p.m. plus 10% of the takings ads commission. Other incidental expenses are estimated at Rs 200 p.m. Petrol and oil will cost Rs 100 per 100 km. The car will make four round trips each day. Assuming that a profit of 15% on taking is desired and that the car will be on the road for 25 days on an average per month, what should be charge per round trip?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A factory which uses a large amount of coal is situated between two colliery X and Y, the former being 5 km and the latter 10 km distant from the factory. A fleet of lorries of 5 tonne carrying capacity is used for the collection of coal from the pitheads. The lorries average a speed of 20 km per hour when running and regularly take 10 minutes in the factory premises to unload. At colliery X loading time averages 30 minutes per load and at colliery Y 20 minutes per load.
Driver’s wages, licences, insurance, depreciation, garage and similar charges are noticed to cost Rs 6 per hour opened. Fuel, oil tyres repeats and similar changes are noticed to cost to paisa per kilometre run.
Recap a statement stating the cost per tonne kilometre of carrying coal from each colliery. If the coal is of equal, quality and price at pithead from which colliery should the purchases be made?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Union transport company supplies the following details in respect of a truck of 5 tonne capacity.
|
Cost of truck—Rs 90,000
|
|
Estimated life—10 years
|
|
Diesel, oil, grease—Rs 15 per trip each day
|
|
Repairs and maintenance—Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
Driver’s wages—500 p.m.
|
|
Cleaner’s wages—250 p.m.
|
|
Insurance—Rs 4,800 per year
|
|
Tax—Rs 2,400 per year
|
|
General supervision charges—Rs 4,800 per year
|
The track carries goods to and from the city covering a distance at 50 km each way, on outward trip freight is available to the extent of full capacity and on return 20% of capacity.
Assuming that the truck runs on an average 25 days a month workout:
- Operating cost tonne km
- Rate per tonne trip that the company should charge if a profit of 50% on freight is to be earned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A transport service company is running four buses between two towns 50 miles apart. Seating capacity of each bus is 40 passengers. The following particulars were obtained from their books:
|
Rs
|
|
Wages of drivers, conductors and cleaners
|
2,400
|
|
Salaries of office and supervisory staff
|
1,000
|
|
Diesel oil and other oil
|
4,000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
800
|
|
Taxation, insurance, etc.
|
1,600
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,600
|
|
Interest and other charges
|
2,000
|
|
14,400
|
Actual passengers carried were 75% of the seating capacity. All the four buses ran on all the days of the month. Find out the cost per passenger mile.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A transport company is running two buses between two places 100 km apart. Seating capacity of each bus is 50 passengers. The following particulars are taken from their books for a month.
|
Rs
|
|
Wages of drivers, conductors and cleaners
|
3,000
|
|
Salary of supervisory and office staff
|
1,500
|
|
Diesel, oil, etc.
|
6,000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
1,500
|
|
Taxation and insurance
|
2,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
3,000
|
|
Interest and other charges
|
2,500
|
Actual passengers travelled were 80% of the capacity. The buses ran on all the days. Each bus made a to and fro trip. Find out the cost per passenger kilometre.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating cost sheet of truck for the year
|
p.a.
|
per km
|
|
Particulars
|
Rs P.
|
Rs P.
|
|
Fixed charges:
|
|
|
|
Road licence
|
650
|
|
|
Insurance
|
800
|
|
|
Garage rent
|
700
|
|
|
Supervision
|
1,400
|
|
|
Interest on vehicle (10% on 30,000)
|
3,000
|
|
|
Total fixed charges
|
6,550
|
0.33
|
|
Variable charges:
|
|
|
|
Petrol
|
|
0.20
|
|
Repairs
|
|
1.80
|
|
Type allocation
|
|
0.40
|
|
Driver’s wage
|
|
0.10
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
0.30
|
|
Operating cost per running km
|
|
3.13
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Value of vehicle
|
Rs 40,000
|
|
Road licence (annual)
|
Rs 2,000
|
|
Driver’s wages (per month)
|
Rs 3,000
|
|
Insurance (annual)
|
Rs 3,000
|
|
Garage rent (annual)
|
Rs 4,000
|
|
Direct wages (per month)
|
Rs 3,000
|
|
Cost of petrol per litre
|
Rs 25
|
|
Mileage per litre
|
30
|
|
Estimated life in miles
|
1,00,000
|
|
Annual mileage runs
|
10,000
|
Calculate cost per mile.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anandhan owns a fleet of taxis and the following information is available from the records maintained by him.
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 54,600
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 700 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 400 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 900 per taxi
|
|
10. Driver’s salary
|
Rs 350 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repairs
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 3,000 km in a month and 30% of this distance has to be run without any passenger. Petrol consumption is one litre for every 10 km at 4.41 per litre. Oil and other expenses are Rs 10.50 per 100 km.
Calculate the cost of running a taxi per km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ram owns a fleet of taxies and the following information is available from the records maintained by him.
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 50,000
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 1,000 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 400 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 600 per taxi
|
|
10. Driver’s salary
|
Rs 500 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repairs
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 3,000 km in a month of which 30% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is one litre for 10 km @ Rs 7 per litre. Oil and other sundries are Rs 10 per 100 kilometres.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jawan owns a fleet of taxis and the following information is available from the records maintained by him:
|
1. Number of taxis
|
5
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 20,000
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 900 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 300 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 400 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 800 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 1,200 per taxi
|
|
10. Drivers salary
|
Rs 400 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repair
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 5,000 km in a month of which 40% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is one litre for 10 km @ Rs 1.80 per litre. Oil and other sundries are Rs 5 per 100 km.Calculate the cost of running a taxi per kilometre.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Staff salary Rs 60,000 per annum
|
|
|
Room attendant’s salary is Rs 6 per day.
|
|
|
Room attendants are needed only when the room is occupied. There is one room attendant per room.
|
|
|
Normal lighting expenses for a room for a month is Rs 60
|
|
|
Power is used only in winter and normal charge per month when occupied for a room is Rs 30
|
|
|
Repairs to building Rs 12,000 per annum
|
|
|
Linen and cleaning
|
Rs 5,200 p.a.
|
|
Other expenses
|
Rs 4,800 p.a.
|
|
Interior decoration
|
Rs 12,000 p.a.
|
|
Cost of building
|
Rs 4,20,000
|
|
Rate of depreciation
|
10%
|
|
Other equipments
|
Rs 1,40,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
10%
|
|
Investment
|
Rs 10,00,000 interest 10%
|
|
There are 100 rooms in the hotel.
|
|
|
70% of the room are normally occupied in summer.
|
|
|
70% of the room are normally occupied in winter.
|
|
|
Winter and summer are of six months each.
|
|
|
Normal days in a month is 30
|
|
|
Profit to be earned
|
25% on cost
|
calculate the room to be charged per day.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data relating to two different vehicles A and B, compute the cost per running mile:
|
Vehicle A Rs
|
Vehicle B Rs
|
|
Mileage run (annual)
|
15,000
|
6,000
|
|
Cost of vehicle
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
|
Road licence (annual)
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Insurance (annual)
|
800
|
600
|
|
Garage rent (annual)
|
1,000
|
500
|
|
Supervision and salaries
|
1,500
|
1,600
|
|
Driver’s wage per hour
|
3
|
3
|
|
Cost of fuel per gallon
|
3
|
3
|
|
Miles run per gallon
|
20 miles
|
15 miles
|
|
Repairs and maintenance per mile
|
1.65
|
2.00
|
|
Tyre allocation per mile
|
0.80
|
0.60
|
|
Estimated life of vehicles
|
1,00,000 miles
|
75,000 miles
|
Charge interest at 5% per annum on cost of vehicles. The vehicles run 20 miles per hour on an average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
rom the following data relating to two different vehicles A and B, compute the cost per running mile:
|
A Rs
|
B Rs
|
|
Mileage run (annual)
|
15,000
|
6,000
|
|
Cost of vehicles
|
25,000
|
15,000
|
|
Road licence (annual)
|
750
|
750
|
|
Insurance (annual)
|
700
|
400
|
|
Garage rent (annual)
|
600
|
500
|
|
Supervision, salaries, etc. (annual)
|
1,200
|
1,200
|
|
Driver wage per hour
|
8
|
8
|
|
Cost of petrol per litre
|
10
|
10
|
|
Miles run per litre
|
20 miles
|
15 miles
|
|
Repair and maintenance charge (per mile)
|
0.20
|
0.30
|
|
Tyre allocation per mile
|
0.80
|
0.60
|
|
Estimated life of the vehicle
|
1,00,000 miles
|
75,000 miles
|
You are to charge interest on cost of vehicles at 5% per annum. The vehicles run 20 miles per hour on an average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Work out in appropriate cost sheet form, the unit cost per passenger mile for the year 1968–1969 for a fleet of passenger buses run by a transport company from the following figures extracted from its books:
5 passenger buses costing Rs 50,000, Rs 1,20,000, Rs 45,000, Rs 55,000 and Rs 80,000, respectively. Yearly depreciation of vehicles—20% of the cost. Annual repair, maintenance and spare parts—80% of depreciation.
|
Wages of 10 drivers @ Rs 100 each per month
|
|
Wages of 20 cleaners @ Rs 50 each per month
|
|
Yearly rate of interest @ 4% on capital
|
|
Rent of six garages @ Rs 50 each per month
|
|
Director’s fees @ Rs 400 per month
|
|
Office establishment @ Rs 1,000 per month
|
|
Licence of taxes @ Rs 1,000 every 6 months
|
|
Realization by sale of old tyres and tubes @ Rs 3,200 every six months.
|
|
900 passengers were carried over 1,600 miles during the year
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anandhan owns a fleet of Taxis and the following information is available from the records maintained by him.
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 54,600
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 700 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 400 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 900 per taxi
|
|
10. Driver’s salary
|
Rs 350 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repairs
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 3,000 km in a month and 30% of this distance has to be run without any passenger. Petrol consumption is one litre for every 10 km at 4.41 per litre. Oil and other expenses are Rs 10.50 per 100 km.Calculate the cost of running a taxi per km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been given a permit to run a bus on a route 20 km long. The bus costs you Rs 1,00,000. It has to be insured @ 3% p.a. and the annual tax will be Rs 2,000. Garage rent is Rs 100 p.m. Annual repairs will be Rs 1,000 and the bus is likely to last for 5 years at the end of which the scrap value is likely to be Rs 5,000.
The driver’s salary will be Rs 150 p.m. and the conductor’s Rs 100 together with 10% of the takings as commission (to be shared equally by both). Stationery will cost Rs 50 p.m. The manager cum accountant’s salary will be Rs 450 p.m.
Diesel and oil be Rs 25 per 100 km. The bus will make 3 round trips for carrying on the average 40 passengers on each trip. Assuming 15% profit on takings, calculate the bus fare to be charged from each passenger. The bus will work on the average 25 days in a month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A transport company is running four buses between two towns, which are 50 km apart. Seating capacity of each bus is 40 passengers. The following particulars were obtained from their books for April 1998:
|
Rs
|
|
Wages of drivers and conductors
|
2,400
|
|
Salaries to office staff
|
1,000
|
|
Diesel and other oils
|
4,000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
800
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
1,600
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,600
|
|
Interest and other charges
|
2,000
|
|
14,400
|
Actual passengers carried were 75% of the seating capacity. All the four buses run on all days of the month. Each bus made one round trip per day. Find out the cost per passenger km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jaidka owns a fleet of taxis and the following information is available from the records maintained by him:
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 30,000
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 1,000 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 700 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 300 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 500 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
600 per taxi
|
|
10. Drivers salary
|
Rs 200 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repair
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 km. A taxi runs in all 3,000 km in a month of which 30% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is one litre for 10 km @ Rs 1.80 per litre. Oil and other sundries are Rs 5 per 100 km. Calculate the cost of running a taxi per kilometre.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ram owns a fleet of taxies and the following information is available from the records maintained by him.
|
1. Number of taxis
|
10
|
|
2. Cost of each taxi
|
Rs 50,000
|
|
3. Salary of manager
|
Rs 1,000 p.m.
|
|
4. Salary of accountant
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
5. Salary of cleaner
|
Rs 200 p.m.
|
|
6. Salary of mechanics
|
Rs 400 p.m.
|
|
7. Garage rent
|
Rs 600 p.m.
|
|
8. Insurance premium
|
5% p.a.
|
|
9. Annual tax
|
Rs 600 per taxi
|
|
10. Driver’s salary
|
Rs 500 p.m. per taxi
|
|
11. Annual repairs
|
Rs 1,000 per taxi
|
Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 k.m. A taxi runs in all 3,000 km in a month of which 30% of it runs empty. Petrol consumption is one litre for 10 km @ Rs 7 per litre. Oil and other sundries are Rs 10 per 100 kilometres.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An entrepreneur owns a bus, which runs from Delhi to Agra and back for 25 days in a month. The distance from Delhi to Agra is 170 km. The bus completes the trip from Delhi to Agra and back on the same day. Calculate the fare the entrepreneur should charge a passenger if he wants to earn a profit of 33.33% on cost. The following information is further available
|
Cost of bus
|
Rs 3,50,000
|
|
Salary of driver per month
|
Rs 1,200
|
|
Salary of conductor per month
|
Rs 700
|
|
Salary of part time accountant per month
|
Rs 480
|
|
Insurance per annum
|
Rs 6,720
|
|
Diesel consumption 16 km per gallon costing
|
Rs 26
|
|
Local taxes per annum
|
Rs 1,200
|
|
Lubricant oil per 100 km
|
Rs 25
|
|
Repairs and maintenance per annum
|
Rs 1,000
|
|
Licence fee per annum
|
Rs 3,000
|
|
Normal capacity (person)
|
Rs 50
|
|
Depreciation rate per annum
|
Rs 15
|
The bus usually runs full up to 90% of its capacity both ways. Interest is payable on the cost of bus at 10% per annum.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A person owns air condition bus, which runs between Delhi and Chandigarh and back for 10 days in a month. The distance between Delhi and Chandigarh is 150 miles. The bus completes the trip from Delhi and Chandigarh and will be back on the same day.
The bus goes to Agra for another 10 days. The distance between Delhi and Agra is 120 miles. This trip is also completed on the same day. For the rest of the 4 days of its operation, it runs in the local city. Daily distance covered is 40 miles.
Calculate the charge to be made by the person when he wants to earn profit of 33 1/3% on his takings. The other information is:
|
Cost of the bus
|
Rs 1,00,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
20% p.a.
|
|
Salary of driver
|
Rs 650 p.m.
|
|
Salary of conductor
|
Rs 650 p.m.
|
|
Salary of accountant
|
Rs 360 p.m.
|
|
Insurance
|
Rs 1,680 p.a.
|
|
Diesel consumption 4 miles per litre costing Rs 3 per litre
|
|
|
Road tax
|
Rs 600 p.a.
|
|
Lubricant
|
Rs 20 per 100 miles
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
Rs 500 p.a.
|
|
Permit fee
|
Rs 284 p.m.
|
|
Normal capacity
|
50 per sons
|
The bus generally occupies 90% of the capacity when it goes to Chandigarh, 80% when it goes to Agra. It is always full when it runs within the city. Passenger tax is 20% of his net takings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute cost per running kilometre from the following data of a truck.
|
Estimated life of vehicle
|
1,50,000 km
|
|
Annual running
|
15,000 km
|
|
Rs P.
|
|
Cost of vehicle
|
40,000
|
|
Road licence (annual)
|
1,000
|
|
Insurance (annual)
|
1,000
|
|
Garage rent (annual)
|
900.00
|
|
Supervision and salaries (annual)
|
2,700.00
|
|
Drivers’ wages per hour
|
3.00
|
|
Cost of fuel per litre
|
3.00
|
|
Repairs and maintenance per km
|
1.75
|
|
Tyre allocation per km
|
0.90
|
Charge interest at 5% per annum on cost of vehicle. The vehicle runs 20 km per hour on an average and one litre of fuel gives 20 km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data calculate the cost per mile of a vehicle:
|
Rs
|
|
Value of vehicle
|
1,00,000
|
|
Garage rent per year
|
1,200
|
|
Insurance charges per year
|
400
|
|
Road tax per year
|
500
|
|
Driver’s wages per month
|
600
|
|
Cost of petrol per litre
|
6.40
|
|
Tyre maintenance per mile
|
0.80
|
|
Estimated life—1,50,000 miles
|
|
|
Miles per litre of petrol 8
|
|
|
Estimated annual mileage 6,000
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jayakumar with an inter state bus permit, has been running a bus of 50 passenger capacity every month as follows:
- Madras–Kolar (150 km apart)—Round Trip, 10 days in a month with 90% passengers.
- Madras–Chittoor (200 km apart)—Round Trip, 10 days in a month with 80% passengers
- Madras–Tirupathi (150 km apart)—Round Trip, 10 days in a month with 70% passengers.
He requests you to fix ‘cost based’ passenger rates, providing the following information.
- Passenger tax payable to Government 1/6 of gross receipts.
- Commission to conductor and driver at 5% on net receipts.
- Required profit 35% on net receipts.
- Bus purchase price Rs 2,10,000 to be depreciated at 10% p.a.
- Interest on the capital cost of bus at 5% p.a.
- Expenses of the bus were
|
Rs
|
|
Permit fees per annum
|
14,400
|
|
Token tax per annum
|
5,100
|
|
Insurance per annum
|
9,000
|
|
Office expenses (apportioned per month)
|
1,000
|
|
Tyres and tubes Re 0.4 per km
|
|
|
Diesel 10 km per litre at Rs 10 per litre
|
|
|
Drivers salary per month
|
1,200
|
|
Conductors salary per month
|
800
|
|
Cleaning and repairs charges per month
|
1,500
|
|
Lubricants and supplies Rs 0.10 per km
|
|
|
Sundry route expenses per month
|
500
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A transport company is running 4 buses between towns which are 50 km apart. The seating capacity of each bus is 40 passengers. The following particulars were obtained from their books for the month of April.
|
Rs
|
|
Wages of drivers, conductors and cleaners
|
4,000
|
|
Salaries to office staff
|
2,000
|
|
Diesel and other oils
|
5,000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
800
|
|
Taxes, insurance, etc.
|
1,600
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,600
|
|
Interest and other charges
|
2,000
|
Actual passengers carried were 75% of the capacity. All the four buses ran on all the days of the month. Each bus made one trip (up and down) per day. Calculate the cost per passenger km.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Valuation of work uncertified) Meenakshi Company Limited undertook a contract for construction of a bridge on 1 1 1997. The contract is expected to be completed by 30 6 1998. The contract price is Rs 8,00,000. You are required to prepare the contract account for the year ending 31 12 1997 from the following data:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials issued
|
2,00,000
|
|
Wages
|
75,000
|
|
Materials returned to stores
|
10,000
|
|
Plant used for full year
|
2,00,000
|
|
General overheads
|
80,000
|
|
Depreciation of plant 10% supervisors’ salary
|
10,000
|
|
Work certified
|
5,00,000
|
Cash received is 80% of work certified. Ten per cent of materials issued and 15% of wages may be taken to have been incurred for the portion of work completed but not yet certified. General overheads are charged as percentage of direct wages.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A building contractor having undertaken construction work at a contract price of Rs 5,00,000 began the execution of the work on 1st January 1981. The following are the particulars of the contract up to 31st December 1981.
|
Rs
|
|
Machinery installed at site
|
30,000
|
|
Materials sent to site
|
1,70,698
|
|
Labour at site
|
1,48,750
|
|
Direct expenses
|
6,334
|
|
Overhead charges allocated
|
8,252
|
|
Materials returned from site
|
1,098
|
|
Work certified by architect
|
3,90,000
|
|
Cash received
|
3,60,000
|
|
Cost of work not certified
|
9,000
|
|
Materials on hand as on 31 12 1981
|
3,766
|
|
Wages accrued due on 31 12 1981
|
5,380
|
|
Value of machinery as on 31 12 1981
|
22,000
|
It was decided that profit made on the contract in the year should be arrived at by deducting the cost of work certified from the total value of the architect’s certificates, that 1/3rd of the profit so arrived as should be regarded as provision against contingencies and that such provision should be increased by taking to the credit of profit and loss account only such portion of the 2/3rd profit as the cash received before the amount is taken to the credit of the profit and loss account. Prepare contract account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 1st January, ‘A’ undertook a contract for Rs 5,00,000. He incurred the following expenses during the year.
|
Rs
|
|
Materials issued from stores
|
50,000
|
|
Materials purchased for the contract
|
45,000
|
|
Plant installed at cost
|
35,000
|
|
Wages paid
|
1,00,000
|
|
Wages accrued due on 31st December
|
40,000
|
|
Direct expenses paid
|
10,000
|
|
Direct expenses accrued due on 31st December
|
2,500
|
|
Establishment
|
6,500
|
Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, the plant which cost Rs 2,000 and the materials costing Rs 1,500 were lost. Some of the materials costing Rs 2,000 were sold for Rs 2,500. On 31st December the plant, which cost Rs 500, was returned to the stores and on the same date a part of the plant, which cost Rs 200, was damaged rendering itself useless.
The work certified was Rs 2,40,000 and 80% of the same was received in cash. Cost of work done but uncertified was Rs 1,000. Charge 10% p.a. depreciation on plant and prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st December, by transferring to the profit and loss account the portion of the profit, if any, which you think is reasonable. Show also the particulars relating to the contract in the balance sheet of the contractor on 31st December.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to a building contract for Rs 10,00,000.
|
1986 Rs
|
1987 Rs
|
|
Materials issued
|
3,00,000
|
84,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
2,30,000
|
1,05,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
22,000
|
10,000
|
|
Indirect expenses
|
6,000
|
1,400
|
|
Work certified
|
7,50,000
|
10,00,000
|
|
Work uncertified
|
8,000
|
–
|
|
Materials at site
|
5,000
|
7,000
|
|
Plant issued
|
14,000
|
2,000
|
|
Cash received from contractee
|
6,00,000
|
10,00,000
|
The value of the plant at the end of 1986 and 1987 was Rs 7,000 and Rs 5,000, respectively.
Prepare (i) contract account and (ii) contractee’s account for the two years 1986 and 1987 taking into consideration such profit for transfer to profit and loss account as you think proper.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to a contract for Rs 7,50,000 (the contractee paying 90% of the value of work done and certified by the Architect and rest on completion of the contract) of Murugan Construction Company.
|
|
1996 Rs
|
1997 Rs
|
1998 Rs
|
|
Materials
|
90000
|
1,10,000
|
63,000
|
|
Wages
|
85,000
|
1,15,000
|
85,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
3,500
|
12,500
|
4,500
|
|
Indirect expenses
|
1,500
|
2,000
|
|
|
Work certified
|
1,75,000
|
5,65,000
|
7,50000
|
|
Work uncertified
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Plant
|
10000
|
|
|
The value of plant at the end of 1996, 1997 and 1998 was Rs 8,000, Rs 5,000 and Rs 2,000 respectively.
Prepare contract account for the three years in the books of Murugan Construction Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following prepare contract account for three years 1984, 1985 and 1986.
|
|
1984 Rs
|
1985 Rs
|
1986 Rs
|
|
Materials issued
|
1,10,000
|
1,20,000
|
80,000
|
|
Other charges
|
10,000
|
8,000
|
20,000
|
|
Wages
|
2,20,000
|
60,000
|
2,00,000
|
|
Machinery issued
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
Value of machinery at the end of the year
|
45,000
|
40,000
|
36,000
|
|
Materials returned
|
1,000
|
500
|
|
|
Materials at site
|
3,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Work uncertified
|
2,000
|
6,000
|
|
|
Work certified
|
4,00,000
|
10,00,000
|
12,00,000
|
The contract price was Rs 12,00,000. Cash received was 80% of work certified.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are the details relating to the contract for the year ended 31st December 1998
|
Rs
|
|
Contact price
|
3,00,000
|
|
Material issued
|
60,000
|
|
Wages
|
80,000
|
|
Overheads
|
5,000
|
|
Plant installed at the site
|
10,000
|
|
Material in hand as on 31 12 98
|
5,000
|
|
Work certified
|
2,00,000
|
|
Cash received
|
1,60,000
|
|
Depreciate plan at 10% p.a.
|
|
|
Work done but not certified
|
5,000
|
repare contract account and show the profit to be taken to profit and loss account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
New Vistas Builders Limited undertook a contract on 1st January 1997 with an escalation clause. The clause provided that if material prices and wage rates increase by more than 10%, the contractor gets compensation for 60% of such rise in the cost of materials and 80% of such rise in wage rates beyond the 10% in each case. It is agreed that since the signing of the agreement till 31st December 1997, the material prices had gone up by 25% and wage rates by 30%. The value of work certified does not take into account the effect of the escalation clause. The following are the details relating to the contract for the year ended 31 12 1997.
|
Rs
|
|
Contact price
|
4,00,000
|
|
Material sent to site
|
78,800
|
|
Wages
|
1,26,500
|
|
Sundry expenses
|
8,000
|
|
Plant installed at site
|
20,000
|
|
Materials on hand
|
4,000
|
|
Work certified
|
2,40,000
|
|
Cash received in respect thereof
|
1,80,000
|
|
Work uncertified
|
6,000
|
Depreciation on plant at 10% p.a. Prepare contract account and show the profit to be taken to profit and loss account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 1st January, A undertook a contract for Rs 5,00,000. He incurred the following expenses during the year:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials issued from stores
|
50,000
|
|
Material purchased for the contract
|
45,000
|
|
Plant installed at cost
|
35,000
|
|
Wages paid
|
1,00,000
|
|
Wages occurred due on 31st December
|
40,000
|
|
Direct expenses paid
|
10,000
|
|
Direct expenses accrued due on 31st December
|
2,500
|
|
Establishment
|
6,500
|
Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, the plant which cost Rs 2,000 and the materials costing Rs 1,500 were lost. Some of the materials costing Rs 2,000 were sold for Rs 2,500. On 31st December, the plant, which cost Rs 500, was returned to the stores, and a part of the plant, which cost Rs 200, was damaged, rendering itself useless.
The work certified was Rs 2,40,000 and 80% of the same was received in cash. The cost of work done, but uncertified was Rs 1,000. Charge 10% p.a. depreciation on plant and prepare the Contract
Account for the year ended 31st December, by transferring to the profit and loss account the portion of the profit, if any, which you think is reasonable. Show also the particulars relating to the contract in the balance sheet of the contractor as on 31st December.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s Anand Associates commenced the work on a particular contract on 1st April 1994. They close their books of accounts for the year on 31st December each year. The following information is available from their costing records on 31st December 1994.
|
Rs
|
|
Materials sent to site
|
43,000
|
|
Foreman’s salary
|
12,620
|
|
Wages paid
|
1,00,220
|
A machine costing Rs 30,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of the year. Its working life was estimated at 5 years and scrap value at Rs 2,000. A supervisor is paid Rs 2,000 per month and he had devoted one half of his time on the contract.
All other expenses were Rs 14,000. The materials on site were Rs 2,500. The contract price was Rs 4,00,000. On 31st December 1994, 2/3rd of the contract was completed; however, the architect gave a certificate only for Rs 2,00,000 on which 80% was paid. Prepare the contract account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company undertook a contract for construction of a large building complex. The construction work commenced on 1st April 1997 and the following data are available for the year ended 31st March 1998.
|
|
Rs ‘000
|
|
Rs ‘000
|
|
Contract price
|
35,000
|
Plant hire charges
|
1,750
|
|
Work certified
|
20,000
|
Wages related costs
|
500
|
|
Progress payments received
|
15,000
|
Site office costs
|
678
|
|
Materials issued to site
|
7,500
|
Head office expenses apportioned
|
375
|
|
Planning & estimating costs
|
1,000
|
Direct expenses incurred
|
902
|
|
Direct wages paid
|
4,000
|
Work not certified
|
149
|
|
Materials returned from site
|
250
|
|
|
The contractrs own a plant, which originally cost Rs 20,00,000, has been continuously in use in this contract throughout the year. The residual value of the plant after 5 years of life is expected to be Rs 5,00,000. Straight line method of depreciation is in use.
As on 31st March 1998, the direct wages due and payable amounted to Rs 2,70,000 and the materials at site were estimated at Rs 2,00,000.
Required:
- Prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st March 1998.
- Show the calculation of profit to be taken to the profit and loss account of the year.
- Show the relevant balance sheet entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Construction Limited is engaged on two contracts A and B during the year. The following particulars are obtained at the year end (December 31):
|
Contract A
|
Contract B
|
|
Date of commencement
|
April I Rs
|
September I Rs
|
|
Contract price
|
6,00,000
|
5,00,000
|
|
Materials issued
|
1,60,000
|
60,000
|
|
Materials returned
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Materials at site (December 31)
|
22,000
|
8,000
|
|
Direct labour
|
1,50,000
|
42,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
66,000
|
35,000
|
|
Establishment expenses
|
25,000
|
7,000
|
|
Plant installed at site
|
80,000
|
70,000
|
|
Value of plant (December 31)
|
65,000
|
64,000
|
|
Cost of contract not yet certified
|
23,000
|
10,000
|
|
Value of contract certified
|
4,20,000
|
1,35,000
|
|
Cash received from contractees
|
3,78,000
|
1,25,000
|
|
Architect’s fees
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
During the period materials amounting to Rs 9,000 have been transferred from contract A to contract B. You are required to show: (a) contract accounts, (b) contractees’ accounts, and (c) extract from balance sheet as on December 31, clearly showing the calculation of work in progress.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance was extracted on 31st December 1997 from the books of Swastik Company Limited Contractors:
|
Rs
|
Rs
|
|
Share capital: shares of Rs 10 each
|
|
3,51,800
|
|
Profit and loss account on 1st January 1997
|
|
25,000
|
|
Provision for depreciation of machinery
|
|
63,000
|
|
Cash received on account: contract 7
|
|
12,80,000
|
|
Creditors
|
|
81,200
|
|
Land and buildings (cost)
|
74,000
|
|
|
Machinery (cost)
|
52,000
|
|
|
Bank
|
45,000
|
|
|
Contract 7:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
6,00,000
|
|
|
Direct labour
|
8,30,000
|
|
|
Expenses
|
40,000
|
|
|
Machinery at site (cost)
|
1,60,000
|
________
|
|
18,01,000
|
18,01,000
|
Contract was begun on 1st January, 1997. The contract price is Rs 24,00,000 and the customer has so far paid Rs 12,80,000, being 80% of the work certified. The cost of the work done since certification is estimated at Rs 16,000. On 31st December, 1997, after the above trial balance was extracted, machinery costing Rs 32,000 was returned to stores, and materials when at site were valued at Rs 27,000. Provision is to be made for direct labour due Rs 6,000 and for depreciation of all machinery at 12½% on cost. You are required to prepare (a) the contract account, (b) a statement of profit, if any, to be properly credited to profit and loss account for 1997, and (c) the balance sheet of Swastik Company Limited as on 31st December.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Ascertainment of work uncertified) M/s Kishore & Company commenced the work on a particular contract on 1st April 1997. They close their books of accounts for the year on 31st December each year. The following information is available from their costing records on 31st December 1997:
|
Rs
|
|
Material sent to site
|
50,000
|
|
Wages paid
|
1,00,000
|
|
Foreman’s salary
|
12,000
|
A machine costing Rs 32,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of the year. Its working life was estimated at 5 years and scrap value at Rs 2,000. A supervisor is paid Rs 2,000 per month and had devoted one half of his time on the contract.
All other expenses were Rs 15,000. The material on site was Rs 9,000. The contract price was Rs 4,00,000. On 31st December, 1997, 2/3 of the contract was completed; however, the architect gave certificate only for Rs 2,00,000 on which 75% was paid. Prepare the Contract Account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deluxe Limited undertook a contract for Rs 5,00,000 on 1st July 1997. On 30th June 1998 when the accounts were closed, the following details about the contract were gathered:
|
|
Rs
|
|
Rs
|
|
Materials purchased
|
1,00,000
|
Wages accrued 30 06 1998
|
5,000
|
|
Wages paid
|
45,000
|
Work certified
|
2,00000
|
|
General expenses
|
10,000
|
Cash received
|
1,50,000
|
|
Plant purchased
|
50,000
|
Work uncertified
|
15,000
|
|
Materials on hand 30 06 1998
|
25,000
|
Depreciation of plant
|
5,000
|
The above contract contained an escalation clause, which read as follows:
“In the event of prices of materials and rates of wages increase by more than 5% the contract price would be increased accordingly by 25% of the raise in the cost of materials and wages beyond 5% in each case”.
It was found that since the date of signing the agreement the prices of materials and wages rates increased by 25%. The value of the work does not take into account the effect of the above clause.
Prepare the contract account working should form part of the answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s Kishore and Company commenced work on a particular contract on 1st April 1990. They close their books of accounts for the year on 31st December each year. The following information is available from their closing records on 31 12 1996:
|
Rs
|
|
Material sent to site
|
50,000
|
|
Foreman’s salary
|
12,000
|
|
Wages paid
|
1,00,000
|
A machine costing Rs 32,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of the year. Its working life was estimated at 5 years and scrap value at Rs 2,000. A supervisor is paid Rs 2,000 per month and had devoted one half of his time on the contract.
All other expenses were Rs 15,000. The material on site was Rs 9,000. The contract price was Rs 4,00,000. On 31st December, 2/3rd of the contract was completed. However, the architect gave certificate only for Rs 2,00,000 on which 75% was paid.
Prepare the contract account in the company’s books.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s Arun and Varun undertook a contract for Rs 2,50,000 for constructing a college building. The following is the information concerning the contract during the year 1997:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials sent to site
|
85,349
|
|
Labour engaged on site
|
74,375
|
|
Plant installed at site at cost
|
15,000
|
|
Direct expenditure
|
3,167
|
|
Establishment charges
|
4,126
|
|
Materials returned to stores
|
549
|
|
Work certified
|
1,95,000
|
|
Value of plant as on 31st December 1997
|
11,000
|
|
Cost of work not yet certified
|
4,500
|
|
Materials at site 31st December 1997
|
1,883
|
|
Wages accrued 31st December 1997
|
2,400
|
|
Direct expenditure accrued 31st December 1997
|
240
|
|
Cash received from contractee
|
1,80,000
|
Prepare contract account, contractee’s account and show how the work in progress will appear in the Balance Sheet as on 31st December 1997.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following particulars are extracted from the books of a building contractor on 31 12 1991.
|
Materials
|
Rs
|
|
Purchased
|
80,000
|
|
Transfer from other contracts
|
2,00,000
|
|
Issued from central stores
|
5,50,000
|
|
Wages
|
8,75,000
|
|
Indirect expenses
|
35,000
|
|
Inspection fees
|
15,000
|
|
General stores
|
40,000
|
|
Establishment charges
|
66,000
|
|
Scrap (material sold)
|
6,000
|
A cement mixing plant was purchased on 1st January 91 for Rs 80,000 and installation charges amounted to Rs 20,000. Of the plant and material charged to the contract, plant which cost Rs 3,000 and material which cost Rs 2,500 were lost. On June 30 plant was transferred to another contract. An additional plant was purchased on October 1, for Rs 2,00,000. Of the materials charged to contract, materials which cost Rs 5,000 were sold for Rs 5,500.
The contract price was Rs 50,00,000. Cash received on account till 31st December 1991 amounted to Rs 20,00,000 being 80% of work certified. The cost of work done but not certified was Rs 75,000. The value of material on hand was Rs 20,000. Charge depreciation on plant at 10% p.a.
Prepare contract account. Show how work in progress account will appear in the balance sheet on 31st December 1991.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are required to prepare a contract account for the year ending 31 December 1989 from the following particulars:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials
|
4,00,000
|
|
Wages
|
5,00,000
|
|
Expenses
|
1,00,000
|
|
Expenses occurred due
|
20,000
|
|
Plant
|
2,00,000
|
|
Work certified (90% received in cash)
|
16,00,000
|
Materials at site (31 12 1989) Rs 40,000.
Depreciate plant by 10%. Ten per cent of the value of materials issued and 5% of the wages may be taken as incurred for the portion of the work completed, but not yet certified. Expenses are to be charged as a percentage to direct wages. Ignore depreciation on the uncertified portion of work. Ascertain the amount to be transferred to the profit and loss account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A building contractor furnishes the following records about a contract commenced on 1 April 1985. Expenses incurred on the contract up to 31 December 1985 were:
|
Rs
|
|
Materials purchased
|
21,500
|
|
Wages paid
|
50,110
|
|
Foreman’s salary
|
6,310
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
12,610
|
|
Machinery purchased
|
15,000
|
A supervisor with a monthly salary of Rs 1,000 has spent about half of his time on this contract. Materials at site on 31 12 1985 were worth Rs 2,480. The machinery purchased was used for 73 days. The estimated life of the machine is five years and its scrap value is estimated at Rs 1,000.
The contract price is fixed at Rs 2,00,000. On 31 December 1985, two thirds of the contract was completed. Work certified was worth Rs 1,00,000 and Rs 80,000 have been paid on account. Prepare the contract account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance was extracted on 31st December 1997 from the books of Swastik Company Limited contractors:
|
Rs
|
Rs
|
|
Share capital: shares of Rs 10 each
|
|
3,71,800
|
|
Profit and loss account on 1st January 1997
|
|
25,000
|
|
Provision for depreciation of machinery
|
|
63,000
|
|
Cash received on account: contract 7
|
|
12,80,000
|
|
Creditors
|
|
81,200
|
|
Land and buildings (cost)
|
74,000
|
|
|
Machinery (cost)
|
52,000
|
|
|
Bank
|
45,000
|
|
|
Contract 7:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
6,00,000
|
|
|
Direct labour
|
8,30,000
|
|
|
Expenses
|
60,000
|
|
|
Machinery at site (cost)
|
1,60,000
|
_______
|
|
18,21,000
|
18,21,000
|
Contract 7 was begun on 1st January, 1997. The contract price is Rs 34,00,000 and the customer has so far paid Rs 13,80,000 being 80% of the work certified.
The cost of the work done since certification is estimated at Rs 25,000.
On 31st December 1997, after the above trial balance was extracted, machinery costing Rs 32,000 was returned to stores, and materials when at site were valued at Rs 30,000.
Provision is to be made for direct labour due Rs 6,000 and for depreciation of all machinery at 12½% on cost.
You are required to prepare: (a) the contract account, (b) a statement of profit, if any, to be properly credited to profit and loss account for 1997, and (c) the balance sheet of Swastik Company Limited as on 31st December.